City of Shelby SHELBY, NORTH CAROLINA
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project – Issued for Bid
Construction Documents Project Manual – Volume 1
September 2017
HDR Project No. 10030498 & 10052355 SRF Project No. CS370502-07
HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas, 440 S. Church St. Suite 1000, Charlotte NC 28202 704.338.6700 NC License F0116
This page intentionally left blank.
Table of Contents DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 07 00 11 13 00 21 13 00 41 13 00 43 13 00 52 13 00 61 13 00 61 14 00 72 13 00 73 00 00 73 50
SEALS AND SIGNATURES EJCDC C-111 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS EJCDC C-200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS EJCDC C-410 BID FORM EJCDC C-430 BID BOND (Penal Sum Form) EJCDC C-520 AGREEMENT EJCDC C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND EJCDC C-615 PAYMENT BOND EJCDC C-700 GENERAL CONDITIONS EJCDC C-800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SRF SPECIAL CONDITIONS MBE/WBE (DBE) Compliance Supplement EPA Forms 6100-3 and 6100-2 Davis-Bacon Specifications Wage Determination Schedule American Iron and Steel Provisions
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 01 11 10 01 25 13 01 30 00 01 32 17 01 33 00 01 35 05 01 45 25 01 45 33 01 61 03 01 61 05 01 62 35 01 65 50 01 73 20 01 73 29 01 74 13 01 75 00 01 77 00
SUMMARY OF WORK MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING CLEANING FACILITY START-UP CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 01 03 03 01 30 03 05 05 03 11 13 03 15 19 03 21 00 03 31 30 03 31 31 03 35 00
CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION FORMWORK ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 1
03 41 33
PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 01 20 04 05 13 04 05 23 04 05 50 04 22 00
MASONRY CLEANING MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT MASONRY ACCESSORIES COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION CONCRETE MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 12 00 05 14 00 05 21 00 05 30 00 05 41 00 05 50 00 05 52 02
STRUCTURAL STEEL STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STEEL JOISTS METAL DECK METAL DECK METAL FABRICATIONS ALUMINUM RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 06 82 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 14 00 07 19 00 07 21 00 07 26 00 07 42 13 07 52 16 07 61 13 07 62 00 07 84 00 07 92 00
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING LIQUID WATER REPELLENT BUILDING INSULATION UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM METAL ROOFING FLASHING AND SHEET METAL FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 00 08 11 16 08 15 00 08 31 00 08 33 22 08 41 10 08 51 13 08 62 00 08 70 00 08 81 00 08 90 00
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES ACCESS DOORS ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS STOREFRONT ALUMINUM WINDOWS SKYLIGHT FINISH HARDWARE GLASS AND GLAZING LOUVERS AND VENTS
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 2
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 22 16 09 29 00 09 30 13 09 51 00 09 52 00 09 53 00 09 65 00 09 96 00 09 97 23
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GYPSUM WALLBOARD CERAMIC TILE (CT) ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM) METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING PANELS ACOUSTIC SUSPENSION SYSTEM VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 10 14 23 10 28 13 10 44 33
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES SIGNAGE TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES FIRE EXTINGUISHER
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 13 00
DOCK EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 20 00 12 35 53
WINDOW TREATMENT LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 13 34 24 13 71 02
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME PLASTIC LINER PLATE
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 20 00 22 33 13
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT INSTANTANEOUS DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 93 23 09 00 23 21 00 23 31 00 23 34 00 23 52 00 23 74 36 23 80 00 23 81 29
HVAC SYSTEMS: BALANCING AND TESTING INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES HVAC: DUCTWORK HVAC: FANS BOILERS REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM HVAC: EQUIPMENT VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 26 05 05 26 05 19
ELECTRICAL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS POWER SYSTEM STUDIES WIRE AND CABLE: 600 VOLT AND BELOW
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 3
26 05 26 26 05 33 26 05 43 26 05 99 26 08 13 26 09 13 26 09 16 26 22 13 26 24 13 26 24 16 26 24 19 26 26 13 26 27 26 26 28 00 26 28 16 26 29 23 26 32 14 26 36 00 26 41 13 26 43 13 26 50 00
GROUNDING AND BONDING RACEWAYS AND BOXES ELECTRICAL: EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND POWER DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURE ACCEPTANCE TESTING ELECTRICAL METERING DEVICES CONTROL EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS SWITCHBOARDS PANELBOARDS MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT PACKAGE POWER SUPPLY WIRING DEVICES OVERCURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SAFETY SWITCHES VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: LOW VOLTAGE ENGINE GENERATOR: DIESEL TRANSFER SWITCHES LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 10 00
STRUCTURED CABLING
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 10 00 31 23 00 31 23 33 31 25 00 31 32 19 31 37 00
SITE CLEARING EARTHWORK TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL GEOTEXTILES STONE REVETMENT (RIP RAP)
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 32 13 13 32 16 13 32 31 13 32 91 13 32 92 00
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING SEEDING, SODDING AND LANDSCAPING
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 05 16 33 12 19 33 40 00 33 44 16
PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES FIRE HYDRANT STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM PREFABRICATED TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 4
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS 40 05 00 40 05 07 40 05 17 40 05 19 40 05 23 40 05 24 40 05 26 40 05 31 40 05 51 40 05 52 40 05 59 40 05 61 40 05 62 40 05 63 40 05 64 40 05 65 40 05 66 40 41 13 40 42 00 40 62 16 40 71 00 40 72 00 40 90 00 40 90 05 40 91 10 40 94 43 40 96 52 40 97 00 40 98 00 40 99 00
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS PIPE: COPPER PIPE: DUCTILE PIPE: STAINLESS STEEL PIPE: STEEL PIPE: CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE: PLASTIC VALVES: BASIC REQUIREMENTS MISCELLANEOUS VALVES FABRICATED SLIDE GATES GATE VALVES PLUG VALVES BALL VALVES BUTTERFLY VALVES GLOBE VALVES CHECK VALVES HEAT TRACING CABLE PIPE, DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION COMPUTER NETWORK AND HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) HARDWARE FLOW INSTRUMENTATION LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS CONTROL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS PRIMARY METERS AND TRANSMITTERS PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) CONTROL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS: HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) AND REPORTS CONTROL AUXILIARIES CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT 41 12 13 41 12 14 41 22 23
BELT CONVEYORS CONVEYORS: SHAFTLESS SCREW HOISTS, TROLLEYS, AND MONORAILS
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT 43 13 00 43 13 43 43 21 00 43 23 14 43 23 16 43 23 19 43 23 57 43 24 16 43 24 27 43 25 13
DIGESTER GAS CONDITIONING DIGESTER GAS FLARE PUMPING EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS PUMPING EQUIPMENT: NON-CLOG CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT: END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS PUMPING EQUIPMENT: HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMPS PUMPING EQUIPMENT: PROGRESSIVE CAVITY PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUMP PUMPING EQUIPMENT: VERTICAL TURBINE (LINE SHAFT) PUMPING EQUIPMENT: SUBMERSIBLE NON-CLOG
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 5
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 21 33 46 23 23 46 24 23 46 33 33 46 53 48 46 73 35 46 73 36 46 73 42 46 76 21
ROTARY DRUM SCREEN GRIT COLLECTION AND CONCENTRATION SYSTEM SLUDGE GRINDERS LIQUID POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS DIGESTER GAS EQUIPMENT DIGESTER MIXING SYSTEM: DRAFT TUBE MECHANICAL HEAT EXCHANGER BELT FILTER PRESS
APPENDICES Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D
COMPOST BUILDING RECORD DRAWINGS EXISTING HEADWORKS FACILITY RECORD DRAWINGS GEOTECHNICAL REPORT – BIOSOLIDS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT GEOTECHNICAL REPORT – INFLUENT & PRELIMINARY TREATMENT PROJECT
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid Table of Contents - 6
1 2 3
5
SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS AND SIGNATURES
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07 - 1
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 11 13
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794 (703) 684‐2800 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347‐7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400 (800) 548‐2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C‐111, Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
CITY OF SHELBY SHELBY, NC INFLUENT AND BIOSOLIDS IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed Bids for the construction of the Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project, SRF Project No. CS370502‐07 will be received, by City of Shelby, at George W. Clay, Jr. Utility Operations Center, 824 W. Grover Street, Shelby, NC 28150 until 2:00 PM EST, on November 2, 2017, at which time the Bids received will be publicly opened and read. The Project consists of constructing new headworks, influent pump station upgrades, new influent forcemain, two digesters, one sludge holding tank, a dewatering building and cake storage pad. This project will be funded in part using State Revolving Fund (SRF). All requirements for SRF funding shall be met to include DBE, AIS and Davis Bacon and are provided in Section 00 73 50 of the specifications. Bids will be received for a single prime Contract. Bids shall be on a lump sum and unit price basis, with deductive alternate bid items and preferred brand alternates as indicated in the Bid Form. The Issuing Office for the Bidding Documents is: 440 S. Church St., Suite 1000, Charlotte, NC 28202‐2075, Danielle McFeeley, 704‐338‐6830,
[email protected]. Prospective Bidders may examine the Bidding Documents at the Issuing Office on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM, and may obtain copies of the Bidding Documents from the Issuing Office as described below. Bidding Documents also may be examined at the First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC, between the hours of 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM. Bidding Documents are available online at AGC Carolina and Dodge; Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office during the hours indicated above. Bidding Documents are available on compact disc (as portable document format (PDF) files) for a non‐ refundable charge of $30, including shipping via overnight express service. Alternatively, printed Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office either via in‐person pick‐up or via mail, upon Issuing Office’s receipt of payment for the Bidding Documents. The non‐refundable cost of printed Bidding Documents is $300 per set, payable to “HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas”, and includes shipping. Upon Issuing Office’s receipt of payment, printed Bidding Documents will be sent via the prospective Bidder’s delivery method of choice. The date that the Bidding Documents are transmitted by the Issuing Office will be considered the prospective Bidder’s date of receipt of the Bidding Documents. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be available from the Issuing Office. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda if any, obtained from sources other than the Issuing Office. A pre‐bid conference will be held at 2:00 PM local time on October 12, 2017 at the Administration Building of the First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant, 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC. Attendance at the pre‐bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Owner: City of Shelby By:
David Hux
Title:
Water Resources Director
Date: October 2, 2017 EJCDC® C‐111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
+ + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + +
EJCDC® C‐111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794 (703) 684‐2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347‐7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400 (800) 548‐2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 3 – Qualifications of Bidders ........................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 4 – Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program; Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 2 ARTICLE 5 – Bidder’s Representations .......................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 6 – Pre‐Bid Conference ................................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 7 – Interpretations and Addenda .................................................................................................... 4 ARTICLE 8 – Bid Security ............................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 9 – Contract Times .......................................................................................................................... 5 ARTICLE 10 – Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................................ 5 ARTICLE 11 – Substitute and “Or‐Equal” Items ............................................................................................. 5 ARTICLE 12 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 13 – Preparation of Bid ................................................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 14 – Basis of Bid .............................................................................................................................. 7 ARTICLE 15 – Submittal of Bid ....................................................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 16 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ....................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 17 – Opening of Bids ....................................................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 18 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ................................................................................... 8 ARTICLE 19 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract .............................................................................. 9 ARTICLE 20 – Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 9 ARTICLE 21 – Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 9 ARTICLE 22 – Sales and Use Taxes .............................................................................................................. 10
EJCDC® C‐200, Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS 1.01
Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below: A.
Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued.
ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01
Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office in the number and format stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid.
2.02
Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.03
Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license for any other use.
ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01
To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, after submitting its Bid and within 3 days of Owner’s request, Bidder shall submit (a) written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and present commitments, and (b) the following additional information: A.
Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located.
B.
Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.
C.
Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information; coordinate with provisions of Article 12 of these Instructions, “Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.”
D.
Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and present commitments. Minimum experience qualifications for Genera Contractors shal l include completion of at least 3 projects in the past ten (10) years, which meet the criteria below. Alsoprovide resumes for the proposed Project Manager and Superintendent tha t show experience with similar size and scope projects as this project. 1.
Minimum contract value of $8,000,000.
2.
Water or wastewater treatment plant projects.
3.
Work including water retaining structures, gravity and pressure piping systems and ele ctrical work.
4.
Projects completed and operating to the satisfaction of Owner (to be verified by calling provided references).
3.02
A Bidder’s failure to submit required qualification information within the times indicated may disqualify Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract.
3.03
No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1
3.04
Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s representations and certifications.
ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 4.01
Site and Other Areas A.
4.02
The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights‐of‐ way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.
Existing Site Conditions A.
Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions 1.
The Supplementary Conditions identify: a.
those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site.
b.
those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
c.
reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.
d.
Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
2.
Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.
3.
If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply.
4.
Geotechnical Baseline Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR). The GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations (“Baseline Conditions”). The GBR is a Contract Document. The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential subsurface conditions are baselined. Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices,
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
4.03
4.04
B.
Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site are set forth in the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.
C.
Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.
Site Visit and Testing by Bidders A.
Bidder shall conduct the required Site visit during normal working hours, and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.
B.
Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of Site conditions.
Owner’s Safety Program A.
4.05
Site visits at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.
Other Work at the Site A.
Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential matters), if any.
ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 5.01
It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: A.
examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents;
B.
visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
C.
become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work; EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3
D.
carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;
E.
consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;
F.
agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;
G.
become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;
H.
promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder;
I.
determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work; and
J.
agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 6 – PRE‐BID CONFERENCE 6.01
A pre‐Bid conference will be held at the time and location stated in the invitation or advertisement to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.
ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01
All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4
opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7.02
Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY 8.01
A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent (5%) percent of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the form included in the Bidding Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the General Conditions.
8.02
The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults.
8.03
The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be released.
8.04
Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be released within seven days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES 9.01
The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be substantially completed, and completed and ready for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR‐EQUAL” ITEMS 11.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, and those “or‐equal” or substitute or materials and equipment subsequently approved by Engineer prior to the submittal of Bids and identified by Addendum. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as an “or‐ equal” or substitute unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder and has been received by Engineer at least 15 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General Conditions. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5
such proposed item, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective Bidders. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post‐Bid approvals of “or‐equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk. ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 12.01 A Bidder shall be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of the Work if required by the Bidding Documents (most commonly in the Specifications) to do so. If a prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the concern is not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid. 12.02 Subsequent to the submittal of the Bid, Owner may not require the Successful Bidder or Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity against which Contractor has reasonable objection. 12.03 The apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award. 12.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID 13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents. A.
All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink. Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item, and unit price item listed therein.
B.
If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.” EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6
13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. 13.03 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The partnership’s address for receiving notices shall be shown. 13.04 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the firm’s address for receiving notices shall be shown. 13.05 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and address for receiving notices. 13.06 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture’s address for receiving notices shall be shown. 13.07 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures. 13.08 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 13.09 Postal and e‐mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 13.10 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form. ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID 14.01 Base Bid with Alternates A.
Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum basis for the base Bid and include a separate price for each alternate described in the Bidding Documents and as provided for in the Bid Form. The price for each alternate will be the amount added to or deleted from the base Bid if Owner selects the alternate.
14.02 Unit Price A.
Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit price section of the Bid Form.
B.
The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity” (which Owner or its representative has set forth in the Bid Form) for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”; such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General Conditions.
C.
Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7
14.03 Allowances A.
For cash allowances the Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for Contractor's overhead, costs, profit, and other expenses on account of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents, in accordance with Paragraph 13.02.B of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID 15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy of the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form. 15.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with the notation “BID ENCLOSED.” A mailed Bid shall be addressed to Mr. David Hux. 15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened. ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. 16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS 17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and, unless obviously non‐responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8
ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT 19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work. 19.02 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder submitting the lowest responsive Bid. 19.03 Evaluation of Bids A.
In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
B.
In the comparison of Bids, alternates will be applied as as selected by the Owner. Owner may elect to select any combination of listed bid alternates. After determination of the Successful Bidder based on this comparative process and on the responsiveness, responsibility, and other factors set forth in these Instructions, the award may be made to said Successful Bidder on its base Bid and any combination of its additive alternate Bids for which Owner determines funds will be available at the time of award.
19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents. 19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers. ARTICLE 20 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to Owner, it shall be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation. ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 21.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within ten days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9
ARTICLE 22 – SALES AND USE TAXES 22.01 State sales and use taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be included in the Bid. Refer to Paragraph SC‐7.09 of the Supplementary Conditions for additional information.
EJCDC® C‐200, (Rev. 1), Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 41 13 BID FORM FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794 (703) 684‐2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347‐7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400 (800) 548‐2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii
BID FORM INFLUENT AND BIOSOLIDS IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT CS370502‐07
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – Bid Recipient ............................................................................................................................. 1 ARTICLE 2 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements ..................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 3 – Bidder’s Representations .......................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 4 – Bidder’s Certification ................................................................................................................. 2 ARTICLE 5 – Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................ 3 ARTICLE 6 – Time of Completion ................................................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 7 – Attachments to this Bid ............................................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 8 – Defined Terms ......................................................................................................................... 10 ARTICLE 9 – Bid Submittal ........................................................................................................................... 10
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv
ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT 1.01
This Bid is submitted to: City of Shelby Attn: Mr. David Hux George W. Clay, Jr. Utility Operations Center 824 W. Grover Street, Shelby, NC 28150
1.02
The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 2.01
Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
2.02
BIDDER will sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the AGREEMENT with the Bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within 15 days after the date of OWNER's Notice of Award.
ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3.01
In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: A.
Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Bidding Documents, and hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No.
Addendum, Date
B.
Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C.
Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D.
Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1
Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings. E.
Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and any Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs.
F.
Bidder agrees, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
G.
Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H.
Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and confirms that the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.
I.
The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work.
J.
The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION 4.01
Bidder certifies that: A.
This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation;
B.
Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid;
C.
Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and
D.
Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D: 1.
“corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;
2.
“fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non‐competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2
3.
“collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial, non‐competitive levels; and
4.
“coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the e execution of the Contract.
ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID 5.01
Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):
Lump Sum Bid Items A.
Lump Sum Bid Price for Headworks and Related Work (Dwg $ Series 10, 11, and 12)
B.
Preferred Brand Alternate: Grit Collection and Concentration $244,500.00 System (pre‐negotiated cash allowance)
C.
Lump Sum Cash Allowance (Instrumentation and Integration – Refer to Appendix) for Headworks and Related Work (Dwg $ (To be provided via addendum) Series 10, 11, and 12)
D.
Lump Sum Bid Price for All Other Work
E.
Lump Sum Cash Allowance (Instrumentation and Integration – $ (To be provided via addendum) Refer to Appendix) for All Other Work
F.
Lump Sum Contingency Allowance
$750,000
G.
Total Lump Sum Bid Price (A+B+C+D+E+F)
$
$
Unit Price Items Item H.
Quantity
Unit Price
Total Price
Calcium Aluminate Mortar Wall Overlay (Refer to Spec Section 03 01 30)
2,000 SF
$/SF
$
I.
Concrete Repair – Type 1 (Refer to Spec Section 03 01 30)
25 SF
$/SF
$
J.
Concrete Repair – Type 2 (Refer to Spec Section 03 01 30)
200 SF
$/SF
$
K.
Crack Repair – Type 3 (Refer to Spec Section 03 01 30)
50 LF
$/SF
$
L.
Total Unit Price Items (H+I+J+K )
$
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3
Total Bid Price (G+L):
Total Bid Price (G+L) in Words: 5.02
Bidder to provide cost for deductive bid alternates listed below. These costs will represent a reduction in the total bid price if these items are elected to be removed from the scope of the Work:
Deductive Bid Alternates: A.
Deductive Bid Alternate 1 – NPW Pump Station
$
B.
Deductive Bid Alternate 2 – Filtrate EQ Tank Improvements
$
C.
Deductive Bid Alternate 3 – Hot Water Boiler No. 2
$
D.
Deductive Bid Alternate 4 – Belt Filter Press No. 2
$
E.
Deductive Bid Alternate 5 – Digester Recirculated Pump No. 3
$
F.
Deductive Bid Alternate 6 – Influent Pump Station Roof $ Replacement
G.
Deductive Bid Alternate 7 – Influent Standby Generator
$
Deductive Bid Alternates Descriptions: Deductive Bid Alternate 1 – NPW Pump Station: includes all work as shown on in the 67 Series as well as related instrumentation drawings. Deductive Bid Alternate 2 – Filtrate EQ Tank Improvements: includes all work shown in the 70 Series as well as related instrumentation drawings. Deductive Bid Alternate 3 – Hot Water Boiler No. 2: Includes Hot water boiler No. 2 along with associated boiler loop including hot water pump, temperature control valve, related valves and piping as well as related instrumentation. Refer to drawing 00G‐08 and 00G‐09 for limits of bid alternate. Deductive Bid Alternate 4 – Belt Filter Press No. 2: Includes Belt filter press no. 2, associated wash water pump, and related instrumentation. Deductive Bid Alternate 5 – Digester Recirculated Pump No. 3: includes pump and related valves, and instrumentation and electrical work. Deductive Bid Alternate 6 – Influent Pump Station Roof Replacement: includes all work shown on drawing 11A‐02. Deductive Bid Alternate 7 – Influent Standby Generator: Includes all work associated with generator as indicated on drawing 98E‐04. EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4
5.03
Bidder to provide costs for preferred brand alternatives as shown below. A.
The Bidder will provide an additive or deductive price, if any, for substitution of the listed “Base Bid” major equipment with the “Owner Preferred Brand Alternative” in the space provided.
B.
All equipment prices stated below include and meet all requirements of the equipment specification section including the preparation and submittal of detailed shop drawings showing all modifications, if any, to the Contract Drawings necessary to accommodate such equipment or products.
C.
All equipment listed under “Base Bid Equipment Manufacturer” are of equal quality and function the same as the Owner Preferred Brand Alternative.
D.
If awarded a contract for this project, all equipment items or products are guaranteed by the Bidder and his Surety to meet the performance requirements of the Contract Documents.
Preferred Brand Alternates: Owner Preferred Brand Alternative
Addition/Deductio n to Base Bid for Preferred Brand Alternative
Specification
Description
Base Bid Equipment Manufacturer
26 09 13
Electrical Metering Devices
Eaton
26 24 13
Switchboards
Eaton
26 24 16
Panelboards
Eaton
26 24 19
Motor Control Equipment (MCC)
Eaton
26 26 13
Package Power Supply
Eaton
Eaton
Eaton
Eaton
26 28 00
26 29 13 26 29 23
Overcurrent and short Circuit Protective devices Reduced Voltage Solid State Starters – Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Bidder to include in other Bid item(s) the other costs (if any) associated with accepting such assignment and administering the assigned contract.
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5
ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION 6.01
Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.
6.02
Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.
ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID 7.01
7.02
The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid: A.
Required Bid security;
B.
List of Proposed Subcontractors;
C.
List of Proposed Suppliers;
D.
List of Project References;
E.
Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids;
F.
Contractor’s License No.: __________
G.
Required Bidder Qualification Statement with supporting data; and
H.
EPA Form 6100‐3 DBE Subcontractor Participation Form.
I.
EPA Form 6100‐4 DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form.
J.
Bidders American Iron and Steel Certification.
Major Equipment Items: In connection with major items of equipment to be furnished and installed in this Project, BIDDER expressly agrees to the following provisions: A.
That the Bid stated above includes the furnishing and installing of major equipment furnished by the Supplier which BIDDER has selected from the Schedule of Major Equipment Suppliers, below; BIDDER shall furnish major equipment selected in the Schedule of Major Equipment Suppliers found below.
B.
That the installed price of the equipment includes the cost (if any) of changes in the structure, buildings, piping, wiring, accessories, etc., necessary to accommodate the particular equipment proposed.
SPEC SECTION 26 05 99
EQUIPMENT NAME Power Distribution Enclosure
26 22 13
Dry‐Type Transformers
26 28 16
Safety Switches
LISTED MANUFACTURERS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.
Lectrus Corporation Powell Electrical Systems, Inc. Square D Company Eaton Siemens Or approved equal Eaton General Electric Company Square D Company Siemens Sola/Hevi-Duty Eaton
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6
40 05 52
Miscellaneous Valves, Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valves
40 05 59
Fabricated Slide Gates
40 05 61
Gate Valves
40 05 62
Plug Valves
40 05 66
Swing Check Valves, 3 in to 24 in
40 05 66
Silent Check Valves
41 12 13
Belt Conveyors
41 12 14
Conveyors: Shaftless Screw
41 22 23
Hoists
41 22 23
Trolleys
41 22 23
Monorails
43 13 00
Digester Gas Conditioning
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3.
General Electric Company Square D Company Siemens Appleton Electric Company Crouse-Hinds Killark APCO 200A GA Industries, Figure 920 Or approved equal RW Gate Company Whipps Rodney Hunt Hydro-Gate Golden Harvest Waco Waterman Clow Mueller American Flow Control M&H DeZurik Millikin ValMatic Victaulic Clow American Darling Golden Anderson APCO Series 300 or 600 Clow 375, 636 Golden Anderson, Figures 280 or 290 Serpentix Conveyor Corporation Or approved equal SPIRAC (USA) INC. Jim Myers and Sons Or approved equal Yale Acco Robbins and Myers Wright Yale Acco Wright Spanmaster Twin City Monorail Unison Solutions Clean Methane Systems Or approved equal
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7
43 13 43
43 23 14
43 23 16
43 23 19 43 23 57
43 24 16
43 24 27
43 25 13
46 21 33
46 23 23
1. 2. 3. Pumping Equipment: Non‐Clog 1. Centrifugal 2. 3. 4. Pumping Equipment: Inline Centrifugal 1. Pumps 2. 3. 4. Pumping Equipment: Horizontal 1. Chopper Pumps 2. Pumping Equipment: Progressive Cavity 1. 2. 3. Pumping Equipment: Sump 1. 2. 3. 4. Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine 1. (Line Shaft) 2. 3. 4. Pumping Equipment: Submersible Non‐ 1. Clog 2. 3. Rotary Drum Screen 1. 2. 3. Grit Collection and Concentration 1. Digester Gas Flare
System
2. 46 24 23
Sludge Grinders
46 33 33
Liquid Polymer Feed Equipment, Polymer Blenders
46 33 33
Liquid Polymer Feed Equipment, Ball Valves
46 53 48
Submersible Mixers
46 73 35
Digester Gas Equipment, Manually
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1.
Varec, model 244WL Groth, similar model Or approved equal KSB Flygt Fairbanks Morse Or approved equal Armstrong Gould Bell & Gossett Or approved equal Vaughan Or approved equal Moyno Netzsch Seepex Zoeller Star Water Systems Tsurumi Pump Barnes Fairbank Morse Flowserve Sulzer Peerless Flygt Sulzer/ABS Fairbanks Morse Lakeside Equipment Corporation Huber Technology Or approved equal Smith and Loveless PISTA Grit System with V-Force Baffles No “or equal” or substitutions will be allowed. Disposable Waste System, Inc. (Muffin Monster) Franklin Miller Or approved equal VeloDyne Prominent Fluid Dynamics Chemtrol ASAHI/America Spears EMU Flygt ABS Varec, Model 246
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8
Operated Drip Traps 46 73 35
Digester Gas Equipment, Condensate and Sediment Traps
46 73 35
Digester Gas Equipment, Flame Arresters
2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2.
46 73 35
46 73 35
46 73 35
46 73 35
46 73 35 46 73 36
46 73 42
46 76 21
3. Digester Gas Equipment, Flame Arrestor 1. with Thermal Shutoff Valve 2. 3. Digester Gas Equipment, Combination 1. Pressure/Vacuum Relief Valve and 2. Flame Arrestor 3. Digester Gas Equipment, Back Pressure 1. Check Valve 2. 3. Digester Gas Equipment, Flame Checks 1. 2. 3. Digester Gas Equipment, Davit Cranes 1. 2. Digester Mixing System: Draft Tube 1. Mechanical 2. 3. Digester Heating Equipment 1. 2. 3. Belt Filter Press 1. 2. 3.
7.03
Groth, Model 8460 Or approved equal Varec, Model 233 Groth, Model 8330 Or approved equal Varec, Model 5000 (vertical), Model 5010 (horizontal) Groth, Model 7618 (vertical), Model 7628 (horizontal) Or approved equal Varec Series 450 Groth, Model 8500A Or approved equal Varec Series 5810B Groth Model 8800A Or approved equal Varec Model 211 Groth Model 8110 Or approved equal Varec, Model 5200 Groth, Model 7622 Or approved equal Thern Series 5110 Or approved equal Ovivo Westech Or approved equal Alfa-Laval Gooch No other accepted Alfa Laval G3 200 Klampress Komline Sanderson GRS 2 Series III Kompress Andritz 2.0 Meter SMX-S8
Subcontractors List: Provide list of all subcontractors proposed for this project.
SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS Subcontractor Name and Address
Description of Work/Materials
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9
ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS 8.01
The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
ARTICLE 9 – BID SUBMITTAL BIDDER: [Indicate correct name of bidding entity] By: [Signature]
[Printed name] (If Bidder is a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.) Attest: [Signature]
[Printed name]
Title:
Submittal Date:
Address for giving notices: EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Contact Name and e‐mail address:
Bidder’s License No.:
(where applicable)
EJCDC® C‐410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11
This page intentionally left blank.
Page 1 of 5
SALES AGREEMENT Page 1 of 4
14040 Santa Fe Trail Drive Lenexa, Kansas 66215 913/888-5201
Quotation Date: 9/11/2017 Name and Address: HDR Engineering Inc. of the Carolinas Attn: Will Shull, PE; Christopher Crotwell, PE 440 South Church St., Ste. 10000 Charlotte, NC 28202
Inquiry Number: 26372 Engineer:
HDR
Job Location: Shelby, NC Carotek Quote No.: 15-184-17091103
Smith & Loveless, Inc., having an office at 14040 Santa Fe Trail Drive, Lenexa, Kansas 66215 (hereinafter referred to as “Seller”), hereby agrees to sell to the buyer designated below (hereinafter referred to as “Buyer”), the following equipment subject to all of the provisions set forth in this Sales Agreement. The Sales Representative is not an agent or employee of Seller and is not authorized to enter into any agreement on Seller’s behalf or bind Seller in any way.
Section 462323: Grit Collection and Concentration System ONE
Smith & Loveless Model 30.0B PISTA GRIT CHAMBER™ mechanism suitable for installation in a concrete structure 18’ -0” diameter x 12’-9” deep with a concentric 5’-0” diameter x 7’- 0” deep grit well, concrete structure by others. The PISTA GRIT CHAMBER™ mechanism shall include a helical gear reducer driven by 2.0 HP, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 460 volts, explosion proof motor, spur gear final drive head, air bell, propeller, PISTA GRIT FLUIDIZER™ vane, drive tube, V-FORCE BAFFLETM, removable grit well cover plates and accessories as described herein. All wetted parts shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
ONE
4B2H grit pump capable of delivering 250 GPM @ 47’ TDH with 1750 RPM, 15 HP, TEFC motor
ONE
Model 250 PISTA Grit Concentrator constructed of Ni-Hard to be mounted on the Screw Conveyor
ONE
PISTA PRO-PAK to house the drive assembly, grit pump, electrical controls and vacuum priming system in two sliding insulated fiberglass enclosure with carbon steel base plate. To allow for on-site maintenance of the pump, a pump lifting stanchion with a lifting arm will be provided (hoist by others).
ONE
Vacuum priming pump in NEMA 4X-304 stainless steel enclosure to be mounted in unclassified area.
ONE
DEWATERING: S&L SCREW CONVEYOR™ Model 15 in 304 stainless steel, 1.0 HP, 3/60/480 volt, explosion proof motor, gear reducer, 9” diameter screw, screw trough, steel inlet hopper, supported to provide an incline of approximately 22. Hopper and trough covers are included. The conveyor shall be equipped with two emergency stop switches. Contacts will be manually reset. Switches shall be opened by cable linkage mounted on both sides.
ONE
QuickSmart main control panel in a NEMA 4X-304 stainless steel enclosure to be in unclassified area with controls to handle one (1) PISTA drive motor, one (1) grit pump motor and one (1) screw conveyor motor. Spare Parts One (1) set of fluidizer vanes One (1) set of paddles One (1) set of solenoid valves Bearing -one of each type Five (5) complete set of fuses
Quotation Date: 9/11/2017
Inquiry Number: 26372
Page 2 of 5
CORROSION PROTECTION: All motors and gearboxes shall be furnished with the original manufacturer’s coating. Final touch up and finish coating shall be the responsibility of the purchasing contractor. Approximate total weight of PISTA System: Approximate weight of the SCREW CONVEYOR™: Approximate weight of the Grit Pump:
2600 lbs. 2000 lbs. 750 lbs.
The equipment will be shipped in major pieces as follows: Gear head/gear motor assembly Turbo pump and motor Air bell Propeller drive tube Propeller mounting ring and blades – 2 pieces V-FORCE Baffle TM – 3 pieces Grit well cover plate – 2 pieces Second stage PISTA GRIT CONCENTRATOR™ Grit pump suction pipe PISTA® GRIT FLUIDIZER™ Screw Conveyor– 2 pieces Electrical control panel – 1 piece Vacuum priming system – 1 piece NOT INCLUDED: Field assembly/erection or installation Interconnecting piping, wiring and conduit Field paint or painting Lubricants Anchorage or anchor bolts Field testing if required Performance Testing and/or Grit Removal Efficiency Testing Grouting PLC Program Copy (if applicable) Smith & Loveless, Inc. will provide one electronic copy of the O&M on CD in PDF format and four hard copies of the O&M. Additional copies can be provided for $50 per copy.
PRICE, SUBMITTAL DATA & DELIVERY: $_244,500.00_______ F.O.B. factory plus any taxes, which may apply. Truck/Rail freight allowed to the job site, rail siding or nearest unloading area-unloading to be by Buyer. Due to the spike in gas prices, which is beyond the control of Smith & Loveless at the time of our quotation/bid, a fuel surcharge may need to be assessed at time of shipment. Due to wide fluctuations and increases in the price of stainless and carbon steel components we are experiencing in very short time frames, the sales price of the equipment quoted herein is subject to an escalation in price. Escalation shall be based upon the increase in the Producer Price Index, U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics-Group: Machinery and Equipment: Special Industry Machinery and Equipment, Series Id-WPU116 (the “Index”). The escalation shall be calculated based upon the percentage increase of the monthly index between the date of this quotation and the date of
Quotation Date: 9/11/2017
Inquiry Number: 26372
Page 3 of 5
shipment of the equipment (i.e. the index for the month of the shipment minus the index for the month of quotation divided by the index for the month of quotation, multiplied by the quoted price). Note there is approximately 2-4 month delay in the publishing and finalizing of these indexes by the Federal Government. Therefore, the escalation will be calculated at the time the index for both months has been published and finalized. Pricing is firm for 45 days from bid date. Five (5) days supervision of initial operation, start-up and operator training over two (2) trips are included. If additional days are required, Seller will furnish a factory-trained supervisor for $925 per day including travel time plus actual travel expenses. With continuing approval of the Smith & Loveless Credit Department, payment terms are 10% with order, 25% at release to manufacture, 65% Net 30 from shipment or at time of start-up (whichever occurs first). Seller to send Submittal Data for approval 4-6 weeks after receipt of complete details at Seller’s factory. Manufacturing completion is estimated 14-16 weeks after receipt in Seller’s office of approved Submittal Data and/or after all notations or comments have been clarified, approved and inserted into the manufacturing documents by the Seller. Variations in the time Submittal Data is returned to Seller and/or Submittal Data marked approved but which contain contingencies or variations may impact the completion time of the equipment. ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 1. GENERAL A. Buyer's execution of this Agreement constitutes Buyer's offer to purchase, on the terms and conditions set forth herein, the equipment described in this agreement, and such offer is irrevocable for thirty (30) days after Buyer executes and delivers to Seller this Agreement together with all necessary engineering data and information. Prices are firm for sixty (60) days after the bid date provided a firm order is received at the factory within that time period and provided approved Submittal Data is received at the factory within fortyfive (45) days from the date submittals are forwarded from the factory. In the event firm orders and Submittal Data are not received by Seller within the times set forth above, then price and delivery estimates may change due to changes in the costs of material and labor and/or factory capacity at the time when the firm orders or approved Submittal Data is received by Seller. Seller reserves the right to amend this Sales Agreement if not signed and returned within sixty (60) days from the quotation date. In the event we are unable to ship within estimated period for reasons beyond our control, including a request by the Buyer to defer shipment, the prices are subject to adjustment to those prevailing at the time of shipment, but will not exceed 1-1/2% per month. B. THIS AGREEMENT IS NOT BINDING ON SELLER UNLESS SIGNED ON SELLER'S BEHALF BY AN OFFICER OR MANAGER OF SELLER. C. This Agreement constitutes the entire contract between the parties with respect to said equipment (any prior agreement, representation, covenant or warranty, written or oral, being superseded hereby) and may not be amended or modified except by a written instrument duly executed by both parties, the provisions of any purchase order or other document submitted by or on behalf of Buyer to the contrary notwithstanding. D. All notices hereunder are to be in writing and mailed postage prepaid to the party being notified at the address indicated in this agreement or at such other address as may be designated in writing. E. Remedies provided for herein are cumulative and are in addition to all other remedies as may be available at law or in equity. F. This Agreement is governed by and subject to the laws of the State of Kansas and the Buyer by executing this agreement agrees to submit to the Jurisdiction of the State of Kansas and the venue for any disputes between the parties will be in the District Court of Johnson County, Kansas, or the Federal District Court of Kansas. 2. NOTICE TO PROCEED- Return to Seller of approved Submittal Data or notification to Seller that the submission of submittals will be waived, constitutes notice to Seller to proceed with manufacture. In the event Seller does not receive approved Submittal Data within fortyfive (45) days after Seller's submission of submittal data for approval, then Seller reserves the right to amend price and delivery of the equipment being sold. Final approved Submittal Data means approval by Buyer (or Buyer’s representative) of Seller’s Submittal Data and/or after all notations or comments have been clarified, approved and inserted into Seller’s manufacturing documents at which point Sellers estimated completion schedule commences. Variations in the time Submittal Data is returned to Seller and/or Submittal Data marked approved but which contain contingencies or variations may impact the completion time of the equipment. Seller agrees to furnish only the equipment included in Seller’s quotation and/or as described and modified in the Submittal Data. Approval of the Submittal Data constitutes acceptance of the equipment in the configuration described therein. If Seller is directed to change the scope of the equipment after notice to proceed to manufacture, then Seller reserves the right to amend the price and delivery of the equipment. 3. EXCUSED PERFORMANCE- Seller is not liable for any failure or delay in performance hereof, with respect to delivery or otherwise, if such failure or delay is due to any cause beyond Seller's control including, but not limited to, any Act of God, war, civil disturbance, riot, labor difficulty, factory capacity, fire, other casualty, accident or supplier's failure or inability to perform.
Quotation Date: 9/11/2017
Inquiry Number: 26372
Page 4 of 5
4. CREDIT APPROVAL- The credit terms specified herein are subject to Seller's continuing approval of Buyer's credit and if, in Seller's sole judgment, Buyer's credit or financial standing is impaired as to cause Seller to deem itself insecure, Seller may withdraw the extension of credit and require other payment terms. 5. PAYMENT- Subject only to any credit terms, which Seller may extend, the total purchase price hereunder is due at such time, within or after the estimated shipment period specified herein, as said equipment is ready to be shipped. Buyer shall pay in full all invoices within the time for payment specified therein and Buyer's payment obligation is in no way dependent or contingent upon Buyer's receipt of payment from any other party. Any balance owed by Buyer for thirty (30) days or more after the same becomes due is subject to a 2% per month delinquency charge until paid. In addition to all other amounts due hereunder, Buyer shall reimburse Seller in full for all damages, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, which Seller may incur with respect to Buyer’s breach of this Sales Agreement or the collection of past due amounts from Buyer. If Buyer is in default under this or any other agreement with Seller, Seller may, at its option, defer performance hereunder until such default is cured. 6. SECURITY INTEREST- Until all amounts due hereunder have been paid in full, Seller has a security interest in said equipment and has all rights of a secured party under the Uniform Commercial Code including, without limitation, the right to take possession of said equipment without legal process and the right to require Buyer to assemble said equipment and make it available to Seller at a place reasonably convenient to both parties. At Seller's request, Buyer shall execute any financing statement or statements submitted by Seller in order that Seller's security interest in said equipment may be perfected. 7. WARRANTY & LIABILITY- Seller warrants only that said equipment is free from defects in materials and workmanship as set forth in Seller's standard Certificate of Warranty furnished to Buyer at the time of final shipment. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR DESIGN AND WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED BY SELLER. Seller's sole responsibility with respect to any equipment which proves to be defective as to materials or workmanship is either to replace or to repair the same as is set forth in said Certificate of Warranty. Unless authorized in writing by Seller, Seller is not responsible for any charge or expense incurred for the modification, servicing or adjusting of said equipment after the same has been delivered to Buyer. Seller is not liable in association with its warranty or in any other capacity for any consequential, incidental or liquidated damages, late fees/damages or penalties. 8. CLAIM PERIOD- Buyer shall immediately inspect said equipment upon receipt thereof and immediately notify the carrier of any damage, shortage or other nonconformance. Seller is not obligated to consider any claim for damages, shortages or non-conformance unless notified by Buyer within ten (10 ) days after Buyer's receipt of said equipment. 9. CANCELLATION- Should Buyer cancel this agreement without Seller's prior written consent, Seller may, at its option, recover from Buyer a cancellation charge of not less than 20% of the purchase price hereunder. This cancellation charge is intended to compensate Seller for difficult-to-calculate economic losses, including but not limited to, material and labor costs, as well as loss of anticipated profits suffered due to cancellation. 10. SEVERABILITY – If any provision or provisions of this Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal, unenforceable or in conflict with the law of any jurisdiction, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby. 11. STORAGE- If at such time, within or after the estimated shipment period specified herein, as Seller notifies Buyer that said equipment is ready to be shipped Buyer requests a delay in shipment, Seller may, at its option, agree to store said equipment for a period of time determined by Seller, provided that such agreement will not affect Buyer's obligation to pay in full all invoices as they become due, and provided further that for each month, or portion thereof, said equipment is so stored by Seller, Buyer shall pay to Seller as a storage fee an amount equal to 2% of the purchase price. 12. DRAWINGS, ILLUSTRATIONS AND MANUALS- Catalog and proposal drawings, bulletins, and other accompanying literature are solely for purpose of general style, arrangement and approximate dimensions. Seller may make any changes Seller deems necessary or desirable. Submittal for approval, if required, will be made after receipt of complete information from Buyer. Unless otherwise specified at the time of quotation, six sets will be furnished. Additional sets are at $25.00 per set. Installation, maintenance and operation manuals will be furnished in the number of copies specified at the time of quotation. If none specified, four will be provided at no added cost, with additional copies at $50.00 each. 13. PERMITS, LICENSES- Buyer at its sole cost and expense shall obtain all building or other permits or licenses with respect to the installation and operation of said equipment required by any federal, state or local governmental body. 14. PATENT INDEMNIFICATION- Seller shall, at its own expense, defend any suit instituted against Buyer, based on any claim that equipment furnished hereunder infringes any Letters Patent of the United States, and Seller shall pay any damages assessed against Buyer in any such suit, provided that Buyer, upon service of process upon Buyer, gives to Seller notice in writing of the institution of such suit, and permits Seller, through counsel chosen by Seller, to defend the same, and gives Seller all information in Buyer's possession and reasonable assistance and authority to enable Seller so to do. Seller shall have no liability or obligation to Buyer for patent infringement resulting from compliance by Seller with written instructions or specifications of Buyer concerning the structure, operation, material, or method of making equipment furnished hereunder.
By_______________________________________________________ Authorized Signature Agreed to this _______day of ______________________, ________
_________________________________________________________ Address
_________________________________________________________ Buyer
Is this purchase tax exempt?
By_______________________________________________________ Print Name
Yes____ No____
Quotation Date: 9/11/2017
Inquiry Number: 26372
Page 5 of 5 By _______________________________________________________ Authorized Signature
Agreed to this _______day of _______________________, _______ at Lenexa, KS. SMITH & LOVELESS, INC.
Prepared by ______________________________________________ Sales Representative
If YES, attach Sales Tax Exemption Certificate. Failure to provide tax exempt certificate prior to shipment will result in Buyer being responsible for all applicable taxes. NOTE: The Sales Representative is not an agent or employee of Seller and is not authorized to enter into any agreement on Seller’s behalf or to bind Seller in any way.
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 43 13
BID BOND Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address):
BID Bid Due Date: Description (Project Name— Include Location): BOND Bond Number: Date: Penal sum
$
(Words) (Figures) Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal) Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By:
By: Signature
Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest: Signature
Signature
Title
Title
Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary. 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
PENAL SUM FORM 2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents. 3. This obligation shall be null and void if: 3.1
Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2
All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3
Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent. 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect. 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013. Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee. Page 2 of 2
SECTION 00 52 13
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)
Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794 (703) 684‐2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347‐7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400 (800) 548‐2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE) THIS AGREEMENT is by and between
City of Shelby
(“Owner”) and (“Contractor”).
Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01
Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Project identified herein.
ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT 2.01
The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described as follows: New headworks including new influent screen and grit system, influent pump station upgrades, new influent forcemain, new primary clarifier splitter box, two new digesters, new sludge holding tank, digester control building, dewatering building, and cake storage pad.
ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER 3.01
The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas.
3.02
The Owner has retained HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES 4.01
Time of the Essence A.
4.02
All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
Contract Times: Days A.
The Work will be substantially completed within 600 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions within 630 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
B.
Parts of the Work shall be substantially completed on or before the following Milestone(s): 1.
Milestone 1: Headworks portion of work including PCS Nos. 1 and 2, 365 days.
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
4.03
Liquidated Damages A.
Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed and Milestones not achieved within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1.
Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in Paragraph 4.02.A above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.
2.
Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Times (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $500 for each day that expires after such time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.
3.
Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.
4.
Milestones: Contractor shall pay Owner $750 for each day that expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for achievement of Milestone 1, until Milestone 1 is achieved.
ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE 5.01
Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract: A.
For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.
ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01
Submittal and Processing of Payments A.
6.02
Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions.
Progress Payments; Retainage A.
Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 25 day of each month during performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract. EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 7
1.
B.
6.03
Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract a.
95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; and
b.
95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the balance being retainage).
Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 97.5 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions.
Final Payment A.
Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.
ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST 7.01
Not used.
ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01
In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following representations: A.
Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, and any data and reference items identified in the Contract Documents.
B.
Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C.
Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D.
Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.
E.
Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site‐related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 7
of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. F.
Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.
G.
Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
H.
Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
I.
The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
J.
Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01
Contents A.
The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1.
This Agreement.
2.
Performance bond.
3.
Payment bond.
4.
General Conditions.
5.
Supplementary Conditions.
6.
Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.
7.
Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) with each sheet bearing the following general title: Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project.
8.
Addenda.
9.
Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): a.
Contractor’s Bid.
10. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and are not attached hereto: a.
Notice to Proceed.
b.
Work Change Directives.
c.
Change Orders.
d.
Field Orders.
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 7
B.
The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above).
C.
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.
D.
The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS 10.01 Terms A.
Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions.
10.02 Assignment of Contract A.
Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents.
10.03 Successors and Assigns A.
Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
10.04 Severability A.
Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
10.05 Contractor’s Certifications A.
Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 10.05: 1.
“corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract execution;
2.
“fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non‐competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 7
3.
“collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial, non‐competitive levels; and
4.
“coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution of the Contract.
10.06 Other Provisions A.
Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are based on EJCDC® C‐700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract, published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee®, and if Owner is the party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor, through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the Supplementary Conditions.
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 7
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. This Agreement will be effective on {______} (which is the Effective Date of the Contract). OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
City of Shelby
By:
By:
Title:
Title:
(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint
venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)
Attest:
Attest:
Title:
Title:
Address for giving notices:
Address for giving notices:
License No.:
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents authorizing execution of this Agreement.)
(where applicable)
NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other jurisdictions where applicable or required.
EJCDC® C‐520, (Rev.1), Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price). Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 61 13
PERFORMANCE BOND
CONTRACTOR (name and address):
SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):
OWNER (name and address):
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location): BOND Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
SURETY (seal)
(seal) Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal
Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
By: Signature
Signature (attach power of attorney)
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest: Signature
Title
Signature
Title
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3. 3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; 3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. 4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. 5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions: 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence,
to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or 5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. 6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for: 7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and 7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 2 of 3
10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.
11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. 14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. 14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. 16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
14. Definitions 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims
EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 3 of 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 61 14
PAYMENT BOND CONTRACTOR (name and address):
SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):
OWNER (name and address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Effective Date of the Agreement: Amount: Description (name and location): BOND Bond Number: Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract): Amount: Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
SURETY (seal)
(seal) Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal
Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal
By:
By: Signature
Signature (attach power of attorney)
Print Name
Print Name
Title
Title
Attest:
Attest: Signature
Title
Signature
Title
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.
6.
If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.
7.
When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:
If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.
Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, 5.1.1
5.1.2
5.2
have furnished a written notice of nonpayment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
7.2
Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7.3
The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.
8.
The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.
9.
Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.
The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following: 5.1
7.1
10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 2 of 3
12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
8.
16.2
Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.
16.3
Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
16.4
Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
16.5
Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. 14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 16. Definitions 16.1
Claim: A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
The name of the Claimant; The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished; The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.
17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. 18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 3 of 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 00 72 13 This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (EJCDC® C-520, Stipulated Sum, or C-525, Cost-Plus, 2013 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. To prepare supplementary conditions that are coordinated with the General Conditions, use EJCDC’s Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC® C-800, 2013 Edition). The full EJCDC Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C-001, 2013 Edition).
Copyright © 2013:
National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org
American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.org
American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org
The copyright for this document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE.
NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1 1.01
Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.02
Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5
Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6 2.01
Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6
2.02
Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6
2.03
Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6
2.04
Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7
2.05
Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7
2.06
Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7
Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8 3.01
Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8
3.02
Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8
3.03
Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8
3.04
Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9
3.05
Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10
Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10 4.01
Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10
4.02
Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10
4.03
Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10
4.04
Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10
4.05
Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11
Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12 5.01
Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12
5.02
Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12
5.03
Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13
5.04
Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14
5.05
Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15 EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
5.06
Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site....................................................................... 17
Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 19 6.01
Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19
6.02
Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19
6.03
Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20
6.04
Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23
6.05
Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23
6.06
Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25
6.07
Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25
Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26 7.01
Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26
7.02
Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26
7.03
Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26
7.04
“Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27
7.05
Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28
7.06
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29
7.07
Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31
7.08
Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31
7.09
Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32
7.10
Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32
7.11
Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32
7.12
Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32
7.13
Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33
7.14
Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33
7.15
Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34
7.16
Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34
7.17
Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36
7.18
Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37
7.19
Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37
Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38 8.01
Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38
8.02
Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39
8.03
Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39 EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii
Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities.............................................................................................. 40 9.01
Communications to Contractor............................................................................................ 40
9.02
Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40
9.03
Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40
9.04
Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40
9.05
Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40
9.06
Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40
9.07
Change Orders...................................................................................................................... 40
9.08
Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41
9.09
Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41
9.10
Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41
9.11
Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41
9.12
Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41
Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41 10.01
Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41
10.02
Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41
10.03
Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42
10.04
Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42
10.05
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42
10.06
Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42
10.07
Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42
10.08
Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities.................................................... 42
10.09
Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43
Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43 11.01
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43
11.02
Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44
11.03
Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44
11.04
Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44
11.05
Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45
11.06
Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45
11.07
Execution of Change Orders................................................................................................. 46
11.08
Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47
Article 12 – Claims......................................................................................................................... 47 EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii
12.01
Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47
Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 48 13.01
Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48
13.02
Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50
13.03
Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51
Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52 14.01
Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52
14.02
Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52
14.03
Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53
14.04
Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53
14.05
Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53
14.06
Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54
14.07
Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54
Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55 15.01
Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55
15.02
Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58
15.03
Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58
15.04
Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59
15.05
Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59
15.06
Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59
15.07
Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61
15.08
Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61
Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 62 16.01
Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62
16.02
Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62
16.03
Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63
16.04
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63
Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 64 17.01
Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64
Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 64 18.01
Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64
18.02
Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64
18.03
Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64 EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv
18.04
Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65
18.05
No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65
18.06
Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65
18.07
Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65
18.08
Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01
Defined Terms A.
Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1.
Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
2.
Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer, and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.
3.
Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4.
Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed.
5.
Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.
6.
Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents, and all Addenda.
7.
Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.
8.
Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract.
9.
Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 65
has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute, law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. 13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which together comprise the Contract. 14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. . 15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a) achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the Work. 16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. 17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition. 18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. 19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the Contract becomes effective. 20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental Condition. 23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 65
24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real property, or personal property. 25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of the Bid. 27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work. 28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work, pursuant to the terms of the Contract. 29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers, contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing, commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents is a part. 31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for, procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual may be bound in one or more volumes. 32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative. 33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals and the performance of related construction activities. 35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 65
37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. 40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions. 42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements these General Conditions. 43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor. 44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site, or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06. 45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 65
48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. 1.02
Terminology A.
The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B.
Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1.
C.
Day: 1.
D.
The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective: 1.
E.
The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.
The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a.
does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b.
does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c.
has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).
Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: 1.
The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2.
The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 65
F.
3.
The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
4.
If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a wellknown technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01
2.02
2.03
Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A.
Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.
B.
Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.
C.
Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.
Copies of Documents A.
Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
B.
Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this provision to Engineer.
Before Starting Construction A.
Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1.
a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract;
2.
a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 65
3.
2.04
2.05
Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A.
Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required records.
B.
At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.
Initial Acceptance of Schedules A.
2.06
a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference, attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1.
The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.
2.
Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3.
Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work.
Electronic Transmittals A.
Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a secure Project website.
B.
If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.
C.
When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 65
computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols. ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01
3.02
Intent A.
The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.
B.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed record version shall govern.
D.
The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether written or oral.
E.
Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided herein.
Reference Standards A.
3.03
Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations 1.
Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2.
No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer.
Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A.
Reporting Discrepancies: 1.
Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 65
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
B.
2.
Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
3.
Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof.
Resolving Discrepancies: 1.
3.04
Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such provisions of the Contract Documents and: a.
the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or
b.
the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
Requirements of the Contract Documents A.
During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.
B.
Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim.
C.
If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 65
3.05
Reuse of Documents A.
B.
Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not: 1.
have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or
2.
have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.
The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.
ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01
Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A.
4.02
Starting the Work A.
4.03
Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.
Reference Points A.
4.04
The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract, whichever date is earlier.
Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
Progress Schedule A.
Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1.
Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 65
2. B.
4.05
Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.
Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
Delays in Contractor’s Progress A.
If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
B.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay, disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.
C.
If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following: 1.
severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and earthquakes;
2.
abnormal weather conditions;
3.
acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8); and
4.
acts of war or terrorism.
D.
Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5.
E.
Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site.
F.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 65
G.
Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event.
ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01
5.02
Availability of Lands A.
Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work.
B.
Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C.
Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
Use of Site and Other Areas A.
Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1.
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
2.
If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 65
by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
5.03
B.
Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C.
Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
D.
Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.
Subsurface and Physical Conditions A.
B.
Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.
those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site;
2.
those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and
3.
Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1.
the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or
2.
other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or
3.
any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 65
5.04
Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A.
Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site either: 1.
is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or
2.
is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or
3.
differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4.
is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so. B.
Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
C.
Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in part.
D.
Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1.
Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a.
such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A;
b.
with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 65
c.
2.
5.05
Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a.
Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or otherwise; or
b.
the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or
c.
Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.
3.
If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
4.
Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.
Underground Facilities A.
B.
Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1.
Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and
2.
the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a.
reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site;
b.
locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents as being at the Site;
c.
coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground Facilities, during construction; and
d.
the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 65
becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. C.
Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question; determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.
D.
Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in part.
E.
Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1.
Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a.
Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the Underground Facility in question;
b.
With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;
c.
Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times; and
d.
Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.
2.
If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
3.
Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 65
5.06
Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A.
B.
Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1.
those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and
2.
Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1.
the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or
2.
other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or
3.
any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C.
Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work.
D.
Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the presence of any such Constituents of Concern.
E.
If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 65
F.
Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
G.
If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off.
H.
If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.
I.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
J.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
K.
The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 65
ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01
6.02
Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A.
Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.
B.
All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond.
C.
Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required amounts.
D.
If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the bond and surety requirements above.
E.
If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
F.
Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work.
Insurance—General Provisions A.
Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions.
B.
All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.
C.
Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 65
maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
6.03
D.
Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
E.
Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.
F.
If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage.
G.
If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
H.
Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.
I.
Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.
J.
The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract.
Contractor’s Insurance A.
Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for: 1.
claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts.
2.
United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable).
3.
claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s compensation states).
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 65
4. B.
C.
Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).
Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against: 1.
claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees.
2.
claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.
3.
claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.
Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1.
Products and completed operations coverage: a.
Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.
b.
Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.
2.
Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.
3.
Broad form property damage coverage.
4.
Severability of interest.
5.
Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.
6.
Personal injury coverage.
7.
Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their equivalent.
8.
For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04, “Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent.
D.
Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.
E.
Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every one of the underlying policies.
F.
Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 65
of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion. G.
Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis. Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.
H.
Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such Subcontractor.
I.
General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:
J.
1.
include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.
2.
be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.
3.
contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other insured under the policy.
4.
remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
5.
be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies, and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 65
6.04
6.05
Owner’s Liability Insurance A.
In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.
B.
Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.
Property Insurance A.
Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis, in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1.
include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be referred to as “insureds.”
2.
be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.
3.
cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures.
4.
cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 65
5.
extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).
6.
extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.
7.
allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.
8.
allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.
9.
provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered.
10. not include a co-insurance clause. 11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 12. include performance/hot testing and start-up. 13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is complete. B.
Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured.
C.
Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.
D.
Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.
E.
Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.
F.
Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what amount. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 65
6.06
6.07
Waiver of Rights A.
All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
B.
Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, for: 1.
loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and
2.
loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.
C.
Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of them.
D.
Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.
Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds A.
Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 65
policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days after notice of such claim. B.
Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.
C.
If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by Change Order, if needed.
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01
7.02
7.03
Supervision and Superintendence A.
Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction.
B.
At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.
Labor; Working Hours A.
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B.
Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be unreasonably withheld.
Services, Materials, and Equipment A.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.
B.
All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 65
guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C.
7.04
All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
“Or Equals” A.
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described below. 1.
If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a.
b.
in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1)
it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics;
2)
it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;
3)
it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and
4)
it is not objectionable to Owner.
Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1)
there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2)
it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.
B.
Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or equal” item at Contractor’s expense.
C.
Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 65
7.05
D.
Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents.
E.
Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph 7.05.
Substitutes A.
Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the Site. 1.
Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other than Contractor.
2.
The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances.
3.
Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: a.
b.
c.
shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: 1)
perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design,
2)
be similar in substance to that specified, and
3)
be suited to the same use as that specified.
will state: 1)
the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will necessitate a change in Contract Times,
2)
whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and
3)
whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
will identify: 1)
all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 65
2) d.
7.06
available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.
shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change.
B.
Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
C.
Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
D.
Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
E.
Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute at Contractor’s expense.
F.
Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request, Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution. The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by timely submittal of a Change Proposal.
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A.
Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.
B.
Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.
C.
Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.
D.
Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 65
E.
Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity.
F.
If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.
G.
No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
H.
On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.
I.
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.
J.
Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work.
K.
Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed herein.
L.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. N.
Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the particular Subcontractor or Supplier.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 65
O.
7.07
7.08
Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1.
shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor
2.
shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
Patent Fees and Royalties A.
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
B.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.
C.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
Permits A.
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 65
7.09
Taxes A.
7.10
7.11
Laws and Regulations A.
Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B.
If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C.
Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.
Record Documents A.
7.12
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work.
Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer.
Safety and Protection A.
Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1.
all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 65
7.13
all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and
3.
other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.
B.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress.
C.
Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work.
D.
Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site.
E.
All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
F.
Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
G.
Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
Safety Representative A.
7.14
2.
Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.
Hazard Communication Programs A.
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 65
exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.15
Emergencies A.
7.16
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals A.
Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements: 1.
B.
Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a.
reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b.
determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;
c.
determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
d.
determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.
2.
Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.
3.
With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1.
Shop Drawings: a.
Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.
b.
Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 65
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D. 2.
3.
Samples: a.
Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.
b.
Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.
Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C.
Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Specifications.
D.
Engineer’s Review: 1.
Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2.
Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
3.
Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
4.
Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.
5.
Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 7.16.A and B.
6.
Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances, change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a Change Order.
7.
Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample, or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 65
8.
E.
7.17
Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.
Resubmittal Procedures: 1.
Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.
2.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a setoff against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.
3.
If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.
Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A.
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B.
Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
C.
1.
abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or
2.
normal wear and tear under normal usage.
Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1.
observations by Engineer;
2.
recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3.
the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner;
4.
use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5.
any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;
6.
the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;
7.
any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
8.
any correction of defective Work by Owner.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 65
D.
7.18
7.19
If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.
Indemnification A.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
B.
In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
C.
The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1.
the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2.
giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.
Delegation of Professional Design Services A.
Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.
B.
If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 65
Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. C.
Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
D.
Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 7.16.D.1.
E.
Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by Owner or Engineer.
ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01
Other Work A.
In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site.
B.
If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.
C.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected.
D.
If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 65
8.02
Coordination A.
B. 8.03
If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of any such other work: 1.
the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors;
2.
an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility; and
3.
the extent of such authority and responsibilities.
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination.
Legal Relationships A.
If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner for whom the Owner is responsible causes damage to the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
B.
Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this paragraph.
C.
When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 65
D.
If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.
ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01
Communications to Contractor A.
9.02
Replacement of Engineer A.
9.03
9.06
Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the Agreement.
Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings A.
Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph 5.01.
B.
Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.
C.
Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
Insurance A.
9.07
Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
Pay When Due A.
9.05
Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.
Furnish Data A.
9.04
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer.
Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 6.
Change Orders A.
Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 65
9.08
Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A.
9.09
Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A.
9.10
Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 5.06.
Evidence of Financial Arrangements A.
9.12
The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A.
9.11
Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 14.02.B.
Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).
Safety Programs A.
While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been informed.
B.
Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01
Owner’s Representative A.
10.02
Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract.
Visits to Site A.
Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.
B.
Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 65
or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 10.03
Project Representative A.
10.04
Rejecting Defective Work A.
10.05
10.06
A.
Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set forth in Paragraph 7.16.
B.
Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in Paragraph 7.19.
C.
Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.
D.
Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.
Determinations for Unit Price Work Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A.
10.08
Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. 10.07
If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.
Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A.
Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 65
10.09
B.
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D.
Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
E.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.
Compliance with Safety Program A.
While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which Engineer has been informed.
ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A.
The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change Directive, or a Field Order. 1.
2.
Change Orders: a.
If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times.
b.
Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.
Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 65
adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive. 3.
11.02
Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A.
11.03
Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.
11.04
Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05.
Change of Contract Price A.
The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B.
An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1.
where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or
2.
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or
3.
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 65
the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04.C). C.
11.05
11.06
Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1.
a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2.
if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a.
for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent;
b.
for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;
c.
where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a and 11.04.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;
d.
no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;
e.
the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and
f.
when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.
Change of Contract Times A.
The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.
B.
An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.
Change Proposals A.
Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 65
the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
11.07
1.
Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.
2.
Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole, approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.
3.
Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under Article 12.
Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.
Execution of Change Orders A.
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1.
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;
2.
changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly contested such set-off;
3.
changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other engineering or technical matters; and
4.
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 65
B.
11.08
If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as if fully executed.
Notification to Surety A.
If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change.
ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS 12.01
Claims A.
Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted to the Claims process set forth in this Article: 1.
Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;
2.
Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other relief under the Contract Documents; and
3.
Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.
B.
Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.
C.
Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.
D.
Mediation: 1.
At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim submittal and response process.
2.
If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 65
submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator. 3.
Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.
E.
Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.
F.
Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.
G.
Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 13.01
Cost of the Work A.
B.
Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1.
To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or
2.
To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment.
Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall include only the following items: 1.
Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 65
thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2.
Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.
3.
Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.
4.
Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work.
5.
Supplemental costs including the following: a.
The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b.
Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor.
c.
Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof, whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
d.
Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e.
Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f.
Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 65
other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.
C.
13.02
g.
The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h.
Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
i.
The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1.
Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2.
Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.
3.
Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4.
Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
5.
Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.
D.
Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.
E.
Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
Allowances A.
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 65
B.
13.03
Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that: 1.
the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and
2.
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C.
Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.
D.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
Unit Price Work A.
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B.
The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.
C.
Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D.
Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of the following paragraph.
E.
Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price if: 1.
the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;
2.
there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and
3.
Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 65
ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 14.01
Access to Work A.
14.02
Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.
Tests, Inspections, and Approvals A.
Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.
B.
Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05.
C.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.
D.
Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and tests required: 1.
by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;
2.
to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work;
3.
by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;
4.
for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; and
5.
for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E.
If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner, Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.
F.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 65
cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 14.03
14.04
Defective Work A.
Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not defective.
B.
Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective, and to reject defective Work.
C.
Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
D.
Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.
E.
Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work.
F.
Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
Acceptance of Defective Work A.
14.05
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety). Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to Owner.
Uncovering Work A.
Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 53 of 65
14.06
B.
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.
C.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.
2.
If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of the determination that the Work is not defective.
Owner May Stop the Work A.
14.07
1.
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
Owner May Correct Defective Work A.
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.
B.
In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.
C.
All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as setoffs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 54 of 65
include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D.
Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 15.01
Progress Payments A.
Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.
B.
Applications for Payments:
C.
1.
At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.
2.
Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3.
The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.
Review of Applications: 1.
Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
2.
Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 55 of 65
3.
4.
a.
the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b.
the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and
c.
the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.
By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a.
inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or
b.
there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.
Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a.
to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b.
for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
c.
for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or
d.
to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or
e.
to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5.
Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.
6.
Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a.
the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
b.
the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c.
Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
d.
Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 56 of 65
e.
D.
Payment Becomes Due: 1.
E.
Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents.
Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
Reductions in Payment by Owner: 1.
2.
In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following: a.
claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, and patent infringement;
b.
Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site;
c.
Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;
d.
Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible;
e.
Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;
f.
the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
g.
Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
h.
the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
i.
an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a termination for cause has occurred;
j.
liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;
k.
Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;
l.
there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount recommended.
If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 57 of 65
remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal contesting the reduction. 3.
15.02
Contractor’s Warranty of Title A.
15.03
Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven days after the time of payment by Owner.
Substantial Completion A.
When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be completed or corrected before final payment.
B.
Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor.
C.
If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.
D.
At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 58 of 65
15.04
E.
After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above.
F.
Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the punch list.
Partial Use or Occupancy A.
15.05
1.
At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A through E for that part of the Work.
2.
At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3.
Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
4.
No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other property insurance.
Final Inspection A.
15.06
Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
Final Payment A.
Application for Payment: 1.
After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 59 of 65
inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment. 2.
3.
B.
The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a.
all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;
b.
consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c.
satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.
d.
a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and
e.
complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.
In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.
Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance: 1.
If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.
C.
Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment.
D.
Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer (less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 60 of 65
including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 15.07
15.08
Waiver of Claims A.
The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.
B.
The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.
Correction Period A.
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1.
correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;
2.
correct such defective Work;
3.
if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and
4.
satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B.
If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
C.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
D.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 61 of 65
E.
Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 16.01
Owner May Suspend Work A.
16.02
At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.
Owner May Terminate for Cause A.
B.
The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by Contractor and justify termination for cause: 1.
Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);
2.
Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Contract Documents;
3.
Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or
4.
Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.
If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to: 1.
declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that the Contract is terminated; and
2.
enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.
C.
Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
D.
Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.
E.
If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses, EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 62 of 65
and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
16.03
F.
Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
G.
If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.
Owner May Terminate For Convenience A.
B. 16.04
Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1.
completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
2.
expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and
3.
other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A.
If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 16.03.
B.
In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 63 of 65
expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 17.01
Methods and Procedures A.
B.
Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final resolution under the provisions of this Article: 1.
A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in full; and
2.
Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.
Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner or Contractor may: 1.
elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or
2.
agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution process; or
3.
if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS 18.01
Giving Notice A.
18.02
1.
delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or
2.
delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the sender of the notice.
Computation of Times A.
18.03
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if:
When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.
Cumulative Remedies A.
The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 64 of 65
18.04
Limitation of Damages A.
18.05
No Waiver A.
18.06
All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
Controlling Law A.
18.08
A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision, nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.
Survival of Obligations A.
18.07
With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution, and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
Headings A.
Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.
EJCDC® C-700 (Rev. 1), Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 65 of 65
SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
This Supplementary Conditions has been prepared for use with the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC® C‐700, 2013 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. The suggested language contained in the Guide to the Preparation of Instructions to Bidders (EJCDC® C‐200, 2013 Edition) is also carefully integrated with the suggested language of this document. The full EJCDC Construction series of documents is discussed in the Commentary on the 2013 EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC® C‐001, 2013 Edition). Copyright © 2013: National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314‐2794 (703) 684‐2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347‐7474 www.acec.org American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191‐4400 (800) 548‐2723 www.asce.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the three sponsoring organizations listed above. The National Society of Professional Engineers is the Copyright Administrator for the EJCDC documents; please direct all inquiries regarding EJCDC copyrights to NSPE. NOTE: EJCDC publications may be purchased at www.ejcdc.org, or from any of the sponsoring organizations above.
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................ 1 SC‐ 1.01 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................... 1 ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................ 1 SC‐ 2.02 Copies of Documents ........................................................................................................ 1 ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE ....................................................................... 1 SC‐ 3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................. 1 ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................... 2 SC‐ 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .................................................................................. 2 SC‐ 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions ............................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE ........................................................................................................... 3 SC‐ 6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ......................................................................................... 3 SC‐ 6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ...................................................................................................... 3 SC‐ 6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................ 5 ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................ 5 SC‐ 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence .................................................................................... 5 SC‐ 7.02 Labor; Working Hours ....................................................................................................... 6 SC‐ 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment .................................................................................. 6 SC‐ 7.08 Permits .............................................................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ........................................................................................................ 6 SC‐ 8.02 Coordination ..................................................................................................................... 6 ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................................................... 6 SC‐ 9.13 Owner’s Site Representative ............................................................................................. 6 ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................... 7 SC‐ 10.03 Project Representative ...................................................................................................... 7 ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET‐OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD .................. 10 SC‐ 15.03 Substantial Completion ................................................................................................... 10 SC‐ 15.07 Waiver of Claims ............................................................................................................. 10 ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES ......................................................................................... 10 SC‐ 17.02 Arbitration ....................................................................................................................... 10 SC‐ 17.03 Attorneys’ Fees ............................................................................................................... 11
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i
I.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A.
Caption and Introductory Statements Supplementary Conditions These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, EJCDC® C‐700 (2013 Edition). All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto.
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC‐1.01
Defined Terms
SC‐1.01.A
49. Owner’s Representative – Owner’s Representative shall include any authorized agent including Owner’s staff, Engineer, or subcontractor under employ of the Owner and authorized to act on the Owner’s behalf under this contract.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS SC‐2.02
Copies of Documents
SC‐2.02.A. Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows: Owner shall furnish to Contractor (3) copies of the Contract Documents (including one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). SC‐2.02
Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 2.02.B: C. Conformed documents incorporate and integrate Addenda and amendments negotiated prior to the Effective Date of the Contract. The conformed documents are produced for the convenience of the user and are not binding on the Owner nor do conformed documents take the place of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE SC‐3.01
Intent
SC‐3.01
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 3.01.E: F.
The Specifications may vary in form, format and style. Some specification sections are written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some sections may be relatively narrative by comparison. Omissions of such words and phrases as "the Contractor shall," "in conformity with," "as shown,"
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 11
or "as specified" are intentional in streamlined sections. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a section or articles within a part depending on the format of the section. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in making claims for extra Work. G. The cross referencing of specification sections under the subparagraph heading "Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:" and elsewhere within each specification section is provided as an aid and convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not rely on the cross referencing provided and shall be responsible to coordinate the entire Work under the Contract Documents and provide a complete Project whether or not the cross referencing is provided in each section or whether or not the cross referencing is complete. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC‐5.03
Subsurface and Physical Conditions
SC‐5.03
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.B: C. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site are known to Owner: 1. Report dated February 2, 2017, prepared by Joel E. Wood & Associates, Clover, SC, entitled: “Geotechnical Investigation FBR WWTP – Biosolids Improvement Project, Shelby, NC”, consisting of 34 pages. The Technical Data contained in such report upon whose accuracy Contractor may rely are those indicated in the definition of Technical Data in the General Conditions. 2. Report dated March 10, 2017, prepared by Joel E. Wood & Associates, Clover, SC, entitled: “Geotechnical Investigation FBR WWTP – Influent & Preliminary Treatment, Shelby, NC”, consisting of 24 pages. The Technical Data contained in such report upon whose accuracy Contractor may rely are those indicated in the definition of Technical Data in the General Conditions. D. The following drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities) are known to Owner: 1. Drawings dated June 2014, by HDR, Charlotte, NC, entitled: “Record Drawings: First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Upgrades Project”, consisting of 155. 2. Drawings dated January 2010, by Willis Engineers, entitled “Contract 5.0 Influent Pumping Improvements”, consisting of 12 sheets. 3. Drawings dated July, 1993, by Piedmont, Olsen, Hensley, entitled “Record Drawings: First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Upgrade, consisting of 119 sheets. 3. Drawings dated July 1964, by WM. C. Olsen and Associates, Raleigh, NC, entitled “Record Drawings: Waste Treatment Plant”, consisting of 37 sheets. EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 11
a. None of the contents of such drawings is Technical Data on whose accuracy Contractor may rely. E. Contractor may examine copies of reports and drawings identified in SC 5.03.D at First Broad River WWTP during regular business hours, or may request copies from Engineer. SC‐C.
5.06
SC 5.06
Hazardous Environmental Conditions
Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following: A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site are known to Owner. B. Not Used.
ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE SC‐6.02
Insurance—General Provisions
SC‐6.02
Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.02.B: 1. Contractor may obtain worker’s compensation insurance from an insurance company that has not been rated by A.M. Best, provided that such company (a) is domiciled in the state in which the project is located, (b) is certified or authorized as a worker’s compensation insurance provider by the appropriate state agency, and (c) has been accepted to provide worker’s compensation insurance for similar projects by the state within the last 12 months.
SC‐6.03
Contractor’s Insurance
SC 6.03
Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J: K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: 1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1 and A.2 of the General Conditions: State:
Statutory
Federal, if applicable (e.g., Longshoreman’s):
Statutory
Jones Act coverage, if applicable:
Bodily injury by accident, each accident
$
Bodily injury by disease, aggregate
$
Employer’s Liability: Bodily injury, each accident
$ 1,000,000
Bodily injury by disease, each employee
$ 1,000,000
Bodily injury/disease aggregate
$ 2,000,000
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 11
For work performed in monopolistic states, stop‐ gap liability coverage shall be endorsed to either the worker’s compensation or commercial general liability policy with a minimum limit of:
$
Foreign voluntary worker compensation
Statutory
2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and 6.03.C of the General Conditions: General Aggregate
$ 2,000,000
Products ‐ Completed Operations Aggregate
$
Personal and Advertising Injury Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property Damage)
$
$
3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions: Bodily Injury: Each person
$
1,000,000
Each accident
$
1,000,000
$
1,000,000
Property Damage: Each accident or Combined Single Limit of
$ 2,000,000
4. Excess or Umbrella Liability: Per Occurrence
$ 2,000,000
General Aggregate
$ 2,000,000
5. Contractor’s Pollution Liability: Each Occurrence
$
General Aggregate
$
If box is checked, Contractor is not required to provide Contractor’s Pollution Liability insurance under this Contract
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 11
6. 7. Contractor’s Professional Liability:
SC‐6.05
Each Claim
$ 1,000,000
Annual Aggregate
$ 2,000,000
Property Insurance
SC‐6.05.A. Delete Paragraph 6.05.A of the General Conditions and substitute the following in its place: Contractor shall provide and maintain installation floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. The installation floater insurance shall be a broad form or “all risk” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work. Coverage under the Contractor’s installation floater will include: 1. any loss to property while in transit, 2. any loss at the Site, and 3. any loss while in storage, both on‐site and off‐site. Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk, or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any deductible carried under this coverage and claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixture, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation applicable to Owner, Contractor, Engineer, all Subcontractors, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES SC‐7.01
Supervision and Superintendence
SC‐7.01.B. Amend Paragraph 7.01.B to add the following sentences: “The Contractor shall identify their representative at the Site that shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from this representative shall be binding on Contractor.” SC‐7.01.C. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.01.B: Any superintendent or other personnel, who repeatedly fails to follow the Engineer’s written or oral orders, directions, instructions, or determinations, shall be subject to removal from the project. Upon the written request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately remove such superintendent or other personnel and name a replacement in writing. Noncompliance with the Engineer’s request to remove and replace personnel at any level shall be grounds for terminating the Contract.
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 11
SC‐7.02
Labor; Working Hours
SC‐7.02.B. Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B: 1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM – 7:00 PM. 2. Owner's legal holidays are New Years Day, MLK Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Eve, Christmas Day SC‐7.02.C. Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B: Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any overtime pay or other expense incurred by the Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident Project Representative, if any), Owner's representative, and construction observation services, occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as overtime on any regular work day. If Contractor is responsible but does not pay, or if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15. SC‐7.03
Services, Materials, and Equipment
SC‐7.03.B. Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.03.B: 1. Where the Work requires equipment be furnished, due to the lack of standardization of equipment as produced by the various manufacturers, it may become necessary to make minor modifications in the structures, buildings, piping, mechanical work, electrical work, accessories, controls, or other work, to accommodate the particular equipment offered. Contractor's bid price for any equipment offered shall include the cost of making any necessary changes subject to the approval of Engineer. SC‐7.08
Permits
SC‐7.08.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph GC‐7.08A. which is to read as follows: "B. In those instances where a certificate of occupancy must be obtained before the Work under this Contract can be occupied and placed into service by Owner, it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to arrange, coordinate, and pay any costs of obtaining said certificate."
ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES SC‐9.13 SC‐9.13
Owner’s Site Representative Owner will furnish an “Owner’s Site Representative” to represent Owner at the Site and assist Owner in observing the progress and quality of the Work. The Owner’s Site Representative is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee. Owner’s Site Representative will be Gavel and Dorn.
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 11
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION SC‐10.03
Project Representative
SC‐10.03
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A: B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions. 1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under the direction of Engineer. 2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer concerning acceptability. 3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other Project‐related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof. 4. Liaison: a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on‐Site operations. c.
Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when required for proper execution of the Work.
5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer. 6. Shop Drawings and Samples: a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor‐approved Shop Drawings. b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination. c.
Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.
7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions, EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 11
together with RPR’s recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer. 8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work: a. Conduct on‐Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start‐ups: a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start‐ups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof. b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and systems start‐ups. 10. Records: a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors, deliveries of equipment or materials, daily activities, decisions, observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer. b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e‐mail addresses, web site locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors, and major Suppliers of materials and equipment. c.
Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.
11. Reports: a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals. b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from Contractor. EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 11
c.
Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents, emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental Condition.
12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to payment for that part of the Work. 14. Completion: a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected. b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be remedied. c.
Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.
C. The RPR shall not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment (including “or‐equal” items). 2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s work. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations of Owner or Contractor.
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 11
6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off‐site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. 7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than Contractor. 8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part. ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET‐OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD SC‐15.03
Substantial Completion
SC 15.03.B Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B: 1. If some or all of the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial Completion and will require re‐inspection or re‐testing by Engineer, the cost of such re‐inspection or re‐testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, shall be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set‐off against payments due under Article 15. SC‐15.07
Waiver of Claims
SC‐15.07.B. Amend Paragraph 15.07.B to state "The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims and rights against Owner and/or Engineer other than those pending matters that have been duly submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.” ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES SC‐17.02
Arbitration
SC‐17.02
Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 17.01. SC‐17.02 Arbitration A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the rules of selected arbitration agency, subject to the conditions and limitations of this paragraph. This agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitrator or arbitration provider, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required in this Article, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. The demand for arbitration should include specific reference to Paragraph SC‐17.02.D below. C. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 11
(including Engineer, and Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; and 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings. D. The award rendered by the arbitrator(s) shall be consistent with the agreement of the parties, in writing, and include a concise breakdown of the award, and a written explanation of the award specifically citing the Contract provisions deemed applicable and relied on in making the award. E. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award. F. The fees and expenses of the arbitrators and any arbitration service shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor. SC‐17.03
Attorneys’ Fees SC‐17.03 Attorneys’ Fees: For any matter subject to final resolution under this Article, the prevailing party shall be entitled to an award of its attorneys’ fees incurred in the final resolution proceedings, in an equitable amount to be determined in the discretion of the court, arbitrator, arbitration panel, or other arbiter of the matter subject to final resolution, taking into account the parties’ initial demand or defense positions in comparison with the final result.
EJCDC® C‐800 (Rev. 1), Supplementary Conditions. Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 11
SECTION 00 73 50 SRF SPECIAL CONDITIONS
NC Division of Water Infrastructure MBE/WBE (DBE) Compliance Supplement
Instructions (This package combines the various aspects of State of NC HUB program requirements and Federal DBE requirements into a single compliance supplement in order to eliminate redundancy and ambiguity)
Item
What to do with it
Good Faith Efforts Form
Provided by all bidders to be responsive Only low bidder’s form is submitted to the State
Table A (Summary of firms on job)
Provided by all bidders to be responsive Only low bidder’s form is submitted to the State
Table B (per item being subbed)
Provided by low bidder if SRF project or SRP/SEL* that obtains less than 10% M/WBE utilization (see page 2)
Provide documentation of anything you did that is mentioned later in this supplement
‐ Proof of trade paper advertisement ‐ Printouts of DBE sources used ‐ Solicitation emails and/or letters
Additional Forms for SRF Projects 6100‐3 (per M/WBE firm) 6100‐2 Subs submit concerns on 6100‐2 forms to:
Provided by low bidder if SRF project Distributed to M/WBE firms if SRF project Michael Pigram Region 4, Atlanta Federal Center 61 Forsyth Street Atlanta, GA 30303‐8960
NOTES on this Compliance Supplement Verifiable Goals
EPA MBE/WBE participation goals:
State of NC MBE/WBE participation goal:
MBE 10.9% WBE 10.4% These are goals that the State reports against and are not quotas. The good faith efforts must be adhered to and all forms provided regardless of what percentage utilization is achieved. 10% (combined)
Table B is not required for SRP and SEL projects if you achieve 10% utilization. DBE (MBE or WBE) Certification In order for a firm to count towards the goals, a firm must be properly certified. Table A and Table B both provide spaces to note who certified the firm. The North Carolina Department of Administration and North Carolina Department of Transportation are the most common certifications we see listed. Division of Water Infrastructure staff verify all certifications listed.
Instructions Page 1 of 2
For SRF projects, please note the EPA’s six Good Faith Efforts found in 40 CFR 33 Filling out the Good Faith Efforts Form and providing Table B (if subcontracting is achieved) constitutes compliance with EPA’s six good faith efforts. (1) Ensure MBE/WBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include placing MBE/WBEs on solicitation lists and soliciting them whenever they are potential sources. (2) Make information of forthcoming opportunities available to MBE/WBEs and arrange time for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by DBEs in the competitive process. This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitations for bids or proposals for a minimum of 30 calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date. (3) Consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with MBE/WBEs. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include dividing total requirements when economically feasible into smaller tasks or quantities in order to increase opportunities for participation by MBE/WBEs in the competitive process. (4) Encourage contracting with a consortium of MBE/WBEs when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually. (5) Use the services and assistance of the SBA and the MBDA. (6) If the prime contractor awards subcontracts, require the prime contractor to take the steps in subparagraphs (1)‐(5) of this section.
Pertinent State of North Carolina Administrative Code Regarding M/WBE Compliance. The provisions in this Compliance Supplement constitute compliance with the Rules below. Owner Requirements Contractor Requirements
01 NCAC 30I .0306 01 NCAC 30I .0308
Resources Some sources for identifying MBE/WBE (DBE) firms
https://www.ips.state.nc.us/vendor/SearchVendor.aspx (NCDOA) https://www.ebs.nc.gov/VendorDirectory/default.html (NCDOT) http://dsbs.sba.gov/dsbs/search/dsp_dsbs.cfm (US SBA)
Some sources for finding minority trade papers for potential solicitation advertisements and Federal advertising options
http://web.sba.gov/subnet/ (US SBA Subnet advertising website) https://www.mbda.gov/ (US Dept. of Commerce) https://ncadmin.nc.gov/businesses/hub (NC HUB Office)
Instructions Page 2 of 2
Good Faith Efforts Form Attempts to provide subcontracting opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. Per 01 NCAC 30I .0101, 50 points must be claimed below by the bidder. (This is identical to State of NC Affidavit A)
☐ 1 – (10 pts) Contacted minority businesses that reasonably could have been expected to submit a quote and that were known to the contractor, or available on State or local government maintained lists, at least 10 days before the bid date and notified them of the nature and scope of the work to be performed.
☐ 2 ‐‐(10 pts) Made the construction plans, specifications and requirements available for review by prospective minority businesses, or providing these documents to them at least 10 days before the bids are due.
☐ 3 – (15 pts) Broken down or combined elements of work into economically feasible units to facilitate minority participation.
☐ 4 – (10 pts) Worked with minority trade, community, or contractor organizations identified by the Office of Historically Underutilized Businesses and included in the bid documents that provide assistance in recruitment of minority businesses.
☐ 5 – (10 pts) Attended prebid meetings scheduled by the public owner. ☐ 6 – (20 pts) Provided assistance in getting required bonding or insurance or provided alternatives to bonding or insurance for subcontractors.
☐ 7 – (15 pts) Negotiated in good faith with interested minority businesses and did not reject them as unqualified without sound reasons based on their capabilities. Any rejection of a minority business based on lack of qualification should have the reasons documented in writing.
☐ 8 – (25 pts) Provided assistance to an otherwise qualified minority business in need of equipment, loan capital, lines of credit, or joint pay agreements to secure loans, supplies, or letters of credit, including waiving credit that is ordinarily required. Assisted minority businesses in obtaining the same unit pricing with the bidder's suppliers in order to help minority businesses in establishing credit.
☐ 9 – (20 pts) Negotiated joint venture and partnership arrangements with minority businesses in order to increase opportunities for minority business participation on a public construction or repair project when possible.
☐ 10 ‐ (20 pts) Provided quick pay agreements and policies to enable minority contractors and suppliers to meet cash‐flow demands.
Good Faith Efforts Form, Page 1 of 2
Results of Good Faith Efforts Undertaken (you must check one box below)
☐
No subcontractors are being used for this contracted work. Fill out Table A listing only the Prime Contractor. (This statement takes the place of State of NC Affidavit B)
☐ ☐
Subcontractors are being used. Fill out Table A and B for each trade. Each Table B lists 3. Subcontractors are being used. If any Table B has fewer than 3 solicitations you must also advertise in an M/WBE trade paper and indicate what source of M/WBE firms you used (must list at least one). Some possible papers and sources of M/WBE firms are listed in the Instructions of this Supplement. Name of the Trade Paper: __________________________________________________ Submit proof of advertisement with package
M/WBE Sources:
Source:__________________ Source:_____________________
Submit printouts from M/WBE source(s) Certification Statement and Affidavit of Contractor. The below affidavit constitutes compliance with 01NCAC 30I .0308(7)(a) and (b) and takes the place of State of North Carolina Affidavits C and D. I have read the information in this compliance supplement and all information provided to the State in this package is accurate and true to the extent of my knowledge including the calculated percentages and the good faith efforts presented herein. ____________________________ Prime Contractor Company Name (Print) Prime Contractor Representative (Sign & Date) State of_________________________, County of ________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______day of ______________ 20____
Notary Public _____________________________________________________
My Commission Expires_____________________________________________
SEAL
___________________________________
Applicant Name (Print)
Applicant Authorized Representative (Sign & Date)
Division of Water Infrastructure Project Number
Good Faith Efforts Form, Page 2 of 2
Table A: Prime Contractor and list of selected subcontractors List Prime and ALL of the selected subcontractors (both DBE’s and non‐DBE’s) being used on the project. Each Trade listed on this sheet should have a completed Table B: Subcontract Solicitation List showing the DBE firms contacted and given opportunities to bid. Company Name (list prime first then subs)
Company Address and Phone
Trade (Above) and Price (Below)
MBE or WBE (State use and certifying only) Listed in agency if EPLS as applicable Debarred?
$
$
$
$
Calculate M/WBE utilization as a percent (00.00%) of the prime contract. Limited to 100% even if the Prime is a DBE. MBE and WBE subs total $ Prime Contract Price
$
__________%
Note: Table A substitutes for both the State of NC “Identification of Minority Participation” form and EPA Form 6100‐4.
Table B: Subcontract Solicitation List Table B is required if: 1) Project is Federally funded (SRF) OR; 2) Project is a State Reserve Project or State Emergency Loan (SRP or SEL) and Utilization % on Table A is less than 10% 3)
Trade: ____________________(enter the trade being solicited, paving, hauling etc.) List the firm being used on the project first. If three MBE or WBE firms are not listed, additional information must be provided showing advertisements and/or sources used to identify MBE/WBE subs. Use as many of these sheets as are necessary to cover every trade being subbed out. Company Name
Company Address and Phone
MBE or WBE and certifying agency if applicable.
How was this firm contacted (email, letter, phone) and what was the result of the solicitation?*
*Must submit copies of emails or letters. If phone calls were made this sheet can serve as documentation of calls.
MBE/WBE (DBE) – Change or Add a Subcontractor Form According to EPA guidance on 40 CFR 33.302 If a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under the subcontract for any reason, the recipient must require the prime contractor to employ the six good faith efforts described in §33.301 if soliciting a replacement subcontractor. Please provide the information below if the subcontracted work in question was included in previously submitted good faith efforts documentation: Prime Contractor: Subcontracted work: Previous Subcontractor: Reason this firm did not complete the work: New subcontractor and DBE status:
MBE
WBE
N/A
If this is a new trade being subcontracted, or was not documented in the original Project Bid Information submittal to the State then good faith efforts to solicit a DBE firm must be documented. As the original DBE instructions indicate, please provide a Table B from those original instructions, showing all the DBE firms contacted to perform this work. If three (3) firms are not listed on Table B, then additionally you must submit proof of an advertisement in a minority trade paper and evidence that there were not three reasonably available firms in the work area. The EPA provides in 33.301(a) that good faith efforts are to be carried out “…to the fullest extent practicable…”. If solicitations were not carried out due to being impracticable, please attach this explanation to this form. Please follow the steps below for new subcontracted work: Indicate the new trade being subcontracted: Indicate the firm being used and DBE status:
MBE
WBE
Yes
No
Attach Table B (For State Use) Is this sub debarred?
Project Owner/Applicant:
Signature of Prime Contractor’s Representative
Project Number:
N/A
OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form This form is intended to capture the DBE1 subcontractor’s2 description of work to be performed and the price of the work submitted to the prime contractor. An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractor to have its DBE subcontractors complete this form and include all completed forms in the prime contractors bid or proposal package. Subcontractor Name Bid/ Proposal No.
Project Name Assistance Agreement ID No. (if known)
Point of Contact
Address Telephone No.
Email Address
Prime Contractor Name
Issuing/Funding Entity:
Contract Item Number
DBE Certified By: ____ DOT
Description of Work Submitted to the Prime Contractor Involving Construction, Services , Equipment or Supplies
____ SBA
____ Other: _________________________________________
Price of Work Submitted to the Prime Contractor
Meets/ exceeds EPA certification standards? ____ YES ____ NO ____ Unknown
1
A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity from which EPA accepts certifications as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entities that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2
Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance.
EPA FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form)
OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form
I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. Signing this form does not signify a commitment to utilize the subcontractors above. I am aware of that in the event of a replacement of a subcontractor, I will adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302 (c). Prime Contractor Signature
Print Name
Title
Date
Subcontractor Signature
Print Name
Title
Date
The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address.
EPA FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form)
OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractors to provide this form to its DBE subcontractors. This form gives a DBE1 subcontractor2 the opportunity to describe work received and/or report any concerns regarding the EPA-funded project (e.g., in areas such as termination by prime contractor, late payments, etc.). The DBE subcontractor can, as an option, complete and submit this form to the EPA DBE Coordinator at any time during the project period of performance. Subcontractor Name Bid/ Proposal No.
Project Name Assistance Agreement ID No. (if known)
Point of Contact
Address Telephone No.
Email Address
Prime Contractor Name
Issuing/Funding Entity:
Contract Item Number
Description of Work Received from the Prime Contractor Involving Construction, Services , Equipment or Supplies
Amount Received by Prime Contractor
1
A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity from which EPA accepts certifications as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entities that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2
Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance.
EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)
OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form
Please use the space below to report any concerns regarding the above EPA-funded project: ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Subcontractor Signature
Print Name
Title
Date
The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address.
EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)
Davis-Bacon Instructions for SRF Projects To be included in the Contract Documents:
The entire contents of 29 CFR 5.5 The appropriate wage rates (Usually Heavy or Building rates). This decision must be the most current and have been in effect at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If a wage decision for the project location is not available, then the Statewide wage determination may be used. If it takes longer than 90 days to execute contracts and the wage rate decisions change, then the new wage rates must be incorporated into the contract. Wage Decisions can be found at: http://www.wdol.gov/sca.aspx
During Construction:
Post the Davis-Bacon Poster www.dol.gov/whd/regs/compliance/posters/fedprojc.pdf Post the appropriate wage rates. These should be the ones included in the specifications and any new classifications approved by the Department of Labor. Weekly payrolls are to be maintained onsite for all subject contractors and subcontractors. Number them for each week of the construction period including weeks that do not have payroll. Form WH 347 is suggested. Do not submit these to the State SRF office. Link to Form WH 347 - http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347.pdf Conduct interviews with employees when there are irregularities concerning wages being paid. Use Standard Form 1445. (Attached) For additional wage classification approvals, complete form SF 1444 found at this link: http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts/SF1444.pdf Email this form to:
[email protected]
The entire contents of this package is: 1) These Instructions 2) 29 CFR 5.5 3) Davis-Bacon Poster 4) Payroll form WH 347 5) Interview Form SF 1445 6) New Classification Form SF 1444
29 CFR §5.5 Contract provisions and related matters. (a) The Agency head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a public building or public work, or building or work financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except where a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in §5.1, the following clauses (or any modifications thereof to meet the particular needs of the agency, Provided, That such modifications are first approved by the Department of Labor): (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in §5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein:Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by
the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (2) Withholding. The (write in name of Federal Agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the (Agency) may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show
that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency). The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the (write in name of appropriate federal agency) if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit them to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the (write in name of agency), the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (or the applicant, sponsor, or owner). (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a “Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under §5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under §5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code.
(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of the agency) or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees—(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In
addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the (write in the name of the Federal agency) may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. (b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by §5.5(a) or §4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards.
(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the conract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The (write in the name of the Federal agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in §5.1, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of agency) and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job.
EMPLOYEE RIGHTS
UNDER THE DAVIS-BACON ACT
fOR LABORERS AND MECHANICS
EMPLOYED ON fEDERAL OR fEDERALLY
ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION PROjECTS
THE UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION
PREVAILING WAGES
You must be paid not less than the wage rate listed in the Davis-Bacon Wage Decision posted with this Notice for the work you perform.
OVERTIME
You must be paid not less than one and one-half times your basic rate of pay for all hours worked over 40 in a work week. There are few exceptions.
ENFORCEMENT
Contract payments can be withheld to ensure workers receive wages and overtime pay due, and liquidated damages may apply if overtime pay requirements are not met. Davis-Bacon contract clauses allow contract termination and debarment of contractors from future federal contracts for up to three years. A contractor who falsifies certified payroll records or induces wage kickbacks may be subject to civil or criminal prosecution, fines and/or imprisonment.
APPRENTICES
Apprentice rates apply only to apprentices properly registered under approved Federal or State apprenticeship programs.
PROPER PAY
If you do not receive proper pay, or require further information on the applicable wages, contact the Contracting Officer listed below:
or contact the U.S. Department of Labor’s Wage and Hour Division.
For additional information:
1-866-4-USWAGE
(1-866-487-9243)
TTY: 1-877-889-5627
WWW.WAGEHOUR.DOL.GOV U.S. Department of Labor
Employment Standards Administration
Wage and Hour Division WH 1321(Revised April 2009)
U.S. Department of Labor
PAYROLL
Wage and Hour Division
(For Contractor's Optional Use; See Instructions at www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm)
Rev. Dec. 2008
Persons are not required to respond to the collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number.
NAME OF CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS
OR SUBCONTRACTOR
NAME AND INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFYING NUMBER (e.g., LAST FOUR DIGITS OF SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER) OF WORKER
(2)
(3)
WORK CLASSIFICATION
(4) DAY AND DATE
(5)
(6)
(7)
HOURS WORKED EACH DAY
TOTAL HOURS
RATE OF PAY
GROSS AMOUNT EARNED
OT. OR ST.
(1)
PROJECT OR CONTRACT NO.
PROJECT AND LOCATION
FOR WEEK ENDING
NO. OF WITHHOLDiNG EXEMPTIONS
PAYROLL NO.
OMB No.: 1235-0008 Expires: 01/31/2015
(9)
(8) DEDUCTIONS
FICA
WITHHOLDING TAX
OTHER
NET WAGES TOTAL PAID DEDUCTIONS FOR WEEK
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
While completion of Form WH-347 is optional, it is mandatory for covered contractors and subcontractors performing work on Federally financed or assisted construction contracts to respond to the information collection contained in 29 C.F.R. §§ 3.3, 5.5(a). The Copeland Act (40 U.S.C. § 3145) contractors and subcontractors performing work on Federally financed or assisted construction contracts to "furnish weekly a statement with respect to the wages paid each employee during the preceding week." U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) regulations at 29 C.F.R. § 5.5(a)(3)(ii) require contractors to submit weekly a copy of all payrolls to the Federal agency contracting for or financing the construction project, accompanied by a signed "Statement of Compliance" indicating that the payrolls are correct and complete and that each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the proper Davis-Bacon prevailing wage rate for the work performed. DOL and federal contracting agencies receiving this information review the information to determine that employees have received legally required wages and fringe benefits. Public Burden Statement We estimate that is will take an average of 55 minutes to complete this collection, including time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. If you have any comments regarding these estimates or any other aspect of this collection, including suggestions for reducing this burden, send them to the Administrator, Wage and Hour Division, U.S. Department of Labor, Room S3502, 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20210 (over)
Date I,
(b) WHERE FRINGE BENEFITS ARE PAID IN CASH
(Name of Signatory Party)
−
(Title)
do hereby state: (1) That I pay or supervise the payment of the persons employed by
(c) EXCEPTIONS on the
(Contractor or Subcontractor)
EXCEPTION (CRAFT)
EXPLANATION
; that during the payroll period commencing on the
(Building or Work) day of
Each laborer or mechanic listed in the above referenced payroll has been paid, as indicated on the payroll, an amount not less than the sum of the applicable basic hourly wage rate plus the amount of the required fringe benefits as listed in the contract, except as noted in section 4(c) below.
,
, and ending the
day of
,
,
all persons employed on said project have been paid the f ull weekly wages earned, that no rebates have been or will be made either directly or indirectly to or on behalf of said
(Contractor or Subcontractor)
from the full
weekly wages earned by any person and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned by any person, other than permissible deductions as defined in Regulations, Part 3 (29 C.F.R. Subtitle A), issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act, as amended (48 Stat. 948, 63 Stat. 108, 72 Stat. 967; 76 Stat. 357; 40 U.S.C. § 3145), and described below:
REMARKS:
(2) That any payrolls otherwise under this contract required to be submitted for t he above period are correct and complete; that the wage rates for laborers or mechanics contained therein are not less than the applicable wage rates contained in any wage determination incorporated into the contract; that the classifications set forth therein for each laborer or mechanic conform with the work he performed. (3) That any apprentices employed in the above period are duly registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with a State apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, United States Department of Labor, or if no such recognized agency exists in a State, are registered with the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, United States Department of Labor. (4) That: (a) WHERE FRINGE BENEFITS ARE PAID TO APPROVED PLANS, FUNDS, OR PROGRAMS
−
in addition to the basic hourly wage rates paid to each laborer or mechanic listed in the above referenced payroll, payments of fringe benefits as listed in the contract have been or will be made to appropriate programs for the benefit of such employees, except as noted in section 4(c) below.
NAME AND TITLE
SIGNATURE
THE WILLFUL FALSIFICATION OF ANY OF THE ABOVE STATEMENTS MAY SUBJECT THE CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR TO CIVIL OR CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. SEE SECTION 1001 OF TITLE 18 AND SECTION 231 OF TITLE 31 OF THE UNITED STATES CODE.
General Decision Number: NC170063 01/06/2017
NC63
Superseded General Decision Number: NC20160063 State: North Carolina Construction Type: Building Counties: Bladen, Cleveland, Columbus, Harnett, Lincoln, Richmond, Robeson, Rowan, Scotland and Wilson Counties in North Carolina. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number 0
Publication Date 01/06/2017
* PLUM0421-004 07/01/2013 Rates
Fringes
PIPEFITTER (Excluding HVAC System Installation).............$ 24.85 9.65 ---------------------------------------------------------------* SUNC2011-044 08/26/2011 Rates
Fringes
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 19.09
8.73
CARPENTER (Drywall Hanging Only)............................$ 18.13
1.31
CARPENTER, Excludes Drywall Hanging, and Form Work...........$ 15.93
2.99
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 14.02
0.00
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 17.36
3.07
FORM WORKER......................$ 16.08
3.48
GLAZIER..........................$ 18.16
0.87
HVAC MECHANIC (Installation of HVAC Unit Only, Excludes Installation of HVAC Pipe and Duct)............................$ 15.41
2.60
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 18.75
5.62
LABORER:
Common or General......$ 10.53
1.39
LABORER: Landscape & Irrigation.......................$ 10.29
1.82
LABORER: Mason Tender-Brick/Cement/Concrete.....$ 11.31
0.00
OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 17.98
0.91
OPERATOR:
Crane.................$ 19.25
2.37
OPERATOR:
Grader/Blade..........$ 15.71
1.49
PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray............................$ 14.60
1.97
PLUMBER, Excludes HVAC Unit Installation.....................$ 17.42
2.29
ROOFER...........................$ 13.55
0.80
SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 15.29
0.00
SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation.....................$ 13.09
1.28
TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 13.14 1.01 ---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is
like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.
Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * * * *
an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ �
END OF GENERAL DECISION
This page intentionally left blank.
Page 1 of 4
General Decision Number: NC170070 01/06/2017
NC70
Superseded General Decision Number: NC20160070 State: North Carolina Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Bladen, Cleveland, Columbus, Davidson, Duplin, Harnett, Iredell, Lee, Lenoir, Lincoln, Montgomery, Moore, Richmond, Robeson, Rowan, Sampson, Scotland, Stanly and Wilson Counties in North Carolina.
HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.
Modification Number 0
Publication Date 01/06/2017
SUNC2011-051 08/26/2011 Rates
Fringes
CARPENTER (Form Work Only).......$ 15.47
1.50
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 13.10
1.32
LABORER:
Common or General......$
9.52
0.00
LABORER:
Pipelayer..............$ 12.13
0.00
OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 16.18
0.00
TRUCK DRIVER.....................$ 12.02 0.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the
https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/NC70.dvb?v=0
9/28/2017
Page 2 of 4
Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------
The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that
https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/NC70.dvb?v=0
9/28/2017
Page 3 of 4
classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * * * *
an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division
https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/NC70.dvb?v=0
9/28/2017
Page 4 of 4
U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION �
https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/NC70.dvb?v=0
9/28/2017
American Iron and Steel (AIS) Guidance for SRF Projects in North Carolina This state guidance summarizes the requirements under Subsection 436 (a)(2) of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2014 that SRF recipients only use iron and steel products produced in the United States. The Environmental Protection Agency provides full guidance on the requirements at the following website: http://water.epa.gov/grants_funding/aisrequirement.cfm. Recipients of subject SRF awards must submit the executed Certification for SRF Projects and any waiver requests with their Bid Package. The recipient cannot receive a promissory note without these items. Manufacturers can use the template “Compliance Certification” to document that materials are “produced in the United States.”
Contents 1. Certification for SRF Projects 2. AIS Waiver Instructions 3. Materials covered by AIS 4. Template Compliance Certification for Materials Covered by AIS 5. Template De Minimis list
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
Page 1 of 6
American Iron and Steel (AIS) Certification for SRF Projects Recipients of subject SRF awards must submit this executed form and any waiver requests with their Bid Information package to the State SRF program in order to receive funding.
The __(Applicant)_________________________ certifies that their contractors performing construction, alteration, maintenance and repair of the public treatment works under project number ________________ will comply with subsection 436 (a)(2) of the Consolidated Appropriations Act of 2014 and only use iron and steel products produced in the United States.
Contractor Representative
Project Applicant/Owner Representative
(print)______________________________
(print)____________________________
(sign and date)_______________________
(sign and date)_____________________
Company Name
Applicant/Owner Name and Project No.
___________________________________
_________________________________
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
Page 2 of 6
AIS Waiver Instructions Approved national waivers can be found at this website: http://water.epa.gov/grants_funding/aisrequirement.cfm Please note that a national waiver for “de minimis” iron and steel components has been approved. A table is included in this document for use in documenting what items are to be considered as covered under this waiver. Note that no single de minimis item can be more than 1% of the total material cost of the project and the total of all de minimis items must not exceed 5% of the total material cost of the project. Waiver Requests are provided for in subsection 436(b) of the Act. It states they will be granted if the Administrator of the EPA finds that: (1) Applying subsection (a) would be inconsistent with the public interest; (2) Iron and steel products are not produced in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available quantities and of a satisfactory quality; or (3) Inclusion of iron and steel products produced in the United States will increase the cost of the overall project by more than 25 percent. A checklist of items for a complete waiver application package can be found in the EPA guidance document for AIS found here: http://water.epa.gov/grants_funding/upload/AIS-final-guidance-3-20-14.pdf • •
Submit DWSRF waiver requests to
[email protected]. Submit CWSRF waiver requests to
[email protected].
The State will forward these to the EPA for a final determination.
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
Page 3 of 6
Materials Covered by AIS Lined and unlined pipes and fittings, manhole covers, municipal castings (detailed below), hydrants, tanks, flanges, pipe clamps and restraints, valves, structural steel (detailed below), reinforced precast concrete and construction materials (detailed below). Products must be composed of greater than 50% iron and steel measured by cost and permanently incorporated into the project to be subject to the provision. Municipal Castings Structural Steel Construction Material Access Hatches Ballast Screen Benches Bollards Cast Bases Cast Iron Hinged Hatches Cast Iron Riser Rings Catch Basin Inlet Cleanout/Monument Boxes Construction Covers and Frames Curb and Corner Guards Curb Openings Detectable Warning Plates Downspout Shoes Drainage Grates, Frames and Inlets Inlets Junction Boxes Lampposts Manhole Covers, Rings, Frames and Risers Meter Boxes Service Boxes Steel Hinged Hatches Steel Riser Rings Trash Receptacles Tree Grates Tree Guards Trench Grates Valve Boxes, Covers and Risers
Wide Flange shapes I-beams Channels Angles Tees Zees H-piles Sheet piling Tie Plates Cross Ties (note: at least one dimension must be 3 inches or greater to be subject)
Wire Rod Bar Angles Concrete Reinforcing Bar Wire Wire Cloth Wire Rope and Cables Tubing Framing Joists Trusses Fasteners Welding Rods Decking Grating Railings Stairs Access Ramps Fire Escapes Ladders Wall Panels Dome Structures Roofing Ductwork Surface Drains Cable Hanging Systems Manhole Steps Fencing and Fence Tubing Guardrails Doors Stationary Screens
Mechanical and electrical components, equipment and systems are not subject to AIS. See the EPA guidance for details.
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
Page 4 of 6
Template Compliance Certification For Materials Covered by AIS
Company Name: Company Address: SRF Project name and project number:
I___________________, certify that the following products were produced at the following location or steps in the production of the listed products, occurred at the following location: Location: Product
Step in production (Final production, melting, bending, etc.)
1) 2) 3)
Therefore, these materials are “produced in the United States.”
_____________________________________________ (signature and title of company representative)
___________________
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
(date)
Page 5 of 6
De Minimis List Item
Cost
Total De Minimis Cost:
$
Total Material Cost For Project:
$
De Minimis Cost is
percent of total material costs.
C:\Users\amyers\Desktop\spec import\FBR - WWTP\SRF\Buy_American_Provisions_2014-05-02.docx
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8 9
DEFINITIONS A. Project Classified System (PCS): A defined part of the Project, consisting of an arrangement of items, such as equipment, structures, components, piping, wiring, materials, or incidentals, so related or connected to form an identifiable, unified, functional, operational, safe, and independent system.
1.2
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A. The general description of the Work to be performed is indicated below: 1. PCS No. 1 – Headworks: Series 10. 2. PCS No. 2 – Influent Pump Station: Series 11. 3. PCS No. 3 – Influent Forcemain: Series 03. 4. PCS No. 4 – Primary Clarifier Splitter Box. 5. PCS No. 5 – Anaerobic Digester System: a. Digester No. 1. b. Digester No. 2. c. Sludge Holding Tank. d. Digester Control Building. e. Filtrate Pump Station. f. Digester Gas Flare. g. Related Equipment. 6. PCS No. 6 – Dewatering Facility. 7. PCS No. 7 – Dewatered Cake Storage. 8. PCS No. 8 – Compost Building Demolition.
26 27
B. Furnish all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; provide all construction equipment and tools; and perform all necessary labor and supervision.
28 29 30
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation.
31 32
D. Coordinate the progress of the Work, including coordination between trades, subcontractors, suppliers, public utilities, and OWNER to ensure the progress of Work.
33 34 35 36
E. It is the intent of this Contract that the Work proceed in a manner to minimize plant operational interferences and to ensure compliance with permits that the OWNER has regarding the water quality discharged from the plant. The Work occasionally will require weekend, night time, and multiple shift labor activities to meet the above stated objectives.
37
1.3
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
CONTRACT A. Construct the Work Under a Single Contract.
1.4
PUBLIC UTILITIES AND AGENCIES COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A. Water and sewer: 1. Agency: City of Shelby, Utilities Department, 704-484-6840. 2. Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR: a. Perform all testing and disinfection work of potable water lines per OWNER standards and regulations.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B. Power: 1. Agency and contact number: 2. City of Shelby, Utilities Department, 704-484-6840. 3. Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR: a. Coordinate CONTRACTOR's work with Duke Power Company where adjacent to existing facilities. b. Provide temporary electrical service for CONTRACTOR's needs during performance of this Contract. Pay all costs to install and remove temporary electrical service including meter. Pay all monthly service charges and other fees associated with temporary electrical service. c. Perform all Work per Duke Power Company requirements and codes.
12 13 14 15
C. Telephone: 1. Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR: a. Coordinate CONTRACTOR's work with BellSouth where adjacent to existing facilities. b. Coordinate CONTRACTOR's work on-site with OWNER.
16 17 18 19
D. Gas: 1. Agency and contact number: City of Shelby, Utilities Department, 704-484-6840. 2. Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR: a. Coordinate gas service work with Utilities Department.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
E. Fire protection: 1. Agency and contact number: City of Shelby, Fire and Rescue Department, 704-484-6835. 2. Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR: a. CONTRACTOR is to update OWNER’s site map on record with the fire department to reflect temporary parking, office trailers, and storage facilities used during construction. Provide a general list of materials and any fuels, solvents, etc., that may be stored onsite during construction.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1.5
WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work with the following provisions: 1. All existing plant facilities will remain in operation during construction. 2. CONTRACTOR must allow and provide for OWNER's continuous access to site. 3. Power outages will be considered by ENGINEER and OWNER upon 48 hours written notice to ENGINEER and OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall describe the reason, anticipated length of time, and areas affected by the outage in his written notice. Temporary provisions for continuous power supply to critical plant components must be provided by CONTRACTOR, if requested by ENGINEER and OWNER. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and coordinate his operations, shall make all necessary temporary connections, and shall perform any other work necessary to ensure continuous plant operation. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, as required to prevent interruption of treatment. 6. The CONTRACTOR must very carefully coordinate proposed work with the ENGINEER and plant personnel before effecting unit shutdowns and under no circumstances is the CONTRACTOR to be permitted to cease work at the end of a normal working day if his actions have inadvertently caused a cessation of any plant operating process. If the latter factor is involved, CONTRACTOR's personnel will remain on site until necessary repairs are complete. 7. CONTRACTOR shall not close any lines, open valves, or take any other action which would affect the operation of existing systems. Modifications to operations of existing systems will be performed by OWNER’s operation staff only. Such actions will be considered by ENGINEER and OWNER upon 48 hours written notice to ENGINEER and OWNER.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
8.
Any existing plant equipment, facilities, and appurtenances such as water lines, gas lines, electrical cables, sludge lines, structures, vehicles, etc., which are damaged by the CONTRACTOR during construction, even though inadvertently, will be repaired immediately by CONTRACTOR at his own expense. 9. During this Contract, CONTRACTOR is responsible for adapting its construction and schedule in order to allow the OWNER to maintain the existing level of wastewater treatment consistent with applicable permit requirements, laws and regulations, and standard practices. In performing such Work and in cooperating with the OWNER to maintain treatment operations, it may be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to plan, design and provide various temporary services, utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access and the like which will need to be included within the Contract Price. 10. CONTRACTOR shall conduct on-site Work during regular working hours which are defined as weekdays, 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., holidays excluded. CONTRACTOR may apply to work outside of regular working hours as provided in the General Conditions. B. Construction Work/Time Constraints, Sequencing and Coordination requirements: 1. General: a. PCS Nos. 5, 6 and 7 can start at any time. 2. Phase I: a. Complete Phase I demolition work as indicated on Drawing 02C-01. b. Install new underground electrical service and transformer. c. Provide temporary electrical power to influent pump station and existing headworks. 3. Phase II: a. Construct the new Headworks, including cast-in-place concrete, gates, process piping, equipment, etc. b. Install the new screen, conveyor, washer compactor, and grit removal equipment and perform wet tests using non-potable water. c. Complete construction of Primary Clarifier Splitter Box (PCS 4). d. Install piping from splitter box to existing primary clarifier influent chamber and by coring through the wall. One of the two clarifiers can be taken out of service for up to two days at a time with prior notification of Owner/Engineer. e. Complete new 30-inch influent forcemain from new splitter box to the existing 24-inch tee which it will connect to (adjacent to influent pump station) in subsequent phase. 4. Phase III: a. Perform temporary bypass pumping (BYP PUMP 1) from upstream manhole (refer to Dwg 02V-01) to existing headworks. Install two plugs to isolate influent 48” sewer where new manhole is to be constructed. b. Construct new manhole and related sewer piping to allow flow to new Headworks. Isolate existing sewer to prevent flow to existing headworks. c. Install temporary bypass pumping system (BYP PUMP 2) from effluent end of new headworks to new 30-inch forcemain. d. Send partial flow to new headworks via valve to test new Headworks. e. Test BYP PUMP 2 system with partial flow. f. Increase partial flow until new headworks and BYP PUMP 2 receives 100% of flow. g. Once test period is complete and with Owner and Engineer approval, pull plugs and remove BYP PUMP 1, allowing all flow to go by gravity to the new Headworks. All flow is pumped at the effluent end of new headworks with BYP PUMP 2 and through the new 30-inch forcemain. Flow is now sent to the new primary splitter box. h. Existing influent pump station is isolated at this point. i. Install new electric generator. 5. Phase IV: a. Complete Phase II demolition work as indicated on Drawing 02C-02. b. During the outage of the influent pump station, make the connection between the existing 24-inch tee and the new forcemain with a 24”x30” reducer fitting. c. Partially remove and plug the existing 24-inch forcemain downstream of the bypass connection. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
d.
6.
1.6
Plug and abandon the existing influent lines from the existing splitter box. This will require taking primary clarifiers out of service. One of the two clarifiers can be out of service for up to two days with prior notification and with approval from Owner and Engineer. e. Install the influent piping connection from new headworks into existing influent pump station wet well. f. Remove the existing screen and install in the new headworks channel. g. Permanently decommission / demolish the existing headworks including plugging the existing influent and effluent piping connections. h. Demolish the suction pipes for pumps 1 and 3 and core drill new wall penetrations. Demolish Pump 3 discharge piping. Install larger diameter piping and isolation valves. i. Install new pumps, VFD’s and related mechanical, electrical and instrumentation. j. Engineer to inspect existing wet well and provide direction on repair based on unit price bid items. Allow two weeks for engineer inspection and selection of repair unit price items. k. Repair/rehabilitate wet well concrete. l. Startup and test new pumps. m. Send flow to new influent pump station. After successful test period has ended and with notification and approval from Owner and Engineer, remove BYP PUMP 2. n. Isolate existing 24-inch forcemain by plugging line downstream of valve. o. Milestone 1 is now complete. Phase V: a. Complete PCS Nos. 5, 6, and 7 if not already complete. b. Start and complete PCS No. 8 only after all other PCS are complete.
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
26 27
A. CONTRACTOR shall limit his use of the premises for Work and storage to allow for OWNER occupancy.
28 29
B. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products furnished under this Contract, stored on or off-site.
30 31
C. Move any stored products under CONTRACTOR's control that interfere with operations of the OWNER.
32
D. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
33 34 35 36 37
E. CONTRACTOR shall confine all materials storage, equipment storage, and employee and subcontractor parking to the areas shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall not store materials or equipment, nor shall employees of the CONTRACTOR or subcontractors park automobiles on public streets, in the OWNER's parking lots, or in the parking and storage areas designated for use by other Contractors.
38 39 40
F. CONTRACTOR shall restore any areas used for materials storage, equipment storage, or employee and subcontractor parking to their original condition or better, unless specified otherwise.
41 42 43 44
G. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER a parking plan outlining where employees of the CONTRACTOR and subcontractors will park during normal and peak construction periods. 1. Submit within ten days after Effective Date of the Notice to Proceed. 2. Plan must be approved by OWNER.
45 46 47 48 49
1.7
EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. Confine construction operations to the immediate vicinity of the location indicated on Drawings and use due care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies, so as to cause the least possible damage to property and interference with traffic.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 4
1
1.8
FENCES
2
A. Maintain all fences affected by the Work until completion of the Work.
3
B. Keep gates closed and locked when not in use.
4 5 6 7 8 9
1.9
CONTROL OF NOISE A. Conduct all construction, land disturbance activities and all vehicle movements in such a manner as to comply with City of Shelby Noise Ordinance provisions.
1.10 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY A. Protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by construction operations.
10 11 12 13
B. Restore to their original condition, pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, together with sod and shrubs, in yards and parking areas, whether within or outside the easement.
14
C. Use new materials for replacement of all items.
15 16 17 18 19
D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, and other public or private property, regardless of location or character, that may be caused by transporting equipment, materials, or workers to or from the Work or any part or site thereof, whether by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors or suppliers.
20 21 22
E. Make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the owner of, or the agency or authority having jurisdiction over, any damaged property concerning its repair, replacement, or payment of costs incurred in connection with the damage.
23 24
F. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and available for use at all times.
25 26 27 28 29 30
G. Notify all utility offices which may be affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance. Before exposing any utility, the utility having jurisdiction shall grant permission and may oversee the operation. Should service of any utility be interrupted due to the CONTRACTOR's operation, the proper authority shall be notified immediately. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the said authority in restoring the service as promptly as possible and shall bear any costs incurred.
31 32 33
1.11 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND ACCESS TO FACILITIES A. OWNER’s access to facilities must be maintained at all times during construction. 1.12 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
34 35
A. Protect plant access roads that are closed to traffic by barricades with warning signs as indicated by the Contract Documents.
36
B. Provide suitable warning signs and lights at obstructions, such as material piles and equipment.
37
C. Illuminate barricades and obstructions with warning lights from sunset to sunrise.
38 39 40
D. Install and maintain barricades, signs, lights, and other protective devices in conformity with applicable laws and regulations, and in conformance with North Carolina Department of Transportation Standards if roadway construction is involved.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1.13 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. OWNER will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction for the conduct of his normal operations. Cooperate with OWNER in all construction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate OWNER usage. 1.14 LINES AND GRADES A. Construct all Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Remove and reconstruct improperly located Work. B. Provide all additional survey, layout, and measurement work required. 1. Work to be performed by a qualified professional engineer or registered land surveyor acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site Work, and preserve all permanent reference points during construction. a. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to ENGINEER. b. Report to ENGINEER when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. c. Require surveyor to replace Project control points and all Federal, State, City, County, and private land monuments that may be lost or destroyed. 1) Establish replacements based on original survey control. 2) Comply with local and State requirements for monument replacement and restoration. 3. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. a. Site improvements. 1) Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2) Batter boards for structures. 3) Building foundation, column locations, and floor levels. 4) Controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades. 4. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods. 5. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. 6. On request of ENGINEER, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. 1.15 WORK SITE SECURITY
33
A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain strict site security at all times during construction of the Work.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
B. Specific requirements include the following: 1. CONTRACTOR vehicle access – No vehicles, other than CONTRACTOR vehicles with readily visible logos, shall be permitted to park except in the designated parking area as shown on the Drawings. All employee personal vehicles shall be parked in designated areas as shown on Drawings. No vehicles shall be permitted to park in the OWNER designated parking areas at any time. 2. CONTRACTOR sign in/sign out logs – CONTRACTOR shall maintain a log of all employees, subcontractors, equipment suppliers, and other individuals involved with the Work at all times. Any individuals not accounted for may be asked to leave the site at any time by OWNER. 3. Employee Identification: a. CONTRACTOR shall provide all employees a photo identification badge. The badge is to be worn at all times and readily visible while employee is working on site. b. CONTRACTOR shall also provide an additional means of employee identification which shall be readily visible from a distance of 50 feet. Acceptable means of identification shall include a minimum of one of the following: 1) Hard hats with company logos. 2) Distinguishable work attire (i.e. shirts). 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
c. 4.
5.
Any other individuals, including subcontractors, equipment suppliers, etc., shall also comply with above requirements. CONTRACTOR to inspect all deliveries, including equipment, materials, mail, etc. prior to material being allowed on-site. No deliveries are to enter fenced plant area prior to inspection by CONTRACTOR. Upon receipt or discovery of suspicious material, CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify OWNER plant personnel and appropriate field personnel and take appropriate action to safely handle and remove material. CONTRACTOR to notify OWNER personnel immediately upon discovery of any threat to plant security, personnel safety, etc., and shall take immediate action as appropriate to remove threat.
C. OWNER may, at any time, ask individuals not complying with these requirements to leave the site. OWNER may also ask at any time, for vehicles and/or equipment that is not in compliance with the above requirements to be removed from the Project Site. Upon request by the OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall immediately remove items and/or individuals from the Site until adequate identification can be provided. 1.16 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
17 18
A. Comply with all Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, codes, and ordinances applicable to the Work.
19 20
B. References in the Contract Documents to local codes shall mean the City of Shelby, Cleveland County, North Carolina.
21
C. Other standards and codes that apply to the Work are designated in the Specifications.
22 23 24 25 26
1.17 ACCESS BY GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS A. Authorized representatives of governmental agencies shall at all times have access to the Work where it is in preparation or progress. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for access and inspection.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 11 10 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8
A. The intent of this Specification is to have the Contractor schedule and perform the Work in a manner such that the Owner can keep the existing treatment plant facilities in continuous dependable operation and meet all regulatory requirements. This specification also covers bypass pumping requirements.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B. The Contractor shall: 1. Perform all construction necessary to complete connections, tie-ins and shutdowns to existing facilities. 2. Keep existing facilities in operation unless otherwise specifically permitted in these Specifications or approved by the Owner. 3. Perform all construction activities so as to avoid interference with operations of the facility and the work of others. 4. Start-up the new and rehabilitated facilities in a controlled, systematic order as outlined in this Section.
18 19 20
C. Related Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Section 01 11 00 – Summary of Work 2. Section 01 75 00 - Facility and System Start-up.
21
1.2
GENERAL CONSTRAINTS
22 23 24 25 26
A. Any temporary work, facilities, roads, walks, protection of existing structures, piping, blind flanges, valves, equipment, temporary pumping, line-stopping, temporary generators, temporary power, temporary equipment, temporary lighting, temporary barriers, etc. that may be required within Contractor's Work limits to maintain continuous and dependable plant operation shall be furnished by Contractor at no extra cost to Owner.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B. Contractor shall schedule the Work in such a manner so that the plant is maintained in continuous operation and only shutdown those facilities that are identified to be shutdown. All shutdowns shall be approved by Owner. If, in the opinion of Owner or Engineer, a shutdown is not required for Contractor to perform the Work, Contractor shall use alternate methods to accomplish the Work. All shutdowns shall be coordinated with and scheduled at times suitable to Owner. Unless noted otherwise, Contractor shall provide a minimum of 21 days notice of any system or partial system shutdown.
34 35 36 37 38 39
C. Shutdowns shall not begin until all required materials are on-hand and ready for installation and the written shutdown plan has been approved by the Owner. At a time approved by Owner, the shutdown period will commence and Contractor shall proceed with the Work continuously, start to finish, until the Work is completed and the system is tested and ready for operation. If Contractor completes all required Work before the specified shutdown period has ended, Owner may immediately place the existing system back in service.
40 41 42 43
D. Owner shall have the authority to order the Work to be performed during a scheduled shutdown stopped or prohibit work which would, in his opinion, unreasonably result in stopping the necessary functions of the plant operations. Owner reserves the right to cancel scheduled shutdowns if conditions warrant.
44 45 46 47
E. All operations of existing equipment, valves and gates required for the Work shall be done by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that valves, stop logs, gates, etc., are or will be water or gas tight. Contractor shall provide temporary caps, plugs, dewatering, pumping and other measures required to perform the Work. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS 01 11 10 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
F. Contractor shall pump out areas to which Contractor requires access. Owner will identify pump discharge location. Complete, water-tight areas are not guaranteed and Contractor shall provide necessary measures required to provide an environment suitable for Contractor to perform the Work. Contractor is responsible for cleaning, temporary drain pumps, piping, safety equipment and appurtenances to keep the areas suitable and safe for Contractor’s use. Material (such as solids, grit, etc.) that cannot be removed by pumping shall be removed by the Contractor using other methods, including hand removal. The removed material may be deposited in the appropriate waste container on the plant site. Owner will identify the appropriate container. Contractor is responsible to transport the material to the container. Owner will arrange for container disposal. No construction debris will be allowed to be discharged into Owner’s containers, only the grit and solids from the initial channel dewatering and cleaning will be accepted. Contractor shall provide disposal containers for all other material.
13 14
G. Insofar as possible, all equipment shall be tested and in operating condition before the final tieins are made to connect new equipment or facilities to the existing facility.
15
H. Contractor shall provide temporary lighting if shutdowns occur at night.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
I.
Owner will require continuous access to all plant operational areas. Gates, roads and pathways required for vehicle and personnel access shall be maintained such that they are serviceable. If construction activities require interruption of normal access to any area, Contractor shall provide temporary means for Owner access. Contractor shall coordinate access interruptions with the plant staff and provide at least 14 days notice of such interruptions. If vehicle support will be required in an area that is blocked by construction activity, Contractor shall provide such access to Owner upon request.
23
J.
All exterior temporary electrical feeders shall be mining-grade cable.
24 25
K. All equipment and electrical components shall be rated for the area in which they are being operated. Area hazard classifications are noted on the Drawings.
26
1.3
SUBMITTALS
27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Submit detailed information for each shutdown described herein and all others required to complete the Work. Submittals shall include detailed description of shutdown, shutdown timeline, detailed breakdown of work to be completed prior to and during shutdown, materials required and availability, proposed manpower, proposed method of protecting existing equipment, list of valves, gates and equipment that will require operation by Owner and any other details to adequately describe the proposed shutdown.
33 34
B. Submittal must be approved before shutdown can begin. Submit information at least 21 days prior to start of proposed shutdown.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
1.4
WORK SEQUENCE A. The shutdowns in this Section are a general list of tie-in work which require bypasses, shutdowns and coordination with plant operation. The list does not purport to include all phases, shutdowns or Work necessary and it may be modified to suit existing conditions that are encountered. It shall be used by Contractor as a guide to prepare the Project Schedule and the Shutdown Schedule and Master Shutdown and Start-up Schedule required in Section 01 75 00. Shutdowns are not necessarily listed in the order they must be performed. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling the shutdowns in conjunction with the required construction sequence.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS 01 11 10 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B. General Shutdown Requirements: 1. Two Pre-Shutdown Meetings shall be held prior to any shutdown. The meetings shall be conducted at least one week prior to the schedule shutdown and the day before the shutdown. 2. Shutdown periods are indicated in 24-hour calendar days, months or number of hours. 3. Insofar as possible, all equipment to be incorporated into existing facilities shall be on-site and ready for installation before the existing facilities are shutdown. 4. If the work during the shutdown periods is not done satisfactorily, or as planned, or within the time required or approved by Engineer, Owner may order Contractor to work a 24-hour, 7-day week work schedule with a full crew, or he may order Contractor to place the facility back in service and reschedule the shutdown. In no case shall Owner be required to make additional payment for overtime work or redoing the work caused by Contractor's failure to complete the work in the allotted time. 5. The list of work required to be performed during and prior to the specific shutdown period described in this Section may not be complete, Contractor shall schedule all work required to be completed during a shutdown of a specific facility during the scheduled shutdown period. 6. Sediment control features shall be in place prior to starting any shutdown work. 7. If alternative shutdown procedures or methods to those indicated herein are proposed by Contractor, they shall be submitted for approval. All supporting data, calculations and other information requested by Engineer or Owner shall be provided with the submittal. 8. Contractor shall be responsible for any cleanup resulting from spills. 1.5
TEMPORARY PUMPING
24
A. Temporary pumping to be provided as described in Section 01 11 00.
25
B. All costs for temporary pumping shall be incorporated in the base bid price by the Contractor.
26 27
C. Provide two bypass pumping systems (BYP PUMP 1 and BYP PUMP 2). Duration of both pumping systems will overlap. Both systems must be in operation for a duration of time.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D. Bypass Pumping System 1 (BYP PUMP 1) 1. Bypass Pump System Suction: a. Location: Suction for the pumps shall come from manhole upstream of Manhole 2. 2. Refer to drawings.Bypass Pump System Discharge: a. Location: Discharge from the temporary pumps shall be into the existing headworks inlet box. Secondary location shall be to the new headworks. Valves shall be provided to direct flow to primary or secondary discharge location. Refer to drawings. 3. Temporary Pumping Capacity: 21 mgd. 4. Number of temporary pumps: As required. 5. Redundancy: Provide full pumping capacity with largest temporary pump out of service. Automatically engage standby redundant pump if a duty pump fails. Adequate additional standby equipment shall be available and ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. 6. Duration: As required, minimum of 14 calendar days.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
E. Bypass Pumping System 2 (BYP PUMP 2) 1. Bypass Pump System Suction: a. Location: Suction for the pumps shall come from effluent end of the new Headworks facility. Refer to drawings. 2. Bypass Pump System Discharge: a. Location: Discharge from the temporary pumps shall be into the new influent force main (connect adjacent to the existing influent pump station). Refer to drawings. 3. Temporary Pumping Capacity: 21 mgd. 4. Number of temporary pumps: As required.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS 01 11 10 - 3
1 2 3 4 5
5.
6.
Redundancy: Provide full pumping capacity with largest temporary pump out of service. Automatically engage standby redundant pump if a duty pump fails. Adequate additional standby equipment shall be available and ready for immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. Duration: As required, minimum of 45 calendar days.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F. Normal Operation: 1. The temporary pumping system shall start by a maximum level. 2. Max level switch shall activate both an audible and visual temporary alarm supplied by the Temporary Pumping Provider to alert plant staff. WWTP is not staffed 24/7, therefore means of contacting staff at high level are required. Provide alert to existing autodialer in existing influent pump station. Alternately, provide wireless phone autodialer to alert plant staff. 3. Once the temporary pumping system is started, the pumps shall turn on and off, increase or decrease speed as required to maintain a constant water surface elevation in the suction manhole. 4. Provide a low level switch to turn all pumps off at a low water level.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
G. Submittals: A detailed plan and description outlining the details and provisions for each temporary bypass pumping system required. The plans shall be specific and complete, including such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, materials and other incidental items necessary and/or required to ensure proper operation of the bypass pumping systems, including compliance with permit conditions. No bypass pumping shall begin until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed and approved: 1. As a minimum the temporary pumping plan shall include: a. Staging areas for pumps. b. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of pump suction piping. c. Number, size, materials, method of installation and location of installation of discharge piping. d. Bypass pump sizes, capacity, number of each size to be on site and power requirements. e. Calculations of static lift, friction losses, and flow velocity. f. Size and location of standby power generator, if required. g. Downstream discharge plan. h. Method of protecting suction and discharge structure from damage. i. Thrust and restraint block sizes and locations. j. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring required. k. Schedule for delivery, mobilization, setup, testing and demonstration. 2. Piping plan including proposed pipe sizes, material, and valves. 3. Pump Curves for each type of pump provided. 4. Cut sheet for each type of pump provided including pump dimensions. 5. System curve based on piping plan with pump curves to verify pumping capacity. Include calculations for development of system curve. Provide pump curve showing parallel operation of all duty pumps. 6. Fuel storage or fuel refueling plan to potentially maintain pumping capacity 24 hours per day. 7. List pumping system controls. 8. Provide 24/hr service representatives contact information.
46 47 48
H. Demonstration: Verify the pump capacity of each pump. Owner and/or Engineer shall be notified of the date of demonstration as well as provided an agenda and schedule for the demonstration 7 days in advance.
49 50 51 52
I.
Provide temporary pumping representative to be on call 24 hrs a day while pumps are in operation. Owner shall have the ability to directly call representative if required during an emergency to start the pumps, service, repair or for any other reason. Temporary pumping representative shall be able to get to the plant site within 60 minutes.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS 01 11 10 - 4
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
3 4 5 6 7 8
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Godwin Pumps. 2. Sunbelt Pumps. 3. Rain for Rent.
2.2
MATERIALS
9 10 11 12
A. All bypass pumps used shall be fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of foot-valves or vacuum pumps in the priming system. The pumps shall be diesel powered. All pumps used shall be constructed to allow dry running for extended periods of time to accommodate the cyclical nature of plant flows.
13
B. Provide all necessary instrumentation and controls to operate each pump.
14 15
C. In order to prevent the accidental spillage of flows, all pump discharge systems shall be temporarily constructed of rigid pipe with positive, restrained joints.
16 17
D. The bypass pumping systems shall be designed to operate continuously and shall be staffed by competent personnel at all times the system is operating.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
20 21 22
A. Locate existing utilities in the area selected for the bypass piping. Locate the bypass piping to minimize any disturbance to existing utilities. All costs associated with relocating utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
23 24
B. Protect existing structures and equipment from damage inflicted by any equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for all physical damage to the existing structures and equipment.
25
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATIONS 01 11 10 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Section Includes: 1. The procedure for requesting the approval of substitution of a product that is not equivalent to a product which is specified by descriptive or performance criteria or defined by reference to one or more of the following: a. Name of manufacturer. b. Name of vendor. c. Trade name. d. Catalog number. 2. Substitutions are not "or-equals." 3. This Specification Section does not address substitutions for major equipment.
15 16 17
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
C. Request for Substitution - General: 1. Base all bids on materials, equipment, and procedures specified. 2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. a. When this method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from consideration other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are "or-equals," as determined by Engineer. 3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable substitutions under the following conditions: a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products meeting specified requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor; or, b. Contractor proposes a cost and/or time reduction incentive to the Owner.
30
1.2
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, Contractor represents they: 1. Have investigated proposed product, and have determined that it is adequate or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 2. Will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified. 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently arise. 1.3
40 41
QUALITY ASSURANCE
DEFINITIONS A. Product: Manufactured material or equipment.
1.4
PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION
42 43 44
A. Substitution shall be considered only: 1. After Award of Contract. 2. Under the conditions stated herein.
45
B. Written request through Contractor only.
46
C. Transmittal Mechanics: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 13 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Follow the transmittal mechanics prescribed for Shop Drawings in Specification Section 01 33 00. a. Product substitution will be treated in a manner similar to "deviations," as described in Specification Section 01 33 00. b. List the letter describing the deviation and justifications on the transmittal form in the space provided under the column with the heading DESCRIPTION. 1) Include in the transmittal letter, either directly or as a clearly marked attachment, the items listed in Paragraph D below.
D. Transmittal Contents: 1. Product identification: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Telephone number and representative contact name. c. Specification Section or Drawing reference of originally specified product, including discrete name or tag number assigned to original product in the Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed product with Contract Documents. 3. Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product characteristics including but not necessarily limited to: a. Size. b. Composition or materials of construction. c. Weight. d. Electrical or mechanical requirements. 4. Product experience: a. Location of past projects utilizing product. b. Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product. c. Available field data and reports associated with proposed product. 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 6. Data relating to changes in cost. 7. Samples: a. At request of Engineer. b. Full size if requested by Engineer. c. Held until substantial completion. d. Engineer not responsible for loss or damage to samples. 1.5
APPROVAL OR REJECTION
36
A. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the Engineer.
37 38
B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern of specified product if necessary to secure design intent.
39 40
C. In the event the substitution is approved, the resulting cost and/or time reduction will be documented by Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions.
41 42 43 44 45 46
D. Substitution will be rejected if: 1. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval. 2. Request is not made in accordance with this Specification Section. 3. In the Engineer's opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the original design. 4. In the Engineer's opinion, substitution will not perform adequately the function consistent with the design intent.
47 48
E. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the cost of Engineer's evaluation whether or not substitution is approved.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 13 - 2
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
2
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
4
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 13 - 3
EXHIBIT A
Substitution Request Form (One Item per each Form)
Project:
Date:
Substitution Requestor: Contractor: Specification Section No:
Paragraph No. (i.e. 2.1.A.1.c):
Specified Item:
Proposed Substitution: Provide Product Data Sheets, Manufacturer’s written installation instructions, drawings, diagrams, or any other information as an attached to this Form that will demonstrate the proposed substitution is an Approved Equal. In the lines provided state differences between proposed substitutions and specified item. Differences include but are not limited to interrelationship with other items; materials, equipment, function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finished, appearances, and quality.
____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ In the lines provided demonstrate how the proposed substitution is compatible with or modifies other systems, parts, equipment or components of the Project and Work under the Contract : ____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ In the lines provided, describe what effect the proposed substitution has on dimensions indicated on the Drawings and previously reviewed Shop Drawings?
____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ In the lines provided, describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Construction Schedule and Contract Time.
____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ In the lines provided, describe what effect the proposed substitution has on the Contract Price. This includes all direct, indirect, impact and delay costs.
____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer’s guarantees of the proposed and specified items are:
☐
☐
Same
Different (explain on attachment)
The undersigned state that the function, utility, life cycle costs, applied finishes, appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equal or superior to those of the specified item.
For use by Project Representative:
______________________________________________ ☐ ☐
Accepted Not Accepted
☐ ☐
Accepted as Noted Received Too Late
(Contractor’s Signature)
______________________________________________ (Contractor’s Firm)
__________________ (Date)
__________________
______________________________________________ (Firms Address)
______________________________________________
(Telephone) Comments:
Copyright 2014 HDR Engineering, Inc.
1 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01 25 13 - EXHIBIT A - 4
SECTION 01 30 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for: a. Preconstruction Conference. b. Project signs. c. Contractor's Superintendent's Field Office. d. Engineer's Field Office. e. Drawings and Contract Documents for Contractor use. f. Project photographs. g. Testing and Special Inspections. h. Schedule of Values. i. Project meetings. j. Special considerations related to adjacent properties and facilities. k. Historical and archaeological finds. l. Administrative procedures.
19 20 21
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
22
1.2
23 24 25 26 27 28
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2012Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. 1.3
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A preconstruction conference shall be held at the First Broad River WWTP after award of Contract. 1. Engineer will notify the Contractor as to the date and time of the conference two (2) weeks in advance of the proposed date. 2. Contractor's Project Manager and Project Superintendent and Contractor's Subcontractor Representatives shall attend.
1.4
PROJECT SIGNS
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. Engineer's Sign: 1. Furnish and install 4 FT x 8 FT plywood backboard with support legs and bracing. 2. Submit sign for approval by Engineer 3. Sign Contents shall include but not limited to: a. Project Name. b. Owner Name. c. Contractor Name. d. Engineer Name. e. Project Dates. f. Funding sources.
46
B. Coordinate sign locations with Owner.
47
C. Signs not listed in this Specification Section permitted only upon approval of Owner. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 1
1
1.5
CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENT'S FIELD OFFICE
2
A. Establish at site of Project.
3
B. Equipment: Telephone, telecopy, mailing address, and sanitary facilities.
4
C. Ensure attendance at this office during the normal working day.
5 6 7
D. At this office, maintain complete field file of Shop Drawings, posted Contract Drawings and Specifications, and other files of field operations including provisions for maintaining "As Recorded Drawings."
8
E. Remove field office from site upon acceptance of the entire work by the Owner.
9
1.6
ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE
10
A. Separate from Contractor's field office.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. General Construction: 1. New or reconditioned mobile office trailer as manufactured by Acton or equal. 2. Baked enamel aluminum siding. 3. 3-1/2 IN foil-backed fiberglass insulation throughout. 4. Interior paneling. 5. Vinyl tile flooring. 6. 8 FT high acoustic tile ceiling. 7. Two (2) private office areas, one (1) at each end of trailer, one (1) reception-conference room area, and private washroom. 8. Windows: a. Minimum two (2) per room, excepting washroom, with one (1) each on opposing walls. b. Combination screen-storm windows. c. Provide horizontal louver blinds on each window. 9. Nominal 60 FT long and 14 FT wide. 10. Two (2) exterior doors (with cylinder deadbolt locks) with outer screens, exterior lights and exterior stairs and railings. 11. A sketch of interior configuration with up to four (4) doors will be provided by the Engineer. 12. Trailers, once sited, must be securely tied down and grounded.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
C. Electrical System: 1. All fixtures, outlets, and wiring of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) approved devices. 2. All circuits protected by circuit breakers; fuses are not acceptable. 3. Electrical system shall meet requirements of the latest National Electric Code (NEC). 4. System suitable for 220 V, 3 PH service. 5. Any transformers or other devices required to match this supply to the mobile office shall be provided and connected. 6. Provide a circuit breaker for the incoming service. 7. Each interior room except the washroom shall have at least four (4) 110 V duplex electrical convenience outlets.
40 41 42 43 44 45
D. Central Combination Electric Heating, Air-Conditioning System: 1. Fan-forced air. 2. Thermostatically controlled. 3. Individual room units are not acceptable. 4. Freeze protect and insulate all piping. 5. System sized to maintain 75 DegF constant temperature in each room.
46 47 48
E. Lighting System: 1. Fluorescent type producing 100 footcandles at desk top height. 2. Ample ceiling fixtures provided to ensure adequate lighting throughout.
49
F. Standard Washroom: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Flush toilet, sink, hot and cold running water. Electric water heater. Mirror. Electric ceiling or wall vent. Sound insulated partitions.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
G. Furnishings: 1. Full width built-in desk at ends of both end offices, with a nominal depth of 30 IN and overhead book shelves 12 IN deep. 2. One (1) desk 36 x 72 IN long with locking lap drawer. 3. One (1) plan table 39 x 72 x 36 IN wide, with one (1) locking equipment drawer. 4. One (1) plan table 39 x 84 IN x 36 FT wide, with one (1) locking equipment drawer. 5. One (1) L-shaped secretary desk with main desk 36 x 72 x 36 IN high with locking lap drawer, side drawer, and hanging file drawer. a. The desk shall have a typewriter leaf with a typing paper filing cabinet. 6. Three (3) 30 x 72 IN folding tables. 7. One (1) built-in work and computer table in office. 8. One (1) 48 x 60 IN liquid marking board with minimum four-color set of compatible markers. 9. One (1) 48 x 60 cork bulletin board. 10. One (1) four-drawer legal size filing cabinets. 11. Two (2) cushioned swivel arm chairs. 12. 13. Twelve (12) folding chairs. 14. Two (2) nominal 3 FT plan racks that hold a 30 IN minimum of six (6), 200 sheet sets of 30 x 42 IN Drawings. 15. Three (3) sets of bookcases, each composed of three (3) shelves 36 IN long and 12 IN wide. a. The units shall be a minimum of 3 FT high. 16. Three (3) standard size waste paper baskets. 17. One (1) Emerson Model OR300A, 2.7 CF refrigerator.
30 31 32 33
H. Communications: 1. Provide telephone service including two sets. 2. Provide high-speed internet service with wireless modem. 3. Provide conference call phone.
34 35 36
I.
Field Office Equipment: 1. One (1) all-in-one printer-copier-scanner. 2. General office supplies as agreed upon by Engineer.
37 38 39 40 41 42
J.
Safety Equipment. 1. One (1) 10 LB ABC dry powder fire extinguisher, upright and fully charged, in an easily accessible location. 2. One (1) OSHA, “Employee Right to Know” Poster, prominently displayed. 3. One (1) first aid kit. 4. One (1) weather radio.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
K. Maintenance: 1. Contractor shall provide all maintenance and upkeep of trailer and equipment. a. Equipment breakdowns shall be repaired promptly by Contractor. 2. Janitorial service. a. Weekly: 1) Floor sweeping using dust suppressing compound. 2) Wet mopping with floor detergent. b. Inclement weather: Conduct weekly requirements on daily basis. c. Monthly: Wash windows and clean window blinds. 3. Pay all utilities costs. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 3
1 2
4.
3 4
Maintain at least until acceptance of the entire work by the Owner or until otherwise suspended by the Engineer.
L. Remove field office from site upon acceptance of the entire work by the Owner. 1.7
DRAWINGS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR USE
5
A. Refer to General Conditions.
6 7
B. Contractor shall pick up all "no-charge" documents within 10 days from date of Notice to Proceed.
8
C. Additional documents after "no-charge" documents will be furnished to Contractor at cost.
9
1.8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS A. At least once each month during construction of the Work, provide progress pictures as directed by Engineer. 1. Pictures shall be digital and provided on disk with thumbnail index. 2. Provide number of photographs as follows: a. Twenty-four (24) ground level color photos per month. b. Three (3) color aerial photos taken at each of the following: 1) At 0 percent complete. 2) At six (6) month intervals after initial set. 3) At 100 percent complete. 3. Contractor shall schedule and coordinate photographer with Engineer's Field Representative. 4. Photographically impose a site plan key map on each photograph in the upper right hand corner and show by arrow the subject and the direction from which the photograph was taken. a. Date all photographs.
1.9
PROJECT MEETINGS
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
A. Construction Meetings: 1. The Engineer will conduct construction meetings involving: a. Contractor's project manager. b. Contractor's project superintendent. c. Owner's designated representative(s). d. Engineer's designated representative(s). e. Contractor's subcontractors as appropriate to the Work in progress. f. Owner's Construction Quality Control Consultant. 2. Meetings will be conducted every two (2) weeks. 3. The Engineer will take meeting minutes and submit copies of meeting minutes to participants and designated recipients identified at the Preconstruction Conference. a. Corrections, additions or deletions to the minutes shall be noted and addressed at the following meeting. 4. The Engineer will schedule meetings for most convenient time frame. 5. The Engineer will have available at each meeting full chronological files of all previous meeting minutes. 6. The Contractor shall have available at each meeting up-to-date record drawings.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
B. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Coordinate and schedule with Resident Project Representative and Engineer for each material, product or system specified. a. Conferences to be held prior to initiating installation, but not more than two (2) weeks before scheduled initiation of installation. b. Conferences may be combined if installation schedule of multiple components occurs within the same two (2) week interval. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
c. 2.
Review manufacturers recommendations and Contract Documents Specification Sections. Contractor's Superintendent and individual who will actually act as foreman of the installation crew (installer), if other than the Superintendent, shall attend.
1.10 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS RELATED TO ADJACENT PROPERTIES AND FACILITIES A. Contractor shall be responsible for negotiations of any waivers or alternate arrangements required to enable transportation of materials to the site. B. Access, Traffic Control, and Parking: 1. Maintain conditions of access road to site such that access is not hindered as the result of construction related deterioration. 2. Do not permit driving across or transporting materials or equipment across areas outside the construction limits shown on the Drawings. 3. Provide traffic control devices and personnel necessary to ensure a safe interface of construction traffic with business traffic to and from adjacent sites. 4. Provide access routes for emergency vehicles at all times. 5. Provide daily sweeping of hard-surface roadways to remove soils tracked onto roadway. 6. Provide on site parking for all staff to limit interference with adjacent properties and businesses. 1.11 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL A. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archeological interest is found, the Contractor shall cease operations affecting the find and shall notify Owner. 1. No further disturbance of the deposits shall ensue until the Contractor has been notified by Owner that Contractor may proceed. 2. Owner will issue a notice to proceed after appropriate authorities have surveyed the find and made a determination to Owner. 3. Compensation to the Contractor, if any, for lost time or changes in construction resulting from the find, shall be determined in accordance with changed or extra work provisions of the Contract Documents. 4. The site has been previously investigated and has no known history of historical or archaeological finds. 1.12 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. Unless otherwise specified, or agreed to in the Pre-Construction Conference, use the following EJCDC standard forms for Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Field Orders: 1. C-940 Work Change Directive 2013. 2. C-941 Change Order 2013. 3. C-942 Field Order 2013.
38
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
39
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
40
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 5
1
ATTACH EXHIBIT A (IF USED) - SEE THE PROJECT SIGNS ARTICLE
2
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 30 00 - 6
SECTION 01 32 17 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Specific requirements for the preparation, submittal, updating, and status reporting of the construction Progress Schedule.
8 9 10
B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Review of the CPM Schedule: 1. In so far as the Contractor is solely responsible for its means and methods and the CPM schedule represents in part its means and methods, the review of the CPM schedules (preliminary, baseline, updates, revisions, etc.) is for compliance with the requirements as defined in the contract documents. 2. The review of the CPM schedule is not intended to be complete or exhaustive or check every activity and its relation to the work. 3. The Engineer will provide comments on the CPM schedule compliance with those contract requirements and anomalies that might appear to the Engineer. 4. If the Contractor fails to include contract requirements (e.g. specified cure times, commissioning periods) in the CPM schedule, or the Engineer fails to notify the Contractor of anomalies the Contractor is not relieved of the contract requirements. 5. Acceptance of the CPM schedule does not imply that the Owner has approved or accepted the Contractor’s means and methods or sequence for performing the work to construct the project. 6. If the Contractor has questions or concerns about comments, the Contractor and Engineer shall meet to resolve those issues prior to issuance of future updates or revisions.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1.2
DEFINITIONS A. The following definitions shall apply to this Specification Section: 1. EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT: The date the contract is signed by the last party, either the Owner or the Contractor. 2. WORKING DAYS: Monday through Friday except holidays as directed by the Owner. 3. PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE: A schedule showing detailed activity for the first 90 days of the Project, and a general work plan for construction activity from the 91st day until the Contractual Completion Date. 4. BASELINE SCHEDULE: The initial detailed Progress Schedule prepared by the Contractor defining its plan for constructing the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. SCHEDULE UPDATE: The initially accepted Baseline Schedule, or subsequently approved Revised Baseline Schedules, updated each month to reflect actual start and finish dates of each schedule activity and the remaining duration of activities that began during the period. 6. CURRENT SCHEDULE: The current schedule is either the Baseline Schedule or Revised Baseline Schedule including and incorporating Schedule Updates. 7. REVISED BASELINE SCHEDULE: The initially accepted Baseline Schedule revised to reflect approved contract change orders and modifications. 8. RECOVERY SCHEDULE: a. A schedule indicating the Contractor’s plan for recovering lost time.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 17 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
b. 9.
1.3
A recovery schedule will be requested when the Contractor is forecasting at least 10 working days or more delays in meeting a contract milestone or the contract completion date. SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE: a. Schedule prepared by the Contractor reflecting the work planned for the coming weeks. b. This is also known as a Look-Ahead Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
A. Preliminary Schedule: 1. Submittal and review: a. Submit within 10 days after Execution of the Contract or the effective date of the contract, whichever is earlier. b. The Engineer will review and provide comments to the Contractor within ten (10) working days after receipt of the schedule. c. The Contractor will review and modify the preliminary schedule and return the schedule within five (5) working days. If there are concerns about the comments provided, the Engineer and Contractor will meet to review and resolve those concerns. 2. Submittal package: a. Provide a detailed plan for the first ninety (90) days of the project and summary activities of the work to achieve the project milestones. b. CPM time-scaled network diagram: 1) A printed logic diagram and PDF that include the following information: a) Unique activity number/identifier; numeric, alpha or combination of numeric/alpha. b) Activity description. c) Activity duration. d) Early start and early finish for each activity. e) Late start and late finish for each activity. f) Total float (TF) for each activity. g) Predecessor activities. h) Successor activities. i) Bar showing the early start and completion dates of each activity. 2) The activities will be sorted by area, trades, and subcontractors as agreed on with the Engineer. 3) Print the CPM time-scaled network diagram on minimum sheet size of 11 IN x 17 IN.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B. Baseline Schedule: 1. Submittal and review: a. Submit within 30 days after Execution of the Contract or the effective date of the contract, whichever is earlier. b. The Engineer shall review the baseline schedule and provide comments to the Contractor within twenty (20) working days after receipt of the schedule. c. After receiving comments, the Contractor and Engineer shall meet to review the comments within five (5) working days. d. After the meeting, the Contractor will modify the schedule as agreed and resubmit the baseline schedule within 5 working days. e. After the Engineer confirms that the Contractor has made the changes as agreed, the schedule will become the baseline schedule. 2. Submittal package: a. CPM time-scaled network diagram: 1) A printed logic diagram and PDF that include the following information: a) Unique activity number/identifier; numeric, alpha or combination of numeric/alpha. b) Activity description. c) Activity duration. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 17 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
d) Early start and early finish for each activity. e) Late start and late finish for each activity. f) Total float (TF) for each activity. g) Predecessor activities. h) Successor activities. i) Cost/budget to complete the work in the activity. j) Resources needed to complete the activity. k) Bar showing the early start and completion dates of each activity. 2) The activities will be sorted by area, trades, and subcontractors as agreed on with the Engineer. 3) Print the CPM time-scaled network diagram on minimum sheet size of 11 IN x 17 IN.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C. Schedule Updates: 1. Submittal and Review: a. The Contractor shall provide a Schedule Update on the 4th of each month after the Baseline Schedule is completed. b. The Engineer shall provide comments to the Contractor on the Schedule Update. c. The Contractor shall incorporate the Engineer comments into the next Schedule Update. 2. CPM time-scaled network diagram as described for the Baseline Schedule: a. Do not change the description of an activity number. 1) Any activity added to the schedule shall have a new unique activity number and description. 2) If activities are deleted, the deleted activity number(s) will not be used again.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D. Recovery Schedule: 1. When the activities on the critical path or the completion milestones appear to be fifteen (15) working days beyond the contract time, the Engineer may request and the Contractor shall provide a Recovery Schedule demonstrating how the Contractor will recover the lost time so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Provide the Recovery schedule within ten (10) working days after requested by the Engineer. 3. Activities will be added or the durations modified to reflect the changes to the work. 4. The Engineer will review and provide comments to the Contractor on the Recovery Schedule within five (5) working days. 5. Incorporate the Engineer comments into the Recovery Schedule. 6. After acceptance by the Engineer, the Recovery Schedule use for future Schedule Updates. 7. CPM time-scaled network diagram as described for the Baseline Schedule: a. Do not change the description of an activity number. 1) Any activity added to the schedule shall have a new activity number and description. 2) If activities are deleted, the deleted activity number(s) will not be used again. 8. Provide a narrative with an explanation of the changes in logic and/or activity durations.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E. Short Interval Schedule: 1. Provide a four-week schedule each week during the Contract Time. This schedule can be reviewed at each progress meeting. a. Provide an accurate representation of the work performed the previous week and work planned for the current week and subsequent three (3) weeks. 2. Provide in a tabular format with bars or other graphic representing work duration. a. Reference activity ID numbers on the Baseline, Revised Baseline, or Updated Schedule, which ever is being currently used. b. Note by color, highlight or underscore all activities on the critical path. 3. Identify inspection hold points including special inspections needed before the Contractor can move forward with the work. 4. Identify the day materials provided by the Owner or others needed on site. 5. Identify utility tie-ins and traffic changes including road and/or lane closures. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 17 - 3
1
1.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
A. Prepare and submit construction progress schedules as specified herein. 1. Develop and maintain Baseline, Updates and Recovery schedules using Microsoft Project or equal as approved by the Engineer. 2. Include the following information: a. Construction start dates (Award date, Notice(s) to Proceed date). b. Procurement activities. c. Preparation of key submittals for materials and equipment. d. Engineers review and approval of key submittals. e. Material and equipment fabrication lead times. f. Material and equipment deliveries for Contractor, Owner and third parties. g. Water curing of concrete after placement for all structures. h. Shutdowns. i. Utility tie-ins. j. Plant tie-ins. k. Traffic changes and closures. l. Inspections and hold points. m. Start up of equipment. n. Testing of equipment and systems. o. Training p. Commissioning. q. Contract milestones: 1) Intermediate milestones. 2) Substantial Completion Date. 3) Physical Completion Date. 3. The following CPM schedule outputs will be rejected without further review: a. Schedules indicating the start of the critical path at a date point or activity beyond the date of Notice to Proceed, or schedules indicating a discontinuous critical path from Notice to Proceed to Contract completion. b. Schedules defining critical activities as those on a path or paths having some minimum value of float. c. Schedules with multiple critical paths. d. Schedules indicating a completion date beyond the contractual completion date.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B. The number of activities shall be sufficient to assure adequate planning of the project, to permit monitoring and evaluation of progress, and to do an analysis of time impacts. 1. Work activities shall not exceed durations of 10 days or 2 weeks. a. Procurement and fabrication activity durations may exceed 10 days or 2 weeks. 2. Schedule activities shall include the following: a. A clear and legible description. b. At least one (1) predecessor and one (1) successor activity, except for project start and finish milestones.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
C. Early Completion Schedule: 1. Contractor may show early completion time on any schedule provided that the requirements of the contract are met. 2. Contractor may increase early completion time by improving production, reallocating resources to be more efficient, performing sequential activities concurrently or by completing activities earlier than planned. 3. Any time between the Contractor’s early completion and the Contract Time will be considered float.
50
D. Plan working durations to incorporate the effects of normal weather impacts.
51 52 53
E. Float: 1. The project owns the float, therefore neither the Owner nor the Contractor has exclusive use of the float; the float can used by either party. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 17 - 4
1 2
2.
Once float is used, liability for delay of the project completion date rests with the party actually causing delay to the project completion date.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
6
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 17 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanics and administration of the electronic submittal process for: a. Shop Drawings. b. Samples. c. Miscellaneous submittals. d. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 2. General content requirements for Shop Drawings. 3. Content requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Engineer will provide a Project File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site for the processing of electronic submittals
15 16 17 18
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Sections in Divisions 2 through 16 identifying required submittals.
19
1.2
DEFINITIONS
20 21 22
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions. 2. Product data and samples are Shop Drawing information.
23 24 25 26 27
B. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: 1. Contain the information required for proper installation and maintenance of building materials and finishes. 2. Contain the technical information required for proper installation, operation and maintenance of process, electrical and mechanical equipment and systems.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Submittals other than Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals. 2. Representative types of miscellaneous submittal items include but are not limited to: a. Construction schedule. b. Concrete, soil compaction, and pressure test reports. c. HVAC test and balance reports. d. Installed equipment and systems performance test reports. e. Manufacturer's installation certification letters. f. Instrumentation and control commissioning reports. g. Warranties. h. Service agreements. i. Construction photographs. j. Survey data. k. Cost breakdown (Schedule of Values). l. Leakage testing results. m. Pipe testing results.
44 45 46 47 48
1.3
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Schedule of Shop Drawings: 1. Submitted and approved within 20 days of receipt of Notice to Proceed. 2. Account for multiple transmittals under any specification section where partial submittals will be transmitted.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 1
1
B. Shop Drawings: Submittal and approval prior to 30 percent completion of project.
2 3
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Completed Equipment Record Sheets: Initial submittal within 30 days after date Shop Drawings are approved.
4
1.4
PREPARATION OF ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS
5 6 7 8 9 10
A. General: 1. All submittals and all pages of all copies of a submittal shall be completely legible. 2. Submittals which, in the Engineer’s sole opinion, are illegible will be returned without review. 3. Extraneous information for equipment and products not relevant to the submittal should be minimized.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Scope of any submittal and letter of transmittal: a. Limited to one (1) Specification Section. b. Do not submit under any Specification Section entitled (in part) "Basic Requirements" unless the product or material submitted is specified, in total, in a “Basic Requirements” Section. 2. Numbering letter of transmittal: a. Include as prefix the Specification Section number followed by a series number, "-xx", beginning with "01" and increasing sequentially with each additional transmittal. b. If more than one (1) submittal under any Specification Section, assign consecutive series numbers to subsequent transmittal letters. 3. Describing transmittal contents: a. Provide listing of each component or item in submittal capable of receiving an independent review action. b. Identify for each item: 1) Manufacturer and Manufacturer's Drawing or data number. 2) Contract Document tag number(s). 3) Unique page numbers for each page of each separate item. c. When submitting "or-equal" items that are not the products of named manufacturers, include the words "or-equal" in the item description. 4. Contractor stamping: a. General: 1) Contractor's review and approval stamp shall be applied either to the letter of transmittal or a separate sheet preceding each independent item in the submittal. a) Contractor's signature and date shall be electronic signature. b) Shop Drawing submittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval as stipulated under General Conditions Paragraph 6.17D." c) Letters of transmittal may be stamped only when the scope of the submittal is one (1) item. d) Provide AIS Stamp which shall read: (Contractor’s Name) has reviewed the applicability of the AIS to the products listed in this submittal and: (check one below) This product is required to meet the AIS. If so, check one of the following two statements. __ This product meets AIS guidelines. __ This product does not meet AIS guidelines but we have submitted an exemption which is included in this submittal package. 2) Submittals containing multiple independent items shall be prepared with an index sheet for each item listing the discrete page numbers for each page of that item, which shall be stamped with the Contractor's review and approval stamp.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
a)
Individual pages or sheets of independent items shall be numbered in a manner that permits Contractor's review and approval stamp to be associated with the entire contents of a particular item. 5. Resubmittals: a. Number with original root number and a suffix letter starting with "A" on a (new) duplicate transmittal form. b. Do not increase the scope of any prior transmittal. c. Account for all components of prior transmittal. 1) If items in prior transmittal received "A" or "B" Action code, list them and indicate "A" or "B" as appropriate. a) Do not include submittal information for items listed with prior "A" or "B" Action in resubmittal. 2) Indicate "Outstanding-To Be Resubmitted At a Later Date" for any prior "C" or "D" Action item not included in resubmittal. a) Obtain Engineer's approval to exclude items. d. Provide a written response to each review comment. In the response for each comment, provide the specific page numbers of the resubmittal that are applicable to that comment and response. e. For each resubmittal, include all prior comments and responses. 6. For 8-1/2 x 11 IN, 8-1/2 x 14 IN, and 11 x 17 IN size sheets, provide one (1) electronic copy of each page for the Engineer’s review.. a. All other size sheets: 1) Submit one (1) electronic print of each Drawing until approval is obtained. 2) Utilize project ftp site for submittal to Engineer 3) The Engineer will mark and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his reproduction and distribution. 7. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component defined in PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS – Contractor Stamping. 8. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals. a. Duplicate all marks on all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are photocopy reproducible. b. Outline Contractor marks on reproducible transparencies with a rectangular box. 9. Transmittal contents: a. Coordinate and identify Shop Drawing contents so that all items can be easily verified by the Engineer. b. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, Drawing detail reference, weight, and other Project specific information. c. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and technical data to allow an evaluation to be made to determine that the item submitted is in compliance with the Contract Documents. d. Submit items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, product data sheets or catalog sheets on 8-1/2 x 11 IN pages. 1) Indicate exact item or model and all options proposed by arrow and leader. e. When a Shop Drawing submittal is called for in any Specification Section, include as appropriate, scaled details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, test data, anchoring details, installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color charts, layout Drawings, rough-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data in addition to information specifically stipulated in the Specification Section. 1) Arrange data and performance information in format similar to that provided in Contract Documents. 2) Provide, at minimum, the detail specified in the Contract Documents. f. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Contract Drawings or Specifications in any way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said deviation in detail in a separate letter immediately following transmittal sheet. 10. Samples: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
a.
b. c. d. e.
Identification: 1) Identify sample as to transmittal number, manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, tag number, standard Specification Section or Drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data. 2) If identifying information cannot be marked directly on sample without defacing or adversely altering samples, provide a durable tag with identifying information securely attached to the sample. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples or transmittal form as indication of Contractor's checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with interrelated work. Resubmit samples of rejected items. Submit a minimum of three Samples and Color Charts as original hard copies with associated submittal transmittal sheet. Additionally, submit an electronic copy of the transmittal sheet for logging purposes
16 17 18
C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Prepare in the format and detail specified in Specification requiring the miscellaneous submittal.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D. Electronic Submittals: 1. Electronic copy submittals: a. Electronic copies submittals are to be produced in Adobe Acrobat's Portable Document Format (PDF) Version 6.0 or higher. b. Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document. c. Create one (1) PDF document (PDF file) for each submittal d. Drawings or other graphics must be converted to PDF format and made part of the one (1) PDF document. 1) Scanning to be used only where actual file conversion is not possible. e. Rotate pages that must be viewed in landscape to the appropriate position for easy reading. f. Images only shall be scanned at a resolution of 300 dpi or greater. g. File naming conventions: 1) File names shall use a "ten dot three" convention (XXXXX-YY-Z.PDF) where XXXXX is the Specification Section number, YY is the Shop Drawing Root number and Z is an ID number used to designate the associated volume. a) Example 1: (1) Two (2) pumps submitted as separate Shop Drawings under the same Specification Section: (a) Pump 1 = 11061-01-pdf. (b) Pump 2 = 11061-02-.pdf. b) Example 2: (1) Control system submitted as one (1) Shop Drawing but separated into two (2) volumes: (a) Volume 1 = 13440-01-.pdf. (b) Volume 2 = 13440-01-.pdf. h. Labeling: 1) As a minimum, include the following labeling on all CD-ROM discs and jewel cases: a) Project Name. b) Equipment Name and Project Tag Number. c) Project Specification Section. d) Manufacturer Name. e) Vendor Name. i. Binding: 1) Include labeled CD(s) in sleeves. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Owner's use of manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance materials: a. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance materials are provide for Owner's use, reproduction and distribution within Owner's organization. b. Manufacturer's standard copyright notices applied to either hard copy materials or electronic media shall have no affect in limiting the Owner's use of materials furnished under this Contract. 2. Number each Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal with the original root number of the associated Shop Drawing. a. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter starting with "A." 3. Submittal format: a. Interim submittals: Submit one (1) electronic copy via ftp site or Compact –Disc (CDROM) in Portable Document Format (PDF) until manual is approved. b. Final submittals: 1) Within 30 days of receipt of approval, submit two (2) electronic copies on CDROM in PDF. a) Compact discs to be secured in jewel cases. 2) Electronic copies will be reviewed for conformance with the approved electronic copy (PDF) requirements of this Specification. 3) Non-conforming CDs will be returned with comments. a) Provide final CDs within 30 days of receipt of comments. 4. Electronic preliminary submittals: a. Submit Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manuals electronically to provide printing on 8-1/2 x 11 IN size paper . 1) Provide a Cover Page for each manual with the following information: a) Manufacturer(s). b) Date. c) Project Owner and Project Name. d) Specification Section. e) Project Equipment Tag Numbers. f) Model Numbers. g) Engineer. h) Contractor. 2) Provide a Table of Contents or Index for each manual. b. Reduce Drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 x 11 IN or 11 x 17 IN size. c. Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts and data applicable to the installation for the Project. 1) Delete or cross out information that does not specifically apply to the Project. 5. Electronic Operations and Maintenance Manuals copy submittals: a. Electronic copies of the approved electronic preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manuals are to be produced in Adobe Acrobat's Portable Document Format (PDF) Version 6.0 or higher. b. Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document. c. Create one (1) PDF document (PDF file) for each equipment O&M Manual. d. Create one (1) PDF document for the entire manual. e. Drawings or other graphics must be converted to PDF format and made part of the one (1) PDF document. 1) Scanning to be used only where actual file conversion is not possible. f. Rotate pages that must be viewed in landscape to the appropriate position for easy reading. g. Images only shall be scanned at a resolution of 300 dpi or greater. 1) Perform Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture on all images. 2) Achieve OCR with the "original image with hidden text" option. 3) Word searches of the PDF document must operate successfully to demonstrate OCR compliance. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
h.
6.
7.
Create bookmarks in the navigation frame, for each entry in the Table of Contents/Index. 1) Normally three (3) levels deep (i.e., "Chapter," "Section," "Sub-section"). i. Thumbnails must be generated for each PDF file. j. Set the opening view for PDF files as follows: 1) Initial view: Bookmarks and Page. 2) Magnification: Fit in Window. 3) Page layout: Single page. 4) Set the file to open to the cover page of the manual with bookmarks to the left, and the first bookmark linked to the cover page. k. All PDF documents shall be set with the option "Fast Web View" to open the first pages of the document for the viewer while the rest of the document continues to load. l. File naming conventions: 1) File names shall use a "ten dot three" convention (XXXXX-YY-Z.PDF) where XXXXX is the Specification Section number, YY is the Shop Drawing Root number and Z is an ID number used to designate the associated volume. a) Example 1: (1) Two (2) pumps submitted as separate Shop Drawings under the same Specification Section: (a) Pump 1 = 11061-01-1.pdf. (b) Pump 2 = 11061-02-1.pdf. b) Example 2: (1) Control system submitted as one (1) Shop Drawing but separated into two (2) O&M volumes: (a) Volume 1 = 13440-01-1.pdf. (b) Volume 2 = 13440-01-2.pdf. m. Labeling: 1) As a minimum, include the following labeling on all CD-ROM discs and jewel cases: a) Project Name. b) Equipment Name and Project Tag Number. c) Project Specification Section. d) Manufacturer Name. e) Vendor Name. n. Binding: 1) Include labeled CD(s) in labeled jewel case(s). a) Bind jewel cases in standard three-ring binder Jewel Case Page(s), inserted at the front of the Final paper copy submittal. b) Jewel Case Page(s) to have means for securing Jewel Case(s) to prevent loss (e.g., flap and strap). Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Materials and Finishes: a. Building Products, Applied Materials and Finishes: 1) Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition and color and texture designations. 2) Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. b. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: 1) Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. c. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: 1) Include product data listing, applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. 2) Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance and repair. d. Additional requirements as specified in individual product specifications. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Equipment and Systems:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
a.
b.
1.5
Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and systems is applicable but not necessarily limited to: 1) Major equipment. 2) Equipment powered by electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic systems. 3) Specialized equipment and systems including instrumentation and control systems and system components for HVAC process system control. 4) Valves and water control gates. Equipment and Systems Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following completed forms and detailed information, as applicable: 1) Fully completed type-written copies of the associated Equipment Record(s), Exhibits C1, C2 and C3, shall be included under the first tab following the Table of Contents of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. a) Each section of the Equipment Record must be completed in detail. (1) Simply referencing the related manual for nameplate, maintenance, spare parts or lubricant information is not acceptable. b) For equipment items involving components or subunits, a fully completed Equipment Record Form is required for each operating component or subunit. c) Submittals that do not include the associated Equipment Record(s) will be rejected without further content review. d) Electronic copies of the Exhibits may be obtained by contacting the Project Manager. 2) Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations. 3) Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 4) Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 5) Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 6) Troubleshooting guide. 7) Parts lists: a) Comprehensive parts and parts price lists. b) A list of recommended spare parts. c) List of spare parts provided as specified in the associated Specification Section. 8) Outline, cross-section, and assembly Drawings; engineering data; and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams. 9) Test data and performance curves. 10) As-constructed fabrication or layout Drawings and wiring diagrams. 11) Instrumentation or tag numbers assigned to the equipment by the Contract Documents are to be used to identify equipment and system components. 12) Additional information as specified in the associated equipment or system Specification Section.
TRANSMITTAL OF SUBMITTALS
45 46
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 7
1
A. Submittal Flow Chart:
2 3
Contractor Electronic Submittal Preparation: Submit “To HDR” and Receive submittals “From HDR” on ftp site
Hard copies of samples and color charts mailed to Contract Administrators
Email notification of sending and receiving of submittals to Contract Administrators
HDR Sharepoint Site To: HDR- from Contractor From: HDR-to Contractor
Owner’s Access to review and receive electronic submittals
Hard copy samples and color charts Engineer’s Review, Internal Processing & Distribution within HDR and subcontractors via Project Wise
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 8
1 2 3
B.
Samples and Color Charts (hard copies): 1. Transmit all submittals to: HDR Engineering, Inc. 440 South Church St, Ste 1000 Charlotte, NC 28202 Attn: Will Shull, PE
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2. 3. 4.
5.
Utilize Exhibit "A" to transmit all Shop Drawings and samples. Utilize Exhibit "B" to transmit all Operation and Maintenance Manuals. All submittals must be from Contractor. a. Submittals will not be received from or returned to subcontractors. b. Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal stamp may be Contractor's standard approval stamp. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials utilized on the Project. a. Generalized product information, not clearly defining specific equipment or materials to be provided, will be rejected.
15 16
C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Follow electronic submittals procedure
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
D. Email Transmittals: 1. Permitted on a case-by-case basis to expedite review when approved by Engineer. 2. Requires ftp site electronic transmittal to immediately follow. a. Engineer will proceed with review of email transmittal. b. Engineer's approval or rejection comments will be recorded and returned on electronic copy transmittal. 3. Provisions apply to both: a. Initial transmittal contents. b. Supplemental information required to make initial transmittal contents complete.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1.6
ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION A. Shop Drawings and Samples: 1. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and will receive one of the following actions: a. A - FURNISH AS SUBMITTED. b. B - FURNISH AS NOTED (BY ENGINEER). c. C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT. d. D - REJECTED. e. E - ENGINEER'S REVIEW NOT REQUIRED. 2. Submittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion of Contractor's approval stamp. a. Submittals not stamped by the Contractor or stamped with a stamp containing language other than that specified herein will not be reviewed for technical content and will be returned without any action. 3. In relying on the representation on the Contractor’s review and approval stamp, Owner and Engineer reserve the right to review and process poorly organized and poorly described submittals as follows: a. Submittals transmitted with a description identifying a single item and found to contain multiple independent items: 1) Review and approval will be limited to the single item described on the transmittal letter. 2) Other items identified in the submittal will: a) Not be logged as received by the Engineer.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
b) Be removed from the submittal package and returned without review and comment to the Contractor for coordination, description and stamping. c) Be submitted by the Contractor as a new series number, not as a re-submittal number. b. Engineer, at Engineer’s discretion, may revise the transmittal letter item list and descriptions, and conduct review. 1) Unless Contractor notifies Engineer in writing that the Engineer’s revision of the transmittal letter item list and descriptions was in error, Contractor’s review and approval stamp will be deemed to have applied to the entire contents of the submittal package. 4. Submittals returned with Action "A" or "B" are considered ready for fabrication and installation. a. If for any reason a submittal that has an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted, it must be accompanied by a letter defining the changes that have been made and the reason for the resubmittal. b. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all documents having previously received "A" or "B" Action that are superseded by a resubmittal. 5. Submittals with Action "A" or "B" combined with Action "C" (Revise and Resubmit) or "D" (Rejected) will be individually analyzed giving consideration as follows: a. The portion of the submittal given "C" or "D" will not be distributed (unless previously agreed to otherwise at the Preconstruction Conference). 1) One (1) copy or the one (1) transparency of the "C" or "D" Drawings will be marked up and returned to the Contractor. a) Correct and resubmit items so marked. b. Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed. c. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, the major part of the individual Drawings or documents are incomplete or require revision, the entire submittal may be given "C" or "D" Action. 1) This is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. 2) In this case, some Drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or the statement, "Resubmit to maintain a complete package." 3) Distribution to the Owner and field will not be made (unless previously agreed to otherwise). 6. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal paragraphs of the Specifications will result in the submittal being returned to the Contractor with "C" or "D" Action. 7. Calculations required in individual Specification Sections will be received for information purposes only, as evidence calculations have been performed by individuals meeting specified qualifications, and will be returned stamped "E. Engineer's Review Not Required" to acknowledge receipt. 8. Transmittals of submittals which the Engineer considers as "Not Required" submittal information, which is supplemental to but not essential to prior submitted information, or items of information in a transmittal which have been reviewed and received "A" or "B" Action in a prior submittal, will be returned with Action "E. Engineer's Review Not Required." 9. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes. a. Remove samples when directed. b. Include in bid all costs of furnishing and removing samples. 10. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for judging completed work. a. Finished work or items not equal to samples will be rejected. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Engineer will review and indicate one of the following review actions: a. A - ACCEPTABLE. b. B - FURNISH AS NOTED - Not Used. c. C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 10
1 2 3
2.
d. D - REJECTED - Not Used. Deficient submittals (electronic copy will be returned along with the transmittal form which will be marked to indicate deficient areas.
4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
5
PART 3 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
6 7
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 11
1
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 12
EXHIBIT A
1
Shop Drawing Transmittal No. ________-____
2 3 4 5
(Spec Section)
Project Name:
Hardeeville WRF Expansion
Date Received:
Project Owner: Beaufort-Jasper Water & Sewer Authority
Checked By:
Contractor:
HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas
Log Page:
Address:
Address3955 Faber Place Drive
HDR No.:
187552-018
Suite 300
Spec Section:
North Charleston, SC 29405
Drawing/Detail No.:
Attn:
Attn: Tracy Lewis, PE
Date Transmitted:
Previous Transmittal Date:
Item No. No. Copies
(Series)
Description
1st. Sub
Manufacturer
ReSub.
Mfr/Vendor Dwg or Data No.
Action Taken*
Remarks:
* The Action designated above is in accordance with the following legend: A - Furnish as Submitted
D - Rejected E - Engineer's review not required 1. Submittal not required. 2. Supplemental Information. Submittal retained for informational purposes only. 3. Information reviewed and approved on prior submittal. 4. See comments.
B - Furnish as Noted C - Revise and Submit 1. Not enough information for review. 2. No reproducibles submitted. 3. Copies illegible. 4. Not enough copies submitted. 5. Wrong sequence number. 6. Wrong resubmittal number. 7. Wrong spec. section. 8. Wrong form used. 9. See comments. Comments:
By
Distribution:
6 7
Contractor
File
Date
Field
Owner
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 13
Other
EXHIBIT B
1
O&M Manual Transmittal No. ________-_____
2 3 4
(Spec Section)
Project Name:
Hardeeville WRF Expansion
Date Received:
Project Owner:
Beaufort-Jasper Water & Sewer Authority
Checked By:
Contractor:
Owner:
Address:
Address:
Attn:
Attn:
Beaufort-Jasper Water & Sewer Authority
Log Page: HDR No.: 187552-018
1st. Sub.
Date Transmitted: No. Copies
(Series)
ReSub.
Previous Transmittal Date:
Description of Item
Manufacturer
Dwg. or Data No.
Action Taken*
Remarks:
To:
From: HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas Date:
* The Action designated above is in accordance with the following legend: 5. Lubrication & maintenance instructions. A - Acceptable, provide one (1) additional paper copy and two (2) 6. Troubleshooting guide. electronic copies on CD-ROM for final review. 7. Parts list and ordering instructions. B - Not Used 8. Organization (binder, binder titles, index & tabbing). 9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to installation. C - Revise and Resubmit 10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams. This Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal is deficient in 11. Test data & performance curves. the following area: 12. Tag or equipment identification numbers. 1. Equipment Records. 13. Inclusion of all components & subcomponents. 2. Functional description. 14. Other - see comments. 3. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment & checkout instructions. D - Not Used 4. Operating instructions. Comments:
By Distribution:
Contractor
File
Date Field
Owner
5 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 14
Other
1
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 15
Equipment Record
EXHIBIT C1
1 2 3
Equipment Data and Spare Parts Summary Project Name
Specification Section: Year Installed:
Equipment Name Project Equipment Tag No(s). Equipment Manufacturer
Project/ Order No. Phone
Address Fax
Web Site
E-mail
Local Vendor/Service Center Address
Phone
Fax
Web Site
E-mail
MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip.
Serial No.
Make
Model No.
ID No.
Frame No.
HP
RPM
Cap.
Size
TDH
Imp. Sz.
CFM
PSI
Other:
ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA Equip.
Serial No.
Make
Model No.
ID No.
Frame No.
HP
V.
Amp.
HZ
PH
RPM
Duty
Code
Ins. Cl.
Type
NEMA
C Amb.
Temp. Rise
Rating
SF
Other:
SPARE PARTS PROVIDED PER CONTRACT Part No.
Part Name
Quantity
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS Part No.
Part Name
4 5 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 16
Quantity
Equipment Record
EXHIBIT C2
1 2 3
Recommended Maintenance Summary Equipment Description
Project Equip. Tag No(s).
4 INITIAL COMPLETION * FOLLOWING START-UP RECOMMENDED BREAK-IN MAINTENANCE (FIRST OIL CHANGES, ETC.)
D W M Q S A
RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
D W M Q S A
Hours
5 PM TASK INTERVAL *
*
D = Daily
W = Weekly
M = Monthly
Q = Quarterly
S = Semiannual
A = Annual
Hours
Hours = Run Time Interval
6 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 17
Equipment Record
EXHIBIT C3
1 2 3
Lubrication Summary Equipment Description
Project Equip. Tag No(s).
4
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
Manufacturer
Product
AGMA #
SAE #
ISO
1 2 3 4 5
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point
1 2 3 4 5
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point
1 2 3 4 5
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point
1 2 3 4 5
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point
1 2 3 4 5
Lubricant Type
Lubricant Point
1 2 3 4 5
5 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01 33 00 - 18
SECTION 01 35 05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Minimizing the pollution of air, water, or land; control of noise, the disposal of solid waste materials, and protection of deposits of historical or archaeological interest.
8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Prior to the start of any construction activities submit: a. A detailed proposal of all methods of control and preventive measures to be utilized for environmental protection. b. A drawing of the work area, haul routes, storage areas, access routes and current land conditions including trees and vegetation. c. A copy of the NPDES permit for storm water discharges from construction activities. d. A copy of the approved pollution prevention plan.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
3.1
INSTALLATION
25 26
A. Employ and utilize environmental protection methods, obtain all necessary permits, and fully observe all local, state, and federal regulations.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
B. Land Protection: 1. Except for any work or storage area and access routes specifically assigned for the use of the Contractor, the land areas outside the limits of construction shall be preserved in their present condition. a. Contractor shall confine his construction activities to areas defined for work within the Contract Documents. 2. Manage and control all borrow areas, work or storage areas, access routes and embankments to prevent sediment from entering nearby water or land adjacent to the work site. 3. Restore all disturbed areas including borrow and haul areas and establish permanent type of locally adaptable vegetative cover. 4. Unless earthwork is immediately paved or surfaced, protect all side slopes and backslopes immediately upon completion of final grading. 5. Plan and execute earthwork in a manner to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils. 6. Except for areas designated by the Contract Documents to be cleared and grubbed, the Contractor shall not deface, injure or destroy trees and vegetation, nor remove, cut, or disturb them without approval of the Engineer. a. Any damage caused by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the Contractor's expense. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS 01 35 05 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C. Surface Water Protection: 1. Utilize, as necessary, erosion control methods to protect side and backslopes, minimize and the discharge of sediment to the surface water leaving the construction site as soon as rough grading is complete. a. These controls shall be maintained until the site is ready for final grading and landscaping or until they are no longer warranted and concurrence is received from the Engineer. b. Physically retard the rate and volume of run-on and runoff by: 1) Implementing structural practices such as diversion swales, terraces, straw bales, silt fences, berms, storm drain inlet protection, rocked outlet protection, sediment traps and temporary basins. 2) Implementing vegetative practices such as temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, sod stabilization, vegetative buffers, hydroseeding, anchored erosion control blankets, sodding, vegetated swales or a combination of these methods. 3) Providing Construction sites with graveled or rocked access entrance and exit drives and parking areas to reduce the tracking of sediment onto public or private roads. 2. Discharges from the construction site shall not contain pollutants at concentrations that produce objectionable films, colors, turbidity, deposits or noxious odors in the receiving stream or waterway.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D. Solid Waste Disposal: 1. Collect solid waste on a daily basis. 2. Provide disposal of degradable solid waste to an approved solid waste disposal site. 3. Provide disposal of nondegradable solid waste to an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies. 4. No building materials wastes or unused building materials shall be buried, dumped, or disposed of on the site.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E. Fuel and Chemical Handling: 1. Store and dispose of chemical wastes in a manner approved by regulatory agencies. 2. Take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, herbicides, and insecticides from entering drainage ways. 3. Do not allow water used in onsite material processing, concrete curing, cleanup, and other waste waters to enter a drainage way(s) or stream. 4. The Contractor shall provide containment around fueling and chemical storage areas to ensure that spills in these areas do not reach waters of the state.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
F. Control of Dust: 1. The control of dust shall mean that no construction activity shall take place without applying all such reasonable measures as may be required to prevent particulate matter from becoming airborne so that it remains visible beyond the limits of construction. a. Reasonable measures may include paving, frequent road cleaning, planting vegetative groundcover, application of water or application of chemical dust suppressants. b. The use of chemical agents such as calcium chloride must be approved by the State of North Carolina DOT. 2. Utilize methods and practices of construction to eliminate dust in full observance of agency regulations. 3. The Engineer will determine the effectiveness of the dust control program and may request the Contractor to provide additional measures, at no additional cost to Owner.
48 49 50 51
G. Burning: 1. Do not burn material on the site. 2. If the Contractor elects to dispose of waste materials by burning, make arrangements for an off-site burning area and conform to all agency regulations.
52 53
H. Control of Noise: 1. Control noise by fitting equipment with appropriate mufflers. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS 01 35 05 - 2
1 2 3 4
I.
Completion of Work: 1. Upon completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition. 2. Ensure all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of required permanent work are removed.
5 6 7 8 9 10
J.
Historical Protection: 1. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archaeological interests is found, cease work in the affected area, find and notify Engineer. a. Do not disturb deposits until written notice from Engineer is given to proceed. 2. The Contractor will be compensated for lost time or changes in construction to avoid the find based upon normal change order procedures.
12
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS 01 35 05 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 45 25 WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
DESCRIPTION
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A. General: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services, for all testing of concrete structures for watertightness as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
12 13
B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limites to: 1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
14
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17
A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 350.1 Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Containment Structures.
18 19 20 21 22
B. Testing: 1. Provide watertightness testing for the following structures in accordance with the indicated criteria: STRUCTURE
WATER ELEVATION AT COMMENCEMENT OF FINAL 24 HR TEST PERIOD
Primary Clarifier Splitter Box Headworks Anaerobic Digestors Nos. 1 and 2 Sludge Holding Tank Filtrate Pump Station Digester Control Bldg – Basement Sump
Top of wall minus 6-inches
MAXIMUM WATER LEAKAGE ALLOWED IN FINAL 24 HR TEST PERIOD (PERCENT OF TEST VOLUME) 0.075%
Top of wall minus 6-inches Top of wall minus 6-inches
0.075% 0.075%
Top of wall minus 6-inches Top of wall minus 12-inches Top of wall
0.075% 0.075% 0.075%
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C. Perform a watertightness test on all water containing structures specified herein. Testing to conform to requirements of this Section with allowable leakage and other criteria as established by Engineer. 1. Water containing structure shall be structurally complete including the construction of all elevated slabs prior to performance of watertighnesst test 1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Visible leakage: The presence of liquid water flowing or seeping with a visible water surface sheen. Surface dampness as evidenced by discoloration of the concrete without a visible water sheen will not constitute visible leakage.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 01 45 25 - 1
1
1.4
2
SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B. Submit to Engineer results of watertightness testing indicating the following: 1. Level of water in structure and in evaporation pan at commencement and end of final 24 HR test period. 2. Net leakage in percent of total volume for each structure during final 24 HR test period (gross leakage minus that due to evaporation). 3. Photographs of all visible leaks and damp areas. Include distant photos and close-ups to document conditions. 4. Areas, methods and materials of patching to correct leakage. 5. Results of retesting required due to leakage exceeding percentages allowed.
12
C. Testing for watertightness with accompanying results to be witnessed by Engineer.
13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
14
2.1
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Nonshrink grout: SikaGrout 212. 2. Epoxy grout and adhesive: Sikadur 52. 3. Instant Setting Waterstop: a. Sikaset Plug by Sika Corporation. 4. Injectable polyurethane sealant: a. SikaFix HH, by Sika Corporation. b. Or approved equal.
23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
3.1
PREPARATION BEFORE TESTING
25 26 27 28 29
A. General. 1. Testing to be performed prior to new roof installation. a. Contractor responsible for phasing construction to minimize the impact of leak testing. b. Contractor to furnish all necessary materials (such as flange cover plates). 2. Coordinate with Owner for source of water.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
B. Patching. 1. Completely fill penetrations with nonshrink grout, or as specified. 2. Fill voids and honeycombed areas with patching grout. 3. Cracks suspected to cause leakage to be filled with epoxy adhesive or injected with sealant. a. Patching to be performed after concrete defective area is cleaned of all loose material to surface of sound concrete. 4. Prior to patching activities, Contractor to submit patching materials and procedures for review by Engineer. 5. Method of patching and materials subject to approval by Engineer.
39
3.2
TESTING FOR LEAKAGE
40 41 42 43
A. Fill structure to water elevation specified or indicated. Water for test to be plant filter effluent approved by Engineer. Final 24 HR test period shall commence after water has been in structure for a minimum period of 96 HRS or extended period to allow for water absorption into concrete and complete curing of strip-type waterstops.
44 45
B. Record level of water in structure at commencement of the final 24 HR test period. The final 24 HR test period to be free of any form of precipitation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 01 45 25 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
C. Just prior to beginning the final 24 HR test, place an evaporation pan next to the structure being tested. Evaporation pan to be 4 FT 0 IN in diameter and 10 IN deep made of galvanized steel or plastic. Float pan on surface of basin test water and place water to within 2 IN of top of pan. Record level of water in pan at commencement of test. Amount of water lost due to evaporation in the structure in IN shall be equal to the decrease in water depth (noted in inches) in the evaporation pan during the final 24 HR test period.
7 8 9
D. During testing period, inspect structure for areas indicating leakage. Any areas evidencing running water and/or visible leakage are to be repaired and patched to a stop-leak condition. Repair and patch in accord with requirements of this Section and manufacturer’s instructions.
10 11 12
E. At the end of the final 24 HR test period, record level of water surface in the structure. Water leakage from the structure during the final 24 HR test period shall be the resulting net leakage after deducting the leakage due to evaporation from the total leakage.
13 14 15
F. If leakage is greater than that allowed in this Section, repair and patch areas suspected of causing the leakage. Repair and patch in accord with requirements of this Section. Re-test structure with water until leakage is equal to or less than that allowed.
16 17
G. Dispose of water used for testing to an area which will not damage new or existing construction and will not interfere with construction operations. Point of disposal to be approved by Engineer.
18 19 20 21
3.3
PAYMENT A. Contractor shall pay all costs required for testing, retesting, patching and repair as required to meet watertightness requirements specified or indicated.
END OF SECTION
22
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES 01 45 25 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 45 33 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor responsibilities for special inspection and testing. 2. Special Inspection program and reporting requirements. 3. Attachment A to this Specification Section includes the Submittal of Special Inspections. 4. Attachment B to this Specification Section includes Special Inspector qualifications, reporting requirements, and material specific inspections and tests. a. This information is for the Contractor reference only and is not part of the Contract Documents. b. It is included to assist the Contractor in understanding the Owner-provided Services so that those services may be factored into the Contractor’s pricing and schedule. c. The Service Provider(s) responsible for the Owner-provided Services will be selected after Contract award. 5. Attachment C to this Specification Section includes sample forms.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Purpose: 1. This Document was developed to address the requirements of the 2009 International Building Code IBC, section 1704.1, including: a. One or more special inspectors will be hired by the Owner or the Owner’s Agent to provide inspections during constructions on the types of work listed under Section 1704. 2. A Statement of Special Inspections will be submitted to the Building Code Official as a condition for permit issuance. This statement is included as Attachment A to this Specification. Attachment B includes a complete list of materials and work requiring special inspections, the inspections to be performed and a list of the minimum qualifications of the individuals, approved agencies or firms intended to be retained for conducting such inspections.
30 31 32
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
33
1.2
DEFINITIONS
34 35
A. Special Inspector: Representative of the Owner approved inspection agency designated for that portion of the work.
36 37 38
B. Testing Agency: Approved agency, not affiliated or hired by the Contractor, which is responsible for the materials testing requirements of the project including but not limited to concrete cylinder breaks, soils testing, and masonry materials testing.
39 40
C. Statement of Special Inspections: Document provided to the Building Code Official outlining special inspections and tests to be done on the project and frequency of required test.
41 42 43
D. Soils Engineer or Geotechnical Engineer: For the purposes of Special Inspection "Soils Engineer," "Geotechnical Engineering," and "Special Inspector" shall be interchangeable as pertains to the Division 31 specifications.
44
E. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM 01 45 33 - 1
1
1.3
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A. Contractor shall cooperate with testing agency personnel, special inspector, and agents of the Building Code Official and provide access to the work. 1. Providing access to the work shall include all labor and facilities to perform inspections and tests as listed in the specifications for the duration of the inspections or tests involved. 2. Contractor shall provide means to obtain and handle samples taken on site. 3. Contractor shall provide a Statement of Responsibility as described by Chapter 17 of the Building Code. 4. Contractor shall provide storage facilities for testing agencies exclusive use as described in the Specifications.
11 12
B. Attend a pre-construction meeting to coordinate and clarify inspection and testing procedures, requirements.
13 14
C. Contractor shall notify special inspector and/or testing agency of work to be inspected/tested minimum of 24 HRS prior.
15 16
D. Work for which special inspections are required shall remain accessible and exposed for the purposes of special inspections until completion of required special inspections.
17 18 19
E. Any portion of work that is not in conformance shall be corrected and re-inspected. Such portions of the work shall not be covered or concealed until authorized by Owner’s Representative.
20
F. Work to be inspected should be complete at time of inspector's arrival on-site.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
G. Payment for Special Inspection services will be in accordance with the following: 1. Payment described below is for the Testing Agency and Special Inspector costs and does not include the Contractor’s costs listed in Paragraph 1.3 A. 2. After Contractor notification, inspector arrives at site and performs inspection within the timeframe defined in Item 4 below. a. Inspection reveals work is satisfactory. b. Owner pays all costs associated with this inspection. 3. After Contractor notification, inspector arrives at site and performs inspection within the timeframe defined in Item 4 below. a. Inspection reveals work is deficient. b. Contractor corrects deficiencies within timeframe defined in Item 4) below. c. Work is re-inspected and work is satisfactory. d. Owner pays all costs associated with this inspection. 4. After Contractor notification, inspector arrives at site and work is not ready for inspection when inspector arrives. a. Inspector will remain on-site for a maximum of 2 HRS awaiting the completion of the work. b. If work is not ready for inspection at the end of this period, inspector will be dismissed until Contractor requests re-inspection. c. All costs associated with this inspection trip will be charged to the Contractor. 5. After Contractor notification, inspector arrives at site and performs inspection within the timeframe defined above. a. Inspection reveals work is deficient. b. Contractor attempts to correct deficiencies within 2 HR timeframe and calls for reinspection. c. Work is re-inspected and found to still be deficient. d. Inspector will be dismissed. e. All costs associated with this inspection trip will be charged to the Contractor. 6. Owner will pay for "passing" soils on the Project. Costs of corrective actions and cost of failed test areas requiring retesting are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. For additional specific payment requirements for soils see the respective Division 31 Section. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM 01 45 33 - 2
1 2 3 4 5
H. Special Inspection is intended to be an independent quality assurance. Special Inspections shall not relieve the Contractor of any quality assurance, quality control, workmanship, or warranty responsibilities. Contractor’s own personnel shall review all work to be inspected for conformance with Contract Documents prior to calling for inspection. 1.4
REPORTING DUTIES AND AUTHORITY
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. A pre-construction meeting to coordinate and clarify inspection, testing, and procedural requirements will be held per Section 01 30 00. 1. The meeting is to be attended by: a. Owner. b. Engineer. c. Building Code Official or designee. d. Testing Agency and Special Inspectors. e. General Contractor. f. Appropriate Sub-contractor(s).
15 16 17
B. Special Inspector shall report all deficient work to the Contractor as soon as possible. 1. Deficient work that has been covered up or concealed prior to re-inspection shall be reported to the Engineer and the Building Code Official.
18 19
C. Special Inspector does not have authority to stop work or modify the requirements of the Contract Documents.
20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
21
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
23 24 25 26
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM 01 45 33 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
This page intentionally left blank.
24
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING PROGRAM 01 45 33 - 4
1 2 3
ATTACHMENT A SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
This page intentionally left blank.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 2
Statement of Special Inspections Project Name:
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project
Project Location:
1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
Owner:
City of Shelby, North Carolina
Design Professional in Responsible Charge:
Christopher T. Crotwell, PE
This Statement of Special Inspections is submitted as a condition for permit issuance in accordance with the Special Inspection and Structural Testing requirements of the Building Code. It includes a schedule of Special Inspection services applicable to this project as well as the name of the Special Inspection Coordinator and the identity of other approved agencies to be retained for conducting these inspections and tests. This Statement of Special Inspections encompass the following disciplines: Structural
Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing
Architectural
Other _______________
The Special Inspection Coordinator shall keep records of all inspections and shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. Discovered discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Contractor for correction. If such discrepancies are not corrected, the discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. The Special Inspection program does not relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities. Interim reports shall be submitted to the Building Official and the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge. A Final Report of Special Inspections documenting completion of all required Special Inspections, testing and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted prior to issuance of a Certificate of Use and Occupancy. Job site safety and means and methods of construction are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Interim Report Frequency:
or
per attached schedule.
Prepared by:
(type or print name)
Signature
Date
Owner’s Authorization: Signature
Design Professional Seal
Building Official’s Acceptance: Date
Signature
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 3 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
Date
September 2017
Schedule of Inspection and Testing Agencies This Statement of Special Inspections includes the following building systems:
IT-1 IT-2 IT-3 IT-4 IT-5 IT-6 IT-7 IT-8 IT-9 IT-10
Verification Of Soils Excavation And Fill Pilings And Drilled Piers Modular Retaining Walls Reinforced Concrete Post Tension Slab Precast Concrete Erection Prestressed Concrete Inspection Of Precast Concrete Fabricators Inspection Of Structural Steel Fabricators
Special Inspection Agencies
Firm
IT-11 IT-12 IT-13 IT-14 IT-15 IT-16 IT-17 IT-18 IT-19
Structural Masonry Welding Structural Steel and Structural Aluminum Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials Exterior Insulation and Finish System Seismic Resistance Smoke Control Wood Special Cases Address, Telephone, e-mail
1. Special Inspection Coordinator: Cast-in-Place Concrete, Precast and Prestressed Concrete, Masonry, Reinforcing Steel erection, Structural Steel and Aluminum erection 2. Inspector Geotechnical/Soils 2A Engineer 2B Inspector
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
3. Site Resident Inspector
TBD
TBD
4. Testing Agency Soils Reinforced Cast-in-Concrete Masonry
TBD
TBD
5. Testing Agency Welding
TBD
TBD
6. Other Engineer of Record
TBD
TBD
Note: The inspectors and testing agencies shall be engaged by the Owner or the Owner’s Agent, and not by the Contractor or Subcontractor whose work is to be inspected or tested. Any conflict of interest must be disclosed to the Building Official, prior to commencing work. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 4 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Qualifications of Inspectors and Testing Technicians The qualifications of all personnel performing Special Inspection and testing activities are subject to the approval of the Building Official. The credentials of all Inspectors and testing technicians shall be provided if requested.
Key for Minimum Qualifications of Inspection Agents: When the Registered Design Professional in Responsible Charge deems it appropriate that the individual performing a stipulated test or inspection have a specific certification or license as indicated below, such designation shall appear below the Agency Number on the Schedule. PE/SE PE/GE EIT
Structural Engineer – a licensed SE or PE specializing in the design of building structures Geotechnical Engineer – a licensed PE specializing in soil mechanics and foundations Engineer-In-Training – a graduate engineer who has passed the Fundamentals of Engineering examination
American Concrete Institute (ACI) Certification ACI-CFTT ACI-CCI ACI-LTT ACI-STT ACI-CRSI
Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1 Concrete Construction Inspector Laboratory Testing Technician – Grade 1 & 2 Strength Testing Technician Adhesive Anchor Installer
American Welding Society (AWS) Certification AWS-CWI AWS/AISC-SSI
Certified Welding Inspector Certified Structural Steel Inspector
American Society of Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT) Certification ASNT
Non-Destructive Testing Technician – Level II or III.
International Code Council (ICC) Certification ICC-SMSI ICC-SWSI ICC-SFSI ICC-PCSI ICC-RCSI
Structural Masonry Special Inspector Structural Steel and Welding Special Inspector Spray-Applied Fireproofing Special Inspector Prestressed Concrete Special Inspector Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) NICET-CT NICET-ST NICET-GET
Concrete Technician – Levels I, II, III & IV Soils Technician - Levels I, II, III & IV Geotechnical Engineering Technician - Levels I, II, III & IV
Exterior Design Institute (EDI) Certification EDI-EIFS
EIFS Third Party Inspector
Other For additional requirements See Attachment B.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 5 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
Schedule of Special Inspections - By Structure Project Name: Project Address: Date:
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
The following lists comprise the required schedule of special inspections for this project. Legend: IT
Special Inspection REQUIRED for this structure. = Inspection Type
No Special Inspections Required for this structure
62 Digester Control Building The following Special Inspections are required for this structure: IT-1 IT-2 IT-3
Verification Of Soils Excavation And Fill Pilings And Drilled Piers
IT-4 IT-5 IT-6 IT-7 IT-8 IT-9
Modular Retaining Walls Reinforced Concrete Post Tension Slab Precast Concrete Erection Prestressed Concrete Inspection Of Precast Concrete Fabricators IT-10 Inspection Of Structural Steel Fabricators
IT-11 Structural Masonry IT-12 Welding IT-13 Structural Steel and Structural Aluminum IT-14 Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials IT-15 Exterior Insulation and Finish System IT-16 Seismic Resistance IT-17 Smoke Control IT-18 Wood IT-19 Special Cases
64 Dewatering Facility The following Special Inspections are required for this structure: IT-1 IT-2 IT-3 IT-4 IT-5 IT-6 IT-7 IT-8 IT-9
Verification Of Soils Excavation And Fill Pilings And Drilled Piers
Modular Retaining Walls Reinforced Concrete Post Tension Slab Precast Concrete Erection Prestressed Concrete Inspection Of Precast Concrete Fabricators IT-10 Inspection Of Structural Steel Fabricators
IT-11 Structural Masonry IT-12 Welding IT-13 Structural Steel and Structural Aluminum IT-14 Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials IT-15 Exterior Insulation and Finish System IT-16 Seismic Resistance IT-17 Smoke Control IT-18 Wood IT-19 Special Cases
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 6
September 2017
Non-Building Environmental Water Retaining Structures • • • •
10 Headworks 12 Primary Clarifier Splitter Box 61 Digester Tank No. 1 and No. 2 63 Sludge Holding Tank
The following Special Inspections are required for these structures: IT-1 IT-2 IT-3
Verification Of Soils Excavation And Fill Pilings And Drilled Piers
IT-4 IT-5 IT-6 IT-7 IT-8 IT-9
Modular Retaining Walls Reinforced Concrete Post Tension Slab Precast Concrete Erection Prestressed Concrete Inspection Of Precast Concrete Fabricators IT-10 Inspection Of Structural Steel Fabricators
IT-11 Structural Masonry IT-12 Welding IT-13 Structural Steel and Structural Aluminum IT-14 Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials IT-15 Exterior Insulation and Finish System IT-16 Seismic Resistance IT-17 Smoke Control IT-18 Wood IT-19 Special Cases
Non-Building Other Structures •
66 Dewatered Cake Storage
The following Special Inspections are required for these structures: IT-1 IT-2 IT-3 IT-4 IT-5 IT-6 IT-7 IT-8 IT-9
Verification Of Soils Excavation And Fill Pilings And Drilled Piers
Modular Retaining Walls Reinforced Concrete Post Tension Slab Precast Concrete Erection Prestressed Concrete Inspection Of Precast Concrete Fabricators IT-10 Inspection Of Structural Steel Fabricators
IT-11 Structural Masonry IT-12 Welding IT-13 Structural Steel and Structural Aluminum IT-14 Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials IT-15 Exterior Insulation and Finish System IT-16 Seismic Resistance IT-17 Smoke Control IT-18 Wood IT-19 Special Cases
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 7
September 2017
Schedule of Special Inspections - By Inspection Types
IT-1 VERIFICATION OF SOILS Item 1. Shallow Foundations
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 2 PE/GE
Scope IT-1 Inspection Periodic. Inspect soils below footings for adequate bearing capacity and consistency with geotechnical report. Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials.
IT-2 EXCAVATION AND FILL Item 1. Controlled Structural Fill
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 2 PE/GE
Scope IT-2 Inspection Continuous: Inspect removal of unsuitable material and preparation of subgrade prior to placement of controlled fill Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill. Inspect placement, lift thickness and compaction of controlled fill. Verify extent and slope of fill placement.
IT-3 PILINGS AND DRILLED PIERS (Not Required)
IT-4 MODULAR RETAINING WALLS
(Not Required)
IT-5 REINFORCED CONCRETE Item 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, material certification.
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 6 ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI
Scope IT-5
(Refer to IBC 1705.3)
Inspection Continuous. Review shop fabrication and installation drawings.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 8 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item 2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding, material certification.
3. Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete. 4. Inspection of anchors postinstalled in hardened concrete members.
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 5, 6
Scope IT-5
(Refer to IBC 1705.3)
Inspection in accordance with IT-12.
ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI Agency 3 ICC-RCSI Agency 3
Inspection Periodic. Review shop fabrication and installation drawings.
Inspection Periodic.
ICC-RCSI; ACI-CRSI
5. Verifying use of required design mix.
Agency 3, 6
6. At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete. 7. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques. 8. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. 9. Inspection of pre-stressed concrete. 10. Erection of precast concrete members 11. Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in post-tensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs
Agency 2, 3
Inspection Periodic.
ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI Inspection Continuous.
ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI
NA
Agency 3
NA
Inspection Periodic.
ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 9 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item 12. Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete members being formed
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3 ACI-CCI; ICC-RCSI
Scope IT-5
(Refer to IBC 1705.3)
Inspection Periodic. Review installation drawings.
IT-6 POST TENSION SLAB-ON-GROUND & POST TENSION CONCRETE (Not Required)
IT-7 PRECAST CONCRETE ERECTION Item 1. Precast concrete erection.
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 6 PE/SE
2. Precast concrete fabricated in a certified plant.
Agency 3, 6 ACI-CCI; ICC-PCSI
Scope IT-7
(Refer to IBC 1704.2 and 1704.4)
Inspection Periodic. Review shop fabrication and installation drawings. Review plant operations and quality control procedures. Also see IT-9.
IT-8 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE Item 1. Prestress operations.
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 6 ICC-PCSI
Scope IT-8
(Refer to IBC 1704.4)
Inspection Continuous. Inspect placement, stressing, grouting and protection of prestressing tendons. Also see IT-5 and IT-13.
IT-9 INSPECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE FABRICATORS Item 1. Fabricator Certification/ Quality Control Procedures
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 1, 6 ICC-PCSI
Scope IT-9
(Refer to IBC 1704.2)
Inspection Continuous. Review shop fabrication and quality control procedures.
IT-10 INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATORS Item 1. Fabricator Certification/ Quality Control Procedures a. Structural steel b. Metal fabrication c. Metal Building Systems d. Steel Joists
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 1, 6 AWS/AISCSSI
Scope IT-10 Inspection Continuous. Review shop fabrication and quality control procedures.
ICC-SWSI
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 10 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
IT-11 STRUCTURAL MASONRY Item 1. Material Certification
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 1, 3, 6 PE/FE ICC-SMSI
2. Compliance with required inspection provisions of the construction documents and the approved submittals
Agency 1, 3
3. Verification of f’m and f’ aac prior to construction and for every 5,000 square feet during construction
Agency 3, 4
4. Verification of proportions of materials in premixed or pre-blended mortar and grout as delivered to the site
Agency 3, 4, 6
5. Verification of slump flow and VSI as delivered to the site for self-consolidating grout
Agency 4
6. The following shall be verified to ensure compliance
Scope IT-11
(Refer to IBC 1705.4)
Inspection Continuous. Submittal review and Field review. Verify material certifications conform to specification requirements. Inspection Periodic.
ICC-SMSI
Inspection Periodic.
ICC-SMSI
Inspection Periodic.
ICC-SMSI
Inspection Continuous.
ICC-SMSI ICC-SMSI (UNO)
6A. Proportions of site-prepared mortar, and grout
Agency 3, 4
Inspection Periodic.
6B. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints
Agency 3
Inspection Periodic.
6C. Placement of reinforcement, and connectors
Agency 3
Inspection Periodic.
6D. Grout space prior to grout
Agency 3
Inspection Continuous.
6E. Placement of grout
Agency 3
Inspection Continuous.
6F. Placement of pre-stressing grout
NA
NA
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 11 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item 6G.Size and location of structural elements
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3
Scope IT-11
(Refer to IBC 1705.4)
Inspection Continuous.
6H. Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction
Agency 3
Inspection Continuous. Review shop fabrication and installation drawings.
6I. Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement, and anchor bolts
Agency 3, 6
Inspection Periodic. Review shop fabrication and installation drawings.
6J. Welding of reinforcing bars
Agency 5
Inspection in accordance with IT-12.
AWS-CWI Agency 3
Inspection Periodic.
6K. Preparation, construction and protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40DEG F) or hot weather (temp above 90-DEG F) 6L. Application and measurement of prestressing force 7. Preparation of any required grout specimens and / or prisms shall be observed
NA
Agency 1, 3, 4
NA
Inspection Continuous.
ICC-SMSI
IT-12 WELDING Item 1. Welding - General
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 5 AWS-CWI ASNT (UNO)
Scope IT-12
(Refer to IBC 1705.2.2.1)
Inspection Periodic. Visually inspect all welds. Inspect pre-heat, post-heat and surface preparation between passes. Verify size and length of fillet welds. Ultrasonic testing of all full-penetration welds. Review welder’s certification per submittal process.
2. Structural steel, aluminum and cold-formed steel deck
Agency 3
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 12 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3, 5
Inspection Continuous.
2B. Multipass fillet welds
Agency 3, 5
Inspection Continuous.
2C. Single-pass fillet welds > 5/16-IN
Agency 3, 5
Inspection Continuous.
2D. Plug and slot welds
Agency 3, 5
Inspection Continuous.
2E. Single-pass fillet welds ≤ 5/16-IN
Agency 3, 5
Inspection Periodic.
2F. Floor and roof deck welds
Agency 3, 5
Inspection Periodic.
2A. Complete and partial joint penetration groove welds
3. Reinforcing steel
Scope IT-12
(Refer to IBC 1705.2.2.1)
Agency 3
3A. Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel other than ASTM A 706
Agency 3, 6
3B. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, and boundary elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement
Agency 3
Inspection Continuous.
3C. Shear reinforcement
Agency 3
Inspection Continuous.
3D. Other reinforcing steel
Agency 3
Inspection Periodic.
4. Material verification of weld filler materials:
Agency 3, 6
Inspection Periodic.
Inspection Continuous.
IT-13 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM Note:
Similar types of inspection and reporting requirements apply to structural aluminum as applies to structural steel. Item
Agency # (Qualif.)
Scope IT-13
(Refer to IBC 1705.2)
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 13 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item 1. Fabricator Certification/ Quality Control Procedures
2. Material Certification
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 1
Inspection Continuous.
AWS/AISCSSI ICC-SWSI Agency 3, 6
Inspection Continuous.
AWS/AISCSSI ICC-SWSI 3. Open Web Steel Joists
Agency 3, 5, 6
Scope IT-13
(Refer to IBC 1705.2)
Review certified mill test reports and identification markings on wide-flange shapes, high-strength bolts, nuts and welding electrodes. Inspection Continuous. Material verification open web steel joists Inspection Continuous: Review fabrication and installation drawings Inspection Periodic. Field welding and bridging of joists.
4. Bolting
Agency 3, 6
Inspection Continuous.
AWS/AISCSSI
Material verification of high-strength bolts, nuts and washers must be inspected for Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents.
ICC-SWSI
Inspection Periodic. Inspect installation and tightening of high-strength bolts. Inspection Continuous. Verify that splines have separated from tension control bolts. Verify proper tightening sequence. Inspection. Continuous: bolts in slip-critical connections. 5. Shear Connectors
Agency 3, 6
Inspection Continuous.
AWS/AISCSSI
Material verification shear connectors.
ICC-SWSI
Inspect size, number, positioning and welding of shear connectors. Inspect suds for full 360 degree flash. Ring test all shear connectors with a 3 lb hammer. Bend test all questionable studs to 15 degrees.
Inspection Continuous.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 14 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
Item 6. Structural Details
Agency # (Qualif.) Agency 3 PE/SE
Scope IT-13
(Refer to IBC 1705.2)
Inspection Periodic. Inspect steel frame for compliance with structural drawings, including bracing, member configuration and connection details. Inspection Periodic. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance: a. Details such as bracing and stiffening b. Member locations c. Application of joint details at each connection
7. Metal Deck
Agency 3, 6 AWS-CWI
Inspection Continuous. Material verification of cold-formed steel deck Inspection Continuous:. Review fabrication and installation drawings. Inspection Periodic. Inspect welding and side-lap fastening of metal roof and floor deck.
8. Cold-Formed Steel Trusses
NA
NA
IT-14 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTANT MATERIALS (Not Required)
IT-15 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
(Not Required)
IT-16 SEISMIC RESISTANCE
(Not Required)
IT-17 SMOKE CONTROL
(Not Required)
IT-18 WOOD
(Not Required)
IT-19 SPECIAL CASES
(Not Required)
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SUBMITTAL OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT A- 15 CASE Form 101 - Statement of Special Inspections - CASE 2004
September 2017
This page intentionally left blank.
ATTACHMENT B SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
1 2 3 4
PART 1 - GENERAL
5
1.1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SUMMARY A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 5. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 6. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 7. Section 13 34 24 – Reinforced Concrete Tank Roof Dome. 8. Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork. 9. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Pavement.
1.2
QUALIFICATIONS
17 18
A. Qualifications stated here are the minimum recommended by the Engineer. If the Building Code Official has more stringent qualifications, the more stringent qualifications will take precedence.
19 20 21
B. All Special Inspections and Testing to be done under the direction of a Professional Engineer or Registered Architect registered in the State of North Carolina herein referred to as Registered Professional for Special Inspections (RPSI).
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C. Soil, concrete, masonry, mortar, grout, steel and aluminum related testing. 1. The Testing Agency shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the testing of these materials. 2. The Testing Agency’s technician(s) conducting this testing: a. Shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the testing of soil, concrete, mortar, grout, steel and aluminum as appropriate. 3. Concrete related work: a. International Code Council certification for Reinforced Concrete and American Concrete Institute Concrete Field Testing Technician – Grade 1.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
D. Special Structural Inspections: 1. Professional Engineers or Architects, licensed in the State of North Carolina, may perform special inspections in accordance with their license qualifications. 2. Other individuals, working under the direct supervision of a licensed engineer and meeting the following qualifications, may perform special inspections. 3. Soils related work: a. NICET Level II Certification in geotechnical engineering technology/construction; or b. Registered Geologist; or c. Engineer Intern under the direct supervision of a Licensed Professional Engineer. 4. Concrete related work: a. International Code Council certification for Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector or American Concrete Institute Concrete Construction Special Inspector. b. Alternatively, may be an Engineer Intern under the direct supervision of a Licensed Professional Engineer. 5. Precast concrete erection related work: a. Engineer Intern under the direct supervision of a Licensed Professional Engineer. 6. Precast concrete erection welding: 1) American Welding Society as a Certified Welding Inspector; or 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT B - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
7.
8.
9. 1.3
2) International Code Council Structural Steel and Welding Certification and American Welding Society Qualified and one (1) year of related experience; or 3) NDT Level II or II Certificate (for non-destructive testing only). Masonry related work: a. Shall be certified by the International Code Council or American Concrete Institute for structural masonry and one (1) year of related experience. b. Alternatively, may by an Engineer Intern with a minimum of two (2) years appropriate training. Steel and aluminum related work: a. Frame and material verification IBC Table 1704.3 b. Welding: 1) American Welding Society as a Certified Welding Inspector; or 2) International Code Council Structural Steel and Welding Certification and American Welding Society Qualified and one (1) year of related experience; or 3) NDT Level II or II Certificate (for non-destructive testing only). c. High strength bolting: 1) International Code Council Structural Steel and Welding Certification and one (1) year related experience. 2) Alternatively, may be an Engineer Intern with appropriate training. Other equivalent certifications will not be acceptable unless approved by the Engineer.
REPORTING DUTIES AND AUTHORITY
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
A. Reporting requirements for special inspector per IBC 2009 for Building System Related Work. 1. Comply with requirements of IBC Section 1704.1.2. 2. Provide written documentation of all inspections and testing. a. Include exact location of work. b. If testing of specimens is included, include detailed information on storage and curing of specimens prior to testing. 3. Furnish inspection and test reports to the Contractor, the Engineer’s Project Manager and the Owner’s on-site representative. a. Indicate that work inspected was done in conformance with approved construction documents. b. Immediately report any discrepancies to the Contractor for correction. c. If the discrepancies are not corrected in a timely fashion, notify the Engineer’s Project Manager and Owner’s on-site representative. 4. Issue an electronic report summarizing all inspections, corrective action notifications and resolution of discrepancies and non-conforming work every two (2) weeks (14 calendar days). a. Copy will be available to: 1) Engineer’s Project Manager. 2) Owner. 3) The Building Code Official. 4) General Contractor. 5. At the end of the Project, the RPSI shall compile all test reports for each inspected material and for each Special Inspector and summarize into a single PDF and submit to the Engineer and Building Code Official. a. Final summary report to be signed and sealed by a Registered Professional for Special Inspections stating: 1) The required Special Inspections have been performed. 2) All discrepancies have been resolved except as specifically stated in the summary report.
51 52 53
B. Special Inspector shall report all deficient work to the Contractor as soon as possible. 1. Deficient work that has been covered up or concealed prior to re-inspection shall be reported to the Engineer and the Building Code Official. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT B - 2
1 2 3
C. Special Inspector does not have authority to stop work or modify the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.4
4 5 6 7 8
A. Material specific requirements for special inspection and testing are listed in the technical specifications listed below. Special inspection and testing requirements will be located in each appropriate technical specification under "SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL", "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL" and/or "QUALITY ASSURANCE" as appropriate for each material. 1.5
9 10 11 12 13
1.6
1.7
27 28 29
PRECAST CONCRETE A. Special Inspection and testing will be provided per IBC Section 1704. Inspection and testing is required for connection embed number and placement, connection welding, and proper panel detailing prior to placement.
1.8
23 24 25 26
CONCRETE A. Special Inspection and testing will be provided per IBC Section 1704. Inspection is required for material verification, reinforcing steel, embedded anchor bolts, post installed anchors, mechanical splices, concrete tests, welding of reinforcing, concrete placement and curing, and waterstop placement.
19 20 21 22
SOILS A. Special Inspection/testing will be provided per IBC Section 1704 as required to determine that the site has been prepared in accordance with the approved soils report, and to verify the allowable soil bearing pressure, materials, compaction densities, trenching and backfill and conformance to the project Specifications.
14 15 16 17 18
MATERIAL SPECIFIC SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
MASONRY A. Special Inspection and testing will be provided per IBC Section 1704. Inspection is required for material tests and verification, reinforcing steel, embedded bolts and anchorage, post installed anchors, grout placement, and welding of reinforcing.
1.9
STEEL, STAINLESS STEEL, AND ALUMINUM A. Special Inspection will be provided for structural steel and aluminum per IBC Section 1704. Inspection is required for material verification, high-strength bolting, welding and other work noted on the Contract Documents.
30
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS ATTACHMENT)
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS ATTACHMENT)
32 33
END OF ATTACHMENT
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT B - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
This page intentionally left blank.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT B - 4
1 2
ATTACHMENT C SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
This page intentionally left blank.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 2
1
Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility
2 3 4 5 6
Each contractor responsible for the construction or fabrication of a system or component designated in the Quality Assurance Plan must submit a Statement of Responsibility. Project Name: Project Location:
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
Contractor’s Name Contractor’s Address License No. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Description of designated building systems and components included in the Statement of Responsibility:
Contractor’s Acknowledgment of Special Requirements I hereby acknowledge that I have received, read, and understand the Quality Assurance Plan and Special Inspection program. I hereby acknowledge that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construction documents approved by the Building Official.
__________________________________________ Signature 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
_________________________ Date
Contractor’s Provisions for Quality Control Procedures for exercising control within the contractor’s organization, the method and frequency of reporting and the distribution of reports is attached to this Statement. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the organization are attached to this Statement.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 3 CASE Form 103 - Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility - CASE 2004
1
Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance
2 3 4 5 6 7
Each approved fabricator that is exempt from Special Inspection of shop fabrication and implementation procedures per section 1704.2 of the International Building Code must submit a Fabricator’s Certificate of Compliance at the completion of fabrication. Project Name:
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project
Project Location:
1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
Owner:
City of Shelby, North Carolina
Fabricator’s Name: Address Certification or Approval Agency: Certification Number: Date of Last Audit or Approval: 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Description of structural members and assemblies that have been fabricated:
I hereby certify that items described above were fabricated in strict accordance with the approved construction documents.
__________________________________________ Signature
_________________________ Date
__________________________________________ Title 20 21 22
Attach copies of fabricator’s certification or building code evaluation service report and fabricator’s quality control manual 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 4 CASE Form 104 - Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility - CASE 2004
1
Final Report of Special Inspections
2 3 4
Project Name: Project Location:
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
Owner:
City of Shelby, North Carolina
Owner’s Address
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Architect of Record:
Brian T. Ellington, AIA
Structural Engineer of Record:
Randy Maccaferri, PE
To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections required for this project, and itemized in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following:
Comments:
12 13 14 15 16
(Attach continuation sheets if required to complete the description of corrections.) Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted, Special Inspector
(Type or print name)
Signature
Date
Licensed Professional Seal
17 18
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 5 CASE Form 102 - Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility - CASE 2004
1 2
Agent’s Final Report Project Name: Project Location: Agent:
3 4 5 6 7 8
First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project 1940 South Lafayette Street, Shelby, NC 28152
Special Inspector: To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the Special Inspections or testing required for this project, and designated for this Agent in the Statement of Special Inspections submitted for permit, have been performed and all discovered discrepancies have been reported and resolved other than the following:
Comments:
9 10 11 12 13
(Attach continuation sheets if required to complete the description of corrections.) Interim reports submitted prior to this final report form a basis for and are to be considered an integral part of this final report. Respectfully submitted, Agent of the Special Inspector
(Type or print name)
Signature
Date
Licensed Professional Seal or Certification
14 15 16
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FORMS 01 45 33 - ATTACHMENT C - 6 CASE Form 102 - Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility - CASE 2004
SECTION 01 61 03 EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements of this Specification Section apply to all equipment provided on the Project including those found in other Divisions even if not specifically referenced in individual "Equipment" Articles of those Specification Sections.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 6. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 7. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 8. Section 40 05 00 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 9. Section 40 91 10 - Primary Elements and Transmitters. 10. Section 40 98 00 - Control Panels and Enclosures. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E1934, Standard Guide for Examining Electrical and Mechanical Equipment with Infrared Thermography. b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 4. Hydraulic Institute (HI): a. 9.6.4, Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps for Vibration Measurements and Allowable Valves. 5. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE). 7. The International Society of Automation (ISA). 8. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 1940, Mechanical Vibration - Balance Quality Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State - Part 1: Specification and Verification of Balance Tolerances. 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. c. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 10. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): a. ATS, Acceptance Testing Specification for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 11. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 430, Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers. 12. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 13. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 14. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
a.
29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 15. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). a. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment. b. 508A, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels. 16. Vibration Institute.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
B. Natural frequency analysis firm: 1. An independent firm, whose sole or principal part of its business is the calculation of and analysis of natural frequencies of rotating equipment. 2. Minimum of 10 years experience. 3. Employs a registered professional engineer who has experience in finite element analysis, rotordynamic analysis and experimental modal analysis. a. Minimum five (5) years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Qualified Vibration Category III certification from the Vibration Institute.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Vibration Testing Program: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of three (3) years field experience covering all phases of field vibration testing and data gathering. b. Qualified Vibration Category II certification from the Vibration Institute. 3. Analysis personnel: a. Minimum five (5) years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Qualified Vibration Category III certification from the Vibration Institute.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
D. Infrared Thermography Testing Program: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of one (1) year field experience covering all phases of field thermography testing and data gathering. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 3. Analysis personnel: a. Minimum three (3) years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. Testing firm: a. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration , and adjusting of systems. b. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST. 2. Field personnel: a. Minimum of one (1) year field experience covering all phases of electrical equipment inspection, testing, and calibration. b. Relay test technician having previous experience with testing and calibration of relays of the same manufacturer and type used on project and proficient in setting and testing the types of protection elements used. c. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 2
1 2 3
3.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Analysis personnel: a. Minimum three (3) years combined field testing and data analysis experience. b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET.
F. Miscellaneous: 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" shall be selected and utilized uniformly throughout Project even if: a. More than one (1) manufacturer is listed for a given "product" in Specifications. b. No manufacturer is listed. 2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical wiring, instrumentation, controls, and system components shall fully comply with specific NEC requirements related to area classification and to NEMA 250 and NEMA ICS 6 designations shown on the Hazardous Area Site Plan and defined in the Electrical specifications. 3. Variable speed equipment applications: The driven equipment manufacturer shall have single source responsibility for coordination of the equipment and VFD system and verify their compatibility. 1.3
DEFINITIONS
17
A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment.
18 19 20 21 22 23
B. Major Equipment Supports - Supports for Equipment: 1. Located on or suspended from elevated slabs with supported equipment weighing 2000 LBS or greater, or; 2. Located on or suspended from roofs with supported equipment weighing 500 LBS or greater, or; 3. Located on slab-on-grade or earth with supported equipment weighing 5000 LBS or more.
24 25 26 27 28 29
C. Equipment: 1. One (1) or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function. 2. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. 3. Not limited to items specifically referenced in "Equipment" articles within individual Specifications.
30 31 32 33
D. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. General for all equipment: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. b. Data sheets that include manufacturer's name and complete product model number. 1) Clearly identify all optional accessories that are included. c. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the requirements of the standards referenced. d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation instructions. e. Equipment identification utilizing numbering system and name utilized in Drawings. f. Equipment installation details: 1) Location of anchorage. 2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage. 3) Anchorage setting templates. 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions. g. Equipment area classification rating. h. Shipping and operating weight.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
i.
2.
3.
Equipment physical characteristics: 1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 2) Materials of construction and construction details. j. Equipment factory primer and paint data. k. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. l. Equipment lining and coatings. m. Equipment utility requirements include air, natural gas, electricity, and water. n. Ladders and platforms provided with equipment: 1) Certification that all components comply fully with OSHA requirements. 2) Full details of construction/fabrication. 3) Scaled plan and sections showing relationship to equipment. Mechanical and process equipment: a. Operating characteristics: 1) Technical information including applicable performance curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and efficiencies. 2) Brake horsepower requirements. 3) Copies of equipment data plates. b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. c. Equipment bearing life certification. d. Equipment foundation data: 1) Equipment center of gravity. 2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces resulting from equipment operation. Electric motor: a. Motor manufacturer and model number. b. Complete motor nameplate data. c. Weight. d. NEMA design type. e. Enclosure type. f. Frame size. g. Winding insulation class and temperature rise. h. Starts per hour. i. Performance data: 1) Motor speed-torque curve superimposed over driven machine speed-torque curve during start-up acceleration and at rated terminal voltage a minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage for all motors over 25 HP. 2) Time-current plots with acceleration versus current and thermal damage curves at the operating and ambient temperatures and at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage for all motors over 25 HP. 3) Guaranteed minimum efficiencies at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load. 4) Guaranteed minimum power factor at 100 percent, 75 percent, and 50 percent of full load. 5) Locked rotor and full load current at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. 6) Starting, full load, and breakdown torque at rated terminal voltage and minimum permissible or specified terminal voltage. j. Bearing data and lubrication system. k. Natural frequency calculations for: 1) Completed assembly including but not limited to the equipment base, rotating piece of equipment, and the rotating piece of equipment driver. 2) Individual piece of rotating equipment. 3) Equipment driver and connected gear reducer, if applicable. l. Thermal protection system including recommended alarm and trip settings for winding and bearing RTD’s. m. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
4.
5. 6.
7.
1) Dimensioned outlined drawing. 2) Connection diagrams including accessories (strip heaters, thermal protection, etc.). n. Certifications: 1) When utilized with a reduced voltage starter, certify that motor and driven equipment are compatible. 2) When utilized with a variable frequency controller, certify motor is inverter duty and the controller and motor are compatible. a) Include minimum speed at which the motor may be operated for the driven machinery. o. Electrical gear: 1) Unless specified in a narrow-scope Specification Section, provide the following: a) Equipment ratings: Voltage, continuous current, kVa, watts, short circuit with stand, etc., as applicable. 2) Control panels: a) Panel construction. b) Point-to-point ladder diagrams. c) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. d) Technical product data on panel components. e) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. f) Panel access openings. g) Nameplate schedule. h) Panel anchorage. Systems schematics and data: a. Provide system schematics where required in system specifications. 1) Acknowledge all system components being supplied as part of the system. 2) Utilize equipment, instrument and valving tag numbers defined in the Contract Documents for all components. 3) Provide technical data for each system component showing compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 4) For piping components, identify all utility connections, vents and drains which will be included as part of the system. For factory painted equipment, provide paint submittals in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. Qualifications for: a. Natural frequency analysis firm and personnel. b. Vibration testing firm and personnel. c. Infrared thermography testing firm and personnel. d. Electrical equipment and connections testing firm and personnel. Equipment Monitoring and Testing plans, in accordance with PART 3 of this Specification Section: a. Natural frequency analysis and calculations. b. Vibration testing. c. Thermography testing. d. Electrical equipment and connection testing.
B. Factory Test Reports 1. Natural frequency bump test reports where required for rotating equipment. a. Minimum characteristics of impact hammer. 1) Frequency Range 1 kHz 2) Range (5v output) 5,000 lbf (22,200 N) 3) Hammer Sensitivity (approx.) 1 mV/lbf (0.23 mV/N) 4) Resonant Frequency 12 kHz 2. Motor, equipment and final assembled equipment including motor. a. Determine natural frequency of assembled motor prior to shipping to OEM or job site. 1) Individual motor fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final assembled equipment. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
b.
3. 4.
Determine natural frequency of the pump. 1) Pump fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final assembled equipment. c. Determine natural frequency of the pump/motor assembly. 1) Pump/motor assembly fastened to an “infinitely rigid” mass at the same bolt circle as the final field assembled equipment. a. For this use, the "infinitely rigid" mass shall be at least 10 times the weight of the equipment being tested. Submit natural frequency report(s) for approval prior to shipment. Equipment performance tests. a. As listed in individual equipment specifications.
12 13 14 15
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
D. Informational Submittals: 1. Sample form letter for equipment field certification. 2. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been initially started up, has been calibrated and/or adjusted as required, and is ready for operation. 3. Certification for major equipment supports that equipment foundation design loads shown on the Drawings or specified have been compared to actual loads exhibited by equipment provided for this Project and that said design loadings are equal to or greater than the loads produced by the equipment provided. 4. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified in narrow-scope Specification Sections. 5. Notification, at least one (1) week in advance, that motor testing will be conducted at factory. 6. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer-supplied control panels that interface in any way with other controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with the supplier/installer of those interfacing systems. 7. Motor test reports. 8. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel drawings for manufacturersupplied control panels truly represent panel wiring including any field-made modifications. 9. Provide three (3) bound final written reports documenting natural frequency testing, vibration monitoring and testing for specified equipment. a. Include the acceptance criteria of all equipment tested. b. Provide individual tabbed sections for information associated with each piece of tested equipment. 10. Preliminary field quality control testing format to be used as a basis for final field quality control reporting. 11. Testing and monitoring reports in accordance with PART 3 of this Specification Section. 12. Certification that driven equipment and VFD are compatible.
43
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
2.1
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Motors: a. Baldor. b. General Electric. c. Marathon Electric. d. Siemens. e. Toshiba
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
2.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
f. Teco-Westinghouse. g. U.S. Motors. h. WEG. Mechanical variable speed drives: a. Reeves. b. U.S. Motors (VariDrive).
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Electric Motors: 1. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed AC or DC drives, provide motors that are fully compatible with the speed controllers. 2. Design for frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment. 3. Design for full voltage starting. 4. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by driven equipment. 5. Size for altitude of Project. 6. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates which include all data required by NEC Article 430. 7. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally constructed motor driven equipment specified by model number in which a redesign of the complete unit would be required in order to provide a motor with features specified. 8. AC electric motors less than 1/3 HP: a. Single phase, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. c. Built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element with stainless steel enclosure. 9. AC electric motors 1/3 to 1 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) For single phase motors, provide built-in manual reset thermal protector or integrally mounted manual motor starter with thermal overload element. 10. AC electric motors 1-1/2 to 10 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to ABMA standards. c. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 11. AC electric motors greater than 10 HP: a. Single or 3 PH, 60 Hz, designed for the supply voltage shown on the Drawings. b. Oil or grease lubricated antifriction bearings conforming to ABMA standards. 1) Design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 50,000 HRS of operation for motors up to and including 100 HP. 2) For motors greater than 100 HP, design bearing life for 90 percent survival rating at 100,000 HRS of operation. c. For vertical motors provide 15 year, average-life thrust bearings conforming to ABMA standards. d. Thermal protection: 1) For motors 50 HP and above controlled from a variable frequency drive and for all other motors 100 HP and above, provide integral thermal detectors with normally closed contacts that will open on overtemperature or resistance type temperature detector (RTD) complete with monitor and alarm panel having a normally closed contact that will open on overtemperature. a) Two (2) thermal sensing devices per phase in each phase hot-spot location. b) Monitor and alarm panel: (1) For constant speed motors, install panel in and energize from the motor starter equipment.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
(2) For variable speed motors, install panel in and energize from the variable speed drive equipment. 12. Severe duty motor to have the following minimum features: a. All cast iron construction. b. Gasketed conduit box. c. Epoxy finish for corrosion protection. d. Hydroscopic varnish on windings for corrosion protection. e. Drain plug and breather. B. NEMA Design Squirrel Cage Induction Motors: 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA and IEEE for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment. 2. Motors to meet NEMA MG 1 (NEMA Premium) efficiencies. 3. Do not provide motors having a locked rotor kVA per HP exceeding the NEMA standard for the assigned NEMA code letter. 4. For use on variable frequency type adjustable speed drives, provide: a. Induction motors that are in compliance with NEMA MG 1, Part 31. b. Nameplate identification meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31 requirements. c. Insulated drive end bearing on all motors. d. Insulated non-drive end bearings, at a minimum, on all motors with horizontal shaft 100 HP and larger. e. An insulated bearing carrier on the non-drive end for vertical shaft motors 100 HP and larger. f. Shaft grounding ring on all motors: 1) Factory installed, maintenance free, circumferential, bearing protection ring with conductive microfiber shaft contacting material. 2) Electro Static Technology AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring or approved equal. 5. Design motor insulation in accordance with NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above a 40 DegC ambient. 6. Design motors for continuous duty. 7. Size motors having a 1.0 service factor so that nameplate HP is a minimum of 15 percent greater than the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. a. As an alternative, furnish motors with a 1.15 service factor and size so that nameplate HP is at least equal to the maximum HP requirements of the driven equipment over its entire operating range. 8. Motor enclosure and winding insulation application: a. The following shall apply unless modified by specific Specification Sections: MOTOR LOCATION
40 41
MOTOR ENCLOSURE / WINDING INSULATION
Unclassified Indoor Areas
TEFC, Standard Insulation
Wet indoor Areas
TEFC, Standard Insulation
Wet outdoor Areas
TEFC, Extra Dip and Bake for Moisture
Corrosive Areas
TEFC, Severe/ Chemical Duty
Class I, Division 1 Areas
Explosion Proof, Approved for Class I Division 1 Locations
Class II, Division 1 Areas
Explosion Proof, Approved for Class II Division 1 Locations
Class I or Class II, Division 2 Areas
Explosion Proof, Approved for Division 1 Locations or TEFC with maximum external frame temperature compatible with the gas or dust in the area, Extra Dip and Bake for moisture
NOTE: Provide TENV motors in the smaller horsepower ratings where TEFC is not available.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 8
1 2 3 4
9.
Provide oversize conduit box complete with clamp type grounding terminals inside the conduit box. 10. Balance motors to ISO G2.5 level. a. Submit prior to shipping to OEM or job site.
5 6
C. Submersible Motors: Refer to individual narrow-scope Specification Sections for submersible motor requirements.
7 8 9 10 11
D. V-Belt Drive: 1. Provide each V-belt drive with sliding base or other suitable tension adjustment. 2. Provide V-belt drives with a service factor of at least 1.6 at maximum speed. 3. Provide staticproof belts. 2.3
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
COMPONENTS A. Gear Drives and Drive Components: 1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load including losses in speed reducers and power transmission. 2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer at least equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. 3. Design drive units for 24 HR continuous service, constructed so oil leakage around shafts is precluded. 4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems, gear drives, speed reducers, speed increasers and flexible couplings meeting applicable standards of AGMA. 5. Gear reducers: a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil lubricated. b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout. c. Provide worm gear reducers having a service factor of at least 1.20. d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and combination bevel-helical gear reducers with a service factor of at least 1.50.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A. Guards: 1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements. 2. Interior applications: a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to shaft or coupling surface. b. Utilize non-flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal 1/2 IN spacing. c. Connect to equipment frame with hot-dip galvanized bolts and wing nuts. 3. Exterior applications: a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum. b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture. c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface. d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Anchorage: 1. Cast-in-place anchorage: a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for all equipment. b. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. c. Provide two (2) nuts for each bolt. 2. Drilled anchorage: a. Adhesive anchors per Specification Section 05 50 00. b. Epoxy grout per Specification Section 03 31 30. c. Threaded rods same as cast-in-place.
51
C. Data Plate: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 9
1 2 3
1. 2.
Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating equipment. Permanently stamp information on data plate including manufacturer's name, equipment operating parameters, serial number and speed.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D. Gages: 1. Provide gages in accordance with Specification Section 40 91 10. 2. Provide at the following locations: a. Inlet and outlet of all reciprocating, centrifugal and positive displacement mechanical and process equipment. b. At locations identified on Drawings. 3. Utilize tapping sleeves for mounting per Specification Section 40 05 00.
11 12 13 14
E. Lifting Eye Bolts or Lugs: 1. Provide on all equipment 50 LBS or greater. 2. Provide on other equipment or products as specified in the narrow-scope Specification Sections.
15 16 17
F. Platforms and Ladders: 1. Design and fabricate in accordance with OSHA Standards. 2. Provide in accordance with Drawings and Division 05 and 06 Specifications.
18 19 20
G. Space Heaters: 1. Silicone rubber strip type, 120 V rated. 2. Provide in all motors 10 HP and larger that are mounted outdoors or in humid environments.
21
2.5
FABRICATION
22 23
A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with modern engineering and shop practices.
24 25
B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field.
26
C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable.
27 28
D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
29 30 31 32 33
E. Furnish equipment which requires periodic internal inspection or adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. 1. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items.
34 35 36
F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. 1. Provide drain connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing.
37
G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment.
38 39 40 41 42 43
H. Fabricate equipment which will be subject to Corrosive Environment in such a way as to avoid back to back placement of surfaces that can not be properly prepared and painted. 1. When such back to back fabrication can not be avoided, provide continuous welds to seal such surfaces from contact with corrosive environment. 2. Where continuous welds are not practical, after painting seal the back to back surfaces from the environment in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00.
44 45 46 47
I.
Natural frequency/critical Speed: 1. All rotating parts accurately machined and in as near perfect rotational balance as practicable. 2. Excessive vibration is sufficient cause for equipment rejection.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 10
1 2
3.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J.
2.6
Ratio of all rotative speeds to natural frequency/critical speed of a unit or components: Greater than 1.2.
Control Panels Engineered and Provided with the Equipment by the Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer’s standard design for components and control logic unless specific requirements are specified in the specific equipment Specification Section. 2. NEMA or IEC rated components are acceptable, whichever is used in the manufacturer’s standard engineered design, unless specific requirements are required in the specific equipment Specification Section. 3. Affix entire assembly with a UL 508A label "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" prior to delivery. a. Control panels without an affixed UL 508A label shall be rejected.
SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES
13 14 15 16 17 18
A. Electrical Equipment: 1. Provide factory-applied paint coating system(s) for all electrical equipment components except those specified in Specification Section 09 96 00 to receive field painting. a. Field painted equipment: See Specification Section 09 96 00 for factory applied primer/field paint compatibility requirements. b. See Specification Section 40 98 00 for additional equipment receiving factory painting.
19 20 21
B. Field paint other equipment in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. 1. See Specification Section 09 96 00 for factory applied primer/field paint compatibility requirements.
22
2.7
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Motor Tests: 1. Test motors in accordance with NEMA and IEEE standards. 2. Provide routine test for all motors. 3. The Owner reserves the right to select and have tested, either routine or complete, any motor included in the project. a. The Owner will pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all motors successfully passing the tests. b. The Contractor shall pay all costs, including shipping and handling, for all motors failing the tests. c. If two (2) successive motors of the same manufacturer fail testing, the Owner has the right to reject all motors from that manufacturer.
34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
35
3.1
INSTALLATION
36
A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
37
B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab-mounted equipment.
38 39 40
C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 3/4 IN PVC or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor or equipment drain. 1. Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved by Engineer.
41
D. DO NOT construct foundations until major equipment supports are approved.
42 43
E. Extend all non-accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to a location which allows easy access of fittings from closest operating floor level.
44 45 46
F. Equipment Base: 1. Construct level in both directions. 2. Take particular care at anchor bolt locations so these areas are flat and level.
47
G. Machine Base: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. 2.
Mount machine base of rotating equipment on equipment base. a. Level in both directions, using a machinist level, according to machined surfaces on base. Level machine base on equipment base and align couplings between driver and driven unit using steel blocks and shims. a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each mounting bolt location. 1) Provide area size of blocks and shims approximately 1-1/2 times area support surface at each mounting bolt point. b. Provide blocks and shims at each mounting bolt. 1) Furnish blocks and shims that are square shape with "U" cut out to allow blocks and shims to be centered on mounting bolts. c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before grouting, tighten mounting bolts to proper torque value.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
H. Rotating equipment Couplings: 1. Align in the annular and parallel positions. a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less, align both annular and parallel within 0.001 IN tolerance for couplings 4 IN size and smaller. b. Couplings larger than 4 IN size: Increase tolerance 0.0005 IN per inches of coupling diameter, i.e., allow 6 IN coupling 0.002 IN tolerance, and allow a 10 IN coupling 0.004 IN tolerance. c. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than 1200 rpm allow both annular and parallel positions within a tolerance rate of 0.00025 IN per inch coupling diameter. 2. If equipment is delivered as a mounted unit from factory, verify factory alignment on site after installation and realigned if necessary. 3. Check surfaces for runout before attempting to trim or align units.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
I.
44
3.2
Grouting: 1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled onto equipment base, couplings aligned and mounting bolts tightened to correct torque value, place a dam or formwork around base to contain grouting between equipment base and equipment support pad. a. Extend dam or formwork to cover leveling shims and blocks. b. Do not use nuts below the machine base to level the unit. 2. Saturate top of roughened concrete subbase with water before grouting. a. Add grout until entire space under machine base is filled to the top of the base underside. b. Puddle grout by working a stiff wire through the grout and vent holes to work grout in place and release any entrained air in the grout or base cavity. 3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or formwork and finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. a. Cover exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently wet to prevent too rapid evaporation of water from the grout. b. When the grout has fully hardened (after a minimum of seven (7) days) tighten all anchor bolts to engage equipment base to grout, shims, and equipment support pad. c. Recheck driver-driven unit for proper alignment.
INSTALLATION CHECKS
45 46 47 48 49
A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed specifications, secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized representative(s) of equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment installation. 1. In each case, representative(s) shall be present during placement and start-up of equipment and as often as necessary to resolve any operational issues which may arise.
50 51 52 53
B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a written report certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Is in accurate alignment. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 12
1 2 3
3. 4.
4 5 6 7
C. No separate payment shall be made for installation checks. 1. All or any time expended during installation check does not qualify as Operation and Maintenance training or instruction time when specified. 3.3
8 9 10
IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT AND HAZARD WARNING SIGNS A. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with Specification Section 10 14 00.
3.4
11 12 13
Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. Has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. a. Secure and deliver a field written report to Owner immediately prior to leaving jobsite.
FIELD HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS A. For required field High Performance Industrial Coatings, comply with Specification Section 09 96 00.
3.5
WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION
14
A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
15
B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire.
16
C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor leads.
17 18
D. Tape stripped ends of conductors and associated connectors with electrical tape. 1. Wrapping thickness shall be 150 percent of the conductor insulation thickness.
19
E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature rise.
20
F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
21
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. General: 1. Furnish equipment manufacturer’s field quality control services and testing as specified in the individual equipment Specification Sections. 2. Execute pre-demonstration requirements in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00. 3. Perform and report on all tests required by the equipment manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Provide testing of electrical equipment and connections in accordance with the Electrical specifications. 5. Equip testing and analysis personnel with all appropriate project related reference material required to perform tests, analyze results, and provide documentation including, but not limited to: a. Contract Drawings and Specifications. b. Related construction change documentation. c. Approved Shop Drawings. d. Approved Operation and Maintenance Manuals. e. Other pertinent information as required.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Equipment Monitoring and Testing Plans: 1. Approved in accordance with Shop Drawing submittal schedule. 2. Included as a minimum: a. Qualifications of firm, field personnel, and analysis personnel doing the Work. b. List and description of testing and analysis equipment to be utilized. c. List of all equipment to be testing, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification,
47
C. Instruments Used in Equipment and Connections Quality Control Testing: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.
2. 3.
Minimum calibration frequency: a. Field analog instruments: Not more than 6 months. b. Field digital instruments: Not more than 12 months. c. Laboratory instruments: Not more than 12 months. d. If instrument manufacturer’s calibration requirements are more stringent, those requirements shall govern. Carry current calibration status and labels on all testing instruments. See individual testing programs for additional instrumentation compliance requirements.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D. Testing and Monitoring Program Documentation: 1. Provide reports with tabbed sections for each piece of equipment tested. 2. Include all testing results associated with each piece of equipment under that equipment’s tabbed section. a. Include legible copies of all forms used to record field test information. 3. Prior to start of testing, submit one (1) copy of preliminary report format for Engineer review and comment a. Include data gathering and sample test report forms that will be utilized. 4. In the final report, include as a minimum, the following information for all equipment tested: a. Equipment identification, including: 1) Name and tag numbers identified in the Contract Documents. 2) Manufacturer’s serial numbers. 3) Other pertinent manufacturer identification, b. Date and time of each test. c. Ambient conditions including temperature, humidity, and precipitation. d. Visual inspection report. e. Description of test and referenced standards, if any, followed while conducting tests. f. Results of initial and all retesting. g. Acceptance criteria. h. "As found" and "as left" conditions. i. Corrective action, if required, taken to meet acceptance. j. Verification of corrective action signed by the Contractor, equipment supplier, and Owner’s representative. k. Instrument calibration dates of all instruments used in testing. 5. Provide three (3) bound final reports prior to Project final completion.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
E. Electrical Equipment and Connections Testing Program: 1. Perform testing on Electrical equipment and connections in accordance with the Electrical specification requirements. 2. Testing of motors: a. After installation and prior to energizing the motor, perform inspections and tests per NETA ATS 7.15 for all motors 50 HP or above. b. Ensure motor has been lubricated. c. Bump motor to check for correct rotation. 3. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the acceptable tolerance until the equipment meets or exceeds acceptability standards.
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
F. Other Testing: 1. Perform tests and inspections not specifically listed but required to assure equipment is safe to energize and operate. 2. Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is made in the form of a cast iron or steel structure that has supporting beams, legs, and cross members that are cast, welded, or bolted shall be tested for a natural frequency of vibration after equipment is mounted. a. The ratio of the natural frequency of the structure to the frequency of the disturbing force shall not be between 0.5 and 1.5.
53
G. Infrared Thermography Testing Program: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
1.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Perform infrared thermography testing for equipment specified in other Divisions during the Equipment Demonstration Period. a. Perform on all rotating and reciprocating equipment having drivers 25 HP or greater. b. Perform on electrical equipment and connections: See Specification Section 26 08 13. Additional requirements for infrared thermography monitoring and testing equipment: a. Temperature range: -10 to 350 DegC. b. Accuracy: ±2 percent or 2 DegC, whichever is greater. c. Repeatability: ±1 percent or 1 DegC, whichever is greater. d. Temperature indication resolution: 0.1 DegC. e. Minimum focus distance: 0.3 meters. f. Output in color palettes: JPEG, BMP, or other digital format compatible with Windows. Perform inspection per ASTM E1934. a. Operate VFD driven equipment at 100 percent speed during thermographic inspection. Acceptability of electrical connections and components based on temperature comparison between components and ambient air temperatures not greater than 10 DegC per ASTM E1934. Acceptability of motors and equipment bearings based on temperature rise not greater than 5 DegC above the equipment and/or bearing manufacturers published criteria. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the acceptable tolerance until the equipment meets or exceeds acceptability standards.
H. Equipment Vibration Monitoring and Testing Program: 1. Perform vibration monitoring and testing for equipment specified in other Divisions during the Equipment Demonstration Period. 2. Provide vibration testing on all rotating and reciprocating equipment having driver 25 HP and greater {or as shown in the Equipment Vibration Testing Schedule. 3. Additional requirements for vibration monitoring and testing equipment at 25 DegC: a. Requirements for analyzer. 1) Frequency range: 10 Hz to 20 kHz 2) Frequency Accuracy: 0.02 percent. 3) Non-integrated spectral amplitude accuracy: 5 percent, 3 Hz to 65kHz. 4) Single integrated spectral amplitude accuracy: 5 percent 10 Hz to 20kHz. 5) Supports measurements of acceleration, velocity, displacement, envelope demodulation for bearing defect detection. 6) Capable of two-place computer balancing. b. Requirements for vibration sensor at 25 DegC: 1) Sensitivity: ±5 percent = 100 mV/g. 2) Acceleration range: ±50 g. 3) Amplitude nonlinearity: ±1 percent. 4) Frequency response: ±10 Hz to 7 kHz (±3 dB). 5) Permanently attach vibration test and monitoring mounting pads to mechanical equipment at location recommended by the equipment manufacturer or as recommended by the testing firm. 4. Acceptability of equipment conditions, except pumps, based on ISO 1940-1 Balance Quality Grade G2.5 criteria. 5. Acceptability of pumping equipment to be based on current ANSI/HI criteria: a. ANSI/HI 11.6-2012 for Submersible Pumps in a Wet-pit or Dry-pit configuration. b. ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009 for all other centrifugal pumps. 6. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the acceptable tolerance until the equipment meets or exceeds acceptability standards. 7. Utilize an Engineer approved testing agency to perform vibration monitoring and testing on equipment defined in the schedule at the end of this Section. 8. Permanently attach vibration test and monitoring mounting pads to the equipment at locations recommended by the equipment manufacturer or as recommended by the vibration testing agency. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
37 38 40
9. 10. 11.
12. 13. 14. 15.
3.7
Utilize mounting pads suitable for permanent installation and for incorporation into a predictable maintenance program. For variable speed equipment provide vibration testing at 1 Hz increments throughout entire operating range. Diagnosis to include, but is not limited to the following: a. Unbalance. b. Misalignment. c. Bent shaft. d. Journal bearing related problems. e. Rolling contract bearing problems. f. Mechanical looseness. g. Resonance. h. Foundation flexibility. i. Electrically induced problems. j. Pump problems. k. Fan problems. l. Coupling problems. m. Drive belt problems. n. Gear problems. o. Centrifugal compressor problems. p. Electric motor induced vibration from VFD or VFD carrier frequency. q. Natural frequency of the installed equipment. Provide machinery condition diagnosis based on an acceptable machinery vibration severity guide or machinery fault guide analysis provided by the testing agency, ISO 1940 Balance Quality Grade 6.3 as a minimum. Tolerances for pumping equipment shall be per HI published standards. Repair or replace equipment shown to be out of range of the specified tolerance until the equipment meets the specified normal operation range required in the machinery fault guide analysis. Document testing with written report. a. Report to include initial testing results, acceptance criteria, corrective action taken to meet acceptance, verification of corrective action and acceptance report and baseline. b. Natural frequency of installed equipment utilizing an impact hammer. c. Report to include graphical plots of vibration signature for each test point at a scale which illustrates all vibration levels greater than 0.025 ips RMS.
DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Specification Section 01 75 00.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EQUIPMENT: BASIC REQUIREMENTS 01 61 03 - 16
SECTION 01 61 05 MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. A listing of the equipment for the Project, which is considered to be major equipment. 2. A listing of the approved suppliers of said major equipment. 3. Certain instructions concerning the bidding of major equipment.
9 10 11 12 13 14
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. The sections listed under "ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT". 1.2
15 16 17 18
SUMMARY
DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers or suppliers, as used in the context of "approved manufacturers or suppliers of major equipment", shall mean the manufacturers or suppliers listed in the ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT Article of this Specification Section.
1.3
INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDING MAJOR EQUIPMENT
19 20 21 22
A. Furnish, for base bid, equipment by any of the suppliers listed in the ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT Article of this Specification Section, or as added to the ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT Article of this Specification Section by addendum.
23 24
B. Name only one (1) of said suppliers in the schedule of major equipment suppliers found in the Bid form.
25 26 27
C. Proposal shall be considered irregular and subject to rejection if the Bidder: 1. Fails to list an approved supplier for each item. 2. Lists more than one approved supplier for each item.
28 29 30
D. If the Bidder fails to list an approved supplier, the Owner has the sole right to select one (1) of the suppliers from the list of manufacturers in the ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT Article of this Specification Section.
31 32
E. If the Bidder lists more than one (1) approved supplier, the Owner has the sole right to select one (1) of the suppliers so listed.
33 34 35 36
F. Requests for prequalification of equipment to be listed in the ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT Article of this Specification Section must comply specifically with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. 1. Refer to Specification Section 00 21 13, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.
37 38 39
1.4
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT A. See Bid Form for approved major equipment suppliers.
40
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
41
PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION) 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS 01 61 05 - 1
1
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MAJOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS 01 61 05 - 2
SECTION 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8
A. Government procurement policy is to acquire, in a cost effective manner, items containing highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials practicable consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition without adversely affecting performance requirements or exposing suppliers' employees to undue hazards from the recovered materials.
9 10 11
B. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines.
12 13 14
C. The Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the execution of the Work.
15
1.2
16 17 18
A. 40 CFR 247 - Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for Products Containing Recovered Materials. 1.3
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
REFERENCES
EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK A. Various sections of the specifications contain requirements for materials that have been designated by EPA as being products which are or can be made with recovered or recycled materials. 1. These items, when incorporated into the work under this contract, shall contain at least the specified percentage of recycled or recovered materials unless adequate justification (nonavailability) for non-use is provided. 2. When a designated item is specified as an option to a non-designated item, the designated item requirements apply only if the designated item is used in the Work.
1.4
EPA PROPOSED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK A. Products other than those designated by EPA are still being researched and are being considered for future Comprehensive Procurement Guideline (CPG) designation. 1. It is recommended that these items, when incorporated in the work under this contract, contain the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials, provided specified requirements are also met.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34 Product Fiberglass Rigid Foam Rock Wool Coal Fly Ash Steel (EAC) Steel (BOF) Restroom Partitions
Material
Post Consumer Content Percent
Total Recovered Materials Content Percent
Glass Cullet -Slag ---Steel (BOF)
----16 67 16
20 – 25 9 75 20 – 30 25 – 30 100 25 – 30
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS 01 62 35 - 1
Product Non-Pressure Pipe Non-Pressure Pipe Non-Pressure Pipe
Material
Post Consumer Content Percent
Total Recovered Materials Content Percent
PVC Steel (BOF) Steel (EAF)
5 - 15 16 67
25 – 100 25 – 30 100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS 01 62 35 - 2
SECTION 01 65 50 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10
A. Section Includes: 1. Scheduling of product delivery. 2. Packaging of products for delivery. 3. Protection of products against damage from: a. Handling. b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments.
11 12 13
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
14 15 16 17 18
C. Payment: 1. No payment will be made to Contractor for equipment or materials not properly stored and insured or without approved Shop Drawings. a. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent progress estimate(s) if proper storage procedures are not observed.
19
1.2
DELIVERY
20 21
A. Scheduling: Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage.
22 23 24
B. Packaging: Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken cartons or other containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or environmental damage.
25 26
C. Identification: Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item, and installation location.
27
D. Protection and Handling: Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.
28
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
29
PART 3 - EXECUTION
30
3.1
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
PROTECTION, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Instruction: 1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. a. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in storage. b. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 2. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 3. When space heaters are provided in equipment, connect and operate heaters during storage until equipment is placed in service.
3.2
STORAGE FACILITIES A. Temporary Storage Building:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01 65 50 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1. 2. 3. 4.
3.3
Provide a weatherproof temporary storage (or Conex box) building specifically for the purpose of providing for protection of products and equipment as required for proper storage of equipment. Equip building with lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for equipment space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage environments acceptable to specified manufacturers. Provide methods of storage of products and equipment off the ground. Provide this structure within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. a. Locate building on-site where shown on the Drawings or in location approved by Engineer. b. Remove building from site prior to startup and demonstration period.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
13 14 15 16
A. Inspect Deliveries: 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. a. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used, or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on Project.
17 18 19
B. Monitor Storage Area: Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture conditions are maintained as required by manufacturer or as appropriate for particular items.
21
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01 65 50 - 2
SECTION 01 73 20 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Methods of installing and sealing openings and penetrations in construction.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 50 00 - Miscellaneous Metals. 4. Section 06 82 00 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fabrications. 5. Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 6. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 7. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 8. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. d. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. e. A351, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts. f. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. g. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. h. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. i. A995, Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for Pressure-Containing Parts. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC): 1) Article 501, Class 1 Locations. b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. c. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
1.3
DEFINITIONS
40 41 42
A. Corrosive Areas: For the purpose of this specification section, the following areas are defined as corrosive: 1. Headworks Channels.
43 44
B. Hazardous Areas: Areas shown in the Contract Documents as having Class I or Class II area classifications.
45
C. Washdown Areas: Areas having floor drains or hose bibbs.
46 47
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. 2.
3.
See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. For each structure provide dimensioned or scaled (minimum 1/8 IN = 1 FT) plan view drawings containing the following information: a. Vertical and horizontal location of all required openings and penetrations. b. Size of all openings and penetrations. c. Opening type. d. Seal type. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured products.
10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
11
2.1
MATERIALS
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Areas listed as Corrosive Areas in PART 1: a. Stainless steel, Type 316L. b. Penetrations 24 IN DIA or less: ASTM A269, ASTM A312 or ASTM A554, Schedule 40. c. Penetrations larger than 24 IN DIA: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Minimum 1/4 IN thickness. 2. All other Areas: a. Steel, Hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. b. Steel, painted in accordance with specification section 09 96 00. c. Penetrations 24 IN DIA or less: ASTM A53, Schedule 40. d. Penetrations larger than 24 IN DIA: ASTM A36, Minimum 1/4 IN thickness.
24
B. Backing Rod and Sealant: See Specification Section 07 92 00.
25 26 27 28
C. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Link-Seal. 2. 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers.
29
D. Firestopping Material: See Specification Section 07 84 00.
30 31 32 33
E. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Areas listed as Corrosive Areas in PART 1: Stainless steel: ASTM A240, Type 316L. 2. All other areas: Galvanized steel: ASTM A653, G90. 3. Minimum 12 GA.
34 35 36 37
F. Commercial Wall Castings: 1. Ductile iron, ASTM A536. 2. For wet/corrosive areas either side of penetration: Stainless Steel, ASTM A352 or ASTM A995.Grade equal to connecting piping system.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
3.1
FABRICATION
40
A. Fabricate pipe sleeves in accordance with Specification Section 05 50 00.
41
B. Fabricate sheet metal sleeves in accordance with Specification Section 07 62 00.
42 43 44 45 46
C. Provide waterstop plate/anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and sleeves cast-in-place in concrete. 1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. 2. For commercial castings, cast water stop/anchor with wall pipe. 3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 2
1 2 3 4
4. 5. 6.
5 6 7 8
For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 IN larger than outside diameter of sleeve, pipe or ductwork. For commercial castings, waterstop/anchor size to be manufacturer standard. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or ductwork.
D. Factory or shop-coat painted components in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. 3.2
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Firestopping materials used in fire-resistance rated construction shall be in full compliance with Specification Section 07 84 00.
9 10
B. Seal openings and penetrations in non-fire-resistance-rated construction in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00.
11 12
C. Obtain prior approval from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 SQ IN must be made in existing or newly completed construction.
13
D. Perform HVAC penetrations in accordance with NFPA 90A.
14
E. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501.
15 16 17 18 19
F. When mechanical or electrical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures or devices necessary to permit installation later. 1. Lay out chases, holes or other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete or other work.
20 21 22
G. Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through floors in washdown areas, install sleeves with top 3 IN above finish floors. 1. In non-washdown areas, install sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces.
23 24
H. Size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts which will receive sealant seal such that free area to receive sealant is minimized and seal integrity may be obtained.
25 26
I.
For insulated piping and ducts, size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation.
27 28 29 30
J.
Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through grating, provide banding at the entire perimeter of the opening. 1. Metal grating: See Specification Section 05 50 00. 2. FRP grating: See Specification Section 06 82 00.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
K. Where pipes, conduits or ducts are removed where passing through grating: 1. Metal grating: a. Provide banding at perimeter and cover opening with 1/4 IN plate of the same material of the grating. b. See Specification Section 05 50 00. 2. FRP grating: a. Provide full depth cover meeting same loading requirement as existing material or replace grating section. b. See Specification Section 06 82 00.
40
L. Do not cut into or core drill any beams, joists, or columns.
41
M. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns.
42
N. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns, or slabs.
43 44 45 46 47
O. Field Cutting and Coring: 1. Saw or core drill with non-impact type equipment. 2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or less holes through structure following opening outline. 3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 3
1 2 3
a. b. c.
Knock out within sawcuts using impact type equipment. Do not chip or spall face of surface to remain intact. Do not allow any overcut with saw kerf.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
P. Precast-Prestressed Concrete Construction: 1. Do not cut openings or core drill vertically or horizontally through stems of members. 2. Do not locate or install sleeves or recess sleeves vertically or horizontally through or in stems of members. 3. Cast openings and sleeves into flanges of units. 4. Cast openings larger than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension in units at time of manufacture. 5. Cast openings smaller than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimensions in flanges of units at time of manufacture or field cut.
13 14
Q. Where alterations are necessary or where new and old work join, restore adjacent surfaces to their condition existing prior to start of work.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
R. Where area is blocked out to receive sheet metal sleeve at later date: 1. If blockout size is sufficient to allow placement, utilize dowels for interface of initially placed concrete and sleeve encasement concrete which is placed later. a. Size blockout based on sleeve size required plus 4 to 6 IN each side of sleeve for concrete encasement. b. Provide #4 dowels at 12 IN spacing along each side of blockout with minimum of two (2) dowels required per side. 2. If blockout size is not sufficient to allow placement of dowels, provide keyway along all sides of blockout. a. Size blockout based on sleeve size required plus 2 to 4 IN each side of sleeve for concrete encasement.
26 27
S. For interior wall applications where backer rod and sealant are specified, provide backer rod and sealant at each side of wall.
28 29 30
T. Refer to Drawings for location of fire-rated walls, floors, and ceilings. 1. Utilize firestopping materials and procedures specified in Specification Section 07 84 00 in conjunction with scheduled opening type to produce the required fire rating.
31 32
U. Use full depth expanding foam sealant for seal applications where single or multiple pipes, conduits, etc., pass through a single sleeve.
33 34
V. Do not make duct or conduit penetrations below high water levels when entering or leaving tankage, wet wells, or other water holding structures.
35 36 37 38 39
W. Modular Mechanical Seals: 1. Utilize one (1) seal for concrete thickness less than 8 IN and two (2) seals for concrete, 8 IN thick or greater. 2. Utilize two (2) seals for piping 16 IN diameter and larger if concrete thickness permits. 3. Install seals such that bolt heads are located on the most accessible side of the penetration.
40 41 42 43
X. Backer Rod and Sealant: 1. Install in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00. 2. Provide backer rod and sealant for modular mechanical seal applications. a. Apply on top side of slab penetrations and on interior, dry side wall penetrations.
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
3.3
SCHEDULES A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Floors, Roofs, Foundation Base Slabs, Foundation Walls, Foundation Footings, Partitions and Walls for Ductwork, Piping, and Conduit: 1. Provide the following opening and penetration types: a. Type A - Block out 2 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe, or conduits. b. Type B - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
c.
2.
3. 4.
Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve cast-in-place. Provide pipe sleeve with water ring for wet and/or washdown areas. d. Type D - Commercial type casting or fabrication. e. Type E - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit spools. f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit. g. Type G - Saw cut or line-drill and remove area 1 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe or conduit. h. Type H - Core drill. i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. j. Type J- Grating Banding for any field cut openings Provide seals of material and method described as follows. a. Category 1 - Modular Mechanical Seal. b. Category 2 - Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA specifications unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Refer to Specification Section 07 62 00 and roofing Specification Sections for additional requirements. c. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon sealant with backing rod and sealant used in sleeve annulus. d. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. e. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on both sides of opening. f. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both sides of opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening. g. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant or full depth expanding foam sealant depending on application. h. Category 8 - Banding for all grating openings and banding and cover plate of similar materials for abandoned openings Furnish openings and sealing materials through new floors, roofs, grating, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New Construction. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing floors, grating, roofs, partitions and walls in accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing Construction.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 5
1 2 3
SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION DUCTS
PIPING
CONDUIT
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location
C F I
7 Not Req 7
D F
Not Req Not Req 7
C F
7 Not Req
Through floors on grade above water table
C F I
4 Not Req 4
C F
I (1)
7 Not Req 7
C F
I (1)
4 Not Req 7
Through slab on grade below water table
F
Not Req
F
Not Req
F
Not Req
Through floors in washdown areas
C I
4 4
C (2) H I (1)
4 3 4
F (2) H I (1)
Not Req 3 7
Through walls where one side is a hazardous area
C F I
7 Not Req 7
D F
I (1)
Not Req Not Req 7
C F
7 Not Req
Through exterior wall below grade above water table
C F I
7 Not Req 7
C D F
F I (1)
Not Req 7
I (1)
1 Not Req Not Req 1
Through wall from tankage or wet well (above high water level) to dry well or dry area
C F I
7 Not Req 7
C D F (2) H
1 Not Req Not Req 1
C F H (2) (1) I
7 Not Req 7 7
Through wall from tankage or wet well (below high water level) to dry well or dry area
F
Not Req
F
Not Req
F
Not Req
Through exterior wall above grade
A B C
6 6 6
A B D H (2)
5 5 Not Req 5
C H (2)
5 4
Roof penetrations
A
2
A
2
A
2
Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications
A C
4 4
A C
4 4
A C F
4 4 Not Req
Grating openings and penetrations
J
8
J
8
J
8
APPLICATIONS
I (1)
4 5
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 6
1 2 3
SCHEDULE B. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DUCTS
8
CONDUIT
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
OPENING TYPE
SEAL CATEGORY
Through floors with bottom side a hazardous location
B E
7 Not Req
B (1) E (3) (2) H
7 Not Req 7
B (1) E (3) (2) H
7 Not Req 7
Through floors on grade above water table
B
7
B
7
B
7
Through slab on grade below water table
E
Not Req
E
Not Req
E
Not Req
Through floors in washdown areas
G
3
G (2) H
3 3
G H (2)
3 3
Through walls where one side is a hazardous area
B E
7 Not Req
B (1) B (3)_ E H (2)
7 1 Not Req 7
Through exterior wall below grade above water table
B
7
B (1) B (3) (2) H
Through wall from tankage or wet well (above high water level) to dry well or dry area
B E
7 Not Req
Through wall from tankage or wet well (below high water level) to dry well or dry area
E
Through exterior wall above grade
APPLICATIONS
4 5 6 7
PIPING
(1) (3)
E H (2)
7 Not Req 7
7 1 7
B (1) (3) H (2)
7 7
B E H (2)
1 Not Req 1
B (1) (3) E H (2)
7 Not Req 7
Not Req
E
Not Req
E
Not Req
G
6
G (1) (3) (2) H
5 5
G (1) (3) (2) H
5 7
Roof penetrations
G
2
G (1) (3) (2) H
2
G
2
Through interior walls and slabs not covered by the above applications
G
4
G (1) (3) H (2)
4 4
G H (2)
(1) (3)
4 4
Grating openings and penetrations
J
8
J
8
J
8
B
(1) Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits. (2) Single pipe 3 IN and smaller or single conduit. (3) Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 IN.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 01 73 20 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 01 73 29 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition, cutting and patching of existing construction where shown on Drawings, or as required to accommodate new work shown or specified. 2. Removal and protection of items identified to be saved or reused.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 4. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 6. Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork. 7. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities. 1.2
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Salvage items, designated for Owner's salvage, as a functional unit. 2. Clean, list and tag for storage. 3. Protect from damage and deliver to location designated. 4. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for operation.
1.4
37 38
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Provide documentation of demolition and removal. Indicate limits and sequencing to be used. Show and identify any items to be kept for Owner reuse or retention. 3. Provide schedule of demolition activities including overall schedule, planned utility interruptions, interruptions of Owner/Using Agency services and traffic control if required. 4. Indicating manufacturer and type of: a. Proposed non-shrink grout. b. Epoxy bonding adhesive. c. Proposed materials and methods to be used for matching and repairing existing construction.
31 32 33 34 35 36
SUMMARY
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of work.
1.5
39
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference with other operations.
40
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
41
2.1
42 43 44
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Epoxy bonding adhesive:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
2.
7 8
a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co. b. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation. Epoxy patch: a. Depth of patch: 1) Greater than 3/4 IN: Five Star MP Epoxy Patch. 2) Between 1/8 IN and 3/4 IN: Five Star Fluid Epoxy.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
9 10 11
A. Temporary Partitions: 1. Plywood: 1/2 IN minimum for interior or exterior use. 2. Paneling: 1/4 IN minimum for interior use.
12 13
B. Non-shrink Grout: 1. See Section 03 31 30.
14 15 16 17
C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: 1. See Specification Section 03 31 30. 2. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
3.1
PREPARATION
20 21 22
A. Provide and maintain temporary partitions as required in public areas. 1. Construct partitions of braced plywood in exterior areas. 2. Adequately braced paneling may be used in interior areas.
23 24
B. Provide and maintain covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work.
25
C. Provide and maintain substantial barricades and safety lights as required.
26 27
D. Provide and maintain temporary dustproof partitions where indicated or necessary. 1. Prevent infiltration of dust into occupied areas.
28
E. Provide and maintain temporary weather protection as necessary.
29 30
F. Provide adequate temporary bracing to maintain safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the structure may be subjected.
31
3.2
DEMOLITION
32 33 34 35 36
A. Cutting and Removal: 1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of new work. 2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work. 3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Modification of Existing Concrete: 1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining surfaces as specified in Specification Section 03 35 00. a. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete. 1) Core drill with 6 IN DIA core at the corners of rectangular openings to avoid overcutting at corners. b. Break out concrete after initial saw cuts in the event concrete thickness prevents cutting through. c. Where saw cutting is not possible, make openings by drilling holes around perimeter of opening and then chipping out the concrete. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. 3.
4.
1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to remaining concrete. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides and build back to required opening size by means of grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 IN from face of concrete and fill resulting holes with bonding agent and non-shrink grout. a. At liquid containing structures, coat entire surface with cementitious waterproofing mortar. Protect remaining concrete from damage. a. If existing concrete to remain becomes damaged, cease demolition and make corrections as required to avoid further damage. b. Notify Engineer immediately of any damage to remaining concrete.
13 14 15 16
C. Removal of Existing Anchor Bolts or Other Protruding Elements: 1. Remove all protruding elements. 2. Remove to a depth of 1/4 IN from finished surface. 3. Fill void with epoxy patch.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D. Matching and Patching: 1. Walls, ceilings, floors or partitions: a. Repair abutting walls, ceilings, floors or partitions disturbed by removal. b. Match and patch existing construction disturbed during installation of new work. 2. Methods and materials: a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas for areas or surfaces being repaired. b. Subject to review of Owner. 3. Reinforcing steel that is cut and exposed: a. Remove to a depth of 1/4IN. b. Fill void with epoxy patch.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E. Salvaged Items: 1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces. 2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. 3. Clean and lubricate motors and other moving parts. 4. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation. 5. Dispose of items or materials not designated for Owner's salvage or reuse. a. Promptly remove from site. 6. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on-site. 7. Carefully remove items to be salvaged and reused or to be delivered to Owner's storage. a. Store and protect items indicated on Drawings or those which have been marked by Owner to be salvaged or to be reused in Work. b. Replace any item damaged through carelessness in removal, storage, or handling with new items of same type. c. Do not reuse materials or equipment not specifically indicated or specified to be reused. 8. Preparation of equipment for storage: a. Identify each component with markings or tags to show its position in the assembly and the assembly of which it belongs. b. Place small parts of wooden boxes and clearly mark contents on the outside. c. Remove oil from oil-lubricated bearings and gear boxes and replace with storage oil. d. Grease grease-lubricated bearings. e. Replace any breather plug with solid plug. f. Megger test motor windings: Attach report of the test results to the unit and furnish one (1) copy to the Engineer. g. Attach unit to suitable crate bottom. h. Enclose unit in polyethylene film and seal all seams and the film to the base of the unit with tape. i. Construct crate of wooden slats around top and sides of unit. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 3
1 2 3 4 7
j.
Attach permanent instruction tag to outside of crate stating "This unit has been prepared for storage--replace oil, vent plugs, and lubricant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before start-up."
F. Clean Up: Transport debris and legally dispose of off-site.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 4
SECTION 01 74 13 CLEANING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Intermediate and final cleaning of Work not including special cleaning of closed systems specified elsewhere.
8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14
SUMMARY
STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials.
1.3
15 16
SCHEDULING A. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces.
17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
18
2.1
19 20 21 22
MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: 1. Compatible with surface being cleaned. 2. New and uncontaminated. 3. For Manufactured Surfaces: Material recommended by manufacturer.
23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24
3.1
CLEANING - GENERAL
25
A. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.
26 27
B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities.
28 29
C. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or sewers.
30
D. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site.
31 32
E. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies.
33
F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
34 35
G. Do not drop or throw materials from heights greater than 4 FT or less than 4 FT if conditions warrant greater care.
36 37 38
H. On completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition. 1. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of required permanent Work.
39
I.
Do not burn on-site.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CLEANING 01 74 13 - 1
1
3.2
INTERIOR CLEANING
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Keep work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel in existing facility operations. 2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. 3. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting. a. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until substantial completion. 4. Control dust in work areas of existing facilities. a. Provide protection to existing electrical and mechanical equipment as required to eliminate detrimental effects due to construction. 5. At maximum monthly intervals, check interior of existing electric panels and vacuum if dust accumulation has occurred. 6. At maximum weekly intervals, sweep all floors, including basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways, and pick up and dispose of all debris. a. Use dust suppressant sweeping compound in areas open to areas of existing facility operations.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
B. Final Cleaning: 1. Complete immediately prior to Demonstration Period. 2. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces. 3. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean. 4. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. 5. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. 6. Ventilating systems: a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 7. Replace all burned out lamps. 8. Broom clean process area floors. 9. Mop office and control room floors.
32
3.3
EXTERIOR (SITE) CLEANING
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
A. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Construction debris: a. Confine in strategically located container(s): 1) Cover to prevent blowing by wind. 2) Haul from site minimum once a week. b. Remove from work area to container daily. 2. Vegetation: Keep weeds and other vegetation trimmed to 3 IN maximum height. 3. Soils, sand, and gravel deposited on paved areas and walks: a. Remove as required to prevent muddy or dusty conditions. b. Do not flush into storm sewer system.
43 44 45 46
B. Final Cleaning: 1. Remove trash and debris containers from site. a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers. 2. Clean paved roadways.
47
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
48 49
A. Immediately prior to Demonstration Period, conduct an inspection with Engineer to verify condition of all work areas.
50
END OF SECTION
51
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CLEANING 01 74 13 - 2
52 53
SECTION 01 75 00 FACILITY START-UP
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures and actions, required of the Contractor, which are necessary to achieve and demonstrate Substantial Completion. 2. Requirements for Substantial Completion Submittals.
9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 01 61 03 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 40 90 00 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. 1.2
DEFINITIONS
15 16 17 18
A. Project Classified System (PCS): A defined part of the Project, consisting of an arrangement of items, such as equipment, structures, components, piping, wiring, materials, or incidentals, so related or connected to form an identifiable, unified, functional, operational, safe, and independent system.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B. Pre-Demonstration Period: The period of time, of unspecified duration after initial construction and installation activities during which Contractor, with assistance from manufacturer's representatives, performs in the following sequence: 1. Finishing type construction work to ensure the Project or each PCS has reached a state of Substantial Completion. 2. Equipment start-up. 3. Personnel training.
26 27 28 29 30 31
C. Demonstration Period: A period of time, of specified duration, following the Pre-Demonstration Period, during which the Contractor initiates process flow through the Project Classified System and starts up and operates the Project Classified System facility, without exceeding specified downtime limitations, to prove the functional integrity of the mechanical and electrical equipment and components and the control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the Project Classified System as evidence of Substantial Completion.
32
D. Substantial Completion: See the General Conditions.
33
1.3
SUBMITTALS
34 35
A. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Submit in the chronological order listed below prior to the completion of the Pre-Demonstration Period. 1. Master operation and maintenance training schedule: a. Submit 30 days (minimum) prior to first training session for Owner's personnel. b. Schedule to include: 1) Target date and time for Owner witnessing of each system initial start-up. 2) Target date and time for Operation and Maintenance training for each system, both field and classroom. 3) Target date for initiation of Demonstration Period. c. Submit for review and approval by Owner. d. Include holidays observed by Owner. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
e.
2.
1.4
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Attend a schedule planning and coordination meeting 90 calendar days prior to first anticipated training session. 1) Provide a status report and schedule-to-complete for requirements prerequisite to manufacturer's training. 2) Identify initial target dates for individual manufacturer's training sessions. f. Owner reserves the right to insist on a minimum seven (7) days' notice of rescheduled training session not conducted on master schedule target date for any reason. g. Schedule to be resubmitted until approved. Substantial Completion Submittal: a. File Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection. b. Approved Operation and Maintenance manuals received by Engineer minimum 30 days prior to scheduled training. c. Written request for Owner to witness each system pre-demonstration start-up. 1) Request to be received by Owner minimum one (1) week before scheduled training of Owner's personnel on that system. d. Equipment installation and pre-demonstration start-up certifications. e. Letter verifying completion of all pre-demonstration start-up activities including receipt of all specified items from manufacturers or suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Project Classified Systems (PCS's) established as follows: 1. PCS No. 1 – Headworks Facility (Series 10). 2. PCS No. 2 – Influent Pump Station (Series 11). 3. PCS No. 3 – Influent Forcemain (Series 03). 4. PCS No. 4 – Primary Clarifier Splitter Box. 5. PCS No. 5 – Anaerobic Digester System: a. Digester No. 1. b. Digester No. 2. c. Sludge Holding Tank. d. Digester Control Building. e. Filtrate Pump Station. f. Digester Gas Flare. g. All related equipment. 6. PCS No. 6 – Dewatering Facility. 7. PCS No. 7 – Dewatered Cake Storage. 8. PCS No. 8 – Compost Building Demolition.
1.5
38
COST OF START-UP A. Contractor to pay all costs associated with Facility start-up.
39
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
40
PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
3.1
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
GENERAL A. Facility Start-up Divided into Two Periods: 1. Pre-Demonstration Period including: a. Completion of construction work to bring Project to a state of Substantial Completion. b. Start-up of Equipment. c. Training of Personnel. d. Completion of the filing of all required submittals. e. Filing of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection. 2. Demonstration Period including:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
a. 3.2
Demonstration of functional integrity of facility or PCS.
PRE-DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. Completion of Construction Work: 1. Complete the work to bring the PCS to a state of substantial completion. B. Equipment Start-up: 1. Requirements for individual items of equipment are included in the Technical Specification Sections. 2. Prepare the equipment so it will operate properly and safely and be ready to demonstrate functional integrity during the Demonstration Period. 3. Perform Equipment Start-up to extent possible without introducing product flow. 4. Test tanks, pumping and similar equipment requiring a fluid, using non-potable plant water supplied by the Owner. 5. Introduce product flow to complete Equipment Start-up for the following equipment: a. Headworks. b. Influent Fine Screens. c. Grit Classifier. d. Grit Removal System e. Influent Pump Station Wet Well. f. Primary Clarifier Splitter Box. g. Anaerobic Digesters 1 and 2. h. Boilers. i. Main Loop Hot Water Pumps. j. Heat Exchanger Hot Water Pumps. k. Boiler Loop Hot Water Pumps. l. Heat Exchangers. m. Digested Sludge Recirculation Pumps. n. Belt Filter Press Feed Pumps. o. Sludge Holding Tank. p. Filtrate Pump Station. q. Filtrate Pumps. r. Belt Filter Press. s. Washwater Booster Pumps t. Polymer Blenders u. Non-Potable Water Pumps v. Submersible Mixers 6. Procedures include but are not necessarily limited to the following: a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of: 1) Power, control, and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source. 2) Voltage of all circuits. 3) Phase sequence. 4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems. 5) Alignment of connected machinery. 6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems. 7) Lubrication. 8) Valve orientation and position status for manual operating mode. 9) Tankage for integrity using non-potable water. 10) Pumping equipment using non-potable water. 11) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception, and response. a) See Specification Section 40 90 00. 12) Tagging and identification systems. 13) All equipment: Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment. b. Calibrate all safety equipment.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
c. d. e.
7.
Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. "Bump" start electric motors to verify proper rotation. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make the equipment ready for Demonstration Period. f. Documentation: 1) Prepare a log showing each equipment item subject to this paragraph and listing what is to be accomplished during Equipment Start-up. 2) Provide a place for the Contractor to record date and person accomplishing required work. 3) Submit completed document before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion certification. Obtain certifications, without restrictions or qualifications, and deliver to Engineer: a. Manufacturer's equipment installation check letters (sometimes referred to as Manufacturer’s Field Services report). b. Instrumentation Supplier's Instrumentation Installation Certificate.
C. Personnel Training: 1. See individual equipment specification sections. 2. Conduct all personnel training after completion of Equipment Start-up for the equipment for which training is being conducted. a. Personnel training on individual equipment or systems will not be considered completed unless: 1) All pretraining deliverables are received and approved before commencement of training on the individual equipment or system. 2) No system malfunctions occur during training. 3) All provisions of field and classroom training specifications are met. b. Training not in compliance with the above will be performed again in its entirety by the manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Field and classroom training requirements: a. Hold classroom training on-site. b. Notify each manufacturer specified for on-site training that the Owner reserves the right to video record any or all training sessions. 1) Organize each training session in a format compatible with video recording. c. Training instructor qualification: Factory trained and familiar with giving both classroom and "hands-on" instructions. d. Training instructors: 1) Be at classes on time. 2) Session beginning and ending times to be coordinated with the Owner and indicated on the master schedule. 3) Normal time lengths for class periods can vary, but brief rest breaks should be scheduled and taken. e. Organize training sessions into maintenance verses operation topics and identify on schedule. f. Plan for minimum class attendance of -15 people at each session and provide sufficient classroom materials, samples, and handouts for those in attendance. g. Instructors to have a typed agenda and well prepared instructional material. 1) The use of visual aids, e.g., films, pictures, and slides is recommended for use during the classroom training programs. 2) Deliver agendas to the Engineer a minimum of seven (7) days prior to the classroom training. 3) Provide equipment required for presentation of films, slides, and other visual aids. h. In the on-site training sessions, cover the information required in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted according to Specification Section 01 33 0001 33 00 and the following areas as applicable to PCS's. 1) Operation of equipment. 2) Lubrication of equipment. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
i. j.
3) Maintenance and repair of equipment. 4) Troubleshooting of equipment. 5) Preventive maintenance procedures. 6) Adjustments to equipment. 7) Inventory of spare parts. 8) Optimizing equipment performance. 9) Capabilities. 10) Operational safety. 11) Emergency situation response. 12) Takedown procedures (disassembly and assembly). Address above Paragraphs 1), 2), 8), 9), 10), and 11) in the operation sessions. Address above Paragraphs 3), 4), 5), 6), 7), and 12) in the maintenance sessions. Maintain a log of classroom training provided including: Instructors, topics, dates, time, and attendance.
15 16 17 18
D. Complete the filing of all required submittals: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Training material.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
E. Filing of Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection of Project or PCS: 1. File the notice when the following have been completed: a. Construction work (brought to state of Substantial Completion). b. Equipment Start-up. c. Personnel Training. d. Submittal of required documents. 2. Engineer will review required submittals for completeness within 5 calendar days of Contractor's notice. If complete, Engineer will complete inspection of the Work, within 10 calendar days of Contractor's notice. 3. Engineer will inform Contractor in writing of the status of the Work reviewed, within 14 calendar days of Contractor's notice. a. Work determined not meeting state of Substantial Completion: 1) Contractor: Correct deficiencies noted or submit plan of action for correction within 5 days of Engineer's determination. 2) Engineer: Reinspect work within 5 days of Contractor's notice of correction of deficiencies. 3) Reinspection costs incurred by Engineer will be billed to Owner who will deduct them from final payment due Contractor. b. Work determined to be in state of tentative Substantial Completion: Engineer to prepare tentative "Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion." c. Engineer's Certificate of Substantial Completion: 1) Certificate tentatively issued subject to successful Demonstration of functional integrity. 2) Issued for Project as a whole or for one or more PCS. 3) Issued subject to completion or correction of items cited in the certificate (punch list). 4) Issued with responsibilities of Owner and Contractor cited. 5) Executed by Engineer. 6) Accepted by Owner. 7) Accepted by Contractor. d. Upon successful completion of Demonstration Period, Engineer will endorse certificate attesting to the successful demonstration, and citing the hour and date of ending the successful Demonstration Period of functional integrity as the effective date of Substantial Completion.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
3.3
DEMONSTRATION PERIOD A. General: 1. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the mechanical, electrical, and control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the PCS as evidence of Substantial Completion. 2. Duration of Demonstration Period: a. PCS No. 1: 720 consecutive hours. b. PCS No. 2: 336 consecutive hours. c. PCS No. 3: Not applicable. d. PCS No. 4: Not applicable. e. PCS No. 5: 1080 consecutive hours. f. PCS No. 6: 168 consecutive hours. g. PCS No. 7: Not applicable. h. PCS No. 8: Not applicable. 3. Digester startup and purging: a. General: Each digester shall be purged of air with inert gas before startup occurs. b. Purge digester headspace in accordance with NFPA 54 and 69. c. Suggested purging sequence: 1) Digester shall be filled with NPW (provided by Owner) to max water level to reduce headspace. 2) Close all valves and hatches to isolate from the rest of the digester gas system. Refer to 40 05 00 for purging requirements for digester gas piping and equipment. 3) Adjust pressure relief valves to 2 IN WC. 4) Provide pressurized inert gas into the headspace. Allow pressure relief valves to relieve gas. 5) Test gas leaving digester head space until all air has been vented from headspace. 6) Purge inert gas with fuel gas. 7) Purging is now complete. 8) Adjust pressure relief valves back to specified. 9) Complete digester gas piping and equipment purging if not already done. 10) Open all valves and allow digester gas system to be connected as intended. d. Discharge of purged gases: 1) Open end of piping shall not discharge into confined spaces or areas where there are sources of ignition. e. Hot Water System Startup: 1) Startup and test hot water system including boilers, hot water pumps, temperature control valves, heat exchanger and digester recirc pumps when digester is filled with NPW. 2) Pre-Demonstration a) Pumps and Heat Exchangers shall be operated with water for a minimum of 8 hours to check for leaks and demonstrate the functionality of the Digester Recirculation and Heating Systems. b) Inlet/outlet pressure readings at the pumps and heat exchangers shall be recorded. c) Inlet/outlet water temperature readings at the heat exchangers shall be recorded. f. Digester Startup: 1) Owner will send TWAS and primary sludge to the digesters. NPW will be supplanted over time. 2) Provide lime or caustic soda feed from temporary totes as needed to stabilize ph. Contractor to provide (2) totes per digester. 3) Boilers will operate on natural gas during startup. 4) Continue to test digester gas over period of weeks, until digester gas meets required BTU content needed by boiler manufacturer. Once this is met, switch boiler to digester gas.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
4.
If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate amount of time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustments to any equipment or systems that renders the affected equipment or system inoperative exceed 10 percent of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of functional integrity will be deemed to have failed. a. In the event of failure, a new Demonstration Period will recommence after correction of the cause of failure. b. The new Demonstration Period shall have the same requirements and duration as the Demonstration Period previously conducted. 5. Conduct the demonstration of functional integrity under full operational conditions. 6. Owner will provide operational personnel to provide process decisions affecting plant performance. a. Owner's assistance will be available only for process decisions. b. Contractor will perform all other functions including but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period. 7. Owner reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, etc., to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes. 8. Demonstration by PCS: a. Contractor may demonstrate by PCS, either individually or a combination of two or more PCS. 9. Time of beginning and ending any Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner, and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period. 10. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide knowledgeable personnel to answer Owner's questions, provide final field instruction on select systems and to respond to any system problems or failures which may occur. a. Provide final field instruction on the following systems: 1) Belt Filter Press. 2) Digester external draft tube mixers. 3) Digester gas flare. 4) Boilers. 5) Influent screens. 6) Grit system. b. For the above systems, provide instruction, divided among the systems as follows: 1) Provide final field instruction on the following systems, as noted in the schedule in sub-article 3.4. 2) Minimum hours are listed. 3) Assume field and training visits are separate trips. 4) Assume hrs over 16 require multiple, separate trips. 11. Provide all labor, supervision, utilities, chemicals, maintenance, equipment, vehicles or any other item necessary to operate and demonstrate all systems being demonstrated. 3.4
MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICE AND TRAINING SCHEDULE
Section No.
Section Title
Field Service (hrs)
Training (hrs)
23 52 00
Boilers
40
16
26 29 23
Variable Frequency Drives: Low Voltage
Refer to spec
Refer to spec
26 32 14
Engine Generator: Diesel
16
4
26 36 00
Transfer Switches
8
8
40 05 59
Fabricated Slide Gates
8
0
40 91 10
Primary Meters and Transmitters
24
16
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 7
2
41 12 13
Belt Conveyors
32
8
41 12 14
Conveyors: Shaftless Screw
24
8
41 22 23
Hoists, Trolleys, and Monorails
8
4
43 13 00
Digester Gas Conditioning
24
8
43 13 43
Digester Gas Flare
16
8
43 23 14
Pumping Equipment: Non-clog Centrifugal
8
8
43 23 16
Pumping Equipment: End Suction Centrifugal Pumps
8
8
43 23 19
Pumping Equipment: Horizontal Chopper Pumps
8
8
43 23 57
Pumping Equipment: Progressive Cavity
8
8
43 24 16
Pumping Equipment: Sump
0
4
43 24 27
Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (line shaft)
8
8
43 25 13
Pumping Equipment: Submersible Non-clog
8
8
46 21 33
Rotary Drum Screen
24
16
46 23 23
Grit Collection and Concentration System
40
16
46 24 23
Sludge Grinders
0
4
46 33 33
Liquid Polymer Feed Equipment
8
16
46 53 48
Submersible Mixers
0
4
46 73 35
Digester Gas Equipment
4 per mfr
4 per mfr
46 73 36
Digester Mixing System: Draft Tube Mechanical
24
16
46 73 42
Digester Heating Equipment
4
4
46 76 21
Belt Filter Press
32
16
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FACILITY START-UP 01 75 00 - 8
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Description of procedures to be followed and related work required to accomplish an orderly transfer of Project deliverables from the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER.
8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
DEFINITIONS
12 13 14 15
A. Punch List: The stated qualification accompanying either the ENGINEER's Certificate of Substantial Completion or the Certificate of Final Payment, or any list of construction items found to be deficient or incomplete through review of the Work by ENGINEER and communicated in writing to CONTRACTOR at any time during the Contract Period.
16
B. Record Drawings: Drawings showing changes made during actual construction.
17
1.3
SUBMITTALS
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Substantial Completion: 1. CONTRACTOR to notify ENGINEER that the CONTRACTOR considers the Work as a whole or portions of the Work, in the form of Project Classified Systems, to be in Substantial Completion and request for a Substantial Completion inspection. 2. Record Drawings. 3. Certificates of Inspection and Occupancy if required in local jurisdiction. 4. A list of Work not yet completed and not to be considered for Substantial Completion. 5. Registry of training sessions conducted and list of attendees for: a. Specified manufacturer's operation and maintenance training. b. Specified CONTRACTOR's operation and maintenance training during Facility Startup. 6. Register of final maintenance and lubrication of filter and/or oil lube-protected equipment. 7. Inventory of extra materials and spare parts ready for delivery to the OWNER. a. Organize by Specification Sections. 8. Summary report identifying the submittal dates and approval dates of: a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment included in the Work to be considered substantially complete. b. Manufacturer's Installation Certification Letters. 9. Two copies of each special warranty specified in Division 02 through 46 Specification Sections.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Final Completion: 1. CONTRACTOR to notify OWNER that the CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work to have progressed to Final Completion and provide the following documents: a. Submittals required for Substantial Completion. b. Record Drawings. c. "Contractor's Affidavit, Release and Waiver of Claim." d. Consent of Surety with Power of Attorney attached. e. Sales Tax Certification. f. Letter indicating actual M/WBE participation, if any, on project. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1
1 2
g. h.
Evidence of payments, if requested by OWNER. Final Payment Request.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
3.1
6 7
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, ADJUSTMENT AND RELEASE OF RETAINAGE A. See Article 6 of the Agreement.
3.2
INSPECTION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. When the items of Work on the Punch List(s) have been completed, and CONTRACTOR considers the Work of the entire Project is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of OWNER's representative and are operational. 5. Work has received Final Cleaning: Section 01 74 13. 6. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
17 18
B. OWNER will make an inspection with the CONTRACTOR to verify the status of completion within 14 calendar days after receipt of such certification.
19 20 21 22 23 24
C. Should OWNER consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. Notify the CONTRACTOR in writing within 7 calendar days, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. CONTRACTOR: Remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to OWNER that the Work is complete. 3. OWNER will reinspect the Work.
25
3.3
FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
26
A. Complete demobilization prior to submitting final application for payment.
27 28
B. Submit final application for payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
29 30
C. OWNER will review application and recommend final payment within 10 calendar days of receipt of application.
31
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2
SECTION 03 01 03 CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10
A. Section Includes: 1. The method and materials necessary for the structural rehabilitation of environmental structures utilizing a spray or trowel applied calcium aluminate cementitious system. a. The rehabilitation of interior influent pump station wet well wall surfaces as specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Refer to the Bid Form where it references each system.
11 12 13 14 15
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 01 30 – Existing Concrete Repair 4. Section 09 97 00 – Protective Coatings.
16
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. Referenced Standards and Guidelines: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI). a. 546R, Concrete Repair Guide. b. RAP (Repair Application Procedures) Bulletins. c. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of ACI 546R govern the performance of the work of this Specification Section. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 IN or [50- mm] Cube Specimens). b. C293, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam With Center-Point Loading). c. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. d. C496, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. e. C596, Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing Hydraulic Cement. f. C882, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear. g. C1583, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method). 3. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): a. 9001, Quality Management Systems-Requirements. 4. Occupational Safety and Health Organization (OSHA). 5. Building code: a. North Carolina Building Code: 1) North Carolina Building Code and associated standards, 2012 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
46 47 48 49
B. Qualifications: 1. Work crew: a. Repair material manufacturer: Maintain a listing of competent contractors that have demonstrated requisite skill and training to be qualified applicators of their materials. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
b.
2.
3.
22 23 24 25 26
Prior to Project award, the Contractor must satisfy the Engineer that all Contractor’s work crew personnel have performed satisfactory work in similar capacities elsewhere for a sufficient period of time to be fully qualified to properly perform the work in accordance with the Project's requirements. c. Foreman: Have at least four (4) years experience with similar work and Project conditions. d. Nozzleman: Be qualified by having had similar work experience. 1) Low pressure nozzleman must be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the product being applied. Approved applicator qualifications include but are not necessarily limited to: a. A minimum of five (5) years experience in applying cement based products similar to those specified in this Specification Section. b. Subcontractor/applicator: Submit a list of five (5) previous jobs that successfully utilized the specified repair system. c. A letter from the manufacturer of the specified materials, on the manufacturer's letterhead, signed by an officer of the company, stating that the subcontractor/applicator has been trained in the proper techniques for the preparation of the surface, and proper methods for mixing, placing, curing, caring and injection techniques of the manufacturer's products. Mortar mixer having at least seven (7) years of successful performance in similar applications.
C. Mock-Ups: 1. Designate 4 FT x 4 FT wall and floor areas as references for surface finish acceptance. 2. Owner will utilize such reference samples to define minimum level of quality of workmanship acceptable for the Project. 1.3
DEFINITIONS
27 28 29 30
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
31
B. MPII: Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Complete data pertaining to the surfaces of the structure to be rehabilitated, the rehabilitation product, surface preparation and installation. c. At the request of the manufacturer, Contractor shall test for adverse chemical conditions that may hinder overall product performance. d. Reinforcing steel. 3. Certifications: a. Furnish a certificate of "Compliance with Specifications" for all materials supplied. b. ISO 9001 certificate for product manufacturer. c. Contractor and subcontractor qualifications. 4. Warranties: a. Submit information verifying such . 5. Work plan: Include proposed methods of installation and plans for installing repair materials taking into account sun, heat, wind, ambient air temperature or other limitations of facilities that may prevent proper finishing or curing.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 2
1 2 3
6. 1.5
Safety plan: Contractor is to comply with OSHA standards and all regulations pertaining to the work including confined space entry.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
4 5
A. Deliver materials to the site appropriately packaged and labeled to indicate manufacturer's name, type, grade and color.
6
B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's precautions.
7
C. Follow manufacturer's instructions for handling components.
8 9 10 11
D. Store materials with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. 1. Store in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. 1.6
12 13 14
WARRANTY A. Warranties: 1. Provide a service life that is supported by documented test analysis. 2. Warranty materials and workmanship for a minimum of ten (10) years.
15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
16
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following mortar manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Calcium Aluminate Mortar: a. Strong-Seal. b. Kerneos Inc. c. Pre-Approved Equal 2. Mortar: a. Sika. 3. Bonding agent and reinforcement protection: a. Sika "Armatec 110 EpoCem." b. Euclid "Duralprep AC."
28
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
2.2
MATERIALS A.
Calcium Aluminate Mortar: 1. Furnish a prepackaged mortar mix, including all cement, aggregates, and any required additives. a. Provide mix with a minimum seven (7) years of successful performance in similar applications. 2. Chemical composition limits of the cement and any aggregate portion of the mortar mix: Al2O3 38-44%
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
3.
4. 5.
CaO 35-40%
FeO+ Fe2O3 9-17%
SiO2 <7%
Calcium aluminate mortar mix acceptable manufacturers and product (see Paragraph 2.1A.1.d.): a. Strong-Seal QSR. b. "SewperCoat PG" or "SewperCoat 2000HS Regular" manufactured by Kerneos Inc. Design the calcium aluminate mortar mix to withstand long-term exposure to a bacterially corrosive hydrogen sulfide environment that may be expected to produce a pH of 1 on normal Portland cement concrete. Potable Water: Add to produce mortar suitable for spray application.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B. Mortar Material: 1. Furnish a prepackaged proprietary mortar mix, including all cement, aggregates, and any required additives. a. Provide mix with a minimum seven (7) years of successful performance in similar applications. 2. Mortar mix acceptable manufacturers and product: a. Sikacem 103F. 3. Potable Water: Add to produce mortar suitable for spray application. 2.3
EQUIPMENT
10 11 12 13
A. Contractor to provide all equipment necessary to individually gage, control, and monitor the actual amounts of all component materials necessary to complete the installation. 1. Type of equipment and methods used to gage, control, and monitor component materials is subject to approval by the Engineer and/or product manufacturer.
14
B. Spray type approved by the material manufacturer.
15 16
C. Alternate equipment may be utilized provided it meets the performance requirements of this Specification Section and as approved by product manufacturer.
17
D. All equipment must be kept in sound operating condition and good repair.
18
2.4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Mortar Mix: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109): a. 48 HRS: Greater than 6,000 psi. b. 28 days: Greater than 7,000 psi. 2. Flexural strength (ASTM C293): a. 24 HRS: Greater than 1,000 psi. b. 28 days: Greater than 1,400 psi. 3. Splitting tensile strength (ASTM C496): a. 24 HRS: Greater than 800 psi. 4. Slant shear test (ASTM C882): a. 28 days: Greater than 2,300 psi. 5. Shrinkage at 28 days (ASTM C596): Less than 1/10 percent cured at 90 percent relative humidity.
32
PART 3 - EXECUTION
33
3.1
GENERAL
34 35
A. All preparation, mixing, installation, application equipment, finishing and curing: Be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
36
B. Halt all work when weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of work.
37
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
38 39 40 41 42 43
A. Ensure all sub-surfaces are clean and free of laitance, loose material, residue and all existing coating and lining materials. 1. For detailed explanation of the required surface preparation see Specification 09 97 00 and appropriate ACI RAP Bulletins and ICRI 310.2. 2. The more stringent preparation requirements shall control. 3. ACI 546R also provides a good reference on the subject.
44
B. Legally dispose of all waste product off-site.
45 46 47
C. Substrate: 1. Assure compatibility of calcium aluminate mortar with all substrate including any local concrete products used previously or as part of this project. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 4
1 2 3
2. 3. 3.3
Thoroughly saturate with clean water prior to the application of the lining materials. Saturate and free the existing surface of any running water prior to installation.
APPLICATION
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Spray Material: 1. Do not apply to a frozen surface or to a surface that may freeze within 24 HRS of application. a. Frozen conditions are ambient temperatures of 32 DegF or below. 2. Thoroughly mix by mechanical means to ensure all agglomerated particles are reduced to original size or removed prior to placement into the application equipment. 3. Entirely discharge each batch of material before recharging with fresh material. 4. Clean mixing equipment at regular intervals to remove all adherent materials. 5. Add water to the mix per manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Remixing or tempering is not permitted. a. Do not use rebound materials.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Responsibilities prior to the application: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Ensure proper equipment selection and operation follows ICRI 320.1R. 3. Regulate the water content so the applied materials consistently achieve proper compaction with a low percentage of rebound and no visible sag. 4. Ensure the installation equipment nozzle is held at the proper distance away from and as nearly perpendicular to the prepared sub-surface as the working conditions will permit to secure maximum material compaction with minimum rebound and no visible sag. 5. Follow a sequence routine that will fill corners with adequately compacted material applied at a maximum practicable layer thickness. 6. Determine necessary operating procedures for placement in confined spaces, extended distances or around unusual obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may need to be adjusted. 7. Ensure slough pockets are removed and prepared for installation of replacement material. 8. Bring the installed materials to specified profile in a neat and timely manner.
30
C. Sequence of Application: Bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
31 32 33 34
D. If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. 1. Replace such defects as the work progresses.
35 36 37 38
E. Suspend Application: 1. If air velocity separates the cement from the aggregate at the nozzle. 2. If ambient temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed product cannot be protected and insulated.
39 40 41 42
F. The time interval between successive layers of material application must be sufficient to allow "tackiness" to develop but not final set. 1. If final set does occur, prepare this surface in accordance with the SURFACE PREPARATION Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
43 44 45 46 47
G. Avoid construction joints within a structure. 1. In the event a construction joint is necessary and approved by the Engineer, slope off to a thin, clean, regular edge, at a 45 degree angle. 2. Prior to placement of the adjoining materials, thoroughly clean the sloped portion and adjacent applied material, as necessary, then moisten and scour with an air jet.
48
H. Nozzleman: Bring the material to an even plane and to well-formed corners.
49 50
I.
After the primary body coat has been placed, true the surface with a thin-edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 5
1
1.
Properly fill low areas with additional material to insure a true, flat surface.
2 3 4
J.
5 6
K. Finished surfaces shall be smooth trowelled to mimic the initial construction smooth steel form finish.
7 8 9 10 11
L. Adjacent Areas or Grounds: 1. Adequately protect from being permanently discolored, stained or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound material. 2. If necessary, clean by early scraping, brushing or washing as the surroundings permit. 3.4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Minimum Thickness, unless otherwise specified: 1. For other larger structures (lift stations, wet wells, treatment plant structures, etc.): 0.25 IN cover over all surfaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sampling and Testing: 1. Contractor to employ and pay for the cost of sampling and testing of the mortar mix during placement and the surface to which it is applied. a. Provide other testing required to show conformance with this Specification Section. b. Submit certified test reports and certificates in duplicate to the Engineer and Owner. 2. Test applied mortar materials used on the Project using a recognized and Engineer-approved independent testing agency or laboratory. ASTM C1583 is the recommended procedure for non-horizontal areas; minimum adhesion tensile strength shall be 150 psi. a. The manufacturer, instead of an independent laboratory, may test Project sample specimens, provided the Owner, Engineer, and manufacturer are in agreement of this testing method prior to Project award. b. Test specific materials at locations selected by the Engineer. Testing frequency shall be one per every 500 SF of applied material. c. Contractor shall repair areas destructively tested with original material. 3. Do not incorporate any materials failing to meet the requirements of this Specification Section into the work plan.
3.5
CURING
29 30 31
A. Contractor shall apply a curing compound to all repaired surfaces. 1. Curing compound shall meet the requirements of ASTM C309 and have the approval of the lining material manufacturer and the Engineer prior to use.
32 33 34 35 36 37
B. Moist curing may be used in lieu of curing compound. 1. If moist curing is selected, it should be implemented immediately after product has attained reasonable set so as not to be damaged or affected by wet curing means. 2. Moist curing can consist of the use of soaker hoses, water sprinklers, burlap kept wet, or vapor/misting machines. 3. Regardless of delivery method, continue moist curing for a minimum of 18 HRS.
38 39 40 42
3.6
CLEAN-UP A. Expeditiously remove all waste and construction materials from work area. 1. Time is of the essence in returning structure for Owner's use.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE REHABILITATION USING SPRAY APPLICATION 03 01 03 - 6
SECTION 03 01 30 EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Furnishing of materials, labor, tools, and equipment necessary to repair deteriorated concrete as described in Contract Documents.
8 9 10 11 12
B. Related Section includes but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 1 - General Requirements. 2. Division 3 - Concrete. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings, Painting and Protective Coatings.
13
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ACI unless otherwise specified, ACI requirements govern the performance of the work of this section. 2. ASTM C 109, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars. 3. ASTM C 157, Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Cement Mortar and Concrete. 4. ASTM C 882, Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Use with Concrete Specification. 5. ASTM C 1583, Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by Direct Tension (Pull-off Method).
24 25 26 27
B. Contractor shall furnish the name of all subcontractors which it proposes to use for this work including necessary evidence and/or experience records to ascertain their qualifications in the application of epoxy, polyurethane, polymer-modified and cement-based compounds, and hydrophilic resins, as applicable.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
C. Approved applicator qualifications shall include: 1. A minimum of five years experience in applying epoxy, and polymer-modified calcium aluminate mortar and cement based compounds similar to those specified in this Section. 2. A minimum of three years experience in applying hydrophilic resins, if applicable. 3. The subcontractor/applicator shall submit a list of five previous jobs that successfully utilized the specified repair systems to be used. 4. A letter from the manufacturer of the specified materials, on the manufacturer’s letterhead, signed by an officer of the company, stating that the subcontractor/applicator has been trained in the proper techniques for the preparation of the surface, and proper methods for mixing, placing, curing, caring and injection techniques of the manufacturer’s products.
38
1.3
DEFINITIONS
39
A. Rehabilitation: Concrete rehabilitation includes concrete repair as described in this section.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Concrete Repairs are classified as follows: 1. Type 1 - Concrete Surface Repair: To be used for greater than 2.5 inch deep spalled delaminated and deteriorated concrete. This repair shall consist of cleaning all surface areas that need to be repaired, and placing, finishing, and curing repair mortar, extended with 3/8” aggregate as appropriate and recommended by manufacturer. 2. Type 2 - Concrete Surface Repair: To be used for up to 2.5 inch deep spalled, delaminated and deteriorated concrete. The surface repair material shall be repair mortar. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. 4.
1.4
Type 3 - Crack Repair: To be used for concrete repair for 1/16 IN to 1/4 IN wide cracks. The structural crack repair shall use epoxy crack filler material. Non-structural crack repair utilizes hydrophilic filler material. Type 4 - Expansion Joint Repair: To be used to replace existing expansion joint material. Includes the removal of existing backer rod, joint filler and sealant and installation of new material.
SUBMITTALS
8 9 10 11 12
A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shall submit manufacturer’s product information and recommended placement procedures for all repair materials. 2. Submit the method of performing pull-out testing of repair material and shall submit information on testing equipment and accessory materials to be used in the test.
13 14 15
B. Certification: Ingredients: Submit laboratory test reports and mill or manufacturer’s certificates verifying that ingredients conform to specified requirements and have a minimum of six month’s residual shelf life when shipped.
16 17 18
C. Documentation: Proposed methods of installation and plans for placing concrete patching and filling cracks taking into account sun, heat, wind, ambient air temperature or other limitations of facilities that will prevent proper finishing or curing.
19
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
20 21
A. Deliver materials to the site appropriately packaged and labeled to indicate manufacturer’s name, type, grade and color.
22
B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s precautions.
23
C. Follow manufacturer’s precaution for handling components.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Base Repair Mortar: a. Five Star Structural Concrete, manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc. b. SikaRepair SHA, SikaTop 123 Plus, SikaTop 111 Plus, manufactured by the Sika Corporation. c. Emaco S88-CI or S66-CI, manufactured by BASF. d. Verticoat Supreme manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company. e. Or approved equal. 2. Calcium Aluminate Lining Mortar: a. Kerneos Inc. b. Heidelberger Calcium Aluminates (Calucem). c. Sauereisen. d. It is assumed the above firms are capable of providing a product meeting requirements of this Specification Section. e. Or approved equal. 3. Crack injection material: a. Epoxy resin: 1) Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod L.V. and Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel, as manufactured by Sika Corporation. 2) Eucopoxy Injection Resin, as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. 3) Or approved equal. b. Hydrophilic resin: 1) Duroseal Inject, as manufactured by BBZ USA, Inc.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4.
2.2
2) SikaFix HH Hydrophilic, by Sika Corporation. 3) Or approved equal. Bonding Agent/Corrosion Inhibitor: a. Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem. b. Duralbond by Euclid Chemical. c. Duralprep AC by Euclid Chemical. d. Or approved equal.
MATERIALS A. Repair Mortars (Non-calcium Aluminate): 1. Repair mortar shall be prepackaged cement-based and modified (polymer or latex) product specifically formulated for the repair of concrete surface defects. It shall have the following properties: Physical Property Compressive Strength (minimum) at 1 day at 28 days Bond Strength (minimum) at 28 days
Value
ASTM Standard C-109
2000 psi 6000 psi C-882 (*) 1800 psi
(*) Modified for use with repair mortars. 14 15 16 17
2.
Where the least dimension of the placement, in width or thickness, exceeds 4 inches, the repair mortar shall be extended by addition of aggregate as recommended by the manufacturer.
18 19
B. Crack Injection Material: Epoxy for injection shall be a low viscosity, high modulus moisture insensitive type.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
C. Calcium Aluminate Lining Mortar Material: 1. Furnish a prepackaged mortar mix, including all cement, aggregates, and any required additives. a. Provide mix with a minimum seven (7) years of successful performance in similar applications. 2. Chemical composition limits of the cement and any aggregate portion of the mortar mix: Al2O3 38-44%
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
3.
4.
CaO 35-40%
FeO+ Fe2O3 9-17%
SiO2 <6%
Mortar mix acceptable manufacturers and product (see Paragraph 2.1A.1.d.): a. "SewperCoat PG" or "SewperCoat 2000HS Regular" manufactured by Kerneos Inc. b. "ISTRA 40 (or 50)" manufactured by Heidelberger Calcium Aluminates (Calucem). c. "SewerSeal F-120" manufactured by Sauereisen. Design the mortar mix to withstand long-term exposure to a bacterially corrosive hydrogen sulfide environment that may be expected to produce a pH of 1 on normal Portland cement concrete.
D. Calcium Aluminate Mortar Mix: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109): a. 24 HRS: Greater than 5,000 psi. b. 28 days: Greater than 7,000 psi. 2. Flexural strength (ASTM C293): a. 24 HRS: Greater than 1,000 psi. b. 28 days: Greater than 1,500 psi. 3. Splitting tensile strength (ASTM C496): 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4. 5. 6.
a. 24 HRS: Greater than 900 psi. Adhesion strength (ASTM D7234) a. 28 days: greater than 150 psi. Bond Strength-Slant shear test (ASTM C882): a. 28 days: Greater than 2,000 psi. Shrinkage at 28 days (ASTM C596): Less than 1/10 percent cured at 90 percent relative humidity.
8
E. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Specification Section 03 21 00.
9
F. Potable Water: Add to produce mortar suitable for spray application.
10 11 12 13 14 15
G. Expansion Joint Sealant and Backer Rod: 1. Replace the existing expansion joint sealant and backer rod with new material in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00. 2. If additional joint filler is needed for installation of backer rod, use additional backer rod for this purpose. 3. Use polysulfide rubber sealant suitable for immersion in wastewater or sewage.
16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
17
3.1
PREPARATION
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A. Contractor shall perform a condition survey of each structure before scheduling repair work. Prior to conducting the survey, all concrete surfaces shall be power washed (4000 PSI minimum, with orbital nozzle) to facilitate the survey. Submit the procedure for the condition survey for prior approval by the Engineer. The survey shall include, but is not limited to, visual inspection for: deficiencies in joints, cracks, leakage, scaling, spalling, exposed reinforcing, extent of chemical attack using phenolphthalein, and previous repairs; delamination survey; and half-cell measurements for corrosion of reinforcement. Submit the results of the survey to the Engineer to determine the extent of repair work. The results shall clearly indicate the size, length, width, and depth of all deficiencies.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B. One-hundred percent of wall areas shall be repaired. All laitance, foreign material, and all loose, broken, softened, and acid contaminated concrete removed by chipping (only 15 and 30 pound pneumatic chipping hammers to be used with pointed shipping ends, 30 pound hammer limited to large areas and away from reinforcement) and/or a heavy abrasive blasting shotblasting or hydroblasting. The surface shall be further roughened as required to 1/4-inch amplitude textured surface. Additional surface preparation steps recommended by the manufacturer shall be performed.
34 35 36 37
C. Where existing reinforcing bars are exposed, concrete shall be removed to a minimum of one inch all around the bars. If the existing bars are cut through, cracked, or the cross sectional area is reduced by more than 20 percent, provide a supplemental same size bar lapped per details. Coat all reinforcing with corrosion inhibitor specified.
38 39 40
D. The perimeter of the damaged area shall be score cut to a minimum depth of 3/8 inch and a maximum depth so as not to cut any existing reinforcing steel. Existing concrete shall be chipped up to the score line so that the minimum thickness of repair mortar is 3/8 inch.
41 42
E. The recommendations of both repair material and bonding agent manufacturers shall be followed.
43 44 45 46
F. Injection Ports/Packers – Establish port holes using a 1/2 or 5/8 IN (1.27 to 1.59 cm) rotohammer bit at a 45 degree angle (approximate) to the crack or joint being injected. Alternate holes from side-to-side if possible. Injection ports shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
47 48
3.2
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Non-Structural Crack Injection Repair:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
All cracks identified by the Engineer as non-structural shall be repaired with a hydrophilic resin as specified herein. Hydrophilic resin shall be pressure injected into all cracks as indicated by the Engineer. Installation instructions and recommendations by the manufacturer shall be followed. Location of Injection Ports: Injection ports shall be spaced as recommended by the manufacturer and as needed to insure complete penetration of the joint of crack with the injected material. Spacing of injection ports shall not exceed 2 feet. Drilling Ports: Holes for injection ports shall be drilled to the depth needed for proper distribution of the injected material. Care shall be taken to not damage any reinforcing steel. Port Preparation: Holes for injection ports shall be cleaned of all debris and fitted with an injection fitting as provided by the manufacturer of the injected material or equal. The injection fitting shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s instructions and will remain in place until injection work has been completed at that area. Caps or valves will be installed at the injection ports to prevent back flow or the uncured injected material after it has been injected. Injection Procedure: a. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer and their representatives for all mixing and injection procedures. b. All cracks shall be sealed at the surface where needed to provide for complete penetration of the injected material and to prevent loss of material. c. Prior to sealing material injection, water shall be injected into the ports in order to flush the crack clean and to verify continuity between adjacent ports until it begins to flow from an adjacent or nearby port. d. If the water injection procedure indicates the potential presence of voids within members or behind members resting against soil, the Engineer shall be notified immediately. e. Beginning at the lowest injection port, inject the sealing material until it begins to flow from an adjacent or nearby port. Repeat the process until the crack is completely filled. In general, the port to port travel of the injection process will be from low to high in a continuous operation. f. If port to port continuity does not occur at locations where continuity was verified through water injection, mark location and notify the Engineer. g. Avoid sudden application of high pressures during the injection process. h. After completion of the injection operation, all ports and surface sealing materials shall be removed so as to leave an undamaged surface. i. Minimum ambient temperature shall be 45 Fº or as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Structural Crack Repair: 1. All cracks identified by the Engineer as structural shall be repaired with an epoxy resin as specified herein. Epoxy shall be pressure injected into all cracks in damaged concrete as indicated by the Engineer in those structures included in the scope of work listed herein. Installation instructions and recommendations by the epoxy manufacturer shall be followed. 2. Cracks shall be injected with sufficient pressure to ensure full penetration of the epoxy buy without causing further damage. 3. The location, drilling, and preparation of ports for injection shall be as required for chemical grout herein. 4. Epoxy Injection: a. Follow the instructions of the epoxy manufacturer and their representatives for all mixing and injection procedures. b. All cracks shall be sealed at the surface where needed to provide for complete penetration of the injected epoxy and to prevent loss of material. c. Beginning at the lowest injection port, inject the epoxy until it begins to flow from an adjacent or nearby port. Repeat the process until the crack is completely filled. d. If port to port continuity does not occur, mark the location and notify the Engineer. e. Avoid sudden application of high pressures during the injection process. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 5
1 2 3
f. g.
After completion of the injection operation all ports and surface sealing materials shall be removed so as to leave an undamaged surface. Minimum ambient temperature shall be 45 Fº or as recommended by manufacturer.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Repair Mortar (All Types): 1. The procedures recommended by the manufacturer for preparing surfaces, mixing and placement of the repair mortar shall be followed. 2. After the initial mixing of the repair mortar, additional water shall not be added to change the consistency should the mix begin to stiffen. Discard as necessary. 3. Repair mortar shall be placed to a minimum thickness as recommended by the manufacturer but not less than 3/8 inch. Repair mortar shall be applied so that the minimum, cover over existing sound coarse aggregate is 3/8”, or 2” cover over exposed reinforcing steel, which ever requires more mortar. 4. Do not place repair mortar so as to create locally raised areas. Where there is a transition with wall surfaces which are not in need of repair, the repair mortar shall not be feathered at the transition. A score line shall be saw cut to not less than the minimum repair mortar depth and concrete chipped out to it to form the transition. Care shall be taken to not cut or otherwise damage any reinforcing steel. 5. The repair mortar shall be placed to an even, uniform plane to restore the member to its original surface finish and plane. Tolerance for being out of plane shall be such that the gap between a 12-inch straight edge and the repair mortar surface does not exceed 1/4 inch and the gap between a 48-inch straight edge and the repair mortar surface does not exceed 3/8 inches. This shall apply to straight edges placed in any orientation at any location. 6. Steps shall be taken to prevent exposed plastic mortar surfaces from drying. Windbreaks, foggers, and/or evaporation retarders shall be standing by during all finishing operations. Foggers shall maintain the humidity 2 ft. to 3 ft. above the surface of the concrete. If necessary evaporation retarder between finishing operations shall be applied. 7. The repair mortar shall receive a smooth, steel troweled finish.
28 29 30
D. Expansion Joint Sealant and Backer Rod: 1. Use materials and installation methods in accordance with sealant manufacturer recommendations.
31
3.3
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
CURING A. Curing shall follow immediately behind the final finish. Curing shall be performed by a combination of covering the concrete with a layer of wet burlap and the application of a liquid membrane-forming curing compound. The sequence, at the Contractor’s option, shall be selected to retain moisture in the slab for a minimum of 7 days.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In-Situ Pull-Off Tests 1. In situ pull-off tests shall be performed on repaired areas at locations established by the Engineer. One pull-off test per ASTM C1583 shall be performed for every single wall surface of all tanks. Failure of any pull-off test shall require additional test locations as specified by the Engineer. Such additional tests shall be at the cost of the Contractor. 2. Pull-off tests shall consist of core drilling through the repair or topping material to a minimum of 1/2 inch beyond the joint surface with the existing concrete. Reinforcing steel shall not be damaged by core drilling. A steel disk with integral rod or pipe shall be bonded to the surface of the core connected to a tensioning device. Tension at 150 psi shall be applied parallel to the axis of the core, at a uniform rate of increase not to exceed 75 pounds every 5 seconds.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.
4. 5.
The pull-out test shall pass if failure occurs within the existing concrete substrate (cohesive concrete failure). If failure occurs at the joint surface with the existing concrete (bond failure), within the repair material, or at the connection to the testing device, the pull-out test shall pass if the unit tensile stress acting on the core cross section at failure exceeds 300 psi. If failure occurs within the repair material, additional test samples of the repair material in the area of the test shall be taken for compressive testing to verify the strength of the repair material. Such additional test shall be at the cost of the Contractor. The tensioning device shall have a load measuring dial accurate to within +/- 2 percent. All damage done during in situ testing operations shall be repaired by the Contractor.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B. Defective Repair: 1. A repair will be considered defective if a single pull-out test fails or if Schmidt-Hammer test gives results less then 3500 psi for repair mortars and 3000 psi for topping grout at any location in seven days, or if the repair is not properly finished and within specified tolerances. 2. Concrete repair material in place that is deemed structurally defective must be removed. 3. Replace, strengthen or correct defective concrete repair material as directed.
17 18 19 20 21 22
C. Damaged Work: 1. Before final acceptance of the work, neatly repair damaged surfaces, corners of concrete and concrete finish. 2. Where surface repairs are permitted, finish damaged areas to smooth, dense watertight condition. 3. Replace concrete patching material that is not satisfactorily installed.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
D. Corrective Work 1. If correction of defects is approved, remove defective concrete. Key area to be repaired, clean and soak surface with water and patch with approved materials. Patch concrete so as to match existing. 2. Clean surface cavities produced by form ties, other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other effects. Saturate with water and point with a mortar consisting of patching material paste. Follow patching material manufacturer’s recommendations concerning placement, pot life, and curing. 3. Prepare pointing material not more than 30 minutes prior to use. Cure mortar patches properly. Carefully tool contraction and articulated joints in completed work and keep them free of concrete. Where necessary, leave joint filler exposed for its full length with clean and true edges. 4. Tolerance deviations and other surface defects may also be corrected, if approved, by grinding high areas of swales. 5. Where corrective work is unsatisfactory, completely remove such work and replace with new work complying with specified requirements.
39
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid EXISTING CONCRETE REPAIR 03 01 30 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 05 05 CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Contractor requirements for testing of concrete and grout. 2. Definition of Owner provided testing. 3. Acceptance criteria for concrete.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 5. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing and Curing. 6. Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 7. Section 13 34 24 – Reinforced Concrete Tank Roof Dome. 1.2
RESPONSIBILITY AND PAYMENT
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Owner will hire an independent Testing Agency/Service Provider to perform the following testing and inspection and provide test results to the Engineer and Contractor. 1. Testing and inspection of concrete and grout produced for incorporation into the work during the construction of the Project for compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Additional testing or retesting of materials occasioned by their failure, by test or inspection, to meet requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Strength testing on concrete required by the Engineer or Special Inspector when the watercement ratio exceeds the water-cement ratio of the typical test cylinders. 4. In-place testing of concrete as may be required by Engineer when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. 5. Other testing services needed or required by Contractor such as field curing of test specimens and testing of additional specimens for determining when forms, form shoring or reshoring may re removed. 6. Owner will pay for services defined in Paragraph 1.2A.1. 7. See Specification Section 01 30 00.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
B. Contractor shall hire a qualified testing agency to perform the following testing and provide test results to the Engineer. 1. Testing of materials and mixes proposed by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Documents and retesting in the event of changes. 2. Additional testing and inspection required because of changes in materials or proportions requested by Contractor. 3. Contractor shall pay for services defined in Paragraphs 1.2B.1. and 1.2B.2. 4. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for testing services defined in Paragraphs 1.2A.2., 1.2A.3., 1.2A.4. and 1.2A.5. 5. See Specification Section 01 30 00.
43 44 45 46 47
C. Duties and Authorities of Testing Agency/Service Provider: 1. Any Testing Agency/Service Provider or agencies and their representatives retained by Contractor or Owner for any reason are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to reject, approve or accept any portion of the Work.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2. 3.
4. 1.3
Testing Agency/Service Provider shall inform the Contractor and Engineer regarding acceptability of or deficiencies in the work including materials furnished and work performed by Contractor that fails to fulfill requirements of the Contract Documents. Testing Agency to submit test reports and inspection reports to Engineer and Contractor immediately after they are performed. a. All test reports to include exact location in the work at which batch represented by a test was deposited. b. Reports of strength tests to include detailed information on storage and curing of specimens prior to testing. Owner retains the responsibility for ultimate rejection or approval of any portion of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. b. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL). b. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. c. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. d. C42, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. e. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. f. C138, Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. g. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. h. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. i. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. j. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. k. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. l. C1218, Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. m. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
38 39 40 41 42
B. Qualifications: 1. Contractor’s Testing Agency: a. Meeting requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM C94. b. Provide evidence of recent inspection by CCRL of NBS, and correction of deficiencies noted.
43 44 45
C. Use of Testing Agency and approval by Engineer of proposed concrete mix design shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with Contract Documents.
46
1.4
47 48 49 50 51
DEFINITIONS A. Testing Agency/Service Provider: An independent professional testing/inspection firm or service hired by Contractor or by Owner to perform testing, inspection or analysis services as directed, and as provided in the Contract Documents.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1. 2.
3.
See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. Product technical data including: a. Concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. 1) Include results of all testing performed to qualify materials and to establish mix designs. 2) Place no concrete until approval of mix designs has been received in writing. 3) Submittal for each concrete mix design to include: a) Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates. b) Test for aggregate organic impurities. c) Proportioning of all materials. d) Type of cement with mill certificate for the cement. e) Brand, quantity and class of fly ash proposed for use along with other submittal data as required for fly ash by Specification Section 03 31 30. f) Slump. g) Brand, type and quantity of air entrainment and any other proposed admixtures. h) Shrinkage test results. i) Total water soluble chloride ion concentration in hardened concrete from all ingredients determined per ASTM C1218. j) 28-day compression test results and any other data required by Specification Section 03 31 30 to establish concrete mix design. Certifications: a. Testing Agency qualifications.
25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
3.1
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
TESTING SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED SERVICE PROVIDER/TESTING AGENCY A. The following concrete testing will be performed by the Service Provider/Testing Agency: 1. Concrete strength testing: a. Secure concrete samples in accordance with ASTM C172. 1) Obtain each sample from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding selection of test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. 2) Sample shall be taken at the discharge of concrete poump if pumping is used. b. For each strength test, mold and cure cylinders from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. 1) Record any deviations from requirements on test report. 2) Cylinder size: Per ASTM C31. a) 4 IN cylinders shall not be used for concrete mixes with maximum aggregate size larger than 1 IN. b) Use the same size cylinder for all tests for each concrete mix. 3) Quantity: a) 6 IN DIA by 12 IN high: Four (4) cylinders. b) 4 IN DIA by 8 IN high: Six (6) cylinders. c. Field cure one (1) cylinder for the seven (7) day test. 1) Laboratory cure the remaining. d. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. 1) 6 IN DIA cylinders: a) Test two (2) cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and the one (1) field cured sample at seven (7) days for information. b) Hold remaining cylinder in reserve.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
2.
3. 4. 5. 3.2
39 40 41 42
2) 4 IN DIA cylinders: a) Test three (3) cylinders at 28 days for strength test result and the one (1) field cured cylinder at seven (7) days for information. b) Hold remaining cylinders in reserve. e. Strength test result: 1) Average of strengths of two (2) 6 IN DIA cylinders or three (3) 4 IN DIA cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2) If one (1) cylinder in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, handling, curing, or testing, discard and test reserve cylinder(s); average strength of remaining cylinders shall be considered strength test result. 3) Should all cylinders in any test show any of above defects, discard entire test. f. Frequency of tests: 1) Concrete sand cement grout: One (1) strength test for each 4 HR period of grout placement or fraction thereof. a) Test grout in accordance with ASTM C1019. 2) Concrete topping, concrete fill and lean concrete: One (1) strength test for each 60 CY of each type of concrete or fraction thereof placed. 3) Precast concrete: Frequency per Specification Section 03 41 33. 4) All other concrete: a) One (1) strength test to be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 60 CY or fraction thereof placed in any one (1) day. b) Once for each 5000 SQ FT of slab or wall surface area placed each day c) If total volume of concrete on Project is such that frequency of testing required in above paragraph will provide less than five (5) strength tests for each concrete mix, tests shall then be made from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five (5) batches are provided. Slump testing: a. Determine slump of concrete sample for each strength test. 1) Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143. b. If consistency of concrete appears to vary, the Engineer or Owner’s Representative shall be authorized to require a slump test for each concrete truck. 1) This practice shall continue until three consecutive batches are determined to be consistent and meet the slump requirements specified. Air content testing: Determine air content of concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. Temperature testing: Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. In-place concrete testing (if required).
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Special Inspections and Testing:. 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
3.3
SAMPLING ASSISTANCE AND NOTIFICATION FOR OWNER
43 44 45 46 47 48
A. To facilitate testing and inspection, perform the following: 1. Furnish any necessary labor to assist Testing Agency in obtaining and handling samples at site. 2. Provide and maintain for sole use of Testing Agency adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of test specimens on site for first 24 HRS as required by ASTM C31. 3. Take samples at point of placement into concrete member.
49 50
B. Notify Owner's Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations (minimum of 24 HRS) to allow for assignment of personnel and for scheduled completion of quality tests.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 4
1
3.4
ACCEPTANCE
2 3
A. Completed concrete work which meets applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification.
4 5
B. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification.
6 7 8 9 10
C. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected as provided in these Contract Documents. 1. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that concrete work complies with requirements. 2. Modifications, as directed by Engineer, to be made at no additional cost to Owner.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
D. Dimensional Tolerances: 1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by tolerances shall be considered potentially deficient in strength and subject to modifications required by Engineer. 2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by tolerances may be rejected and excess material subject to removal. a. If removal of excess material is permitted, accomplish in such a manner as to maintain strength of section and to meet all other applicable requirements of function and appearance. 3. Concrete members cast in wrong location may be rejected if strength, appearance or function of structure is adversely affected or misplaced items interfere with other construction. 4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding limits of tolerances and which are exposed to view, may be rejected. a. Repair or remove and replace if required. 5. Finished slabs exceeding tolerances may be required to be repaired provided that strength or appearance is not adversely affected. a. High spots may be removed with a grinder, low spots filled with a patching compound, or other remedial measures performed as permitted or required.
30 31 32 33 34 35
E. Appearance: 1. Concrete surfaces exposed to view with defects which, in opinion of Engineer, adversely affect appearance as required by specified finish shall be repaired by approved methods. 2. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective appearance unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, the defects impair the long-term strength or function of the member.
36 37 38 39 40
F. High Water-Cement Ratio: 1. Concrete with water in excess of the specified maximum water-cement ratio will be rejected. 2. Remove and replace concrete with high water-cement ratio or make other corrections as directed by Engineer.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
G. Strength of Structure: 1. Strength of structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if it fails to comply with any requirements which control strength of structure, including but not necessarily limited to following: a. Low concrete strength: 1) Test results for standard molded and cured test cylinders to be evaluated separately for each mix design. a) Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with specified quality standards. b) For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix design shall be represented by at least three (3) strength tests. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
c)
2. 3.
4. 5.
A strength test shall be the average of two (2) 6 IN diameter cylinders or three (3) 4 IN diameter cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. 2) Acceptance: a) Strength level of each specified compressive strength shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: (1) Average of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required specified 28 day compressive strength. (2) No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28 day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. b. Reinforcing steel size, configuration, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement at variance with requirements in Specification Section 03 21 00 or requirements of the Contract Drawings or approved Shop Drawings. c. Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength. d. Curing time and procedure not meeting requirements of this Specification Section. e. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature during early stages of hardening and strength development. f. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or premature removal of formwork likely to result in deficient strength. g. Concrete defects such as voids, honeycomb, cold joints, spalling, cracking, etc., likely to result in deficient strength or durability. Structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required when strength of structure is considered potentially deficient. In-place testing of concrete may be required when strength of concrete in place is considered potentially deficient. a. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure or for selecting areas to be cored. 1) Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. b. Core tests: 1) Where required, test cores will be obtained in accordance with ASTM C42. a) If concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 DegF, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for seven (7) days before test then test dry. b) If concrete in structure will be wet or subjected to high moisture atmosphere under service conditions, test cores after immersion in water for at least 40 HRS and test wet. c) Testing wet or dry to be determined by Engineer. 2) Three (3) representative cores may be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. a) Location of cores shall be determined by Engineer so as least to impair strength of structure. b) If, before testing, one (1) or more of cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure, damaged core shall be replaced. 3) Concrete in area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if average strength of three (3) cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Fill core holes with non-shrink grout and finish to match surrounding surface when exposed in a finished area. If core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required and their results evaluated in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 20. Correct or replace concrete work judged inadequate by structural analysis or by results of core tests or load tests with additional construction, as directed by Engineer, at Contractor's expense.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 6
1 2 3 5
6.
Contractor to pay all costs incurred in providing additional testing and/or structural analysis required.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION 03 05 05 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 11 13 FORMWORK
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork requirements for concrete construction.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 5. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 2. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
23 24 25 26 27
B. Qualifications: 1. Formwork, shoring and reshoring to be designed by a licensed professional engineer currently registered or having a minimum of three (3) years experience in this type of design work. a. Above qualifications apply to slabs and beams not cast on the ground.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
C. Miscellaneous: 1. Design and engineering of formwork, shoring and reshoring as well as its construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Design requirements: a. Design formwork for loads, lateral pressures and allowable stresses outlined in ACI 347R and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses and other applicable requirements of the controlling local Building Code. 1) Where conflicts occur between the above two (2) standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. b. Design formwork to limit maximum deflection of form facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view to 1/240 of span between structural members. 3. For slabs and beams not cast on the ground, develop a procedure and schedule for removal of shores and installation of reshores and for calculating the loads transferred to the structure during this process in accordance with ACI 347R. a. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon. Calculations shall be performed by a licensed professional engineer. b. When developing procedure, schedule and structural calculations, consider the following at each stage of construction: 1) The structural system that exists. 2) Effects of all loads during construction. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3) Strength of concrete. 4) The influence of deformations of the structure and shoring system on the distribution of dead loads and construction loads. 5) The strength and spacing of shores or shoring systems used, as well as the method of shoring, bracing, shore removal, and reshoring including the minimum time intervals between the various operations. 6) Any other loading or condition that affects the safety or serviceability of the structure during construction. 1.3
10 11
DEFINITIONS A. Words and terms used in these Specifications are defined in ACI CT-13.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for the requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer and type of proposed form materials. c. Manufacturer and type of proposed form ties.
19 20
B. Samples: 1. A 12 IN SQ sample of each of the following form finishes.
21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
22
2.1
MATERIALS
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A. Forms for Surfaces Exposed to View: 1. Wood forms: a. 5/8 or 3/4 IN 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade. b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel. 2. Metal forms: a. Metal forms may be used except for aluminum in contact with concrete. b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide members of uniform thickness.
31 32 33
B. Forms for Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 1. Wood or metal sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2. Do not use aluminum forms.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
2.2
ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. Commercially fabricated for use in form construction. a. Field fabricated ties are unacceptable. 2. Constructed so that ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling at surfaces of the concrete. 3. Embedded portion of ties to be not less than 1-1/2 IN from face of concrete after ends have been removed. 4. Cone size: a. 3/4 IN minimum diameter cones on both ends. b. Depth of cone not to exceed the concrete reinforcing cover. 5. Provide ties with built-in waterstops in all walls that will be in contact with process liquid during plant operationor below grade soil. 6. Through-wall ties that are designed to be entirely removed are not allowed in all walls that will be in contact with process liquid during plant operation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 2
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
PREPARATION
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A. Form Surface Treatment: 1. Before placing of reinforcing steel or concrete, cover surfaces of forms with an approved release material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete, will not stain concrete or prevent bonding of future finishes. a. A field applied form release agent or sealer of approved type or a factory applied nonabsorptive liner may be used. 2. Do not allow excess form release material to stand in puddles in forms nor in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
11 12 13 14 15
B. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed, and to limit height of free fall of concrete to prevent aggregate segregation. 1. Temporary openings to limit height of free fall of concrete shall be spaced no more than 8 FT apart.
16 17 18
C. Clean surfaces of forms, reinforcing steel and other embedded materials of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed.
19
3.2
ERECTION
20
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
B. Tolerances: 1. Conform to ACI 117. 2. Variation from plumb: a. In lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in risers. 1) Maximum in any 10 FT of height: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire height: 1/2 IN. b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any 20 FT length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 IN. 3. Variation from level or from grades specified: a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of supporting shores. 1) Maximum in any 10 FT of length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum in any bay or in any 20 FT length: 3/8 IN. 3) Maximum for entire length: 3/4 IN. b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other exposed to view lines: 1) Maximum in any bay or in 20 FT length: 1/4 IN. 2) Maximum for entire length: 1/2 IN. 4. Variation of linear structure lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions: a. Maximum in any bay: 1/2 IN. b. Maximum in any 20 FT of length: 1/2 IN. c. Maximum for entire length: 1 IN. 5. Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: Maximum of +1/2 IN. 6. Variation in horizontal plan location of beam, column and wall centerlines from required location: Maximum of +1/2 IN. 7. Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: Maximum of -1/4 IN, +1/2 IN. 8. Footings and foundations: a. Variations in concrete dimensions in plan: -1/2 IN, +2 IN. b. Misplacement or eccentricity: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1) 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 IN. Thickness: 1) Decrease in specified thickness: 5 percent. 2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit except that which may interfere with other construction. 9. Variation in steps: a. In a flight of stairs: 1) Rise: +1/8 IN. 2) Tread: +1/4 IN. b. In consecutive steps: 1) Rise: +1/16 IN. 2) Tread: +1/8 IN. 10. Establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of Project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances. 11. Regardless of tolerances listed allow no portion of structure to extend beyond legal boundary of Project. 12. To maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork prior to hardening of concrete. c.
20
C. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete.
21 22
D. Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in exposed to view corners of forms to produce 3/4 IN wide beveled edges.
23 24 25 26 27 28
E. At construction joints, overlap contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view over hardened concrete in previous placement by at least 1 IN. 1. Hold forms against hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain a true surface. 2. Where possible, locate juncture of built-in-place wood or metal forms at architectural lines, control joints or at construction joints.
29 30 31 32 33 34
F. Circular Wall Forms: 1. Where circular walls are to be formed and forms made up of straight sections are proposed for use, provide straight lengths not exceeding 2 FT wide, unless noted otherwise. 2. Circular wall forms for the Headworks Grit Tank and Grit Well (see 10S-Series) shall be plywood forms designed to create a smooth radius wall with no straight sections. 3. Brace and tie formwork to maintain correct position and shape of members.
35 36
G. Construct wood forms for wall openings to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling.
37 38
H. Anchor formwork to shores or other supporting surfaces or members so that movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete placement.
39 40
I.
Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs, supported directly on formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel.
41 42 43 44 45
J.
Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and take up all settlement during concrete placing operation. 1. Securely brace forms against lateral deflection. 2. Fasten wedges used for final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement in position after final check.
46 47 48 49 50
3.3
REMOVAL OF FORMS A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads places thereon.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 4
1 2 3
B. When required for concrete curing in hot weather, required for repair of surface defects or when finishing is required at an early age, remove forms as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support.
4 5 6 7
C. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. 1. Perform any needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces at once, followed by curing specified in Specification Section 03 31 31.
8 9
D. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete.
10 11 12
E. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal. 1. For walls of water containing structures, leave forms in place for a minimum of 72HRS.
13 14 15 16 17
F. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete in place until concrete has attained its specified 28 day compressive strength. 1. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer's structural calculations.
18 19 20
G. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that non-load-carrying form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports, facing material may be removed when concrete has sufficiently hardened to resist damage from removal.
21
3.4
RESHORING
22 23 24 25
A. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon.
26 27
B. While reshoring is underway, no superimposed dead or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction.
28 29
C. During reshoring do not subject concrete in structural members to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads that structural members can adequately support.
30 31
D. Place reshores as soon as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of working day on which stripping occurs.
32
E. Tighten reshores to carry their required loads without overstressing.
33 34
F. Shoring, reshoring and supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer's structural calculations.
35 36 37 38
G. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete leave original supporting shores in place or reshore. 1. Reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist anticipated loads. 2. Locate reshores directly under a shore position above.
39 40 41
H. In multi-story buildings, extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads in such a manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded.
42 43 44 45 47
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FORMWORK 03 11 13 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 15 19 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for all cast-in-place anchor bolts, anchor rods, reinforcing adhesive anchorage, and post-installed concrete anchors required for the Project but not specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Design of all concrete anchors not indicated on the Drawings including, but not limited to, installation of anchors into concrete for the following structural and nonstructural components: a. Structural members and accessories. b. Metal, wood, and plastic fabrications. c. Architectural components. d. Mechanical and electrical equipment and components. e. Plumbing, piping, and HVAC work. f. All other components requiring attachment to concrete.
18 19 20 21 22 23
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 09 91 96 – High Performance Industrial Coatings. 5. Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Support Systems.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. b. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. c. 355.2, Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete. d. 355.4, Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete. 2. American Concrete Institute/Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (ACI-CRSI): a. Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program: Adhesive Anchor Installer. 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. c. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. d. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. e. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. f. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. g. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. h. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. i. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. j. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. k. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
l. 5. 6.
F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. ICC Evaluation Service (ICC-ES): a. AC193, Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements. b. AC308, Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B. Qualifications: 1. Anchor designer for Contractor-designed post-installed anchors and cast in place anchorage shall be a professional engineer licensed in the State that the Project is located in. 2. Installer for post-installed anchors shall be trained by the manufacturer or certified by a training program approved by the Engineer. 3. Installer for adhesive anchors installed in horizontal, upward incline, or overhead applications shall be certified by ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program.
18 19 20 21
C. Post-installed anchors and related materials shall be listed by the following agencies: 1. ICC-ES. 2. Engineer approved equivalent. DEFINITIONS
1.3
22 23 24 25
A. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Post-installed anchors developing their strength primarily from chemical bond between the concrete and the anchor. 2. Includes anchors using acrylics, epoxy and other similar adhesives.
26
B. Anchor Bolt: Any cast-in-place anchorage that is made of a headed (i.e. bolt) material.
27 28
C. Anchor Rod: Any cast-in-place or post-installed anchorage made from unheaded, threaded, rod or deformed bar material.
29
D. Concrete Anchor: Generic term for either an anchor bolt or an anchor rod.
30 31 32
E. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard.
33
F. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153.
34 35 36 37
G. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
38
H. MPII: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
39 40 41 42 43 44
I.
45 46 47
J.
48
1.4
Mechanical Anchors: 1. Post-installed anchors developing their strength from attachment other than thru adhesives or chemical bond to concrete. 2. Includes expansion anchors, expansion sleeve, screw anchors, undercut anchors, specialty inserts and other similar types of anchorages. 3. Drop-in anchors and other similar anchors are not allowed.
Post-Installed Anchor: Any adhesive or mechanical anchor installed into previously placed and adequately cured concrete. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1. 2.
See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that submitted products meet requirements of referenced standards. b. Manufacturer material data sheet for each anchor. 1) Clearly indicate which products on the data sheet are proposed for use on the Project. c. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. d. Current ICC-ES report for each post-installed anchor system indicating the following: 1) Certification that anchors meet all requirements indicated in this Specification. 2) Performance data showing that anchor is approved for use in cracked concrete. 3) Seismic design categories for which anchor system has been approved. 4) Required installation procedures. 5) Special inspection requirements for installation. e. Anchorage layout drawings and details: 1) Indicate anchor diameter, embedment, length, anchor type, material and finish. 2) Drawings showing location, configuration, spacing and edge distance. f. Contractor Designed Post-Installed Anchors: 1) Show diameter and embedment depth of each anchor. 2) Indicate compliance with ACI 318, Appendix D. 3) Design tension and shear loads used for anchor design. 4) Engineering design calculations: a) Indicate design load to each anchor. b) When the design load is not indicated on Drawings, include calculations to develop anchor forces based on Design Criteria listed herein. c) Sealed and signed by contractor’s professional engineer. d) Calculations will be submitted for information purposes only. 5) Type of post-installed anchor system used. a) Provide manufacturer's ICC-ES report for the following: (1) Mechanical anchorage per ICC-ES AC193. (2) Adhesive anchorage per ICC-ES AC308.
32 33 34 35
B. Samples: 1. Representative samples of concrete anchors may be requested by Engineer. Review will be for type and finish only. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusively the responsibility of the Contractor.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certification of qualifications for each installer of post-installed anchors. a. Indicate successful completion or certification for each type of approved post-installed anchor as required by the Contract Documents. b. Provide one of the following for each type of anchor, as required by this specification section: 1) Letter from manufacturer documenting successful training completion for mechanical and adhesive anchors. 2) Certification of completion for Engineer approved program.
47
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
48 49
A. Deliver products to job site in manufacturer’s or distributor’s packaging undamaged and complete with installation instructions.
50 51
B. Store above ground on skids or other supports to keep items free of dirt and other foreign debris and to protect against corrosion.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 3
1 2
C. Protect and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent damage or deterioration.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
2.1
MATERIALS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Cast-in-place Concrete Anchors: 1. Building, nonbuilding structures, and equipment: a. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 for threaded rods. b. ASTM A307, Grade A for galvanized headed bolts. 2. All other cast-in-place concrete anchors: a. Stainless steel with matching nut and washer. b. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316. c. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316.
13 14 15 16
B. Post-Installed Mechanical and Adhesive Concrete Anchors: 1. Stainless steel with matching nut and washer. 2. Submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 316. 3. Non-submerged application: ASTM F593, Type 304 or Type 316.
17
C. Reinforcement: See Section 03 21 00.
18 19
D. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi.
20 21
E. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi.
22 23 24 25 26 27
F. Washers: 1. ASTM F436 unless noted otherwise. 2. If stainless steel anchorage is being used for cast-in-place anchorage, furnish washers of the same material and alloy as in the accompanying anchorage. 3. Plate washers: Minimum 1/2 IN thick fabricated ASTM A36 square plates as required. 4. Follow manufacturer’s requirements for all post-installed anchorage.
28 29 30 31 32
G. Nuts: 1. ASTM A563 for all cast-in-place anchorage. 2. If stainless steel anchorage is being used for cast-in-place anchorage, nuts shall meet ASTM F594 and be the matching material and alloy as in the accompanying anchorage. 3. Follow manufacturer’s requirements if using post-installed anchorage.
33 34 35 36 37
H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions. 2. ASTM A780. 3. Zinc content: Minimum 92 percent in dry film. 4. ZRC "ZRC Cold Galvanizing" or Clearco "High Performance Zinc Spray."
38
I.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
2.2
Dissimilar Materials Protection: See Specification Section 09 96 00.
CONTRACTOR DESIGNED ANCHORAGE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Post-installed anchor systems for the listed manufacturers will be considered only if a current ICC-ES evaluation report is submitted in accordance with the SUBMITTALS Article in PART 1 of this Specification Section and if the anchor system is approved by the Engineer. a. Hilti. b. Powers Fasteners. c. Simpson Strong-Tie. 2. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. B. Contractor shall design the anchorage when any of the following occur:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 4
1 2 3 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
5 6 7 8
Design load for concrete anchorage is shown on the Drawings. When specifically required by the Contract Documents. When an anchorage is required but not specified in the Drawings. When anchorage is shown on Drawings other than Structural Drawings.
C. Anchorage Design Loads: 1. Determine all of the design loads, including wind and seismic loads, per the Building Code. a. Anchorage of equipment and non-structural components: Use the actual dead and operating loads provided by the manufacturer.
9 10
D. When Contract Drawings, other than the Structural Drawings, indicate an anchor diameter or length, the Contractor design shall incorporate these as “minimums.”
11 12 13 14 15
E. Cast-in-Place Concrete Anchors: 1. Provide the material, nominal diameter, embedment length, spacing, edge distance and design capacity to resist the calculated load based on the requirements given in the Building Code including ACI 318, Appendix D. 2. Design assuming cracked concrete.
16 17 18 19 20 21
F. Post-installed Concrete Anchors: 1. Provide the manufacturer’s system name/type, nominal diameter, embedment depth, spacing, minimum edge distance, cover, and design capacity to resist the specified or calculated load based on requirements given in the Building Code, ACI 318, Appendix D and current ICCES report, for the anchor to be used. 2. Design assuming cracked concrete.
22
2.3
ENGINEER DESIGNED ANCHORAGE
23 24
A. When the size, length and details of anchorages are shown on Contract Structural Drawings, Contractor design of anchorage is not required unless otherwise indicated.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Additional newer post-installed anchor systems for the listed manufacturers will be considered only if a current evaluation agency report is submitted in accordance with the SUBMITTALS Article in PART 1 of this Specification Section, the anchor system is certified by ICC-ES for cracked concrete conditions, and if approved by the Engineer. 2. Mechanical Anchors: a. Hilti: 1) Kwik Bolt 3 (ICC-ES ESR-2302). 2) HDA Undercut (ICC-ES ESR-1546). b. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Strong-Bolt (ICC-ES ESR-1771). 2) Strong-Bolt 2 (ICC-ES ESR-3037). 3. Adhesive Concrete Anchors: a. Hilti: 1) HIT RE 500-SD (ICC-ES ESR-2322). 2) HIT RE 500 V3 (ICC ESR-3814). b. Simpson Strong-Tie: SET-XP (ICC-ES ESR-2508). 4. Screw Concrete Anchors: a. Hilti: Kwik HUS-EZ Screw (ICC-ES ESR-3027). b. Simpson Strong-Tie: 1) Titen HD (ICC-ES ESR-2713). 5. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. a. Substitution request to indicate the proposed anchor has the at least the same tension and shear strength as the specified anchor installed as indicated in the Contract Drawings. b. Calculations to be stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state that the Project is located in.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 5
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
3 4 5 6 7
GENERAL A. Cast-in-Place Anchorage: 1. Use where anchor rods or bolts are indicated on the Drawings, unless another anchor type is approved by the Engineer. 2. Provide concrete anchorage as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure components to concrete.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B. Adhesive Anchorage: 1. Use only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by the Engineer. 2. May be used where subjected to vibration or where buried or submerged. 3. Do not use in overhead applications or sustained tension loading conditions such as utility hangers. 4. Contact Engineer for clarification when anchors will not be installed in compliance with manufacturer's printed installation requirements.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
C. Mechanical Anchorage: 1. Use only where specifically indicated on the Drawings or when approved for use by the Engineer. 2. Do not use where subjected to vibration. 3. May be used in overhead applications. 4. Contact Engineer for clarification when anchors will not be installed in compliance with manufacturer's printed installation requirements.
23 24
D. Do not use powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified herein for structural applications unless approved by the Engineer or specified in Contract Documents.
25
3.2
PREPARATION
26 27
A. Provide adequate time to allow for proper installation and inspection prior to placing concrete for cast-in-place concrete anchorage.
28 29 30 31 32
B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify areas and conditions under which concrete anchorage is to be installed. 1. Notify Engineer of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
33 34 35 36 37
C. Special Inspection is required in accordance with the Building Code for all concrete anchorage. 1. Notify the Special Inspector that an inspection is required prior to concrete placement (or during post-installed anchorage installation). 2. See the FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional requirements.
38 39 40
D. Post-installed anchor manufacturer’s representative shall demonstrate and observe the proper installation procedures for the post-installed anchors at no additional expense to the Owner. 1. Follow such procedures to assure acceptable installation.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Tie cast-in-place anchorage in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. 1. Tack welding of anchorage is prohibited. 2. Coat the projected portion of carbon steel anchors and nut threads with a heavy coat of clean grease after concrete has cured. 3. Anchorage location tolerance shall be in accordance with AISC 303. 4. Provide steel or durable wood templates for all column and equipment anchorage. a. Templates to be placed above top of concrete and not impede proper concrete placement and consolidation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B. Unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using stainless steel cast-inplace anchorage unless shown otherwise. a. Provide dissimilar materials protection per Specification Section 09 96 00. 2. Provide washers for all anchorage. 3. Where exposed, extend threaded anchorage a maximum of 3/4 IN and a minimum of 1/2 IN above the top of the fully engaged nut. a. If anchorage is cut off to the required maximum height, threads must be dressed to allow nuts to be removed without damage to the nuts.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C. Do the following after nuts are snug-tightened down: 1. If using post-installed anchorage, follow MPII. 2. Upset threads of anchorage to prevent nuts from backing off. a. Provide double nut or lock nut in lieu of upset threads for items that may require removal in the future. 3. For all other cast-in-place anchorage material, tighten nuts down an additional 1/8 turn to prevent nuts from backing off. 4. If two (2) nuts are used per concrete anchor above the base plate, tighten the top nut an additional 1/8 turn to "lock" the two (2) nuts together. 5. If using post-installed anchorage, follow manufacturer’s installation procedures.
20
D. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete.
21 22
E. Secure architectural components such that it will not be aesthetically distorted nor fasteners overstressed from expansion, contraction or installation.
23 24
F. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00.
25 26 27 28
G. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. 1. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding. 2. Apply galvanizing repair paint to minimum 6 mils DFT in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM A780.
29 30 31 32 33 34
H. For post-installed anchors, comply with the MPII on the hole diameter and depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of the anchor or reinforcing bar. 1. Use hammer drills to create holes. 2. Properly clean out the hole per the ICC-ES reports utilizing a non-metallic fiber bristle brush and compressed air or as otherwise required to remove all loose material from the hole prior to installing the anchor in the presence of the Special Inspector.
35
3.4
36 37 38 39
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
3.5
CLEANING
40 41
A. After concrete has been placed, remove protection and clean all anchorage of all concrete, dirt, and other foreign matter.
42 43 44
B. Provide surface acceptable to receive field applied paint coatings when specified in Specification Section 09 96 00.
45
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE 03 15 19 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 21 00 REINFORCEMENT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bar requirements for concrete construction.
7 8 9 10 11 12
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 1.2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. SP 66, ACI Detailing Manual. b. 117, Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. c. 315, Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. d. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. e. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. d. A706, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A970, Standard Specification for Headed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. f. A1064, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): a. Manual of Standard Practice.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Mill certificates for all reinforcing. d. Manufacturer and type of proprietary reinforcing mechanical splices. 3. Qualifications of welding operators, welding processes and procedures. 4. Reinforcing number, sizes, spacing, dimensions, configurations, locations, mark numbers, lap splice lengths and locations, concrete cover and reinforcing supports. 5. Sufficient reinforcing details to permit installation of reinforcing. 6. Reinforcing details in accordance with ACI SP 66 and ACI 315. 7. Locations where proprietary reinforcing mechanical splices are required or proposed for use. 8. Shop Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without reference to Contract Drawings.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 1
1 2 3 4
a.
1.4
Shop Drawings shall not be prepared by reproducing the plans and details indicated on the Contract Drawings but shall consist of completely redrawn plans and details as necessary to indicate complete fabrication and installation of all reinforcing steel.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
5
A. Support and store all reinforcing above ground.
6 7
B. Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers which match the Shop Drawing mark numbers.
8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
9
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Reinforcing adhesive anchors: a. See Specification Section 03 15 19. 2. Reinforcing mechanical splices: a. Lenton Rebar Splicing by Erico, Inc. b. Richmond dowel bar splicer system by Richmond Screw and Anchor Co., Inc. c. Bar-Grip Systems by Barsplice Products, Inc.
18
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
19
2.2
MATERIALS
20
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed.
21
B. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706.
22
C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064.
23 24 25 26
D. Smooth Dowel Bars: 1. Water containing structures: ASTM A276, Type 316. 2. All other locations: ASTM A36, with metal end cap to allow longitudinal movement equal to joint width plus 1 IN.
27 28
E. Proprietary Reinforcing Mechanical Splices: To develop in tension and compression a minimum of 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced.
29 30
F. Headed Deformed Bars: 1. ASTM A970, Class B.
31 32
G. Reinforcing Adhesive Anchors: 1. See Specification 03 15 19.
33
2.3
ACCESSORIES
34 35 36 37 38 39
A. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, Hangers, and Other Reinforcing Supports: 1. Metal fabrications with plastic-coated tips in contact with forms. a. Plastic coating meeting requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. All plastic construction meeting the requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. a. 100 percent non-metallic, non-corrosive. b. Required for all walls and elevated construction exposed to liquid containing structures.
40
B. Protective plastic caps at mechanical splices.
41 42 43 44
2.4
FABRICATION A. Tolerances: 1. Conforms to ACI 117, expect as modified herein. 2. Sheared lengths: +1 IN.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 2
1 2
3. 4.
Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: +1/2 IN. All other bends: +0 IN, -1/2 IN.
3 4
B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the reinforcing bar to be as indicated in ACI 318 Paragraph 7.2.
5 6 7 8
C. Ship reinforcing to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags. 1. Place on each tag the mark number of the reinforcing corresponding to the mark number indicated on the Shop Drawing. 2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed.
9 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
A. Tolerances: 1. Conform to ACI 117, except as modified herein. 2. Reinforcing placement: a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: +1/4 IN. b. Minimum spacing between bars: -1/4 IN. c. Top bars in slabs and beams: 1) Members 8 IN deep or less: +1/4 IN. 2) Members between 8 IN and 2 FT deep: -1/4 IN, +1/2 IN. 3) Members more than 2 FT deep: -1/4 IN, +1 IN. d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within +1 IN. e. Lengthwise of members: +2 IN. 3. Minimum clear distances between reinforcing bars: a. Beams, walls and slabs: Distance equal to bar diameter or 1 IN, whichever is greater. b. Columns: Distance equal to 1-1/2 times the bar diameter or 1-1/2 IN, whichever is greater. c. Beam and slab reinforcing shall be threaded through the column vertical rebars without displacing the column vertical bars and still maintaining the clear distances required for the beam and slab reinforcing bars.
29 30
B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings:
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
C. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings: 1. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN. 2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth: a. 2 IN for reinforcing bars #6 or larger. b. 1-1/2 IN for reinforcing bars less than #6. 3. Formed surfaces exposed to or located above any liquid: 2 IN for all reinforcing sizes. 4. Interior surfaces: a. 1-1/2 IN for beams, girders, and columns. b. 3/4 IN for slabs, walls and joists.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, provide splice lengths for reinforcing as follows: 1. For reinforcing: Class B splice meeting the requirements of ACI 318. 2. For welded wire reinforcement: a. Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall not be less than one (1) spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN, nor less than 1.5 x development length nor less than 6 IN. b. Development length shall be as required for the yield strength of the welded wire reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318. 3. Provide splices of reinforcing not specifically indicated or specified subject to approval of Engineer. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 3
1 2
a.
3 4
E. Welding: 1. Welding reinforcing is not permitted.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Mechanical proprietary splice connectors may only be used when approved or indicated on the Contract Drawings.
F. Placing Reinforcing: 1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil or other materials that may affect or reduce bond. 2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including heights of deformations on a cleaned sample is not less than required by applicable ASTM specification that governs for the reinforcing supplied. 3. Reinforcing support: a. Uncoated reinforcing: 1) Support reinforcing and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction operations. a) Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. b) Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. c) Reinforement shown on the Contract Documents may not be repositioned for use a support for reinforcement. Addtional drop bars may be provided for support of reinforcing, 2) Reinforcing supported on ground: a) Slab on grade and other members with only one mat of reinforcing: (1) Provide metal bar supports with bottom plate. (2) Do not use concrete blocks to support slab-on-grade reinforcing. b) All other members: Provide supporting concrete blocks or metal bar supports with bottom plate. 3) Reinforcing supported on formwork: a) Concrete surfaces in contact with or over process liquid: All-Plastic chairs, runners and bar supports. b) All other formed surfaces: (1) Provide plastic-coated metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and other reinforcing support. (2) Only tips in contact with the forms need to be plastic coated. 4. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams is indicated to be placed in two or more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be 1 IN. a. Place spacer bars at 3 FT maximum centers to maintain the required 1 IN clear distance between layers. 5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges. a. If perimeter edge is formed by earth extend reinforcement to within 3 IN of the edge. 6. To assure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars and dowels. 7. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by Engineer. a. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat. 8. Do not tack weld reinforcing. 9. Embed reinforcing into hardened concrete utilizing adhesive anchor system specifically manufactured for such installation: a. See Specification Section 03 15 19. 3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interferences: 1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between bars cannot be met.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
2. 3. 4. 5.
Do not place any concrete until the Engineer submits a solution to reinforcing congestion problem. Reinforcing may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, obtain Engineer's approval of resulting arrangement of reinforcing. No cutting of reinforcing shall be done without written approval of Engineer.
B. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCEMENT 03 21 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 31 30 CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8 9
A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete materials, strengths and proportioning for concrete work. 2. Grouting: a. Base plates for columns and equipment. b. As specified and indicated in the Contract Document.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 5. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 6. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing, and Curing. 7. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 8. Section 03 41 33 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 9. Section 13 34 24 – Reinforced Concrete Tank Roof Dome. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. c. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. d. 232.2R, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete. e. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. f. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. c. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. d. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. e. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement, Mortar, and Concrete. f. C192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. g. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. h. C227, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method). i. C289, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method). j. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. k. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. l. C989, Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars. m. C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
n.
3. 1.3
9
C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (MortarBar Method). o. C1567, Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method). Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. 31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks.
DEFINITIONS A. Words and terms used in these Specifications are defined in ACI CT-13.
10 11 12
B. Water-Bearing Concrete: Any concrete surface to be in contract with process fluids during normal operation of the facility, including, but not limited to, tank, channels, wet wells and distribution chambers.
13 14
C. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM): Fly ash, silica fume and ground granulated blast furnace slag (Slag Cement).
15
D. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) (Slag Cememt).
16
1.4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's instructions. c. Concrete mix designs as required by Specification Section 03 05 05. d. Manufacturer and type of proposed admixtures. e. Manufacturer and type of proposed non-shrink grout and grout cure/seal compound. 3. Certifications: a. Certification of standard deviation value in psi for ready mix plant supplying the concrete. b. Certification that the SCM meet the quality requirements stated in this Specification Section, and SCM supplier's certified test reports for each shipment of SCM delivered to concrete supplier. c. Certification that the class of coarse aggregate meets the requirements of ASTM C33 for type and location of concrete construction. d. Certification of aggregate gradation. e. Certification of coarse aggregate impurities as relates to alkali-silica reactivity per ASTM C33, Appendix X. f. Certification of shrinkage test results. 4. Test reports: a. Cement and SCM mill reports for all cement to be supplied. b. Provide test results for alkali-silica reactive impurities on coarse aggregates per referenced ASTM standards.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage of Materials: 1. Store cement and SCM in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos which will exclude moisture and contaminants. 2. Arrange aggregate stockpiles and use in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. 3. Allow natural sand to drain until it has reached a relatively uniform moisture content before use. 4. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. 5. Do not use bottom 6 IN layer of stockpiled material in contact with ground.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 2
1 2 3 4 5
6.
Store admixtures in such a manner as to avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. a. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions, provide agitating equipment to assure thorough distribution of ingredients. b. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics and performance.
6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
7
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Non-shrink grout: a. BASF Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Company. c. Five Star Products, Inc. d. Sika Corporation. 2. Epoxy grout: a. BASF Corporation. b. Five Star Products, Inc. c. Euclid Chemical Company. d. Sika Corporation.
19
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
20
2.2
MATERIALS
21 22 23 24 25
A. Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type I/II or II for cast-in-place concrete. 2. ASTM C150, Type III for precast concrete. 3. Cement type used shall correspond to that upon which selection of concrete proportions was based in the mix design.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
B. SCM: 1. Fly Ash: a. ASTM C618, Class F or Class C. b. Non-staining. c. Suited to provide hardened concrete of uniform light gray color. d. Compatible with other concrete ingredients and having no deleterious effects on the hardened concrete. e. Produced by source approved by the State Highway Department in the state where the Project is located for use in concrete for bridges. f. Evaluate and use in accordance with ACI 232.2R. 2. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (Slag Cement): a. ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120. 3. Cement and SCM type used shall correspond to that upon which selection of concrete proportions was based in the mix design.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
C. Admixtures: 1. Air entraining: ASTM C260. 2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating: Conform to ASTM C494, Types A through E, and provisions of ACI 212.3R. 3. High range water reducers (superplasticizers): Conform to ASTM C494, Types F or G. 4. All concrete mixes require the use of water reducers to maintain the specified water-tocement ratios without additional cement. 5. SCM: Per above. 6. Admixtures to be chloride free. a. Do not use calcium chloride. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7.
Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design. 8. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures. 9. Shrinkage reducing admixtures (optional): a. Admixture used to reduce the shrinkage of Portland Cement concrete. b. Utilize at dosage necessary to help achieve required shrinkage value stated herein. c. Similar to: 1) Eclipse 4500 by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc. 2) Conex by Euclid Chemical Co. 3) MasterLife SRA 20 or MasterLife CRA 007 by BASF Corporation. 10. Alkali-silica reaction inhibiting admixture: a. ASTM C494/C494M, Type S, shall contain a nominal lithium nitrate content of 30 percent. b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1) BASF Corporation, MasterLife ASR 30. 2) Euclid Chemical Company, Eucon Integral ARC.
17 18 19 20 21 22
D. Water: 1. Potable. 2. Containing less than 50 ppm of chlorides. 3. Clean and free from deleterious substances. 4. Free of oils, acids and organic matter. a. Test per ASTM C1602.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
E. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: 1. ASTM C33. 2. Fine and coarse aggregates to be regarded as separate ingredients. 3. Provide aggregates approved for bridge construction by the North Carolina State Highway Department of Transportation. 4. Coarse aggregate: a. Use only washed aggregates. b. Coarse aggregate sieve analysis: 1) Per Table 1 in the PART 2 MIXES Article. 5. Fine aggregates to be natural, not manufactured. 6. Do not use aggregates that may be deleteriously reactive when combined with alkalis in cement. a. Evaluate proposed aggregates for potential deleterious expansion due to alkali silica reactivity per ASTM C33 (Appendix X), ASTM C289, ASTM C227, ASTM C1260 or ASTM C1567.
38 39 40 41 42
F. Maximum total chloride ion content for concrete mix including all ingredients measured as a weight percent of cement in accordance with ASTM C1218: 1. Prestressed concrete: 0.06. 2. All other concrete: 0.10. 3. Do not use calcium chloride.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
G. Sand Cement Grout (referred to as "Grout" on the Drawings): 1. Approximately three (3) parts sand, one (1) part Portland cement, 6 +1 percent entrained air and water to produce a slump which allows grout to completely fill required areas and surround adjacent reinforcing. a. Provide sand in accordance with requirements for fine aggregate for concrete. 2. Minimum 28 day compressive strength: a. 3000 psi. b. Shall be at least strength of parent concrete when used at construction joints.
51 52
H. Grout for Construction Joints at Base of Walls: 1. Cement grout with same strength as wall concrete, without coarse aggregate. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
I.
Non-shrink Grout: 1. Non-shrink, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, and nonstaining. a. Conform to ASTM C1107. 2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at jobsite. 3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. a. Mass expansion shall not be created by gas liberation or by other means. 4. Minimum 28 day compressive strength: 7,000 psi. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Masterflow, 713". b. Euclid Chemical "NS Grout". c. Sika Corporation "Sika Grout 212". d. Sauereisen, Inc. "F-100 Level Fill Grout".
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
J.
Epoxy Grout: 1. Three-component epoxy resin system: a. Two (2) liquid epoxy components. b. One (1) inert aggregate filler component. 2. Adhesive acceptable manufacturers: a. BASF “Masterflow 648”. b. Five Start Products, Inc. "DP Five Start Epoxy Grout." c. Euclid Chemical "E3-G." d. Sika "Sikadur Hi-Mod." 3. Aggregate acceptable manufacturers: a. BASF “Masterflow 648”. b. Five Start Products, Inc. "DP Five Start Epoxy Grout." c. Euclid Chemical "Euclid aggregate." d. Sika aggregate. 4. Aggregate manufacturer shall be the same as the adhesive manufacturer. 5. The aggregate shall be compatible with the adhesive. 6. Each component furnished in separate package for mixing at jobsite.
31
K. See Specification Section 03 31 31 for Grout Schedule of use.
32
2.3
MIXES
33 34 35 36 37 38
A. General: 1. Provide concrete capable of being placed without aggregate segregation and, when cured, of developing all properties specified. 2. Ready-mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M. 3. All concrete to be normal weight concrete weighing approximately 145 to 150 LBS per cubic foot at 28 days after placement.
39 40 41 42 43 44
B. Concrete Mixes: 1. Pavement, curbs, sidewalks, pipe encasement, precast building footings and slabs, concrete fill, and lean concrete 3,000 psi. 2. All Precast concrete 5,000 psi. 3. Water Bearing Structures 4,500 psi 4. All other cast-in-place concrete 4,000 psi.
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
C. Air Entrainment: 1. Provide air entrainment in concrete resulting in a total air content percent by volume as follows a. 1-1/2 IN maximum aggregate size: 5-1/2 +/- 1-1/2 percent total air content. b. 1 IN and 3/4 IN maximum aggregate size: 6 +/- 1-1/2 percent total air content. c. 1/2 IN maximum aggregate size: 6-1/2 +/- 1-1/2 percent total air content. 2. 3 percent maximum air for interior building concrete floors to be trowel-finished. 3. Adjust dosage rate as necessary to compensate for shrinkage reducing admixtures. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D. Slump: 1. Measure slump at point of discharge into concrete members. 2. Walls and columns: a. 8 IN maximum, 4 IN minimum measured at the point of discharge into the concrete member. b. Slump shall be obtained by use of mid-range or high-range water reducer conforming to ASTM C494. 3. All other members: a. Concrete using a water reducer per ASTM C494: 8 IN maximum, 4 IN minimum measured at the point of discharge into the concrete member. b. Concrete without a water reducer per ASTM C494: 5 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum measured at point of discharge into the concrete member. 4. Concrete of lower than minimum slump may be used provided it can be properly placed and consolidated. 5. Provide additional water or water reducing admixture at ready mix plant for concrete that is to be pumped to allow for slump loss due to pumping. a. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum slump specified and the maximum specified water-cement ration is not exceeded. 6. Slump may be adjusted in the field through the use of water reducers. a. Coordinate dosage and mixing requirements with concrete supplier. 7. Slump tolerances shall comply with the requirements of ACI 117.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
E. Proportioning: 1. General: a. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by methods of placement and consolidation employed without permitting materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on surface. b. Proportion ingredients to produce proper placability, durability, strength and other required properties. 2. Normal weight concrete (*) target cementitious materials contents and maximum water cementitious ratios: (*) Cement in following table shall be defined as all cementitous material (i.e. cement plus SCM). Cement content’s intent is to provide a crackfree, durable finished product, not one with excessive strength.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
SPECIFIED STRENGTH (PSI) AT 28 DAYS
TARGET(*) CEMENT (LBS/CY) (+/- 5%)
MAXIMUM WATER TO CEMENT RATIO BY WEIGHT
5,000 (for precast concrete only)
611
0.40
4,500
564
0.42
3,000
517
0.48
3.
4,000 564 0.45 Supplementary Cementitious Material (SCM): a. Fly ash: 1) For cast-in-place concrete only, a maximum of 25 percent by weight of Portland cement content per cubic yard may be replaced with fly ash at a rate of 1 LB fly ash for 1 LB cement. 2) If fly ash is used, the water to fly ash plus cement ratio not to exceed the maximum water cement ratio specified in this Specification Section. 3) Concrete containing fly ash shall not be used in the construction of the precast concrete units specified in Specification Section 03 41 33.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
b.
4.
5.
6.
Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (Slag Cement): 1) For cast-in-place concrete only, a maximum of 30 percent by weight of Portland cement content per cubic yard may be replaced with GGBFS at a rate of 1 LB GGBFS for 1 LB cement Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: a. Use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Add to mix at batching plant. c. Use water-reducing or high-range water reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 1) Water reducers are required to maintain specified maximum water to cement ratios. High range water reducers (superplasticizers): a. Use required for: 1) All concrete to be pumped except slabs on grade. 2) All concrete for water containing structures. 3) Other concrete members at Contractor’s option. b. Use required for all non-pumped concrete except slabs on grade and foundations. c. Maximum concrete slump before addition of admixture to be 3 IN maximum slump after addition to be 8 IN. d. Reference Specification Section 03 31 31 for additional requirements. Concrete mix proportioning methods for normal weight concrete: a. Method 1: 1) Used when combination of materials proposed is to be evaluated and proportions selected to be on a basis of trial mixes. 2) Produce mixes having suitable proportions and consistencies based on ACI 211.1, using at least three (3) different water cement ratios or cement contents which will produce a range of compressive strengths encompassing the required average strength. 3) Design trial mixes to produce a slump within 0.75 IN of maximum specified, and for air entrained concrete, air content within 0.5 percent specified. 4) For each water cement ratio or cement content, make at least three (3) trial strength tests for specified test age, and cure in accordance with ASTM C192. a) Cylinder size: Per ASTM C31. b) Test for strength at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39. (1) Quantity of cylinders per trial strength test: (a) 6 IN DIA cylinders: Two (2). (b) 4 IN DIA cylinders: Three (3). 5) From results of these tests, plot a curve showing relationship between water cement ratio or cement content and compressive strength. 6) From this curve select water cement ratio or cement content to be used to produce required average strength. 7) Use cement content and mixture proportions such that maximum water cement ratio is not exceeded when slump is maximum specified. 8) Base field control on maintenance of proper cement content, slump, air content and water cement ratio. 9) See paragraph hereafter for definition of required average strength. b. Method 2: 1) In lieu of trial mixes, field test records for concrete made with similar ingredients may be used. 2) Use of proposed concrete mix proportions based on field test records subject to approval by Engineer based on information contained in field test records and demonstrated ability to provide the required average strength. 3) Field test records to represent materials, proportions and conditions similar to those specified. a) Changes in the materials, proportions and conditions within the test records shall have not been more restricted than those for the proposed concrete mix. b) Field test records shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 Paragraph 5.3.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
7.
4) Required concrete proportions may be established by interpolation between the strengths and proportions of two (2) or more test records each of which meets the requirements of this Specification Section. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28 day compressive strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5 using the standard deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as described in ACI 318, Chapter 5.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
F. Flowable Fill or Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM): 1. A mixture of cement, fly ash, fine sand, water and air having a consistency which will flow under a very low head. 2. Flowable Fill and Controlled Low-Strength Material are synonymous. 3. Approximate quantities of each component per cubic yard of mixed material: a. Cement (Type I or II): 50 LBS. b. Fly ash: 200 LBS. c. Fine sand: 2,700 LBS. d. Water (approximate): 420 LBS. e. Air content (approximate): 10 percent. 4. Actual quantities shall be adjusted to provide a yield of 1 CY with the materials used. 5. Approximate compressive strength should be 85 to 175 psi. 6. Fine sand shall be an evenly graded material having not less than 95 percent passing the No. 4 sieve and not more than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.
21 22 23 24 25
G. Allowable Shrinkage: 1. Test per in accordance with ASTM C157 at 28 Days. 2. Normal weight, water-bearing concrete: 0.042 percent per ASTM C157. 0.048 percent per ASTM C157. 3. Normal weight, all other concrete:
27
2.4
28 29 30
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. To assure stockpiles are not contaminated or materials are segregated, perform any test for determining conformance to requirements for cleanness and grading on samples secured from aggregates at point of batching.
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION
32
3.1
33 34 35 37
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE, MATERIALS AND PROPORTIONING 03 31 30 - 8
SECTION 03 31 31 CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Mixing, placing, jointing, and curing of concrete construction.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Concrete Testing and Inspection. 4. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 5. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 6. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 7. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 8. Section 13 34 24 - Reinforced Concrete Tank Roof Dome. 9. Section 07 26 00 - Under Slab Vapor Retarder. 10. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. b. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. c. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. d. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. e. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. f. 305.1, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. g. 306.1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. h. 308.1, Specification for Curing Concrete. i. 309R, Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. j. 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. k. 360R, Guide to Design of Slabs-on-Ground. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. c. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. d. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. e. C881, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. f. C1059, Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh To Hardened Concrete. g. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. h. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). i. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. j. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 3. Corps of Engineers (COE): a. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 1
1 2 3
4. 5.
4 5 6 7 8
B. Qualifications: 1. Ready Mixed Concrete Batch Plant: Certified by NRMCA. 2. Waterstop manufacturer's representative shall provide on-site training of waterstop installation, field splicing, welding and inspection procedures prior to construction, and at no additional cost.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
C. Concrete Conference: 1. A meeting to review the detailed requirements of the Contractor's proposed concrete design mixes, to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction, and to clarify the roles of the parties involved shall be held no later than 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. a. Schedule the meeting to occur no later than five (5) days in advance of the first scheduled date of concrete placement. b. The Engineer shall be notified no less than seven (7) days prior to the date of the conference. 2. All parties involved in the concrete work shall attend the conference, including: a. Contractor's representative. b. Testing laboratory representative/inspectors. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Reinforcing steel subcontractor and detailer. e. Concrete supplier. f. Admixture manufacturer's representative. g. Owner. h. Resident Engineer. i. Design Engineer. 3. The conference shall be held at a mutually agreed upon time and location. a. The Engineer shall be notified no less than seven (7) days prior to the date of the conference. 4. The agenda shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Scheduling, sequence and notification of concrete placements. b. Contractor’s concrete pre-placement plan checklist. c. Delivery time from batch plant and maximum waiting period prior to placing concrete. d. Review of approved design mix including the limits of water that can be added and who is authorized to add water, if water has been withheld at the plant. e. Additional test cylinders to be made for any load in which water exceeding the water/cement ratio of the approved mix design has been added on site. 1) Review and discuss Field Quality Control requirements. f. Additional test cylinders for structural elements the Contract intends to subject to live loads earlier than 28 days. g. Authority of testing agency. h. Curing procedures. i. Temperature/weather issues. j. Test cylinder storage and protection. k. Approval and rejection of work. l. Mock-up panels as the standard. m. Mass concrete pertinent requirements and procedures. 1.3
50 51 52
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA): a. Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. NSF International (NSF).
DEFINITIONS A. Words and terms used in this Specification Section are defined in ACI CT-13.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1. 2.
3.
17 18 19 20 21 22
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Copies of concrete delivery tickets. 3. Description of proposed curing methods. 1.5
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Concrete Delivery: 1. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready mixed concrete. 2. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Contractor at the time of delivery. 3. Ticket to show: a. Mix identification. b. Quantity delivered. c. Amount of material in each batch. d. Outdoor temperature in the shade. e. Time at which cement was added. f. Time of delivery. g. Time of discharge. h. Amount of water that may be added at the site without exceeding the specified watercement ratio. i. Amount of water added at the site.
1.6
38 39 40 41
See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1) Procedure for adding high-range water reducer at the jobsite. c. Scaled (minimum 1/8 IN per foot) drawings showing proposed locations of construction joints, control joints, expansion joints (as applicable) and joint profile dimensions for each joint type. d. Manufacturers and types: 1) Joint fillers. 2) Curing agents. 3) Construction joint bonding adhesive. 4) Waterstops. Certifications: a. Ready mix concrete plant certification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Adjust concrete mix design when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength test results or other circumstances warrant. 1. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer.
1.7
42 43 44 45
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has been approved by Engineer. 1. Approval of concrete mix design does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
46
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
47
2.1
48 49
PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in this article are acceptable.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B. Neoprene Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Permaglaze. b. Rubatex. c. Williams Products. 2. Materials: a. Closed cell neoprene. b. ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class A or C. c. Grade: Compression deflection as required to limit deflection to 25 percent of joint thickness under pressure from concrete pour height.
11 12 13 14 15
C. Asphalt Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. W.R Meadows. b. J and P Petroleum Products. 2. Materials: ASTM D994.
16 17
D. Fiber Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Materials: ASTM D1751.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
E. Waterstops, PVC Type: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Greenstreak Plastic Products. b. W.R Meadows. c. Vinylex Corporation. d. Bometals, Inc. 2. Materials: a. Virgin polyvinyl chloride compound not containing any scrap or reclaimed materials or pigment. b. Cast-in-place type: COE CRD-572. 3. Approved profiles as listed. a. Construction joints: 1) Ribbed: 6 IN wide by 3/8 IN typical unless noted otherwise. 2) Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #679, or equal. b. In joints noted on Drawings: 1) 4 IN wide by 3/16 IN thick bulb type. 2) Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #701. c. Control joints: 1) 6 IN wide by 3/8 IN thick with ribs and center bulb. 2) Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #705, or equal. d. Expansion joint: 1) 9 IN wide by 3/8 IN thick tear web type waterstop. 2) Greenstreak Plastic Products Style #700, or equal. 4. Provide factory-made waterstop fabrications at all changes in direction, intersections and transitions, leaving only straight butt splices for the field. Butt welds to be a minimum 6 IN from the intersection. 5. Factory prepunched (12 IN centers, each edge) for wire supports. a. Provide hog rings or grommets at maximum 12 IN OC along the length of the waterstop at Contractor’s option. 6. See Drawings for application and other requirements.
48 49 50 51 52 53
F. Waterstops, Preformed Strip Type: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Greenstreak Plastics, Inc. (Hydrotite). b. Adeka Ultra Seal USA (MC-2010MN). c. Swellstop by Greenstreak Plastics, Inc. 2. Hydrophilic, nonbentonite composition. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3. 4. 5.
Manufactured solely for the purpose of preventing water from traveling through construction joints. Volumetric expansion limited to 3 times maximum. See Drawings for application and other requirements.
G. Water Swelling Sealant: 1. Compatible with strip-type waterstop. 2. Single component, gun applied. 3. Moisture cured. 4. Minimum 70 percent volumetric expansion swelling capability.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
H. Curing Products to conform to one or more of the following: 1. Absorbent Covers. 2. Moisture Retaining Covers. a. Moisture Retaining Fabric. 3. Dissipating curing compound: a. Pigmented, waterborne, membrane-forming. b. ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B, Dissipating shall be composed of hydrocarbon resins, and dissipating agents that begin to break down upon exposure to UV light, and traffic, approximately 4 to 6 weeks after applications, providing a film that is removable with standard degreasing agents, and mechanized scrubbing actions so as to not impair the later addition of applied finishes. c. Acceptable Products: 1) DaytonSuperior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-WD). 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. 3) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R2. 4. Clear, water-borne, membrane-forming curing and sealing compound: a. ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. b. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.40 Kg/m2 when applied at 300 SQ FT/GAL. c. Manufacturer's certification is required. d. Subject to project requirements, provide one of the following products: e. Products: 1) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Diamond Clear, Luster Seal 300 (exterior), Super Rez-Seal (interior). 2) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. 3) Meadows, W.R., Inc.; CS-309/30. 4) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Diamond Clear VOX. 5) L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. 6) Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
I.
Bonding Agent: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Sika. c. Euclid Chemical Co. 2. Materials: a. Latex: ASTM C1059, Type II. b. Epoxy: ASTM C881, Type V.
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
J.
Epoxy Bonding Agent: 1. Three component, water based, epoxy modified Portland cement bonding agent and anticorrosion protection coating providing up to 24 HRS open time in which to apply repair mortar. 2. Product shall be capable of achieving bond strength of 2,700 psi per ASTM C882. 3. Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The), Duralprep AC. b. Sika Chemical Corporation; Armatec 110.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 5
1
K. Vapor Retarder: See Specification Section 07 26 00.
2
L. Sand cement grout, non-shrink grout and epoxy grout: See Specification Section 03 31 30.
3
2.2
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
4 5
A. The concrete plant shall conform to the Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the NRMCA.
6 7
B. Precast concrete may be produced by precaster if his batching, mixing, and transporting facilities meet requirements of Paragraph A immediately above.
8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
9
3.1
PREPARATION
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A. General: 1. Complete formwork. a. See Specification Section 03 11 13. 2. Remove earth, snow, ice, water, and other foreign materials from areas that will receive concrete. 3. Secure reinforcement in place. a. See Specification Section 03 21 00. 4. Position expansion joint material, anchors and other embedded items. 5. Obtain approval of reinforcement erection and placement prior to placing concrete. 6. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow, unless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained. a. Plan size of crews with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on rate of hardening of concrete as required to obtain good surfaces and avoid unplanned cold joints. b. Do not allow rainwater to increase mixing water nor to damage surface finish. 7. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveying equipment and formwork. 8. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated required depth when sloping structural foundation base slabs and elevated slabs to drains. a. For floor slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide slab of required uniform thickness.
31 32 33 34
B. Preparation of Subgrade for Slabs On Ground: 1. Granular subgrade to be wetted without standing water immediately prior to placing concrete. 2. Obtain approval of granular subgrade compaction density prior to placing slabs on ground.
35 36 37 38 39
C. Edge Forms and Screeds: 1. Set accurately to produce designated elevations and contours of finished surface. 2. Sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds, if required. 3. Use strike off templates, or approved vibrating type screeds, to align concrete surfaces to contours of screed strips.
40
3.2
CONCRETE MIXING
41 42 43 44
A. General: 1. Provide all concrete from a central plant conforming to Checklist for Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities of the NRMCA. 2. Batch, mix, and transport in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
45 46 47 48
B. Control of Admixtures: 1. Control at the batch plant: a. All admixtures to be introduced at the batch plant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
b.
2.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
Charge admixtures into mixer as solutions. 1) Measure by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device. 2) Liquid considered a part of mixing water. 3) Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or measured by volume if so recommended by manufacturer. c. Add separately, when two or more admixtures are used in concrete, to avoid possible interaction that might interfere with efficiency of either admixture, or adversely affect concrete. d. Complete addition of retarding admixtures within one minute after addition of water to cement has been completed, or prior to beginning of last three quarters of required mixing, whichever occurs first. Control of Admixtures in the field: a. Additional quantities of admixtures (with the exception of retarders) may be added in the field provided: 1) Addition of admixtures shall be under the supervision of the ready mix quality control representative. 2) Addition of each admixture to be documented on the delivery ticket. 3) Provide additional mixing per ASTM C94.
C. Tempering and Control of Mixing Water: 1. Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. 2. Discard concrete which has set. 3. Discharge concrete from ready mix trucks within time limit and drum revolutions stated in ASTM C94/C94M. 4. Addition of water at the jobsite: a. See Specification Section 03 31 30 for specified water cement ratio and slump. b. Do not exceed maximum specified water cement ratio or slump. c. Incorporate water by additional mixing equal to at least half of total mixing required. 3.3
PLACING OF CONCRETE A. General: 1. Place concrete as such a rate that concrete, which is being integrated with fresh concrete, is still workable. a. Select placement equipment and manpower in order to assure timely delivery of concrete into forms to avoid cold joints and placement issues. 2. Tined rakes are prohibited as a means of conveying fiber reinforced concrete. 3. Comply with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R. 4. Do not begin placing concrete during rain, sleet, or show. a. Protect fresh concrete from ensuing inclement weather. 5. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials. 6. Begin work only when work of other trades affecting concrete is complete. 7. Deposit concrete: a. Continuously to avoid cold joints. 8. Locate construction joints at locations approved by Engineer. a. Plan size of crews with due regard for effects of concrete temperature and atmosphere conditions to avoid unplanned cold joints. 9. Spreaders: a. Temporary: Remove as soon as concrete placing renders their function unnecessary. b. Embedded: 1) Obtain approval of Engineer. 2) Materials: Concrete or metal. 3) Ends of metal spreaders coated with plastic coating 2 IN from each end. 10. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation. a. Maximum free fall: 4 FT.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
b.
Place concrete by means of hopper, elephant trunk or tremie pipe extending down to within 4 FT of surface placed upon. 11. Perform the following operations before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on surface: a. Spread. b. Consolidate. c. Straightedge. d. Darby or bull float. 12. No water shall be added to the concrete surface to ease finishing operation.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B. Cold Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 306.1. 2. Do not place concrete on subgrade that are below 32 DegF or contain frozen material. 3. Maintain all materials, forms, reinforcement, subgrade and any other items which concrete will come in contact with free of frost, ice or snow at time of concrete placement. 4. Temperature of concrete when discharged at site: Per ACI 306.1. 5. Heat subgrade forms, embedments and reinforcement to between 45 and 70 DegF, when temperature of surrounding air is 40 DegF or below at time concrete is placed. a. Remove all frost from subgrade, forms and reinforcement before concrete is placed. 6. Combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added, if water or aggregate is heated above 90 DegF. 7. Do not mix cement with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 90 DegF. 8. Follow ACI 360R-10 for specific requirements dealing with elevated steel troweled slabs that will be exposed to freeze-thaw cycles.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C. Hot Weather Concrete Placement: 1. Comply with ACI 305.1. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing, or add flake ice or well crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing for all or part of mixing water if high temperature, low slump, flash set, cold joints, or shrinkage cracks are encountered. 3. Temperature of concrete at point of delivery (i.e. truck discharge) when placed: a. Not to exceed 90 DegF. b. Not so high as to cause: 1) Shrinkage cracks. 2) Difficulty in placement due to loss of slump. 3) Flash set. 4. Temperature of forms and reinforcing when placing concrete: a. Not to exceed 90 DegF. b. May be reduced by spraying with water to cool below 90 DegF. 1) Leave no standing water to contact concrete being placed. 5. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking and/or slab curling due to evaporation.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
D. Consolidating: 1. Consolidate in accordance with ACI 309R except as modified herein. 2. Consolidate by vibration so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners of forms. a. Eliminate: 1) Air or stone pockets. 2) Honeycombing or pitting. 3) Planes of weakness. 3. Use suitable form vibrators located just below top surface of concrete, where internal vibrators cannot be used in areas of congested reinforcing. a. Size and coordinate external vibrators to specifically match forming system used. 4. Internal vibrators: a. Minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute. b. Insert and withdraw at points approximately 18 IN apart. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1) Allow sufficient duration at each insertion to consolidate concrete but not sufficient to cause segregation. c. Use in: 1) Beams and girders of framed slabs. 2) Columns and walls. 3) Vibrating concrete around all waterstops. d. Size of vibrators shall be in accordance with ACI 309R, Table 5.1.5. Obtain consolidation of slabs with internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved means. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Provide spare vibrators on jobsite during all concrete placing operations. Bring a full surface of mortar against form by vibration supplemented if necessary by spading to work coarse aggregate back from formed surface, where concrete is to have an as-cast finish. Prevent construction equipment, construction operations, and personnel from introducing vibrations into freshly placed concrete after the concrete has been placed and consolidated.
E. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that required quality of concrete is maintained. 1. Use truck mixers, agitators, and non-agitating units in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 2. Horizontal belt conveyors: a. Mount at a slope which will not cause segregation or loss of ingredients. b. Protect concrete against undue drying or rise in temperature. c. Use an arrangement at discharge end to prevent segregation. d. Do not allow mortar to adhere to return length of belt. e. Discharge conveyor runs into equipment specially designed for spreading concrete. 3. Metal or metal lined chutes: a. Slope not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. b. Chutes more than 20 FT long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used provided they discharge into a hopper before distribution. c. Provide end of each chute with a device to prevent segregation. 4. Pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment: a. Designed for concrete application and having adequate pumping capacity. b. Control pneumatic placement so segregation is avoided in discharged concrete. c. Loss of slump in pumping or pneumatic conveying equipment shall not exceed 1-1/2 IN. d. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. e. Provide pumping equipment without Y sections. 3.4
JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Construction Joints - General: 1. Locate joints as indicated on Contract Drawings or as shown on approved Shop Drawings. a. Where construction joint spacing shown on Drawings exceeds the joint spacing indicated in Paragraph B. below, submit proposed construction joint location in conformance with this Specification Section. 2. Unplanned construction joints will not be allowed. a. If concrete cannot be completely placed between planned construction joints, then it must be removed. 3. In general, locate joints near middle of spans of slabs, beams and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point, in which case, offset joint in girder a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. 4. Locate joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders, and at tops of foundations or floor slabs, unless shown otherwise. a. At Contractor's option, beam pockets may be formed into concrete walls.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
b. Size pockets to allow beam reinforcing to be placed as detailed on Drawings. Place beams, girders, column capitals and drop panels at same time as slabs. Place corbels monolithically with walls. a. Locate wall vertical construction joints midway between corbels. b. Where only a single corbel is located place it also monolithically with wall and locate wall vertical construction joint a minimum of 3 FT from face of corbel. 7. Make joints perpendicular to main reinforcement with all reinforcement continuous across joints. 8. Provide the following joints unless noted otherwise on Drawings: a. Roughen joints: horizontal construction joints. b. Keyed joints: vertical construction joints. 9. Roughen construction joints: a. Clean the previously hardened concrete interface and remove all laitance. b. Intentionally roughen the interface to a full amplitude of 1/4 IN. 10. Keyways: a. Construction joint keyways shall have the following dimensions, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. b. Wall keys: 1) Keyway width, not less than 1/3 and not more than 1/2 the wall thickness measured perpendicular to wall faces. 2) Keyway depth to be not less than 1-1/2 IN. 3) Continuous along length of wall. 4) Place keyway in wall center unless shown otherwise on Drawings. c. Keyways in footings, foundations, base slabs, and structural or elevated slabs: 1) Keyway height not less than 1/3 and not more than 1/2 the footing or slab thickness. 2) Keyway depth not less than 1-1/2 IN. 3) Continuous along footing or slab. 4) Keyway in footing or slab center unless shown otherwise on Drawings. d. Beam keyways: 1) Full width of beam. 2) Keyway height not less than 5-1/2 IN. 3) Keyway depth not less than 1-1/2 IN. 4) Keyway located in initial beam pour, directly above the bottom reinforcing, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 11. Minimum time before placement of adjoining concrete construction: a. All other concrete: 72 HRS. 5. 6.
B. Construction Joints - Spacing Unless Otherwise Specified: 1. Structures not intended to contain liquid: a. Wall vertical construction joints: 1) 50 FT maximum centers. 2) At wall intersections, 4 FT minimum from corner. b. Base slab, floor, and roof slab construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square and not to exceed 2500 SQ FT. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour to be 90 FT. 2. Water retaining structures: a. Wall vertical construction joints: 1) 30 FT maximum centers. 2) At wall intersections, 10 FT minimum from corner. b. Wall horizontal construction joints: 22 FT centers. c. Floor slab, construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square and not to exceed 2000 SQ FT. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour to be less than: a) Twice the length of the short side. b) 60 FT. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 10
1 2 3 4
d.
Elevated slab construction joints: 1) Placements to be approximately square and not to exceed 4000 SQ FT. 2) Maximum side dimension of a slab pour to be less than: a) Twice the length of the short side.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C. Construction Joints - Bonding: 1. Obtain bond between concrete pours at construction joints by thoroughly cleaning and removing all laitance from construction joints. 2. Before new concrete is placed, all construction joints shall be coated with cement grout, or dampened, as outlined below: 3. Roughen construction joints: a. Roughen the surface of the concrete to expose the coarse aggregate uniformly with 1/4 IN minimum amplitude. 1) Remove laitance, loosened particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface. b. Dampen the hardened concrete immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete or grout. c. Cover the hardened concrete of horizontal joints with a coat of cement grout of similar proportions to the concrete, except substitute fine aggregate for coarse aggregate. d. Place 2 IN layer of grout in bottoms of walls with waterstops. Grout shall be placed immediately before placing concrete. 1) Vibrate grout and first layer of concrete simultaneously. e. Place fresh concrete before the grout has attained its initial set. 4. Keyed construction joints: a. Thoroughly clean construction joints and remove all laitance. b. Dampen the hardened concrete immediately prior to placing of fresh concrete.
25 26 27 28 29 30
D. Slab On Grade Joints: 1. Locate construction and control joints in slabs on grade as indicated on Drawings. 2. Time cutting properly with set of concrete, if saw cut joints are required or permitted. a. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. b. Complete before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
E. Expansion Joints: 1. Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to concrete (except smooth dowels bonded on only one side of joint) to extend continuously through an expansion joint. 2. Use neoprene expansion joint fillers, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 3. Seal expansion joints as shown on Drawings. a. See Specification Section 07 92 00 for requirements.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
F. Waterstops - General: 1. Waterstop to be continuous with splices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and create water tight joints. 2. Do not mix different types of waterstop materials in the same structure without specific approval from the Engineer unless shown on Drawings. 3. Preformed strip type: a. Locate waterstop at center of wall, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 1) Maintain at least 3 IN from edge of concrete. b. Install in a bed of swelling sealant on smooth surface of hardened concrete by use of nails, adhesive or other means as recommended by manufacturer to prevent movement of waterstop during placement of concrete. c. Roughened joints shall be especially prepared during concrete placement to provide smooth surface for proper water stop installation. d. Use in joints against existing concrete where indicated on Drawings. 4. PVC waterstops: a. Position waterstop accurately in joints, with adequate clearance from all reinforcing. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
b.
c. d. e.
f.
Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced 24 IN maximum staggered along each edge full length and passed through the edge of the waterstop. 1) Tie wire to adjacent reinforcing. Hold horizontal waterstops in place with continuous supports. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 1) Do not displace reinforcement from required location. Splice ends and intersections with perpendicular butt splice using electrical splicing iron in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1) Use factory fabricated "T" and corner intersection fittings. 2) Field splice straight runs of material. Unless otherwise noted, use for all construction joints in new construction for all structures indicated on Drawings.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
G. Other Embedded Items: 1. Place sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support, prior to initiating concreting. a. Give Contractor whose work is related or integral to concrete, or supported by it, ample notice and opportunity to furnish and install items before placing concrete. 2. Do not route electrical conduit, drains, or pipes in concrete slabs, walls, columns, foundations, beams or other structural members unless approved by Engineer.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
H. Placing Embedded Items: 1. Support against displacement. 2. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids. 3. Provide adequate means for anchoring waterstop in concrete. a. Provide means to prevent waterstops in the forms from being folded over by the concrete as it is placed.
28
3.5
FINISHING
29
A. See Specification Section 03 35 00.
30
B. Coordinate mixing and placing with finishing.
31
3.6
INSTALLATION OF GROUT
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A. Grout Schedule of Use: 1. Non-shrinking non-metallic grout: a. Filling form tie holes. b. Under column and beam base plates. c. Other uses indicated on the Drawings. 2. Epoxy grout: a. Patching cavities in concrete. b. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. c. Grouting of equipment base plates where driving motor is 500 HP and above. d. Other uses indicated on the Drawings.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
B. Grout Installation: 1. Sand cement grout: a. Fill keyways between precast concrete hollow core slabs with sand cement grout. b. Consolidate grout by rodding or by other means to assure complete filling of keyways. c. Cure grout by one of methods specified. 2. Non-shrink non-metallic grout: a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to grouting. c. Mix in a mechanical mixer. d. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
e. f.
3.
3.7
Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide under beam, column, and equipment base plates, in joints between precast concrete filter slabs, and in other locations indicated on the Drawings. g. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the top of base plates. h. Provide forms where base plates and bed plates do not confine grout. i. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. j. Except where a slope is indicated on the Drawings, finish edges flush at the base plate, bed plate, member or piece of equipment. k. Coat exposed edges of grout with cure or seal compound recommended by the grout manufacturer. Epoxy grout: a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface. c. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors without voids. d. Grout base and bed plates as specified for non-shrinking, non-metallic grout. e. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to assure proper placement.
CURING AND PROTECTION
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury immediately after placement, and maintain with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement, hardening, and compressive strength gain. 1. Follow recommendations of ACI 308.1 except as modified herein. 2. All traffic shall be kept from the surface as necessary to protect the concrete but not less than the first 48 HRS of curing.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
B. For surfaces of non-water bearing structures, apply one of the following curing procedures immediately after completion of placement and finishing (surfaces not in contact with forms). 1. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. Take care to avoid eroding the surface of freshly placed concrete. 2. Application of wet Absorbent Covers: a. Minimum lap: 12 IN. b. Provide continuous uniform supply of moisture, such as sprinklers or soaker hoses as required to keep concrete surface continuously wet. c. Monitor Absorbent Covers as required to prevent cover materials or concrete surface from drying out. 3. Application of sand kept continuously wet. 4. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 DegF) or mist spray. 5. Application of Moisture Retaining Cover sheet materials. a. Place as soon as possible after final finishing and without marring the surface. b. Minimum lap: 12 IN. c. Seal all edges to make water-tight. d. Place Moisture Retaining Cover in intimate contact with the concrete surface, without wrinkles and weighted to hold in place. e. Hold cover and edges in place as required to prevent wind from displacing the cover. f. Moisture Retaining Fabric: 1) Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 2) Saturate concrete surface and fabric side of cover immediately prior to placing. g. Monitor continuously during the curing period: 1) Repair any holes, tears or displaced cover. 2) Rewet as required to keep concrete moist under cover. 6. Application of other moisture retaining covering as approved by Engineer. 7. Water used for curing shall be within 20 DegF of the concrete temperature. 8. Application of a curing compound.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
a.
9.
Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations immediately after any water sheen, which may develop after finishing, has disappeared from concrete surface. b. Do not use on any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that curing compound will not prevent bond. c. Where a vertical surface is cured with a curing compound, the vertical surface shall be covered with a minimum of two (2) coats of the curing compound. 1) Apply the first coat of curing compound to a vertical surface immediately after form removal. 2) The vertical concrete surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water on the surface. 3) Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. 4) A vertical surface: Any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal. d. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction shall be non-toxic and taste and odor free, and NSF approved. 1) Alternately, all tank surfaces shall be cleaned to remove non-NSF approved curing compound without damaging the concrete finish. Surfaces In Contact with Forms: a. Formed surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces utilizing final curing methods per ACI 308.1, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, 1) See Section 03 11 13. b. Minimize moisture loss from and temperature gain of concrete placed in forms exposed to heating by sun by keeping forms wet and cool until they can be safely removed. c. Make provisions to keep concrete wall moist while stripping forms and until curing measures are in place. d. After form removal, cure concrete until end of time prescribed. e. Use one of the methods listed above. f. Forms left in place shall not be used as a method of curing in hot weather. g. The term "hot weather", where used in these specifications, is defined in ACI 305.1. h. In hot weather, remove forms from vertical surfaces as soon as concrete has gained sufficient strength so that the formwork is no longer required to support the concrete.
C. For Surfaces of Water Bearing Structures: 1. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury immediately after placement, and maintain with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement, hardening, and compressive strength gain. a. Follow recommendations of ACI 308.1 except as modified herein. b. Use Evaporation Retardant to reduce surface moisture evaporation of slabs during concrete placement. Comply with all the manufacturer’s instructions of use as required to obtain the intended results. 2. Apply one of the following moist curing procedures immediately after completion of placement and finishing, for concrete surfaces not in contact with forms. a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling. b. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet and in intimate contact with concrete. c. Surfaces shall be covered with a double layer of absorptive mats or fabric, wetted before placing, and overlapped at least 6 IN. d. Application of sand kept continuously wet. e. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 DegF) or mist spray. f. Ponding and sprinkling in conjunction with application of waterproof sheet materials, conforming to ASTM C171 and only with a program as approved by the Engineer that will keep the surface continuously wet. g. Ponding and sprinkling in conjunction with application of other moisture retaining covering as approved and only with a program as approved by the Engineer that will keep the surface continuously wet. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3.
4.
After (7) full days of moist curing, application of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C309 or ASTM C1315 may be substituted for moist curing. 1) Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations immediately after any water sheen which may develop during moist curing has disappeared from concrete surface. 2) Do not use on any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is proven that curing compound will not prevent bond. 3) Where a surface is cured with a curing compound, the surface shall be covered with a minimum of two (2) coats of the curing compound, 30 mils thick each coat. a) Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal or discontinued moist curing and before the surface displays water loss. Apply in one direction only, covering uniformly to a minimum thickness of {30} mils. b) The concrete surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water on the surface. c) Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. d) Apply second coat in direction perpendicular to the first coat application direction, covering uniformly to a minimum thickness of 30 mils. 4) Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction shall be non-toxic and taste and odor free. Curing Concrete In Contact with Forms: a. Minimize moisture loss of concrete placed in forms by keeping forms wet and cool until they can be safely removed. b. Moist cure the top surface of concrete placed in forms as specified. c. After form removal, cure concrete until end of time prescribed. 1) Use one of methods listed above. 2) When approved by the Engineer, placement of the second pour at joints may occur prior to the end of the curing period. d. Forms left in place shall not be used as a method of curing in hot weather. e. The term "hot weather", where used in these specifications, is defined in ACI 305R. f. In hot weather, remove forms from vertical surfaces as soon as concrete has gained sufficient strength so that the formwork is no longer required to support the concrete and commence moist curing as specified.
33 34 35 36 37 38
D. Curing Period: 1. Continue curing for at least seven (7) days for all concrete except Type III, high early strength concrete for which period shall be at least three (3) days. a. If one of curing procedures indicated above is used initially, it may be replaced by one of other procedures indicated any time after concrete is (7) days old, provided concrete is not permitted to become surface dry during transition.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
E. Cold Weather: 1. Follow recommendations of ACI 306.1. 2. Maintain temperature of concrete per ACI 306.1 for a minimum of 72 HRs after concrete is placed, when outdoor temperature is 40 DegF, or less. a. Maximum temperature rate of decrease: Per ACI 306.1. 3. Use heating, covering, insulating, or housing of the concrete work to maintain required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. 4. Do not use combustion heaters unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. 5. Interior slabs in areas intended to be heated shall be adequately protected so that frost does not develop in the supporting subgrade.
50 51 52 53
F. Hot Weather: 1. Follow recommendations of ACI 305.1 and ACI 308.1. 2. Make provision for cooling forms, reinforcement and concrete, windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 15
1 2 3
3. 4.
4 5 6
G. Rate of Temperature Change: 1. Keep changes in temperature of air immediately adjacent to concrete as uniform as possible, during and immediately following curing period.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Provide protective measures as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. Maximum temperature rate of decrease: Per ACI 305.1.
H. Protection from Mechanical Injury: 1. Protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. 2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction equipment, materials, or methods, and by rain or running water. 3. Do not load self supporting structures in such a way as to overstress concrete. 3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
14 15 16 17
A. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections..
18
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MIXING, PLACING, JOINTING, AND CURING 03 31 31 - 16
SECTION 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete finishing and repair of surface defects.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 11 13 - Formwork. 4. Section 03 01 03 - Concrete Rehabilitation Using Spray Application. 5. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 6. Section 03 31 31 - Concrete Mixing, Placing, Jointing and Curing. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. CT-13, Concrete Terminology. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. b. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. c. C1315, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. d. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. e. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. 3. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
28 29 30 31 32
B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator of concrete sealer shall be factory trained and approved, in writing, by the manufacturer to apply the product. a. Applicator shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience successfully applying materials specified.
33
1.3
DEFINITIONS
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
A. Vertical Surface Defects: 1. Any void in the face of the concrete deeper than 1/8 IN, such as: a. Tie holes. b. Air pockets (bug holes). c. Honeycombs. d. Rock holes. 2. Scabbing: a. Scabbing is defect in which parts of the form face, including release agent, adhere to concrete. 3. Foreign material embedded in face of concrete. 4. Fins 1/16 IN or more in height.
45 46 47 48
B. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 1
1
C. Other words and terms used in this Specification Section are defined in ACI CT-13.
2
D. MPII: Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions.
3
1.4
SUBMITTALS
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certifications: a. Certification of aggregate gradation. b. Certification that products being used will not interfere with bonding of future floor or wall finishes. c. Manufacturer's written approval of applicator. 4. Certification of installer qualifications for application of concrete sealer.
16 17 18
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
19
1.5
20 21
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements for materials used.
1.6
22
WARRANTY A. Provide warranty equal to specified manufacturer's standard warranty for all products used.
23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Chemical floor sealer (CS-3): a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Dayton Superior. 2. Bonding agents: a. Euclid Chemical Co. b. BASF Admixtures, Inc. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Repair Mortars: a. Sika Corporation b. Euclid Chemical c. Master Emaco
39
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
40
2.2
MATERIALS
41 42 43 44 45
A. Chemical Floor Sealer (CS-3): 1. Clear, penetrating, 100 percent reactive waterborne silane-siloxane micro emulsion. 2. VOC compliant, oderless. 3. Non-flammable. 4. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "AQUAPEL+PLUS."
46 47
B. Bonding Agent: 1. For use only on concrete surfaces not receiving liquid water repellent coating: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
a.
2.
High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars. b. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con." c. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Acryl-Set." d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Everbond." e. Thoro System Products "Acryl 60." For use only on concrete surface receiving liquid water repellent: a. Non-acrylic base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars.
10 11 12
C. Repair Mortars: 1. SikaTop 123 Plus 2. Or engineer approved equal.
13
D. Water: Potable.
14
E. Non-shrink Grout: See Specification Section 03 31 30 and Specification Section 03 31 31.
15
2.3
MIXES
16 17 18 19
A. Bonding Grout: 1. Dry ingredients: One (1) part cement to one (1) part aggregate. 2. Wet ingredients: Bonding agent and water in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B. Patching Mortar: 1. Dry ingredients: One (1) part cement to two and one-half (2-1/2) parts aggregate by damp loose volume. a. Substitute white Portland cement for a part of gray Portland cement to produce color matching surrounding concrete. 2. Wet ingredients: Bonding agent and water in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
27
PART 3 - EXECUTION
28
3.1
PREPARATION
29
A. For methods of curing, see Specification Section 03 31 31.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
B. Preparation of Bonding Grout Mixture: 1. Mix cement and aggregate. 2. Mix bonding agent and water together in separate container in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Add bonding agent/water mixture to cement/aggregate mixture. 4. Mix to consistency of thick cream. 5. Bonding agent itself may be used as bonding grout if approved by manufacturer and Engineer.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
C. Preparation of Patching Mortar Mixture (Cosmetic purpose only): 1. Mix cement and aggregate. 2. Mix bonding agent and water together in separate container in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Add only enough bonding agent/water mixture to cement/aggregate mixture to allow handling and placing. 4. Let stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, until mix has reached stiffest consistency to allow placement.
46 47
D. Clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258 to remove dust, dirt, form oil, grease, or other contaminants prior to abrasive blasting, chipping, grinding or wire brushing. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1.
2.
Abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4259 and SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6 to completely open defects down to sound concrete and remove laitance. a. If additional chipping or wire brushing is necessary, make edges perpendicular to surface or slightly undercut. b. No featheredges will be permitted. Rinse surface with clean water and allow surface water to evaporate prior to repairing surface defects.
8 9 10
E. Repair Mortar: 1. Proprietary bagged mortars shall be installed per MPII. Reference other Contract Documents for additional requirements.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
F. Repairing Other Surface Defects: 1. This method of repairing surface defects is to be used only on vertical concrete surfaces, in tanks containing water, surfaces to receive liquid water repellent and exterior surfaces. 2. Fill and repair using patching mortar mix specified in the MIXES Article in PART 2 of this Specification Section. a. Use non-shrink grout to fill tieholes as outlined in this Specification Section. 3. If required by bonding agent manufacturer, etch surfaces with a muriatic acid solution followed by a thorough rinse with clean water. a. Test concrete to determine pH level and continue flushing with clean water until surface pH is within acceptable limits. 4. Dampen area to be patched and an area at least 6 IN wide surrounding it prior to application of bonding grout. 5. Brush bonding grout into the surface after the surface water has evaporated. 6. Allow bonding grout to set for period of time required by bonding agent manufacturer before applying premixed patching mortar. 7. Fill tie holes with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. a. Where exposed to view and scheduled to receive concrete Finish #2 or #5, hold grout below surface of concrete and fill with patching mortar to match surrounding concrete. 8. Fill all other defects with patching mortar. a. Match color of surrounding wall. b. Do not use acrylic bonding agent in patching mortar for filling defects in surfaces to be treated with liquid water repellent. 9. Consolidate grout or mortar into place and strike off so as to leave patch slightly higher than surrounding surface. 10. Leave undisturbed for at least 60 minutes before finishing level with surrounding surface. a. Do not use metal tools in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed or coated with other materials. 11. Keep areas damp in accordance with grout manufacturer or bonding agent manufacturer's directions.
40
3.2
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
41 42 43 44 45
A. Do not repair surface defects or apply wall or floor finishes when temperature is or is expected to be below 50 DegF. 1. If necessary, enclose and heat area to between 50 and 70 DegF during repair of surface defects and curing of patching material. a. Use only clean fuel, indirect fired heating apparatus.
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
B. Chemical Floor Sealer Application: 1. General: a. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean floor in accordance with ASTM D4258 and prepare to receive chemical floor sealer. 1) Remove previously applied membrane curing compounds. 2) Remove soil, oils, stains, discoloration, or any other imperfection having a negative impact on the appearance of the finished floor. b. Apply product to floor areas indicated on the Drawings. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
2.
c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. Chemical Floor Sealer (CS-3): a. Apply uniform coats at rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Apply with fine, uniform spray or microfiber pad. 2) As product is drying, apply light spray of clean water and lightly scrub to uniform finish. b. Allow floor to dry completely and remove any dried residue using hot water and mild citric acid. c. Final floor finish shall be uniform, free of residue, and shall repel water. d. Apply additional coat(s) as necessary to achieve water repellent finish.
C. Concrete Finishes for Vertical Wall Surfaces: 1. General: Give concrete surfaces finish as specified below after removal of formwork and repair of surface defects. 2. Finish #1 - As cast rough form finish: a. Selected forming materials are not required. b. Prepare surface in accordance with the PREPARATION Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section and repair the following surface defects: 1) Tie holes. 2) Honeycombs deeper than 1/4 IN. 3) Air pockets deeper than 1/4 IN. 4) Rock holes deeper than 1/4 IN. c. Chip or rub off fins exceeding 1/4 IN in height. d. Use at unexposed surfaces such as foundations and backfilled surfaces of walls not to be waterproofed. 3. Finish #2 - As cast form finish: a. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture. 1) Use forms specified for surfaces exposed to view in accordance with Specification Section 03 11 13. b. Prepare surface in accordance with the PREPARATION Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section and repair the following surface defects: 1) Tie holes. 2) Honeycombs deeper than 1/4 IN or larger than 1/4 IN DIA. 3) Air pockets deeper than 1/4 IN or larger than 1/4 IN DIA. 4) Rock holes deeper than 1/4 IN or larger than 1/4 IN DIA. 5) Scabbing. c. Chip or rub off fins exceeding 1/8 IN in height. 1) Finish shall provide uniform color and texture. d. Provide this finish for: 1) See Schedule in the CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE Article at the end of this Specification Section. 4. Finish #4 - Decorative coating finish: a. Form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture. 1) Use forms specified for surfaces exposed to view in accordance with Specification Section 03 11 13. b. Prepare surface in accordance with the PREPARATION Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section and repair all surface defects. c. Brush on decorative coating to entire surface. 1) Coating shall be MASTERBUILDERS MasterSeal 581, or engineer approved equal. 2) As a mixing liquid for the decorative coating, use bonding agent and water mixture as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3) Color shall be "Standard Gray." 4) Apply two (2) coats at 2 LBS per square yard per coat. d. Construct mock-up per the Mock-Ups paragraph in the QUALITY ASSURANCE Article in PART 1 of this Specification Section. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 5
1 2 3
e.
Provide this finish for: 1) See Schedule in the CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE Article at the end of this Specification Section.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D. Related Unformed Surfaces (Except Slabs): 1. Strike smooth and level tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces after concrete is placed. 2. Float surface to a texture consistent with that of formed surfaces. a. If more than one (1) finish occurs immediately adjacent to unformed surface, provide surface with most stringent formed surface requirement. 3. Continue treatment uniformly across unformed surfaces.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E. Concrete Finishes for Horizontal Slab Surfaces: 1. General: a. Tamp concrete to force coarse aggregate down from surface. b. Screed with straightedge, eliminate high and low places, bring surface to required finish elevations; slope uniformly to drains. c. Dusting of surface with dry cement or sand during finishing processes not permitted. 2. Unspecified slab finish: a. When type of finish is not indicated, use following finishes as applicable: 1) Surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications: Scratched finish. 2) Surfaces intended to receive roofing, or waterproofing membranes: Floated finish. 3) Floors: Troweled finish. 4) Garage floors and ramps: Broom or belt finish. 5) Exterior slabs, sidewalks, platforms, steps and landings, and ramps, not covered by other finish materials: Broom or belt finish. 6) All slabs to receive a floated finish before final finishing. 3. Scratched slab finish: After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class B tolerance, roughen surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set. 4. Floated finish: a. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do no further work until ready for floating. b. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. 1) Use wood or cork float. c. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface with a 10 FT straightedge applied at not less than two (2) different angles. d. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots to produce a surface with Class B tolerance throughout. e. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform texture. 5. Troweled finish: a. Float finish surface to true, even plane. b. Power trowel, and finally hand trowel. c. First troweling after power troweling shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects, but which may still show some trowel marks. d. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. e. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. f. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. g. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and plane to a Class A tolerance. h. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects that would show through floor covering by grinding. 6. Broom or belt finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as specified, give it a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across surface. 7. Underside of concrete slab finish: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 6
1 2 3 4
a. b. 3.3
Match finish as specified for adjacent vertical surfaces. If more than one (1) finish occurs immediately adjacent to underside of slab surface, provide surface with most stringent formed surface requirement.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A. Horizontal slab finishes will be accepted provided: 1. Applicable specification requirements are satisfied. 2. Water does not pond in areas sloped to drain. 3. Gap between a 10 FT straightedge placed anywhere and the finished surface does not exceed: a. Class A tolerance: 1/8 IN. b. Class B tolerance: 1/4 IN. c. Class C tolerance: 1/2 IN. 4. Accumulated deviation from intended true plane of finished surface does not exceed 1/2 IN. 5. Accuracy of floor finish does not adversely affect installation and operation of movable equipment, floor supported items, or items fitted to floor (doors, tracks, etc.).
16 17 18 19
B. Unacceptable finishes shall be replaced or, if approved in writing by Engineer, may be corrected provided strength and appearance are not adversely affected. 1. High spots to be removed by grinding and/or low spots filled with a patching compound or other remedial measures to match adjacent surfaces.
20
3.4
21 22 23 24
PROTECTION A. All horizontal slab surfaces receiving chemical floor sealer shall be kept free of traffic and loads for minimum of 72 HRS following installation of sealer.
3.5
CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE
DRAWING NO. STRUCTURE NAME 10S-Series Headworks
26
10S-Series
Headworks
12S-Series
Primary Clarifier Splitter Box
12S-Series
Primary Clarifier Splitter Box
61S-Series
Digester No. 1 and No. 2
61S-Series
Digester No. 1 and No. 2
63S-Series
Sludge Holding Tank
63S-Series
Sludge Holding Tank
66S-Series
Dewatered Cake Storage
66S-Series
Dewatered Cake Storage
SURFACE TO BE FINISHED All interior vertical cast-in-place surfaces. All exterior exposed vertical cast-inplace surfaces. All interior vertical cast-in-place surfaces. All exterior exposed vertical cast-inplace surfaces. All interior vertical cast-in-place surfaces. All exterior exposed vertical cast-inplace surfaces. All interior vertical cast-in-place surfaces. All exterior exposed vertical cast-inplace surfaces. All interior vertical cast-in-place surfaces. All exterior exposed vertical cast-inplace surfaces.
FINISH NO. 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE FINISHING AND REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 03 35 00 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 03 41 33 PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Precast and prestressed concrete.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 05 05 - Testing. 4. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 5. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 6. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors 7. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. c. A416, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete. d. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. e. A1064, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. f. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. g. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. h. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. i. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1/A5.1M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5/A5.5M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. c. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. e. D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 6. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI): a. MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. b. MNL 120, Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. 7. Building Code: 1) North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B. Qualifications: 1. Provide precast and prestressed concrete units produced by an active member of PCI. 2. Plant to be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, as applicable: a. Certification Code C1: Precast Concrete Products. b. Certification Code C2: Precast Hollow Core and Repetitive Products. c. Certification Code C3: Prestressed Straight Strand Structural Members. d. Plant shall have been certified within past year from bid date. 3. Plant shall be certified by IAS and shall be acceptable to the Building Code Official to assure compliance with approved fabricator Special Inspection requirements in accordance with the Building Code. a. Plants that are not certified by IAS or not acceptable to the Building Code Official may be acceptable to work on the Project, provided: 1) Plant meets all remaining qualifications. 2) Contractor reimburses the Owner the cost of Special Inspection services. 4. Provide units manufactured by plant which has regularly and continuously engaged in manufacture of units of same type as those required for a minimum of three (3) years. 5. Assure manufacturer's testing facilities meet requirements of ASTM E329. 6. Welding operators and processes to be qualified in accordance with: a. AWS D1.1 for welding steel shapes and plates. b. AWS D1.4 for welding reinforcing bars. 7. Welding operators to have passed qualification tests for type of welding required during the previous 12 months prior to commencement of welding. 8. Engineer for all precast or prestressed members: Professional Engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina. a. Engineer to have minimum five (5) years experience in design of precast and prestressed members with scope similar to this Project. 9. Precast erector: a. Minimum 3 years experience with projects of similar size and complexity. 1.3
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
DEFINITIONS A. Slabs: May refer to hollow core slabs or solid flat slabs, prestressed or non-prestressed.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Sizes, types and manufacturer of bearing pads. d. Hardware to be utilized to support suspended appurtenances. 3. Shop Drawings and erection plans for precast units, their connections and supports showing: a. Member size and location. b. Size, configuration, location and quantity of reinforcing bars and prestressing strands. c. Initial prestress forces. d. Size and location of openings verified by Contractor. e. Size, number, and locations of embedded metal items and connections. f. Required concrete strengths. g. Identification of each unit using same standard marking numbers as used to mark actual units. 4. Calculations for members and connections designed by fabricator. a. Calculations to be sealed by a professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which the Project is constructed.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
b.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Perform calculations using the dead load of the members plus the superimposed uniform and concentrated loads shown on the Drawings and indicated in this Specification Section. c. Indicate the following: 1) Design for maximum moment, maximum shear and maximum torsion. 2) Final top and bottom flexural stresses resulting from the stresses due to maximum moment and any prestress force. 3) Ultimate moment capacity. 4) Final top and bottom flexural stresses, ultimate moment capacity, and ultimate shear capacity, if affected, for members with reduced cross sections due to openings or penetrations. 5) When required on Drawings, a check for no tension in top and bottom of members due to prestress force and member dead load plus superimposed loads indicated on Drawings and in this Specification Section. Submit test results, when so required on Drawings, showing that embedded connection items will adequately support the indicated loads. a. Connection items to have an ultimate load capacity of at least two (2) times the required indicated load. Concrete mix design(s) including submittal information defined in Specification Section 03 05 05. Fabricator's quality control documentation for Special Inspections as required by the Building Code, Chapter 17. Copies of source quality control tests. Certification of manufacturer's testing facility qualifications.
25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
26
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW, Inc. b. KSM Division, Omark Industries. 2. Bearing pads: a. JVI, Inc. b. Korolath of New England
35
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
36
2.2
MATERIALS
37 38 39
A. Embedded Steel Plates and Shapes: 1. ASTM A36. 2. Galvanized: ASTM A123/A123M, minimum 2.0 OZ zinc per square foot of metal surface.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
B. Stainless steel: 1. Minimum yield strength: 30,000 psi 2. Minimum tensile strength: 75,000 psi. 3. Bars, shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304. 4. Strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316, Grade A. 5. Bolts and nuts: a. ASTM F593, Type 304 or 316. b. Minimum yield strength: 25,000 psi. c. Minimum tensile strength: 70,000 psi. d. Strip, plate and flat bar for welded connections: ASTM A666, Type 304L or 316L.
50
C. Bearing Pads: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Under slabs: a. Plastic bearing strips. b. Minimum compressive strength: 8,000 psi with no fracture at 26,000 psi. c. Korolath of New England, Inc., or equal. For all other locations: Random, fiber-reinforced elastomeric pads. Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Capable of supporting a compressive stress of 3000 psi with no cracking, splitting, excessive bulging or delaminating in the internal portions of the pad. Size pad to keep a minimum stress 200 PSI under minimum dead load. Masticord as manufactured by JVI, Inc., or equal.
12 13 14 15 16
D. Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or III. 2. Type II cement to be used in the following precast units: a. Precast weir troughs. b. IPS roof panels.
17 18 19 20 21 22
E. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete: 1. ASTM C33 with coarse aggregate meeting the gradation for Size 67 as stated in ASTM C33. 2. Provide aggregates approved for bridge construction by the State Highway Department in the state where the precast units are fabricated or in the state where the Project is located. 3. All fine aggregate to be natural not manufactured.
23 24 25
F. Water: 1. Potable, clean. 2. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter.
26 27 28
G. Maximum total chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cement and admixtures measured as a weight percent of cement to not exceed 0.06 for prestressed concrete and 0.10 for all other precast concrete.
29 30 31
H. Prestressing Strands: 1. Either 250K or 270K high tensile strength uncoated seven (7) wire strand. 2. Manufacture and test strands in accordance with ASTM A416.
32
I.
Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: See Specification Section 03 21 00.
33 34 35 36
J.
Headed Studs: 1. ASTM A108. 2. Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi. 3. Minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi.
37 38 39 40
K. Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. ASTM A496 or ASTM A1064. 2. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi. 3. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi.
41 42 43 44
L. Electrodes: 1. E70 series conforming to AWS A5.1/A5.1M or AWS A5.5/A5.5M for welding steel shapes and plates. 2. E90 series conforming to AWS A5.5/A5.5M for welding rebar.
45 46
M. Concrete sand cement grout in keyways between slabs. 1. See Specification Section 03 31 30.
47 48
N. Access Doors 1. See Specification Section 08 31 00.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 4
1
2.3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DESIGN A. General Design Requirements: 1. Design units and connections in strict accordance with ACI 318 and the PCI MNL 120. 2. Design units for spans, dead load of members, dead and live loads indicated on the Drawings with concentrated loads placed in their actual locations. a. Verify weights and locations of concentrated loads. 3. Design units taking into account reduced cross section at openings and penetrations. 4. Provide all reinforcing in units as indicated. a. Where not indicated, design and provide all reinforcing and prestressing strands subject to approval of Engineer. 5. Due to presence of corrosive atmosphere, design any prestressed members where indicated on Drawings for no tension in top and bottom of members resulting from loads indicated on Drawings and in this Specification Section. 6. Design connections to allow rotation and/or movement as appropriate to avoid damage to connections, supporting members, joint sealants and other building components.
2.4
MIXES
17
A. See Specification Section 03 31 30.
18
B. Do not begin fabrication of units until concrete mix design(s) have been approved by Engineer.
19
2.5
FABRICATION
20 21
A. Do not fabricate units until Shop Drawings have been approved by Engineer and returned to Contractor and support locations have been field verified by Contractor.
22 23
B. Manufacture, quality, dimensional and erection tolerances of all units to be in accordance with both PCI MNL 116 and PCI MNL 120.
24 25
C. Cast all members in smooth rigid forms which will provide straight, true members of uniform thickness and uniform color and finish.
26
D. Use sand cement grout mixture to fill all air pockets and voids, and to repair damaged edges.
27
E. Finish all repairs smooth and to match adjacent surface texture and color.
28 29 30 31 32 33
F. Where units are to receive concrete topping, provide units having heavy broom finish on top surface for bond. 1. Provide roughness of top surface to provide bond with topping and design for horizontal shear at topping and unit interface in accordance with requirements of ACI 318, Horizontal Shear Strength paragraph. 2. Make all other surfaces smooth.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
G. Incorporate embedded plates, access doors, angles, and flange welding strips into members at time of manufacture. 1. Provide embedded items as shown on the Drawings unless prior approval is received from Engineer to do otherwise. 2. Provide flange welding strips on all flanged edges of all double tee units as indicated on Drawings. 3. Space strips as shown on Drawings. 4. Cast lifting handles into units at or near support points, as required. a. Unless otherwise noted remove lifting handles after units are erected. b. Lifting handles for pump station roof shall be permanent, for future use.
44 45 46
H. Cast openings larger than 6 IN SQ or 6 IN DIA in units at time of manufacture. 1. Make smaller openings by neat cutting or neat drilling by trades requiring them. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of all openings before fabrication of units.
47 48
I.
Make provisions for support of suspended ceilings, lighting fixtures, ducts, piping, conduits and other suspended work.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. 2.
When drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners are approved for use, coordinate prestress strand location with prestress concrete member supplier so that drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners do not hit or are drilled or driven into prestress strands. Install powder-driven fasteners by means of a low velocity powder-actuated tool complying with requirements of OSHA. a. Assure that the load to be supported by each in place drilled expansion bolt or powderdriven fastener does not exceed the maximum allowable load recommended by the bolt or fastener manufacturer for the concrete strength encountered and for the type, size and embedment length of expansion bolt or driven fastener installed.
10 11
J.
12
K. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.
13
L. Minimum concrete compressive strength at time of strand release: 3500 psi.
14 15
M. Mark each unit as indicated on the erection plans. 1. Place mark on non-exposed-to-view surface.
16
N. Coat or finish ends of exposed prestressing strands to prevent corrosion.
17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25
O. Fabricate the following types of precast and prestressed units (all units to be made with normal weight concrete unless noted otherwise on Drawings):
26
Automatically weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors to members to provide full penetration weld between studs, bar anchors and members they are attached to.
1.
2.6
Precast items shown on Drawings including but not limited to: a. Splash blocks. b. Hollow core slabs. c. Flat solid slabs.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
27 28 29 30
A. During production of precast concrete units, conduct strength tests of concrete placed in units as required in Specification Specification Section 03 05 05 for concrete placed during fabrication. 1. Results of strength tests to be sent immediately to Engineer, Contractor and Owner. 2. Test reports to indicate units they represent.
31 32
B. When approved by Engineer, strength tests may be made by precast manufacturer after he has submitted certification that his testing facilities meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
C. Conduct tests on precast concrete using the following procedures: 1. If the precast manufacturer’s quality control program requires more frequent or more stringent testing requirements, the manufacturer’s quality control program will take precedence for the specific type of test. a. Precast manufacturer to employ services of an independent testing laboratory to perform concrete testing for manufacturer’s production procedures (not listed below) and quality control program. 2. If the precast fabrication plant is not certified by IAS and acceptable to the Building Code Official, Owner will employ and pay for precast concrete production special inspection. a. Coordinate with Owner’s special inspector. 1) Provide minimum 7 calendar days notice prior to the start of fabrication. 2) Provide minimum 24 HRS notice prior to fabrication of any precast members. 3. If precast fabrication plant is certified by IAS and acceptable to the Building Code Official, perform concrete tests as specified in Section 03 05 05. Frequency of tests: Per PCI MNL116 or PCI MNL-117 as applicable.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 6
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
PREPARATION
3 4
A. Verify acceptability and location of supports to receive units. 1. Check bearing surfaces to determine that they are level and uniform.
5 6 7
B. Verify compressive strengths of concrete and masonry supports. 1. Do not start erection of units until supports have reached their 28 day required compressive strengths.
8
3.2
9
ERECTION A. Sequence erection to provide a balance of loads across beams and columns.
10 11
B. Give consideration to possible lack of stability or capacity of partially completed frame or structure.
12 13 14
C. Contractor to be responsible for guying, shoring, and bracing of frame, walls and individual members as necessary to resist forces due to wind, erection, or any other source that may occur before structure is completed.
15 16 17 18
D. Use only erection equipment adequate for placing units at lines and elevations indicated on Drawings. 1. Do not damage units or existing construction during erection. 2. Erect units using lifting handles cast into the units.
19 20 21
E. Place each leg of all double tees on a 3/8 IN thick bearing pad held 1 IN back from edge of support. 1. Pad dimensions equal to length of bearing -1 IN x bearing width +2 IN.
22 23
F. Place slabs on continuous 1/8IN (UNO) bearing strips of width one inch less than contact surface.
24 25 26 27
G. After erection, verify that there is no direct contact between bottom of units and supporting members. 1. Where direct contact occurs, install additional layers of bearing material to raise units off supports.
28
H. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.
29
I.
When welding galvanized members, remove galvanizing at welds prior to welding.
30 31
J.
Fill all keyways between slabs with concrete sand cement grout. 1. See Section 03 31 30.
32 33 34
K. After all precast units are erected and all precast unit connections have been made, coat all exposed surfaces and damaged galvanizing of the connections. 1. See Specification Section 09 96 00.
35
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
36 37 38
A. Testing and Special Inspections: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements.. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Causes for rejection of units include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Cracked units. 2. Chipped, broken, or spalled edges. 3. Units not within allowable casting tolerances. 4. Voids or air pockets which, in opinion of Engineer, are too numerous or too large. 5. Non-uniform finish or appearance. 6. Low concrete strength. 7. Improperly placed embedded items and/or openings. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 7
1 3
8.
Exposed wire mesh, reinforcing or prestressing strands.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 03 41 33 - 8
SECTION 04 01 20 MASONRY CLEANING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry cleaning.
7 8 9
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
10
1.2
11 12 13
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Use experienced workmen familiar with product and its application.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer's application instructions. b. Manufacturer's dilution recommendations. c. Manufacturer's recommendations on neutralizing rinse.
21 22
B. Certifications: 1. Certification that Contractor is experienced in this type of masonry cleaning.
23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Cleaning solution: Detergent type. a. Pro So Co. b. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 2. Cleaning solution for manganese or vanadium stained masonry: a. Pro So Co. b. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
33
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
34
2.2
MATERIALS
35
A. Detergent-Type Cleaning Solution: Pro So Co. "Sure Klean #600" detergent masonry cleaner.
36
B. Manganese or Vanadium-Stained Masonry: Pro So Co. "Vanatrol."
37
C. Water: Potable.
38
D. Neutralizing rinse as required by manufacturer.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY CLEANING 04 01 20 - 1
1
2.3
MIXES
2 3
A. Dilute cleaning solution with potable water at rate which will provide for the weakest solution allowable for cleaning wall.
4 5
B. If project conditions require solution of greater than 5 percent acid, obtain permission from Engineer in writing prior to applying solution to wall surface.
6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7
3.1
PREPARATION
8
A. Allow 7 days after completion of masonry work before start of cleaning.
9
B. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers.
10 11
C. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be cleaned. 3.2
APPLICATION
12
A. Protect adjacent surfaces subject to potential damage by cleaning solution.
13 14 15 16
B. Apply masonry cleaner to exposed-to-view masonry surfaces. 1. Do not use wire brushes. 2. Use only tools free of rust. 3. Apply solution using fibered wall-washing brush.
17
C. Thoroughly rinse and pre-soak walls.
18
D. Flush all loose mortar and dirt from surface.
19
E. Wet to prevent "run-off" streaking.
20
F. Scrape off mortar and reapply cleaning solution.
21
G. After scrubbing, clean thoroughly with pressurized water.
22
H. Apply neutralizing rinse as recommended by manufacturer.
23
I.
24
See Section 04 01 20 Concrete Masonry for cleaning of ground-face (burnished) masonry.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY CLEANING 04 01 20 - 2
SECTION 04 05 13 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry mortar. 2. Masonry grout. 3. Integral water repellent admixture.
9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 4. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. b. C144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. c. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. d. C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. e. C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. f. C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. g. C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. h. C1019, Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. i. C1093, Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry. j. C1384, Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars. 2. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC): a. Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602); referred to herein as MSJC Specification. 3. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B. Qualifications: 1. Preconstruction Testing Laboratory shall be an independent agency qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for performing the testing indicated. a. Testing Laboratory shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the testing of mortar and grout. b. Technician conducting tests shall have minimum of five (5) years experience in the testing of mortar and grout.
41 42
C. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide mortar and grout for mock-up specified in or Specification Section 04 22 00.
43
1.3
DEFINITIONS
44 45
A. Coarse grout and fine grout are defined by the aggregate size used in accordance with ASTM C476.
46
B. Coarse aggregate and fine aggregate are defined in ASTM C404, Table 1. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 13 - 1
1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. General: 1) Product data for cementitious materials. 2) Source or producer of aggregates and gradation. 3) Integral water repellent manufacturer's dosage rate. c. Proposed mortar mix design: d. Proposed masonry grout mix design. 3. Test results: a. Preconstruction mortar test results. b. Preconstruction masonry grout test results.
16 17 18 19 20
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Qualifications of testing lab and technician. 3. Test results and inspection reports per Specification Section 01 45 33
21
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
22 23
A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
24 25
B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
26 27 28
C. Deliver preblended, dry mixes in moisture-resistant containers. 1. Store preblended, dry mixes in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
30
2.1
MATERIALS
31 32 33 34 35
A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C150, Type I or II. 2. No air entrainment. 3. Natural color. 4. Maximum percent of alkalis: 0.60 in accordance with ASTM C150, Table 1A.
36 37 38 39
B. Hydrated Lime: 1. ASTM C207, Type S. 2. Type SA not acceptable. 3. Lime substitutes are not acceptable.
40
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, free of gypsum.
41
D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
42
E. Water: Potable.
43 44 45 46
F. Integral Water Repellent Admixture: 1. Liquid polymeric admixture: ASTM C1384. 2. Verify compatibility with liquid water repellent admixture being used in the fabrication of concrete masonry units. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 13 - 2
1
2.2
2
MIXES A. Mortar and grout shall comply with MSJC Specification and Building Code.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
B. Type "S" mortar shall be used: 1. Comply with ASTM C270, Table No. 1, Cement-Lime Mortar. a. Do not use masonry cement or mortar cement. b. No fly ash additives will be accepted. 2. Mix materials minimum of three (3) minutes and maximum of five (5) minutes. 3. Adjust consistency to satisfaction of mason. 4. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide integral water repellent admixture in mortar used for: a. Exterior concrete masonry work. b. Interior concrete masonry work in wet areas. 6. Do not use integral water repellent admixture in mortar for brick.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
C. Masonry Grout: 1. ASTM C476. a. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 2,000 psi. b. Slump: 8 to 11 IN. 2. Mix 5 minutes minimum. 3. No admixtures allowed. 4. At Contractor's option, premixed or preblended grout meeting the above minimum requirements may be used.
22
2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
23 24 25 26 27 28
A. Perform preconstruction laboratory tests on proposed masonry mortar and grout prior to start of masonry work. 1. Perform tests far enough in advance so that any necessary retesting can be accomplished before masonry construction begins. a. Test mortar per ASTM C270. b. Test grout per ASTM C1019.
29 30 31 32
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: 1. Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one (1) source or producer for each aggregate.
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
3.1
INSTALLATION
35
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and MSJC Specification.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
B. Mortar: 1. If standard gray mortar begins to stiffen, it may be retempered by adding water and remixing unless prohibited by water repellent admixture manufacturer. a. Standard gray mortar shall not be retempered more than one (1) time. 2. All mortar must be used within 2-1/2 HRS maximum after initial mixing per MSJC Specification. 3. Engineer reserves right to alter mix design based on initial rate of absorption of masonry units. 4. Set masonry using type S mortar. a. Rake mortar from joint as recommended by the unit manufacturer. b. Tuckpoint raked joints and scored joints using pointing grout. 1) Install pointing grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10 and masonry unit manufacturer’s published instructions. 2) Use polymer modified sanded pointing grout for joints in: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 13 - 3
1 2 3 4
a) Exterior masonry. b) Interior dry areas. 3) Use epoxy pointing grout for joints in interior areas subject to exposure to corrosive or caustic chemicals.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C. Masonry Grout: 1. Use grout within 1-1/2 HRS maximum after initial mixing. 2. Use no grout after it has begun to set. 3. Do not retemper grout after initial mixing. 4. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 4 FT. 5. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 IN. 6. Consolidate all grout while installing. a. Consolidate grout pours 12 IN or less in height by mechanical vibration or by puddling. b. Consolidate grout pours exceeding 12 IN in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. 3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
17 18 19
A. Masonry Mortar and Grout Testing and Inspection: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
20
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 13 - 4
SECTION 04 05 23 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Masonry accessories.
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A82, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A580, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. d. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. e. A951, Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. f. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. g. D412, Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension. h. D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. i. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. j. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness. 2. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2012 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
36 37 38 39
B. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide specified products for inclusion into mock-up panels required by Specification Section 04 22 00. 2. Coordinate with built-in items and veneer coursing.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1.3
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Detailed drawings of all factory or field formed stainless steel thru wall flashing. d. Tear resistance of flashing material.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 1
1 2
e. f.
Manufacturer's recommendations for flashing adhesive. Manufacturer's data sheet on each product.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Weep vents for cavity wall construction: a. Heckman Building Products Inc. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Wire Bond. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 2. Reglets: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b. W. P. Hickman Co. c. Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. 3. Masonry anchors, horizontal joint reinforcing and miscellaneous anchors: a. Heckman. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Wire Bond. 4. Thru wall flashing: a. EPDM: 1) Carlisle Syntech Systems, Inc. 2) Firestone Building Products Co. b. Stainless steel: 1) Heckman Building Products. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Weep joint mortar protection system: a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Wire Bond. 6. Preformed control joint inserts: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b. Wire Bond. 7. Grout screen: a. Wire Bond. b. Heckman Building Products. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
38
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
39
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
A. Thru Wall Flashing : 1. 40 mil EPDM manufactured specifically for thru wall flashing. a. Tear resistance: ASTM D624, 150 LB/IN minimum. b. Width as necessary. 1) Provide single piece full width, no horizontal joints will be allowed unless approved in writing by Engineer. c. Factory precut wherever possible. d. Factory fabricated inside corners, outside corners, and end dams.
48 49
B. Flashing Adhesive: As recommended by flashing manufacturer for sealing laps, sealing to vertical masonry and concrete surfaces and sealing to stainless steel surfaces.
50
C. Weep Vent: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. 2. 3.
90 percent open mesh vent designed to be placed in vertical mortar joint. Mortar Net USA, Ltd. "Mortar Net Weep Vents." Color: Gray
D. Reglets: 1. Products specified are manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2. For masonry construction: Type #MR - Masonry Reglet. 3. For concrete construction: Type #CR - Concrete Reglet.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E. Veneer Anchorage System for New Concrete Back-up: 1. Anchors, dovetail: a. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316, ASTM A666. b. 16 GA corrugated steel with dovetail. 1) 1 IN wide x 5 1/2 IN long minimum or as necessary by Project conditions. a) Provide minimum 2 IN embedment into veneer mortar joint. 2. Dovetail slots: a. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316, ASTM A666. b. 22 GA steel. c. 1 IN wide, 1 IN deep, nominal 5/8 IN throat with filler.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
F. Veneer Anchorage System for Existing Concrete orConcrete Masonry Back-up: 1. Adjustable pintle and plate: a. Conform to ASTM A951. b. Cold drawn stainless steel steel wire pintle, ASTM A82 ASTM A580, Type 304. c. 14 GA stainless steel plate, ASTM A666, Type 304 ASTM A1008. d. 3/16 IN DIA wire x length necessary to embed pintle minimum 2 IN into veneer mortar joint.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
G. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. General: a. Conform to ASTM A951. b. Cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82. Stainless steel, ASTM A580, Type 304 or 316. c. 9 GA side rods. d. 9 GA cross rods. e. Prefabricated corner and tee sections with minimum length of 30 IN from point of intersection. 2. Single wythe wall joint reinforcing: Ladder design. 3. Composite wall joint reinforcing: Ladder design with double side rod. 4. Cavity wall joint reinforcing with masonry back-up: a. Ladder design horizontal joint reinforcing. b. Wire eyes welded to horizontal joint reinforcing. 1) Length as necessary to project through rigid insulation into airspace. c. 3/16 IN DIA adjustable pintle veneer anchors. 1) Length as necessary to provide minimum 2 IN embed into veneer mortar joint. d. Hohmann & Barnard "270 Ladder."
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
H. Rigid Steel Masonry Anchors: 1. 1 IN by 1/4 IN with ends turned up 2 IN. 2. Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316. 3. Length: a. 24 IN unless noted otherwise. b. Where wall conditions such as jambs or other obstructions preclude the use of 24 IN anchors, shorter anchors may be used.
50 51 52
I.
Mesh Wall Ties: 1. Stainless steel, ASTM E437, Type 304. 2. 16 GA, 1/2 IN square mesh.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 3
1 2
3. 4.
3 4 5 6
J.
Width: 2 IN less than nominal wall thickness. Length: As necessary to embed minimum 6 IN into each wall.
Grout Screen: 1. Polypropylene monofilament. 2. 1/4 x 1/4 IN mesh. 3. Width of grout screen to be 2 IN less than nominal width of CMU.
7 8 9 10 11
K. Weep Joint Mortar Protection System: 1. 100 percent recycled polyester. 2. 90 percent minimum open weave mesh. 3. Minimum 10 IN high by full width of air cavity. 4. Trapezoidal shape.
12 13 14 15 16 17
L. Preformed Rubber Control Joint Inserts: 1. ASTM D2000, M2AA-805. 2. Hardness: ASTM D2240, Shore A Durometer, 80 +/-5. 3. Ultimate elongation: 350 percent, ASTM D412. 4. Tensile strength: 1000 psi, ASTM D412. 5. Hohmann & Barnard #RS Series.
18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
19
3.1
INSTALLATION
20
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
B. Thru Wall Flashing and Stainless Steel Drip: 1. Install to provide positive drainage of cavity moisture. 2. Extend stainless steel drip beyond the exterior face of the wall to minimum distance possible while still allowing drip to perform intended purpose. 3. Extend flashing horizontally beyond each edge of lintel or sills to next vertical mortar joint but not less than 4 IN and turn up edge one (1) full veneer course. a. Seal all joints. 4. Where thru wall flashing steps up or down in the wall, provide end dam at step. a. End dam shall extend up or down to tie into thru wall flashing step. b. Seal all joints for continuous watertight barrier. 5. Lap stainless steel drip minimum of 2 IN and bond two (2) pieces together using stainless steel pop rivets and two (2) beads of lap sealant. 6. At concrete masonry unit back-up, install upper edge of flashing into block joint. 7. At concrete back-up, secure upper edge of flashing into reglet and seal. 8. Adhere vertical surface of flashing to back-up wall with adhesive recommended by flashing manufacturer. 9. Extend flashing minimum of 6 IN above top of weep joint mortar protection system. 10. Lap and seal flashing at all inside and outside corners to provide continuous uninterrupted barrier.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
C. Thru Wall Flashing: 1. Install flashing to provide positive drainage of cavity moisture. 2. Extend flashings beyond edge of lintel or sill to the next vertical mortar joint but not less than 4 IN and turn up edge one (1) full veneer course. a. Solder and seal all joints. 3. Where flashing steps up or down in the wall provide end dam at the step. a. End dam shall extend up or down to tie into the thru wall flashing step. b. Solder and seal all joints for continuous water and air tight barrier. 4. Lap flashing 2 IN. a. Seal all laps by applying two (2) beads of lap sealant on each side of the lap joint. b. Sealant beads shall extend full width of flashing both vertical and horizontal surfaces. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 4
1 2
5.
c. Provide means for maintaining drip leg alignment at lap. Install upper edge of flashing into mortar joint or reglet as shown on Drawings.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
D. Weeps: 1. Provide open weep joints at maximum 16 IN OC in head joint of first course of veneer immediately above thru wall flashing. a. Omit mortar bed on top of thru wall flashing at each open weep joint location to allow moisture an unobstructed path to the exterior. b. Weep joints shall be not more than 4 IN high. 2. Provide weep vents maximum 16 IN OC in top of head joint of top course of veneer or as indicated on Drawings. a. Do not use weep vents in weep joints at the bottom of the wall. b. Set weep vents back away from face of veneer slightly so the front edge of the vent is contained within the mortar joint.
14 15 16 17 18 19
E. Weep Joint Mortar Protection System: 1. Install continuous row(s) of material. 2. Provide multiple thicknesses of material compressed as necessary to completely fill the entire air cavity. a. Thickness to be at least 10 percent wider than air cavity being filled. 3. Set material directly on top of thru wall flashing.
20 21
F. Butt joints of preformed control joint inserts tightly together and secure with adhesive or sealant acceptable to insert manufacturer.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
G. Anchoring Veneer: 1. Veneer with concrete block back-up: a. Anchor veneer to new construction using horizontal joint reinforcing and adjustable pintle veneer anchors 2. Veneer with concrete back-up: a. Anchor veneer to new construction using dovetail anchors and slots. b. Anchor veneer to existing construction using adjustable pintle and plate. c. Provide veneer anchorage at not more than 16 IN OC vertically and 16 IN OC horizontally.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
H. Reinforcing Masonry: 1. General: a. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing in all concrete masonry wall construction. 1) Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length with minimum cover of 5/8 IN on exterior side of walls and 1/2 IN at other locations. a) For interior partitions, the "exterior" side of the wall is considered the side having the most corrosive atmosphere or the corridor side of the wall. 2) Lap reinforcement minimum of 12 IN at ends. a) Remove cross wires on one (1) side of the lap splice and bend the side rods slightly so the lap is provided with 12 IN of uninterrupted wire lap occurring in the same plane. 3) Do not bridge control joints with horizontal joint reinforcing. 4) Do not bridge expansion joints with horizontal joint reinforcing. 5) At corners and wall intersections use prefabricated "L" and "T" horizontal joint reinforcing sections. 6) Cut and bend as necessary. b. Install reinforcing at 16 IN OC vertically unless noted otherwise on Drawings. c. Install reinforcing 8 IN OC vertically for a minimum of 24 IN at starter courses. 1) Do not install horizontal joint reinforcing in veneer mortar joint having throughwall flashing. d. In concrete masonry back-up construction, install horizontal joint reinforcing {and adjustable pintle veneer anchors} at 8 IN OC in parapets. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
2.
3. 4.
1) Parapets begin at the course immediately above the top of the roof structural member or top of concrete topping slab on precast roof structure. e. In concrete masonry back-up construction, install additional horizontal joint reinforcing and adjustable pintle veneer anchors 16 IN OC in courses on each side of vertical control joints and on each jamb of openings for full height of joint or opening. 1) Alternate with normal wall horizontal joint reinforcing. 2) Extend reinforcing minimum 32 IN beyond joint or jambs of opening. f. In concrete back-up construction, install veneer horizontal joint reinforcing 8 IN OC and install dovetail anchors at 8 IN OC in courses on each side of vertical control joints and on each jamb of openings for full height of joint or opening. 1) Extend reinforcing minimum 32 IN beyond the edge of the dovetail anchors. 2) Cut veneer horizontal joint reinforcing around dovetail anchors but do not completely separate joint reinforcing into individual pieces. 3) Locate dovetail anchors within 4 IN of the edge of the opening. 4) Terminate horizontal joint reinforcing at edge of dovetail anchors at opening. g. In concrete masonry back-up construction, reinforce masonry openings over 12 IN wide with horizontal joint reinforcing and adjustable pintle veneer anchors placed in three (3) horizontal joints above lintel and two (2) horizontal joints below sill. 1) Extend minimum of 32 IN beyond jambs of opening. Reinforcing concrete masonry: a. Install reinforcing bars where indicated on Drawings. 1) Provide means necessary to ensure position of vertical steel reinforcing meets requirements of Building Code. b. At intersecting load-bearing walls, provide rigid steel anchors 16 IN OC vertically, embed ends in grout filled cores. 1) Alternate rigid steel anchors with horizontal joint reinforcing. c. At intersecting non-load bearing walls or at intersecting load bearing/non-load bearing walls provide mesh wall ties in mortar joint at 16 IN OC vertically. 1) Extend minimum 6 IN into each wall. 2) Alternate mesh wall ties with horizontal joint reinforcing. d. Anchor intersecting concrete masonry to intersecting cast-in-place or precast concrete using dovetail slots and anchors. 1) Provide dovetail anchors at 16 IN OC or as noted on Drawings. Repair all galvanized coatings damaged as a result of welding. a. See Specification Section 05 50 00 for galvanizing repair system. Reinforcing veneer: a. Reinforce veneer with joint reinforcement placed in veneer mortar joints: 1) In new masonry back-up construction alternate veneer horizontal joint reinforcing with horizontal joint reinforcing and adjustable pintle veneer anchors . 2) In new concrete back-up construction alternate veneer horizontal joint reinforcing with dovetail anchors. b. In concrete back-up construction, reinforce masonry veneer openings over 12 IN wide with single wall wythe horizontal joint reinforcing and dovetail anchors placed in two (2) horizontal joints above lintel and below sill. 1) Extend reinforcing minimum 32 IN beyond the jambs of openings. 2) Locate dovetail anchors within 4 IN of the edge of the opening. 3) Cut veneer horizontal joint reinforcing around dovetail anchors but do not completely separate joint reinforcing into individual pieces. 4) Terminate horizontal joint reinforcing at edge of dovetail anchors at opening.
50 51
I.
Install reglets as walls are being constructed. 1. Set reglets true with wall, plumb and at consistent depth.
52 53
J.
Remove all excess mortar and grout from reglets as walls are being constructed and protect reglet openings from filling with mortar, grout and other construction debris.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 6
1
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 23 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 04 05 50 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Cold weather protection. 2. Hot weather protection.
8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry Society (ACI/ASCE/TMS): a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specification for Masonry Structures. 2. Brick Industry Association (BIA): a. Tech Note 1, Cold and Hot Weather Construction. 3. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC): a. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Masonry Construction. 4. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). a. TEK 3-1C, All Weather Concrete Masonry Construction.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
23 24 25
A. Hot Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, hot weather construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperatures exceed 100 DegF or 90 DegF when the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph.
26 27 28
B. Cold Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, cold weather construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperature falls below 40 DegF or when the temperature of the masonry units is below 40 DegF.
29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)
30
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
3.1
ERECTION AND APPLICATION
32 33 34 35 36 37
A. General: 1. Comply with NCMA TEK 3-1C and BIA Tech Note 1 recommendations and practices. 2. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials. 3. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered with clear polyethylene minimum 6 mil thick. a. Extend down each side of wall minimum of 16 IN and secure.
38 39 40 41 42 43
B. Temporary Facilities: 1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and orderly progress of work. 2. Provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32 DegF within protected areas. 3. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of work. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 04 05 50 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements: 1. Prior to and during installation: a. Air temperature 32 to 40 DegF: Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. b. Air temperature 25 to 32 DegF: 1) Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. 2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. c. Air temperature below 25 DegF: 1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. 2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. 3) Maintain temperature of units until laid at not less than 40 DegF. 4) Provide heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain air temperature above freezing. 5) Provide windbreaks or shelters when wind is in excess of 15 mph. a) Wind breaks or shelters shall be translucent. 2. After installation: a. Air temperature 32 to 40 DegF: Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 HRS by covering with weather-resistive translucent membrane. b. Air temperature 25 to 32 DegF: Completely cover with translucent weather-resistive membrane for not less than 24 HRS. c. Air temperature 20 to 25 DegF: Completely protect with insulating blankets for not less than 24 HRS or provide other protection approved by Engineer. d. Air temperature below 20 DegF: 1) Provide enclosed translucent shelters and heating to maintain air temperature on each side of wall above 32 DegF for 24 HRS. 2) Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat. e. Promptly repair all tears, holes, etc., to translucent membrane and shelter using compatible patching material and tape as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
D. Hot Weather Construction and Protection Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of IMIAWC, NCMA, BIA and ACI/ASCE/TMS. 2. Storage and preparation of materials. a. Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials from direct sun. b. Maintain sand in a damp loose condition. 1) Sand moisture shall be maintained at minimum 8 percent. 2) Sprinkle with cool water as required to maintain moisture content. c. Use cool water for mixing mortars. d. Avoid using tools and equipment that have been sitting in the sun. 1) Sprinkle mortar boards, mortar pans, wheel barrows, mixers, etc., with cool water. e. Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to use. 3. Installation: a. Place masonry units within one minute of the spreading of the mortar. 1) Mortar beds shall not be spread more than 4 FT ahead of the masonry unit being placed. b. Provide wind screens and shading partitions as required to eliminate direct sunlight exposure. c. Wet installed units using fog spray of clean water. d. Cover installed work immediately after installation to slow rate of loss of moisture from units. e. Fog-spray new masonry work until damp. 1) Repeat fog spraying minimum of three (3) times per day until masonry work has cured for 72 HRS.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 04 05 50 - 2
1 2 3 5
2) In high humidity conditions, Engineer reserves the right to discontinue fog spraying if operation is found to be introducing excessive amounts of moisture into the Work.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 04 05 50 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE MASONRY
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry construction (CMU), including: a. Standard concrete masonry. b. Pre-colored masonry. c. Split-face masonry. d. Precast concrete lintels. 2. Integral water repellent admixture. 3. Masonry special inspection.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcement. 4. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 5. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 6. Section 04 01 20 - Masonry Cleaning. 7. Section 04 05 13 - Masonry Mortar and Grout. 8. Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories. 9. Section 04 05 50 - Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 10. Section 07 19 00 - Liquid Water Repellent. 11. Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation. 12. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C55, Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick. c. C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. d. C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. e. C426, Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units. f. C1357, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength. g. E514, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 2. Masonry Standard Joint Committee (MSJC): a. Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602); referred to herein as MSJC Specification. 3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): a. TEK 2-3A, Architectural Concrete Masonry Units. b. TEK 3-4B, Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction. c. TEK 8-2A, Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry. d. TEK 8-3A, Control and Removal of Efflorescence. 4. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
5.
Concrete masonry unit manufacturer shall be licensed or qualified, in writing, by manufacturer of integral water repellent admixture to produce masonry units containing manufacturer's admixture. a. Concrete masonry unit manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience producing masonry units containing manufacturer's admixture.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
B. Mock-Ups: 1. Prior to permanent wall construction, construct mock-up. a. Construct mock-up on a concrete slab as necessary to demonstrate construction details. 1) Minimum slab thickness: 4 IN. b. Mock-up shall show full color range, texture and bond pattern(s) of all masonry specified. c. Mock-up shall be as large as required to properly display all conditions required by the building masonry construction. 1) Minimum 4 FT high x 8 FT long. a) Return corners and intersections minimum 4 FT. 2) Mock-up shall demonstrate: a) Outside corner condition. b) Inside corner condition. c) Intersection of interior masonry partition. d) Jamb condition demonstrating lintel bearing and flashing. e) Masonry control joint. f) Expansion joint. d. Include all special corners and other special CMU detailing shown on Drawings. e. Include all types of masonry shown on Drawings, including: 1) Pre-colored masonry. 2) Split-face masonry. 3) Precast lintel. 4) Cast stone. f. Mock-up shall include, as a minimum: 1) All types of masonry. a) All special shapes. b) All types of back-up wall system(s). 2) Vertical wall reinforcing with grouted cell. 3) Typical bond beam construction. 4) Typical lintel construction. 5) Positioning, securing and lapping of reinforcing steel. 6) Masonry accessories: a) Horizontal joint reinforcing. (1) Positioning and lapping of joint reinforcing. b) Weep joint mortar protection system. c) Weep joints and weep vents, d) Typical control joint construction. e) Mesh wall ties. f) Rigid steel masonry anchors. 7) Insulation. 8) Cleaning of masonry work. 2. Step construction of mock-up to allow observation of all components. 3. Mock-up shall constitute minimum standard of quality for actual construction. a. Maintain mock-up during construction. 4. If not acceptable, construct additional mock-ups as required. 5. Remove when directed by Engineer.
52 53 54
C. All masonry units of any one (1) particular type, color or face style shall be from the same production run. 1. Special shapes shall be factory fabricated unless noted otherwise. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 2
1
1.3
DEFINITIONS
2 3
A. For purposes of manufacturing concrete masonry units using integral water repellent admixture, all concrete masonry units are considered to be installed in an exterior environment.
4
B. Definitions to be in accordance with Standard Unit Nomenclature Table 1, NCMA TEK 2-3A.
5
1.4
SUBMITTALS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer's information on aggregate and cement type used in manufacture. b. Data sheet on each type of masonry unit, including: 1) Pre-colored masonry. 2) Split-face masonry. 3. Drawings: a. Scaled (minimum 1/8 IN per foot) plans showing proposed locations of masonry control joints. b. Wall elevations and sections, indicating special shapes, shape part numbers, applicable dimensions. c. Detail drawings for: 1) Precast concrete lintels. a) Show profiles, cross-sections, reinforcement and steel components. 4. Certifications: a. Certification that concrete masonry units meet or exceed requirements of standards referenced. b. Certification that fire-resistive rated units meet the requirements of the Building Code. c. Certification that integral water repellent admixture will not affect the use of coloring processes or alter the actual colors of factory colored masonry units. d. Data sheets on integral water repellent admixture being used in masonry unit manufacturing. e. Technical bulletins on cleaning masonry containing integral water repellent. f. Certification of integral water repellent admixture dosage rates from concrete masonry unit producer. g. Concrete masonry producer shall certify that integral liquid water repellent admixture has been provided at dosage rate recommended by admixture manufacturer for use in exterior wall construction. 5. Qualifications of testing lab and technician. 6. Test results for all masonry testing.
38 39 40 41 42 43
B. Samples: 1. Concrete Masonry Finish Samples: Manufacturer's complete offering of colors and textures for each type of masonry specified. a. Minimum 3 IN SQ samples for initial selection. b. Provide two (2) 8 IN SQ samples if each type of masonry selected for final approval. c. Samples of standard gray masonry will not be required.
44 45 46
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
47
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
48
A. Deliver units on pallets with tight covers or deliver in cubes and store on dunnage.
49
B. Protect units from damage.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 3
1 2 3
C. Inspect units upon delivery for damage, to assure color match with mock-up or approved samples, dimensional quality, and trueness of unit. 1. Remove damaged or otherwise unacceptable units from the Project Site.
4
D. Store units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
12 13
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERSSubject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:Standard masonry units: a. Any manufacturer capable of meeting the requirements of this Specification Section. 2. Integral water repellent admixture: a. GCP Applied Technologies, Inc. b. ACM Chemistries, Inc. B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
2.2
MATERIALS
14
A. Cement: Type I or II Portland, ASTM C150.
15
B. Aggregate: ASTM C33.
16
C. Reinforcing Bars: Refer to Specification Section 03 21 00.
17
D. Mortar: Refer to Specification Section 04 05 13.
18
E. Masonry Grout: Refer to Specification Section 04 05 13.
19
F. Masonry Accessories: Refer to Specification Section 04 05 23.
20
G. Insulation: Refer to Specification Section 07 21 00.
21
H. Sealants: Refer to Specification Section 07 92 00.
22 23 24
I.
25
2.3
Integral Concrete Masonry Water Repellent: 1. Liquid polymeric admixture. 2. GCP Applied Technologies, Inc., "DRY-BLOCK".
MANUFACTURED UNITS
26 27 28 29
A. General: 1. Fire resistive units: Fabricate to meet the Building Code. 2. Fabricated in the manufacturing plant. 3. Provide square corners unless noted otherwise.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Modular units: ASTM C90. a. Light weight units. 2. Concrete bricks: a. Structural units: ASTM C55. 1) Same material, texture and density as modular units. 3. Color: a. Interior units: Standard gray. b. Exposed exterior units: Precolored. 4. Design compressive strength: f'm=1,500 psi minimum. a. Determine in accordance with MSJC Specification. 1) Unit strength method, sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C140. 5. Provide masonry units manufactured with integral water repellent admixture for the following exposures: a. Exterior veneer. b. Exterior single-wythe construction. c. Exterior composite wall construction. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
d. 6.
10 11 12 13 14 15
Interior areas defined as wet and/or corrosive. 1) See Specification Section 07 92 00 for definition of wet and/or corrosive areas. Special shapes and faces: a. Corner units. 1) Corner units used in veneer wythe shall have a finished return leg one-half the length of a standard modular stretcher unit. 2) Corner units shall maintain regular modular masonry coursing. b. Finished end units. c. Other special shapes as indicated on Drawings or necessary to maintain coursing.
C. Precast concrete lintels: 1. Concrete: See Specification Section 03 31 30. 2. Reinforcing: See Specification Section 03 21 00. 3. Embedded steel components: Galvanized. a. See Specification Section 05 50 00. 2.4
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. Integral Concrete Masonry Water Repellent: 1. Water permeance of masonry: Capable of achieving a Class E Rating when evaluated using ASTM E514 with the test extended to 72 HRS, using the rating criteria specified in ASTM E514. 2. Flexural bond strength of masonry: An increase of 10 percent, minimum, in masonry flexural bond strength shall occur as a result of adding integral water-repellent concrete masonry and mortar admixtures when compared to a control (containing no admixtures) concrete masonry and mortar tested in accordance with ASTM C1357. 3. Compressive strength validation shall be per unit strength method. 4. Drying shrinkage of masonry: Maximum 5 percent increase in drying shrinkage of the concrete masonry units shall occur as a result of adding integral water repellent concrete masonry admixture when compared to a control (containing no admixtures) concrete masonry when tested in accordance with ASTM C426. 5. Grout shear bond strength: Maximum 5 percent decrease in grout shear bond strength shall occur as a result of adding integral water repellent admixture to the concrete masonry units when compared to a control (containing no admixtures).
32
PART 3 - EXECUTION
33
3.1
PREPARATION
34
A. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct.
35 36 37
B. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints. 1. Properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets weep joints and weep vents.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
3.2
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Build in flashing, reinforcing, reglets, weeps, weep vents and related accessory items. a. See Specification Section 04 05 23 for installation of accessory items. 2. Perform all cutting using masonry saw blades. 3. Drill holes using masonry drill bits or core drill. a. Holes made by chipping unit will not be accepted. 4. Install field units in running bond, unless noted otherwise. a. Provide special coursing where indicated on the Drawings. 5. Cut as required to maintain bond pattern. 6. Use solid units where cutting or laying would expose holes and as noted on Drawings. 7. Avoid use of less than half size units, whenever possible. 8. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, stained or imperfect units exposed in finish work.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9. Provide units of uniform color, within the range demonstrated on the approved mock-up. 10. Do not wet concrete masonry units. 11. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades. a. Provide not less than 8 IN of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings. 12. In fire-resistive rated wall construction, install fire resistive units in accordance with the Building Code.
8 9 10
B. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Grout solid all cells containing steel reinforcing and as indicated on Drawings. a. Refer to Specification Section 04 05 13 for grouting.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
C. Laying and Tooling: 1. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints. a. Provide full mortar bed on all block cross webs and completely fill head joints. 1) Do not slush head joints. 2) Protect cells requiring grout fill from mortar droppings. 3) Omit mortar from head joint at weep joint opening. 2. Maintain nominal 3/8 IN joint widths. a. Cut joints flush where concealed. b. Tool exposed joints concave. c. Compress mortar in below ground joints and in joints concealed by insulation in cavity wall construction. d. Provide wider joints where noted on Drawings. 1) In no case shall any mortar joint be more than 3/4 IN wide. e. Where masonry sits on top of steel support omit the mortar joint on top of the support and sit masonry directly on top of the thru wall flashing or the steel support member unless a mortar joint is required to maintain coursing. 3. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes except weeps, and completely fill with mortar. 4. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide neat, uniform appearance. 5. Remove masonry disturbed after laying. a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar. b. Do not pound units to fit. c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar. 6. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course. a. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 7. As work progresses, build in items indicated on Drawings and specified. a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items. b. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place grout screen in joint below and fill core solid with mortar.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
D. Control Joints and Sealants: 1. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints where indicated on Drawings. 2. Where not indicated on Drawings, submit proposed control joint locations in accordance with the following requirements: a. Provide control joints at maximum 24 FT OC. b. Provide at all T intersections. c. Locate joints so as to allow lintels and bond beams above and below openings to extend beyond the opening as indicated on the Drawings without control joints thru the lintel or bond beam. 3. Rake out mortar in joint. 4. Refer to Specification Section 07 92 00 for sealant installation requirements. a. Seal control and expansion joints.
53
E. Tolerances: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises: a. 1/4 IN in 10 FT. b. 3/8 IN in a story height not to exceed 20 FT. c. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any story or 20 FT maximum. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: a. 1/4 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 1/2 IN in 40 FT or more. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: a. 1/2 IN in any bay or 20 FT. b. 3/4 IN in 40 FT or more. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on Drawings: a. Minus 1/4 IN. b. Plus 1/2 IN. Maximum variation in mortar joint width: a. Bed joints: 3/32 IN in 10 FT. b. Head joints: 1) Minus 1/8 IN. 2) Plus 1/8 IN.
25 26 27 28
F. Protect against weather when work is not in progress. 1. During inclement weather conditions, cover top of walls with translucent waterproof membrane. 2. See Specification Section 04 05 50.
29
G. Protect against cold/hot weather as specified in Specification Section 04 05 50.
30
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
31 32 33
A. Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction: 1. At a minimum, provide bracing in accordance with NCMA TEK 3-4B. 2. Contractor is responsible for adequately bracing all masonry during construction.
34 35 36 37 38
B. Remove and replace loose, stained, damaged and other unacceptable units as directed by Engineer. 1. Provide new units to match. 2. Install in fresh mortar. 3. Point to eliminate evidence of replacement.
39 40 41
C. Special Masonry Inspection: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
42
3.4
CLEANING
43 44 45 46
A. Clean concrete masonry as the wall is being constructed using fiber brushes, wooden paddles and scrapers. 1. Do not use metal tools or wire brushes. 2. No acid-based cleaning solutions shall be used unless approved in writing by Engineer.
47
B. Remove dirt and stains in accordance NCMA TEK 8-2A.
48
C. Remove primary efflorescence in accordance with NCMA TEK 8-3A.
50
END OF SECTION 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE MASONRY 04 22 00 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel, including the fabrication and erection of support and bracing members, including connections. 2. Connection detail design as required.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. b. 360, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings. c. Quality Certification Program for Fabricators. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B18.21.1, Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A2, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Girder Rails of Plain, Grooved, and Guard Types. b. A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. c. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. d. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, ZincCoated, Welded and Seamless. e. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. f. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. g. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. h. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. i. A325, Standard Specification of Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. j. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. k. A500/A500M, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. l. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. m. A992/A992M, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. n. A1064/A1064M, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. o. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. p. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
q.
4.
5. 6. 7.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. r. F1852, Standard Specification for "Twist Off" Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1/A5.1M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5/A5.5M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. c. A5.17/A5.17M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. d. A5.18/A5.18M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding. e. A5.20/A5.20M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. f. A5.23/A5.23M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. g. A5.28/A5.28M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding. h. A5.29/A5.29M, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding. i. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 1) Steel stud connectors and their installation to comply with requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. National Institute of Steel Detailing (NISD). Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): a. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
B. Qualifications: 1. Steel fabricator: a. Minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of structural steel and participate in the AISC Certification program and is designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category BU (formally known as STD) at time of bid. b. Fabricator plant quality control and inspection program: Meet requirements of the Building Code and/or be an Approved Fabricator. c. Plants that are not an Approved Fabricator may be acceptable, provided: 1) Plant meets all remaining qualifications. 2) Contractor reimburses the Owner the cost of required Special Inspection services. 2. Steel erector: a. Minimum of 10 years of experience in erection of structural steel similar in the scope of this project or certified as CSE under the AISC Quality Certification Program. b. With an active and enforced quality assurance program in place, as described in the applicable Codes. 3. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. 4. Structural steel connections design: Professional engineer registered in the State of North Carolina. 1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Owner: May mean the Owner's Designated Representative for Construction as defined by the AISC 303.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 2
1 2 3
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dipped galvanizing per ASTM A153/A153M and/or ASTM A123/A123M with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by aforementioned standards.
4 5
C. Approved Fabricator: Approved by the Building Official to perform the Building Code required Special Inspections.
6
1.4
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Detailed supplemental specification relating to load indicator washers or high-strength bolts. 1) Alternate design for Engineer approval (submitted at Contractor's option if desired by Contractor for use). d. Source and certification of quality for high-strength bolts, nuts and washers. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Prepare Shop Drawings under NISD Quality Procedures Program certification. b. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop coatings. 1) All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before submittal. 2) Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 3) Indicate all shop and field bolts. 4) Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols. 5) Be reviewed and sealed by a Professional Engineer retained by Contractor to verify conformance with design criteria stipulated in the Contract Documents. a) Note connection capacity or design load next to each connection. c. Prepare complete erection drawings showing the location and marks of all pieces. 1) Copies of up-to-date erection drawings shall accompany the Shop Drawings. 2) Use match marks on the erection drawings to indicate the sheet number on which each particular member is detailed. d. Correct any incorrect or unacceptable material or fabrication due to incorrect detailing, shop work, or erection, without additional charge. 4. Certifications: a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major components and fasteners incorporated into work. b. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to perform welding indicating compliance with testing specified by AWS. c. Welder qualification data and prequalified procedures. d. Special Inspections reports. e. Source Quality Control Documentation, including certificate of compliance stating that the work performed in the fabrication shop was done in accordance with the approved construction documents. 1) Certification is required only if the fabricator is fabricator approved by the Building Official. 5. Test reports: a. Certified copies of mill tests. b. Manufacturer's load test and temperature sensitivity data for post-installed anchor bolts. c. Test reports for all structural steel work.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store steel members above ground on skids or other supports. 1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign material and protect against corrosion.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 3
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. High-strength bolts: a. Portland Bolt and Manufacturing Company. b. Lewis Bolt & Nut Company. c. Nucor Fasteners. d. St. Louis Screw and Bolt Company. 2. Load indicator washers for high-strength bolts: a. Portland Bolt and Manufacturing Company. b. Mid-South Bolt and Screw Co., Inc. c. J and M Turner, Inc. 3. Alternate design high-strength bolts: a. T. C. Bolt Corporation. b. Construction Fastener Systems Division of Bristol Machine Company. c. LeJuene Bolt Co. 4. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW, Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc. 5. Mechanical anchor bolts: a. See Section 03 15 19. 6. Adhesive anchors bolts: a. See Section 03 15 19 7. Anchor bolt sleeves: a. Sinco/Wilson.
27
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
28
2.2
MATERIALS
29 30 31
A. Steel, Structural Shapes and Plate (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. All W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. 2. All other plates, bars and rolled shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.
32
B. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B (Type E or S) (Fy=35).
33 34 35
C. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): 1. Round: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B (Fy=42). 2. Square or rectangular: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B (Fy=46).
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: 1. ASTM A325 with ASTM A563 nuts galvanized: 2. High-strength bolts: a. Provide two (2) ASTM F436 washers for all bolts galvanized. b. Provide beveled washers at connections of sloped/tapered sections. 3. High-strength bolts with compressible washer type direct tension indicators (DTI), ASTM F959. a. Provide at Contractor's option and subject to approval of Engineer. 4. Alternate high-strength design: Provide at Contractor's option and subject to approval of Engineer.
46
E. Bolts, Non-high Strength: ASTM A307, Grade A.
47
F. Threaded Rod: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
48
G. Washers, Plain (for Non-high Strength Bolts): ASME B18.22.1, Type B.
49
H. Welding Electrodes: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. 2. 3. 4.
Shielded metal arc: AWS A5.1/A5.1M or AWS A5.5/A5.5M, E70XX or E801X-X. Submerged arc: AWS A5.17/A5.17M or AWS A5.23/A5.23M, F7XX-EXXX or F8XXEXXX-XX. Gas metal arc: AWS A5.18/A5.18M, E70S-X or E70U-1 or AWS A5.28/A5.28M, ER80SXX, E80C-XXX. Flux cored arc: AWS A5.20/A5.20M, E7XT-X (except 2, 3, 10, GS), AWS A5.29/A5.29M, E7XT-X or E8XTX-X, E8XTX-XM.
8 9
I.
Anchor Rods and Bolts: 1. See Section 03 15 19.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
J.
Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. Headed studs: a. ASTM A108, complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7, Type B; minimum yield strength 50,000 psi, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi. b. Uniform diameter. c. Heads: Concentric and normal to shaft. d. Weld end: Chamfered and solid flux. 2. Deformed bar anchor: a. ASTM A1064/A1064M, complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7, Type C. b. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi. c. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi. d. Straight, unless indicated otherwise. e. Solid flux. 3. After welding, remove ceramic ferrules and maintain free from any substance which would interfere with function, or prevent bonding to concrete.
25
K. Nonshrink Grout: See Specification Section 03 31 30.
26 27
L. Post Installed Mechanical and Adhesive Anchor Bolts for Fastening to Concrete: 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
28
2.3
FABRICATION
29 30 31 32
A. Comply with requirements of applicable Building Code and AISC 360 with modifications and additional requirements specified herein. 1. Identify high-strength steel material in fabricated members in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M.
33 34 35 36
B. Minimize the amount of field welding. 1. Shop assemble components into largest size possible commensurate with transportation and handling limitations. 2. Shop connections: Bolted with high-strength bolts or welded.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
C. Connection Details: 1. Connections not fully detailed on Drawings shall be designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of North Carolina, retained by Contractor, based on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Where beam reactions are shown on Drawings, design beam connection to support specified loads. 3. Where no reactions are shown, design each beam connection to support one-half of total uniform load capacity tabulated in AISC tables for "Uniform Load Constants for Beams" for the given shape, span and steel grade specified. 4. Where indicated on the Drawings, design beam connections for the axial load or transfer forces indicated in addition to the shear value indicated above. 5. Design bracing connections for loads indicated on the Drawings. 6. Provide as a minimum, two (2) 3/4 IN DIA, high-strength bolts for all bolted connections unless otherwise specified.
51
D. Provide bearing type connections for all bolted connections, unless otherwise noted. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
E. Field Connections: 1. Provide bolts for all field connections except where shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Use high-strength bolts unless shown or specified otherwise. 3. Use of high-strength bolts: Conform to RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 4. Unfinished bolts may be used for attaching stair treads to stringers. 5. If structural steel details (field welds versus shop welds, etc.) shown on design Drawings are not compatible with selected erection procedures, submit proposed modifications for review. 6. Connections to structural steel provided by others: Provide all connectors and coordinate location of bolt holes to match connection holes in steel provided by others.
12
F. Accurately mill column end bearing surfaces to true plane.
13
G. Fabricate and erect beams with non-specified camber in accordance with AISC 360, Chapter L1.
14 15 16 17 18 19
H. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. 3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations with tool making 1/16 IN bevel. 4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of other trades or contractors.
20 21
I.
Make allowance for draw in all cross bracing to provide small amount of initial tension in members.
22
J.
Make splices only where indicated or where approved.
23
K. Cope at 45 degrees, corners of stiffener plates at junction of member flanges with webs.
24 25
L. Flame cut bevels for welds, provided such cutting is done automatically. 1. Leave free of burrs and slag by grinding or planing the cut edges.
26 27
M. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp steel edges shall be ground to approximately 1/8 IN radius.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
N. Tolerances (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6/A6M tolerances for camber, profile, flatness or sweep, Contractor is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating, and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC 360. 2. Fabrication tolerance: a. Member length: 1) Both ends finished for contact bearing: 1/32 IN. 2) Framing members: 30 FT or less: 1/16 IN. Over 30 FT: 1/8 IN. b. Member straightness: 1) Compression members: 1/1000 of axial length between points laterally supported. 2) Non-compression members: ASTM A6/A6M tolerance for wide flange shapes. c. Specified member camber (except compression members): 1) 50 FT or less: -0/+1/2 IN. 2) Over 50 FT: -0/+1/2 IN (plus 1/8 IN per 10 FT over 50 FT). 3) Members received from mill with 75 percent of specified camber require no further cambering. 4) Fabricate beams/trusses without specified camber so after erection, camber is upward. 5) Measure camber in fabrication shop in unstressed condition. d. Use filler plates at bolted splices to take up depth deviation. 1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation in depth. 2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements. e. Free finished members from twists, bends and open joints. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 6
1 2 3
1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from the above tolerances are cause for rejection of material. 2.4
WELDING
4 5 6 7
A. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, and other requirements indicated herein, for all welding, techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used to correct defective work. 1. Qualify joint welding procedures or test in accordance with AWS qualification procedures.
8 9 10 11 12
B. Test and qualify welders, welding operators and tackers in compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for position and type of welding to which they will be assigned. 1. Conduct tests in presence of approved testing agency. 2. Certification within previous 12 months will be acceptable, provided samples of the welder's work are satisfactory.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C. Before Starting Welding: 1. Carefully plumb and align members in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Fully tighten all bolts. 3. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 5 for assembly and surface preparation. 4. Preheat base metal to temperature stated in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. a. When no preheat temperature is given in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and base metal is below 50 DegF, preheat base metal to at least 70 DegF. b. Maintain temperature during welding. c. Preheat surface of all base metal within distance from point of welding equal to thickness of thicker part being welded or 3 IN, whichever is greater, to specified preheat temperature. d. Maintain this temperature during welding. 5. Mark welds with an identifying mark unique to each welder.
26
D. Make flange welds before making web welds.
27 28 29 30
E. Where groove welds have back-up plates, make first three (3) passes with 1/8 IN round electrodes. 1. Use backup plates in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, extending minimum of 1 IN either side of joint.
31 32
F. Flame cut edges of stiffener plates at shop or field butt weld. 1. Do not shear.
33
G. Grind flush web fillets at webs notched to receive backup plates for flange groove welds.
34
H. Low Hydrogen Electrodes: Dry and store electrodes in compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
35 36 37
I.
Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0 DegF or where surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are exposed to inclement conditions.
38 39 40 41 42
J.
Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. Automatically end welded in accordance with the AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Fillet welding of headed studs and deformed bar anchors is not allowed unless approved by Engineer.
43 44 45
K. Test in-place studs in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M to ensure satisfactory welding of studs to members. 1. Replace studs failing this test.
46 47 48 49
L. When headed stud-type shear connectors are to be applied, clean top surface of members to receive studs in shop to remove oil, scale, rust, dirt, and other materials injurious to satisfactory welding. 1. Do not shop paint or galvanize metal surfaces to receive field applied studs. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 7
1
2.5
SHOP COATING
2 3
A. Refer to Specification Section 09 96 00 and coordinate shop primer, surface preparation and coating with field applied primers and coatings where specified.
4
B. Provide suitable methods of handling and transporting painted steel to avoid damage to coating.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C. Do not coat following surfaces: 1. Machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, and surfaces fully embedded in concrete. 2. Surfaces covered with fireproofing. 3. All other members for which no coating is specified. 4. Contact surfaces at bolted slip-critical connections, unless surface condition conforms to the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, Part 3.2.2.
12 13 14 15
D. Clean thoroughly all surfaces not coated before shipping. 1. Remove loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease. 2. Protect machined surfaces. 3. Galvanize all structural and miscellaneous steel after fabrication per ASTM A123/A123M.
16
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33. 2. If the fabricator is not an Approved Fabricator, Owner will employ the services of an independent testing agency to inspect and test structural steel shop work for compliance with Specifications. a. Contractor provides sufficient notification and access so inspection and testing can be accomplished. 3. Contractor responsible for testing to qualify shop welders and as needed for Contractor's own quality control to ensure compliance with Contract Documents.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
B. Approved Fabricator or Testing Agency Responsibilities: 1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6 including the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds with ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 2. Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, Section 9. a. Verify proper pretension for slip-critical bolted connection only. b. Verify direct tension indicator gaps for slip-critical bolted connection only. 3. Inspect stud welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 7.8. 4. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer.
40
PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
3.1
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
GENERAL A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. 1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the Contractor. 2. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, bracing or rigid connections are installed. 3. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 8
1 2 3
4.
Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor for the partially complete structure.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including wind, construction activities, and operation of equipment, is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary. 2. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind. 3. Design of the temporary bracing system and consideration of the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades, is the Contractor's responsibility. a. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer with the Engineer to identify those structural steel elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed. 4. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.
21 22 23 24
C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory completion of the work. 2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place.
25 26 27 28
D. Field Measurement: 1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. Contractor is responsible for the accurate fit of the work.
29 30 31
E. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. 1. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.
32
3.2
ERECTION
33 34
A. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the framing tolerances listed in the FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
35
B. Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support erection loads.
36 37
C. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. 1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.
38 39 40 41
D. Welding: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1/D1/1M and requirements of this Specification Section. 2. Join two (2) sections of steel of different ASTM designations using welding techniques in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedure.
42 43
E. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required. 1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.
44
F. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period.
45
G. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly.
46 47 48 49
H. Set beam and column base and bearing plates accurately, as indicated, on nonshrink grout. 1. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. 2. Use metal wedges, shims or setting nuts as required and tighten anchor bolts. a. Use same metal as base plate. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 9
1 2 3 4
3. 4. 5.
b. Cut off protrusions of wedges and shims flush with edge of base plate. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bottom of plate and bearing surface. Refer to Specification Section 03 31 30 for nonshrink grout requirements.
5 6
I.
Cast-in-place Anchor Bolts: 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
J.
Install high strength bolts with hardened washers. 1. Install and tighten in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, Section 8. 2. Coordinate installation with inspection. a. Do not start installation until coordination with Testing Agency is complete. 3. Bearing-type connections: High-strength bolts shall be tightened to snug-tight condition. 4. Slip-critical connections: a. Perform calibration testing for all methods of installation of high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, Section 8.2. b. Turn-of-nut tightening: 1) Inspector shall observe the pre-installation verification testing. 2) Subsequently, ensure by routine observation that the bolting crew properly rotates the turned element relative to the unturned element by the amount specified. 3) Alternatively, when fastener assemblies are match-marked after the initial fitup of the joint but prior to pretensioning, visual inspection after pretensioning is permitted in lieu of routine observation. c. Calibrated wrench tightening: Calibrate on a daily basis. d. Direct tension indicator tightening: If previously approved by Engineer. e. Installation of alternate design bolts: If previously approved by Engineer. 5. In the event any bolt in a connection is found to be defective, check and retighten all bolts in the connection.
29 30 31 32 33 34
K. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors. 1. In case members do not fit or holes do not match, ream out the holes and insert the next larger size bolt. a. Drill new holes if the connections require new holes. b. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Engineer. 2. Burning of holes is not permitted.
35 36
L. Prior to making field connections to existing structural steel, remove completely all paint from existing steel which will be in contact with new steel and new welds.
37
M. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in welded construction.
38 39
N. Provide beveled washers to give full bearing to bolt head or nut where bolts are to be used on surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to bolt axis.
40 41
O. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of non-high strength bolts and anchor bolts to prevent nuts from backing off.
42 43 44 45
P. After Erection: 1. Grind smooth all sharp surface irregularities resulting from field cutting or welding. 2. Power tool clean welds, bolts, washers and abrasions to shop coat removing all rust and foreign matter.
46 47
Q. Mechanical Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts: 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
48 49 50
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 10
1
2.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
B. Erected Framing Tolerance, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings: 1. Do not exceed cumulative effect of rolling, fabrication and erection tolerance for overall finished dimensions. 2. Erection tolerances are defined relative to member working points and working lines as follows: a. Actual centerline of top flange or surface at each end for horizontal members. b. Actual center of member at each end for all other members. c. Other points may be used, providing they are based on these definitions. d. Working line is straight line connecting member working points. 3. Tolerances on position and alignment are as specified in the Code, unless otherwise modified. a. Provide "adjustable items" such as lintels, wall supports, curb angles, window mullions and similar members with adjustable connections to supporting structural framing. 4. Certification by steel erector: a. Certify the location of erected structural steel is acceptable for plumbness, level and aligned within tolerances specified. b. Provide certification upon completion of any part of work. c. Provide certification prior to start of work by other trades that may be supported; attach to structural steel work. 3.4
CLEANING AND REPAIR OF SHOP PRIMER PAINT A. After erection, clean all steel of mud or other foreign materials, and repair any damage. 1. Touchup coatings to comply with Specification Section 09 96 00.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 11
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 05 14 00 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Structural aluminum including the fabrication and erection of framing and bracing members, including connection design as required.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Division 03 - Concrete. 4. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 5. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 6. Section 05 52 02 - Aluminum Railings. 7. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. ADM 1, The Aluminum Design Manual. b. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 325, Manual of Steel Construction. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. B210, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. c. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. d. B247, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and Rolled Ring Forgings. e. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. f. B429, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. g. F467, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use. h. F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, Socket Head Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. i. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. j. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 5. Building code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
45 46 47 48
B. Qualifications: 1. Minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of structural aluminum. 2. For welding aluminum: a. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.2. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05 14 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
b. 3. 1.3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Welding operators to have been qualified during the 12-month period prior to commencement of welding. Connections and members not detailed on the Drawings shall be designed by a registered professional Structural Engineer in the State of North Carolina.
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Erection plans and details of each piece including connection details: 1) Show all cuts, copes and holes. 2) Indicate all shop welds using AWS symbols. 3) Indicate all shop and field bolts. 4) Reviewed and sealed by Professional Engineer retained by Contractor to verify conformance with design criteria stipulated in the Contract Documents. a) Note connection capacity or design load next to each connection. b. Complete shop drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, details, connections, materials and shop-applied coatings. c. Prepare complete erection drawings showing the location and marks of all pieces. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Certifications. a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major components and fasteners incorporated into work. b. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to perform welding indicating compliance with testing specified by AWS. 5. Test reports. a. Certified copies of material mill tests. b. Manufacturer's load test and temperature sensitivity data for expansion anchor bolt and adhesive anchor bolts.
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
34 35 36 37
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Mechanical anchor bolts: See Specification Section 03 15 19. 2. Adhesive anchor bolts: See Specification Section 03 15 19.
38
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
39
2.2
MATERIALS
40 41 42 43 44
A. Alloy 6061-T6, 32,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. 1. ASTM B209 for sheets and plates. 2. ASTM B210 for tubes. 3. ASTM B221 and ASTM B308 for shapes: Beams, channels, angles, and tees. 4. ASTM B247 for forgings.
45 46
B. Alloy 6063-T5 or T6, 15,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. 1. ASTM B221 and ASTM B429 for bars, rods, wires, pipes, and tubes.
47 48
C. Nonferrous Bolts and Nuts: ASTM F467 and ASTM F468 of alloy 2024-T4 (60,000 psi tensile strength minimum). 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05 14 00 - 2
1 2
D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts : ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Type 304 or 316 with a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi.
3 4
E. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in bolts and nuts with which the washers are to be used.
5
F. Electrodes for Welding Aluminum: AWS D1.2 filler alloy 5356.
6 7 8 9
G. Mechanical and Adhesive Anchor Bolts for Fastening to Concrete: 1. Where approved by Engineer. 2. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. 3. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
10
2.3
DESIGN
11 12 13
A. All design shall consider effect of welds on material properties. 1. Eliminate the use of field welding. 2. Observe locations of any specified shop splice welds.
14 15
B. Where final design of connections for any portion of structure is not indicated, perform final design of such connections in accordance with the Building Code.
16 17 18 19 20 21
C. Final designs of connections shall conform to AA ADM 1 and to details and requirements stated in the Contract Documents. 1. Design loads for connections to be designed by the Contractor shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. Where design loads are not specified, connections shall be detailed to develop the full capacity of the member.
22
2.4
FABRICATION
23 24
A. Fabrication of bolted and welded connections of aluminum work shall be in accordance with AA ADM 1.
25 26
B. Contractor to be solely responsible for correctness of all shop and field fabrication and fit. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.
27 28
C. Fabricate aluminum work and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Make splices only where indicated or approved by Engineer.
29 30 31 32 33
D. Provide connections as indicated. 1. Where not indicated, design and provide connections in accordance with requirements of this Specification Section. 2. One-sided or other types of eccentric connections are not acceptable unless indicated on Contract Drawings or approved on Shop Drawings.
34 35 36 37 38 39
E. Drill or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Provide holes clean and free of torn or ragged edges. 3. Use tools which will make a 1/16 IN bevel to remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or punching operations. 4. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other trades.
40
F. Cope at 45 degrees corners of stiffener plates at junction of member flanges with webs.
41 42 43 44 45 46
G. Welding: 1. Weld connections to members in shop and bolt connections in field. 2. Perform welding using electrodes of filler alloy 5356. 3. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.2. 4. Use only welding procedures and welding operators qualified in accordance with requirements of Paragraph 1.2B. Qualifications.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05 14 00 - 3
1 2
H. All full penetration welds shall be nondestructively tested by liquid penetrant or ultrasonic methods per AWS standards.
3 4 5
I.
Form to shapes indicated with straight lines, true angles and smooth curves. 1. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp edges. 2. Round all corners to approximately 1/8 IN radius.
6
J.
Finish: Mill finish as fabricated.
7
2.5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inpsection and Testing: 1. Contractor responsible for testing to qualify shop welders and as needed for Contractor's own quality control to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contractor to inspect and test fabrication in accordance with the fabricators quality control proceedures and in accordance with ADM-1 2015 or later. 3. Contractor inspect shop welding in accordance with AWS D1.2, Section 5 including the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds with ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 4. For additional requirements see Specification Section 01 45 33.
21
PART 3 - EXECUTION
22
3.1
ERECTION
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. 1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is prerogative of the Contractor. 2. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until decks and diagonal bracing or rigid moment connections are installed. 3. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor. 4. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished and installed by the Contractor.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Bolting: 1. Protect bolt threads from damage. 2. Rest bolt heads and nuts squarely against surfaces. 3. Where bolt heads or nuts rest on beveled surfaces having slope greater that 1 in 20 with plane normal to bolt axis, use beveled washers to provide full bearing to head and nut. 4. Correct poor matching of holes by drilling to next larger size and use larger diameter bolt. 5. Unless otherwise specified, connect aluminum members to: a. Aluminum members using 3/4 IN DIA stainless steel bolts (ASTM F593 and ASTM F594). b. Carbon and low alloy steel using 3/4 IN DIA stainless steel bolts (ASTM F593 and ASTM F594). 1) Provide dissimilar materials protection. c. Concrete or masonry using stainless steel expansion anchor bolts or adhesive anchor bolts unless shown otherwise. 1) Provide dissimilar materials protection.
47
C. Welding: Field welding of aluminum is not allowed unless indicated on Drawings.
48
D. Correct fabrication errors and damaged members in shop. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05 14 00 - 4
1 2
1.
3
Do not use cutting torch in shop or in field to cut any members, to correct fabrication errors, or to cut openings.
E. Provide templates for anchors, bolts, and other items to be installed in other work.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
F. Field Assembly: 1. Tolerances shall comply with AISC 325 and the ADM-1. a. Before members are assembled, thoroughly clean all bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact. b. After assembly, carefully align all members of each frame or assembly and accurately adjust until final, correct and true location is achieved. 1) As work progresses, securely fasten in place. 2. Provide full length members without splices. 3. Securely tighten and leave in place all erection bolts used in welded construction, unless removal is required.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
G. Set beam and column baseplates accurately, as indicated on nonshrink grout, in accordance with Division 03. 1. If not indicated, provide minimum of 1 IN grout thickness under base plates. 2. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. a. Use aluminum wedges, shims, or setting nuts for leveling and plumbing columns and beams. 1) Tighten anchor bolts. b. Fill space between bearing surface and bottom of base plate with nonshrink grout. 1) Fill space until voids are completely filled and base plates are fully bedded on wedges, shims, and grout. c. Do not remove wedges or shims and where they protrude, cut off flush with edge of base plate.
26 27 28 29
H. Temporary Protection: 1. Suitably protect aluminum surfaces against lime mortar stains, discoloration, surface abrasion and other construction abuses. 2. Remove protection during Predemonstration Period.
30 31 32
I.
33 34 35 36 38
3.2
Contact with Dissimilar Materials: Where aluminum surfaces will be embedded in concrete, built into masonry, or in contact with steel, concrete, grout, masonry, or other dissimilar materials, coat the aluminum surfaces as described in Specification Section 09 96 00.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 05 14 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOISTS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured open-web steel joists and joist accessories.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 05 30 00 - Metal Deck. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 360, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC Specification). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. c. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. d. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 4. Corps of Engineers (COE): a. CRD-C621, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 5. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): a. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 6. Steel Joist Institute (SJI): a. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. b. Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series (ANSI SJI-K-1.1). c. Standard Specification for Longspan Steel Joists LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists DLH-Series (ANSI SJI-LH-DLH-1.1). d. Standard Specification for Joist Girders (ANSI SJI-JG-1.1). e. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders: 1) Standard Load Table Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 2) Standard Load Table Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series. 3) Standard Load Table Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series.
44 45 46 47 48
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Member of SJI. a. Structural design calculations and details of manufactured joists shall be prepared by a qualified professional engineer retained by the manufacturer. 2. Qualification of welding work: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
a. b. 1.3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Qualify welding processes, operations, and operators in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1. Welding operators to have been qualified during the 12-month period prior to commencement of welding.
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Detailed Shop Drawings showing size and layout of each joist unit, bridging, connections, and accessories. Include mark, number, type, location, and spacing of joists and bridging. b. Show joining splice and connection to other work details. c. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts. d. Provide details of bridging, method of attachment to joists, and joist end anchorage and other details required for joist installation. Indicate beveled end plates for joist roof pitch where required. e. Show shop-applied coatings. f. Shop Drawings shall not be reproductions of the Contract Drawings. 3. Product technical data including: a. Joist manufacturer's load tables, Standard Specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include product data describing materials, shop coating, bridging, and accessories. 4. Certifications: a. Manufacturer's certification that steel joists and accessories comply with specified requirements. b. Manufacturer member of SJI. c. Joist material, shop welding and testing, manufacturing and shop inspection and testing are in accordance with SJI requirements. d. Capability of joists per Paragraph 2.3A and D.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
32 33
A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended by SJI. 1. Exercise care to avoid damage to joists.
34 35
B. Store joists clear of earth on platforms, skids or other supports. 1. Protect joists after delivery to prevent rust and deterioration.
36 37
C. Provide anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete or masonry, with templates as required, in time for incorporation into the work.
38
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
39 40 41 42 43
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Nucor Corporation Vulcraft Divisions. 2. CANAM Steel Corporation. 3. Socar Incorporated.
44
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
45
2.2
MATERIALS
46
A. Steel: Comply with SJI and AISC Specifications for joist series indicated.
47 48
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 as required, heavy hexagon structural bolts with nuts and hardened washers. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 2
1 2 3
C. Bolts and Nuts, Unfinished: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel, with carbon steel washers. 2.3
STEEL JOISTS
4 5
A. Design of steel joists proposed shall have been checked by the SJI and found to conform to the standard specifications and load tables.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
B. Fabricate Joists and Accessories in accordance with SJI Specifications and as follows: 1. Make shop connections and splices using either arc or resistance welding. a. Do not shop bolt connections. 2. Design and fabricate for maximum deflection of 1/360 of clear span under design live load. 3. Shop holes, field holes, and enlargement of holes will not be permitted unless approved by Engineer. 4. Fabricate bearing ends to provide following minimum bearing unless a longer bearing length is indicated on the Contract Documents.
On masonry or concrete: On steel:
15 16
5.
K SERIES
LH AND DLH SERIES
JOIST GIRDERS
4 IN min
6 IN min
6 IN min
2-1/2 IN min
4 IN min
4 IN min
With steel angle tops and bottom chord members.
18 19
C. Provide extended bottom chords where indicated. 1. Comply with SJI and AISC requirements and load tables.
20 21
D. Provide extended top chords where indicated. 1. Comply with SJI and AISC requirements and load tables.
22 23 24 25
E. Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. 1. Provide either an extended bottom chord or a separate unit of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. 2. Extend ends to within 1/2 IN of wall surface.
26
F. Provide nailers bolted to top chord where indicated.
27
G. Prepare and paint steel joists and accessories in compliance with Section 09 96 00.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
H. Comply with SJI Specifications: 1. Joist designations indicated on the Drawing are minimum requirements; increase as required to comply with design requirements specified. 2. Wherever possible, increased joists shall have the same depth as joist indicated on Drawings. 3. Where necessary to increase joist depths to meet design requirements, coordinate all project changes required due to the increased depth. 4. Make all required joist revisions at no additional cost to Owner.
36
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
37
A. Engineer reserves right to inspect joists or manufacturer's shop during joist fabrication.
38 39 40
B. Identify each joist type, size and manufacturer. 1. Provide tagging or other suitable (permanent) means. 2. Maintain identification continuously.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 3
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
PREPARATION
3 4
A. Examine areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
5
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
6
C. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D. Joists will be subject to rejection if: 1. Joists do not comply with requirements of SJI and AISC Specifications and requirements herein. 2. Joists are improperly manufactured, welded, painted or installed. 3. Joists are damaged so that strength is impaired. 4. Joists are not installed as indicated on Drawings. 5. Chords are not installed straight within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.0028 times the length of the joist or the distance between points of lateral support. 3.2
INSTALLATION
16 17 18
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Where not specifically indicated otherwise, place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI and AISC Specifications and as herein specified.
19
B. Splice joists delivered to the site in more than one piece.
20 21 22 23 24 25
C. Do not overload joists. 1. Note: Joists may not be stable or able to carry design loads until bridging and deck is fully installed. 2. Contractor is solely responsible for safety, construction methods and sequencing of the Work. 3. Do not install joists damaged so that strength is impaired.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32
D. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate location and spacing before permanently fastening. 1. Provide end bearing and anchorages to secure all joists to supporting members or walls in accordance with SJI Specifications, unless otherwise indicated. 2. When joists do not bear flush on supporting member or wall, take corrective measures to ensure full bearing. a. Provide steel shims as required for uniform flush bearing.
33 34 35
E. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI, AISC and AWS Specifications for type of joists used. 1. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
F. Bearing on Masonry or Concrete Bearing Surfaces: 1. Secure joists resting on masonry or concrete bearing surfaces by bedding in mortar and anchoring to masonry or concrete construction as specified in SJI Specifications for type of steel joist used. a. Masonry or concrete required to support joists to have reach required 28-day compressive strength prior to placing joists thereon. b. Area under joist bearing shall be solidly filled with grout. 2. Furnish anchor bolts or steel bearing plates to be built into concrete and masonry construction. a. Furnish templates as may be necessary for accurate location of anchors. Steel bearing plates to conform to ASTM A36. 3. Bedding mortar: a. Sand cement grout: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5
b.
6 7 8 9
1) Approximately 3 parts sand, 1 part Portland cement, 6 plus/minus 1 percent entrained air and water to produce a slump which allows grout to completely fill required areas and surround adjacent reinforcing. 2) Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 3000 psi. Non-shrink grout complying with COE CRD-C621.
G. Provide type, size, spacing, and attachment of bridging in accord with SJI and AISC Specifications, where not specifically indicated otherwise, except as modified herein. 1. Provide diagonal type bridging as indicated. 2. Do not use sag rods as substitute for bridging.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
H. Install bridging completely, immediately after erection, and before any loads are applied. 1. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords of each joist and where terminating at walls or beams. 2. Provide bridging connections at top and bottom chords capable of safely resisting a force specified by SJI Specifications for open web, long span, deep long span joists, and joist girders respectively. 3. Where five rows of bridging are required in spans over 40 FT, laterally brace each joist before erecting next joist or applying loads. 4. Do not release hoisting cables before installing center row of diagonal bridging and anchoring bridging line to prevent lateral movement. 5. During construction period, Contractor is responsible for any loads placed on joists. a. Contractor's attention is directed the fact that joists may be unstable and cannot carry their design load until steel deck and bridging are completely installed.
23 24
I.
Remove or repair damaged joists or other work, to satisfaction of Engineer at no additional expense to Owner.
25
J.
After installation, touch up paint or field paint as specified in Section 09 96 00.
26 27 28 29 31
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 05 30 00 METAL DECK
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured metal roof deck.
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists. 4. Section 05 41 00 - Retrofit Roof Framing System 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. S100, Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. A780/A780M, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of HotDip Galvanized Coatings. d. A1008/A1008M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. e. C1513, Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold Formed Steel Framing Connections. f. D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. g. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. b. D1.3/D1.3M, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. 31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Fire Resistance Directory.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Member of SDI. b. Structural design of manufactured deck shall be prepared by a qualified professional engineer retained by the manufacturer. 2. Welding work: a. Qualify welding processes, operations, and operators in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. b. Welding operators to have been qualified during the 12 month period prior to commencement of welding, and be experienced in welding light gage metal.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 1
1
1.3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Detailed Shop Drawings showing the following: 1) Complete framing and erection layouts. 2) Location, length, type, cross section, thickness, and markings of metal deck units. a) Size and location of openings. b) Accessories and reinforcing. 3) Sequence and procedure to be followed for erecting, fastening, and securing the deck units. 4) Shop applied coatings. 5) Details and gages of accessories and miscellaneous items showing sump pans, cant strips, ridge and valley plates, closure and filler strips and insulation supports. 6) Welding procedures for installation including size, number, type and location of all welds required to install deck units. 7) Recommended welding rod size, type, burn off rate and welder setting for deck thickness to be joined. a) Define welds by use of standard AWS welding symbols. 8) Correct fitting of members and accessories. 9) Size and location of all openings in deck and all conditions requiring closure panels and supplementary framing. 10) Shop Drawings shall not be reproductions of the Contract Drawings. 3. Product technical data including: a. Metal deck manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. b. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for: 1) Welds and welding procedure. 2) Galvanizing repair paint. 3) Screws. 4) Joint sealing compound. c. Manufacturer's load tables for deck to be furnished on this project, including: 1) Allowable gravity load for metal roof deck. 2) Allowable diaphragm shear values for metal roof deck. 3) Allowable superimposed load for metal deck. 4. Manufacturer’s certification that metal deck complies with specified requirements: a. Manufacturer member of SDI. b. Deck material, manufacturing, and shop testing and inspection are in accordance with SDI requirements. c. Welder qualifications. 5. Test reports. a. Manufacturer’s certified test reports.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
44 45
A. Deliver, store, and handle metal deck as recommended by SDI. 1. Exercise care to avoid damage to deck.
46 47 48 49 50
B. Protect materials from rusting, denting or crushing. 1. Store metal deck on project site off the ground with one end elevated to provide drainage and protected from the elements with a waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. 2. Prevent rust, deterioration and accumulation of foreign material.
51 52
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not overload supporting members.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 2
1 2
1.
Until the entire assembly is complete, the structural elements may not be stable or capable of supporting code or stated design loads.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 1-1/2 IN deep metal roof deck: a. Vulcraft. b. Verco Decking, Inc. c. New Millennium Building Systems. d. Consolidated Systems, Inc. e. DACS, Inc.
13
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
14
2.2
METAL ROOF DECK
15 16 17 18 19 20
A. Design of the metal deck to be supplied to have been checked by SDI and found to conform to the standard specifications and load tables. 1. The allowable superimposed live uniform loading per square foot for metal roof deck supplied for the spans indicated shall equal or exceed the allowable superimposed live uniform load per square foot for the same spans as indicated in the SDI latest tables. 2. Maximum deflection: Less than 1/240 of span under live load.
21 22 23
B. Use deck configurations complying with SDI 31and as indicated. 1. Painted deck: ASTM A1008. 2. Galvanized deck: ASTM A653 G60 zinc coating.
24 25
C. Metal Roof Deck, 1-1/2 IN Deep: 1. Rib type B, sheet steel, 22 GA minimum, with minimum uncoated thickness of 0.0295-IN
26 27 28
2.3
FABRICATION A. Standard Deck Profiles:
DEPTH 1-1/2 IN
TYPE Roof Deck - Wide Rib ('B')
RIB SPACING
TOP SURFACE MAXIMUM RIB OPENING
MINIMUM BOTTOM OF RIB WIDTH
6 IN
2-1/2IN
1-3/4 IN
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B. Minimum Deck Thickness: 1. Where gage of metal is indicated, provide the minimum uncoated thickness as specified by SDI. a. Delivered thickness of the uncoated steel: No less than 95 percent of the design thickness. 2. Use steel with a minimum yield stress of 33 ksi.
36 37 38 39 40 41
C. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate deck units in lengths to span three or more support spacing with flush, telescoped or nested 2 IN end laps. a. End laps shall occur on supporting members. b. Provide deck units having overlapping male and female type side laps or joints to provide positive vertical and lateral alignment of adjacent deck units.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5
2.4
ACCESSORIES A. Metal Closures: 1. Form to configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and sides of deck. 2. Minimum thickness before galvanizing: 0.0358 IN (20 GA).
6 7 8 9 10
B. Ridge and Valley Plates: 1. Minimum width: 4-1/2 IN. 2. Bend to provide tight-fitting closure with deck units. 3. Provide plates in 10 FT length where possible. 4. Minimum thickness before galvanizing: 0.0358 IN (20 GA).
11 12 13
C. Welding Washers: 1. 16 GA bent steel plate with 3/8 IN center hole. 2. Use at all deck units thinner than 20 GA.
14
D. Filler Sheet: Flat or formed 20 GA galvanized steel.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
E. Roof Sump Pans: 1. Fabricate from a single piece of galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. 2. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains with bearing flanges minimum 3 IN wide. 3. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 IN below roof deck surface, unless otherwise indicated or required by deck configuration. 4. Minimum thickness before galvanizing: 0.0747 IN (14 GA).
23 24 25 26
F. Cant Strips: 1. Bend cant strips to form 45 degree slope not less than 5 IN wide, with top and bottom flanges not less than 3 IN wide. 2. Minimum thickness before galvanizing: 0.0358 IN (20 GA).
27
G. Insulation supports.
28
H. Venting: Slotted openings in bottom flutes in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
29
I.
Galvanized coating for metal deck accessories: Conform to ASTM A653 G90 zinc coating.
30
J.
Galvanized Repair Paint: See Specification Section 05 50 00.
31 32 33 34 35
K. Screws: 1. Self-drilling, self-tapping, #12 size minimum hex washer head sheet metal screws. 2. Carbon steel by Hilti. a. Organic zinc chromate coated, Hilti Kwik Flex. b. ASTM C1513.
36
L. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Comply with ASTM A36.
37
M. Sheet Metal Accessories: Same material and finish as deck members.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
N. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: 1. Vulcanized, closed cell expanded chloroprene elastomer, complying with ASTM D1056, Grade SCE 41. 2. Brittleness temperature: -40 DegF, ASTM D746. 3. Flammability resistance: Self-extinguishing. 4. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Ensure complete closure.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 4
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
PREPARATION
3 4
A. Examine areas and conditions under which metal deck is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
5
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
6
C. Do not start placement of metal deck until supporting work is in place and secured.
7 8 9 10 11 12
D. Deck will be subject to rejection if metal deck: 1. Units do not comply with requirements of SDI specifications and requirements herein. 2. Is improperly manufactured, painted or installed. 3. Is damaged so that strength is impaired. 4. Is not installed as specified. 3.2
INSTALLATION
13
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
14 15 16
B. Install roof deck units and accessories as indicated, in accordance with SDI 31, manufacturer's recommendations, final approved Shop Drawings and as specified herein. 1. Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories as needed to complete the deck installation.
17
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of structure.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
D. Do not overload metal deck or supporting members: 1. Contractor is solely responsible for safety, construction means, methods and sequencing of the Work. 2. Until the entire assembly is complete, the structural elements may not be stable or capable of supporting code or stated design loads. 3. Use care to assure deck construction loads are less than the recommendation of SDI 31, except where temporary shoring is installed.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
E. Place each deck unit on supporting structural frame, adjust to final position and accurately align with ends bearing on supporting members. 1. Lap roof deck units at ends no less than 2 IN. 2. Interlock units at sides without stretching, contracting, or deforming. 3. Place deck units flat and square and secure to framing without warp or excessive deflection. 4. Place units in accurate and close alignment for entire length of run and with close alignment of flutes of one unit with those of abutting unit.
32 33 34 35
F. Plug weld sizes specified are effective fusion diameter of welds. 1. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material and have good fusion to supporting members. 2. Do not burn through deck.
36 37
G. Prevent overtorquing of screw fasteners by using a tool with a depth limiting nosepiece and a clutch.
38 39
H. Fastening of 1-1/2 IN Deep Metal Roof Deck: 1. Secure deck units to supporting frame and side laps as noted on Contract Documents.
40 41
I.
Remove and replace deck which is structurally weak or unsound or which has burn holes due to improper welding or damage which Engineer declares defective.
42 43 44 45 46 47
J.
Cut and fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. 1. Make cutting and fitting neat, square and trim. a. Cut deck by mechanical means, not by burning. 2. Neatly and accurately install reinforcing at all openings except: a. Circular openings less than 6 IN DIA.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5
3.
b. Rectangular openings having no side dimension greater than 6 IN. Reinforce openings that have not been framed between 6 and 12 IN with 20 GA flat steel sheet 12 IN greater in each dimension than opening. a. Place sheet around opening and fusion weld to top surface of deck at each corner and midway along each side.
6 7 8 9
K. Install insulation supports for support of roof insulation. 1. Provide where top surface of roof deck does not occur adjacent to edge and openings as required to completely support roof insulation. 2. Weld into position.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L. Install metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof deck, and in voids between deck and other construction. 1. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. 2. Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option and when approved by Engineer wherever their use will ensure complete closure. a. Install with elastomeric type adhesive in accordance with written directions and recommendations of manufacturers of closure strips and adhesives.
17 18 19
M. Ridge and Valley Plates: 1. Weld ridge and valley plates to top surface of roof deck. 2. Lap end joints not less than 3 IN with laps in direction of water flow.
20 21 22 23 24 25
N. Roof Sump Pans: 1. Place over openings in roof deck. 2. Weld to top deck surface. a. Space welds maximum 12 IN OC with at least one weld at each corner and each side midway between each corner. 3. Cut opening in bottom of roof sump to accommodate drain size indicated.
26 27 28
O. Cant Strips: 1. Weld cant strips to top surface of roof deck at 12 IN OC. 2. Lap end joints not less than 3 IN.
29 30 31 32
P. Install metal accessories to close all openings and gaps between deck and other construction, at objects projecting through deck, at locations where deck changes direction, and at open ends of deck units where deck units terminate. 1. Weld into position to provide a complete installation.
33 34 35
Q. Clean and Touch Up: 1. Remove all surplus materials and debris from surface of deck after installation. 2. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with Specification Section 05 50 00.
36
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
37
A. Remove and replace defective or damaged deck units.
38 39 40
B. Special Inspection: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
42
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 30 00 - 6
SECTION 05 41 00 RETROFIT ROOF FRAMING SYSTEM
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to complete all work including steel framing, metal decking, and supports for Retrofit Roof Framing system as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.
1.2
9
WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03 41 33 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete.
10
B. Section 07 61 13 – Metal Roofing
11
C. Section 09 96 00 – High Performance Industrial Coatings
12
1.3
REFERENCES SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A. Without limiting the generality of the Specification, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents: 1. North Carolina State Building Code. 2. AISC -Manual of Steel Construction 3. AISI -Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. ASCE 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 5. LGSI, Light Gage Structural steel Framing System Design Handbook.
20 21 22 23
B. Building Code: 1. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
24
1.4
SUBMITTALS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
A. Shop Drawings: Show roof framing system with accessories in plan, sections and details. Include complete drawing/description of each framing component and fastener, including metal thicknesses and finishes, connection details, anchorage details, and special fabrication provisions. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work including Metal Roofing and Precast Concrete. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and provide fastener pullout values. Shop drawings and structural calculations must be completed by the Retrofit Roof Framing System manufacturer. Any changes must be approved by the Manufacturer in writing prior to submittal. Shop drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer, currently registered in the State of North Carolina.
34 35 36
B. Product Data: Include Manufacturer’s detailed material and system description, engineering performance data and finish specifications. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and required fastener pullout values.
37 38 39 40 41
C. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations for all elements of the Retrofit Roof Framing System according to ASCE 7. All loading types shall be considered; dead, live, snow, wind, and seismic. Loads shall be coordinated with Metal Roofing and Precast Concrete. Design calculations shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of North Carolina.
42 43
D. Coordinated design load calculations with Structural design notes list on the Contract Drawings. See Structural Drawings for additional information.
44
E. Loads applied to Precast Concrete Roof Deck. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 41 00 - 1
1 2
F. System Certification: Provide statement certifying the proposed system’s capacity to safely resist the calculated design loads.
3
G. Warranty.
4 5
H. Certification verifying proposed roof installer is authorized by manufacturer of Retrofit Roof Framing System.
6
1.5
7 8 9
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor must be certified by Manufacturer as supplier of retrofit roof framing systems and obtain written certification from Manufacturer that installer is approved for installation of the Retrofit Roof Framing System.
10 11
B. Certified installer must have a minimum of 5 years of experience of acceptable installation of the Retrofit Roof Framing System.
12 13 14
C. All components of the Retrofit Roof Framing System must be obtained from a single manufacturer. Any secondary products that are required which cannot be supplied by the specified manufacturer must be recommended and approved in writing by primary manufacturer.
15 16
D. Provide a minimum 20 year warranty for all materials comprising Retrofit Roof Framing System.
17
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
18 19
A. Manufacturer’s Responsibility: 1. Protect components during fabrication and packing from mechanical abuse and corrosion.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Contractor’s Responsibility: 1. Store materials off ground providing for drainage; under cover providing for air circulation; and protected from wind movement, foreign material contamination, mechanical damage, cement, lime or other corrosive substances. 2. Handle materials to prevent damage. Damaged material shall be rejected and removed from the site. 3. Protect materials from wind-related damages. 4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from project site. 5. Do not overload roof deck with stored materials.
30
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31
2.1
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products from one of the following manufacturers or approved equal. 1. The Garland Company. 2. ReRoof America, Inc.
2.2
RETROFIT ROOF FRAMING SYSTEM A. Materials: 1. Cold formed steel framing components: All light gauge cold formed steel framing components shall be formed from structural quality sheet steel meeting the requirements of an appropriate ASTM standard. The minimum acceptable yield strength shall be 40,000 psi. Section properties shall conform to the LGSI Light Gage Structural Steel Framing System Design Handbook and/or the AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 41 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5
2. 3.
Hot Rolled Steel Framing Components: All hot rolled steel components shall be formed from structural quality steel meeting the requirements of ASTM Standard A36. Section properties shall conform to the AISC Steel Construction Manual. Fasteners: Concrete and masonry anchors shall be installed in accordance with the fastener manufacturer’s recommendations.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
B. Finishes: 1. Cold formed components shall receive a G-90 galvanized coating. 2. Hot rolled steel components shall be finished with one coat of red oxide rust inhibiting paint. 3. All welded areas shall be protected with a cold-galvanizing coating after fabrication. 4. Fasteners which are concealed by the finished roofing system shall be stainless steel. 5. Fasteners which are exposed after installation of the finished roofing system shall be stainless steel with painted heads matching the color of the standing seam panels.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C. Assembly: 1. The framing system shall be a post and beam type system and shall include base components for attachment to the roof deck structure, vertical column members, horizontal top members, and strapping and cross bracing as required. 2. The base members shall be continuous or discontinuous lengths as determined by evaluation of the roof deck. 3. The vertical column members shall be capable of 1-IN minimum field adjustment to accommodate uneven roof deck elevations without field cutting. 4. The horizontal top member shall be a minimum 16 gauge Zee shape with stiffening lips. The top member shall be spaced appropriately to accommodate the required Metal Roofing panel clip spacing as specified by the Metal Roofing Manufacturer. The top flange of the zee shall be (minimum) 1 3/4-IN wide to provide for attachment of the structural standing seam panel clips. 5. Flat strap bracing shall be 22 gauge minimum, and shall only be acceptable for flange bracing of the framing members. 6. The framing system shall use cross bracing for transferring all lateral loads to the main structure. The Metal Roofing panel system shall NOT be considered as a lateral diaphragm. All cross bracing for the transfer of lateral loads shall be formed/stiffened angles or sections/shapes; flat straps are not acceptable. 7. Provide components necessary for framing of overhang and fascia as shown on the Contract Drawings.
35
PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
3.1
FABRICATION
37 38
A. Shop fabricate metal framing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises.
39
B. All welding shall be performed under shop conditions. Field welding is not acceptable.
40 41
C. Horizontal and bracing framing components maybe cut to length at the factory or in the field. Vertical framing components may not be cut to length in the field.
42 43
D. Fabricate framing and related sheet metal work in accordance with approved shop drawings and applicable standards.
44 45 46 47
3.2
PREPARATION A. Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the Retrofit Roof Framing System.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 41 00 - 3
1 2
B. Check roof deck for square and straightness and establish straight side and crosswise benchmarks. Set a true line for the Retrofit Roof Framing System with a string line.
3 4
C. Measure the roof lengthwise to confirm lengths, overhangs, and coverage of flashings at eaves and ridges.
5
3.3
INSTALLATION
6 7
A. Coordinate installation of metal roofing, roof deck, carpentry, miscellaneous furring members, insulation, vapor barriers, and/or infiltration barriers as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
8 9
B. Install framing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s product data, within specified erection tolerances.
10 11 12
C. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and components.
13
D. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on Shop Drawings.
14 15
E. Attach framing system to structural substrate using fasteners of size and spacing as determined by manufacturer’s design analysis to resist all specified design loads.
16
F. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects.
17 18
G. Maximum variation from true planes or lines shall be ¼-IN in 20 feet and 3/8-IN in 40 feet or more.
19
H. Remove damaged work and replace with undamaged components.
20 21
I.
Touch up exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish.
22
J.
Remove all miscellaneous materials and debris from roof.
23 24 25 26 27
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: 1. See Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL DECK 05 41 00 - 4
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A. Section Includes: 1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not otherwise indicated to be supplied under work of other Specification Sections. 2. Design of all temporary bracing not indicated on Drawings. 3. Design of systems and components, including but not limited to: a. Stairs. b. Landings. c. Ladders. d. Modular framing system.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 4. Section 03 31 30 - Concrete, Materials and Proportioning. 5. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel. 6. Section 05 14 00 - Structural Aluminum. 7. Section 05 52 02 - Aluminum Railings. 8. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. ADM 1, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 325, Manual of Steel Construction. b. 360, Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC Specification). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. 4. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 5. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. b. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. A47, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. d. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. e. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. f. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. g. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. h. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. i. A197, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. j. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
k. l.
6.
7.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. m. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. n. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. o. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. p. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. q. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. r. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. s. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. t. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. u. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. v. A668, Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use. w. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. x. A786, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength LowAlloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. y. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes. z. A1064, Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. aa. A1011, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. bb. B26, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. cc. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. dd. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ee. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. ff. B429, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. gg. B632, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. hh. F467, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use. ii. F468, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. jj. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. kk. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. ll. F835, Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws. mm. F879, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws. nn. F1789, Standard Terminology for F16 Mechanical Fasteners. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1/A5.1M, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. c. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. d. D1.6/D1.6M, Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
AMP 510, Metal Stairs Manual. AMP 555, Code of Standard Practice for the Architectural Metal Industry (Including Miscellaneous Iron). c. MBG 531, Metal Bar Grating Manual. 8. NACE International (NACE). 9. Nickel Development Institute (NiDI): a. Publication 11 007, Guidelines for the welded fabrication of nickel-containing stainless steels for corrosion resistant services. 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 11. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): a. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 12. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. b. A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
B. Qualifications: 1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. 2. Fabricator shall have minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of metal items specified. 3. Engineer for contractor-designed systems and components: Professional structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina. 4. NACE certified inspector shall have minimum of two (2) years experience performing inspections as indicated. a. Have a current Level III coating inspector certification.
29
a. b.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
30
A. Fasteners: As defined in ASTM F1789.
31 32 33
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard.
34
C. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153/A153M.
35 36 37 38
D. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Qualifications: a. NACE inspector qualifications. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings and details: a. Submit drawings for all fabrications and assemblies. 1) Include erection drawings, plans, sections, details and connection details. b. Identify materials of construction, shop coatings and third party accessories. 4. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
c.
5.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Provide manufacturer's standard allowable load tables for the following: 1) Grating and checkered plate. 2) Castings, trench covers and accessories. 3) Modular framing systems. Contractor designed systems and components: a. Certification that manufactured units meet all design loads specified. b. Shop Drawings and engineering design calculations: 1) Indicate design live loads. 2) Sealed by a licensed professional engineer, registered in the State of North Carolina. 3) Engineer will review for general compliance with Contract Documents. c. Contractor designed systems and components include the following: 1) Metal Stairs and associated landings. 2) Ladders and associated landings. 3) Gates. 4) Steel checkered plate.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certification of welders and welding processes. a. Indicate compliance with AWS. 3. NACE certification of surface preparation. 4. NACE certification of paint application. 1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25
A. Deliver and handle fabrications to avoid damage.
26 27
B. Store above ground on skids or other supports to keep items free of dirt and other foreign debris and to protect against corrosion.
28
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
29
2.1
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Abrasive stair nosings (embedded in concrete stairs): a. American Safety Tread. b. Balco. 2. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc. 3. Mechanical anchor bolts: a. See Section 03 15 19. 4. Epoxy adhesive anchor bolts: a. See Section 03 15 19. 5. Self-tapping concrete anchors: a. See Section 03 15 19. 6. Castings, trench covers and accessories: a. Neenah Foundry Co. b. Deeter Foundry Co. c. Barry Craft Construction Casting Co. d. McKinley Iron Works. 7. Aluminum ladders: a. Any manufacturer capable of meeting the requirements of this Specification Section. 8. Galvanizing repair paint:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
a. Clearco Products Co., Inc. b. ZRC Products. 9. Modular framing system: a. Unistrut Building Systems. b. B-Line Systems. c. Kindorf. d. Superstrut. 10. Ladder safety extension post: a. Bilco.
10 11
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A. Steel: 1. Structural: a. W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50. b. All other plates and rolled sections: ASTM A36. 2. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B or ASTM A501. 3. Structural tubing: a. ASTM A500, Grade B (46 ksi minimum yield). 4. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength: a. ASTM A325. b. Galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings. c. Provide two (2) washers with all bolts. 5. Bolts and nuts: a. ASTM A307, Grade A. b. Galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 6. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.1, E70 Series. 7. Steel forgings: ASTM A668.
28 29 30 31
B. Iron: 1. Ductile iron: ASTM A536. 2. Gray cast iron: ASTM A48 (minimum 30,000 psi tensile strength). 3. Malleable iron: ASTM A47, ASTM A197.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C. Stainless Steel: 1. Stainless steel in welded applications: Low carbon 'L' type. 2. Minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi. a. Bars, shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304. b. Tubing and pipe: ASTM A269, ASTM A312 or ASTM A554, Type 304 or 316. c. Strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316. d. Bolts and nuts: ASTM F593, Type 304 or 316. 3. Minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 70,000 psi. a. Strip, plate and flat bar for welded connections, ASTM A666, Type 304L or 316L. 4. Welding electrodes: In accordance with AWS for metal alloy being welded.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
D. Aluminum: 1. Alloy 6061-T6, 32,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. a. ASTM B221 and ASTM B308 for shapes including beams, channels, angles, tees and zees. b. Weir plates, baffles and deflector plates, ASTM B209. 2. Alloy 6063-T5 or T6, 15,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. a. ASTM B221 and ASTM B429 for bars, rods, wires, pipes and tubes. 3. ASTM B26 for castings. 4. ASTM F468, alloy 2024 T4 for bolts. 5. ASTM F467, alloy 2024 T4 for nuts. 6. Electrodes for welding aluminum: AWS D1.2, filler alloy 4043 or 5356. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5
1
E. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and nuts.
2 3
F. Embedded Anchor Bolts: 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
4 5
G. Mechanical Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts: 1. See Specification Section 03 15 19.
6 7
H. Headed Studs: ASTM A108 with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi.
8 9
I.
Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A1064 with a minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi.
10 11
J.
Iron and Steel Hardware: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M when required to be galvanized.
12 13 14 15 16
K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions. 2. ASTM A780. 3. Zinc content: Minimum 92 percent in dry film. 4. ZRC "ZRC Cold Galvanizing" or Clearco "High Performance Zinc Spray."
17
L. Dissimilar Materials Protection: See Specification Section 09 96 00.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Ladders: 1. General: a. Fully welded type. 1) All welds to be full penetration welds, unless otherwise specified. b. All ladders of a particular material shall have consistent construction and material shapes and sizes unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. c. Design ladder in accordance with OSHA Standards, ANSI A14.3, ASCE 7 and applicable Building Codes. d. Ladders shall be designed to support a minimum concentrated live load of 300 LBS at any point to produce the maximum stress in the member being designed. 1) Apply additional 300 LB loads for each section of ladder exceeding 10 FT. e. Maximum allowable stresses per AISC Specification. f. Maximum lateral deflection: Side rail span/240 when lateral load of 100 LBS is applied at any location. 2. Material: a. Aluminum. b. Finish: 1) Mill. 3. Rails: a. Round pipe or rectangular tubing: 1) Round pipe: a) 1-1/2 IN nominal diameter. b) Schedule 80. 2) Rectangular tubing: a) Cross-section: 3 by 2 IN maximum. b) Thickness: 0.125 IN minimum. b. Spacing: 1) Minimum clear distance between rails to be 18 IN. 2) Step-through ladder extensions: 24 IN, centerline to centerline. c. Provide cap at exposed top and bottom of side rails. 1) Provide weep holes as necessary to prevent the accumulation of moisture within hollow members. d. Extend side rails of step-through ladders a minimum of 42 IN above the landing.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rungs: a. Minimum 1 IN DIA or 1 IN square solid bar. 1) Integral non-slip finish on all sides. a) Non-slip finish: Coarse knurling or extruded serrations. b) Shop or field-applied grit tape and cap type non-slip finishes are not acceptable. b. Rungs shall penetrate inside wall of side rails. 1) Do not extend rungs beyond the outside face of the side rail. 2) Provide fillet weld all around rung at inside face of side rail and plug weld at outside face of side rail. c. Rung spacing: 1) Uniform, 12 IN. 2) Top rung shall be level with landing or platform. a) Where top of ladder terminates at grating cover, floor access door, roof hatch or similar condition; locate top rung as close as practicable to, but not more than 6 IN below, adjacent walking surface. 3) Spacing of bottom rung from grade or platform may vary but shall not exceed 14 IN. Brackets: a. Angle or bent plate brackets welded to side rails: 1) 3/8 IN by 2-1/2 IN by length required. 2) Provide punched holes for 3/4 IN bolts or anchors. 3) Minimum distance from centerline of rung to wall or any obstruction: 7 IN. 4) Maximum spacing: 4 FT OC. b. For floor supported ladders, provide 3/8 by 2-1/2 by 4 IN rectangular bracket or 3/8 by 6 by 6 IN square plate welded to rails with punched holes for 3/4 IN bolts. 1) Provide wall brackets on floor supported units if vertical run is over 4 FT. Provide ladder cage where shown on the Drawings or required by OSHA. a. Cage construction shall meet all requirements of OSHA Standards and this Specification Section: 1) Hoops: Minimum 1/4 by 2 IN bar at 48 IN OC spacing. 2) Vertical bars: Minimum 1/4 by 1-1/2 IN bar. 3) Weld all connections. 4) Construct cage of same materials as the ladder on which it is mounted. 5) Mount cage on ladder by welding. Landings: a. Construct landing, railing and all supports of same material as the ladder. b. Design live load for landing platform and supporting structure: 1) 100 psf, uniform load. 2) 300 LBS concentrated load on 4 IN square area. 3) All components to be adequate for the uniform load or the concentrated load, whichever requires the stronger component. 4) Maximum deflection: 1/300 of span under a superimposed live load of 100 psf. c. Grating: 1) Per this Specification Section. d. Structural support: Channel or tubular sections with bracing, plates, angles, etc., to support guardrail and grating and to support landing from the side of the structure or building wall. 1) Weld or bolt all connections using stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. e. Guardrails: 1) Match ladder side rails. a) Space intermediate rails equally between top rail and top of kickplate. 2) Provide 4 IN high x 3/8 IN thick toeboard each side of landing. Gates: a. Constructed of same material and sizes as the railing system. b. Hinges:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1) Stainless steel. 2) Heavy-duty, self-closing. c. Gate stop: 1) Aluminum. 9. Ladder safety extension post: a. Telescoping tubular aluminum section that automatically locks into place when fully extended. b. Non-ferrous corrosion-resistant spring and hardware. c. Factory assembled with all hardware necessary for mounting to ladder. d. Bilco "LadderUp" safety post. 10. Deflector plate: a. For aluminum ladders: Minimum .0625 IN aluminum plate, ASTM B209. b. For stainless steel ladders: Minimum .0625 IN stainless steel plate, ASTM A666. c. For steel ladders: Minimum .0625 IN steel plate, ASTM A6. d. Profile as shown on Drawings. e. Fabricate to shapes and sizes required to meet OSHA Standards.
17 18 19 20
B. Bollards: 1. 8 IN DIA extra strength steel pipe, ASTM A53. a. Galvanized. b. See Specification Section 09 96 00 for painting requirements.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C. Abrasive Stair Nosings: 1. Exterior cast-in-place concrete stairs: a. One piece cast aluminum with wing anchors. b. Diamond abrasive pattern. c. Babcock Davis "BSTCA-C3W". 2. Interior stairs: a. Two (2) component consisting of an embedded subchannel and an abrasive tread plate. b. Subchannel: 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 1) Complete with concrete anchors. c. Tread plate: 1) 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. 2) Solid epoxy abrasive filler. a) Color: Safety yellow. d. Balco "DXH-330." e. Finish: Mill. 3. Length: a. Concrete stairs and landings: 1) 4 IN less than overall stair width. 2) Where tread mounted railing post occurs, hold nosing back 4 IN clear from railing centerline. b. Concrete landings at metal stairs: 4 IN less than clear width between stringers.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D. Metal Stairs: 1. Treads: Grating. a. Provide integral corrugated non-slip nosing. 2. Risers: a. Grating treads: 1) Solid plate welded to trailing edge of tread or landing. 2) Minimum 3/16 IN thick by 4 IN high. 3. Landings: a. Grating. b. Provide integral corrugated non-slip nosing at edge acting as stair tread/nosing. 4. Design live load for landing platform and supporting structure: a. 100 psf, uniform load. b. 300 LBS concentrated load on 4 IN square area. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
c. 5.
6. 7.
All components to be adequate for the uniform load or the concentrated load, whichever requires the stronger component. d. Maximum deflection: 1/300 of span under a superimposed live load of 100 psf. Design, fabricate, and install in compliance with NAAMM and applicable codes. a. NAAMM AMP 510: 1) Exterior at site structures and equipment: Industrial Class. 2) Interior or exterior at buildings: Service Class. Handrails and guardrails: Refer to Specification Section 05 52 02. Material: (As noted on Contract Documents) a. Aluminum. b. Steel: ASTM A36, galvanized after fabrication.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
E. Aluminum Grating: 1. NAAMM MBG 531. 2. Bearing bars: Rectangular, 1-1/2 by 3/16 IN at 1-3/16 IN OC spacing OR I-bar, 1-1/2 IN deep with minimum 1/16 IN thick bar and minimum 1/4 IN flange width at 1-3/16 IN OC spacing (unless noted otherwise on Drawings). 3. Cross bars: a. Welded, swaged or pressure locked to bearing bars: b. Maximum 4 IN/OC spacing. 4. Top edges of bars: Grooved or serrated. 5. Finish: Mill, standard. 6. Clips and bolts: Stainless steel. 7. Seat angles: Aluminum or stainless steel
24 25 26 27
F. Heavy-Duty Castings, Trench Covers, and Accessories: 1. Prefabricated, cast iron ASTM A48 or ductile iron ASTM A536. 2. Design load: AASHTO HS-20 wheel loading for indicated span. 3. Machine horizontal mating surfaces.
28 29 30 31 32
G. Access Cover: 1. Tank type manhole frame and solid lid: ASTM A48 or ASTM A536, cast iron. 2. Unless shown otherwise, design of cover shall be such that top of frame extends several inches above slab to prevent surface water from entering tank. 3. Equip lid with four (4) stainless steel screws to secure lid to frame.
33 34 35
H. Loose Lintels: 1. Steel, ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50, sizes as indicated on Drawings. 2. Hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
I.
Modular Framing System: 1. Materials: a. Steel: ASTM A1011, stainless steel, Grade 33. 1) Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A123 or ASTM A153. b. Aluminum: ASTM B221 or ASTM B209. c. Stainless steel: ASTM A666. d. Fiberglass: See Specification Section 06 82 00. 2. Channels and inserts: a. Steel or stainless steel: Minimum 12 GA. b. Aluminum: Minimum 0.080 IN. c. Channels to have one (1) side with a continuous slot with in-turned lips. 1) Width: 1-5/8 IN. 2) Depth and configuration as necessary for loading conditions. 3. Fittings: Same material as system major components. 4. Fasteners: a. Nuts: Toothed groves in top of nuts to engage the in-turned lips of channel. b. Bolts: Hex-head cap screws. c. Same material as system major components.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
5.
6.
7. 8. 2.4
End caps: a. At each exposed end of each piece mounted on walls, or guardrails, or suspended from framing 7 FT or less above the floor or platform. a) Plastic for all exposed ends 7 FT or more above floor or platform. b) Plastic or metallic for all other exposed ends. Schedule: a. Interior wet areas: Aluminum or Stainless steel. b. Exterior areas: Aluminum. c. All other areas not listed above or noted on Contract Documents: Hot-dipped galvanized steel. Provide dissimilar materials protection in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. Repair all cut ends or otherwise damaged areas of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A780.
FABRICATION
15
A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.
16 17 18
B. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, true angles, and smooth curves. 1. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp edges. a. Round all corners to approximately 1/32 - 1/16 IN nominal radius.
19 20
C. Provide drilled or punched holes with smooth edges. 1. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other trades.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
D. Weld Shop Connections: 1. Welds to be continuous fillet type unless indicated otherwise. 2. Full penetration butt weld at bends in stair stringers and ladder side rails. 3. Weld structural steel in accordance with AWS D1.1 using Series E70 electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1/A5.1M. 4. Weld aluminum in accordance with AWS D1.2. 5. Weld stainless steel in accordance with AWS D1.6. a. Treat all welded areas in accordance with ASTM A380. 6. All headed studs to be welded using automatically timed stud welding equipment. 7. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed.
31
E. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
32
F. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
G. Tolerances: 1. Rolling: a. ASTM A6. b. When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6 tolerances for camber, profile, flatness, or sweep, the Contractor is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC Specification. 2. Fabrication tolerance: a. Member length: 1) Both ends finished for contact bearing: 1/32 IN. 2) Framed members: a) 30 FT or less: 1/16 IN. b) Over 30 FT: 1/8 IN. b. Member straightness: 1) Compression members: 1/1000 of axial length between points laterally supported. 2) Non-compression members: ASTM A6 tolerance for wide flange shapes. c. Specified member camber (except compression members): 1) 50 FT or less: Minus 0/plus 1/2 IN. 2) Over 50 FT: Minus 0/plus 1/2 IN (plus 1/8 IN per 10 FT over 50 FT). 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
d. e.
3) Members received from mill with 75 percent of specified camber require no further cambering. 4) Beams/trusses without specified camber shall be fabricated so after erection, camber is upward. 5) Camber shall be measured in fabrication shop in unstressed condition. At bolted splices, depth deviation shall be taken up by filler plates. 1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation in depth. 2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends and open joints. 1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from above tolerances are cause for rejection of material.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
H. Fabricate grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531. 1. Maximum tolerance for difference in depth between grating depth and seat or support angle depth: 1/8 IN. 2. Distance between edge of grating and face of embedded seat angle or face of wall or other structural member: 1/4 IN. a. Tolerance: NAAMM MBG 531. 3. Removable sections: Not wider than 3 FT and not heavier than 100 LBS. 4. Ends and perimeter edges: Banded, with alternate bearing bars welded to band. a. Provide full depth banding unless noted otherwise. b. Banding at trenches and sumps to be 1/4 IN less than grating depth to allow for drainage. 5. Openings through grating: Reinforced to provide required load carrying capacity and banded with 4 IN high toe plate. 6. Provide joints at openings between individual grating sections. 7. Fabricate grating so that bearing bars and cross bars in adjacent sections are aligned.
27 28
I.
29
2.5
See Specification Section 09 96 00 for preparation and painting of ferrous metals and other surfaces.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
30 31
A. Surface Preparation: 1. Refer to Specification Section 09 96 00 for surface preparation requirements.
32 33
B. Shop Applied Coating Application: 1. Refer to Specification Section 09 96 00 for coating requirements.
34 35
C. Meet structural requirements of Specification Section 01 45 33 for inspection and testing items of structural nature.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42
D. OWNER Pays For Inspection and Testing: 1. Owner will employ and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing agency to inspect and test all structural steel work for compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contractor responsible for testing to qualify shop and field welders and as needed for Contractor's own quality control to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Independent testing agency shall have a minimum of five (5) years performing similar work and shall be subject to Owner's approval.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
E. Responsibilities of Testing Agency: 1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AWS Code including the following nondestructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant or mag particle. c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds with ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2. 3. 4. 5.
Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts, Section 9. a. Verify direct tension indicator gaps, if applicable. Inspect structural steel which has been erected. Inspect stud welding in accordance with AWS Code. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer. a. Assist Engineer to determine corrective measures necessary for defective work.
8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
9
3.1
PREPARATION
10 11
A. Provide items to be built into other construction in time to allow their installation. 1. If such items are not provided in time for installation, cut in and install.
12
B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate.
13 14 15
C. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. 1. Field welding aluminum is not permitted unless approved in writing by Engineer.
16
3.2
INSTALLATION
17 18
A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb. 1. Shim and grout as necessary.
19 20 21 22
B. Meet structural requirements of Specification Section 05 12 00 for erecting items of structural nature: 1. Tolerances. 2. Inspection and testing.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. 1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the Contractor. 2. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, and diagonal bracing or rigid connections are installed. 3. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor. 4. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, temporary bracing for the partially complete structure will be required.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
D. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including construction activities and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Plumb, align, and set structural steel members to specified tolerances. 2. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary. 3. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades. a. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer with the Engineer to identify those structural steel elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 12
1
5.
Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.
2 3 4 5
E. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. 1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory completion of the work. 2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place.
6 7 8 9
F. Field Measurement: 1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work.
10 11 12 13
G. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. 1. Use surveyor's level. 2. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.
14 15
H. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the frame tolerances listed in the FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
16
I.
Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support erection loads.
17 18
J.
Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. 1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.
19 20 21 22 23
K. Welding: 1. Conform to AWS D1.1 and requirements of the FABRICATION Article in PART 2 of this Specification Section. 2. When joining two (2) sections of steel of different ASTM designations, welding techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1 procedure.
24 25
L. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required. 1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.
26
M. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated prior to the completion of erection.
27
N. Bolt Field Connections: Where practicable, conceal fastenings.
28 29 30
O. Field Welding: 1. Follow AWS procedures. 2. Grind welds smooth where field welding is required.
31 32
P. Field cutting grating or checkered plate to correct fabrication errors is not acceptable. 1. Replace entire section.
33 34
Q. Remove all burrs and radius all sharp edges and corners of miscellaneous plates, angles, framing system elements, etc.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
R. Unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Connect steel members to steel members with 3/4 IN DIA ASTM A325 high strength bolts. 2. Connect aluminum to aluminum with 3/4 IN DIA stainless bolts. 3. Connect aluminum to structural steel using 3/4 IN DIA stainless steel bolts. a. Provide dissimilar metals protection. 4. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using stainless steel mechanical anchor bolts or adhesive anchor bolts unless shown otherwise. a. Provide dissimilar materials protection. 5. Provide washers for all bolted connections. 6. Where exposed, bolts shall extend a maximum of 3/4 IN and a minimum of 1/2 IN above the top of installed nut. a. If bolts are cut off to required maximum height, threads must be dressed to allow nuts to be removed without damage to the bolt or the nuts. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 13
1 2 3 4
S. Install and tighten ASTM A325 high-strength bolts in accordance with the AISC 325, Allowable Stress Design (ASD). 1. Provide hardened washers for all ASTM A325 bolts. a. Provide the hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening.
5 6
T. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of ASTM A307 bolts or anchor bolts to prevent nuts from backing off.
7
U. Secure metal to wood with lag screws of adequate size with appropriate washers.
8 9 10
V. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping length or change of direction requires splicing. 1. Provide full penetration welded splices where continuity is required.
11 12
W. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or required to install.
13 14
X. Anchor such that work will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from expansion and contraction.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Y. Set beam and column base plates accurately on nonshrink grout as indicated on Drawings. 1. See Division 03 Specification Sections for non-shrink grout and anchorage. 2. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. a. Use metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts for leveling and plumbing columns and beams. 1) Wedges, shims and setting nuts to be of same metal as base plate they support. 2) Tighten nuts on anchor bolts. b. Fill space between bearing surface and bottom of base plate with nonshrink grout. 1) Fill space until voids are completely filled and base plates are fully bedded on wedges, shims, and grout. c. Do not remove wedges or shims. 1) Where they protrude, cut off flush with edge of base plate. d. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts solid with non-shrink grout.
28 29 30 31 32
Z. Tie anchor bolts in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. 1. Tack welding prohibited. a. Coat projecting bolt threads and nuts with heavy coat of clean grease. 2. Anchor bolt location tolerance: a. Per Section 03 15 19.
33 34
AA. Install bollards as detailed on Drawings. 1. Fill pipe with concrete and round off at top.
35 36 37
BB. Provide abrasive stair nosings in each tread and landing of all concrete stairs and at each concrete stair landing having metal stair structure attaching to the concrete landing. 1. Center stair nosings in stair width.
38 39 40
CC. Accurately locate and place frames for openings before casting into floor slab so top of plate is flush with surface of finished floor. 1. Keep screw holes clean and ready to receive screws.
41 42 43 44
DD. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips and bolts. 1. Maximum spacing: 2 FT OC with minimum of two (2) per side. 2. Attach individual units of aluminum grating together with clips at 2 FT OC maximum with a minimum of two (2) clips per side.
45 46
EE. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00.
47 48
FF. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. 1. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 14
1 2
2.
3 4
Apply galvanizing repair paint to minimum 6 mils DFT in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
GG. Anchor ladder to concrete structure with minimum 3/4 IN stainless steel anchor bolts with minimum 6 IN embedment.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
HH. Anchor ladder to masonry structure with minimum 3/4 IN stainless steel anchor bolts with minimum 6 IN embedment. 1. When anchoring into masonry, fill masonry cores with grout at anchor locations and each masonry core within 8 IN of anchor 2. When anchoring into cavity wall construction, provide minimum 6 IN embedment into concrete or masonry back-up wall. a. At each anchor location, provide sleeve between back face of veneer and cavity face of concrete or masonry back-up wall. b. Cut cavity insulation as required and seal around sleeve. 1) Sleeve to be 1 IN DIA schedule 40 stainless steel tubing, TP-304L, ASTM A269. a) Minimum wall thickness to be .065 IN. 2) Continuously weld 4 by 4 by 1/4 IN Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A666 flange onto each end of pipe. a) Drill 1 IN hole in flange to match pipe. b) Attach sleeve to concrete or masonry back-up with 1/4 IN self-tapping concrete anchors. 3) Grout solid, area around bolt where bolt penetrates veneer. 4) Accurately locate sleeves to align with bolt locations on ladder.
23 24 25
II. Install ladder safety extension post in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Mount device opposite the climbing side. 2. Provide ladder safety extension device for all ladders unless noted otherwise.
26
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
27 28
A. Tolerances shall meet structural requirements of Specification Section 05 12 00 for erecting items of structural nature.
29 30 31
B. Special Inspections and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
32
3.4
CLEANING
33 34
A. After fabrication, erection, installation or application, clean all miscellaneous metal fabrication surfaces of all dirt, weld slag and other foreign matter.
35 36 37
B. All stainless steel products in addition to Paragraph A. above: 1. Remove all heat tint, rusting, discoloration by passivation, ASTM A380, or other acceptable means as listed in NiDI 11 007 as approved by the Engineer.
38 39
C. Provide surface acceptable to receive field applied paint coatings specified in Specification Section 09 96 00.
41
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 15
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 05 52 02 ALUMINUM RAILINGS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum handrail, stair rail and guardrail. 2. Aluminum guardrail gates.
8 9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. ADM 1, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B108, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings. b. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. c. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. d. B247, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and Rolled Ring Forgings. e. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. f. B429, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. C5.5, Recommended Practices for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding. b. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. AMP 521, Pipe Railing Systems Manual. 6. U.S. Department of Justice, Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (Access Board): a. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 8. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
46 47 48
B. Qualifications: 1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS and ASME Section IX. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 1
1
1.3
DEFINITIONS
2 3 4
A. Guardrail: A system of building components located near the open sides of elevated walking surfaces for the purpose of minimizing the possibility of an accidental fall from the walking surface to the lower level.
5
B. Handrail: A railing provided for grasping with the hand for support.
6
C. Railing: A generic term referring to guardrail, handrail and/or stair rails.
7 8 9
D. Stair Rail: A guardrail, installed at the open side of stairways with either a handrail mounted to the inside face of the guardrail, or where allowed by applicable codes, with the top rail mounted at handrail height and serving the function of a handrail.
10
1.4
SUBMITTALS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Drawings showing profile, location, sections and fabrication details including all welding information of each railing. b. Type and details of anchorage. c. Location and type of expansion joints. d. Materials of construction, shop coatings and all third-party accessories. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation details. 4. Certification that railings have been designed and fabricated to meet the loading requirements specified. 5. Calculations for all proposed deviations from the Specification. a. Calculations shall be performed, sealed, signed and dated by a registered professional structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina. b. Calculations shall be specific to this Project and shall include all assumptions, references and design interpretations used to achieve the results obtained by the Engineer. c. Reduction in load criteria is not acceptable as reason for deviation from sizes indicated in the Specification.
33 34 35 36 37
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certification of welders and welding procedures indicating compliance with AWS requirements.
38
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
39
A. Deliver and handle railings to preclude damage.
40 41
B. Store railings on skids, keep free of dirt and other foreign matter which will damage railings or finish and protect against corrosion.
42
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
43
2.1
44 45 46 47
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Welded railing systems: a. Any manufacturer meeting this Specification Section.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 2
1 2
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
3 4 5 6
A. Alloy 6061-T6, 32,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. 1. ASTM B209 for sheets and plates. 2. ASTM B221 and ASTM B308 for shapes - beams, channels, angles, tees, and zees. 3. ASTM B247 for forgings.
7 8
B. Alloy 6063-T5 or T6, 15,000 psi tensile yield strength minimum. 1. ASTM B221 and ASTM B429 for bars, rods, wires, pipes and tubes.
9
C. Cast Fittings: Aluminum, ASTM B108.
10
D. Shims: Aluminum of same alloy as component being shimmed.
11
E. Fasteners: See Specification Section 05 50 00.
12
F. Expansion and Adhesive Anchors: See Specification Section 03 15 19.
13 14 15
G. Electrodes for Welding: 1. Aluminum: AWS D1.2. 2. Filler alloy 5356 or 4043.
16
2.3
FABRICATION
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A. General: 1. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. 2. For fabrication of items which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. a. Remove blemishes by grinding and buffing or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. 3. Form exposed work with smooth, short radius bends, accurate angles and straight edges. a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 IN. b. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. c. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges. 4. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints, using stainless steel or aluminum splice locks to splice sections together or by welding. a. Ease the edges of top rail splices and expansion joints and remove all burrs left from cutting. 5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated on Drawings or as required by field conditions. a. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges. 6. Design railings and anchorage system in accordance with NAAMM AMP 521 to resist loading as required by Building Code. a. Maximum allowable stresses per AA ADM 1. 7. Design railings in accordance with accessibility requirements per the Building Code and ADAAG.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Custom fabricate railings to dimensions and profiles indicated. 1. Guardrails: a. Schedule 40 pipe. b. Top rails: 2 IN nominal diameter. c. Intermediate rails: 1-1/2 IN nominal diameter. d. Vertical posts: 1) 2 IN nominal diameter. 2) Vertical posts that are to be side-bracket mounted to a vertical concrete surface or metal structure shall use Alloy 6063-T6. 2. Handrail mounted to wall or to guardrail vertical posts: 1-1/4 IN nominal diameter Schedule 40 pipe. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
8.
Where details are not indicated, space intermediate rails to requirements of the Building Code or OSHA Standards, whichever requires the more restrictive design. Space vertical posts as required by loading requirements but not more than 4 FT on center. a. Avoid locating vertical posts at changes in direction of railing. b. Hold vertical post back from corner and provide radiused corners. Space handrail brackets as required by loading requirements but not more than 4 FT on center. Base plate for vertical guardrail posts mounted to top of concrete surface: a. 3/8 x 6 x 6 IN square plate. b. Predrilled to accept four (4) anchors. c. Provide a 2 IN DIA x 8 IN long solid aluminum rod welded to the base plate. d. Fit the vertical post over the solid rod and weld the post to the base plate. Base plate for vertical guardrail post mounted to flange of metal structure: a. 3/8 x 3 x 8 IN plate. b. Predrilled to accept two (2) fasteners. c. Provide a 2 IN DIA x 8 IN long solid aluminum rod welded to the base plate. d. Fit the vertical post over the solid rod and weld the post to the base plate. Mounting bracket for vertical guardrail post mounted to vertical concrete surface or web of metal structural member: a. Pair of 3/8 IN angles or bent plates. b. Predrilled to accept two (2) fasteners each. c. Weld angles or bent plates to vertical posts. d. Provide toeboards on walkway side of all elevated walkways, platforms and stair landings, and where indicated on the Drawings or required by OSHA Standards. 1) 4 IN high extruded toeboard with stiffener ribs and angled toe. a) Similar to Wagner, Model "IR94102." b) 3/8 IN by 4 IN flat plate toeboard. e. Guardrail gates: 1) Constructed of same material and sizes as the guardrail system. 2) Width of gate as shown on Drawings. 3) Hinges: a) Cast aluminum. b) Self-closing. (1) Stainless steel torsion spring. c) Similar to Wagner, Model "IR100." 4) Gate latch and stop: a) Cast aluminum. b) Spring-loaded pin latch. (1) Stainless steel spring. c) Similar to Wagner, Model "IR101."
C. Railing Fabrication: 1. All railings are to be welded systems. 2. Use wire welding for all joints. 3. All welding to be continuous in accordance with AWS C5.5 and AWS D1.2. a. All welded railing joints shall have full penetration welds unless noted otherwise. 4. All exposed welds to be ground smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. a. NAAMM AMP 521, Type 2. 5. No ragged edges, surface defects, or undercutting of adjoining surfaces will be accepted. 6. Finishing joints with filler is not acceptable. 7. Provide flush weld fittings using locking weld connectors or coped drive-on connectors. 8. Fit exposed ends of guardrails and handrails with solid terminations. a. Return ends of handrail to wall, but do not attach to wall. b. Where guardrail terminates at a wall, provide a vertical post or end-loop 4 IN off the wall to center of vertical member. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
9.
Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at project site. 10. Install weeps to drain water from hollow sections of railing at exterior and high humidity conditions. a. Drill 1/4 IN weep hole in railings closed at bottom: 1) 1 IN above walkway surface at bottom of posts set in concrete. 2) 1 IN above solid aluminum rod at posts having base plate. 3) At low point of intermediate rails. b. Do not drill weep holes: 1) In bottom of base plate. 11. Expansion joints: a. Joints to be designed to allow expansion and contraction of railing and still meet design loads required. 1) Top rail splices and expansion joints shall be located within 8 IN of post or other support. 2) Where railings span building or tank expansion joints; provide a railing expansion joint in the span crossing the building or tank expansion joint. b. Provide expansion joints in any continuous run exceeding 20 FT in length. 1) Space expansion joints at not more than 40 FT on center. c. Provide minimum 0.10 IN of expansion joint for each 20 FT length of top rail for each 25 DegF differential between installation temperature and maximum design temperature. 1) Maximum expansion joint width at time of installation shall not exceed 3/8 IN. a) Provide additional expansion joints as required to limit expansion joint width. d. Provide slip-joint with internal sleeve. 1) Extend slip joint min 2 IN beyond joint at maximum design width. 2) Fasten internal sleeve securely to one side a) Provide allen-head set screw located in bottom of rail. b) Rivets or exposed screw heads are not acceptable.
30
D. Finish: Mill.
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION
32
3.1
PREPARATION
33
A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate.
34 35 36
B. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. 1. Field welding aluminum is not permitted unless approved in writing by Engineer.
37
3.2
INSTALLATION
38
A. Install handrails and guardrails to meet loading requirements of the Building Code.
39
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
40 41 42
C. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation; plumb, level and true. 1. Measure from established lines and items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.
43 44 45
D. Align railings prior to securing in place to assure proper matching at butting and expansion joints and correct alignment throughout their length. 1. Provide shims as required.
46 47 48
E. Install proper sized expansion joints based on temperature at time of installation and differential coefficient of expansion of materials in all railings as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lubricate expansion joint splice bar for smooth movement of railing sections. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 5
1
F. Provide removable railing sections where indicated on Drawings.
2 3 4 5 6 7
G. Attach handrails to walls or guardrail with brackets designed for condition: 1. Provide brackets which provide a minimum 1-1/2 IN clearance between handrail and nearest obstruction. a. Handrails shall not project more than 4-1/2 IN into required stairway width. 2. Anchor handrail brackets to concrete or masonry walls with 1/2 IN stainless steel adhesive anchors with stainless steel hex head bolts.
8 9 10 11 12 13
H. Anchor railings to concrete with minimum 1/2 IN stainless steel adhesive anchors with stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 1. Where exposed, bolts shall extend minimum 1/2 IN and maximum 3/4 IN above the top nut. a. If bolts are cut off to required height, threads must be dressed to allow nuts to be removed without damage to the bolt or the nut. b. Bevel the top of the bolt after cutting to provide a smooth surface.
14
I.
Anchor railings to metal structure with minimum 3/4 IN stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
J.
Install toeboards to fit tight to the walking surface. 1. Attach to railing vertical post with manufacturer's standard mounting clamp: a. Adjustable. b. Designed to engage in extruded slot on back of toeboard. 2. Provide splice bars, corner splices and brackets: a. Manufacturer's standard items as required for a complete installation. 3. Notch toeboards at base plates or other obstructions. 4. Bottom of toeboard shall not exceed 1/4 IN above walking surface.
23 24
K. Coat aluminum in contact with dissimilar metal or concrete in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00.
25
L. Provide railings as required for stair construction identified in Specification Section 05 50 00.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
M. Install guardrail gate plumb and level in location shown on Drawings. 1. Center gate in opening. 2. Top of gate to match top of guardrail. 3. Fasten hinges to gate and jamb post: a. Minimum three (3) 1/4 IN stainless steel countersunk machine screws per leaf. b. Drill and tap into railing and gate vertical posts. 4. Provide not less than two (2) hinges per gate. 5. Install gate latch and stop on strike side of opening. a. Fasten to gate with 1/4 IN stainless steel countersunk machine screws. b. Drill and tap into gate vertical post. c. Drill hole in railing vertical post to receive latch pin. 6. Adjust to provide smooth operation: a. Self-closing and self-latching.
39
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
40 41
A. Tolerances shall meet structural requirements of Specification Section 05 12 00 for erecting items of structural nature.
42 43 44
B. Special Inspection and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
45
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM RAILINGS 05 52 02 - 6
SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Rough carpentry.
7 8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A. Referenced Standards: 1. The Engineered Wood Association (APA): a. PRP-108, Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural Use Panels. b. U450E, Storage and Handling of APA Trademarked Panels. c. Y510T, Plywood Design Specification. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. D2898, Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing. c. D4442, Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. d. D4444, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Standardization and Calibration of HandHeld Moisture Meters. e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): a. M2, Standard for Inspection of Wood Products Treated with Preservatives. b. M3, Standard Quality Control Procedures for Wood Preserving Plants. c. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products. d. P5, Standard for Waterborne Preservatives. e. U1, Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. 4. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Industry (ANSI/SPRI): a. ES-1, Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roof Systems. 5. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 6. FM Global (FM): a. 1-49, Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets - Perimeter Flashing. 7. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): a. PS-1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. b. PS-20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 723, Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
47 48 49
B. Qualifications: 1. Wood Treatment Plant: AWPA M3. 2. Treated Wood Inspection: AWPA M2. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C. Miscellaneous: 1. Factory marking: a. Lumber: 1) Identify type, grade, moisture content, inspection service, producing mill, and other qualities specified. 2) Marking may be omitted, as allowed by Building Code, if certificate of inspection is provided for each shipment. 1.3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication drawings of all fabricated items. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions for all products specified. 4. Certifications: a. Chemicals used in treatment process are registered with and approved by EPA. b. Moisture content of material prior to treatment: 25 percent maximum. c. Material has been kiln-dried after treatment (KDAT) to the moisture content specified. 5. Documentation of treatment of treated material in accordance with standards referenced.
1.4
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
22 23 24
A. Delivery, storage and handling of untreated wood products: 1. Lumber: As recommended by the grading agency indicated on the grade stamp. 2. Plywood: APA U450E.
25
B. Delivery, storage, handling and disposal of treated wood products: AWPA M4.
26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
28 29
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable.
30
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
31
2.2
MATERIALS
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A. General: 1. Lumber (for framing, blocking, nailers, furring, grounds and similar members): a. NIST PS-20. b. Species: 1) Treated material: As indicated in the appropriate AWPA standard. a) Provide species of FRTM as necessary to achieve UL rating listed. c. Grade: 1) For nominal sizes up to and including 2 x 4: Standard and better. 2) For nominal sizes up to 2 IN thick and wider than 4 IN: #2 and better. 2. Non-structural plywood: a. NIST PS-1. b. C-C plugged: 1) Exposure: INT. 2) Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3) Touch sanded.
47 48
B. Preservative Treated Material: 1. Moisture content: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a. b. 2. 3. 4.
Prior to treatment: 25 percent. Kiln-dry after treatment (KDAT), ASTM D4442 and ASTM D4444: 1) Lumber: 19 percent maximum. 2) Plywood: 18 percent maximum. Preservative: a. Waterborne: AWPA P5. b. As indicated in the appropriate AWPA standard. Pressure-treat material in accordance with AWPA U1. Wherever practicable, material to be treated shall be manufactured in its final form prior to treatment.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
C. Fire-Retardant Treated Material (FRTM): 1. Acceptable manufacturer: a. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.: 1) Interior: "Pyro-Guard". 2) Exterior: "Exterior Fire-X". 2. Maximum moisture content: a. Prior to treatment: 25 percent. b. Kiln-dry after treatment (KDAT), ASTM D4442 and ASTM D4444: 1) Lumber: 19 percent (KDAT). 2) Plywood: 15 percent (KD-15). 3. Fire-retardant preservative: a. Provide protection against decay: 1) EPA registered for use as a wood preservative. b. Shall not bleed-through or adversely affect bond of any finish. 4. Pressure-treat material in accordance with AWPA U1. 5. UL Classified: a. FR-S, UL 723. b. Exterior: No increase in classification when subjected to the Standard Rain Test, ASTM D2898. c. Provide UL mark on each piece of FRTM. 6. Maximum flame spread rating: 25, ASTM E84. 7. Wherever practicable, material to be treated shall be manufactured in its final form prior to treatment.
34 35 36 37 38 39
D. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Nails and screws: a. Dry, non-corrosive exposure: Hot dipped galvanized or Type 304 stainless steel. b. Wet, corrosive, marine, and/or below grade: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, self-tapping concrete anchors, bolts, nuts, and washers: See Specification Section 05 50 00.
40
PART 3 - EXECUTION
41
3.1
PREPARATION
42
A. Verify measurements, dimensions, and shop drawing details before proceeding.
43
B. Coordinate location of studs, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports for attached work.
44
C. Eliminate sharp projections which would puncture roofing, flashing or underlayment material.
45 46 47 48 49 50
3.2
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide preservative treated material for all wood used: a. Outside building. b. Below grade. 2. Provide fire-retardant treated material for all wood used:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5
a. b. c. d. e.
Inside building. Exterior building walls. Roof construction. Parapet walls. Roofing nailers.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
B. Attach work securely by anchoring and fastening as indicated or required to support applied loading. 1. Anchor wood to concrete using adhesive or expansion anchors as specified in Specification Section 05 50 00. 2. Anchor wood to metal using bolts and nuts as specified in Specification Section 05 50 00. 3. Provide flat washers under all bolt heads and nuts. 4. Fasten plywood in accordance with APA recommendations. 5. Use fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or receive finish materials. 6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 7. Do not drive threaded friction type fasteners. 8. Tighten bolts and lag screws at installation and retighten as required.
18 19 20
C. Set work to required levels and lines, plumb, true. 1. Shim as required. 2. Cut and fit accurately.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D. Provide wood grounds, nailers, or blocking where required for attachment of other work and surface applied items. 1. Form to shapes indicated or required. a. FRTM lumber: 1) Do not rip or mill. 2) Cross-cutting and drilling are allowable in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and UL requirements. 3) Resurfacing, planing or fabrication of special shapes or profiles shall be done prior to treatment. b. FRTM plywood: 1) Cross-cutting, ripping and drilling are allowable in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and UL requirements. c. Light sanding of FRTM as permitted by UL to remove raised grain or prepare for finishing is allowable. d. Field treat cuts and holes in preservative treated material in accordance with AWPA M4 and manufacturer's published recommendations. 2. Grounds: a. Dressed, key beveled lumber minimum 1-1/2 IN wide of thickness required to bring face of ground even with finish material. b. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3. Install roofing nailers as necessary for attachment of flashing, curbs, fascia, coping, and related accessories: a. Match height of nailers to insulation. b. Anchor nailers to resist force of 300 PLF unless required otherwise by FM Global or roofing manufacturer. 1) Metal decking attachment: a) Attach base nailer to metal roof deck using self-tapping stainless steel sheet metal screws (STSMS) with plate washers or with minimum 3/8 IN Type 304 stainless steel hex head bolts with nuts and washers. b) Countersink heads of bolts flush with top of nailer. 2) Concrete decking attachment: a) Attach base nailer to concrete roof deck using minimum 3/8 IN stainless steel adhesive anchors with minimum 3 IN embedment. b) Countersink heads of bolts flush with top of nailer. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
c. d.
3) Provide size and spacing of anchorage as required to meet loading criteria specified. a) Fasten blocking for perimeter flashing in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 and FM Global 1-49. Provide 1/2 IN vent spaces between lengths of nailers. Install nailers over vapor retarder.
E. When wood has been exposed to moisture allow to completely dry out prior to covering with additional wood or another material. F. Correct or replace wood which shows bowing, warping or twisting to provide a straight, plumb and level substrate for applications of other materials.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 06 82 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8 9
A. Section Includes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) fabrications including but not limited to: a. Grating. b. Structural members. c. Supporting structure design.
10 11 12 13
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, referred to herein as OSHA Standards. 4. Building code: 1) North Carolina Building Code and associated standards, 2012Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
26 27 28
A. Skid-resistant: 1. Manufacturer's standard applied abrasive grit coating. 2. Abrasive coated tape is not acceptable.
29
B. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic.
30 31 32
C. Guardrail: A system of building components located near the open sides of elevated walking surfaces for the purpose of minimizing the possibility of an accidental fall from the walking surface to the lower level.
33
D. Handrail: A railing provided for grasping with the hand for support.
34
E. Railing: A generic term referring to guardrail, handrail and/or stair rails.
35 36 37
F. Stair Rail: A guardrail, installed at the open side of stairways with either a handrail mounted to the inside face of the guardrail, or where allowed by applicable codes, with the top rail mounted at handrail height and serving the function of a handrail.
38
1.4
39 40 41 42 43 44
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All fiberglass reinforced plastic support systems shall be designed by a registered professional structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 82 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2.
3.
4.
5.
16 17 18 19 20
Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations on reinforcing field cut openings. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Plan showing profile, location, section and details of each item including anchorage or support system(s). b. Locations and type of expansion joints. c. Materials of construction including shop applied coatings. d. Listing of all accessory items being provided indicating material, finish, etc. Certifications: a. Certification of Structural Engineer's qualifications. b. Certification that all components and systems have been designed and fabricated to meet the loading requirements specified. Manufacturer's full line of colors available for each component.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Complete design calculations of all supporting structure and fastening conditions. a. Design calculations to be for information only. b. Engineer will not review or take any action on submittal. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
21
A. Deliver and handle each item to preclude damage.
22 23 24
B. Store all items on skids above ground. 1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign matter which will damage items or finish and protect from corrosion and UV exposure.
25
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
26
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Grating and solid plate: a. American Grating. b. Enduro Composite Systems. c. Fibergrate Composite Structures,Inc. d. IKG Industries. e. International Grating Inc. f. Seasafe, Inc. g. Strongwell. 2. Structural shapes: a. American Grating. b. Enduro Composite Systems. c. Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. d. Strongwell. 3. Modular framing system: a. AICKIN. b. Enduro Composite Systems. c. Seasafe, Inc. d. Unistrut.
47
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
48 49
2.2
MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP):
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 82 00 - 2
1 2 3 4
1. 2.
Vinyl ester with fiberglass reinforcing. a. Type V. Color: To be selected by Engineer when more than one (1) color is available for any one (1) component.
5 6 7
B. Fasteners, Clips, Saddles, and Miscellaneous Components: 1. Fiberglass where possible. 2. Stainless steel may be used if fiberglass component is not available.
8
C. Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
9
D. Skid-resistant Surfacing: Manufacturer-applied abrasive grit coating.
10
2.3
FABRICATION
11 12 13 14 15
A. General: 1. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. 2. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible. 3. All components shall be treated with UV inhibitor. 4. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
B. Railings: 1. Custom fabricate handrail and guardrail to profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings. 2. Where not indicated on Drawings, set intermediate horizontal rails to requirements of Building Code. 3. Minimum 2 IN SQ x 0.187 IN tube. 4. Kickplate: a. 4 x 1/2 IN (corrugated) x 0.125 IN thick. b. Provide at all elevated platforms and where required by OSHA Standards. 5. Provide handrail supports at 4 FT maximum spacing for wall brackets and 4 FT maximum spacing for posts. a. Provide vertical supports at 4 FT maximum spacing on all inclined rail sections. b. Provide brackets which provide a 1-1/2 IN projection from finish wall surface or guardrail to wall or guardrail side of rail. c. Handrails shall not project more than 4-1/2 IN into required stairway width. 6. Fit exposed ends of guardrails and handrails with solid terminations. a. Return ends of handrail to wall but do not attach end to wall. b. Where guardrail terminates at a wall or other obstruction, provide a vertical support post located 4 IN off wall or obstruction to center of post. 7. Design railings to resist loading as required by the Building Code. 8. Form connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints. a. Provide concealed splice fitting at all connections. b. Top rail splices and expansion joints shall be located within 8 IN of support. 9. Fabricate items free of blemishes, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 10. Provide removable railing where indicated. 11. Provide weeps to drain moisture from hollow railing sections at exterior and in high humidity areas. a. 1/4 IN weep hole in railing 1 IN above walkway surface at bottom of posts set in concrete or otherwise closed at bottom, and at other low points where moisture can collect.
46 47 48 49 50 51 52
C. Grating and Solid Plate Material: 1. Design live load: a. 100 psf uniform live load. b. 300 LBS concentrated load. c. Maximum deflection of l/300 of span under a superimposed live load. d. Design for the most severe loading condition noted above. 2. Minimum grating depth: 1-1/2 IN. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 82 00 - 3
1 2
3. 4.
3 4 5 6 7
Bar span: Maximum of 1-1/2 IN center to center. Walking surface: Manufacturer's standard applied abrasive grit coating.
D. Embedded Grating Supports: 1. Fiberglass. 2. Size to suit depth of grating. 3. Provide leg or strap for embedding and anchoring into concrete. 4. Similar to Strongwell "Duradek Fiberglass Curb Angle."
8 9 10 11 12
E. Modular Framing System: 1. Material: Heavy duty pultruded. 2. Shapes as required for condition. 3. Fasteners: Stainless steel or fiberglass. 4. Provide end caps for all exposed terminations.
13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
14
3.1
INSTALLATION
15
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, and true. 1. Measure from established lines and levels. 2. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 3. Tolerances: a. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical line: 1/8 IN in 3 FT. b. Maximum variation from level of horizontal line: 1/4 IN in 20 FT. c. Maximum variation from plan location: 1/4 IN in 20 FT.
24 25
C. Coat all exposed surfaces of stainless steel fasteners with minimum 15 mil gel coating to match component being anchored.
26 27 28 29
D. Attach grating to each end and intermediate support clip or saddle with bolts, nuts and washers. 1. Maximum spacing: 2 FT OC with minimum of two (2) per side. 2. Attach clips or saddles to bearing bars only. 3. Reinforce all field cut openings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
30
E. File cut ends of all fiberglass to a 1/32 IN radius.
31 32
F. Seal cut ends of all items with catalyzed resin as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Provide same resin used in fabrication of item as a minimum.
33 34
G. Provide all modular framing components as required to suit condition. 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
36
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06 82 00 - 4
SECTION 07 14 00 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid applied waterproofing. 2. Protection course. 3. Specific concrete finishing requirements.
9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Division 03 - Concrete. 4. Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C836, Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. b. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 2. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): a. 310.2, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays. 3. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. b. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator(s) licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Applicator(s) shall have minimum of seven (7) years experience in application of cold liquid-applied elastomeric waterproofing membranes with minimum of two (2) years installation of products specified or accepted for use on this Project. a. Provide list of projects completed in last two (2) years using products proposed for use. 1) Include name of structure, area waterproofed (SF) and name of contact with phone number.
34 35 36
C. Miscellaneous: 1. Manufacturer's authorized representative shall review substrate preparation and provide written approval of substrate prior to installation of product.
37
1.3
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Details showing flashing of penetrations, terminations, expansion joints, protection course attachment and other special conditions.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. 4. 5. 6.
7 8 9 10 11
Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Certification of Applicator qualifications. Applicator's experience record. Listing of projects completed in last two (2) years.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Manufacturer's written approval of substrate. 3. Warranty.
12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
13
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
14 15 16 17 18
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Waterproofing system: a. Tremco Sealants and Waterproofing. b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing.
19
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
20
2.2
MATERIALS
21
A. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer appropriate to substrate.
22 23 24 25 26 27
B. Waterproofing System: 1. One (1) or two (2) component, moisture curing polyurethane elastomer meeting requirements of ASTM C836. 2. Flowing type for surfaces up to 5 PCT slope. 3. Non-flow type for surfaces exceeding 5 PCT. 4. Carlisle "Liquiseal CCW-525 IN or Tremco "TREMproof 201/60."
28
C. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
29
D. Flashing Reinforcement: Woven uncoated fiberglass mesh.
30
E. Sealant: Manufacturer's recommended sealant.
31 32 33 34
F. Protection Course: 1. Material capable of protecting cured membrane from damage caused by rocks and other debris in the backfill material. 2. Acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer.
35
G. Backer Rod: Closed cell polyurethane foam rod.
36
PART 3 - EXECUTION
37
3.1
PREPARATION
38 39 40
A. Cure concrete and masonry in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Verify moisture content does not exceed manufacturer's maximum allowable. 2. Ensure that curing agents used are compatible with coating system.
41
B. Remove surface contamination by high pressure water cleaning per ASTM D4258.
42
C. Verify that concrete has been troweled and broomed, free of fins, ridges or voids.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00 - 2
1 2 3
1.
Verify that all tie holes and honeycomb areas, holes and voids have been patched in accordance with Specification Section 03 35 00 and coating manufacturer's recommendations.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
D. Prepare substrate per manufacturer's published instructions and this Specification Section. 1. Concrete surfaces: a. Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6 to provide a profiled surface. 1) Profile: ICRI 310.2, CSP 3 minimum. 2. Metal surfaces: a. Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3. 1) Minimum one (1) mil surface profile. b. Prime coat all metal surfaces. 3. Flash all penetrations and other areas in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Clean and seal cracks and joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
15
E. Protect adjacent surfaces.
16
3.2
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Apply waterproofing system in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and this Specification Section. 1. Provide minimum 60 MIL dry film thickness. 2. Apply waterproofing to the exterior side of vertical concrete wall surfaces (surfaces against earth) where finished interior building space occurs on the opposite side of the wall and where indicated on the Drawings. a. Terminate top of waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions approximately 4 IN below finished grade unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
25
B. Extend coating over all previously flashed areas.
26 27
C. Allow vertical applications to cure minimum of 12 HRS at 75 DEGF or as recommended by manufacturer, prior to backfilling.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
D. Protection Course: 1. Protection course is to be installed prior to any perimeter insulation specified in Specification Section 07 21 00. a. Secure protection course to prevent displacement during backfilling. 1) Adhere to cured waterproofing membrane. 2) Mechanical fasteners are not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 14 00 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 07 19 00 LIQUID WATER REPELLENT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Liquid water repellent.
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Division 03 - Concrete. 4. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
A. Material must not inhibit the adhesion of future paint coatings.
14 15
B. Mock-Ups: 1. Product shall be applied to mock-up erected under Specification Section 04 22 00.
16
1.3
SUBMITTALS
17 18 19 20 21 22
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Letter from manufacturer stating that product is suitable for intended use and is compatible with and will not cause discoloration of precolored masonry units . 3. Field conducted water spray test results. 4. Warranty.
30
1.4
31
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard five (5) year performance warranty.
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Liquid water repellent: a. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. c. Hydrozo, Inc. d. Degussa.
41
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LIQUID WATER REPELLENT 07 19 00 - 1
1
2.2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MATERIALS A. Liquid Water Repellent Type 1: 1. Clear, penetrating micro-emulsion water repellent formulated for sealing concrete masonry. a. Water based, VOC compliant, odorless. 1) VOC: Less than 195 g/L. b. Non-yellowing, non-staining. c. Provides both surface barrier and penetrating chemical action-forming barrier. 2. Surface barrier shall protect against water intrusion, mildew, dirt and airborne contaminants. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "HYDROBLOCK."
10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
3.1
PREPARATION
12
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to be covered.
13
B. Clean surfaces to be covered in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
14
C. Make all mortar repairs at least 48 HRS prior to application.
15
D. Allow masonry surfaces to cure minimum of 10 days prior to application.
16
3.2
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
17 18 19 20
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. At a minimum apply material in accordance with manufacturer's recommended application rates using procedures and equipment recommended by manufacturer. a. Apply two (2) coats of material.
21
B. Apply liquid water repellent "Type 1" to exterior concrete block surfaces.
22
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Manufacturer or manufacturer's designated representative shall conduct a water spray test to an area of the mock-up wall specified in Specification Section 04 22 00 for a period of 5 HRS. 1. Water from the spray shall impact the wall at a 45-degree angle to the vertical and shall cover an area of not less than 9 SF. 2. Water flow shall be minimum 5 gpm at 60 psi pressure. 3. If, within 5 HRS, moisture appears on the inside face of the wall within the test area, the wall shall be recoated.
30
B. Retest as required.
31
C. Recoat as required until wall area remains dry within limits of testing procedure.
32 33
D. Results of this test shall be used to determine material quantity in excess of manufacturer's minimum recommended amounts to be applied per square foot to the building surface.
36
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LIQUID WATER REPELLENT 07 19 00 - 2
SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Building insulation. a. Does not include roof insulation or roof vapor retarder; see Specification Section Section 07 61 13.
9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 4. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C272, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions b. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. c. C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. d. C578, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. e. C665, Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. f. D1621, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. g. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory.
30 31
B. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide insulation for mock-ups required in Specification Section 04 22 00.
32
1.3
SUBMITTALS
33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations on sealants, tapes and mastics.
40 41 42 43 44
B. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certification from insulation manufacturer stating that insulation proposed is acceptable for intended use per the Drawings.
45 46
1.4
SITE CONDITIONS A. For purposes of this Specification Section, design frost line for this Project is 6 IN below grade.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Rigid extruded polystyrene board insulation: a. Dow. b. Diversifoam Products. c. Owens Corning. 2. Vapor retarder: a. Raven Industries. b. Reef Industries. c. Fortifiber Corp. d. Alumiseal. 3. Foamed plastic insulation: a. Poly Master, Inc. b. The Icynene Insulation System. c. Insta-Foam Products.
18
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
19
2.2
MATERIALS
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
A. Rigid Polystyrene Board Insulation: 1. Extruded: ASTM C578, Type IV. a. Water vapor transmission: ASTM E96, 1.1 perm-IN maximum. b. Water absorption: ASTM C272, 0.3 percent maximum. c. Thermal resistance: ASTM C518 at 75 DegF mean temperature, 5.0/IN. 2. Provide insulation designed for intended use. a. Perimeter insulation and protection board. 1) Similar to Dow "Styrofoam PERIMATE." 2) Compressive strength: ASTM D1621, 30 psi. 3) Thickness: a) Perimeter insulation: 2 IN. b) Protection board: 1 IN. 4) Edges: a) Long edge: Shiplap. b) Short edge: Square. b. Cavity insulation: 1) Similar to Dow "CAVITYMATE." 2) Compressive strength: ASTM D1621, 15 psi. 3) Thickness: 2 IN. 4) Edges: Square.
40 41
B. Sealant and Mastic (for setting polystyrene and/or polyisocyanurate insulation board): Manufacturer's recommended standard.
42 43 44 45 46
C. Foamed Plastic Insulation: 1. Two component powdered resin and aqueous foaming agent. a. Formaldehyde free. 2. Thermal conductivity (K-Factor): 0.216 (BTU/HR)/(SF)(DegF)/(IN), ASTM C518. 3. Water vapor transmission: ASTM E96, maximum 6.631 perm IN.
47 48 49 50 51
D. Vapor Retarder: 1. Fire rated, reinforced, 3 ply, Class 1 material. 2. Perm rating: Not exceeding 0.035 grains/HR-FT2-IN-Hg when determined in accordance with ASTM E96. 3. Griffolyn "TX-1200FR." 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2
1
E. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3
3.1
4
INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
B. General: 1. Insulate full thickness over surfaces to be insulated. 2. Fit tightly around obstructions, fill voids. 3. Cover all penetrations (electrical junction boxes, switch boxes, piping, conduits, etc.) with insulation, taking care not to compromise the workings of the device. 4. Fit butted joints of batt or blanket insulations tightly together. 5. Apply single or double layer to achieve total thickness. a. If double layer is provided, stagger all joints minimum 12 IN. 6. Do not use broken or torn pieces of insulation. 1. Install so that completed installation is vapor tight. a. Seal all joints. b. Seal to abutting materials to maintain vapor retarder integrity. c. Provide manufacturer’s recommended vapor retarder tape for use with faced batt insulation or separate vapor retarder. 1) If vapor retarder tape fails to adhere to any surface, apply sprayed-on adhesive as recommended by tape manufacturer to promote adhesion. d. Provide manufacturer’s recommended solvent-free sealant compatible with insulation board for rigid board insulation. 1) Tape is not acceptable for use with rigid board insulation.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
C. Rigid Board Insulation in Cavity Walls: 1. Do not proceed with installation until subsequent work which conceals insulation is ready to be performed. 2. Set each piece of insulation flush with the abutting piece to eliminate ledges in the face of the insulation. 3. Install mastic on face of concrete or masonry back-up in accordance with mastic and insulation manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Press courses of insulation between wall ties (horizontal reinforcing) with edges butted tightly both ways. 5. Set units firmly into mastic. 6. Seal all horizontal and vertical joints with sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. 7. Do not use damaged insulation.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
D. Rigid Insulation at Perimeter Below Grade : 1. Install insulation below grade on outside face of foundation walls. a. Install in mastic with tight joints. 2. Where footings are located below the design frost line, extend insulation down to the design frost line. a. Where indicated on the Drawings, extend beyond the design frost line. 3. Where footings are located at the design frost line, extend insulation down to top of footing or as indicated on Drawings. 4. Protect insulation from damage and/or displacement during backfilling and/or pouring of floor slab.
46 47 48 49 50 51
E. Foamed Plastic Insulation: 1. Install in all exterior wall concrete masonry block cores and where noted, in selected interior wall concrete masonry block cores. a. Not required in veneer cores. b. Do not install in bond beams. c. Do not install in cores to receive vertical reinforcing. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 7
2. 3. 3.2
d. Do not install in cores noted to be grouted solid. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that foam completely fills all cores to be insulated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair or replace damaged insulation and/or vapor retarder as directed by Engineer.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4
SECTION 07 26 00 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Under slab vapor retarder.
7 8 9
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
10
1.2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 302.2R, Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. b. D1709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the FreeFalling Dart Method. c. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. d. E1643, Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. e. E1745, Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Product data sheet on vapor retarder sheet and vapor retarder tape. c. All accessories proposed for use. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
32 33 34 35
B. Samples: 1. Provide two (2) 6 IN x 6 IN samples of vapor retarder material taped together using the vapor retarder tape proposed. 2. Provide two (2) samples of all accessories proposed for use.
36
C. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendation on vapor retarder tape.
37
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
2.1
39 40 41 42 43 44 45
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vapor retarder: a. Fortifiber Corporation. b. Layfield Group c. Raven Industries. d. Reef Industries.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07 26 00 - 1
1 2
e. f.
3 4
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Stego Industries. WR Meadows, Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Retarder: 1. ASTM E1745, Class A. 2. Thickness: Minimum 15 mil. 3. Water vapor permeance: 0.03 maximum per ASTM E96. 4. Puncture resistance: ASTM D1709, Method B, 2200 grams. 5. Minimum tensile strength: 45 LBS/IN, ASTM D882.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
12 13
A. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's standard boot fabricated to maintain the integrity of the vapor retarder system.
14
B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturers.
15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
16
3.1
INSTALLATION
17
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASTM E1643 and ACI 302.2R.
18 19 20
B. Provide vapor retarder where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Place continuous vapor retarder above granular fill subgrade material, unless noted otherwise.
21 22
C. Lap minimum 6 IN and seal in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's recommendations.
23
D. Extend to extremities of area and seal to adjacent elements.
24
E. Seal all penetrations: Provide pipe boot for all pipes or conduit penetrating the floor slab.
25
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
26 27
A. Ensure proper precautions are implemented to prevent damage to installed vapor retarder membrane prior to and during pouring of concrete floor slab.
28 29 30 31 32
B. Inspect vapor retarder immediately prior to placement of concrete. 1. Patch all punctures, tears, holes, etc. a. Repair with additional layer of vapor retarder and seal entire patch with vapor retarder tape or as recommended by manufacturer. b. Lap all repairs minimum 6 IN.
34
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 07 26 00 - 2
SECTION 07 42 13 PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed metal wall panels.
7 8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. b. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. c. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. d. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory. b. Fire Resistance Directory. 4. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
31 32 33 34 35 36
B. Qualifications: 1. Installer shall be licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Installer shall have minimum of 10 years experience in the installation of metal wall panel systems similar to system specified. 3. Installer shall have successfully completed two (2) projects of similar size, scope and complexity within past three (3) years.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
C. Mock-ups: 1. Prior to start of permanent wall construction, construct mock-ups of wall system. a. Mock-ups shall be minimum of 5 FT x 5 FT. 2. Mock-ups to include all types of wall panel profiles, insulation, liner panel, vapor retarder, trim, sealant, closures, angles, brackets, etc., as needed for a complete water and air tight installation. 3. Step-construction to allow observation of all components. 4. Panels shall be same panels as specified or approved for Project. a. Exact color is not necessary; however, Contractor is to label each exposed component to identify final installed color of component. 5. Construct additional mock-ups or rework existing mock-ups until acceptable to Engineer. 6. Maintain mock-ups at Project Site until Engineer approves removal of mock-ups. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13 - 1
1 2 3
7. 1.3
4 5 6 7 8
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
9 10
Approved mock-ups to constitute minimum acceptable standard of quality for actual construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal wall panel system consisting of flatinterior liner panel.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: Drawings, prepared by manufacturer, showing anchorage, flashing, jointing and any special detailing different from or not indicated on the Drawings. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's complete installation and erection instructions and details showing all accessories required.
21 22 23
B. Samples: 1. For initial color selection, provide 2 x 3 IN panel samples for each color offered by manufacturer for Engineer's color selection.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C. Informational Submittals: 1. Installer qualifications and listing of projects completed in past three (3) years. 2. Letter of acceptance of Installer from manufacturer. 3. Instructions on proper cleaning methods and materials for Owner reference. 4. Warranty. 5. Product data on insulation for field-insulated panels. 6. Test data: a. Certification that all tests identified under Article 2.4 have been performed on panel being provided and that panel has passed minimum requirements of those tests.
33
1.6
34 35
WARRANTY A. Provide listed manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty on panel finish against fading, chipping, cracking and peeling.
36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
2.1
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Assembled exposed fastener metal wall panels: a. CENTRIA. b. Merchant and Evans. c. Reynolds Metals Company. d. ASC Pacific. e. MBCI. 2. PVDF coating: a. PPG - DURANAR. b. Valspar - Fluropon.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13 - 2
1 2
c. d.
3 4
Atofina Chemicals - KYNAR 500. Solvay Solexis - HYLAR 5000.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
5 6 7
A. Wall Panels: 1. General: a. Galvanized Steel, ASTM A653, G60G90
8
B. Perimeter Trim Pieces and Flashing: Same material as wall panels.
9
C. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel.
10 11 12 13
D. Intermediate support items: 1. Steel, galvanized per ASTM A653 with G90 (1.25 OZ) coating. 2. Minimum 18 GA. 3. Panel manufacturer shall design subgirt for loading conditions specified.
14
E. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard.
15
2.3
FABRICATION
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A. General: 1. Fabricate to shapes indicated on Drawings. a. Provide custom fabricated trim pieces as required. 2. Completely fabricate in shop and label all items for field assembly or, if approved in writing by Engineer, fabricate on-site using same equipment used in the fabrication shop. 3. System shall be designed for wind loading in accordance with ASCE 7 and the Building Code. 4. Length of exterior panels shall be sufficient to cover minimum 40 FT without horizontal joints. 5. Length of interior liner panel shall be sufficient to cover minimum 20 FT without horizontal joints. 6. Fasteners: Painted to match wall panel.
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
B. Panels: 1. Interior liner panels (Exposed fasteners): a. Gage: Minimum 22 GA. b. Profile: Centria "ECONOLAP 3/4 IN." c. Width: 35 IN nominal. d. Finish: Factory applied 0.8 mil epoxy primer on both side of panel with 0.8 epoxy topcoat on exposed surface. 1) Color: Centria #179 "Regal White." 2) Smooth finish. e. Maximum deflection: L/180.
38
2.4
39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: 1. Fire tests: a. Panels shall be qualified by laboratory scale and/or full scale fire tests for acceptance by Building Code and insurance authorities for use when non-load-bearing noncombustible wall construction is permitted, based on fire performance. b. Evidence of fire performance shall be submitted and include the following: 1) UL classification for "Surface Burning Characteristics" per ASTM E84.
2.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Provide Owner with following extra materials:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13 - 3
1
a.
Eight (8) ounces of touch-up paint for each color and each different finish specified.
2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3
3.1
4 5 6
EXAMINATION A. Examine alignment of structural steel and/or panel support system prior to installation and do not proceed until all defects are corrected.
3.2
ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
7 8
A. Provide all closures, trim, angles, plates, sealant, gaskets, fasteners, washers, etc., as required for complete water and air infiltration.
9
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10 11
C. Remove all strippable coating and provide a dry wipe-down cleaning of the panels as they are erected.
12
D. Provide prefinished fasteners to match finish of panels where fasteners must be exposed.
13
E. Touch up all damaged surfaces with paint supplied by panel manufacturer.
14 15
F. Seal all joints using sealant recommended by panel manufacturer for water- and air-tight installation.
16 17
G. Wall panel manufacturers shall be responsible for designing and installing necessary expansion joints in wall panel system.
19
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS 07 42 13 - 4
SECTION 07 52 16 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. SBS modified bitumen roofing systems including roof insulation.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Support Systems. 6. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical: Basic Requirements. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C642, Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete. b. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. c. D41, Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. d. D312, Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. e. D395, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property - Compression Set. f. D573, Standard Test Method for Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven. g. D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. h. D6163, Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. i. D6164, Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcement. j. D6294, Standard Test Method for Corrosion Resistance of Ferrous Metal Fastener Assemblies Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 3. FM Global (FM): a. Approval Guide. b. 4470, Approval Standard for Single-Ply, Polymer-Modified Bitumen Sheet, Built-Up Roof (BUR) and Liquid Applied Roof Assemblies for use in Class 1 and Noncombustible Roof Deck Construction. 4. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): a. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 580, Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 6. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
47 48
B. Qualifications: 1. Applicator licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
2.
1.3
6 7 8 9 10
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
11 12 13
Contractor and applicator shall have a minimum of 10 years experience installing roof membrane systems similar to system specified. a. Minimum of five (5) years of the 10 years experience shall have been spent installing roof systems manufactured by company proposed for use.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System consists of fire-rated ceramic granule coated cap sheet over intermediate ply over base sheet over insulation over vapor retarder over decking.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Scaled outline of roof showing slopes, edge details, penetrations and details, and any special condition not covered on the Drawings. 1) Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. 2) Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
25 26 27 28
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Certifications prior to installation: a. Certification of Contractor and Applicator's qualifications. b. Documentation from roofing manufacturer and insulation manufacturer stating that roof insulation being used is compatible with roofing system and will perform properly for intended use. c. Documentation from roofing manufacturer and insulation manufacturer stating that treated wood specified is compatible with roofing system and is acceptable for intended use. 3. Certifications for final closeout: a. Certification by manufacturer's representative that roof has been installed properly. b. Warranty.
43
1.6
44 45 46 47 48
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roof insulation off ground under cover in accordance with insulation manufacturer's recommendations to prevent physical and moisture damage.
1.7
WARRANTY A. Furnish manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty on roofing system. 1. Warranty to include provision for Owner's personnel to make emergency repairs.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 2
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Roofing materials: a. CertainTeed. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF Corp. d. Johns Manville. 2. Non-composite insulation: a. Apache Foam Products Co. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX. 3. Composite insulation: a. Apache Foam Products Co. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX. 4. Tapered insulation: a. Apache. b. Firestone Building Products. c. GAF. d. Grefco. e. Hunter. f. Johns Manville. g. RMAX. 5. Piping and ducting penetration curbs: a. Pate. b. ThyCurb.
37
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
38
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
39 40 41
A. Roof Assembly Design Criteria: 1. Hail and wind uplift resistance: a. UL 580, Class 90.
42 43 44
B. Roofing System: 1. Multiple ply SBS modified bitumen membrane in solid mopping of asphalt over insulation over vapor barrier.
45 46 47 48 49 50 51
2.3
SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Roofing Membranes - SBS Modified Bitumen: 1. Base ply: a. ASTM D6163, Type 1, Grade S. b. Thickness: Minimum 80 MIL. c. Weight: Minimum 45 LBS/SQ. d. Firestone "SBS" Base.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2.
3.
Intermediate ply: a. ASTM D6164, Type I, Grade G. b. Thickness: Minimum 85 mils. c. Weight: Minimum 54 LBS/SQ. d. Firestone "SBS Smooth." Cap ply: a. ASTM D6164, Type II, Grade G. b. Factory applied white ceramic granules. c. Fire rated. d. Weight: Minimum 90 LBS/SQ. e. Thickness: Minimum 130 MIL.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B. Vapor Retarder: 1. Non-fire rated: a. Class A rated. b. Water vapor permeance: 0.03 maximum. c. Tensile strength: 45.0 LBF/IN. d. Puncture resistance: Minimum 2200 grams. e. Griffolyn Type 105. f. Compatible with roofing system and acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C. Composite Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Board formed of polyisocyanurate foam with high density wood fiberboard on one (1) side and asphalt saturated felt or fiberglass mat on opposite side. a. Facer materials shall be acceptable to roofing manufacturer. b. Density: Nominal 2 PCF. c. Flamespread (foam core): Less than 50. d. Compressive strength: Minimum 20 PSI. 3. Thickness as required to achieve R-value indicated on Drawings. 4. 4 FT x 4 FT or 4 FT x 8 FT boards as recommended by roofing manufacturer. 5. Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
D. Non-Composite Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam core with fiberglass mat facers on one (1) or both faces as required by roofing manufacturer and installation conditions. a. Facer material shall be acceptable to roofing manufacturer. b. Density: 2 PCF. c. Compressive strength: Minimum 20 PSI. d. Flame spread (foam core): Less than 50.
39 40 41 42 43 44
E. Tapered Insulation: 1. ASTM C1289. 2. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam core with glass reinforced facers. a. Same physical and fire properties as composite insulation. 3. Minimum 1/4 IN per foot slope. 4. Acceptable to roofing manufacturer.
45 46
F. Roof Crickets: Tapered insulation per this Specification sloped to provide a minimum 1/4 IN per foot slope.
47
G. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
48 49 50 51 52
H. Bitumen: 1. Unless otherwise required by roofing manufacturer provide the following: a. ASTM D312. b. Type III for installation of insulation, and flashings on vertical surfaces. c. Type III or IV for installation of base and cap sheet. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 4
1
d.
Approved by the roofing manufacturer.
2 3
I.
Flashing: Ceramic granule coated SBS modified asphalt membrane as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
4 5 6 7 8
J.
Flashing Fasteners: 1. Ferrous components: a. Test in accordance with ASTM D6294 b. Meet or exceed FM 4470. 2. Provide stainless steel for all exposed fasteners.
9 10
K. Walking Surface: Additional layer of SBS cap sheet of a contrasting color adhered to roof membrane or other walkway material approved by roofing manufacturer.
11
L. Wood Blocking and Nailers: See Specification Section 06 10 00.
12
2.4
ACCESSORIES
13 14
A. Pipe Penetrations (for Pipes 6 IN DIA or Smaller): 1. Provide pitch pockets constructed in accordance with NRCA accepted standards.
15 16 17 18 19
B. Duct and Pipe Penetrations (for Pipe Penetrations Larger than 6 IN DIA): 1. Provide ThyCurb Model TC-1 insulated pre-fabricated roof curb. 2. Provide all sheet metal flashing and counterflashing as required for weather-tight installation. a. See Specification Section 07 62 00 for sheet metal flashing.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
C. Pipe, Duct and Conduit Supports: 1. 100 PCT recycled rubber. a. Density: ASTM C642, minimum 0.50 OZ/cubic IN. b. Compressive deformation: 1) ASTM D395. 2) 5 PCT at 70 PSI and 72 DEGF. c. Brittleness at low temperature: ASTM D746, -50 DEGF. d. Weathering: ASTM D573, 70 HRS at 120 DEGF. 2. Uniform load capacity: 500 LB per lineal FT. 3. Size: a. Width: 6 IN. b. Length and height as necessary for item being supported. 4. Compatible with modular framing. 5. Provide modular framing, pipe supports, pipe clamps or other accessories as necessary for items being supported. a. See Specification Section 40 05 07 and Specification Section 26 05 00 as applicable. 6. Similar to Cooper B-Line "DURA-BLOK."
37
2.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
38 39
A. Provide Owner with patch repair kit containing materials as required for emergency repairs as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
40
B. Instruct Owner's personnel on making emergency repairs to roof.
41 42
C. Owner to notify manufacturer within three (3) working days if emergency repairs are made by Owner's personnel.
43
PART 3 - EXECUTION
44
3.1
45 46
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Prior to beginning installation of roof system, verify that all through deck penetrations have been completed.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 5
1 2
B. Install all components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, recommendations of the NRCA and ARMA.
3 4 5 6 7
C. Installation of Vapor Retarder: 1. Prime deck in accordance with recommendations of roofing materials manufacturer. a. Lap edges 6 IN, ends 6 IN. b. Seal all laps. c. Extend to outside edge of roof surface and turn up parapet wall to top of insulation.
8
D. Install all nailers required but not indicated on Drawings.
9 10 11 12
E. Provide roofing manufacturer’s recommended sleeper at all duct support structures, condensing units or similar equipment. 1. Fasten sleeper to deck as necessary to resist uplift. 2. Flash sleeper to roof membrane as recommended by roofing manufacturer.
13 14 15 16 17 18
F. Install insulation using solid moppings of asphalt. 1. Prime surface of vapor retarder as required by manufacturer. 2. Cut insulation neatly to fit around all roof penetrations and projections. a. Butt joints tightly. b. When installing multiple layers of insulation, stagger all joints between layers. 3. Provide tapered insulation as shown on the Drawings.
19
G. Provide cricket behind all roof penetrations (including existing) larger than 12 IN.
20
H. Install flashing at all vertical surfaces, roof interruption and penetrations.
21
I.
Install walking surface where indicated.
22
J.
Coordinate roofing work with work under Specification Section 07 62 00.
23 24 25 27
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with roofing membrane and completed before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM 07 52 16 - 6
SECTION 07 61 13 METAL ROOFING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Section Includes: 1. Vapor retarder. 2. Thermal barrier sheathing. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Standing seam metal roofing. 5. Prefinished gutters and downspouts. 6. Standing seam fascia system. 7. Soffit panels. 8. Sheet metal work required for roofing. 9. Insulated curbs for roof penetrations of ductwork, flues etc.
15 16 17 18
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 621, Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. b. A792, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. c. C209, Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. d. C1289, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. e. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. f. D1970, Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. g. D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products. h. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. i. E1592, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. j. E1646, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. k. E1680, Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. l. E1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soul or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. m. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): a. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition, 2003. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5.
a. Building Materials Directory. b. Fire Resistance Directory. c. 580, Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. d. 790, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. e. 1256, Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2012Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have minimum of 10 years experience in the production of structural standing seam metal roofing. a. All structural components of the roof system shall be designed and sealed by registered professional structural engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina. 2. Installing contractor shall be licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. 3. Contractor and installer shall have minimum of seven (7) years experience in the installation of structural standing seam metal roof systems similar to system specified. 4. Contractor and installer shall have successfully completed two (2) projects of similar size, scope and complexity within past two (2) years.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
C. Mock-Ups: 1. Prior to start of permanent roof construction construct mock-ups of roofing system. a. Mock-ups shall be of sufficient size to properly display all components required by the roofing system. b. Mock-ups shall be a minimum 5 FT x 5 FT in size. c. Provide multiple mock-ups as required. 2. Mock-ups shall incorporate all components, specified and/or required but not specified, needed for a complete water and airtight roofing fascia, and soffit system. a. Components include, but are not limited to: 1) Vapor retarder, thermal barrier sheathing, roof insulation,. 2) Roofing panels, including mounting system and seaming. 3) All fascia and soffit conditions. 4) All flashing and counterflashing conditions, including: a) Eave, rake, hip and ridge conditions. b) Roof/vertical wall intersections. c) Roof penetrations. d) All reglet conditions. 5) All miscellaneous clips, angles, plates, brackets, closures and sealants. 6) Gutter and downspouts. 7) Snow retention system. 3. Panels shall be same panels as specified or approved for Project. a. Exact color is not necessary; however, Contractor is to label each exposed component to identify final installed color of component. 4. Step construction to allow observation of all components. 5. Construct additional mock-ups or rework existing mock-ups until acceptable to Engineer. 6. Maintain mock-ups at project site until Engineer approves removal of mock-ups. 7. Approved mock-ups to constitute minimum acceptable standard of quality for actual construction.
48 49
D. Completed roof system to be inspected by roof manufacturer's authorized factory trained representative prior to issuance of roof warranty.
50 51 52 53
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 2
1
2.
Installer and applicator are synonymous.
2
B. Steep Slope: Having a pitch of 3:12 or greater.
3
C. Low Slope: Having a pitch less than 3:12 but greater than 1/4:12.
4
D. PVDF: Polyvinylidene fluoride.
5
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A. Prefinished, field-insulated, structural standing seam metal roof system, including but not limited to: 1. Thermal barrier sheathing. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Structural standing seam metal roof panels. a. Roof panel support and attachment system to be determined by standing seam roof manufacturer.
14 15 16 17 18 19
B. All flashing and miscellaneous trim required for a complete water and airtight system, including but not limited to: 1. Reglets. 2. Flashing. 3. Counterflashing. 4. Sealants.
20
C. Flat metal fascia system.
21
D. Prefinished gutters and downspouts.
22
E. Prefinished aluminum soffit panels.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Manufacturer prepared computer generated Drawings showing anchorage, flashing, jointing and all other accessories required and all special detailing required by the system. 1) Minimum plan scale: 1 IN = 8 FT. 2) Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT. b. Provide complete erection plan for each building structure with all details and sections referenced, all penetrations shown, expansion joints shown, detailed and referenced, and all special conditions identified, referenced and detailed. c. Erection plan to identify limits of each different substrate material (decking). d. Provide distinction between factory and field assembled work. 3. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer data sheets on each component, including masonry reglets used in the roof system. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 1) Certification by manufacturer that roofing assembly being supplied has been successfully tested under UL 580 procedures and has achieved a Class 90 rating. 4. Test results: a. UL 580, Class 90 test data. b. ASTM E1592 test results. 1) Provide results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E1592 for panel size and gage and clip type and spacing similar to panels and clips being used. c. ASTM E1646 and ASTM E1680 test results. d. Concentrated load test data.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5.
6. 7. 8.
1) Load test to be conducted on panel size, gage and with clip spacing as required. Qualifications: a. Manufacturer: Provide structural engineer qualifications. b. Contractor: 1) Certification of approval or license to install product from manufacturer. 2) Certification of experience. 3) Listing of projects completed in the past two (2) years with similar scope. 4) Completed projects information to include, square footage of roofing installed, dollar value of roofing installed, manufacturer and type of roofing installed and contact name and telephone number of building Owner. c. Installer: Provide qualifications of all personnel expected to be working on the Project. Roofing manufacturer's letter of approval for insulation proposed for use. Warranty: Sample language of manufacturer's warranty to be provided on this Project. Structural Engineer's sealed and signed calculations certifying that system structural components meet the requirements for lateral, upward and downward loads specified.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
B. Samples: 1. General: Tag, identify and provide statement regarding use for all fasteners, anchor clips, closures and sealants. 2. Roof panel: a. Two (2) samples, full width, 24 IN long. b. Provide color selected or specified when possible. 3. Fasteners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. Closures, (both metal and non-metallic). 6. Factory and field applied sealants. 7. Color samples: a. For initial preliminary color selection, provide manufacturer's color chart showing all colors available. b. For final color selection, provide two (2) 2 IN x 3 IN colored metal samples, for each color selected during the initial color selection. 8. Snow retention system completely assembled on minimum of two (2) roof panels.
32 33 34 35
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 0001 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
36 37 38 39
D. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Final warranty.
40
1.6
WARRANTY
41 42 43
A. Provide 20 year complete system warranty, including material substrate for air and weather tightness of entire roof assembly signed by manufacturer. 1. Warranty limits shall meet the minimum load capacity requirements of ASTM E1592.
44 45
B. Provide manufacturer's 20 year warranty on panel finish against fading, chipping, cracking and peeling of the panel exterior finish .
46
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
47
2.1
48
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Metal roofing products specified are manufactured by Centria.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 4
1 2 3
B. Manufacturers listed and other manufacturers not listed, but capable of meeting this Specification Section, are expected to provide a system with similar profile, standing seam height, spacing, construction and factory applied finish.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal roofing : a. Centria. b. Merchant and Evans - Zip Rib. c. IMETCO. d. Other manufacturers capable of providing structural standing seam system and profiles similar to that specified will be considered. 2. Vapor retarder: a. Griffolyn. 3. Thermal barrier sheathing: See Specification Section 06 10 00. 4. Insulation: Any manufacturer meeting these specifications and approved by metal roofing manufacturer. 5. PVDF resin: a. PPG - DURANAR. b. Valspar - Fluropon. c. Arkema Inc. - KYNAR 500. d. Solvay Solexis - HYLAR 5000. e. Solvay Solexis - HYLAR 5000. 6. Soffit panels: Provided by metal roofing panel manufacturer.
24
D. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
25
2.2
MATERIALS
26 27 28 29 30
A. Roof Panels: 1. General: a. Galvalume steel, ASTM A792, Class SS, Grade 50B. 1) Painted surfaces: AZ50. 2) Unpainted surfaces: AZ55.
31
B. Fascia Metal: 22 GA to match gutter material, finish and color.
32
C. Soffit Panels: Aluminum, ASTM B209.
33 34 35
D. Insulation: 1. Rigid polyisocyanurate. a. Approved by roofing manufacturer.
36 37
E. Perimeter Trim, Panel Closures, Flashing and Counterflashing: Material and factory applied finish to match roof panels.
38
F. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel, ASTM F593.
39 40
G. Intermediate Support System: 1. Galvanized steel: ASTM A653, Class SS, Grade 50, G90.
41
H. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl.
42
I.
43 44 45 46 47 48
2.3
Thermal Barrier Sheathing: See Specification Section 06 10 00.
ACCESSORIES A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. General: a. Galvalume steel, ASTM A792, Class CS. 1) Painted surfaces: AZ50. 2) Unpainted surfaces: AZ55.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2.
3.
3) Minimum thickness: 22 GA. 4) All exposed surfaces to have finish and color to match roofing metal. Gutters: a. "Style D" gutter per SMACNA Figure 1-2. 1) Seamless except for expansion joints. b. Gutter straps and eave closure flashing: Match gutter material, finish and color. Downspouts: a. SMACNA Figure 1-32B. 1) Seam on concealed side of downspout. 2) Provide gutter to downspout connection per SMACNA Figure 1-33B, Detail 1. b. Hanger straps: Material and finish to match downspouts.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
B. Vapor Retarder: 1. ASTM E1745, Class A rated. 2. Water vapor permeance: ASTM E96, 0.03 maximum. 3. Tensile strength: ASTM D882, 275 FT-LB. 4. Puncture strength: ASTM D4833, 72 FT-LB. 5. Griffolyn Type 105. 6. Vapor retarder tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C. Roof Insulation: 1. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam board. a. ASTM C1289, Class I, Type II. b. Compressive strength: 20 psi minimum. c. Density: 2 pcf minimum. d. Thermal resistance (R-Value): 7.2/IN. e. Water vapor transmission: ASTM E96, less than 1.0 perms. f. Water absorption: ASTM C209, less than 1.0 percent. g. Thickness noted on Drawings. h. Acceptable to roof manufacturer.
29 30 31 32
D. Roof Penetration Flashing: 1. Round penetrations: a. Premolded EPDM boot with metal collar. b. Buildex "DEK-TITE."
33 34 35
E. Foam and metal closures, sealant, gaskets, fasteners, washers, clips, angles, and all miscellaneous trims shall be provided by roofing manufacturer, fabricated for the specific condition as required.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
F. Soffit Panels: 1. Minimum 0.032 IN aluminum, ASTM B209. 2. Factory applied finish to match roof panels. 3. AAMA 2605. 4. Profile: Flat interlocking sheet with reinforcing ribs as required to prevent warping and oil canning. 5. Panel joints shall match standing seam spacing of roof panels when possible. 6. Provide soffit vent panels where indicated on Drawings. a. If not indicated, provide vent panels at maximum 4 FT OC with minimum of three (3) vent panels per side of building. b. Vent panels shall be compatible with and supported by soffit panel systems. c. Vent panels shall have minimum 10 percent free area and shall have the maximum amount of panel face perforations allowed structurally. 1) Perforations to be in the form of holes, minimum 3/32 IN and maximum 1/8 IN DIA, equally spaced on staggered centers from row to row. d. Vent panels shall be same size and profile as solid panels. 1) Factory applied finish to match solid panels. 7. Hat shaped steel channel sub-framing: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 6
1 2
a. b.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 IN deep x 20 GA steel. Galvanized, ASTM A653, G60.
G. Snow Retention System: 1. Mechanical non-penetrating system for sloped metal roof systems to prevent ice and snow from sliding off roof. a. Provide splice fittings for a continuous installation. 2. Snow retention system shall consist of aluminum extrusion secured to the standing seam with non-penetrating stainless steel set screws having rounded points. 3. Aluminum: a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. b. Extrusion to have receptacle in face to provide for insertion of prefinished sheet metal strip to match roofing color. 4. Snow/Ice clips: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Provide with rubber foot on end that sits on the metal roof pan. 5. Metal Roof Innovations, Ltd. S-5! "ColorGard" system. 2.4
FABRICATION
18 19 20 21 22
A. General: 1. Fabricate with square, true corners, mitered and welded. 2. Fabricate trim, flashings and closure pieces to match panel profile and finish. 3. Hem all edges. 4. Fabricate panels in full length with no end laps.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
B. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: 1. Profile: Centria "SRS" System. 2. Height of standing seam: 3 IN. 3. Gage: Minimum 24. 4. Width: a. 16IN. b. Longitudinal stiffening elements to minimize oil canning. 5. System shall be designed as a true structural standing seam shape. 6. Finish: a. PVDF based with minimum 70 percent resin. b. Three-coat system having minimum 0.8 mil epoxy primer coat on both sides of panel with a 0.8 mil PVDF resin color coat and a 0.8 mil PVDF resin clear top coat on the exterior side of the panel. c. Meet or exceed requirements of AAMA 621. d. Smooth finish. e. Color: 1) To be selected from manufacturers full range of primary and secondary colors. a) Does not include exotic, metallic flake or iridescent colors. 7. Concealed fasteners: a. Provide concealed fasteners in all locations. b. If exposed fasteners are required by the roof panel manufacturer, because of location, constructability issues or other critical design requirement, finish of fastener shall match roof panel finish. 1) Exposed fasteners are to be approved by Engineer. c. The use of deflection limiter devices is not allowed.
48 49 50 51 52 53
C. Intermediate Support System: 1. Roof panel anchor clips: a. Manufacturer's standard one-piece clip suitable for condition. 1) Two-piece clips are acceptable if required by roofing manufacturer. b. Minimum 16 GA steel. 1) Galvanized, ASTM A653, G90. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2.
3.
2.5
Roof panel manufacturer shall be responsible for designing and providing all necessary intermediate "Z" or "hat-shaped" or other miscellaneous support members as required to transfer roof panel loads into building roof framing members. a. Design in accordance with Building Code and loads specified. Bearing plates: a. Sized by roofing manufacturer for roof loading indicated. b. Minimum 16 GA steel. 1) Galvanized, ASTM A653, G90.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A. Structural Testing: 1. The system shall be designed to safely resist the positive and negative loads per Building Code and as shown on Drawings. 2. Structural-uniform uplift load capacity of the panel system shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E1592. a. The factor of safety on the test results shall be 1.65 for the panel, batten or clip ultimate loads with no increase for wind. b. The factor of safety for fasteners shall be 3.0 for one (1) single fastener per clip, 2.25 for two (2) fasteners per clip and 4.0 in masonry. c. Design uplift capacity for conditions of gage, span or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of test results. 1) Extrapolation of conditions outside the range of the tests is not acceptable. d. Deflection shall be L/180 for positive loading.
23 24
B. Water Penetration: No uncontrollable leakage at minimum 6.4 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E1646.
25 26
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.00 scfm/SF when tested at 4.0 psf differential pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680.
27 28 29
D. Fire Resistance/Wind Uplift Rating: 1. UL 790, Class 1. 2. UL 580, Class 90.
30 31 32
E. The panels shall withstand a 250 LB concentrated load applied to a 4 SQ IN area at the center of the panel at mid span between supports with no panel deformation, rib buckling, or panel sidelap separation which will adversely affect the weather tightness of the system.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
F. Support roofing panels on top of roof insulation using bearing plates attached to the structural frame or connect to manufacturer-provided intermediate support system. 1. Bearing plate and standing seam roof panel anchor clip attachment is to be determined by the roofing manufacturer and shall take precedent over this Specification. a. Provide attachment to roof structural frame or deck as required for loading criteria specified. 2. Roof panel anchor clips shall be designed to allow thermal movement of the panels except where specific fixed points are indicated. a. Roof panel manufacturer shall be responsible for determining fixed point locations unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wood blocking shown at roof edge is strictly for attachment of miscellaneous flashings and shall not be used for any structural value. 4. Maximum spacing of roof clips shall be determined by manufacturer.
46 47 48 49
G. Roof panel manufacturer shall be responsible for designing and installing all necessary expansion joints in the roof system. 1. Where roof expansion joints occur, provide corresponding expansion joints in fascia, soffit and gutters.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 8
1
2.6
2
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide Owner with 4 OZ of touch-up paint to match each different color used in the system.
3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
4
3.1
INSTALLATION
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA (where referenced) and details shown on Drawings for a complete weathertight installation without waves, warps buckles or distortions. a. Provide all closures, trim, angles, plates, sealant, gaskets, fasteners, washers, etc., as necessary. 2. Attachments shall allow for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Seal all joints as required for watertight installation. 4. Touch-up paint all damaged surfaces.
14 15 16 17 18
B. Vapor Retarder: 1. Install on winter warm side of roof assembly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Lap joints minimum: 4 IN. 3. Seal to perimeter, tape all joints and repair all tears.
19 20 21
C. Thermal Barrier Sheathing: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and UL listed assembly as required to provide fire-resistance rating for roof assembly.
22 23 24 25
D. Roof Insulation: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. If multiple layers are provided to achieve total thickness as shown on Drawings, stagger joints minimum 12 IN in each direction.
26 27 28 29 30
E. Standing Seam Roofing Panels: 1. Install in one (1) continuous length from ridge to eave. 2. Hand crimp battens at each clip. 3. Seam panels and battens together with portable electric seaming machine supplied by the manufacturer.
31 32 33 34
F. Soffit Panels: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using concealed fasteners when possible. 2. Exposed fasteners to be painted to match soffit finish.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
G. Gutters: 1. Install gutters using gutter straps in accordance with SMACNA Table 1-8 and Figure 1-12 and per roofing manufacturer's recommendations. a. Provide gutter brackets or hangers at 24 IN OC maximum. b. Provide expansion joints in gutters per SMACNA and at expansion joint locations shown on Drawings. c. Install gutters to provide positive drainage to downspout locations. d. Seal all joints in gutters to provide completely water tight system.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
H. Downspouts: 1. Install downspouts in locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide downspout hanger straps per SMACNA Figure 1-35 as appropriate for downspout style. 3. Provide gutter to downspout connection per SMACNA Figure 1-33B, Detail 1. 4. Seal all joints in downspout for a complete watertight system. a. Angle bottom of downspout out away from building. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
5. 6. 7.
Fasten hanger straps to building wall with stainless steel screws and anchor sleeves appropriate for wall construction. a. Provide minimum of two (2) fasteners per strap. Maximum spacing of hanger straps shall be 10 FT with minimum of two (2) hanger straps per vertical piece of downspout. Spacing and location of hanger straps shall be consistent from downspout to downspout.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ROOFING 07 61 13 - 10
SECTION 07 62 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural flashing and sheet metal work. 2. Factory formed fasciasystem(s). 3. Prefinished scuppers, conductor heads and downspouts.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 04 05 23 - Masonry Accessories. 1) Specifier: Include applicable roofing Specification Section(s). 2) Section 07 52 16 - SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing System. 3) Section 07 61 13 - Metal Roofing. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 08 62 00 - Skylight. 6. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 2605, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 2. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Industry (ANSI/SPRI): a. ES-1, Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roof Systems. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. b. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. d. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. FM Global (FM). 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): a. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Seventh Edition, 2012.
36 37 38 39 40
B. Qualifications: 1. Sheet metal fabricator shall have minimum 10 years experience in fabrication of sheet metal items similar to items specified. 2. Sheet metal installer shall have minimum five (5) years experience installing sheet metal items specified.
41
1.3
DEFINITIONS
42 43 44 45
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
46
B. PVDF: Polyvinylidene fluoride.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00 - 1
1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Scaled drawing showing expansion joint locations, special conditions, profile, fastening and jointing details. 1) Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. 2) Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT. 4. Fabricator qualifications. 5. Installer qualifications.
15 16 17 18 19
B. Samples: 1. Finish and color samples for each product specified for Engineer preliminary color selection. 2. For final color selection, provide two (2) 2 IN x 3 IN colored metal samples for each color selected during the preliminary color selection.
20 21 22 23
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Warranty: Manufacturer's sample warranty language.
24
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
25
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pre-finished sheet metal: a. Carlisle. b. Firestone Building Products. c. Petersen Aluminum Corp. 2. Factory-formed fascia system. a. W.P. Hickman Co. b. Metal Era, Inc. 3. Butyl sealant: a. Pecora. b. Sika. c. Tremco.
39
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
40
2.2
MATERIALS
41 42 43 44 45
A. Sheet Metal: 1. Aluminum: ASTM B209. 2. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653. 3. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666. a. Type 304.
46
B. Fasteners: Non-ferrous compatible with sheet metal.
47 48 49
C. Sealants: 1. Non-curing Butyl Sealant: a. Pecora “BA-98”. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00 - 2
1 2 3 4
2.
b. Sika “SikaLastomer 511”. c. Tremco “TremPro JS-773”. Building sealants: a. See Specification Section 07 92 00.
5
D. Fasteners: Non-ferrous compatible with sheet metal.
6
E. Retainer Clips and Continuous Cleats: Galvanized steel or stainless steel.
7
F. Solder: ASTM B32.
8
G. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Comply with Specification Section 09 96 00.
9
H. Reglets: See Specification Section 04 05 23.
10
2.3
MANUFACTURED ITEMS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Factory Formed Fascia Systems: 1. Formed fascia cover snap locked to extruded aluminum anchor bar. 2. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 tested. 3. FM Approved. 4. Fascia cover: a. Aluminum. 1) Thickness: 0.050 IN. 5. Factory fabricated accessories, including but not limited to: a. Corners, end caps, end terminations. b. Scuppers and spill-outs. c. All accessories to be factory mitered and welded. 6. Profile: a. Metal-Era "Anchor-Tite Standard Fascia". b. Height: 11.25IN.
25 26 27 28
B. Finish: 1. PVDF coating with minimum 70 percent resin content. a. Meet requirements of AAMA 2605. 1) Color: clear Anodized.
29
2.4
FABRICATED ITEMS
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A. General: 1. Shop fabricate items to maximum extent possible. a. Fabricate true and sharp to profiles and sizes indicated on Drawings. 1) Shop fabricate and weld or solder all corners. 2. Pre-finished aluminum: a. Thickness: Minimum 0.050 IN. b. Texture: Smooth . c. Coated on exposed face with PVDF coating having a minimum 70 percent resin content and a minimum 1.0 mil dry film thickness. 1) Meet requirements of AAMA 2605. 2) Color: Owner to select from manufacturer’s standard colors.
41 42
B. Retainer Clips and Continuous Cleats: 1. 0.050 IN stainless steel.
43 44 45 46
C. Downspouts: 1. Rectangular open-face style similar to SMACNA Figure 1-32E . a. Horizontal cross brace at 5 FT maximum spacing. 2. Fabricated in longest practical lengths.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00 - 3
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
3 4
PREPARATION A. Provide items to be built into other construction to Contractor in time to allow their installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
5 6
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA, and as indicated on Drawings.
7 8 9
B. Weld aluminum to achieve weathertight joints and required details. 1. Do not weld slip joints. 2. Touch-up damaged prefinished items.
10 11 12 13 14
C. Set top edges of membrane flashing and sheet metal flashing into reglets wherever practicable. 1. Surface applied terminations will be allowed only where specifically detailed or otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. 2. Provide counterflashing at all reglets. 3. Seal reglets and counterflashings in accordance with Specification Section 07 92 00.
15
D. Fasten materials at intervals recommended by SMACNA.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
E. Install slip joints to allow for thermal movement as recommended by SMACNA and manufacturer. 1. Maximum spacing: 10 FT OC. 2. Provide slip joint 24 IN from corners. 3. Provide slip joint at each vertical expansion joint location in wall. a. Provide break in continuous cleat at each vertical expansion joint. b. The above expansion joints do not include brick veneer expansion joints.
23
F. Seal slip joints with two (2) beads of non-curing butyl sealant on each side of slip joint overlap.
24 25
G. Form flashings to provide spring action with exposed edges hemmed or folded to create tight junctures.
26 27
H. Provide dissimilar metals and materials protection where dissimilar metals come in contact or where sheet metal contacts mortar, concrete masonry or concrete.
28 29 30 31
I.
Provide all miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically covered elsewhere, as indicated or required to provide a weathertight installation. 1. Provide all components necessary to create weather-tight junctures between roofing and sheet metal work.
32 33 34
J.
Provide sheet metal liner at exposed-to-view openings through roof deck, including but not limited to: 1. Skylights: See Specification Section 08 62 00.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
K. Installation of Gutters: 1. Install gutters using gutter straps in accordance with SMACNA Table 1-8 (built-in gutters) and Figure 1-12 through 1-20 (hanging gutters). a. Provide gutter brackets or hangers at 24 IN OC maximum. b. Provide expansion joints in gutters per SMACNA Figure 1-5. c. Install gutters to provide positive drainage to downspout locations. d. Seal all joints in gutters to provide completely water tight system. e. Provide 1/4 IN x 1/4 IN aluminum mesh debris screen continuous on top of gutter. 1) Screen shall be mounted in aluminum frame which will allow replacement of screen without damage to gutter, screen or screen frame.
45 46 47 48
L. Installation of Downspouts: 1. Install downspouts in locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide downspout anchor straps per SMACNA Figure 1-35 as appropriate for downspout style. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Provide gutter to downspout connection per SMACNA Figure 1-33B, Detail 1. Seal all joints in downspout for a complete watertight system. Angle bottom of downspout out away from building to direct discharge onto concrete splashblock. Anchor hanger straps to building wall with stainless steel screws and anchor sleeves appropriate for wall construction. a. Provide minimum of two (2) anchors per strap. Maximum spacing of hanger straps shall be 10 FT with minimum of two (2) hanger straps per vertical piece of downspout. Spacing and location of hanger straps shall be consistent from downspout to downspout.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9
A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping of joints, through-wall penetrations, and membrane penetrations of fireresistance rated construction. 2. Selection of firestopping assemblies. 3. Engineering Judgments.
10 11 12
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
13 14 15
C.
16
1.2
Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against th spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. b. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. c. E814, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. d. E1966, Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems. e. E2174, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops. f. E2393, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers. g. E2837, Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity Head-of-Wall Joint Systems Installed Between Rated Wall. 2. International Firestop Council (IFC). a. Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems in Engineering Judgments (EJs), referred to herein as IFC Recommended Guidelines. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. 101, Life Sfaety Code. b. 220, Standard on Types of Building Construction. c. 221, Standard for High Challenge Fire Walls, Fire Walls, and Fire Barriers. d. 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and Materials. e. 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 263, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. b. 723, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. c. 1479, Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. d. 2079, Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. 2) International Fire Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all ammendments, referred to herein as the Fire Code.
49
B. Qualifications: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1. 2. 3.
1.3
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Firestop system installations must meet the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of the construction being penetrated. Proposed firestop systems shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. For those fire stop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgement derived from similar qualified tested system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgement documents shall follow the requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data, including: a. Manufacturer’s listed design number. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer’s specification and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations. d. Data sheet for all products and accessories used. e. Detailed drawings of special conditions: 1) Provide UL listing for each type of firestopping assembly to be used. 2) When UL listing is not available, provide a written Engineering Judgment in accordance with IFC Recommended Guidelines. a) Engineering Judgments shall be sealed by a Fire Protection Engineer licensed in the State of North Carolina.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28 29
A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled original, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable.
30 31
B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job-site.
32 33
C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements, including temperature.
34
D. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
35
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
36 37
A. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings.
38 39
B. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
40 41 42
C. Do not proceed with the installation of firestop materials when the ambient temperature is outside the manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation and curing times as printed on the product label and product data sheet.
43 44
D. During installation provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 2
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Safing insulation: a. Johns Manville. b. Owens-Corning. c. Fibrex. d. Roxul. 2. Expanding silicone elastomer: a. Any manufacturer UL listed for system used. 3. Firestop sealant: a. Dow Corning. b. 3M Company. c. Specified Technologies Inc. d. Hilti. 4. Moldable putty: a. 3M Company. b. Specified Technologies Inc. c. Hilti. d. Rector Seal. 5. Fire barrier pillows: a. 3M Company. b. Specified Technologies Inc. c. Hilti. 6. Collars: a. 3 M Company. b. Specified technologies Inc. c. Hilti. 7. Expanding Foams: a. 3 M Company. b. Hilti.
33
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
34
2.2
MATERIALS
35 36 37 38
A. General: 1. Use only materials that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E814 tested for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire rating involved for each separate item.
39 40
B. Safing Insulation shall be tested to ANSI/UL 263 and listed in UL product category BZJZ, Batts and Blankets.
41 42 43
C. Expanding Silicone Elastomer: UL listed. 1. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials: Product category XHHW. 2. Through Penetration Firestop Systems: Product category XHEZ.
44
D. Firestop Sealant: UL listed one part silicone installed as required by the listed design.
45 46
E. Moldable Putty: UL listed, product catatgory QCSN or CLIV, Wall Opening Protective Materials.
47
F. Firestop collars: UL Listed.
48 49 50
G. Fire Barrier Pillows: 1. UL listed. 2. Removable and reusable. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 3
1
3.
2 3
Pillows have self-locking feature.
H. Backer rod and/or compressible filler: UL listed, product category XHHW, Fill, Void or Cavity Materials.
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
3.1
INSTALLATION
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. General: 1. Selection and installation of firestopping assemblies is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. All firestopping shall be provided in accordance with the Building Code and UL listing requirements as necessary to provide the required fire-resistance rating. 3. When UL listing is not available, install in accordance with approved written Engineering Judgment. 4. All firestopping products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Where firestopping will be exposed to view, provide colors matching adjacent construction or paint, if approved by manufacturer, only after inspection and approval by AHJ. 6. Where firestopping is not exposed to view, provide manufacturer's standard color.
18 19 20 21 22
B. Openings and Penetrations: 1. Provide firestopping assembly tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 for all openings, through-penetrations, and membrane penetrations in fire-rated construction. a. Provide Flame (F), Thermal(T), Smoke (L), and Water (W) rated assemblies as necessary to meet Building Code requirements.
23 24 25 26
C. Building Joint Systems: 1. Provide firestopping assembly tested in accordance with ASTM E1966 and ASTM E1399, or UL 2079 for all joint assemblies in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floors or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
27
D. Refer to Specification Section 01 73 20 for openings and penetrations requiring fire stopping.
28
3.2
IDENTIFICATION AND DOCUMENTATION
29 30
A. Prior to acceptance by the Owner, provide written statement that all fire-rated penetrations have been sealed using products specified in accordance with UL requirements for required rating.
31
B. Provide documents to the Owner of all listed systems installed and all engineering judgements.
32 33 34 36
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Special Inspection of all firestopping in accordance with IBC Chapter 17 and Specification Section 01 45 33.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 4
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air or moisture.
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. b. C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. c. C1521, Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints. 3. NSF International (NSF): a. 61, Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects. 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
24 25
B. Qualifications: Sealant applicator shall have minimum five (5) years experience using products specified on projects with similar scope.
26 27 28 29 30 31
C. Mock-Ups: 1. Before sealant work is started, a mock-up of each type of joint shall be sealed where directed by the Engineer. a. The approved mock-ups shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of sealant materials as specified or selected for the work and shall be the minimum standard of quality on the entire project.
32
1.3
DEFINITIONS
33
A. Defect(ive): Failure of watertightness or airtightness.
34 35
B. Finish sealant: Sealant material per this specification applied over face of compressible sealant or expanding foam sealant specified, to provide a finished, colored sealant joint.
36 37 38 39
C. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
40
D. "Interior wet areas": Toilets, showers, laboratories, wet wells and similar areas.
41
E. "Seal," "sealing" and "sealant": Joint sealant work.
42 43 44 45
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.
3. 4.
Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling and bond breaker. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating product being used is recommended for and is best suited for joint in which it is being applied. Certification of applicator qualification.
9 10 11 12 13
B. Test Results: 1. Provide adhesion test results for each sealant sample including adhesion results compared to adhesion requirements. 2. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative recommended remedial measures for all failing tests.
14 15 16
C. Samples: 1. Cured sample of each color for Engineer's color selection. 2. Color chart not acceptable.
17 18 19
D. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
20
1.5
21 22
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact: Labels shall indicate contents and expiration date on material.
23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24
2.1
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Compressible sealant: a. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. Emseal. c. Norton. d. Sandell. 2. Expanding foam sealant: a. Macklanburg Duncan. b. Convenience Products. c. FAI International, Inc. 3. Fire-resistant sealant: See Specification Section 07 84 00. 4. Polyether sealants: a. BASF. b. ChemLink, Inc. c. Tremco. 5. Polyurea joint filler: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. BASF. 6. Polyurethane sealants: a. Pecora. b. Sika Chemical Corp. c. BASF. d. Tremco.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7.
8.
8 9
Silicone sealants: a. ChemLink. b. GE Construction Sealants. c. Dow Corning. d. Tremco. Backer rod, compressible filler, primer, joint cleaners, bond breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Sealants - General: 1. Provide colors matching materials being sealed. 2. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished work, provide manufacturer's color which has best performance. 3. Nonsagging sealant for vertical and overhead horizontal joints. 4. Sealants for horizontal joints: Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade. 5. Joint cleaner, primer, bond breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 6. Sealant backer rod and/or compressible filler: a. Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, nonabsorbent, non-bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to: 1) Control joint depth. 2) Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint. 3) Provide proper shape of sealant bead. 4) Serve as expansion joint filler.
24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Compressible Sealant: 1. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized polybutylene waterproofing coated on front face with nonreactive release agent that will act as bond breaker for applied sealant. a. Polytite Manufacturing Corp. "Polytite-B." 2. Fire rated where required. 3. Adhesive: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
C. Expanding Foam Sealant: 1. One (1) or two (2) component fire rated moisture cured expanding urethane. 2. Shall not contain formaldehyde. 3. Density: Minimum 1.5 pcf. 4. Closed cell content: Minimum 70 percent. 5. R-value: Minimum 5.0/IN. 6. Flame spread: Less than 25. 7. Smoke developed: Less than 25.
38
D. Fire-Resistant Sealant: See Specification Section 07 84 00.
39 40 41 42 43 44
E. Polyether Sealant: 1. Silyl-terminated polyether polymer. 2. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, A, and O. a. BASF MasterSeal 150. b. ChemLink DuraLink. c. Tremco Dymonic FC
45 46 47 48 49
F. Polysulfide Rubber Sealant: 1. One (1) or two (2) component. 2. Meet ASTM C920. a. Pecora Synthacalk GC2+. b. PolySpec THIOKOL 2235.
50
G. Polyurea Joint Filler: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1.
2. 3.
Two (2) component, semi-rigid material for filling formed or saw-cut control joints in interior concrete slabs. a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp. "Joint Fill, Joint Seal, Joint Saver II" as required for condition and recommended by manufacturer. b. Euclid Chemical Co. "EUCO QWIK" joint. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Joint Tite 750". d. BASF MasterSeal “CR100” control joint filler. Comply with ACI 302.1R performance recommendations regarding control and construction joints. Color: Gray.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
H. Polyurethane Sealant: 1. One (1) or two (2) components. 2. Paintable. 3. Meet ASTM C920 Type S or Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, A and O. a. Pecora Dynatrol-IXL, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200, NR-201. b. Sika Chemical Corporation Sikaflex-1a, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL. c. BASF MasterSeal NP-1, NP-II, SL-1 SL-2. d. Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric, Vulkem 116,227,45,245.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
I.
Silicone Sealant: 1. One (1) component. 2. Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, O. a. ChemLink: DuraSil. b. General Electric: Silpruf, Silglaze II. c. General Electric: Sanitary 1700 sealant for sealing around plumbing fixtures. d. Dow Corning: 786 for sealing around plumbing fixtures. e. Dow Corning: 7565, 790, 791, 795. f. Tremco: Spectrem 1, Spectrem 3, Tremsil 600. 3. Mildew resistant for sealing around plumbing fixtures.
29
PART 3 - EXECUTION
30
3.1
PREPARATION
31 32
A. Before use of any sealant, investigate its compatibility with joint surfaces, fillers and other materials in joint system.
33
B. Use only compatible materials.
34 35 36
C. Where required by manufacturer, prime joint surfaces. 1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealant. 2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
37 38
D. Provide joint depth for joints receiving polyurea joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
39
3.2
INSTALLATION
40
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements.
41
B. Clean all joints.
42
C. Make all joints water and airtight.
43 44
D. At changes in direction of joints, joint intersections and where sealant joints interface with other construction, install continuous sealant as necessary to ensure a weather-tight seal.
45 46 47
E. Make depth of sealing compounds, except expanding foam and polyurea sealant, not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less than 1/4 IN nor more than 1/2 IN unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4
1 2 3 4
F. Provide correctly sized backer rod, compressible filler or compressible sealant in all joints to depth recommended by manufacturer: 1. Take care to not puncture backer rod and compressible filler. 2. Provide joint backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer for polyurea joint filler.
5
G. Apply bond breaker where required.
6
H. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids.
7
I.
Upon completion, leave sealant with smooth, even, neat finish.
8
J.
Where piping, conduit, ductwork, etc., penetrate wall, seal each side of wall opening.
9 10 11 12 13 14
K. Install compressible sealant to position at indicated depth. 1. Size so that width of material is twice joint width. 2. Take care to avoid contamination of sides of joint. 3. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of finish sealant). 4. Install with adhesive faces in contact with joint sides. 5. Install finish sealant where indicated.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
L. Install expanding foam sealant to minimum 4 IN depth or thickness of wall being penetrated if less than 4 IN or as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide adequate fire rated backing material as required. 2. Hold material back from exposed face of wall as necessary to allow for installation of backer rod and finish sealant. a. Allow expanding foam sealant to completely cure prior to installing backer rod and finish sealant. 3. Trim off excess material flush with surface of the wall if not providing finished sealant.
23
3.3
SEALANT WORK
24 25 26 27 28
A. General: 1. Work includes but is not limited to: Sealing all joints which will permit penetration of dust, air, or moisture. 2. Refer to SCHEDULE for materials to be used. 3. See Specification Section 07 84 00 for firestopping.
29 30 31 32 33 34
B. Concrete joints: 1. Flooring joints. 2. Isolation joints. 3. Joints between paving or sidewalks and building. 4. Construction, control and expansion joints. 5. Joints between precast roof units and between precast roof units and walls.
35 36 37 38 39 40
C. Masonry: 1. Masonry control joints. 2. Brick expansion joints. 3. Cast stone coping and sill head joints. 4. Glass masonry joints. 5. Between masonry and other materials.
41
D. Flashing, reglets and retainers.
42
E. Wood siding and trim.
43
F. Exterior Insulation and Finish System joints.
44 45 46 47
G. Openings: 1. Perimeters of door and window frames, louvers, grilles, etc. 2. Door thresholds shall be set in a full bed of sealant. 3. Glass and glazing: See specification Section 08 81 00.
48
H. Interior finishes: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5
1 2
1. 2.
Perimeter and penetrations of sound insulated walls. Expansion and control joints in tile work.
3
I.
Plumbing fixtures.
4
J.
Penetrations of walls, floors and decks.
5
K. Other joints where sealant, expanding foam sealant or compressible sealant is indicated.
6
3.4
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adhesion Testing: 1. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM C1521 per the following criteria: a. Water bearing structures: One (1) test per every 1000 LF of joint sealed. b. Exterior precast concrete wall panels: One (1) test per every 2000 LF of joint sealed. c. Chemical containment areas: One (1) test per every 1000 LF of joint sealed. d. Building expansion joints: One (1) test per every 500 LF of joint sealed. e. All other type of joints except butt glazing joints: One (1) test per every 3000 LF of joint sealed. f. Manufacturer's authorized factory representative shall recommend, in writing, remedial measures for all failing tests.
3.5
SCHEDULE A. Furnish sealant as indicated for the following areas: 1. Exterior areas: a. Above grade: Polyurethane b. Below grade: Polyurethane. 2. Interior areas: a. Noncorrosive areas: 1) Wet exposure: Polyether. a) Toilet rooms, locker rooms, janitor closets or similar areas: Mildew resistant silicone. 2) Dry exposure: Polyether, unless noted otherwise. a) Sound insulated construction: Acoustical sealant. b. Corrosive areas: 1) Wet exposure: Polysulfide . 2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane . c. Fire-rated construction: See Specification Section 07 84 00. d. Sealant exposed to or having the potential of being exposed to concentrated chlorine gas or chlorine liquid: Polysulfide. e. Casework, countertops and solid surface materials: Silicone. 1) Sinks, fixtures or other areas subject to potential splash, spillage or condensation: Mildew Resistant Silicone. 3. Immersion: a. Prolonged contact with or immersion in: 1) Potable water: a) Polysulfide. b) NSF 61 approved. 2) Nonpotable water, wastewater or sewage: Polysulfide. 4. Compressible sealant: Where indicated. 5. Exterior wall penetrations: Expanding urethane foam, with finish sealant. a. Finish sealant: 1) Exterior side: a) Above grade: Polyether. b) Below grade: Polyurethane. 2) Interior side: a) Noncorrosive area: (1) Wet exposure: Polyether .
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 7
6.
(2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane, unless noted otherwise. b) Corrosive area: (1) Wet exposure: Polysulfide . (2) Dry exposure: Polyurethane . Interior concrete slab formed or saw-cut control joints: Polyurea joint filler.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 11 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Metal doors and frames.
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware. 4. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA). 3. Steel Door Institute (SDI): a. 117, Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. All SDI publications. 4. Steel Door Institute/American National Standards Institute (SDI/ANSI): a. A250.6, Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. A250.7, Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames. c. A250.8 (formerly SDI 100), Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. d. A250.10, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. e. A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 5. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
35
B. Qualifications: Manufacturer must be current member of SDI, and NAAMM (HMMA).
36
C. Wipe coat galvanized steel is not acceptable as substitute for galvanizing finish specified.
37
1.3
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
DEFINITIONS A. As identified in SDI/ANSI A250.7.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers as used on Drawings. 4. SDI certification.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 1.5
6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store doors and frames in accordance with SDI/ANSI A250.11.
7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
9 10 11 12 13 14
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal doors and frames: a. CECO Corporation. b. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. c. Curries Company.
15
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
16
2.2
MATERIALS
17
A. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A653, A60 coating.
18
B. Frames: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A653, A60 coating.
19
C. Supports and Reinforcing: Hot-dipped galvannealed steel, ASTM A653, A60 coating.
20
D. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard.
21
E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard coating meeting SDI/ANSI A250.10.
22
F. Galvannealed Coating Repair: See Specification Section 09 96 00.
23
G. Thermal Insulation: Polyurethane, CFC free.
24
H. Sound Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation or impregnated Kraft honeycomb.
25
2.3
ACCESSORIES
26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A. Glass Panels in Doors: 1. Fixed, integral stops on exterior face. 2. Snap-in stops or stops secured with countersunk Phillips head machine screws on interior face. 3. Reinforce cut-out in door panel with minimum 20 GA galvannealed or galvanized steel channel. 4. Glass: See Specification Section 08 81 00.
33 34 35 36 37
B. Frame Anchors: 1. Jamb anchors: a. Masonry wire anchors: Minimum 0.1875 IN wire, galvanized. b. Existing wall anchor: Minimum 18 GA, galvanized. c. Stud partition and base anchors: Minimum 18 GA, galvanized.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
2.4
FABRICATION A. General: 1. SDI/ANSI A250.8. 2. Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. 3. Form to sizes and profiles indicated on Drawings. a. Beveled edge. 4. Fit and assemble in shop wherever practical.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop to assure proper assembly at site. Continuously wire weld all joints, dress exposed joints smooth and flush. Fabricate doors and frames to tolerance requirements of SDI 117. Fit doors to SDI clearances. All doors shall be handed. Hinge cut-out depth and size on doors and frames shall match hinge specified in Specification Section 08 70 00. 11. Design and fabricate doors to requirements of the Building Code.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. General: a. 1-3/4 IN thick. b. Fabricate with flush top caps. 1) Thickness and material to match door face. 2) Exterior doors: Seal weld top cap to door face and grind smooth and flush. 3) Interior doors: a) Attach top cap to door with concealed fasteners or by welding. b) Factory seal if attached with fasteners. c) No exposed fasteners will be accepted. c. Continuously wire weld all joints and dress, smooth and flush. 2. Exterior: a. Doors 48 IN wide, or less: SDI/ANSI A250.8, Level 3, and physical performance level A, Model 2. 1) Face sheet minimum thickness: 16 GA. 2) Insulated: Minimum R10. 3. Interior: a. Doors 48 IN wide, or less: SDI/ANSI A250.8, Level 2, and physical performance level "B", Model 2. 1) Face sheet minimum thickness: 18 GA. b. Sound insulated, minimum STC-35.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
C. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Door frames: a. Provide 2 IN face at all heads, jambs and mullions for frames in stud walls. b. Provide 4 IN face at head where noted on Drawings or required by wall construction. c. 26 GA galvannealed steel boxes welded to frame at back of all hardware cutouts. d. Steel plate reinforcement welded to frame for hinge, strikes, closers and surfacemounted hardware reinforcing. 1) All plate reinforcement shall meet size and thickness requirements of SDI/ANSI A250.8. e. Split type frames not acceptable. 1) All horizontal and vertical mullions and transom bars shall be welded to adjacent members. f. Conceal all fasteners. g. Frames shall be set up, all face joints continuously wire welded and dressed smooth. h. Exterior (up to 4 FT wide): 16 GA. i. Exterior (over 4 FT wide): 14 GA. j. Interior: 16 GA. k. Provide removable spreaders at bottom of frame.
48 49 50 51 52 53
D. Prepare for finish hardware in accordance with hardware schedule, templates provided by hardware supplier, and SDI/ANSI A250.6. 1. Locate finish hardware in accordance with SDI/ANSI A250.8. 2. See Specification Section 08 70 00 for hardware. 3. Prepare doors for swing direction indicated. a. Preparing doors for non-handed hinges is not acceptable. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 3
1 2
E. After fabrication, clean off mill scale and foreign materials and prime with rust inhibiting primer.
3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
4
3.1
5 6
INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI/ANSI A250.11, the Building Code and manufacturer's instructions.
7 8 9 10 11
B. Plumb, align, and brace frames securely until permanently anchored. 1. After completion of walls, remove temporary braces and spreaders. 2. Anchor frames with minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb. a. Number and location of anchors shall be in accordance with SDI and frame manufacturer's recommendations.
12 13 14 15 16 17
C. At new masonry or metal stud construction, place frames in conjunction with construction of walls or partitions. 1. Masonry construction: Anchor frames using masonry wire anchors. 2. Metal stud construction: a. Anchor frames using steel stud anchors. b. Attach wall anchors with self-tapping screws.
18 19
D. At concrete, precast concrete or existing masonry construction, place frames in rough opening using existing opening anchors.
20
E. Use plastic plugs to keep silencer holes clear during construction.
21 22 23
F. Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas. 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibiting primer. 2. Finish paint door and frame in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00.
24 25 26
G. Install three (3) silencers on strike jamb of single door frame and two (2) on head of double door frame. 1. See Specification Section 08 70 00.
27
H. Protect doors and frames during construction.
29
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00 - 4
SECTION 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum doors and frames.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware. 5. Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing. 6. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 2605, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. American National Standards Institute/American Hardboard Association (ANSI/AHA): a. A135.4, Basic Hardboard. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. d. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. e. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. f. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. Door and Hardware Institute/American National Standards Institute (DHI/ANSI): a. A115.1, Preparation of Mortise Locks in 1-3/8 IN and 1-3/4 IN Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. National Builders Hardware Association (NBHA): a. Recommended Location for Builders Hardware.
38 39 40 41 42
B. Qualifications: 1. Door and frame fabricator must have minimum 10 years experience in fabrication of flush aluminum doors and associated frames. 2. Installation: Door and frame installation shall be performed by experienced workmen having a minimum five (5) years experience installing products similar to those specified.
43 44 45 46 47
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 - 1
1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. All hardware items for flush aluminum doors are to be provided by Specification Section 08 70 00. 4. Schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers as indicated on Drawings. 5. Certifications: a. Certification of manufacturer qualifications. b. Certification of installer qualifications.
14 15 16 17 18
B. Samples: 1. 6 x 6 IN sample of door section showing edge construction, core, impact reinforcement and face sheet with finish as specified. 2. 6 x 6 IN sample of door frame specified, in color specified, showing weatherstripping, anchoring device, stops and all parts of the frame necessary for complete installation.
19 20 21 22
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
23
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
A. Store doors and frames in a dry, weather protected area. 1. Place units on wood skids providing a minimum 6 IN air space above the ground. 2. Do not store units flat, set frames and doors on edge providing minimum 1/2 IN air circulation space between each unit. 3. Provide covering which will ensure air flow around each unit to prevent trapping of moisture. 4. If door wrapper becomes wet immediately remove and provide dry protection equivalent to wrapper removed.
32 33
B. Storage recommendations by unit manufacturer shall take precedent over the above requirements.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
36 37 38 39 40
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Aluminum doors and frames: a. Alutech Corp. b. Commercial Door Systems.
41
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48
2.2
MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Sheet: a. ASTM B209. b. Alloy 5005 architectural quality. 2. Extrusions: a. Aluminium ASTM B221.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 - 2
1
b.
6063T5.
2 3 4 5
B. Steel: 1. ASTM A36. 2. Galvanized, ASTM A123/A123M. a. Minimum 2.0 OZ per SF.
6 7 8
C. Stainless Steel: 1. ASTM A276 or ASTM A666. 2. Type 304 or 316.
9 10 11
D. Hardboard: 1. ANSI/AHA A135.4. 2. Tempered.
12 13 14 15
E. Insulation: 1. Closed cell urethane or polyisocyanurate. a. CFC and HCFC free. b. Ozone depletion potential: 0.
16 17 18
F. Fasteners: 1. Stainless steel. a. Type 304 or 316.
19
2.3
20 21 22 23 24 25
ACCESSORIES A. Lights (Glass Panels): 1. Fixed, integral stops on exterior face. 2. Screwless snap-in stops or stops secured with countersunk Phillips head machine screws on interior face. 3. Glass: See Specification Section 08 81 00.
2.4
FABRICATION
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. General: 1. Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. 2. Form to indicated sizes and profiles. 3. Fit and assemble in shop wherever practical. 4. Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop to assure proper assembly at site. 5. Factory prepare for finish hardware, in accordance with hardware schedule, templates provided by hardware supplier, DHI/ANSI A115.1, and NBHA. a. Locate hardware in accordance with "Recommended Location for Builders Hardware," by NBHA. b. See Specification Section 08 70 00 for hardware. 6. Conceal fastenings wherever practical. a. Exposed fasteners to be countersunk Phillips or Jackson flat head screws and bolts.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Doors: 1. Nominal 1-3/4 IN thick. 2. Face: a. Aluminum sheet. b. Thickness: 0.062 IN c. Embossed.Smooth. 3. Impact reinforcement: a. Hardboard or FRP sheet. b. Thickness: Minimum 0.120 IN. c. Provide on each face of all doors. 1) Extend full height and width of door. 4. Core: a. Insulated. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
5.
b. Minimum R 5.8. c. Density: Minimum 5.0 pcf. Hardware reinforcement: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Reinforce hinges using continuous bar in hinge stile, tapped for hinges. c. Reinforce for hardware using plate screwed to tubular frame.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
C. Frames: 1. Tubular design. a. Minimum thickness: 0.120 IN. b. Site-line: 1) Minimum: 1-3/4 IN. 2) Maximum: 2-1/4 IN. c. Depth: 1) Minimum: 4 IN. 2) Maximum: 5 IN unless required otherwise by manufacturer. 2. Frames to be vertically reinforced at jambs. a. Reinforce for hinge using bar in hinge side of frame, tapped for hinges. b. Reinforce for all other hardware using plate screwed to frame. c. Reinforcement sizes shall be determined by the frame manufacturer. 1) Minimum thickness: 1/4 IN. d. Wood blocking is not acceptable. e. Provide dissimilar metals protection. 3. See Specification Section 09 96 00 Stops: a. Screw applied. b. Weatherstripping: 1) Interior doors: a) Manufacturer’s standard pile or brush-type weatherstripping, unless noted otherwise. 2) Exterior doors and interior doors indicated to receive weatherstripping: a) Manufacturer's standard resilient bulb weatherstripping.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D. Finish: 1. Door and frame finishes shall match. 2. Exterior doors: a. Anodized: 1) Architectural Class 1 coating per AA DAF 45. 2) Clear: AA-M12C22A41. 3. Interior doors: a. Anodized: 1) Architectural Class 1 coating per AA DAF 45. 2) Clear: AA-M12C22A41.
42
PART 3 - EXECUTION
43
3.1
INSTALLATION
44
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
45 46 47
B. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanently anchored. 1. Number and location of anchors shall be in accordance with frame manufacturer's recommendation with minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb.
48
C. Hardware: See Specification Section 08 70 00.
49 50
D. Seal perimeter of door frame. 1. See Specification Section 07 92 00. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 - 4
1
3.2
2 3 4 5 6 7
A. Repair all damaged finishes or replace framing member or door as directed by Engineer. 1. Use only materials and finishes as recommended or furnished by door and frame manufacturer. 2. Final repaired finish shall match surrounding original finish or item being repaired shall be replaced with new item. 3.3
8 9 10 12
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames as recommended by manufacturer prior to acceptance by Owner.
3.4
PROTECTION A. Protect doors and frames during construction.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 16 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 15 00 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. FRP doors and frames.
7 8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. Door and Hardware Institute/American National Standards Institute (DHI/ANSI): a. A115.1, Preparation of Mortise Locks in 1-3/8 IN and 1-3/4 IN Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 4. Steel Door Institute (SDI): a. 117, Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. All applicable SDI publications.
24 25 26 27 28
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have been producing products specified for minimum of 10 years. 2. Installer shall have minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of fiberglass reinforced plastic doors and frames. a. Experience shall include field repair of fiberglass and gel coating.
29 30
C. Doors and frames shall be fabricated and prepared for hardware by single manufacturer except for fire rated frames.
31
D. Door hardware and accessories are to be provided by others and installed in the field.
32
E. All door hardware is to be provided per Specification Section 08 70 00.
33
1.3
DEFINITIONS
34 35
A. Borrowed Lite: Four-sided frame installed in an interior partition prepared for field installation of stationary (fixed) glazing.
36 37 38 39
B. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
40 41 42 43 44 45
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES 08 15 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. 4. 5. 6.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Schedule of doors and frames specific to this Specification Section, using same reference numbers as used on Drawings. Certification of manufacturer's qualifications. Certification of installer's experience. Certification that doors and frames have been protected against chemical exposures listed.
7 8 9 10 11
B. Samples: 1. Provide one (1) 6 x 6 IN sample of frame and one (1) 6 x 6 IN sample of standard door and sample of fire rated door specified. a. Frame sample shall show corner construction. b. Door sample shall show core specified and reinforcing construction.
12 13 14 15
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
16 17
D. Informational Submittals: 1. Warranty.
18
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A. Store doors and frames in a dry, weather protected area. 1. Place units on wood skids providing a minimum 6 IN air space above the ground. 2. Do not store units flat, set frames and doors on edge providing a minimum 1/2 IN air circulation space between each unit. 3. Provide covering which will ensure air flow around each unit to prevent trapping moisture. 4. If door wrapper becomes wet, remove immediately and provide dry protection equivalent to wrapper removed.
26 27
B. Storage recommendations by unit manufacturer shall take precedence over the above requirements.
28
1.6
29 30 31 32 33
WARRANTY A. Warranty all FRP components to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for one (1) year and from degradation or failure due to corrosion for minimum of five (5) years from date of building acceptance. 1. Warranty against door warpage of more than 1:100 when measured diagonally across the door.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
36 37 38 39
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. FRP doors and frames : a. Corrim Company.
40
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
41
2.2
MATERIALS
42
A. Face Panel: Fiberglass reinforced plastic.
43
B. Supports and Reinforcing: Non-swelling polymer or equivalent non-corrosive material.
44
C. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Stainless steel.
45 46
D. Core: 1. Non-fire rated: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES 08 15 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2.
12 13 14
E. Frames: 1. Non-fire rated: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 2.3
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
a. Rigid, end grain balsa. b. Thickness: Minimum 1-1/2 IN. c. Density: 8.5 - 9.0 pcf. d. Compressive strength: Minimum 1400 psi. Fire rated: a. Mineral core. b. Intumescent seals factory applied to perimeter of door. c. Stiles and rails fabricated from pultruded fire retardant material. d. Provide stainless steel channels on the meeting edges of pairs of doors having surface mounted vertical rod exit devices. e. Rating as indicated on Drawings.
ACCESSORIES A. Frame Anchors: 1. Jamb anchors in masonry: 9 GA steel, masonry wire anchor, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M, G60 coating. 2. Floor anchors: 12 GA steel, galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M, G60 coating. 3. Anchors in existing openings: Stainless steel machine screws and stainless steel expansion shield.
2.4
FABRICATION
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
A. General: 1. Fabricate rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. 2. Form to sizes and profiles indicated on Drawings. a. Sizes indicated in DOOR SCHEDULE are nominal. b. Refer to Architectural details for actual conditions affecting actual size of rough openings. 3. Fit and assemble in shop wherever practical. 4. Mark work that cannot be fully assembled in shop to assure proper assembly at site. 5. For door frames, all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, shall be gel coated to prevent acid attack of the glass reinforcing. 6. Fabricate doors and frames to tolerance requirements of SDI 117. 7. Fit doors to SDI clearances. 8. Doors shall be fabricated to withstand splash and spillage attack from the following chemicals for a period of 8 HRS.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
B. FRP Doors: 1. General: a. Construction: 1) 1-3/4 IN thick, minimum. 2) Face sheets, 0.125 IN thick, minimum. 3) Fabricate with flush top closure. 4) Doors with a maximum size of 48 IN wide x 96 IN tall shall be fabricated in one (1) piece. 5) Fill and dress all joints. 6) Resin: Polyester or vinyl ester as required to meet chemical resistance requirements. 7) Fiberglass content (by weight): Minimum 30 percent, maximum 40 percent. 8) UV stabilized. 9) Core: a) End grain balsa for non-fire rated doors. b) Mineral core for fire rated doors. b. Finish: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES 08 15 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1) Minimum 15 mil gel coat thickness. 2) Gel coat color: 2. 3.
Exterior: a. SDI Grade III, Model 4, seamless. 1) Face sheet 0.125 IN thickness. Interior (except fire rated): a. SDI Grade II, Model 4, seamless with Balsa core.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
C. Frames: 1. General: a. Frame size to be 2 IN x 5-3/4 IN with equal rabbets on each side. b. One (1) piece or if shipped knocked down, all joints shall be filled with fiberglass compound, ground and sanded smooth and finished with gel coat. c. Minimum thickness: 0.1875 IN. d. Resin: Polyester as required to meet chemical resistance requirements. e. Fiberglass content (by weight): Minimum 30 percent, maximum 40 percent. f. UV stabilized. 2. FRP frames: a. Corner reinforcement: Minimum 4 x 4 x 0.25 IN FRP angle attached to top reinforcing bar with concealed stainless steel screws. b. Hinge reinforcement: Minimum 0.25 IN thick polymer plate attached to frame. c. Minimum 0.25 IN thick polymer plate reinforcement bonded and mechanically fastened to frame for strikes, closers and surface-mounted hardware.
25
D. Fire Rated Door{and Borrowed Lite} Frames (Steel):
26 27 28 29
E. Prepare for finish hardware in accordance with hardware schedule, templates provided by hardware supplier, and DHI/ANSI A115.1. 1. Locate finish hardware in accordance with SDI. 2. See Specification Section 08 70 00 for hardware.
30
PART 3 - EXECUTION
31
3.1
INSTALLATION
32 33 34
A. Install doors and frames, {and borrowed lite frames} in accordance with SDI and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Manufacturer's instructions take precedent over SDI.
35
B. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
36
C. Plumb, align, and brace securely until permanently anchored.
37
D. After completion of walls, remove temporary braces and spreaders.
38 39
E. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Manufacturer's instructions take precedent over NFPA.
40
F. Use plastic plugs to keep silencer holes clear during construction.
41 42 43 44 45
G. Immediately after erection, repair damaged areas of gel coat . 1. Fill corner miter joints with fiberglass compound as recommended by frame manufacturer. a. Filling miter joints with sealant is not acceptable. 2. Sand filled area to match adjacent frame and coat with minimum 15 mil gel coating to match adjacent frame finish.
46 47 48
H. On doors not requiring weatherstripping, sound seals or smoke seals, install three (3) silencers on strike jamb of single door frame and two (2) on head of double door frame. 1. See Specification Section 08 70 00. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES 08 15 00 - 4
1 2
I.
Number and location of anchors shall be in accordance with frame manufacturer's recommendation with minimum of three (3) anchors per jamb.
3
J.
Protect frames during construction.
4 5
K. Cover all thru bolts and other stainless steel accessories with minimum 15 mil gel coating to match door frame.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for services of manufacturer's authorized representative to be present during and observe the installation of the first three (3) doors and frames. 1. If project has less than three (3) doors and frames, manufacturer's authorized representative shall be present for installation of all doors and frames. 2. Manufacturer's representative shall instruct installer on proper methods for installing doors and frames in each type of wall construction, repairing damaged gel coating, repairing scratches in finish and filling and finishing all joints.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS AND FRAMES 08 15 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling access doors. 2. Floor access doors. 3. ASME Manways.
9 10 11 12 13
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Specification Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A240, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. d. A480, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. e. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. f. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. g. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. h. B221,Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
32
A. Standard Duty: Will support live load of 150 psf.
33
B. Heavy Duty: Will support live load of 300 psf.
34
C. H-20 loading: As defined in AASHTO Guidelines.
35
1.4
SUBMITTALS
36 37 38 39 40 41
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
42 43 44 45
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Floor access doors: a. Bilco Company. b. Babcock Davis Associates. c. Dur-Red Products. d. Halliday Products. e. USF Fabrication Inc. 2. Ceiling access doors: a. Bilco Company. b. J.L. Industries. c. Milcor. d. Dur-Red Products. e. Larsens Manufacturing Co. 3. ASME Manways: a. Chase Associates b. Approved equal.
20
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
21
2.2
MATERIALS
22 23 24
A. Aluminum: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. 2. Extruded shapes: ASTM B221.
25 26 27 28
B. Steel: 1. Sheet Metal: G90 Galvanized, ASTM A653. 2. Fabrications: Hot-Dip Galvanized, ASTM A123. 3. Hardware: Hot-Dip Galvanized, ASTM A153.
29
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240 or A666.
30
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
31 32 33 34
A. General: 1. All access doors shall be provided by the same manufacturer when possible. 2. Coat all aluminum components in contact with concrete or masonry with manufacturer's standard bituminous coating.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Standard Duty Floor Access Doors: 1. Frame: 1/4 IN mill finished aluminum. a. Fabricate frame with built-in neoprene cushion and strap anchors bolted to exterior. 2. Cover: 1/4 IN mill finished diamond plate aluminum. a. Reinforce cover with aluminum stiffeners. 1) Live load: 150 psf. 2) Deflection: Maximum 1/150 of span. b. Fabricate doors to open to 90 degrees and automatically lock into open position. 3. Hardware: a. All hardware to be stainless steel. b. Positive hold open arm that engages automatically when door reaches full 90 degree open position. c. Slam lock and removable key handle. d. Bolt hinges to underside of door. 1) Pivot on torsion bars. 4. SlamBilco Company, Type "K" or "KD." 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 2
1
a.
Size(s): Refer to the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C. Heavy Duty Floor Access Doors: 1. Frame: 1/4 IN mill finish aluminum channel with anchor tabs. a. 1-1/2 IN DIA drain coupling. 2. Cover: a. 1/4 IN mill finished diamond plate aluminum. b. Reinforce cover with aluminum stiffeners. 1) Live load: 300 psf. 2) Deflection: Maximum 1/150 of span. 3. Hardware: a. All hardware to be stainless steel. b. Positive hold open arm that engages automatically when door reaches full 90 degree open position. c. Slam lock and removable key handle. 4. Bilco Company, Type "J-AL" or "JD-AL." a. Size(s): Refer to the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
D. Ceiling Access Doors: 1. Prime painted galvanized steel. 2. Frame: 18 GA 3. Door: 16 GA. 4. Hinges: Continuous, concealed. 5. Provide flush, screwdriver-operated locks with metal cam. 6. J L. Industries "TM" Series. 7. Size(s): Refer to the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
E. ASME Manways: 1. General: ASME flanged and dished hinged cover. 2. Model: a. Chase and Associates, Model CM-1. b. Approved equal. 3. Provide handwheel release to operate only when tank is empty. 4. Diameter: 36 inch. 5. Gasket: EPDM. 6. Pressure Rating: 30 psi. 7. Material: 316L stainless steel frame and cover. 8. Provide 3” annular weep ring in center of wall. 9. Provide security cover. 10. Inward opening. 11. Conforms to ASME Code Section 8, Division 1.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
2.4
ACCESSORIES A. Secondary Fall Protection System: 1. Design and install system such that when in the open position, no part of the system obstructs the clear opening size listed in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 2. Platform: Design grating to meet OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements for protection for floor openings. 3. Finish: a. Powder coated. b. Color: Safety Orange or Safety Yellow. 4. Hardware: a. Stainless steel Type 316. b. Tamper proof Type 316 stainless steel bolts. 5. Provide positive latch to hold grating in upright position. 6. Size: Allow 6 IN clear space on each unhinged side for visual observation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7. 8.
9.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Provide padlock hasp for Owner provided padlock. Double leaf openings: a. Provide two (2) individual grating platforms hinged on the same side of the hatch frame but independent from one another. 1) Provide each platform with a padlock hasp and positive latch to hold grating in upright position. Install secondary fall protection system at the factory.
B. Load Rating Plates: 1. Minimum 18 GA Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A666. 2. Engraved with maximum design live load allowed for unit on which it will be mounted. 3. Display load in English units as well as metric units. 4. Size as required for text as needed. 5. Text: a. Font: Helvetica Narrow, all caps. b. Size: 1/4 IN height. c. Depth of engraving: 3 mils. 6. Finish: a. Text: 1) Black epoxy baked on paint. 2) Plate to have finish conductive to paint application. b. Coat entire plate with baked on clear coat on front and back side. 7. Attach to top of all floor or vault access doors using stainless steel screws in location determined by manufacturer. a. Provide a neoprene gasket under the plate to separate the stainless steel from the aluminum cover or frame.
26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
3.1
INSTALLATION
28
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
29 30
B. When installing finished flooring material into pan cover of fire rated floor doors, hold concrete fill down as required under flooring material for flush installation of flooring material.
31 32
33 34 35 36 37
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Vault, Ceiling or Floor Access Door Schedule:
DOOR NO.
DRAWING NO.
CLEAR OPENING SIZE (a)
TYPE
REMARKS
VAD-0401
04C-06
INFLUENT FLOW METER VALVE VAULT
3'-6" x 3'-6"
K-AL
b
VAD-1001
11D-02
INFLUENT PUMP STATION WET WELL
3’-0” x 3’-0”
JD-AL
b
FAD-6201
62A-01
DIGESTER CONTROL BUILDING
10’-0” x 6’-6”
JD-AL
b
LOCATION
CAD-6401 64A-01 DEWATERING FACILITY 3’-0” x 3’-0” TM c 1. Notes: a. See definition of Clear Opening Size in the DEFINITIONS Article in PART 2 of this Specification Section. b. Provide secondary fall protection system. c. Finish paint door and frame in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00.
38 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 4
1
B. ASME Manway Schedule DOOR NO.
DRAWING NO.
LOCATION
CLEAR OPENING SIZE (a)
MAN-6101
61D-02
DIGESTER NO. 1
36”
MAN-6102
61D-02
DIGESTER NO. 2
36”
MAN-6301
63D-01
SLUDGE HOLDING TANK
36”
REMARKS
2 3 5
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACCESS DOORS 08 31 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 33 22 ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum rolling overhead doors. a. Motor operated. b. Insulated.
9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 01 61 03 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. c. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
25 26
B. Qualifications: 1. Installer to be licensed or approved in writing by door manufacturer.
27
1.3
28 29 30 31 32
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Schedule of doors using same reference number for openings as indicated on Drawings. 4. Motor operator and accessories technical data including complete wiring and control diagram for motor operators and control stations. 5. Certifications: a. Certification of Installer's qualifications.
44 45
B. Samples: 1. Actual metal color samples of manufacturer's full line of colors available.
46
C. Contract Closeout Information: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS 08 33 22 - 1
1 2 3
1.
4 5 6
Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
D. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Aluminum rolling overhead doors: a. The Cookson Company. b. Cornell Iron Works. c. Wayne Dalton. d. Overhead Door Corp. e. Raynor.
17
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
18
2.2
MATERIALS
19
A. Door Curtain and Hood: Aluminum.
20 21 22
B. Insulation: 1. Closed cell polyurethane foam. 2. CFC free.
23
C. Weatherproofing: Neoprene or vinyl.
24
D. Guides: Aluminum.
25
E. Headplates and Pipe Barrel: Galvanized steel.
26 27
F. Fasteners: Aluminum or stainless steel. 1.
28
2.3
FABRICATION
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. Door Curtain: 1. Insulated flat profile with interlocking face sheets: a. 2-5/8 IN high. b. Exterior face: 0.040 IN. c. Interior face: 0.024 IN. d. Galvanized endlocks. e. Core: Insulated. 2. Weatherstripping: Exterior and interior guide sealing adjustable weatherstripping at jambs, interior hood and lintel (exterior doors only). 3. Bottom bar: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. 4. Finish: a. Powder coat: 1) Factory prime and finish coats. 2) Prime coat: Minimum 0.2 mil baked-on prime paint. 3) Finish coat: Minimum 0.6 mil baked-on polyester powder coat. 4) Color: To be selected by Engineer from manufacturer's complete offering.
46 47
B. Hood: 1. Minimum 0.040 IN aluminum or minimum 24 GA stainless steel. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS 08 33 22 - 2
1
2.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Air baffle weatherstripping extending full length of all exterior door hoods.
C. Guides: 1. Mounting: a. Interior face of wall. 2. Manufacturer's standard structural angle guide system for size of door specified. a. Material: .Galvanized steel.} b. Cold-rolled guides are not acceptable. c. Finish: Match door.
9 10 11
D. Headplates: 1. Galvanized steel or stainless steel plate mounted to guides. 2. Sized to support counterbalance assembly, curtain, and hood.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
E. Counterbalance Assembly: 1. Pipe barrel: a. Steel, ASTM A501. 1) Galvanized, ASTM A123/A123M. b. Maximum deflection: 0.03 IN/FT. 2. Torsion springs: a. Oil-tempered helical torsion springs on cast anchors. b. 50,000 cycle. 3. Adjustable tension wheel.
21
F. Trim Pieces: Material and finish to match door curtain.
22
G. Wind Load: 20 psf minimum.
23 24 25
H. Operation: 1. Motor operated with chain operator backup. a. Provide chain keeper on each operator.
26
I.
27
2.4
28 29 30
Insulated door system: Overhead Door Corp. "625" Series.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Air Infiltration: 1.55 CFM/SF of opening maximum when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 with 25 mph wind load.
2.5
31 32 33
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 2 OZ of touch-up paint properly labeled for each different color of door. 1. Touch-up paint shall be formulated to be compatible with finish specified and shall be capable of being applied without special equipment or tools.
34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
35
3.1
INSTALLATION
36
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
37
B. Installation shall be done by manufacturer's authorized representative.
38
C. Provide all required trim, weatherstripping, closures etc., for complete weather tight installation.
39
D. Adjust for proper counter balance.
40 41 42 43 44
E. Seal along bottom of vertical track (guides), seal the vertical joint between the two (2) separate track angles (if not filled by welding) and seal all holes in vertical track (not being used for fasteners) to provide a completely weather tight track and door system. 1. At fastener locations provide aluminum washers under bolt head to completely cover the slotted holes in the vertical guide. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS 08 33 22 - 3
1 2
F. Electrical disconnect and conduit and wiring from standard three (3) pushbutton control to motor operator is provided in the Electrical Design.
3
G. Provide aluminum or stainless steel bracing for motor operator to eliminate vibration.
4 5
H. Provide dissimilar materials protection on all surfaces coming in contact with dissimilar materials.
6 7 9
3.2
ADJUSTMENT A. Prior to occupancy, adjust door for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS 08 33 22 - 4
SECTION 08 41 10 STOREFRONT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Thermally broken storefront.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 1503, Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 4. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. d. C1363, Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. e. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. f. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. g. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 5. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
39 40
B. Qualifications: 1. Qualify welders and welding process in accordance with AWS D1.2.
41
1.3
DEFINITIONS
42 43 44 45
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
46
B. All weather: Capable of operation from -50 to +120 DegF.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STOREFRONT 08 41 10 - 1
1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data for framing system and major accessories specific to this Project: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Computer generated elevation drawings indicating all frame {and door} dimensions and details specific to this Project. 4. Warranty. 5. Test reports.
12 13 14 15
B. Samples: 1. Metal samples showing range of anodizing finish specified for Engineer's approval. 2. After approval of color samples, provide three (3) 2 x 3 IN samples of color and finish approved.
16
1.5
17 18 19
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store units in vertical position off ground with wood spacers between each unit. 1. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.6
20 21 22 23 24 25
WARRANTY A. Written warranty signed jointly by fabricator, installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace any items of work performed under this Specification Section which fail. 1. Failure includes defects in materials, installation, workmanship, water tightness of assembly, sealant, glazing or any other defects in storefront system which affects its ability to perform as weathertight envelope. 2. Warranty period is five (5) years from date of acceptance.
26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Storefront system: a. Kawneer Co., Inc. b. United States Aluminum. c. Vista Wall. d. YKK-AP America.
35
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
36
2.2
MATERIALS
37
A. Storefront: Aluminum, ASTM B221, 6063-T5.
38
B. Thermal Barrier: Extruded copolymer.
39
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
40
D. Sealants: See Specification Section 07 92 00.
41
E. Brackets, Anchors, Reinforcements: Aluminum or stainless steel.
42 43 44 45
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Glass: 1. ASCE 7. 2. See Specification Section 08 81 00.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STOREFRONT 08 41 10 - 2
1 2 3 4
B. Flashing: 1. Minimum 0.040 IN aluminum. 2. Finish to match storefront if exposed. 3. Mill finish if concealed.
5
C. Sealant: See Specification Section 07 92 00 and manufacturer's recommendations.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D. Fasteners: 1. Structural fasteners anchoring framing to building structure: Stainless steel. 2. Exposed fasteners attaching system framing or components to other system framing or components. a. Aluminum: Finish to match finish of system. 3. Provide Phillips head screws where exposed. 2.4
FABRICATION
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. General: 1. Fully degrease and clean members prior to assembly or application of protective coatings. 2. Weld using methods recommended by manufacturer and AWS to avoid discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish. 4. Ease corners of cut edges to a radius of approximately 1/64 IN. 5. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 6. Fit and assemble work at shop to maximum extent possible. 7. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 8. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joint, with hairline fit of contacting members. 9. Reinforce work as necessary to withstand wind loadings and to support system. 10. Separate dissimilar metal with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion. 11. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other nonabrasive concealed inserts to permanently prevent freeze-up of joint. 12. Frames to be structurally reinforced as required by frame manufacturer. a. Reinforcement: 1) Structural steel, ASTM A36, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, ASTM A653, G90. 2) Provide dissimilar metals protection; see Specification Section 09 96 00. 3) All structural reinforcement sizes shall be determined by the frame manufacturer. 13. Minimum wall thickness of 0.07 IN for all frame components.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
B. Storefront: 1. Nominal 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 IN minimum section with sightline maximum of 2 IN. a. Depth of system as required for loading criteria indicated. b. Depth of system may be different between thermally broken and non-thermally broken frames but is to be consistent on entire Project for each of the individual systems. 2. Complete extruded aluminum framing system: a. Non-thermally broken system: Kawneer VG450. 3. Include all sills, mullions, anchors, division bars, and flashing. 4. Use no through metal connectors in thermally broken systems. 5. Fabricate non-thermally broken system to accept 1/4 IN glass or 1 IN glass as indicated. 6. Provide complete system under single responsibility.
46 47 48 49 50
C. Sealants: 1. Refer to Specification Section 07 92 00. 2. Provide sealant color to match finish of system at exposed locations. 3. Provide sealants compatible with aluminum system and recommended for use with this type of installation.
51 52
D. Finishes: 1. Architectural Class 1 coating per AA DAF 45. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STOREFRONT 08 41 10 - 3
1 2
a. 2.5
Anodized: medium bronze.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A. General Test Requirements: 1. Utilize independent testing laboratories specifically qualified to conduct all performance tests required. 2. Performance tests may be conducted in manufacturer's laboratories provided they are witnessed and certified by qualified independent testing laboratory personnel. 3. Provide certification that proposed system has been tested in accordance with and meets the requirements of the standards identified in this Specification Section. 4. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second. a. Other tests may be in any order.
12 13 14 15
B. Air Infiltration Tests (Storefront Framing): 1. Test in accordance with ASTM E283. 2. Air infiltration: 0.06 cfm/SF of wall area when tested at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf.
16 17 18
C. Water Resistance Test: 1. Test in accordance with ASTM E331. 2. No leakage allowed at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
D. Uniform Load Test: 1. Uniform load: a. A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. b. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/240 of the span of any framing member. c. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage shall occur and no permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear spans shall occur.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
E. Thermal Tests: 1. Perform all thermal tests on unit sized as required to produce representative areas of framing, vision glass, and spandrel glass. 2. Provide test unit which reflects most restrictive situation on project (e.g., worst framing, glass, spandrel proportions for producing desired thermal results). 3. Test in accordance with AAMA 1503. 4. Thermal transmittance of insulated glass and framing areas: Average U-value of 0.65 BTUH/SF/DegF, maximum. 5. Condensation resistance test: a. Determine in accordance with ASTM C1363 and AAMA 1503. b. Provide condensation resistance factor (CRF) not less than 50.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
3.1
INSTALLATION
40 41
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation. 1. Correct defects.
42
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
43
C. Set units plumb, level and true to line.
44
D. Anchor securely in place.
45
E. Separate metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action.
46
F. Set sill and base members in a bed of sealant.
47
G. Provide joint fillers or gaskets for weathertight construction. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STOREFRONT 08 41 10 - 4
1 2
H. Seal all joints within and at perimeter of system. 1. Do not seal joints intended to allow the framing system to drain.
3
I.
4 5 6 8
3.2
Install flashing where shown on Drawings and/or where required.
CLEANING A. Clean all excess sealant, compounds, metal shavings, dirt, fingerprints, and any other foreign material from frame surface promptly after installation.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid STOREFRONT 08 41 10 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum windows.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings. 1.2
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
43 44 45 46 47 48
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 904, Voluntary Specification for Multi-Bar Hinges in Window Applications b. 1503, Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. c. 2605, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, MetallicCoated by the Hot-Dip Process. b. C1363, Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. c. E283, Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. d. E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. e. E331, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
1.3
38 39 40 41 42
SUMMARY
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data for framing system and major accessories including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Hardware being provided by window manufacturer.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
3. 4.
6 7 8
B. Samples: 1. After initial color selection, provide 2 x 3 IN minimum sample of each color and finish selected.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Qualifications of testing laboratory. 3. Test results. 4. Warranty. 1.5
16 17
c. Glass being provided by window manufacturer in factory glazed units. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Elevation drawings indicating window dimensions and details. Manufacturer's full line color chart for painted finishes including exotic colors for selection by Engineer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store units in vertical position off ground with wood spacers between each unit.
1.6
18 19 20 21
WARRANTY A. Five (5) year warranty of weathertightness of installation. 1. Air and water integrity and structural adequacy of units and hardware, including sealants and sealing within and around perimeter of installation. 2. Signed jointly by fabricator, installer, and contractor.
22
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
24 25 26 27 28
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Thermally broken windows: a. Wausau Metals Corp., 2250-T Series. b. Kawneer Company Inc., 8225-T Series.
29
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
30
2.2
MATERIALS
31
A. Extruded Aluminum: 6063T5 alloy.
32
B. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 92 00.
33
C. Thermal Insulator: Poured in place polyurethane, self-adhering to adjacent aluminum surfaces.
34
D. Weatherstripping: Sponge neoprene.
35
2.3
ACCESSORIES
36 37 38 39 40 41
A. Screens: 1. 18 x 16 mesh aluminum wire screens. 2. Secure to aluminum shapes with vinyl spline. 3. Hold in place with spring loaded plungers. 4. Removable to inside of building. 5. Finish same as window frames.
42 43 44 45
B. Flashing: 1. Minimum 0.040 IN aluminum. 2. Finish to match window frames. 3. Mill finish if concealed. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 2
1
2.4
FABRICATION
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A. General: 1. Fully degrease and clean members prior to assembly or application of protective coatings. 2. Weld by methods recommended by manufacturer and AWS D1.2 to avoid discoloration at welds. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and restore finish. 4. Ease corners of cut edges to a radius of approximately 1/64 IN. 5. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 6. Fit and assemble work at shop to maximum extent possible. 7. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 8. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joint, with hairline fit of contacting members. 9. Reinforce work as necessary to withstand wind loadings and to support system. 10. Separate dissimilar metal with paint or preformed separators to prevent corrosion. a. See Section 09 96 00. 11. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other nonabrasive concealed inserts to permanently prevent freeze-up of joint. 12. Reinforce frames for hardware. 13. Structural steel reinforcement hot-dip galvanized after fabrication meeting G-90, ASTM A924, requirements.
21 22
B. Thermal Insulator: Provide minimum 1/4 IN separation between exterior and interior metal surfaces after bridge is removed.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
C. Weatherstripping: 1. Thermally broken type windows: a. Casement and projected: 1) Provide two (2) rows of fin type extruded neoprene weatherstrips extending around perimeter of sash at both inner and outer overlap contacts. 2) Provide corners which are securely staked and joined. 3) Provide units which are easily replaceable.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
D. Window Hardware: 1. General: a. Locking device and strikes: White bronze and/or non-magnetic stainless steel. b. All hardware elements that bridge sash or frame thermal barrier: Reinforced nylon, deirin or suitable non-metallic, low conductivity material. c. Custodial key operation: Secure sash in closed position and automatically lock in washing position. d. Safety keys removable only in closed position. 2. Glass: See Section 08 81 00 for types of glass to be installed under this Section.
39 40 41
E. Fasteners: 1. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of system. 2. Provide Phillips flat head screws where exposed.
42 43
F. Finish: AAMA 2605 Fluoropolymer paint; color to be AA-MA10C22A31+ clear anodized. 1. Color: Medium bronze
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General Test Requirements: 1. Utilize independent testing laboratories specifically qualified to conduct all performance tests required. 2. Performance tests may be conducted in manufacturer's laboratories provided they are witnessed and certified by qualified independent testing laboratory personnel. 3. Perform all tests on "Test Unit":
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
a.
4. 5.
Full-sized window unit for project or a minimum 5 x 8 FT unit mounted in test chamber in exact accordance with job conditions including anchorage system, sealing, etc. b. Test unit to be completely assembled and glazed. 1) Thermal tests may be conducted on 4 x 6 FT unit. Test air infiltration first, water resistance second. a. Other tests may be in any order. Test data on vertical pivot windows will be accepted for fixed windows for condensation resistance, thermal, temperature exposure and acoustical tests provided the fixed windows are the same as the vertical windows tested in the following respects: a. Same frame section (or same family of extrusions). b. Same basic metal mass inside and outside. c. Identical thermal break. d. Same type of glazing.
B. Test Requirements: 1. Air infiltration test: a. With sash and ventilators closed and locked, test in accordance with ASTM E283. b. Air infiltration, in CFM/FT of crack length, at pressure differential of 6.24 psf as follows: 1) Fixed windows: 0.06 maximum, all others 0.10 maximum. 2. Water resistance test: a. Mount glazed unit in its vertical position, continuously supported around outside perimeter with sash and ventilators closed and locked. b. Test in accordance with ASTM E331. c. No uncontrolled leakage allowed, with pressure differential of 6.24 psf. 3. Uniform load deflection test: a. Test in accordance with ASTM E330. b. Subject unit to load of 25 psf applied to outside of window and 25 psf applied to inside of window. c. Maximum allowable deflection of any unsupported span: L/175. d. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or activating mechanisms, or any other damage which would cause window to be inoperable will be allowed. 4. Uniform load structural test: a. Test in accord with ASTM E330. b. Subject unit to loads indicated below. c. Stabilize pressure and maintain it for minimum period of 10 seconds. d. No glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms or activating mechanisms or any other damage which would cause window to be inoperable will be allowed. e. Maximum permanent deformation of any main frame, sash or ventilator member: 0.4 percent of its span. f. After performing Uniform Load Structural Test, increase loads 1-1/2 times and perform safety test. g. Design unit to withstand following design pressures acting normal to plane of wall, at applicable heights and locations. 1) At height of 30 FT or less: 20 psf acting inward 25 psf acting outward. 5. Condensation resistance test: a. Perform on "test unit," except size may be 3 x 4 FT, minimum. b. Test in accordance with AAMA 1503. c. CRF (Condensation Resistance Factor): 50, minimum. 6. Thermal test: a. Perform on "test unit" except size may be 4 x 6 FT, minimum.. b. Test in guarded hot box ASTM C1363, with an exterior temperature of 18 DegF, an interior of 68 DegF and 15 mph fan-generated wind velocity on exterior. c. "U" value: not to exceed 0.65 BTU/HR/SF/DegF. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
d.
Calculated "U" values from smaller units or data or theoretical assumptions will not be acceptable. 7. Temperature exposure test: a. Perform on "test unit" except size may be 4 x 6 FT, minimum. b. Maintain interior chamber temperature at 70 DegF. c. Reduce exterior ambient temperature to minus 15 DegF. 8. Structural thermal barrier tension test: a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Mechanically secure interior and exterior faces of 12 IN section in horizontal position. c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5 minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller. d. Apply direct tension (pull) using a Universal testing machine set in 12,000 LB load range. e. Test results: No loss of bond at 4000 LB IN/IN/MIN. 9. Structural thermal barrier shear test: a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Mechanically secure interior face of 12 IN section in vertical position. c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5 minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller. d. Apply load to exterior face by a bearing plate resting on top of exterior face, using Universal Testing machine set in 12,000 LB load range at a strain rate of 0.050 IN/IN/MIN. e. Test results: No loss of bond at 5500 LB loading. 10. Structural thermal barrier combined torsion and shear test: a. Test urethane filled sections of aluminum. b. Secure interior face of 12 IN section in horizontal position. c. Apply heat tape to exterior face to control surface temperature at 180 DegF 5 minutes before loading, as indicated by a thermocouple wire operated by an automatic controller. d. Apply load to bearing plate centered on portion of glazing pocket to exterior side of thermal barrier, using a Universal Testing machine set in the 12,000 LB load range. e. Test results: No loss of bond at 3900 LB load applied at strain rate of 0.05 IN/IN/MIN.
35
PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
3.1
INSTALLATION
37
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
38
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line.
39
C. Anchor securely in place.
40 41
D. Separate metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action. 1. See Section 09 96 00.
42
E. Set sill and base members in a bed of sealant.
43
F. Provide joint fillers or gaskets for weathertight construction.
44
G. Seal all joints within and at perimeter of system.
45
H. Provide sealant color to match finish of system at exposed locations.
46 47
I.
Provide sealants compatible with aluminum system and recommended for use with this type of installation.
48
J.
See Section 07 92 00 for sealants.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 5
1 2 4
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation supervised or inspected by manufacturer's authorized representative.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 6
SECTION 08 62 00 SKYLIGHT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Skylights. 2. Manufacturer designed fastening system.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 52 16 - SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing System. 4. Section 07 61 13 - Metal Roofing. 5. Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18
A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
19 20
B. Qualifications: 1. Installer shall have minimum five (5) years experience installing similar products.
21
1.3
22 23 24 25 26
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Scaled plan of roof showing location of each unit and anchoring details. a. Minimum scale of plan: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. b. Minimum scale of details: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Installer qualifications.
37 38 39 40
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
41 42 43 44
C. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Warranty.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SKYLIGHT 08 62 00 - 1
1
1.5
WARRANTY
2 3
A. Provide five (5) year written warranty on skylight, glazing, safety screen, sealant, flashing and installation.
4 5
B. Warranty to cover repair or replacement in event of leakage; defective design, materials and construction.
6
C. Warranty jointly signed by Contractor, installer and supplier.
7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
8
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Skylights: a. CPI International. b. Major Industries. c. Naturalite Skylight Systems. d. Sunglo Skylight Products. e. Super Sky International Inc. f. Wasco.
18
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
19
2.2
MATERIALS
20
A. Curb: Aluminum.
21
B. Glazing: Polycarbonate.
22
C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard.
23
D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
24
E. Framework: Aluminum.
25
2.3
FABRICATION
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
A. Curb: 1. Integral 9 IN high. 2. Minimum 0.032 IN outer skin and 0.025 IN inner skin. 3. Insulated. 4. Thermally broken. 5. Integral counter flashing. 6. Curb and curb framework shall be manufactured as complete unit. a. Built-up units not acceptable.
34 35 36 37 38 39
B. Curb Framework: 1. Minimum 0.063 IN extruded aluminum. a. 6063T5 alloy. 2. Built in condensation gutter and weeps. 3. Welded corners. 4. Thermally broken.
40
C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel.
41 42 43 44 45
D. Glazing: 1. Minimum thickness: 0.125 IN. 2. Rise: 25 percent. 3. Dome shaped. 4. Color: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SKYLIGHT 08 62 00 - 2
1 2
a. b.
Exterior: Clear Interior: Clear
3 4 5
E. Finish: 1. Architectural Class 1 coating per AA DAF 45. 2. AA-M10C22A41, clear anodized.
6
F. Design: Support live load of 40 psf and wind load of 30 psf.
7 8 9 10 11 12
G. Unit: 1. Wasco "Sentinel Fall Protection Units." a. Model: DDSA DDSAP. 2. Fabricate to sizes scheduled in the SCHEDULE Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 3. Rough opening size: Match existing opening – field verify.
13
H. Completely shop assemble, to assure proper assembly in field.
14
I.
Disassemble for shipment as required.
15
J.
Properly label each component for accurate field assembly.
16 17 18
K. Construct components to drain water passing joints and to drain condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within skylight system to the exterior. 1. Provide continuous extruded aluminum frame.
19 20
L. Weld by heliarc process. 1. Grind exposed welds to a minimum of 100 grit finish.
21
M. Allow no direct acrylic to metal contact.
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
3.1
INSTALLATION
24 25
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Attach to roof structure per manufacturer's designed fastening system.
26
B. Provide all periphery items as required for complete weathertight installation.
27 28
C. Fasten safety screen to skylight frame using stainless steel screws at maximum 12 IN OC with minimum of three (3) screws per side.
29
D. See Specification Section 07 61 13 and Specification Section 07 62 00 for related flashing work.
30 31 32
E. Provide sheet metal liner at opening through roof deck as shown on the Drawings. 1. See Specification Section 07 62 00.
34
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SKYLIGHT 08 62 00 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 70 00 FINISH HARDWARE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Finish hardware. 1. Inspection and testing of door operation.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08 15 00 - Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors and Frames. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 16 17 18 19 20
A. All door hardware shall be provided by a single hardware supplier. 1. Hardware is to be provided under this Specification Section, unless noted otherwise, for doors specified in: a. Specification Section 08 11 00. b. Specification Section 08 11 16. c. Specification Section 08 15 00.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
B. Referenced Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 2. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI/BHMA): a. A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. A156.3, Exit Devices. c. A156.4, Door Controls -Closers. d. A156.6, Architectural Door Trim. e. A156.8, Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders. f. A156.13, Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000. g. A156.16, Auxiliary Hardware. h. A156.18, Materials and Finishes. i. A156.21, Thresholds. 3. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 101, Life Safety Code. 5. Steel Door Institute (SDI). 6. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
43 44
C. Qualifications: 1. Installation shall be inspected by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
45
1.3
DEFINITIONS
46
A. AHC: Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by DHI.
47
B. Installer or Applicator: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 1
1 2 3
1. 2.
Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
4
C. All weather: Capable of operation from -50 to +120 DegF.
5 6
D. Active Leaf: Right-hand leaf when facing door from keyed side unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
7
1.4
SUBMITTALS
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Qualifications a. AHC qualifications. 3. Certification from AHC stating: a. All door hardware has been reviewed by AHC and verified to be compatible with doors and frames. b. All electrified door hardware has been reviewed by AHC and has been coordinated with power supply and access control system. c. No submittals will be reviewed until Engineer has received AHC certification. 4. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Schedule of all hardware being used on each door. a. Number hardware sets and door references same as those indicated on Drawings. 6. Technical data sheets on each hardware item proposed for use. 7. Warranty information for all hardware devices having extended warranties.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications: a. Certification from AHC stating all door hardware has been provided per approved Shop Drawings, has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and all doors have been inspected and tested and found to be in proper working order. 1) Door assemblies required to swing in the direction of egress have been inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 101.
34
1.5
35
WARRANTY A. Provide all individual manufacturers' extended warranties as advertised.
36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
2.1
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Locksets and latchsets: a. Corbin/Russwin. b. Best Access Systems. 2. Closers: a. LCN. b. Norton. c. Corbin/Russwin. 3. Hinges: a. Stanley Works. b. Hager Hinge Co.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
28 29
c. McKinney Manufacturing Co. Door stops and holders: a. Trimco. b. Rockwood. c. Ives. Overhead stops: a. Glynn-Johnson Corp. b. Rockwood. c. Trimco. d. Rixson. Weatherstripping and thresholds: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. c. Zero Weatherstripping, Inc. d. National Guard Products, Inc. Exit devices: a. Von Duprin, Inc. b. Corbin/Russwin. c. Precision. d. Sargent. Door bolts, coordinators and strikes: a. Ives. b. Trimco. c. Hager. d. Rockwood. e. Dorma. Other materials: As noted.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
30
A. General: As indicated in the FABRICATION Article in PART 2 of this Specification Section.
31
B. Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum.
32 33 34 35
C. Closers: 1. Standard closer: a. Shell: Aluminum or cast iron. b. Arms and piston: Forged steel.
36 37
D. Kickplates: 1. Stainless steel.
38
E. Thresholds: Aluminum.
39
F. Overhead Stops and Wall Stops: Stainless steel or aluminum.
40
G. Keys: Brass or bronze.
41
H. Weatherstripping and Smoke Seals: Polypropylene, neoprene, or EPDM.
42
I.
Pulls and Push Plates: Stainless steel.
43
J.
Silencers: Rubber.
44 45 46 47 48
2.3
ACCESSORIES A. Strikes: 1. Curved lips. a. Extended lips when required. 2. Furnish strike boxes.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 3
1 2
3. 2.4
Appropriate for function and hardware listed.
FABRICATION
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A. Hardware - General: 1. Generally prepare for Phillips head machine screw installation. 2. Exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of other work as closely as possible. 3. Provide concealed fasteners unless thru bolted. 4. Through bolt closers on all doors. 5. Furnish items of hardware for proper door swing. 6. Furnish lock devices which allow door to be opened from inside room without a key or any special knowledge.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B. Hardware: 1. Provide following ANSI/BHMA A156.18 finishes: a. Locksets, latchsets and strikes: 630. b. Door pulls, push bars, push plates: 630. c. Kickplates: 1) Stainless steel: 630. d. Exit devices: 630 where available; 626 if 630 not available. 1) Provide 630 finish on trim. e. Butt hinges: 630. f. Door stops, dead locks, mortise bolts, and miscellaneous hardware: 630 where available, 626 if 630 not available. g. Door overhead stops: 630. h. Closers: 600 prime coat with 689 finish coat, unless noted otherwise.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
C. Mortise Locks and Latches: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 1. a. Meet requirements of ADA. 2. Antifriction two-piece mechanical latchbolt with stainless steel anti-friction insert. a. One-piece stainless steel deadbolt, minimum 1-1/4 IN x 9/ 16 IN thick with 1 IN throw. b. 2-3/4 IN backset. c. Cylinder: Brass, 6 pin, with interchangeable core. d. ADA compliant thumb turn lever. 3. Locking, latching and retracting mechanism and lock case: a. Steel, unless noted otherwise. 1) Chrome or zinc dichromate plated. 4. Trim design: Corbin/Russwin "NSP". a. Functions as indicated in following table in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.13. 1) All electric lock hardware to be 24 Vdc. MORTISE LOCK NUMBERS ANSI
FUNCTION
CORBIN/RUSSWIN
F01
Passage
ML2010
F19
Privacy
ML2030
F13
Entrance or Office
ML2065
Electronic Lockset
ML20905 x M92
40 41 42 43
D. Door Closers: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 2. Size door closers to comply with ANSI recommendations for door size and location. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fabricate all closers with integral back check. Provide integral stop unless noted otherwise. a. Do not provide integral stop at closers indicated to be installed on pull side of door. b. Provide all weather fluid for all closers used in exterior doors. Full cover. a. Manufacturer's standard plastic cover. Arms, brackets, and plates: As required for complete installation. Closers: a. LCN 4040 Series or Norton 7500 Series or Corbin-Russwin DC6200 Series. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E. Hinges: 1. Butt hinges: a. ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 1) A5111: Stainless steel, full-mortise, anti-friction bearing, Grade 1. b. Ball bearing. c. Flat button tips. d. Butt hinges: 1) Hager BB1199. 2) McKinney T4B3386. e. Transfer hinge: 1) Hager BB1199ETW. 2) McKinney T4B3386CC. f. Hinge size: 1) Doors up to and including 46 IN wide: 4.5 IN x 4.5 IN. 2) Doors over 46 IN up to and including 60 IN wide: 5 IN high x 4.5 IN.
26 27 28
F. Door Stops: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.16. a. Wall stops: Ives WS406-CVX or WS406-CCV.
29 30 31 32 33 34
G. Overhead Door Holders/Stop: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.8. 2. Provide 'hold-open' function on all stops unless noted otherwise. a. Do not provide ‘hold-open’ function at fire rated doors. 3. Surface mounted stops: Rockwood N14400 Series or Glynn Johnson 90 Series. 4. Concealed stops: Rockwood N11000 Series or Glynn Johnson 100 Series.
35 36 37 38 39 40
H. Kickplates: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.6. 2. 8 IN high x 2 IN less than door width. 3. Beveled on all edges. 4. Thickness: a. Stainless steel: 0.050 IN.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
I.
Thresholds: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.21. 2. Thermally broken unit. 3. Height: 1/2 IN high maximum. a. Meet requirements of ADA. 4. Width: 4 IN . 5. Provide required bolt cutouts.
48 49 50 51 52
J.
Exit Devices: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 2. Single doors: Mortise 3. Pairs of doors: Concealed vertical rods. 4. Trim: Sargent “ET”.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5. 6.
a. Lever operation. b. Lever style: Sargent "L". Sargent "80 Series". a. Function as indicated on Hardware Schedule. Coordinate power supply and electric option requirements with access control system and electric door assisting device.
K. Astragal: UL listed for labeled doors.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
L. Weatherstripping: 1. Weather seal at jambs and head: a. Self-adhesive strip: Reese #797W. b. Color: Black. 2. Sweep at bottom of doors: a. Reese 701. b. Color: Clear anodized. 3. Weather seal astragal at meeting edges of pairs of doors: a. Reese 92 each leaf. b. Color: Clear anodized. Specifier: The 521 series is surface mounted, the 371 series is mortised.
19 20 21 22
M. Smoke Seals: 1. Self-adhesive strip: Reese #797. 2. Color: Black. 3. UL listed.
23 24 25 26
N. Silencers: 1. Hollow metal frames: Trimco 1229A or Rockwood 608. 2. FRP frames: Trimco 1229A or Rockwood 608. 3. Self-adhesive silencers are not acceptable.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
O. Keying: 1. Establish keying with Owner. a. Provide and set up complete visible card indexed system with key tags and control slips. b. Tag and identify keys. c. Provide two (2) keys for each lock or cylinder. d. Master key and key in groups as directed. e. Provide construction master keys for all exterior doors. f. Key to existing master key system.
36 37 38 39 40 41
P. Bolts: 1. ANSI/BHMAA 156.16. 2. Surface bolts: Rockwood 580 Series with top and bottom strikes. 3. Automatic flush bolts: a. Ives FB30 Series. b. Provide extended bolt length on doors over 84 IN tall.
42 43 44 45 46 47
Q. Coordinator: 1. Ives "Cor Series" or Rockwood 1600 Series. 2. Provide filler bar as required. 3. Finish of coordinator and filler bar to be anodized aluminum color to match other hardware finishes. 4. Mounting brackets as required.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 6
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
INSTALLATION
3 4
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Perform installation by or under the direct supervision of an AHC.
5
B. Provide all hardware in accordance with Building Code.
6
C. Fit hardware before final door finishing.
7
D. Permanently install hardware after door finishing operations are complete.
8
E. Use SDI mounting heights for hardware.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
F. Butt Hinges: 1. Provide non-removable pin (NRP) at: a. Exterior doors. b. Reverse handed doors equipped with locks. 2. Quantities: a. Door height 61 - 90 IN: Three (3). b. Door height 91 - 114 IN: Four (4). c. Door height 115 - 144 IN: Five (5). d. Doors over 48 IN wide and over 96 IN high: 1) Provide top butt hinge within 6 IN of the top of the door to top of hinge. 2) Provide one (1) additional butt hinge approximately 6 IN below the bottom of the top butt hinge. 3. Provide transfer hinge as necessary where electrified lockset or exit device is specified or as otherwise indicated in Hardware Schedule.
23 24
G. Closers: 1. Mount closers on push side of doors unless noted otherwise.
25
H. Provide coordinator when required by hardware specified.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
I.
Overhead Stops: 1. Provide overhead stop when corrosion resistant closer is specified. 2. Provide concealed overhead stop on doors scheduled to receive closer mounted on pull side of door. 3. Provide at interior doors not scheduled to receive a closer as follows: a. Doors that swing more than 105 degrees without encountering a wall or obstruction. 1) Stop shall limit swing of door from impacting wall or obstruction. b. Inactive leafs of pairs of doors.
34 35 36 37 38
J.
Wall Mount Door Stops: 1. Provide where specifically indicated on Hardware Schedule and at doors not otherwise indicated to receive: a. Overhead stop. b. Closer with integral stop.
39
K. Floor mounted stops are not acceptable unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section.
40
L. Install astragal on all pairs of UL labeled fire doors.
41 42 43
M. Provide silencers for door frames. 1. Hollow metal frames: See Specification Section 08 11 00. 2. FRP frames: See Specification Section 08 15 00.
44 45 46 47
N. Provide weather seal, door sweep and threshold at all exterior doors and where scheduled on interior doors. 1. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant. 2. Mount door sweeps on exterior face of door. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 7
1 2
3.
Mount weather seal astragal at meeting edges of pairs of doors on the exterior face of the doors.
3
O. Provide smoke seals on all fire rated doors.
4
P. Mount kickplates on push side of doors.
5 6 7
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to assure proper operation or function. 1. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
8 9 10 11
B. During week prior to startup, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items. 1. Clean and lubricate as necessary to assure proper function and operation. 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C. Inspection and Testing: 1. AHC shall inspect and test all door assemblies and provide written certification that door assemblies are in proper working order. a. Door assemblies required to swing in the direction of egress shall be inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 101. 2. Submit documentation and certification of testing in accordance with the certifications paragraph in the SUBMITTALS Article in PART 1 of this Specification Section.
22
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 8
SECTION 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing. 2. Fire resistance rated glass.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08 11 00 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors and Frames. 6. Section 08 41 10 - Storefront. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. Z97.1, Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C864, Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. b. C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. c. C1048, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. d. C1376, Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass. e. E119, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. f. E2190, Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. 3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): a. Title 16 - Commercial Practices, Chapter ii - Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), Subchapter B - Consumer Product Safety Act Regulations: 1) 16 CFR 1201, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 4. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. Glazing Manual. 5. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 6. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA): a. TM-3000, North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use. 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. b. 251, Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Resistance of Building Construction and Materials. c. 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. d. 257, Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 9, Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. b. 10B, Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. c. 263, Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5
9.
1.3
6 7 8 9
Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
10 11
B. Safety Glazing: Glazing meeting the requirements of the Building Code and CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
12
C. Other terms as identified in CSPC 16 CFR 1201.
13
1.4
SUBMITTALS
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Certification that glass has been tested and approved for use in fire resistance rated doors or walls. 1) Copies of all test criteria. 3. Certification that insulating glass units meet requirements of IGCC and are certified by IGCC to ASTM E2190.
25 26 27
B. Samples: 1. Two (2) 12 x 12 IN sample of each type, color, and thickness specified. a. Samples are not required for clear monolithic glass.
28 29
C. Informational Submittals: 1. Warranty.
30
1.5
31 32 33 34
WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written 10 year warranty to cover deterioration of glass, glass units, coatings and ceramic frit. 1. Insulating glass units shall be warranted against failure of hermetic seal resulting in fogging or film formation on the interior glass surfaces.
35
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
36
2.1
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Glass: a. Guardian Industries Corp. b. Insulite Glass Co. c. Pilkington. d. PPG. e. Viracon. 2. Fire Resistance Rated Glass: a. SAFTIFIRST division of O'Keefe's, Inc. b. Technical Glass Products. c. Vetrotech.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 2
1 2 3
3.
4 5
Gaskets, glazing compounds, setting blocks, spacers, sealant, sealant tape, etc., as recommended by glass manufacturer, glass unit fabricator. a. Provide materials as required by NFPA for use in fire-rated units.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
6 7 8 9 10
A. General: 1. ASTM C1036. a. Clear glass: Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3. b. Tinted glass: Type I, Class 2, Quality Q3. 2. Thickness: 1/4 IN, unless noted otherwise.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B. Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048. 1. General use: Kind HS. 2. Safety glazing: Kind FT. a. Meet requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CSPC 16 CFR 1201. 3. Condition: a. Clear or tinted vision glass: Condition A. b. Spandrel Glass (ceramic coated): Condition B. c. Coated vision glass: Condition C. 1) ASTM C1376, Kind CV or CO.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Fire Resistance Rated Glass: 1. ASTM E119 or UL 263 listed. 2. Fire rating required: as scheduled on Drawings. a. Fire-rated glazing assemblies shall be marked in accordance with the Building Code. 3. Thickness required by fire rating. a. Minimum 3/16 IN thick. 4. Optically clear, colorless and free from distortion. 5. Impact safety rated in addition to fire rating; meet ANSI Z97.1, Category 11.
28
2.3
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Insulating Glass Units: 1. ASTM E2190, Class A. 2. Two (2) lites of glass separated by a hermetically sealed air space. a. Spacer: Stainless steel "warm edge" spacer. 1) Thickness: 1/2 IN. 2) Color: Black. b. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone. 1) Color: Black.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
A. Glazing Compounds: 1. Non-sag, non-stain type. 2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring painting. 3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces. 4. One- or two-part polyurethane or silicone sealant for use in setting glass. a. Provide glazing compounds which will not be affected by chemicals stored in rooms where glazing compounds are used.
45
B. Sealant Tape: Butyl rubber sealant tape or ribbon having a continuous neoprene shim.
46 47 48 49 50
C. Gaskets: 1. Flexible polyvinyl chloride or neoprene. a. ASTM C864. b. Provide gaskets which will not be affected by chemicals stored in rooms where gaskets are used. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 3
1 2 3
2. 3.
Extruded of profile and hardness required to receive glass and provide a watertight installation. Provide gaskets in accordance with NFPA in fire resistance rated glazing.
4 5 6
D. Setting Blocks and Spacers: 1. Neoprene or EPDM, compatible with sealants used. a. ASTM C864.
7 8
E. Compressible Filler Stock: Closed cell polyethylene or polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam.
9
F. Shims, Clips, Screws and Other Miscellaneous Items: As required by condition.
10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11
3.1
INSTALLATION
12 13
A. Install in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer, GANA Glazing Manual and IGMA TM-3000.
14
B. Install setting blocks in adhesive or sealant.
15 16
C. Install spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing.
17
D. Provide 1/8 IN minimum bite of spacers on glass.
18
E. Spacer thickness to equal sealant width.
19 20 21 22 23
F. Prevent sealant exudation from glazing channels of insulating glass which is more than 1/2 IN thick; colored, heat absorbing, coated or laminated glass sizes larger than 75 united inches; and other glass more than 9/32 IN thick or larger than 125 united inches. 1. Leave void at heel (or install filler) at jambs and head. 2. Do not leave void (or install filler) at sill.
24
G. Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.
25
H. Immediately after installation, attach crossed streamers to framing held away from glass.
26 27 28
I.
Use polysulfide-based glazing sealants in window assembly and as perimeter sealant around frames in areas which may be exposed to chlorine gas or chlorine liquid splash or spillage. 1. See Specification Section 07 92 00 for sealants.
29 30
J.
Install fire resistance rated glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with applicable fire testing criteria.
31
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
32
A. Do not install glass with edge damage.
33
B. Do not apply anything to surfaces of glass.
34
C. Remove and replace damaged glass.
35
3.3
CLEANING
36 37
A. Maintain glass reasonably clean during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute to deterioration of other materials.
38 39 40
B. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than seven (7) days prior to acceptance of work in each area. 1. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6
3.4
SCHEDULES A. General: 1. Provide safety glazing for all applications where required by the Building Code and CPSC 16 CFR 1201. 2. Provide heat strengthened glazing for all general use applications where safety glazing is not required.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B. Glass Type 5: Insulating Low-E Units. 1. Exterior lite: 1/4 IN with Viracon on #2 surface. a. Color: {clear. 2. 1/2 IN dehydrated air space. 3. Interior lite: 1/4 IN clear. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Transmittance: 1) Visible light: 76 percent. b. U-Value 1) Winter: 0.31. 2) Summer: 0.29. c. Shading Coefficient: 0.63. d. Relative Heat Gain: 0.54. 5. Viracon Solarscreen 85.
21 22 23
C. Glass Type 15: Fire Resistance Rated Glass. 1. Thickness and hourly rating as necessary for location shown on Drawings. 2. Minimum light transmission 81 percent.
25
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GLASS AND GLAZING 08 81 00 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 08 90 00 LOUVERS AND VENTS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Louvers and vents.
7 8 9 10 11 12
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 62 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Drawing showing location of each louver or vent, indicating size and arrangement of blankoff plates if required. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Color chart showing manufacturer's full line of colors including exotic and special colors for color selection by Engineer.
31
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Louvers: a. Airolite Co. b. Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Ruskin Manufacturing. d. Industrial Louvers, Inc. e. American Warming.
41
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
42 43 44
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Louvers: 1. 4 IN deep.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 90 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Drainable with blades at 37-1/2 degrees. Continuous blade appearance. ASTM B221 extruded aluminum, alloy 6063T5, minimum 0.081 IN thick. Minimum free area: 8.58 SF for 4 x 4 FT louver. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 IN of water at 700 fpm. Water penetration: 0.01 OZ/SF at 873 fpm. AMCA certified. Ruskin "ELF 375DX". Insect screen: a. 18-16 mesh aluminum. b. Install in standard aluminum frame. 11. Bird screen: a. 1/2 IN square mesh. b. 16 GA aluminum. c. Install in standard frame.
16
B. Anchors, Fasteners, Reinforcing: Aluminum or stainless steel.
17 18 19
C. Finish: 1. Architectural Class 1 coating per AA DAF 45. a. light bronze anodized.
20 21
D. Size: Refer to Mechanical Drawings for louver size, and refer to Architectural Drawings for louver shapes.
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
3.1
INSTALLATION
24
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
25
B. Install anchoring and bracing accessories as required.
26 27
C. Seal around perimeter on exterior and interior. 1. See Section 07 92 00.
28 29
D. Install 0.040 IN aluminum flashing at sill to match louver. 1. See Section 07 62 00.
31
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 90 00 - 2
SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Non-Structural Metal Framing in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
7
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
8
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 10 11
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Member of Certified Steel Stud Association (CSSA), Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA).
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C645 Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 2. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process 3. ASTM C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 4. ASTM A1003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic and NonmetallicCoated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
20
C. Provide studs and accessories of type tested and listed for construction indicated.
21 22 23
D. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. 2. GA-234 Control Joints for Fire-Resistance Rated Systems.
24
1.3
25 26 27 28 29 30
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide copies of manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each type of material and accessory required. a. Where fire resistance classification is indicated, submit copies of nationally recognized testing laboratory listings of products proposed for use. b. Include data required to show specification compliance.
31
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
32
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
A. Non-Structural Metal Framing: 1. Base: a. Telling Industries 2. Optional: a. CEMCO Steel Framing and Metal Lath b. ClarkDietrich Building Systems c. Custom Stud Inc. d. Marino/WARE e. MBA Metal Framing f. MRI Steel Framing LLC. g. The Steel Network
44
B. Isolation Strip Material: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1
1 2 3 4
1. 2.
5 6 7
Base: a. Reflectix, Inc. Optional: a. Saint-Gobain
C. Knee Wall Brace: 1. Base: a. Pittcon Industries
8 9 10 11 12 13
D. Interlocking Grid Support Systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. Base: a. USG Corporation 2. Optional: a. Armstrong b. Chicago Metallic
14
E. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 01 25 13.
15 16
F. Products proposed for use in fire-rated assemblies: 1. Approved by nationally recognized testing laboratory.
17
2.2
18 19 20
DESIGN CRITERIA A. Select steel studs in accordance with manufacturer's standard load tables and following design pressures and maximum deflections: Performance Criteria Use Condition
2
Wall enclosing stairs, elevator hoistways, and other vertical shafts Wall enclosing vestibules, ground floor lobbies, and similar spaces subject to intermittent exposure to exterior wind conditions Walls scheduled with Tile Backer Board, Moisture-Resistant, Impact-Resistant, or Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard Walls scheduled to receive Tile, lath and plaster, or veneer 1 plaster. Typical Interior Walls/Partitions (those not listed above) Interior Ceilings, Soffits and Bulkheads
Design Pressure 10 LBS/SF 15 LBS/SF
5 LBS/SF 5 LBS/SF 5 LBS/SF
Maximum Deflection L/240 L/240 L/360
L/240 L/360
Footnotes 1. Limit deflection to L/360 where wall cladding on either face is any of the following: Ceramic Tile, Stone Tile, Porcelain Tile, Thin Brick, Lath & Plaster, Simulated Masonry, Adhered-stone, Veneer Plaster and similar brittle finishes which are prone to movement-induced cracking. 2. Where elements meet multiple conditions; Use most stringent Deflection and Design Pressure values.
21 22 23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32
2.3
MATERIALS A. Metal Studs and Floor Tracks: 1. C-shaped, roll-formed studs and tracks conforming to ASTM C645. 2. Galvanized: G40. 3. Stud and track depths: As indicated by wall type. 4. Minimum flange width: 1-1/4 IN . 5. Minimum thickness: 18 mil (25 GA), except as follows: a. Increase member thickness to comply with performance criteria. b. Increase member thickness to minimum 30 mil (20 GA) studs at following conditions: 1) Jambs of openings: Two 30 mil (20 GA) studs.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
6.
7. 8. 9.
2) One or both sides of walls faced with any of following: a) Wall mounted cabinetry and equipment. b) Tile backing board. c) Adhered stone. d) Plaster. e) Moisture-resistant. f) Abuse-resistant wallboard. g) Lead backed gypsum wallboard. 3) Where walls do not extend to overhead structural deck, and without supporting diagonal bracing, or horizontal stiffeners. In lieu of increased member thickness, design may employ diagonal braces above ceiling to reduce overall span. a. Coordinate locations with building services items. b. Do not employ studs with member thickness less than allowed by fire resistance rated assemblies. High strength 50KSI studs shall comply with design criteria of equivalent thickness standard 33KSI studs listed. Base products: a. Drywall Framing System by Telling Industries. Optional products, high strength steel: a. Viper Stud by Telling Industries.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 43
B. Head of Wall Accessories: 1. Configure to accommodate deflection of superstructure without inducing axial loading on partition wall. 2. Maintain structural integrity, fire and smoke-resistance, and sound control as required by each wall. 3. Slotted top deflection track: a. Deep leg, vertically slotted track. b. Cold-formed sheet steel; galvanized; G60. c. Thickness: 30 mil (20 GA) minimum. d. Width: As required for studs sizes indicated. e. Depth: Minimum 2-1/2 IN down-standing legs with 1/4 IN wide by 1-1/2 IN high slots spaced 1 IN on center. 4. Z-bars, cold formed channels and clips: a. Accommodate thickness of spray-applied fire-resistive materials. 5. UL-listed fire resistant components tested for compliance with requirements indicated. 6. Firestopping Materials: a. Sealants, sprays, intumescent strips and forming materials. b. Coordinate with sealants specified in Section 07 84 00 and Section 07 92 00. c. Intumescent applications: 1) Factory or field applied. 7. .
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
C. Accessory Items: 1. Wire Ties: a. Minimum thickness: 43 mil (18 GA) soft annealed, galvanized. 2. Track Fasteners: a. Power driven type, to withstand minimum 190 LBS shear when driven. 3. Closure: a. Continuous 30 mil (20 GA) galvanized closure angle to receive vapor retarder and vapor retarder tape. 4. Isolation Strip Material: a. Non-absorbent, foam padding to prevent direct contact between metal framing and exterior concrete or masonry. b. Thickness: 0.40 mil minimum. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
5.
6.
7.
c. Install continuous strips in widths to match steel framing and furring. d. Base product: Sill Sealer by Reflectix, Inc. Metal Blocking: a. C-shaped modified track runners. b. G40 galvanized. c. Backing height: 6 IN minimum. d. Flange width: 1-1/4 IN minimum. e. Thickness: 30 mil (20 GA) minimum. Backing - Flat Plate: a. Flat, sheet metal stock per ASTM A1008. b. G40 galvanized. c. Thickness: 50 mil (18 GA) minimum. Shower Seat Support: a. Conceal in framed walls. b. Vertical steel channels with welded steel plate. c. Anchor channels to floor and structure above with steel angles. d. Provide stainless steel sleeves at each bolt that attach shower seat to support bracket in wall 1) Extend past finish face of wall tile 1/8 IN . e. Components: 1) C3 x 6 cold formed steel channel. a) Brace with horizontal channel at 96 IN AFF. 2) Steel plate: 24 x 20 x 3/8 IN . a) Weld to steel channels with top of plate at 20 IN AFF. 3) Steel angles: 3 x 3 x 1/4 x 3 IN . 4) Stainless steel sleeves: 3/8 IN diameter. 5) Expansion bolts with 3-1/2 IN embedment.
D. Support Systems for Gypsum Ceilings: 1. Interlocking Grid Systems: a. ASTM C635, direct-hung system composed of T-Shaped framing members designed to carry load of screw-applied gypsum ceiling board. b. Tabs on Cross-Tees to interlock into slots in Main Runners where intersections occur. c. Base Product: Drywall Suspension System by USG Corporation. 2. Track and Channel Systems: a. ASTM C645 roll-formed steel with G40 galvanized coating. b. Thickness: 30 mil (20 GA) minimum; Use heavier gauge as dictated by conditions. c. Carrying channels: 1) Size: 1-1/2 IN . d. Furring channels: 1) Sizes: 7/8 IN and 1-1/2 IN , as indicated. 3. Stud-Framed Ceiling/Soffit Systems: a. C-shaped studs or joists; roll-formed. b. Galvanized: G40. c. Frame member depth: 3-5/8 IN minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 1) Use wider stud sections if ceiling span and support requires. d. Flange width: 1-1/4 IN minimum. e. Stud thickness: 33 mil minimum. 4. Tie Wire: a. ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Diameter, single-strand: 62 mils (14 GA) minimum. c. Diameter, double-strand: 42 mils (18 GA) minimum. 5. Wire Hangers: a. ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Diameter: 97 mils (12 GA) minimum. 6. Anchors in Concrete: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
a.
7.
8.
Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 or ASTM E1512 as applicable. b. Acceptable types: Cast-in-place, post-installed expansion anchors and post-installed bonded anchors. c. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM-B633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: a. Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190. b. Comply with seismic design requirements where applicable. Other items including suspension wire, tie wire, attachment devices: As specified and indicated.
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
3.1
INSPECTION
19
A. Examine supporting structure and conditions under which system will be installed.
20
B. Correct conditions detrimental to proper installation.
21
C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
22
3.2
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
23
A. Layout and install metal framing accurate to dimensions indicated in drawings.
24 25 26
B. Installation Standard: ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Comply with additional requirements in ASTM C840 relative to framing installation.
27 28
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
29
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
30 31
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
32 33
F. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
34 35 36
G. Extend framing full height to structural supports. 1. Exception: Where partitions are indicated to terminate at, or just above, suspended ceilings. 2. Continue framing around ducts and similar items which penetrate partitions.
37 38
H. Position studs vertically engaging floor track and head of wall deflection track. 1. Align stud knockouts to facilitate running of wires and conduit.
39
I.
Space studs maximum 16 IN on center.
40 41
J.
Provide additional studs at corners, partition intersections and terminations of partitions, and at each side of control joints.
42 43
K. Positively anchor studs to floor tracks with self-tapping pan head screws, or stud clinching tool on both flanges of each stud.
44 45
L. Anchor studs to deflection track with wafer head screws on both flanges of each stud. 1. Maintain deflection gap between top of stud and top of slotted track. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5
1
2.
Install screws at centerline of slot and secure allowing vertical movement.
2
M. Anchor fire rated partitions as required by fire resistance design, and firestopping design.
3 4
N. Where partitions abut vertical structural elements, provide perimeter relief per Gypsum Association GA-600 Strain Relief System details.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
O. Head-of-Wall: 1. Provide slotted top track for walls extended to structure. 2. Configure to resist lateral loads while accommodating deflection of overhead building superstructure without inducing axial loading on partition framing. 3. Secure deflection track to structure in accordance with industry standards and regulatory requirements. 4. Secure at corners and at ends. 5. Cut vertical studs 5/8 IN short to create a deflection gap when installed into top track. a. Secure vertical studs to top track with framing screw at each stud flange, screwing through track slots for positive stud connection. 6. Secure Gypsum Wallboard to vertical studs; do not secure Gypsum Wallboard to top track directly. 7. Where partitions attach to structural elements that are scheduled to receive Spray-applied Fire Resistive Materials (SFRM): a. Install Z-bar to underside of steel beams and steel deck before application of sprayed fireproofing. b. Locate Z-bars perpendicular to line of partition, spaced maximum 16 IN on center. c. Attach each Z-bar with two 0.145 IN x 1 IN powder-actuated fasteners located minimum 1 IN from ends of Z-bar. d. After fireproofing, secure top track to Z-bars with No. 8 x 5/8 IN wafer head framing screws spaced maximum 16 IN on center. 8. Where fire-rated partitions are offset and will not clear fireproofed steel beam, extend Z-bar outrigger horizontally from bottom of beam out to minimum 2 IN beyond width of head-ofwall. a. Attach 3/4 IN expanded metal lath continuous, width of top of Z-bar outriggers prior to fireproofing steel beam to accommodate sprayed fireproofing. 9. Prepare wall for installation of seals, firestopping, or both: a. Fire-rated Walls: Prepare for fire-resistive joint assemblies specified in Section 07 84 00. b. Non-fire rated partitions including Smoke Partitions: Prepare for Acoustical Sealant specified in Section 07 92 00. 3.3
FRAMING AT OPENINGS
37 38 39 40
A. Control Joints (CJ): 1. Install additional stud, maximum 1/2 IN from jamb studs. 2. Do not fasten extra stud to track or jamb stud. 3. Refer to specification Section 09 29 00 for control joint locations.
41 42 43 44 45 46
B. Prefabricated headers, jambs, and sill framing systems option: 1. Proprietary opening framing systems may be used as an alternative to conventionally fabricated framing. 2. Pre-approved Products: a. HDS Framing System by ClarkDietrich. b. Quick Frame Rough Opening System by Marino/ Ware.
47 48 49 50 51 52
C. Door Openings: 1. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section for cripple studs at head and secure to jamb studs. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and secure laterally to overhead structure. 3. Jamb Studs: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4.
5.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Minimum thickness of jamb studs: 30 mil (20 GA)at openings. c. Securely attach jamb studs to door frames. d. Attach drywall to both studs equally. Headers: a. Openings less than 4 FT wide: 1) Cut-to-length section of floor runner above and below wall openings. 2) Split flanges and bend webs at ends. 3) Overlap and screw attach jamb studs to frames. b. Openings over 4 FT wide: 1) Cut-to-length, horizontal box beam studs above and below wall openings. 2) Design for actual span and loading. c. Incorporate miscellaneous steel members, specified in Section 05 50 00, and wood blocking, specified in Section 06 10 00, where indicated. Control Joints at head of jambs: a. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 IN clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
D. Other Framed Openings: 1. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3. Cripple Studs: a. Install cut-to-length intermediate vertical studs above and below openings. b. Spacing: As indicated for typical full-length studs. 4. Incorporate miscellaneous steel members, specified in Section 05 50 00, and wood blocking, specified in Section 06 10 00, where indicated. 3.4
WALL BACKING AND BLOCKING
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
A. Metal Wall Backing: Provide in-wall metal wall backing reinforcement where following items are mounted to interior walls and interior face of exterior walls: 1. Crash rails, chair rails, wall bumpers, and similar wall protection devices. 2. Contractor or Owner-furnished equipment indicated to be wall-mounted. 3. Toilet accessories that do not include proprietary backing devices. 4. Toilet partitions and lockers. 5. Markerboards, tackboards, and chalkboards. 6. Other wall-mounted items where backing is indicated by details or specification.
36
B. Wood Wall Blocking: Specified in Section 06 10 00.
37
C. Coordinate mounting height, location, and coverage with item to be supported.
38
D. Determine material width according to item to be supported.
39 40
E. Provide in-wall metal wall backing material to interior metal stud walls specified herein and Exterior stud walls specified in Section 05 44 00.
41
F. Attachment: Minimum 2 - #10 sheet metal screws at each stud.
42
3.5
CEILING FRAMING
43
A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
44 45
B. Provide required items to support and trim out neatly, flush or recessed mechanical and electrical items.
46 47 48 49
C. Frame openings in ceiling support system to accommodate access panels and similar openings and penetrations. 1. Completely frame openings with closed channel side of stud facing opening for support of recessed mechanical and electrical items. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 7
1
3.6
CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
2 3 4
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings, but not less than required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.
5 6
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where abutting or penetrated by building structure.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and secure fasteners appropriate for substrate. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and secure fasteners appropriate for structure and hanger. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D. Grid Suspension Systems: 1. Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. 2. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3. Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 IN in 12 FT measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
34 35 36 37
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 8
SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Gypsum Wallboard in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
7
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
8
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C475 Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C841 Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring. 4. ASTM C954 Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases. 5. ASTM C1002 Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases. 6. ASTM C1047 Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 7. ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 8. ASTM C1629 Abuse-Resistant Non-decorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and FiberReinforced Cement Panels. 9. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 10. ASTM E84 Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 11. ASTM E90 Sound Transmission Testing. 12. ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction. 13. ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 14. ASTM F2547 Standard Test Method for Determining the Attenuation Properties in a Primary X-ray Beam of Materials Used to Protect Against Radiation Generated During the Use of X-ray Equipment
31 32 33 34
B. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. 2. GA-234 Control Joints for Fire-Resistance Rated Systems. 3. GA-238 Guidelines for Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board.
35 36 37 38 39
C. Fire Resistant Rated Assemblies: 1. For fire resistance rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. 2. Provide materials listed by UL, or other approved testing laboratory, for construction and rating type indicated.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
D. STC Rated Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2. Facility Guidelines Institute (FGI): a. FGI Guidelines For Design and Construction of Healthcare Facilities: 1) Sound and Vibration Requirements. b. 2010 FGI Guidelines For Design and Construction of Healthcare Facilities. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. ANSI S1.1 American National Standard Acoustical Terminology. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
b. c. d.
4.
5.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
ANSI S1.4 American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters. ANSI S1.4 American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters. ANSI S1.43 American National Standard Specifications for Integrating-Averaging Sound Level Meters. ASTM International (ASTM): a. ASTM C423 Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. b. ASTM C634 Standard Terminology Relating to Building and Environmental Acoustics. c. ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. d. ASTM E366 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings. e. ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. f. ASTM E966 Standard Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Facades and Façade Elements. American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. ASHRAE 2007 Handbook: Chapter 47 – Sound and Vibration Control.
E. Radiation Shielding Assemblies: 1. National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP): a. NCRP Report No. 147 Structural Shielding and Design Evaluation for Medical Use of X-rays and Gamma Rays of Energies up to 10MeV b. Comply with requirements of local, state or federal regulatory agencies where building or safety standards or criteria exceed NCRP Report Numbers 49 and 147. 2. Fabricator-Installer Qualifications: a. Not less than ten (10) years experience in successful fabrication and installation of radiation protection similar to work specified. b. Furnish proof of insurance certifying Fabricator-Installer is specifically fabrication and installation of X-ray Protection Materials for Shielding. 3. Certification: a. Furnish certificate of compliance signed by Manufacturer and Fabricator-Installer stating materials are in accordance with Contract Documents and physicist shielding report. 1.3
34 35
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s specifications for each type of material and accessory.
36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
A. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Base: a. Georgia Pacific (GP). 2. Optional: a. American Gypsum b. CertainTeed c. Continental Building Products d. National Gypsum Company (NGC) e. United States Gypsum (USG)
47 48 49 50 51
B. Lead Product Suppliers: 1. Base: a. A&L Shielding. 2. Optional: a. NELCO. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 2
1 2 3 4
b. c. d. e.
Ameray. Radiation Protection Products. Ray Bar Engineering. Mayco.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Wallboard Composite: 1. Base: a. National Gypsum Company. 2. Optional: a. CertainTeed. b. Pabco. c. Supress Products, LLC.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D. Drywall Trim Accessories: 1. Base: a. United States Gypsum (USG) 2. Optional: a. ClarkDietrich b. Phillips Manufacturing c. Structus Building Technologies
19 20 21 22 23 24
E. Specialty Drywall Trim: 1. Base: a. Pittcon Industries. 2. Optional: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc.
25 26 27
F. Foam Tape: 1. Base: a. As noted.
28 29 30
G. Sound Attenuation Batts (SAB): 1. Base: a. As noted.
31 32 33
H. Preformed Acoustical Seal for Wall Boxes: 1. Base: a. STC Architectural Products
34 35 36
I.
37
2.2
Pressure Sensitive Fire Tape: 1. Base: a. E-Z Taping System.
MATERIALS
38 39 40
A. Furnish in maximum available lengths, consistent with installation requirements. 1. Long Edge: Tapered. 2. Short Ends: Square.
41
B. Upgrade listed types to fire rated equivalent products when used in fire rated assemblies.
42 43 44
C. Provide listed GWB products to mold and moisture resistant types, where wallboard is installed in Electrical, Communication Rooms, Mechanical shafts, Stair Shafts and similar locations where wallboard is installed prior to building being weathertight.
45
D. Framing and suspension systems for Gypsum Board Ceilings: Specified in Section 09 22 16.
46
E. Firestopping: Specified in Section 07 84 00.
47
F. Thermal Insulation: Specified in Section 07 21 00 and other Division 07 sections.
48
G. Interior face of exterior walls and rooms where moisture or high humidity is present: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Mold and moisture resistant gypsum panels (MRGWB). Gypsum panels, with glass mat facer per ASTM C1658. Thickness: 5/8 IN . Mold resistance score: 10 per ASTM D3273. Apply continuously to interior face of exterior stud walls prior to framing interior partitions and ceilings. Where MR wallboard is scheduled in fire rated walls, provide approved fire resistive products with comparable moisture resistance. Base product: a. DensArmor Plus Interior Panel and DensArmor Plus Fireguard Interior Panel Fireguard by Georgia Pacific.
H. Interior Partitions and Ceilings: 1. Gypsum panels – Type X: a. ASTM C1396. b. Thickness: 5/8 IN . c. Type X core. d. Base product: 1) ToughRock Fireguard X Gypsum Wallboard by Georgia Pacific. 2. Tile Backer Board (TBB): a. Moisture resistant treated gypsum core, glass mats on both sides, and acrylic water barrier or water resistant gypsum coating on finished side. b. Provide TBB at walls of showers, tub rooms, toilet rooms, decontamination rooms, and similar walls where tile is scheduled. c. Thickness: 1/2 IN . d. Thickness: 5/8 IN type X at rated walls. e. Mold resistance score: 10 per ASTM D3273. f. Base Products: 1) Non-Rated Walls: DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. 2) Fire Rated Walls: DensShield Fireguard Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific. g. Include Level 5 finish at non-tiled portions. 3. Lead Lined Gypsum Wallboard (LLGWB): a. Lead sheet factory laminated to gypsum board carrier. 1) Panel size: 48 IN wide x manufacturer's standard lengths, with lead edge flanges. b. Gypsum wallboard substrate: 1) ASTM C1396 2) 5/8 IN thick 3) Type X. c. Lead Sheet: 1) Unpierced, ASTM B749, alloy UNS L51121, chemical-copper lead. 2) Lead Thickness: As indicated. a) Variation in sheet thickness: Less than 3 percent. 3) Extend lead 1 IN beyond edge of gypsum panel. d. Accessories: 1) Lead battens, tabs, and disks as prescribed by UL Designs indicated, to compensate for loss of integrity at screw penetrations. a) 0.125 IN to 0.146 IN thick. b) Lead Battens: 2 IN wide strips. c) Lead Tabs: 2 IN x 5 IN . d) Lead Disks: of 2) Lead Angles: a) Leak proof, lead angle system providing complete coverage of gamma rays. b) Use at inside corners. 3) Sheet lead to wrap electrical outlets, pipe and duct penetrations, and similar penetrations. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
I.
Trim: 1. Interior Trim: a. Material: Galvanized or aluminum coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, paper faced galvanized steel sheet, or paper faced structural laminate. b. Material for wet areas: Zinc. c. Shapes: 1) Corner bead. 2) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 3) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 4) U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 5) Control joint. 6) Curved Edge Corner bead: With notched or flexible flanges. 7) Other items as indicated.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
J.
Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Use product types recommended by wallboard manufacturer for each condition. 2. Materials compatible with other compounds applied previously or on successive coats. 3. Provide dust control products in occupied areas or adjacent to occupied areas. 4. Joint tape: a. Interior gypsum wallboard: Paper. b. Tile backing panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 5. Joint compounds for interior gypsum wallboard: a. Setting type joint compound: 1) Filling open joints and voids. 2) Embedding tape and first coat over joints, fasteners and trim flanges. 6. Lightweight setting type joint compound: a. Second coat. b. Final, skim coat on surfaces receiving a Level 5 finish. c. Drying type all purpose joint compound: 1) Second and third coats. 2) Final, skim coat, on surfaces receiving a Level 5 finish. d. Spray applied coating compound: 1) Final, skim coat, on surfaces receiving a Level 5 finish. 7. Joint compounds for moisture resistant gypsum wallboard: a. Setting type joint compound: 1) Filling open joints and voids. 2) Embedding tape and first coat over joints, fasteners and trim flanges. b. Lightweight setting type joint compound: 1) Second and third coats. 2) Final, skim coat on surfaces receiving a Level 5 finish.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
K. Acoustical Materials: 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Minimum nominal thickness: As required to achieve STC indicated for wall systems. 3. Density: As required to achieve STC indicated for wall systems. 4. Sound attenuation batts (SAB): a. Glass or mineral fiber. b. Commercial sound blanket, ASTM C665, Type I, unfaced, produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. c. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84: 1) Maximum flame spread: 10. 2) Maximum smoke developed: 10. d. Fire rated assemblies: Select SAB materials and thicknesses that that are approved for use in assemblies listed.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
e.
5.
Acoustically rated assemblies: Select SAB materials and thicknesses that that are approved for use in assemblies listed. f. Base Product: Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation by Owens-Corning; Preformed acoustical seal for wall boxes: a. Box Seal by STC Sound Control b. Molded neoprene, durometer A-40 complying with ASTM D2000. c. Formed to fit the electrical device, outlet and service boxes. d. STC improvement: 6 db in accordance to ASTM E90. 6. Provide at electrical and service box penetrations in sound rated walls.
10 11
L. Interior joint sealants, including acoustical sealants: 1. See Section 07 92 00.
12 13 14 15 16
M. Fasteners: 1. Bugle head screws: ASTM C1002 for use with maximum 22 GA metal stud framing. 2. Self-tapping bugle head screws: ASTM C954 for use with minimum 20 GA metal framing. 3. Type S for gypsum wallboard to metal; Type G for gypsum wallboard to gypsum wallboard. 4. Screws used with backer boards: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
17 18 19
N. Laminating Adhesive: 1. Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
20 21 22 23
O. Foam Tape: 1. PVC 1/2 x 1/4 IN : With pressure sensitive adhesive; Norseal. 2. EPDM 1/2 x 1/4 IN : With pressure sensitive adhesive; Cellular rubber by Gasket Dynamics.
24 25
P. Backing for Control Joints: 1. Fire rated board.
26 27 28 29 30
Q. Sealer for Moisture Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Manufacturer's standard compound. 2. Use at joints, cut edges and screw penetrations.
31
PART 3 - EXECUTION
32
3.1
INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
33
A. Examine supporting structure and conditions prior to wallboard installation.
34
B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
35
C. Start of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for performance.
36
3.2
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
37 38
A. Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
39
B. Remove loose materials and vacuum cavity of gypsum dust prior to enclosing stud space.
40 41
C. Install wallboard vertically with edges over metal stud framing members and similar framing support members.
42
D. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place.
43
E. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partition so they occur on different framing members.
44
F. Stagger joints in multi layer applications not less than one support from previous layer.
45
G. Seal ends, cutouts and screw penetrations of moisture resistant boards with sealer. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 6
1 2
H. Install wallboard over metal framing studs and similar framing support members at interior face of exterior walls full height from floor to structure above.
3 4 5 6
I.
Wallboard installation prior to building being weathertight: 1. Replace scheduled GWB products to their mold-resistant counterparts. a. Products proposed are subject to Architect approval. 2. Exposure time shall be limited by manufacturer requirements.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J.
Sound Insulation: 1. Install sound insulation in walls from floor to structure above, where sound rated walls are indicated. 2. Install in thicknesses and densities necessary to achieve sound rating. 3. Fill cavities where studs are installed nested or toe-to-toe. 4. Pack spaces around electric boxes and other penetrations to maintain full sound rating. a. Fill small voids that remain with Acoustical Sealant.
14 15 16 17
K. Preformed Acoustical Seal for Wall Boxes: 1. Place preformed seal over exposed outlet box flush with wall surface with device protruding through preformed or precut opening in seal. 2. Secure in place with outlet cover plate.
18 19
L. Curved Partitions: 1. Space studs or furring to prevent flat areas between framing at curved surfaces.
20 21
M. Wall Reveals: 1. Install reveal wall channels and/or aluminum framing as recommended by manufacturer.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
N. Screw Placement: 1. Proceed with attachment from board center toward ends and edges. 2. Space maximum 8 IN OC at edges and 12 IN OC in field of board. a. Use closer screw spacing if required by UL. b. Fasten wallboard to each stud where multiple studs are installed at door jambs. 3. Secure wallboard to vertical studs; do not secure to top track directly. a. Follow top track manufacturer’s screw pattern requirements. b. Install additional framing if required. c. Top track is specified in Section 09 22 16. 4. Set screws between 3/8 IN and 1/2 IN from edges. 5. Drive screws so head rests in slight dimple without cutting face paper or fracturing core.
33
3.3
INSTALLATION - RADIATION SHIELDING
34
A. Verify shielding materials meet project requirements prior to installation.
35
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and U.L. requirements.
36 37
C. Perform corrective work to achieve complete radiation isolation, including repair or replacement of finishes.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
D. Rear Access: 1. Definition: Lead lined GWB installation is physically possible from both sides of wall. 2. Construct per UL V439 or other approved design when fire rating is indicated. 3. Install lead battens to inside face of stud flange. 4. Screw lead lined wallboard to studs. 5. Space screws 8 IN OC at edges and 12 IN OC in field. 6. Install nominal 2 IN square lead cap crimped over screw points penetrating lead lined wallboard. 7. Install 2 IN wide sheet lead strip behind joints. a. Install at door and window frame perimeters. b. Overlap lead minimum 1 IN .
49
E. Front Access: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7 8
F. Fire Rated Assembly, UL-U430: 1. 1 Hour.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Definition: Lead lined GWB installation is only possible from X-ray Room side of wall. Construct per UL approved design when fire rating is indicated. Install lead battens to inside face of stud flange. Screw lead laminated wallboard to studs. Install lead buttons over screw heads. Adhesively install second wallboard layer.
G. Installation and Protection at Penetrating Items: 1. Penetrations of lead linings: Provide lead shields to maintain continuity of protection. 2. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that required in assembly being penetrated. 3. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners unless indicated on Drawings. 4. Cut wall penetration covers from lead sheet of equal or greater thickness than backing on adjacent wall panels and size to cover penetrations with laps 1 IN minimum wide. 5. Adhesive apply lead sheet penetration covers on penetrating boxes and raceways and return penetration covers to backside of lead-backed wall panels with 1 IN minimum laps. a. Do not use penetrating fasteners unless indicated otherwise. 6. Outlet boxes and conduit: a. Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining at least 1 IN . b. Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 IN from box. 7. Duct openings: a. Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance from partition or ceiling or both equal to three times the largest opening dimension. b. Lap lead sheet with adjacent lead lining at least 1 IN . 8. Duct Penetrations; where lead sheet 1/8 IN thick and where duct shielding is less than 24 IN wide: a. Wrap ducts with wall penetration covers, lapping lead joints 1 IN minimum. b. Secure lead sheet in place with 1 IN minimum width steel bands spaced not more than 12 IN on center. c. Do not cut into lead sheet with tightening steel bands. 9. Duct penetrations, where lead sheet is greater than 1/8 IN thick or where duct shielding is greater than 24 IN wide: a. Laminate wall penetration covers to fire retardant treated plywood or other similar structural panels conforming to shape of duct, lapping lead joints 1 IN minimum. b. Secure lead laminated panels to ducts with mechanical fasteners located at duct seams and corners. c. Where necessary to prevent lead laminated panels from overloading duct supports, independently suspend panels from hangers secured to overhead building structure. d. Cover fastener heads with lead sheet matching thickness of adjacent lead. 10. Piping: a. Unless otherwise indicated, wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 IN from point of penetration. 3.4
INSTALLATION - TRIM ACCESSORIES
46 47
A. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
48 49 50 51 52
B. Interior Trim: 1. Install in following locations: 2. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 3. J-Bead or LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where wallboard abuts dissimilar surfaces and where indicated. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 8
1 2 3
C. Specialty Trim: 1. Install in locations indicated. 3.5
INSTALLATION - SHAFTWALL
4
A. Install shaft walls in compliance with UL and Gypsum Association description.
5
B. Provide shaft wall systems permitting entire erection procedure from outside shaft.
6 7
C. Provide special metal runner angles and channels, and studs or splines spaced per manufacturer’s requirements.
8 9
D. Comply with requirements for thickness of metal and thickness of wall, for heights of wall indicated.
10
E. Use maximum practical board lengths.
11 12 13 14 15
F. Projections in Elevator Hoistways: 1. Inspect elevator shafts to determine if projections greater than 4 IN exist. 2. At projections 4 IN and greater: a. Install GWB bevels sloping 75 degrees from horizontal. b. Support GWB with metal studs.
16
3.6
INSTALLATION – CEILING
17
A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
18
B. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels’ not less than one framing member.
19 20
C. During cold or damp weather, insulate before installing gypsum board on a ceiling with a vapor barrier.
21
3.7
CONTROL JOINTS
22 23 24 25
A. General: 1. Install Control Joints in location indicated and as described in this article. 2. Install suitable backing material to maintain required rating where Control Joints occur in fire or sound rated assemblies.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
B. Partitions: 1. Extend control joints continuous full height of partition or wall. 2. Provide vertical control joints on both wall faces which align with door frames, window frames, and similar opening as follows: a. Single Doors and Cased Opening: b. Locate CJ’s at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. c. Pair doors: 1) Locate CJ’s at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. 2) Exception: Control Joints are not required where partition forms a cross-corridor condition. d. Doors with adjacent sidelights: 1) Locate CJ’s at both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and, from sill to floor at sidelight jambs. e. Sliding doors: 1) Locate CJ’s at both jambs, from head of opening to top of partition. f. Punched windows less than 30 FT in width: 1) Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and from sill edge to floor. g. Ribbon windows greater than 30 FT in width: 1) Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and from sill edge to floor. 2) Locate additional intermediate CJ’s so maximum distance between CJ’s does not exceed 30 FT apart. 3. Provide additional vertical Control Joints, spaced no more than 30 FT apart from each other, from opening related CJ’s, or from corners. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 9
1 2 3
4.
Provide horizontal control joints at partitions which are more than one story in height: a. Locate horizontal Control Joints where partitions bypass each intermediate floor. b. Align control joint with floor line, unless otherwise indicated.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C. Ceilings: 1. Use Control Joints to subdivide ceilings/soffits as indicated, and within the following limits: a. Ceilings with perimeter relief: 1) Subdivide so no area exceeds 2500 SQ FT , and no area has a length which exceeds 50 FT . a) Exception where ceiling occurs at exterior: Subdivide so that no area exceeds 900 SQ FT , and no area has a length which exceeds 30 FT. b. Ceilings without perimeter relief: 1) Subdivide so that no area exceeds 900 SQ FT, and no area has a length which exceeds 30 FT . c. Locate control joints at transitions between areas of different shapes.
15 16 17 18 19 20
D. Soffits: 1. Use control joints to subdivide ceilings/soffits as indicated, and within the following limits: a. Locate Control Joints at transitions between areas of different shapes. b. Continue lines of soffit Control Joints vertically to top of fascia. c. Subdivide exterior applications so no area exceeds 900 SQ FT , and no area has a length which exceeds 30 FT .
21
3.8
WALLBOARD FINISHING
22 23
A. Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
24
B. Pre-fill open joints and voids, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
25 26
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
27 28
D. Where bead abuts exterior metal window frames or other metal components, separate from other material by use of foam tape.
29
E. Remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
F. Apply Joint Compound and Tape in accordance with fire rated design. 1. Apply joint treatment compound in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2. Fill joints, screw heads, and internal corners with compound. 3. Extend joint system vertically from floor to extent described as follows: a. Fire Walls, Barriers, and Partitions: Extend to full height of wall. b. Smoke Barriers and Partitions: Extend to full height of wall. c. Interior face of exterior wall (non-rated): Extend to full height of wall. d. Other interior partitions (non-rated): Extend to 6 IN 150 mm above ceiling. 4. Refer to Drawings for indication of partition heights.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
G. Level 4 Finish: 1. After drying, sand or otherwise smooth final coat of compound as needed to eliminate high spots or excess compound to leave smooth, even, and level surface. 2. Draw down final coat of compound to a smooth even plane. 3. Locations: a. Wallboard scheduled to be finished with Gloss Level 1 (flat), Level 2 (velvet), or Level 3 (eggshell) paint, glazed coating, textured coating, or wall covering. b. Where above listed surfaces are to be finished with textured decorative treatments, wall covering, paneling, or wall guard. c. Remaining locations, unless noted otherwise.
49
H. Level 5 Finish: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1. 2. 3.
Trowel skim coat of joint compound leaving a thin film covering the entire surface, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Make surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. Locations: a. Exposed ceiling, soffit, or wall areas abutting window mullions, skylights, or receiving direct indoor lighting. b. Hallways or corridors unbroken by doorways or windows in excess of twenty feet . c. Atriums, Lobbies, Auditoriums and similar large spaces. d. Multi-story spaces. e. Wall board scheduled to be finished with Gloss Level 4 (satin), Level 5 (semi-gloss), Level 6 (gloss), Level 7 (high gloss), paint, glazed coating, textured coating, or wall covering. f. Surfaces using MRB or other wallboard types with a glass mat facer on finished side.
14 15
I.
Glass Mat, Water Resistant Backing Panels: 1. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
16 17
J.
Cementitious Backer Units: 1. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
18 19 20
K. Repairs: 1. After painter has applied primer to wallboard surfaces, repair and refinish defective areas. 2. If wallboard is damaged, or surfaces are roughened, repair or replace.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
3.9
FIRE AND SMOKE WALL IDENTIFICATION A. Identify walls indicated on Drawings as having a required fire or smoke rating. 1. Follow guidelines set in Chapter 7 of International Building Code. 2. Permanently identify rating and type of barrier with stencil and paint in contrasting, 3 IN high letters in a manner acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 3. Text for fire and smoke barriers: “x HOUR FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER— PROTECT ALL OPENINGS”.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Radiation Shielding Testing: 1. Radiation shielding will be tested by Owner’s registered radiation physicist. 2. Notify Owner’s radiation physicist when shielding installation is complete to perform a visual inspection. 3. Upon completion of radiology equipment installation, perform tests and radiation survey a. Comply with requirements of ASTM F2547. b. Conduct leakage tests under direction of Owner’s radiation physicist. c. Test elements forming radiation shielding.
37 38
B. Testing Results: 1. Exposure levels shall not exceed those specified in Radiation Shielding Report.
39 40
C. Perform corrective work that inspection reports indicate does not comply with specified requirements.
41
D. Retest locations where system is found to be deficient following repair.
42
E. Submit certified reports to Owner.
43
3.11 PROTECTION
44
A. Protect installed wallboard from water damage during construction.
45 46
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
47
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. 2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
D. Prior to finishing, walls shall be inspected for visible mold growth. 1. Replace affected portions.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00 - 12
SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILE (CT)
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. See the DEFINITIONS Article, Ceramic Tile paragraph for types of tile included in this Specification Section.
8 9 10 11 12 13
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16 17 18 19
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A108.1, Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. b. A137.1, Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 2. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): a. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
20 21 22
B. Qualifications: 1. Installer must have minimum five (5) years experience installing similar products with similar substrates.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C. Mock-Ups: 1. Provide a sample wall and/or floor area minimum 4 x 4 FT each using specified tile, grout, special shapes and trim pieces. a. Sample area substrate shall be of same construction as actual project condition. 2. Construct additional sample areas as required until accepted by Engineer. 3. Sample area will constitute minimum acceptable standard of quality for actual construction. 4. Sample area shall not be built into permanent construction. 5. Remove sample when directed by Engineer.
31
1.3
DEFINITIONS
32 33 34 35
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
36 37
B. Ceramic Tile: For purposes of this Specification Section, the term "ceramic tile" is intended to include ceramic, porcelain, granite, and terrazzo tiles.
38
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
39 40 41 42
A. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, floor tile selection shall be made from complete range of available sizes within Class 3 or durability rating. 1. Tile colors, styles and profiles and associated trim pieces to be selected from manufacturer's complete line including premium and custom offerings.
43 44 45 46
B. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, wall tile selection shall be made from a complete range of available sizes from Color Group 3. 1. Tile colors, styles and profiles and associated trim pieces to be selected from manufacturer's complete line including premium and custom offerings. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CERAMIC TILE (CT) 09 30 13 - 1
1
1.5
SUBMITTALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certification of installer qualifications. 4. Letter from grout and adhesive manufacturer stating that grout and tile adhesive being used is compatible with cement backer board specified in Specification Section 09 29 00.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B. Samples: 1. Complete range of tile samples per the SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Article in this Specification Section for selection by Engineer. a. Tile trim may be contrasting color. b. Complete range of grout color samples. 2. After selection of colors, types, patterns and sizes, and prior to ordering tile, provide minimum 16 x 16 IN sample palette or two (2) full tiles if 12 x 12 IN (or larger) tile are specified, in color, pattern, blend and type for Engineer's final approval. a. Include selected grout color as part of sample.
20 21 22 23
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 0001 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
24 25 26
D. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
28
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ceramic tile: a. American Olean Tile Co. (AOT). b. Dal-Tile Corp. (DTC). c. Esquire (ESQ). d. Florida Tile (FT). e. Metropolitan Ceramics (MC). f. Richetti (RICH). g. Summitville (SUM). h. United States Ceramic Tile Co. (USCT). 2. Adhesives, mortars, grouts and leveling compounds: a. Bonsal Co. b. Bostik Construction Products. c. H.B. Fuller (TEC). d. Laticrete International Inc. e. Mapei Canada, Inc.
46
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
47 48 49
2.2
MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Setting Tile: 1. Dry-set Portland cement mortars: ANSI A108.1.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CERAMIC TILE (CT) 09 30 13 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2. 3. 4.
Latex-Portland cement mortars: ANSI A108.1. Assure adhesives are compatible with cement backer board. Waterproofing: a. Trowel applied elastomeric compound. b. Acceptable to tile manufacturer. c. Compatible with backing material and setting adhesive. d. Mapei "PRP 315". e. Fiber mesh reinforcing: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
9 10
B. Grout: Portland cement-based material, containing quartz aggregate, colorfast pigments and Portland cement.
11 12
C. Sealant: One (1) or two (2) component, non-sag, polyurethane or silicone sealant, as specified in Specification Section 07 92 00.
13
D. Leveling Compounds: As recommended by tile manufacturer.
14
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Wall Tile: 1. Ceramic units conforming to ANSI A137.1. 2. 5/16 IN thick. 3. Size(s): As scheduled in PART 3. 4. Tile selections shall be made by the Engineer from Color Group 3 and may include: a. Designer accents. b. Matt. c. Textured. d. Bright. e. Crystal. f. Satin. g. High gloss smooth glaze. h. Designer strips/rounded moldings. i. Granite look. j. Scored design.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1. Ceramic mosaic units conforming to ANSI A137.1. 2. 1/4 IN thick. 3. Size(s): As scheduled in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 4. Cushion edge unglazed. 5. Slip-resistant units for shower floors and where indicated in schedule in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
37 38 39 40 41 42
C. Tile Base and Associated Trim: 1. Factory made trim shapes for all curbs, caps, corners, bullnose, bases, coves, beads, depressions, moldings, chair rails, etc. a. Cove base: 6 x 6 IN . b. Top trim (for wainscot installation): 1) 1/4 IN radius bullnose cap 2 x 6 IN.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49
2.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Material: 1. Furnish Owner with the following extra materials: a. 2 percent of each different size, pattern, style and/or color of tile used including trim shapes with minimum of one (1) full size tile of each for maintenance purposes. b. Enough extra grout mix of each different color and/or type to allow for full 2 percent of tile to be replaced.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CERAMIC TILE (CT) 09 30 13 - 3
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3.1
PREPARATION
3
A. Locate expansion joints prior to product installation.
4 5 6
B. Verify that substrate is ready to accept tile installation. 1. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.
7
3.2
INSTALLATION
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI A108.1. 2. Place tile in grid pattern. 3. Align tile joints on adjoining walls/floors. 4. Lay out and center tile in both directions in each space or on each wall area. 5. Avoid use of tile less than 1/2 size. 6. Adjust tile to minimize cutting. 7. Provide uniform joint widths insofar as practicable. a. Provide joint widths as recommended by tile manufacturer. 8. Provide leveling beds as required. 9. Provide edging at exposed edges where there is a change of level.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B. Install expansion joints where indicated on Drawings: 1. If not indicated on Drawings, place joints 12-16 FT OC or on column lines each way (whichever is smaller). a. Provide expansion joints in accordance with TCA Handbook. 2. Install over construction or expansion joints in backing. 3. Install where backing material changes. 4. Install where floors abut vertical surface. 5. Maintain nominal 1/4 IN wide joint at perimeter of tiled floor areas and fill with sealant.
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
C. Installation of Tile on FloorsandWalls Over Waterproofing and Setting Adhesive: 1. Provide waterproofing for all tile installed on: a. Floors in toilet rooms, showers, vestibules and any other floor in a wet area. 1) Extend up walls to height of base. b. Walls in shower rooms: 1) Install full height of tile. 2) Completely cover all curb surfaces to receive tile. 2. Installation of Waterproofing Membrane: a. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations. b. Apply base membrane with flat trowel. 1) Maximum thickness: 5/64 IN per coat or as recommended by manufacturer. 2) Allow membrane to cure between coats in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. c. Apply second coat with v-notch trowel and immediately flatten with flat trowel to a smooth, membrane, free of voids. d. Embed fiber mesh reinforcing into fresh membrane at all inside corners, vertical/horizontal intersections and where required for crack control. 1) Do not bridge expansion joints with reinforcing or membrane. e. Apply additional coat (s) of membrane per manufacturer’s published instructions to completely encapsulate fiber mesh reinforcing 3. After waterproofing has cured/dried in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, install tile using setting adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
49 50
3.3
CLEANING A. After installation, clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CERAMIC TILE (CT) 09 30 13 - 4
1 2 3 4 7
3.4
PROTECTION A. Permit no traffic on floors for 72 HRS after grouting and protect installed tile work with minimum 0.125 IN thick nonstaining covering during construction to prevent damage.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CERAMIC TILE (CT) 09 30 13 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM)
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Acoustical Ceiling Systems (AM) in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
7
B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
8
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A641/A641M Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM B633Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 3. ASTM C635/C635M Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels Ceilings. 4. ASTM C636/C636M Standard Specification for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. 5. ASTM E488/E488M Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements. 6. ASTM E580/E580M Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions 7. ASTM E1190 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members
22
B. Site Classification and Seismic Design Categories as defined in the International Building Code.
23
1.3
SUBMITTALS
24 25 26
A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s product data that products comply with acoustical properties indicated on Interior Notes and Finish Legend.
27 28
B. Samples: 1. Three samples of each type of tile listed in Interior Notes and Finish Legend.
29 30 31
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. a. See Section 01 77 00
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
34 35 36 37 38 39
A. Steel Suspension Systems: 1. Base: a. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Optional: a. USG Corporation b. Rockfon
40 41 42
B. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: 1. Base: a. Finishes scheduled in the Drawings.
43
C. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Section 01 25 13. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM) 09 51 00 - 1
1
2.2
MATERIALS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
A. Acoustic Suspension Systems: 1. Intermediate duty systems, ASTM C635. 2. Main runner jointing by spliced, interlocking ends, tab locks, pin locks, or other suitable connections. 3. Cross runners interlocking with main runners. 4. Include components and accessories necessary resist seismic loads and dead loads of items such as light fixtures and air diffusers. 5. Hanger Wire: a. Pre-stretched, with a yield stress load of at least 5 times design load, but not less than 0.106 IN (12 GA) . b. Utilize continuous lengths, without kinks and splices. c. Galvanized Steel: 1) Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire conforming to ASTM A641/A641m. 6. Attachment Devices: a. Anchors in Concrete: 1) Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488/A488M or ASTM E1512. 2) Acceptable types: Cast-in-place, post-installed expansion anchors and postinstalled bonded anchors. 3) Material: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition. b. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: 1) Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190. 7. Suspension System Types: a. CG-1: Exposed grid, non-rated: 1) Description: Galvanized, double web steel, main and cross runners. 2) Face width: 15/16 IN . 3) Base Product: a) Prelude XL, by Armstrong. 4) Finish on exposed surfaces: Smooth, flat white.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
B. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: 1. Scheduled finishes to be factory applied. 2. Class A incombustible units. 3. Fire rated units (when used): UL labeled. 4. Edges uniformly fabricated, true, square. 5. Sizes as required to fit scheduled suspension system. 6. Standard tile size: See Reflected Ceiling Plan.
45 46
C. Diffusers and Grilles: 1. See Section 23 31 00.
47 48
D. Light Fixtures: 1. See Section 26 50 00.
49
PART 3 - EXECUTION
50
3.1
51
INSPECTION A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM) 09 51 00 - 2
1
B. Examine installation site for irregularities having affect on quality and execution of work.
2 3
C. Consult other trades involved before start of ceiling work, to determine areas of potential interference
4
D. Do not start installation until interferences have been resolved.
5
E. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
6
3.2
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
PREPARATION A. Tolerances: 1. Comply with ASTM C635/C635M Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2. Deviation from level plane: 1/8 IN in 10 FT with no load applied maximum. 3. Bow: 1/32 IN in 2 FTmaximum. 4. Camber: 1/32 IN in 2 FTmaximum. 5. Twist: 1 degree in 2 FT maximum.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 2. Grid layout: a. See Reflected Ceiling Plans. b. Install grid based on electrical lighting fixture layout indicated in Electrical Drawings, unless otherwise indicated, c. Acoustical panel dimension at perimeter walls: Not less than 6 IN. d. In case of conflict notify Architect. 3. Install grid square with room and with grid or acoustical panel center lines coinciding with center lines of room, each direction. 4. Intersections between main tees and cross tees: a. Butt cut and notch as required. 5. Wall angles: a. Install wall angles or moldings where ceilings meet walls, partitions, vertical elements, and other types of ceilings or ceiling fixtures. 1) Secure angles to wall construction at stud locations. a) Maximum spacing from terminal ends: 3 IN. b) Draw fasteners tight against vertical surfaces. 2) Level tolerance: not more than 1 IN 1000. 3) Miter cut inside and outside corners. 4) Install with leg supporting bottom flange of runners. 6. Hanger wires: a. Provide hangers and inserts necessary to support ceiling suspension systems and ceiling dead loads. b. Coordinate location and alignment with work of other trades. c. Install hanger wires plumb to main tees and cross tees. 1) Do not suspend any part of suspension system from ducts, pipes, conduit, cable tray or equipment. 2) Provide supplementary rough suspension system where necessary to support ceilings beneath pipes, ducts, equipment, cable trays. 3) Splay hangers no greater than 30 DEG from vertical to avoid obstructions or other conditions that prevent plumb, vertical installation. 4) Offset horizontal forces by bracing or counter-splaying. d. Space hangers to prevent eccentric deflection and rotation due to loads from items in or on ceiling 1) Provide supplemental hangers to support lighting fixtures and within 6 IN from end of main runners and fixtures which exceed manufacturer’s published load data.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM) 09 51 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
7.
8.
9.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 25 27
2) Do not bear runners on walls or partitions. Main runners: a. Utilize wall angles to align and receive terminal ends of main tees without transferring load to wall angle. b. Space main tees as indicated to receive lay-in panels and fixtures. c. Support terminal ends of main tees by wires located within 6 IN from boundary walls. Cross runners: a. Space cross tees as indicated to receive lay-in panels and fixtures. 1) Install cross runners with positive interlock. b. Utilize wall angles to align and receive terminal ends of cross tees without transferring load to wall angle. c. Support terminal ends of cross tees by wires located within 6 IN from boundary walls. Leave suspension system ready to accept installation of acoustic materials.
B. Lay-In Items: 1. Install acoustic materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Place lay-in panels, fixtures, diffusers, grilles, and similar items in manner not compromising suspension system performance. 3. Field cut materials to fit grid. 3.4
CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Perform cleaning of soiled units and replacement of defective or damaged units.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTICAL CEILING MATERIALS (AM) 09 51 00 - 4
SECTION 09 52 00 METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING PANELS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Metal acoustical wall panels. 2. Metal acoustical ceiling panels.
8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. d. C553, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Layout drawings: a. Scaled drawing showing location of each unit, mounting and anchorage details. b. Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT. c. Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
36
A. Products specified are manufactured by Eckel Industries.
37 38 39 40 41 42
B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Acoustical wall panels: a. ALPRO Acoustics. b. Eckel Industries Inc. c. Fry Reglet.
43
C. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING PANELS 09 52 00 - 1
1
2.2
MATERIALS
2
A. Facing: Steel, galvanized, ASTM A653, G60 coating.
3
B. Brackets: Steel, galvanized, ASTM A653, G60 coating.
4
C. Acoustical Insulation: Fiberglass, ASTM C553.
5
D. Acoustical Insulation Protective Wrap: Polyethylene or vinyl.
6
E. Fasteners: Steel, galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M.
7
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. Panel Facing: 1. Provide minimum of two (2) framing members on each side of panel for panels 96 IN long or less. a. Panels over 96 IN long shall have minimum three (3) framing members on each side of panel. 2. Finish: a. Manufacturer's standard polyurethane enamel finish. 3. Size: 30 IN wide x length noted on Drawings. 4. Profile: Similar to Eckel "EFP"
17 18 19 20
B. Framing Members, Suspension and Stand-off Brackets: 1. Minimum {20 GA}{0.050 IN}. 2. To match facing material. 3. Adjustable height, stand-off and suspension brackets to accommodate field conditions
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Acoustical Insulation: 1. 2 IN thick, meeting ASTM C553. 2. 1.5 LBS/CF density minimum. a. Poly wrapped. 3. Fire rated in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Flame spread: 10. b. Smoke density: 5.
28
2.4
29 30 31
A. Provide all attachment brackets, bolts, screws, washers, inserts, and other miscellaneous items required for complete installation. 2.5
32 33
ACCESSORIES
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Panels shall be laboratory tested to verify sound absorption in accordance with ASTM C423.
2.6
34 35 36 37
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide Owner with following maintenance material: 1. Minimum of 2 OZ of touch-up paint in color selected for each 1000 SF or fraction thereof of panel surface. 2. Minimum of 10 LF of acoustical insulation of type specified for Project.
38
PART 3 - EXECUTION
39
3.1
PREPARATION
40 41
A. Verify all above panel work has been completed for ceiling suspended panels prior to installation.
42
B. Verify all behind panel work has been completed for wall mounted panels prior to installation.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING PANELS 09 52 00 - 2
1
3.2
INSTALLATION
2
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3
B. Refer to Drawings for location and length of panels.
4
C. Provide necessary clips and or suspension framing to mount units at height or offset indicated.
5
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
6 7
A. Repair tears in acoustical wrap with tape recommended by manufacturer. 1. Tape color to match acoustical wrap color.
8
B. Touch-up paint all damaged panels.
10
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL ACOUSTICAL WALL AND CEILING PANELS 09 52 00 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 09 53 00 ACOUSTIC SUSPENSION SYSTEM
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Steelacoustic suspension systems.
7 8 9
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
10
1.2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C635, Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. b. C636, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. c. {E580, Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.}
1.3
SUBMITTALS
20 21 22 23 24 25
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
26 27 28
B. Samples: 1. Samples of each product being used minimum 6 IN long. 2. Sample of intersecting grid connection system.
29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
30
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Acoustical suspension systems (steel): a. Armstrong World Industries. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. c. Donn.
37
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
38 39 40 41 42 43
2.2
COMPONENTS A. Acoustical Suspension Systems - General: 1. ASTM C635, heavy duty. 2. Main runner jointing by spliced, interlocking ends, tab locks, pin locks, or other suitable connections. 3. Cross runners interlocking with main runners.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTIC SUSPENSION SYSTEM 09 53 00 - 1
1 2 3
B. Hangers: 1. Galvanized, soft annealed steel wire for general use. 2. Soft stainless steel wire for use with aluminum systems and in wet areas.
4 5 6 7 8
C. Non-Rated Exposed Grid System: 1. Direct hung. 2. Electrogalvanized double-web steel main and cross runners. 3. Finish on exposed surfaces: Smooth, flat white. 4. Chicago Metallic "SNAP-GRID 200" or "FIRE FRONT 1250."
9
2.3
10 11 12 13
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Material: 1. Provide Owner with 8 LF of main runner and 8 LF of cross runner of each different finish and type of grid specified. 2. Supply minimum 2 OZ of touch-up paint for each color of grid used.
14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
15
3.1
INSTALLATION
16
A. Install in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's instructions.
17 18 19
B. Layout suspension system centered between enclosing walls as shown on the Drawings. 1. Provide equally spaced border panels wherever practicable. 2. Avoid layout resulting in border panels of less than half the original size.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C. Hang suspension systems from structural supporting and framing members, floor deck, or rough suspension system. 1. Provide all hangers and inserts necessary to support acoustical ceilings. 2. Provide supplementary framing where pipes, ducts, equipment or other obstructions interfere with hanger wire placement. a. Provide structural members sized as required, to span ducts, etc. b. Do not hang any part of the suspension system or supplementary framing from ducts, pipes, conduit, equipment, etc. 3. Locate hangers to avoid contact with insulation covering ducts and pipes. 4. Splay hangers only where obstructions or other conditions preclude plumb, vertical installation. 5. Offset horizontal forces of splayed hangers by countersplaying, bracing or other approved methods.
33 34 35 36 37 38
D. Space hangers to prevent loads from items in or on ceiling from causing eccentric deflection and rotation of main runners exceeding limits specified in manufacturer's technical data. 1. Provide additional hangers at each corner of recessed light fixture. 2. Provide hangers not more than 6 IN from ends of main runners. 3. Support main runners directly from hangers. 4. Space main runners to support ceiling units and other work resting in or on ceiling.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
E. Install moldings where ceilings meet walls, partitions, other vertical elements, and other types of ceilings. 1. Support runners, cross-tees and border units on moldings. a. Secure moldings to wall construction by fastening through holes drilled in web. 2. Space holes not more than 3 IN from each end and not more than 16 IN on center. 3. Draw up fasteners for tight set against vertical surfaces. a. Moulding to be flush and tight to surface, without deformation. 4. Miter cut inside and outside corners. 5. Level to tolerances in accordance with ASTM C636.
48
F. Leave suspension system ready to accept installation of acoustic materials. See Section 09 51 00. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTIC SUSPENSION SYSTEM 09 53 00 - 2
1
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid ACOUSTIC SUSPENSION SYSTEM 09 53 00 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 09 65 00 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). 2. Resilient base (RB).
8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. E648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. b. F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. c. F1066, Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. d. F1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. e. F2034, Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Recommendations on adhesives, primers and leveling and patching compounds.
30 31
B. Samples: 1. Full range of colors and patterns for Engineer's color selection of each component specified.
32 33 34 35
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
37
2.1
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT): a. Armstrong. b. Azrock. c. Congoleum. d. Mannington Commercial. e. Tarkett Inc.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE 09 65 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2.
3.
13 14
Resilient base: a. Armstrong. b. Burke Flooring. c. Flexco. d. Johnsonite. e. Roppe. f. VPI. Edging strips, reducers and joiners: a. Burke Flooring. b. Flexco. c. Johnsonite. d. Roppe.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
15 16 17
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 1. 12 IN SQ x 1/8 IN. 2. ASTM F1066, Comp 1, Class 2.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B. Resilient Base (RB): 1. Rubber or vinyl, ASTM F1861. a. Group 1, solid through-color. b. Style B, coved. c. 1/8 by 4 IN. 2. Factory-formed outside corners. 3. Continuous rolls, minimum 95 FT long.
25
C. Leveling compound as recommended by manufacturer compatible with adhesives.
26
D. Adhesives and primers as recommended by manufacturer.
27
E. Sheet Vinyl Accent Stripes: 1/8 x 1 IN plain color homogeneous vinyl with backing.
28 29 30
F. Edging Strips, Reducers and Joiners: 1. Thermoplastic vinyl. a. ASTM E648, Class 1 Fire Rated.
31
2.3
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish Owner the following extra material: a. One (1) carton of each type and color of {slip-resistant floor tile and} vinyl composition tile. b. Minimum 12 LF of resilient linoleum sheet flooring and enough welding rod to install all 12 LF of material. c. Remaining portion of one (1) partially used roll of resilient base material with a minimum of 10 LF of each height, color and type. 2. Package and label extra materials to protect material during storage.
41
PART 3 - EXECUTION
42
3.1
PREPARATION
43
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM F710.
44 45 46
B. Acclimate tile to area in which it is to be installed for minimum 72 HRS at 68 DegF prior to installation. 1. Provide manufacturer's recommended relative humidity levels. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE 09 65 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C. Fill cracks, joints (except specified expansion joints), etc., in floors with a water-resistant noncrumbling patching and leveling compound. 1. Trowel level. 2. Verify moisture content in concrete substrate is within acceptable limits per the floor covering manufacturer. a. Conduct one (1) test for every 1000 SF of flooring per room or area in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. b. Provide necessary measures to dry out the substrate in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations and retest until acceptable moisture levels are obtained.
11 12
D. Where tile flooring abuts other finish flooring materials and finished surfaces do not align, install and feather leveling compound for approximately 6 IN so that finished surfaces will align.
13
3.2
INSTALLATION
14
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
15 16 17
B. Floors to be free of all dust, paint, grease, oils, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers and any other deleterious material which may affect the bonding of the adhesive used to install the floor coverings.
18 19
C. Ensure recommended minimum installation temperatures are maintained before, during and after installation as required by the manufacturer.
20 21 22 23
D. General: 1. Apply primer and adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 DegF for a minimum of 72 HRS prior to, during and after installation.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E. Vinyl Composition Tile: 1. Lay in pattern selected by Engineer. 2. Bond tile to floor, flush, tight, and in true alignment with adjacent tiles and with finished surface. 3. Fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against walls, around pipes, and other obstructions. 4. Install edging strips where tile edge is exposed or where flooring terminates. 5. Lay out tile to avoid less than one-half tile at permanent perimeter walls. 6. Perform any cutting or drilling of tile as required. 7. Install accent strips in all door openings directly under door when in closed position. 8. Roll entire floor. 9. Immediately after application and rolling, remove surplus adhesive.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
F. Resilient Base: 1. Install base after wall material has thoroughly dried out. 2. Provide base at intersections of floor and all vertical surfaces in areas scheduled to receive base, where intersection is exposed to view. 3. Set base straight and true. 4. Fit into breaks and recesses. 5. Provide factory-formed outside corners; miter inside corners. a. Make joints tight. b. Where door frames are inset in opening, provide factory formed outside corner returned to frame; trim flush with face of frame. 6. Install with top level and bottom edge in firm contact with floor.
46 47 48 49
G. Edging Strips, Reducers and Joiners: 1. Provide edging, reducers and transitions as necessary for terminating flooring or transitioning to adjacent flooring materials. a. Profiles shall be ADA compliant.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE 09 65 00 - 3
1
3.3
CLEANING
2
A. Clean floors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3 4 5 6
B. Prior to final acceptance, wash, wax and buff floors. 1. After thorough cleaning, apply two (2) coats of wax recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. After each coat, buff floor.
7
3.4
PROTECTION
8 9
A. Protect with nonstaining, nonsticking building paper as may be necessary to prevent dirt and damage.
10 11
B. Protect traffic areas with fiberboard or plywood laid over nonstaining, nonsticking building paper.
13
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING AND RESILIENT BASE 09 65 00 - 4
SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8 9
A. Section Includes: 1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC). 2. Any other coating, thinner, accelerator, inhibitor, etc., specified or required as part of a complete System specified in this Specification Section. 3. Minimum surface preparation requirements.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SUMMARY
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 01 61 03 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 4. Section 01 74 13 - Cleaning. 5. Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing and Repair of Surface Defects. 6. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry. 7. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC). 8. Division 26 - Electrical. 9. Division 40 - Process Interconnections. 10. Section 40 05 00 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D3359, Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. b. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. c. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete. d. D4261, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. e. D4262, Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. f. D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. g. D4414, Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages. h. D4541, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. i. D6677, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Adhesion by Knife. j. D7091, Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous Metals. k. F1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. l. F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 2. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): a. 310.2, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair 3. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): a. 500-03, Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings: 1) 500-03-04, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe. 2) 500-03-05, Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4. 5. 6.
7.
NSF International (NSF). a. 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. Steel Door Institute/American National Standards Institute (SDI/ANSI): a. A250.10, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria For Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. b. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. c. SP 16, Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE): a. SP 5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning b. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. c. SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-off Blast Cleaning. d. SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning. e. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B. Qualifications: 1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide written statement attesting that applicator has been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings specified. 2. Applicators shall have minimum of 10 years experience in application of similar products on similar project. a. Provide references for minimum of three (3) different projects completed in last five (5) years with similar scope of work. b. Include name and address of project, size of project in value (painting) and contact person.
27 28
C. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish coating through one (1) manufacturer unless noted otherwise.
29 30
D. Deviation from specified mil thickness or product type is not allowed without written authorization of Engineer.
31 32
E. Material shall not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by coating manufacturer's authorized representative.
33
1.3
DEFINITIONS
34 35 36 37
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
38 39
B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance with the finish specified in the Specification Section where the product is specified or in Specification Section 01 61 03.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
C. Corrosive Environment: 1. Immersion in or subject to: a. Condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater or chemical solution. b. Exposure to corrosive caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions. c. For purposes of this Specification Section, corrosive environments include: 1) Exterior areas not otherwise identified as highly corrosive. 2) Piping galleries. 3) Surfaces within 2 FT of high water level. 4) Chemicals storage and feed areas:
51
D. Highly Corrosive Environment: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.
Immersion in or subject to: a. Condensation, spillage or splash of a highly corrosive material such as wastewater, or chemical solution. b. Exposure to highly corrosive caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions. c. For purposes of this Specification Section, highly corrosive environments include: 1) Surfaces within 10 FT of chemical fill stations. 2) Areas within 6 FT of chemical tank vents. 3) Chemicals storage and feed areas:
10 11 12 13
E. Holiday: 1. A void, crack, thin spot, foreign inclusion, or contamination in the coating film that significantly lowers the dielectric strength of the coating. 2. May also be identified as a discontinuity or pinhole.
14 15 16
F. Exposed Exterior Surface: 1. Exterior surface which is exposed to view. 2. Exterior surface which is exposed to weather but not necessarily exposed to view.
17 18
G. Finished Area: An area that is listed in or has finish called for on Room Finish Schedule or is indicated on Drawings to be coated.
19 20 21 22 23
H. Immersion Service: 1. Any surface immersed in water or some other liquid. 2. Surface of any pipe, valve, or any other component of the piping system subject to frequent wetting. 3. Surfaces within two feet above high water level in water bearing structures.
24 25 26
I.
Surface Hidden from View: 1. Within pipe chases. 2. Between top side of ceilings and underside of floor or roof structures above.
27 28 29
J.
HPIC: High performance industrial coatings. 1. Epoxies, urethanes, vinyl ester, waterborne vinyl acrylic emulsions, acrylates, silicones, alkyds, acrylic emulsions and any other coating listed as a HPIC.
30
K. Water level for purposes of coating: See Drawings.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Applicator experience qualifications. a. No submittal information will be reviewed until Engineer has received and approved applicator qualifications. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's application instructions. c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than listed in the MATERIALS Article of this Specification Section, provide complete individual data sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products including application procedure, coverage rates and verification that product is designed for intended use. e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles created by blasting operation and location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting media. f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting. g. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat. h. Manufacturer's recommendation for providing temporary or supplemental heat or dehumidification or other environmental control measures.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 3
1 2 3 4
4. 5.
Manufacturer's statement regarding applicator instruction on product use. Certification that High Performance Coating Systems proposed for use have been reviewed and approved by Senior Corrosion Specification Specialist employed by the coating manufacturer.
5
B. NACE inspector experience qualifications.
6 7 8 9
C. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's preliminary color selection. 2. After preliminary color selection by Engineer provide two (2) 3 x 5 IN samples of each final color selected.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D. Informational Submittals: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Approval of application equipment. 3. Applicator's daily records: a. Submit daily records at end of each week in which coating work is performed unless requested otherwise by Engineer's on-site representative.
17
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
18 19 20 21 22 23
A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 1. Name or type number of material. 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 4. Warning labels. 5. VOC content.
24 25
B. Store materials in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 DegF.
26
1.6
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that atmosphere in area where coating is to take place is within coating manufacturer's acceptable temperature, humidity and sun exposure limits. 1. Provide temporary heating, shade and/or dehumidification as required to bring area within acceptable limits. a. Provide temporary dehumidification equipment properly sized to maintain humidity levels required by coating manufacturer. b. Provide clean heat with heat exchanger type equipment sufficient in size to maintain temperature on a 24 HR basis. 1) Vent exhaust gases to exterior environment. 2) No exhaust gases shall be allowed to vent into the space being coated or any adjacent space. 2. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog or mist.
39
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. High Performance Industrial Coatings: a. Carboline Protective Coatings. b. PPG Industries. c. Sherwin Williams. d. Tnemec.
48
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 4
1 2
2.2
MATERIALS A. Coatings used for interior finishes shall meet the requirements of the Building Code
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B. General: 1. High Performance Industrial Coatings: Products listed are manufactured by Tnemec. 2. High Temperature Coatings: Products listed are manufactured by Dampney. 3. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for use provided that the product: a. Is of the same generic resin. b. Requires comparable surface preparation. c. Has comparable application requirements. d. Meets the same VOC levels or better. e. Provides the same finish and color options. f. Will withstand the atmospheric or immersion conditions of the location where it is to be applied. 4. Where manufacturer’s product data sheet indicates a minimum mil thickness per coat that is greater than specified herein, mil thickness for entire coating system shall be increased proportionately.
17
C. Coatings shall comply with the VOC limits of EPA
18
D. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended products.
19 20
E. High Performance Industrial Coatings: GENERIC DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT
Modified Aromatic Polyurethane Primer
Series 1 Omnithane
Modified Polyamine Epoxy (NSF 61)
Series 22 Pota-Pox 100
Polyamidoamine Epoxy
Series L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
Zinc-Rich Urethane
Series 94-H20 Hydro-Zinc
Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy
Series 135 Chembuild
Acrylic Emulsion
Series 180 WB Tneme-Crete
Polyamidoamine Epoxy (NSF 61)
Series L140 Pota-Pox Plus
Modified Polyamine Epoxy
Series 201 Epoxoprime
Modified Flexible Polyamine Epoxy
Series 206SC Chembloc
Modified Polyamine Epoxy Surfacer/Filler
Series 215 Surfacing Epoxy
Epoxy Modified Cementitious Mortar
Series 218 MortarClad
Modified Polyamine Epoxy
Series 237 Power-Tread
Modified Polyamine Epoxy (Secondary Containment)
Series 237SC Chembloc
Novolac Vinyl Ester (Primer)
Series 251SC Chembloc
Novolac Vinyl Ester (Secondary Containment)
Series 252SC Chembloc
Polyamine Novolac Epoxy
Series 282 Tneme-Glaze
Aliphatic Polyester Polyurethane
Series 290 CRU
Polyfunctional Hybrid Urethane (Gloss)
Series 740 UVX
Polyfunctional Hybrid Urethane (Semi-Gloss)
Series 750 UVX
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 5
GENERIC DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT
Inorganic Hybrid Water-Based Epoxy
Series 1254 Epoxoblock WB
1 3 4
2.3
COATING SYSTEMS:
Environment
Surface Preparation
Prime Coat
Intermediate Coats
Finish Coat
Ferrous Metals (Structural & Miscellaneous Metals) Interior atmospheric
SSPC SP-6/ NACE No. 3
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Interior atmospheric (corrosive environment)
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2 min. 2 mil anchor profile
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 94-H2O
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Interior atmospheric (highly corrosive environment)
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2 min. 2 mil anchor profile
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 94-H2O
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series 290 CRU
Immersion – Wastewater
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – non NSF
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2
mil Series3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – NSF
SSPC SP-5/ NACE No.1
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140
Exterior atmospheric
SSPC SP-6/ NACE No. 3
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 94-H2O
3.0 to 5.0 mil Series L69
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 740
Hollow Metal Doors
SSPC SP-3
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 135
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
Bar Joists
SSPC SP-3
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 1
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Interior atmospheric
SSPC SP-16
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – non NSF
SSPC SP-16
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
Immersion – NSF
SSPC SP-16
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L140
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L140
Exterior atmospheric
SSPC SP-16
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 740
Field cut pipe threads
SSPC SP-3
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
Galvanized Steel
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
Coat per exposure above
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
Coat per exposure above
Non Ferrous Metals, including piping
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 6
Environment
Surface Preparation
Prime Coat
Intermediate Coats
Dissimilar Materials Protection
SSPC SP-2
4.5 to 5.5 mil Series L69
Interior atmospheric
SSPC SP-2
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion Wastewater
SSPC SP-16
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
5.0 to 6.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – non NSF
SSPC SP-16
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
5.0 to 6.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – NSF
SSPC SP-16
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140
Exterior atmospheric
SSPC SP-2
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series L69
Interior atmospheric
SSPC SP-6/ NACE No. 3
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 94-H2O
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – Wastewater
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – non NSF
SSPC SP-5/ NACE No.1
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – NSF
SSPC SP-5/ NACE No.1
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L69
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L69
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L69
Exterior atmospheric
SSPC SP-10/ NACE No. 2
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 94-H2O
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
Interior atmospheric
Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – Wastewater
Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
3.0 to4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – non NSF
Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Immersion – NSF
Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L140
Exterior atmospheric
Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04 Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140
Finish Coat
4.0 to 5.0 mil Series L140 2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
Ferrous Piping
Ductile Iron Piping
20.0 to 25.0 mil Series 22
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 7
Environment
Surface Preparation
Prime Coat
Intermediate Coats
Finish Coat
Interior atmospheric
SSPC SP-1
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
Exterior atmospheric
SSPC SP-1
4.0 to 6.0 mil Series 135
2.0 to 3.0 mil Series L69
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
Interior atmospheric
Hand Sanding/ SSPC SP-1
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Exterior atmospheric
Hand Sanding/ SSPC SP-1
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
Cast Iron Piping
PVC Piping
1 Environment
Surface Preparation
Filler/ Surfacer
Prime Coat
Intermediate Coat
Finish Coat
Interior walls, ceilings, etc. atmospheric
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
Series 218 and/or 215 as necessary to fill holes and depressions
250 to 300 SF/GAL Series L69
Interior floors
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
Series 215 as necessary to fill holes and depressions
175 to 225 SF/GAL Series 237 clear
200 to 250 SF/GAL Series 237 pigmented
200 to 250 SF/GAL Series 237 pigmented
Interior – Secondary Containment
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
Series 218 and/or 215 as necessary to fill holes and depressions
50 to 60 mil Series 206SC
211-0215 Fiberglass mat Saturated with 8.0 to 12 mils Series 237SC
10 to 12 mil Series 237SC
Interior – Secondary Containment (Highly Corrosive)
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
Series 218 and/or 215 as necessary to fill holes and depressions
6.0 to 8.0 mil Series 251SC
211-0215 Fiberglass mat Saturated with 8.0 to 12 mils Series 252SC
6.0 to 8.0 mil Series 252SC
Immersion – non NSF
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 to 1/4 IN Series 218
16 to 20 mil Series 22
Immersion – NSF
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 to 1/4 IN Series 218
16 to 20 mil Series 22
Immersion – Wastewater (Abrasion Resistant)
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 to 1/4 IN Series 218
1/8 IN Series 434
15 to 25 mil Series 435
Exterior atmospheric Corrosive Environment
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
Series 218 and/or 215 as necessary to fill holes and depressions
150 to 175 SF/GAL Series 180
150 to 175 SF/GAL Series 180
Concrete 250 to 300 SF/GAL Series L69
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 8
Environment
Surface Preparation
Filler/ Surfacer
Prime Coat
Intermediate Coat
Exterior atmospheric Highly Corrosive Environment
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 IN Series 218
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Secondary Containment (Horizontal Surface)
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 to 1/4 IN Series 218
10.0 to 12.0 mil Series 282
10.0 to 12.0 mil Series 282
Secondary Containment (Vertical Surface)
SSPC SP-13/ NACE No. 6 ICRI CSP 5
1/16 to 1/4 IN Series 218
8.0 to10.0 mil Series 282
8.0 to10.0 mil Series 282
Interior atmospheric
Refer to PART 3
100 to 150 SF/Gal Series 1254
175 to 200 SF/Gal Series L69
175 to 200 SF/Gal Series L69
Exterior atmospheric Corrosive Environment
Refer to PART 3
100 to 150 SF/Gal Series 1254
175 to 200 SF/Gal Series L69
275 to 300 SF/Gal Series 750
Exterior atmospheric Highly Corrosive Environment
Refer to PART 3
100 to 150 SF/Gal Series 1254
175 to 200 SF/Gal Series L69
3.0 to 4.0 mil Series L69
Finish Coat 2.5 to 3.5 mil Series 750
CMU*
175 to 200 SF/Gal Series L69
275 to 300 SF/Gal Series 750
1 2 3
* Coverage rates indicated are based on smooth-face normal weight CMU. Provide increased coverage rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for more porous surfaces.
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
5
3.1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
ITEMS TO BE COATED A. Exterior Surfaces, including but not limited to: 1. Concrete: a. Components of concrete tankage: 1) Coat concrete surfaces per Section 09 97 23 to limits as defined on the Drawings. Structures to be coated per Section 09 97 23 include: a) Headworks channels. b) Manhole No. 1 (MH-1) at headworks. c) Manhole No. 2 (MH-2) at headworks. d) Primary Clarifier Splitter Box. b. Secondary containment enclosures. c. Chemical fill stations. 1) Paving where indicated on Drawings. 2) Spill containment sumps. 2. Concrete masonry: a. Where indicated on Drawings. 3. Piping, valves, fittings, hydrants and supports: a. As scheduled in Specification Section 40 05 00. 4. Pumps and motors. 5. Ferrous metal tankage. 6. Ferrous metal process equipment. a. Clarifier mechanisms. b. Equipment bridges. c. Gates and operators. 7. Structural steel: a. Columns, beams and bracing.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
b. Field welded connections of factory painted structural steel. Miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces: a. Items specifically noted on Drawings to be painted. 9. Miscellaneous galvanized steel surfaces: a. Pipe Bollards. b. Embed Plates. c. Loose lintels. d. Steel components of concrete lintels. e. Items specifically noted on Drawings to be painted. 10. Appurtenant surfaces attached to or adjacent to a surface indicated to be painted: a. Conduit, boxes, covers and supports. 8.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
B. Interior Areas: 1. Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings. a. If space is scheduled to be painted, paint all appurtenant surfaces within the space unless specifically noted otherwise. Appurtenant surfaces include but are not limited to: 1) Columns. 2) Equipment pads. 3) Equipment supports. 4) Underside of roof or floor decks above: a) Including semi-exposed or concealed from view unless noted otherwise. 5) Conduit, boxes, covers and supports. 6) Miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces. 2. Concrete: a. Components of concrete tankage: 1) Walls, columns, beams: a) Paint from one (1) FT below low water level to top of component. 2) Troughs, launders, weirs. 3) Underside of concrete walkways within 2 FT of high water level. b. Chemical storage areas: 1) Flooring where scheduled or indicated on Drawings. 2) Secondary containment enclosures. 3. Piping, valves, fittings, hydrants and supports: a. Do not paint piping scheduled to be insulated. 4. Pumps and motors. 5. Ferrous metal tankage. 6. Ferrous metal process equipment. a. Clarifier mechanisms. b. Equipment bridges. c. Gates and operators. d. Items specifically noted on Drawings to be painted. 7. Miscellaneous galvanized steel surfaces: a. Pipe Bollards. b. Embed Plates. c. Loose lintels. d. Steel components of concrete lintels. e. Seismic angles at masonry partitions. f. Items specifically noted on Drawings to be painted. 8. Copper and brass surfaces. 3.2
ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED
51
A. General: Do not paint items listed in this Article, unless noted otherwise.
52 53
B. Items with Approved Factory Finish: These items may require repair of damaged painted areas or painting of welded connections. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 10
1
C. Electrical Equipment.
2 3
D. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where painting would interfere with the operation of the unit.
4 5
E. Code labels, equipment identification or rating plates and similar labels, tagging and identification.
6
F. Contact surfaces of friction-type structural connections.
7 8 9
G. Stainless Steel Surfaces, except: 1. Piping where specifically noted to be painted. 2. Banding as required to identify piping.
10 11 12 13 14
H. Aluminum Surfaces, except: 1. Where specifically shown in the Contract Documents. 2. Where in contact with concrete. 3. Where in contact with dissimilar metals. 4. Appurtenant surfaces as described in the ITEMS TO BE PAINTED article.
15 16 17 18
I.
Fiberglass Surfaces, except: 1. Fiberglass piping where specifically noted to be painted. 2. Piping supports where specifically noted to be painted. 3. Appurtenant surfaces as described in the ITEMS TO BE PAINTED article.
19
J.
Mechanical piping scheduled to be insulated.
20 21 22
K. Interior of Pipe, Ductwork, and Conduits. 1. See Division 23 for ductwork. 2. See Division 40 for pipe linings.
23
L. Galvanized Steel Items, unless specifically noted to be painted.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
M. Architectural Finishes: 1. Exterior concrete indicated to receive another finish. 2. Precast concrete surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be painted. 3. Prefinished masonry surfaces: a. Pre-colored masonry (exterior face). 1) Interior face shall be painted where scheduled. b. Burnished (ground face) concrete masonry. c. Prefaced masonry. d. Face brick. e. Glass masonry. 4. Plastic laminate. 5. Solid surface material. 6. Standing and running trim. 7. Fiberglass fabrications. 8. Anodized aluminum. 9. PVDF coated metals. 10. Factory finished doors and frames. 11. Aluminum windows, curtainwall and storefront framing systems. 12. Finish hardware. 13. Glass and glazing. 14. Ceramic, porcelain, quarry tile or natural stone. 15. Acoustical materials. 16. Building specialties. 17. Louvers. 18. Casework and countertops. 19. Pipe insulation and jacketing. 20. Standing seam metal roof, fascia, trim, soffit and accessories. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 11
1
3.3
EXAMINATION
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. Concrete: 1. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262. a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable range. b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 2. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits. a. Test surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263 to determine the presence of moisture. 1) If moisture is detected, test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM F1869 or ASTM F2170. 2) Provide remedial measures as necessary to bring moisture content within coating manufacturer’s recommended acceptable limits. 3) Retest surface until acceptable results are obtained.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262. a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable limits. b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained. 2. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits. a. Test surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263 to determine the presence of moisture. 1) If moisture is detected, test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM F1869. 2) Provide remedial measures as necessary to bring moisture content within coating manufacturer’s recommended acceptable limits. 3) Retest surface until acceptable results are obtained.
32
3.4
PREPARATION
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section unless noted otherwise in this Specification Section. a. Where discrepancy between coating manufacturer's instructions and this Specification Section exists, the more stringent preparation shall be provided unless approved otherwise, in writing, by the Engineer. 2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter which would prevent bonding of coating to surface. 3. Adhere to manufacturer's recoat time surface preparation requirements. a. Surfaces that have exceeded coating manufacturer's published recoat time and/or have exhibited surface chalking shall be prepared prior to additional coating in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. 1) Minimum SSPC SP 7/NACE No. 4 unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
46 47 48 49 50 51
B. Protection: 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or provide ample in-place protection. 3. Protect code labels, equipment identification or rating plates and similar labels, tagging and identification.
52
C. Prepare and paint before assembly all surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Prepare ductile iron pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and NAPF. a. All piping, pumps, valves, fittings and any other component used in the water piping system that requires preparation for painting shall be prepared in accordance with requirements for immersion service. b. Prepare all areas requiring patch painting in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and NAPF. c. Remove bituminous coating per piping manufacturer, paint manufacturer and NAPF recommendations. 1) The most stringent recommendations shall apply. 2. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning surface preparation. a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left from welding. b. Remove mill scale. c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections. 3. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 4. Restore surface of field welds and adjacent areas to original surface preparation.
18 19 20 21
E. Galvanized Steel and Non-ferrous Metals: 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 followed by brush-off blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 16 to remove zinc oxide and other foreign contaminants. a. Provide uniform 1 mil profile surface.
22 23 24
F. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Verify factory-applied prime coat is in accordance with SDI/ANSI A250.10. 2. Prepare as indicated in COATING SYSTEMS Article.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
G. Concrete: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258. 3. Abrasive blast concrete surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4259 and SSPC SP 13/NACE No. 6. a. Provide profile per ICRI 301.2 as listed in MATERIALS article of this Specification Section. 4. Test pH and moisture content in accordance with EXAMINATION article in this Specification Section.
34 35 36 37 38 39
H. Concrete Masonry: 1. Cure for minimum of 28 days. 2. Remove all mortar spatters and protrusions. 3. Clean concrete masonry in accordance with Specification ASTM D4261. 4. Test pH and moisture content in accordance with EXAMINATION article in this Specification Section.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
I.
Preparation by Abrasive Blasting: 1. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted surfaces will not be wet after blasting and before painting. 2. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water and oil. a. Provide accessible separators and traps. 3. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, motors and other items that may be damaged from blasting. 4. All abrasive-blasted ferrous metal surfaces shall be inspected immediately prior to application of paint coatings. a. Inspection shall be performed to determine cleanliness and profile depth of blasted surfaces and to certify that surface has been prepared in accordance with these Specifications. 5. Perform additional blasting and cleaning as required to achieve surface preparation required. a. Re-blast surfaces not meeting requirements of these Specifications.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
b.
Prior to painting, re-blast surfaces allowed to set overnight and surfaces that show rust bloom. c. Surfaces allowed to set overnight or surfaces which show rust bloom prior to painting shall be re-inspected prior to paint application. 6. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils unless required otherwise by coating manufacturer. 7. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of abrasive particles in paint film. 8. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted. a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other such barriers to confine blast material. b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and keep plugged until blast operation is complete and residue is removed. 9. Abrasive blasting media may be recovered, cleaned and reused providing Contractor submits, for Engineer's review, a comprehensive recovery plan outlining all procedures and equipment proposed in reclamation process. 10. Properly dispose of blasting material contaminated with debris from blasting operation.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
J. 3.5
All Plastic Surfaces: 1. Sand using 80-100 grit sandpaper to scarify surfaces.
APPLICATION A. General: 1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing by coating manufacturer. b. Hollow metal shall be spray applied only. 2. Temperature and weather conditions: a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 DegF unless product has been formulated specifically for low temperature application and application is approved in writing by Engineer and paint manufacturer's authorized representative. b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. c. Do not paint on damp surfaces. 3. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 4. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified. a. Thickness specified is dry mil thickness. 5. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage. a. All paint systems are "to cover." 1) In situations of discrepancy between manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness requirements govern. b. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish and color. c. Finished paint system shall be uniform and without voids, bugholes, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller marks, runs, sags or other imperfections. 6. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until Engineer has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats. 7. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other difficult to work areas. 8. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid inter-coat contamination. a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat. 9. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface. 10. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating. a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer. b. If recoat time limits have expired re-prepare surface in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed recommendations.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 14
1 2 3 4 5
11. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed. 12. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 13. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand brush coating to work into all recesses. 14. Backroll surfaces if paint coatings are spray applied.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical representative to ensure that fieldapplied coatings are compatible with factory-applied or existing coatings. 1. Certify through material data sheets. 2. Perform test patch. a. Prepare existing coating surface to receive specified coating system. b. Apply coating to a minimum 1 SF area and allow to cure in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Evaluate adhesion to existing coating: 1) Concrete or Masonry substrates: ASTM D4541. 2) All other substrates: ASTM D6677 and ASTM D3359 (X-cut method). 3. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the coating manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied, surface preparation and method of application. a. Perform test patch as described above. 4. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface re-prepared, and new coating applied using appropriate paint system listed in the MATERIALS Article, Paint Systems paragraph of this Specification Section. a. All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be repaired to original condition or better by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
C. Prime Coat Application: 1. Apply structural steel and miscellaneous steel prime coat in the factory. a. Finish coats shall be applied in the {field} {factory}. b. Prime coat referred to here is prime coat as indicated in this Specification. 1) Prime coating applied in factory (shop) as part of Fabricator's standard rust inhibiting and protection coating is not acceptable as replacement for specified prime coating. 2. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. a. Apply prime coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and as written in this Specification Section. 3. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 IN below exposed surfaces. 4. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation. 5. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to primer application over entire surface. 6. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats. a. Restore primed surface equal to surface before damage. 7. All surfaces of steel lintels and steel components of concrete lintels used in wall construction shall be completely painted with both prime and finish coats prior to placing in wall.
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
D. Finish Coat Application: 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with this Specification Section; manufacturer instructions take precedent over these Specifications. 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same material specified for finish coat. a. Prepare damaged area in accordance with the PREPARATION Article of this Specification Section.
52 53
3.6
COLOR CODING A. Color code piping in accordance with the SCHEDULE Article of this Specification Section.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 15
1
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Application Deficiencies: 1. Surfaces showing runs, laps, brush marks, telegraphing of surface imperfections or other defects will not be accepted. 2. Surfaces showing evidence of fading, chalking, blistering, delamination or other defects due to improper surface preparation, environmental controls or application will not be accepted. a. Epoxy surfaces showing evidence of chalking or amine blush shall be prepared and recoated as follows: 1) Solvent clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP1 and abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP7/NACE No. 4. 2) Recoat with intermediate and finish coats in accordance with coating system specified herein.
13 14 15
B. Provide protection for painted surfaces. 1. Surfaces showing soiling, staining, streaking, chipping, scratches, or other defects will not be accepted.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C. Contractor Performed Testing: 1. The Contractor shall provide ongoing testing and inspection, including but not limited to the following: a. Measurement and recording of environmental conditions as specified herein. b. Measurement and recording of substrate conditions as specified herein. c. Thickness Testing: 1) Wet film thickness during application in accordance with ASTM D4414. 2) Dry Film Thickness (DFT) in accordance with SSPC PA 2 and ASTM D7091.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
D. Instrumentation: 1. Provide instrumentation as necessary to measure and record atmospheric and substrate conditions, including but not limited to: a. Dry Film Thickness Gauge. b. Wet Film Thickness Gauge. c. Sling Psychrometer. d. Surface Temperature Gauge. e. Anemometer. f. Moisture Meter.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
E. Maintain Daily Records: 1. Record the following information during application: a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by painters. b. Air temperature. c. Relative humidity. d. Dew point. e. Moisture content and pH level of concrete or masonry substrates prior to coating. f. Surface temperature of substrate. g. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's recommended application parameters including temporary heating, ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and provisions utilized to mitigate wind blown dust and debris from contaminating the wet paint film. h. For exterior painting: 1) Sky condition. 2) Wind speed and direction. i. Record environmental conditions, substrate moisture content and surface temperature information not less than once every 4 HRS during application. 1) Record hourly when temperatures are below 50 DegF or above 100 DegF. 2. Record the following information daily for the paint manufacturer's recommended curing period: a. Date and start time of cure period for each item or area. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
b.
3.
For exterior painting: 1) Sky conditions. 2) Wind speed and direction. 3) Air temperature. a) Dry Bulb. b) Wet Bulb. 4) Relative humidity. 5) Dew point. 6) Surface temperatures. c. Record environmental conditions not less than once every 4 HRS. 1) Record hourly when temperatures are below 50 DegF or above 100 DegF. d. Provisions utilized to protect each item or area and to maintain areas within manufacturer's recommended curing parameters. Format for daily record to be computer generated.
15
F. Measure wet coating with wet film thickness gages in accordance with ASTM D4414.
16 17 18
G. Measure coating dry film thickness in accordance with SSPC PA 2. 1. Engineer may measure coating thickness at any time during project to assure conformance with these Specifications.
19 20
H. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gage specifically designed for such.
21
I.
Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for such.
22
J.
Provide wet paint signs.
23
3.8
CLEANING
24 25
A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. 1. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.
26
B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items.
27
C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris.
28 29 35
3.9
COLOR SCHEDULE A. Pipe Bollards: 02SF Safety Yellow.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid HIGH PERFORMANCE INDUSTRIAL COATINGS 09 96 00 - 17
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 09 97 23 CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for the furnishing and installation of a protective liner to all concrete surfaces as provided on the Drawings and in the Schedule in Section 3.6.
8 9 10 11
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 13
A. All work for and in connection with the liner shall be performed in strict conformance with all applicable specifications, instructions, and recommendations of the liner manufacturer.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
B. Qualifications: 1. All work for and in connection with the installation of the liner, the preparation of surfaces, the application and curing of the liner, and testing of the liner shall be considered as highly specialized work and shall be performed by the manufacturer of the liner or by a firm authorized by and recommended to the Engineer in writing by the manufacturer, as having demonstrated satisfactory past experience in the installation of this liner system. 2. Testing shall be performed by the Contractor with observation by the Owner’s inspector. Provide equipment, apparatus, and trained personnel in the use of the electrical spark tester and pull-off equipment. Provide proof of previous successful experience on other similar projects, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Submit qualifications for review and approval by the Owner/Engineer.
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
C. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. b. C413, Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. c. C579, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. d. C580, Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. e. C695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. f. D16, Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. g. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. h. D790, Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. i. D3960, Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings. j. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. k. D4262, Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. l. D4541, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. m. D4787, Standard Practice for continuity verification of liquid or sheet lining applied to concrete substrates. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
n. 2. 3. 4.
5. 1.3
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
D7234, Standard Test for pull-off adhesion strength of coating on concrete using portable pull-off adhesion testers. o. G20, Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Pipeline Coatings. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29CFR, 1926 / 191Safety and Health Standards. Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications (SSPC): a. Vol. 2 NACE International a. SP0188 – Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates b. Surface Preparation Standards ICRI Technical guidelines – 300 Series Concrete
DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: Specific coating terminology used in this section is in accordance with definitions contained in ASTM D16, ASTM D3960, and the following definitions: 1. Monolithic: A material of uniform composition applied as a continuous surface. 2. Coating or Liner Systems: All components together as a unit used to protect the structure against corrosion. These components include, as applicable: defect filler and reprofiling materials, infiltration and outgassing control, primer and finish coats. 3. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): The thickness of one fully cured continuous application of coating. 4. Applicator: The person assigned by the CONTRACTOR to apply the specified liner system. 5. MPII: Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/WARRANTY
26 27 28 29 30
A. The interior area of structures shall be sealed and protected with the specified liner at the locations indicated on the Drawings or as called for in the Specifications. 1. The Product(s) shall provide a seamless, continuous liner for the designated surfaces. 2. Surface preparation including installation of resurfacing or outgassing prevention primer materials shall be provided for installation of the liner.
31 32 33
B. The liner as installed shall be continuous and free from any holes, defects, or other faults. 1. An electrical holiday test shall be performed on the installed liner to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the liner is free from porosity or holidays.
34 35
C. Complete lining installation shall be warranted for a period of three years against defects due to material failure or installation deficiencies. This warranty shall not be prorated.
36
1.5
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
QUALIFICATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS FOR APPLICATOR A. The coating system shall be applied by an Applicator certified by the Coating System manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall provide evidence that the personnel performing the product application for each project received the manufacturer’s training and certification.
1.6
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See General Conditions of the Contract. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. See 2.4 Product Data below. 3. The Contractor shall submit shop data of installation details indicating how the structures will be lined and the electrical (or other) testing equipment to be used. a. No liner shall be installed until this data has been submitted and approved by the Engineer. 4. Submittal data shall include the following as a minimum:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
a. b. c. d.
5. 1.7
12 13 14 15 16
Technical data on all materials including catalogue cut sheets. Installation procedures (including surface preparation) in accordance with MPII. Criteria for acceptance of the surface preparation. Details of application of resurfacer/primer and finish coats, including required curing times. e. Dry or Wet film thickness testing. f. Holiday testing. g. Surface adhesion testing. h. Surface preparation equipment details. Applicator qualifications.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The products furnished under this section will be installed in environmental structures. The products will be exposed to extremes in corrosivity and humidity. In addition, the products will be exposed to corrosive, abrasive and reactive liquids and gasses associated with wastewater conveyance. The products will be immersed or intermittently immersed in wastewater and are subject to splashing of wastewater.
17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
18
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
19 20 21 22
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers’ products are acceptable: 1. Raven 405. 2. Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield H2S.
23 24 25
B. Epoxy based coatings shall be applied within three months of their date of manufacture (unless the manufacturer’s requirements are more than stringent), or otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
26 27 28
C. Thicknesses specified herein are the minimum dry film thickness required and do not include the resurfacer/primer thickness, unless otherwise noted. The OWNER requires a minimum thickness of 120 mils. Provide greater thickness where recommended by the manufacturer.
29
2.2
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Resurfacing/Primer Material: 1. Applicator shall provide resurfacing material to fill cavities and resurface exposed aggregate as required to achieve a pinhole-free membrane of the specified total film thickness. 2. Resurfacing or primer material shall be per the liner manufacturer’s recommendations and assure that no off-gassing will occur and degrade the application of the finish coating/liner. a. Raven 155 applied at 6 mils (wet), each of 2 coats. 2.3
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
MATERIALS
EQUIPMENT A. The equipment used for installation of the liner shall be approved in writing by the liner manufacturer.
2.4
PRODUCT DATA A. Before materials are delivered to the job site, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following submittal information: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products used in the coating system. 2. For all coating system components, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the manufacturer’s application instructions, which shall include the following: a. Surface preparation recommendations. b. Resurfacer/Primer type. c. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness for vertical and overhead applications.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
d.
3.
Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each. e. Curing time before submergence in liquid. f. Thinner (if approved) to be used with coating material. g. Ventilation requirements. h. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the coating shall be applied. i. Allowable application methods. j. Maximum allowable moisture content. k. Maximum storage life. List of materials proposed to be used under this section and manufacturer’s data for each material.
12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
13
3.1
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
14 15 16
A. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer’s name, coating type, batch number, date of manufacture, storage life, and special handling directions.
17 18 19 20 21
B. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes. The authorized Inspector shall reject materials exceeding the storage life recommended by the manufacturer and they shall be removed from the site, and replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER.
22
3.2
GENERAL
23 24
A. Applicator shall perform surface preparation and installation of liner system in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and as specified herein.
25 26
B. Limits of Application: The interior walls, and ceilings of the structures identified on the Drawings shall be covered with the liner system.
27 28
C. The materials shall be applied at the project site by factory trained and approved technicians only.
29 30
D. Applicator shall apply the lining system within the ambient temperature, material temperature and relative humidity ranges specified by the manufacturer.
31 32
E. Application Log: A daily log shall be kept showing date, weather conditions, quantity of structure(s) lined (square footage covered), and number of gallons of products applied.
33
F. Cure time for the liner system components shall be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
34
3.3
SURFACE PREPARATION
35 36
A. Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to beginning installation of resurfacer/primer. Verify moisture content of substrate complies with MPII.
37 38 39 40 41
B. Surfaces shall be clean and structurally sound. 1. Defects shall be repaired and resurfaced prior to surface preparation. 2. Fins in concrete surfaces shall be removed by grinding smooth. 3. Resurfacing material shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
42 43 44 45
C. Surface shall be prepared per SSCP-SP13/NACE No. 6 to meet ICRI surface profiles between CSP 3 and 5 as specified by the ICRI Technical Guideline 310.2R, unless otherwise specified by the coating manufacturer. Preparation of the surface shall include removal of all contaminants as required by SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 and the coating’s manufacturer requirements.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 4
1 2 3 4 5
D. Concrete surfaces to be lined shall be free of all active leaks and infiltrations. All standing water shall be eliminated prior to application of any materials. 1. All leaks and infiltrations shall be repaired using a cement base, quick-setting, hydraulic compound that instantly stops water or seepage and expands as it sets. 2. Surface preparation shall be acceptable to liner manufacturer and Engineer.
6 7 8 9
E. After all surface preparation is completed, including application of resurfacing/primer materials as required, surfaces adjacent to the work area shall be cleaned of dirt, blasting residues, and other debris to prevent wind-blown contamination of the prepared substrate or freshly applied coating.
10 11 12 13 14
F. Applicator shall take whatever precautions are necessary to prevent contamination of the applied products by rain, condensation, dust, etc. 1. If dust or impurities are present on the primed surface, they shall be blown off or vacuumed to a dust-free condition prior to top coating. 2. Apply the lining within the time window for top coating the primer or resurfacer.
15
G. Prepared surfaces shall be inspected and approved by Inspector.
16
3.4
APPLICATION
17 18
A. Liner shall be applied onto properly prepared surfaces at a minimum of 120 mils dry film thickness per the MPII.
19 20 21 22
B. Confirm that the ambient temperature and humidity, the prepared surface temperature and moisture content, and the temperature of the coating material to be applied are within the manufacturer’s recommended ranges. Coatings shall be applied at a time of day when the ambient temperature and humidity is expected to be steady or falling.
23 24
C. The prime and finish coat (as applicable) shall be a contrasting color. The color of the final coat shall be chosen by the OWNER, if different colors are available.
25 26 27
D. Ensure that pump, hoses, gun, tip, and pressure are properly matched for the coating to be applied. Ensure that the application equipment has been properly cleaned prior to application of coating. Test spray pattern for uniformity of distribution.
28
E. Protect surfaces from rapid drying due to heavy wind or hot sun.
29 30
F. Cure coatings in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, prior to putting into service.
31
G. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer.
32
3.5
FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
33
A. Wet film thickness shall be verified continuously throughout the application process.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
B. A minimum 12 HRS after application, the surface of liner shall be cleaned to permit visual inspection and testing with high-voltage holiday detection equipment (spark-tester). 1. Holiday tests shall be performed in accordance with NACE SP0188 and ASTM D4787. 2. An induced holiday shall be made onto the coated concrete surface and shall serve to delimit the minimum/maximum voltage to be used to test the coating for holidays at that particular area. 3. The spark tester shall be initially set at 100 V per one (1) mil of film thickness applied but may be increased if it is insufficient to detect the induced holiday. 4. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired per the manufacturer's recommendations.
43 44 45
C. At the Engineer’s or Owner’s option surface adhesion pull-off tests may be performed by Owner’s Inspector verifying requirements of coating manufacturer’s specifications. 1. Frequency of pull-off tests: one per 100 SF of applied area.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 5
1 2 3
D. At the Engineer's direction, destruction dry film thickness measurements may be performed in accordance with SSPC PA-2 guidelines for frequency of sampling, averaging of sample results, minimum acceptable value for any one sample result, etc.
4 5 6 7
E. All areas of liner failing to meet the field test shall be properly repaired and retested. 1. The applicator shall provide all equipment and personnel required to clean and test the liner as described herein and as recommended by the liner manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.
8 9 10
3.6
SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 09 96 00 for schedule of structures receiving Concrete Protective Liner.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid CONCRETE PROTECTIVE LINER 09 97 23 - 6
SECTION 10 14 00 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7
A. Section Includes: 1. Tag, tape and stenciling systems for equipment, piping, valves, pumps, ductwork and similar items, and hazard and safety signs.
8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
SUMMARY
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. The International Society of Automation (ISA). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMA/ANSI): a. Z535.1, Safety Color Code. b. Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs. c. Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols. d. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910.145, Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.
1.3
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Catalog information for all identification systems. b. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 3. Identification register, listing all items in PART 3 of this Specification Section to be identified, type of identification system to be used, lettering, location and color.
35
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
36
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. W.H. Brady Co. 2. Panduit. 3. Seton. 4. National Band and Tag Co. 5. Carlton Industries, Inc.
44
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 1
1
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Type A1 - Round Metal Tags: 1. Materials: a. Aluminum or stainless steel. b. Stainless steel shall be used in corrosive environments. 2. Size: a. Diameter: 1-1/2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 0.035 IN (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
B. Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags: 1. Materials: Stainless steel. 2. Size: a. 3-1/2 IN x 1-1/2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 0.036 IN (20 GA) minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Stamped and filled with black coloring. 4. Color: Natural.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
C. Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Size: a. Width 1/2 IN minimum. b. Length as required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN minimum mounting hole. b. Legend: Embossed. 4. Color: Natural.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D. Type B1- Square Nonmetallic Tags: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: 2 x 2 IN minimum. b. Thickness: 100 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. 3/16 IN mounting hole with metal eyelet. b. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded and fade resistant. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. b. Lettering: Black.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
E. Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs: 1. Materials: Fiberglass reinforced or durable plastic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 60 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Rounded corners. b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets. c. Legend: Preprinted, permanently embedded and fade resistant for a 10 year minimum outdoor durability. 4. Color: a. Background: Manufacturer standard or as specified. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 2
1 2 3
5.
b. Lettering: Black. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
F. Type C - Laminated Name Plates: 1. Materials: Phenolic or DR (high impact) acrylic. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 1/16 IN. 3. Fabrication: a. Outdoor rated and UV resistant when installed outdoors. b. Two (2) layers laminated. c. Legend: Engraved through top lamination into bottom lamination. d. Two (2) drilled side holes, for screw mounting. 4. Color: Black top surface, white core, unless otherwise indicated.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
G. Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs: 1. Materials: Vinyl tape or vinyl cloth. 2. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. b. Thickness: 5 mils minimum. 3. Fabrication: a. Indoor/Outdoor grade. b. Weather and UV resistant inks. c. Permanent adhesive. d. Legend: Preprinted. e. Wire markers to be self-laminating. 4. Color: White with black lettering or as specified. 5. Standards for OSHA signs: NEMA/ANSI Z535.1, NEMA/ANSI Z535.2, NEMA/ANSI Z535.3, NEMA/ANSI Z535.4, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.145.
29 30 31 32 33 34
H. Type E - Heat Shrinkable Tape Tags: 1. Materials: Polyolefin. 2. Size: As required by text. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted. 4. Color: White background, black printing.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
I.
Type F - Underground Warning Tape: 1. Materials: Polyethylene. 2. Size: a. 6 IN wide (minimum). b. Thickness: 3.5 mils. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded. b. Message continuous printed. c. Tensile strength: 1750 psi. 4. Color: As specified.
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
J.
Type G - Stenciling System: 1. Materials: a. Exterior type stenciling enamel. b. Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. 2. Size: As required. 3. Fabrication: a. Legend: As required. 4. Color: Black or white for best contrast.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K. Underground Tracer Wire: 1. Materials: a. Wire: 1) 12 GA AWG. 2) Solid. b. Wire nuts: Waterproof type. c. Split bolts: Brass. 2.3
9 10 11 12 13 14
ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Bead chain: #6 brass, aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Plastic strap: Nylon, urethane or polypropylene. 3. Screws: Self-tapping, stainless steel. 4. Adhesive, solvent activated.
2.4
15 16
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators.
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION
19
A. Install identification devices at specified locations.
20
B. All identification devices to be printed by mechanical process, hand printing is not acceptable.
21 22
C. Attach tags to equipment with sufficient surface or body area with solvent activated adhesive applied to back of each tag.
23 24 25 26
D. Attach tags with 1/8 IN round or flat head screws to equipment without sufficient surface or body area, or porous surfaces. 1. Where attachment with screws should not or cannot penetrate substrate, attach with plastic strap.
27 28 29 30
E. Single items of equipment enclosed in a housing or compartment to be tagged on outside of housing. 1. Several items of equipment mounted in housing to be individually tagged inside the compartment.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
F. Tracer Wire: 1. Attach to pipe at a maximum of 10 FT intervals with tape or tie-wraps. 2. Continuous pass from each valve box and above grade at each structure. 3. Coil enough wire at each valve box to extend wire a foot above the ground surface. 4. 1,000 FT maximum spacing between valve boxes. 5. If split bolts are used for splicing, wrap with electrical tape. 6. If wire nuts are used for splicing, knot wire at each splice point leaving 6 IN of wire for splicing. 7. Use continuous strand of wire between valve box where possible. a. Continuous length shall be no shorter than 100 FT.
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Process Systems: 1. General: a. Provide arrows and markers on piping. 1) At 20 FT maximum centers along continuous lines. 2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At valves, risers, "T" joints, machinery or equipment.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
2.
3.
4.
4) Where pipes pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of pipe with arrow markers pointing in flow direction. 1) If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping. Trenches with piping: a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape b. Location: Halfway between top of piping and finished grade. c. Letter height: 1-1/4 IN minimum. d. Natural gas or digester gas: 1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED GAS LINE BELOW” e. Potable water: 1) Color: Blue with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED WATER LINE BELOW” f. Storm and sanitary sewer lines: 1) Color: Green with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW” g. (Nonpotable) water piping, except 3 IN and smaller irrigation pipe: 1) Color: Green with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED NONPOTABLE WATER LINE BELOW” h. Chemical feed piping (e.g., chlorine solution, polymer solution, caustic solution, etc.): 1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED CHEMICAL LINE BELOW” i. Other piping (e.g., compressed air, irrigation, refrigerant, heating water, etc.): 1) Color: Yellow with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION” b) Second line: “BURIED PIPE LINE BELOW” Yard valves, buried, with valve box and concrete pad: a. Tag type: Type A2 - Rectangle Metal Tags. b. Fastener: 3/16 IN x 7/8 IN plastic screw anchor with 1 IN #6 stainless steel pan head screw. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Valve designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “V-xxx”). Valves and slide gates: a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 2) Indoor noncorrosive: a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. b. Fastener:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain. c. Color: Per ASME A13.1 corresponding to the piping system. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Valve designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “V-xxx”). Process equipment (e.g., pumps, pump motors, blowers, air compressors, bar screens, clarifier drive mechanism, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 3) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: 1) Self. 2) Screws. 3) Adhesive. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Primary Sludge Pump P-xxx”). Piping systems: a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type G - Stenciling System. 2) Indoor locations: a) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: Self. c. Color: Per ASME A13.1. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: Manufacturers standard for the pipe diameter. 2) Mark piping in accordance with ASME A13.1. 3) Use piping designation as indicated on the Drawings. 4) Arrow: Single arrow. Process tanks (over 1000 GAL) and basins, (e.g., chemical storage, clarifiers, trickling filters, digesters, etc): a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: 1) Screw. 2) Self. c. Location as directed by Owner. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 4 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Clarifier CL-xxx”). Tanks (less than 1000 GAL) (e.g., break tanks, chemical tanks, hydro-pneumatic tanks, air receivers, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “Polymer Storage Tank Txxx”) Equipment that starts automatically:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
a. b. c. d. e.
Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. Fastener: 1) Type B2 - Screw or adhesive. 2) Type D - Self. Size: 5 IN x 7 IN Location: See Drawings. Legend: 1) OSHA Warning Sign. 2) Description of Warning: “THIS MACHINE STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
B. Instrumentation Systems: 1. Instrumentation Equipment (e.g., flow control valves, primary elements, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Outdoor locations: Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 2) Indoor noncorrosive: a) Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. 3) Indoor corrosive: a) Stainless steel Type A1 - Round Metal Tags. b) Type B1 - Square Nonmetallic Tags. b. Fastener: 1) Type A1: Chain of the same material. 2) Type B1: Stainless steel chain. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Equipment ISA designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “FIT-xxx”). 2. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., PLC control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "PLC CONTROL PANEL PCP-xxx"). 3. Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., PLC’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "PLC-xxx” or “CR-xxx"). 4. Through enclosure door mounted components (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component ISA tag number as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., “HS-xxx”).
48 49 50 51 52 53
C. HVAC Systems: 1. General: a. Provide arrows and markers on ducts. 1) At 20 FT maximum centers along continuous lines. 2) At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3) At dampers, risers, branches, machinery or equipment.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
4) Where ducts pass through floors, walls, ceilings, cladding assemblies and like obstructions provide markers on both sides. b. Position markers on both sides of duct with arrow markers pointing in flow direction. 1) If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. c. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to ducts. HVAC Equipment (e.g., unit heaters, exhaust fans, air handlers, etc.): a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "EF-xxx"). Ductwork: a. Tag type: 1) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. 2) Type G - Stenciling System. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1 IN minimum. 2) Description of ductwork, (e.g., “AIR SUPPLY”). 3) Arrows: Single arrow. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., fan control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment designation as indicated on the Drawings (e.g., "FAN CONTROL PANEL FCP-xxx"). Wall mounted thermostats: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description of equipment controlled (e.g., "UH-xxx" or AHU-xxx"). Components inside equipment enclosure, (e.g., controller’s, control relays, contactors, and timers): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "CR-xxx"). Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”).
D. Electrical Systems: 1. Trenches with ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, or direct-buried wire and cable. a. Tag type: Type F - Underground Warning Tape. b. Letter height: 1-1/4 IN minimum. c. Location: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
2.
3.
4.
1) Where trench is 12 IN or more below finished grade: In trench 6 IN below finished grade. 2) Where trench is less than 12 IN below finished grade: In trench 3 IN below finished grade. d. Electrical power (e.g., low and medium voltage): 1) Color: Red with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”. e. Communications (e.g., telephone, instrumentation, LAN, SCADA): 1) Color: Orange with black letters. 2) Legend: a) First line: “CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION”. b) Second line: “BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE BELOW”. Switchgear, switchboards and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Main equipment legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 1 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/8 IN minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBxxx"). 3) Second line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 4) Third line: System voltage and phase (e.g., “480/277 V, 3PH”). 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). d. Main and feeder device legend: 1) Letter height: 3/8 IN minimum. 2) Description of load (e.g., “MAIN DISCONNECT”, "PUMP Pxxx" or "PANELBOARD HPxxx"). Panelboards and transformers: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "PANELBOARD LPxxx" or "TRANSFORMER Txxx"). 3) Second line (panelboards only): System voltage and phase (e.g., “208/120V, 3PH”). 4) Third line: a) Source of power (e.g., "FED FROM MCCxxx LOCATED IN ROOM xxx"). b) Include the building name or number if the source is in another building. 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). Transfer switches: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: a) First line: 3/8 IN minimum. b) Subsequent lines: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) First line: Equipment name (e.g., "AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ATSxxx").
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
3) Second line: Normal source of power (e.g., "NORMAL SOURCE FED FROM MCCxxx"). 4) Third line: Emergency source of power (e.g., "EMERGENCY SOURCE FED FROM SGENxxx"). 5) Fourth line: Date installed (e.g., “INSTALLED JULY 20xx”). 5. Safety switches, separately mounted circuit breakers and motor starters, VFD’s, etc.: a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) First line: Description of load equipment is connected to (e.g., "PUMP Pxxx"). 6. Enclosure for instrumentation and control equipment, (e.g., lighting control panels, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/2 IN minimum. 2) Equipment name (e.g., "LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LCPxxx"). 7. Components inside equipment enclosures (e.g., circuit breakers, fuses, control power transformers, control relays, contactors, timers, etc.): a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags and Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 3/16 IN minimum. 2) Description or function of component (e.g., "M-xxx”, “CR-xxx” or “TR-xxx"). 8. Through enclosure door mounted equipment (e.g., selector switches, controller digital displays, etc.): a. Tag type: Type C - Phenolic Name Plates. b. Fastener: Screws. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/4 IN minimum. 2) Component tag number as indicated on the Drawings or as defined by contractor (e.g., “HS-xxx”). 9. Conductors in control panels and in pull or junction boxes where multiple circuits exist. a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings or as furnished with the equipment. 10. Conductors in handholes and manholes. a. Tag type: Type A3 - Metal Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Nylon strap. c. Tag conductor at both ends. d. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum. 2) Circuit number or wire number as scheduled on the Drawings. 11. Grounding conductors associated with grounding electrode system in accordance with the following: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Tags. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: 1) Letter height: 1/8 IN minimum. 2) Function of conductor (e.g., "MAIN BONDING JUMPER", "TO GROUND RING", "TO MAIN WATER PIPE"). 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32
12. Flash protection for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels and motor control centers: a. Tag type: Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: Self. c. Legend: Per NFPA 70. 13. Entrances to electrical rooms: a. Tag type: Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. b. Fastener: Screw or adhesive. c. Size: 5 IN x 7 IN. d. Location: Each door to room. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “HIGH VOLTAGE, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY”. 14. Equipment where more than one (1) voltage source is present: a. Tag type: 1) Type B2 - Nonmetallic Signs. 2) Type D - Self-Adhesive Tape Signs. b. Fastener: 1) Screw or adhesive. 2) Self. c. Size: 1-3/4 IN x 2-1/2 IN. d. Location: Exterior face of enclosure or cubical. e. Legend: 1) OSHA Danger Sign. 2) Description of Danger: “MULTIPLE VOLTAGE SOURCES”. 3.3
HAZARD AND SAFETY SIGNS A. Provide 5 Hazard and Safety Signs: 1. Type B2. 2. Inscription as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10 14 00 - 11
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 10 14 23 SIGNAGE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8 9
A. Section Includes: 1. Room identification signs. 2. Other identification signs: a. Fire and/or smoke barrier identification signs. 3. Aluminum letters.
10 11 12 13 14
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 10 14 00 - Identification Devices. 1.2
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. B26, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 3. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2012 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
1.3
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
SUMMARY
DEFINITIONS A. Wet and/or Corrosive Areas: For the purposes of this Specification Section, the following rooms or areas are considered wet and/or corrosive: 1. All exterior mounted signage. 2. Dewatering Facility: a. Storage/Chemical Room b. Dewatering Room c. Storage
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Color charts for Engineer's color selection. 1) Color selection shall be made from manufacturer's complete color line including all premium and special colors. 3. Schedule of all signs indicating text and graphics. 4. Layout drawings of all signage showing size, letter style, text, border, finish, and installation detail. a. Provide drawings for: 1) Room, exit, and stair identification signs. 2) Fire and/or smoke barrier identification signs. 3) Aluminum letters.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1
1 2 3 4
B. Samples: 1. Room, exit, and stair identification signs. 2. Fire and/or smoke barrier identification signs. 3. Aluminum letters.
5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
6
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Room, exit and stair identification signs: a. ASE - Architectural Signs and Engraving. b. ASI Signage Innovations. c. Best Sign Systems. d. Mohawk Sign Systems. e. Nelson-Harkins. f. Southwell Co. g. Stamprite Supersine Identification Specialists. 2. Fire and/or smoke barrier identification signs: a. Brady. b. Panduit. c. Seton. d. Carlton Industries. 3. Aluminum letters: a. A R K Ramos Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. ASI Signage Innovations. c. Leeds Architectural Letters. d. Metal Arts. e. Metallic Arts. f. The Southwell Co.
29
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
30
2.2
MATERIALS
31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Room, Exit, and Stair Identification Signs: 1. Interior: a. Dry, non-corrosive areas: Melamine plastic suitable for raised lettering and Braille. b. Wet and/or corrosive areas: Aluminum or fiberglass suitable for raised lettering and Braille. 2. Exterior: Aluminum or fiberglass suitable for raised lettering and Braille.
37 38
B. Fire and/or Smoke Barrier Identification Signs: 1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape or vinyl cloth.
39 40 41
C. Aluminum Letters: 1. Cast aluminum ASTM B26. 2. For machine cut letters, provide aluminum of appropriate alloy and hardness.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
2.3
FABRICATION A. Room and Exit Identification Signs: 1. General: a. Raised text, border and graphics. 1) Minimum 1/32 IN height. 2) Provide international graphic symbology for all toilet, locker and shower rooms or combinations thereof, and for unisex toilet rooms and stairs. 3) Provide handicap symbol on all signs for rooms meeting handicap requirements.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
b. c. d. e. f. g.
Grade 2 Braille. Finish: Eggshell. 1) Color: To be selected. Text: 1) Typeface: Sans Serif. 2) Size: Minimum 3/4 IN high. Text as indicated in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. Exterior signs shall be rated for exterior use. All signs shall comply with requirements of ADA.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
B. Fire and/or Smoke Barrier Identification Signs: 1. Self-adhesive tape tags and signs: a. Materials: Vinyl tape or vinyl cloth. b. Size: 1) Surface: As required by text. 2) Thickness: 5 mils minimum. c. Fabrication: 1) Indoor/Outdoor grade. 2) Weather and UV resistant inks. 3) Permanent adhesive. 4) Legend: Preprinted. 5) Self-laminating. d. Color: White with black lettering or as specified. 2. Stenciling system: a. Materials: 1) Exterior type stenciling enamel. 2) Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. b. Size: As required. c. Fabrication: 1) Legend: As required. d. Color: Black or white for best contrast.
31
C. Hazard Communication Signage (OSHA signage): See Specification Section 10 14 00.
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
D. Aluminum Letters: 1. General: a. Cast aluminum, machine cut or laser cut aluminum. b. Finish: Baked enamel . a) Color: Color To be selected by Owner. c. Mounting: 1) 1 IN projected. 2) Provide stainless steel mounting studs. d. Text as indicated in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. 2. Letters: a. Size: Upper case, 8 IN high. b. Depth: 3/8 IN. 3. Provide true angles, crisp corners and straight edges with no burrs or pitting in the surface.
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
E. Site Signs: 1. All aluminum construction: a. Panel size as required by text indicated in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. b. Finish: 1) Baked enamel: a) Color To be selected by Owner. 2. Round posts and bridge tubing: a. Size: Minimum 1-3/4 IN OD and maximum 3-1/2IN OD. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. 4. 5.
2.4
7 8 9 10
Left side justified. Text as indicated in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section. Signs: ASI Signage Innvovations Modulex "Compass Modular Exterior System" with individual styles as noted in the SCHEDULES Article in PART 3 of this Specification Section.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Room Identification Signs: 1. Install signs using foam tape for interior signs and stainless steel screws (minimum of two (2)) for exterior signs. a. Stainless steel screws shall be painted to match sign color. 2. Mounting Locations: a. Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48 IN minimum above the finished floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest tactile character and 60 IN maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the highest tactile character. b. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right side of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. c. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 IN minimum by 18 IN minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. 3. Interior and exterior signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall comply with ADA.
30 31 32 33 34
B. Fire and/or Smoke Barrier Identification Signs: 1. Provide marking and identification in compliance with Building Code. 2. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces. 3. Repeat at intervals not exceeding 15 FT measured horizontally. 4. Lettering: Not less than 1/2 IN high.
35 36 37
C. Aluminum Letters: 1. Install letters where indicated on Drawings. 2. Mount to walls with 1 IN projection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
38 39 40
3.2
SCHEDULES A. Room and Exit Identification Signs: BUILDING LOCATION
MOUNTING
VERBIAGE
REMARKS
OPERATIONS BUILDING DOOR 11-102A
EXTERIOR
OFFICE
2
DOOR 11-102B
INTERIOR
OFFICE
3
DOOR 11-103A
EXTERIOR
MAINTENANCE
2
DOOR 11-103D
INTERIOR
MAINTENANCE
3
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 4
BUILDING LOCATION
MOUNTING
VERBIAGE
REMARKS
DOOR 11-104A
INTERIOR
LUNCH ROOM
3
DOOR 11-105A
INTERIOR
WOMEN
1, 3
DOOR 11-106A
INTERIOR
MEN'S LOCKER ROOM
1, 3
DOOR 11-107A
EXTERIOR
OPERATIONS
2
DOOR 11-108A
INTERIOR
INVENTORY
3
DOOR 11-108A
INTERIOR
INVENTORY
2
DOOR 11-109A
EXTERIOR
TRUCK LOADING
2
DOOR 11-109C
EXTERIOR
TRUCK LOADING
2
DOOR 11-109E
EXTERIOR
TRUCK LOADING
2
DOOR 11-110A
EXTERIOR
AUXILLIARY STORAGE
2
DOOR 11-111A
INTERIOR
POLYMER STORAGE
2
DOOR 11-112A
INTERIOR
STAIR
DOOR 11-112A
INTERIOR
PUMP ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
2
DOOR 11-112B
INTERIOR
PUMP ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
2
DOOR 11-112B
INTERIOR
TRUCK LOADING
3
DOOR 11-112C
EXTERIOR
PUMP ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
2
DOOR 11-113A
EXTERIOR
STAIR
2
DOOR 11-202A
INTERIOR
SLUDGE DEWATERING
2
DOOR 11-203A
INTERIOR
UNISEX RESTROOM
DOOR 11-204A
INTERIOR
OPERATOR ROOM
DOOR 11-204A
INTERIOR
STAIR
DOOR 11-204B
INTERIOR
SLUDGE THICKENING
2
DOOR 11-204B
INTERIOR
OPERATOR ROOM
3
DOOR 11-205A
INTERIOR
ELECTRICAL ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
2
DOOR 11-205B
INTERIOR
ELECTRICAL ROOM AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
3
DOOR 11-206A
EXTERIOR
SLUDGE THICKENING
2
DOOR 11-207A
INTERIOR
UTILITY ROOM
2
DOOR 11-208B
INTERIOR
STAIR
DOOR 11-208B
INTERIOR
SLUDGE DEWATERING
SLUDGE HANDLING BUILDING
1, 3
1, 3 2 1, 3
1, 3 2
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 5
BUILDING LOCATION DOOR 11-208C
MOUNTING INTERIOR
VERBIAGE ROOF ACCESS AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
REMARKS 3
REMARKS: 1.
Provide Universal Graphic Symbology.
2.
Mount adjacent to pull side of door.
3.
Mount adjacent to push side of door.
1 2 3 5
B. Fire and/or Smoke Barrier Identification Signs: 1. FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 6
SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet and bath accessories.
7 8 9
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
10
1.2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. b. A480, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's recommendation on fasteners. 3. Schedule of items being provided for each room. Reference rooms using room number designated on Drawings. 4. Catalog cut sheet of each item proposed.
30 31 32 33
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
34
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
35
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original packaging.
36
B. Store materials in a dry, conditioned location, until ready for installation.
37
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
38
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
39
A. Product numbers scheduled are manufactured by Bobrick.
40 41 42 43
B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1
1
3.
2 3
Bradley Corp.
C. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS
4 5 6
A. Toilet Accessories: 1. General: ASTM A480, stainless steel. 2. Grab bars: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
7 8
B. Anchoring Devices: 1. Stainless steel.
9
2.3
FABRICATION
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
A. Toilet Accessories: 1. General: a. Satin finish. b. Items shall meet design requirements of ADA. 2. Grab bars: a. Concealed mounting. b. 3 IN DIA flange. c. 1-1/2 IN OD. d. Peened finish on gripping surface.
19 20 21
B. Anchoring Devices: 1. Designed to withstand minimum concentrated load of 250 LB applied at any point on grab bar.
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
3.1
INSTALLATION
24
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and in accordance with ADA.
25
B. Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
26 27
C. Mount all items using manufacturer's recommended anchorage devices for the substrate to which the accessory is to be mounted.
28
3.2
SCHEDULE
29
A. See Drawings for locations.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
B. Model numbers indicated are Bobrick, unless noted otherwise. 1. TA-1: Robe Hook - B-6727. 2. TA-2: Toilet Tissue Dispenser (double non-controlled) - B-2740. 3. TA-3: Paper Cup Dispenser - B-235. 4. TA-4: Feminine Napkin-Tampon Dispenser - B-2706 (surface mounted) or B-3706 (ADA semi-recessed). 5. TA-5: Feminine Napkin Disposal - B-270. 6. TA-6: Paper Towel Dispenser - B-262. 7. TA-7: Waste Receptacle - B-279. 8. TA-8: Liquid Soap Dispenser - B-2112. 9. TA-9: Mop and Broom Rack - B-223 x 36 IN. 10. TA-10: Shower Curtain Rod - B-6047 length required. 11. TA-11: Soap Dish - B-4380 or 438 as required for wall construction. 12. TA-12: Mirror - B-290 x size indicated on Drawings. 13. TA-13: NOT USED. 14. TA-14: Metal Shelf - B-295 x 24 IN. 15. TA-15: Towel Bar - B-5806.99 x 24 IN. 16. TA-16: Shower Seat - Special unit, B-5181 or 5171 x full depth of stall. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 7
17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
TA-17: TA-18: TA-19: TA-20: TA-21:
Shower curtains - 204-2 with 204-1 hooks as necessary. Grab Bar - B-6806.99 x length indicated on Drawings. Grab Bar - B-6893.99 (52 IN horizontal). Grab Bar - B-6861.99 (30x16 "L" or 36 IN x 36 IN shower). Waste Receptacle - Bradley 359.
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 10 44 33 FIRE EXTINGUISHER
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers.
7 8 9 10 11
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 1.2
12 13 14 15 16 17
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory.
1.3
18 19 20
SUMMARY
DEFINITIONS A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Building official, fire chief, fire marshal or other individual having statutory authority.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
21 22 23 24 25 26
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
27 28 29 30
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
31
1.5
32
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and install filled and charged extinguishers just prior to building occupancy.
33
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
34
2.1
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Fire extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Fire Protection. c. Walter Kidde. d. Potter - Roemer Inc. 2. Fire extinguisher signs: a. Seton.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRE EXTINGUISHER 10 44 33 - 1
1 2
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
3 4 5 6 7 8
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fire Extinguisher (FEXT): 1. Steel bodied, all metal top (head) and valves. 2. Multi-purpose dry chemical with hose and horn. 3. Provide one (1) UL rated 10A-120BC extinguisher for each fire extinguisher location (FEXT) indicated on Drawings. 4. Finish: Red with epoxy finish coat.
9 10 11 12
B. Wall Brackets: 1. Bracket type to fit specified extinguisher. 2. Furnish bracket for each extinguisher not in cabinet. 3. Bracket to be finished in red or black enamel.
13 14 15
C. Fire Extinguisher Signage: 1. Single faced: SETON #21999. 2. Double faced: SETON #22001.
16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
17
3.1
INSTALLATION
18 19 20 21
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 10. 1. Install units with extinguisher top not over 48 IN above floor. 2. Install wall brackets to concrete or masonry substrate with self-tapping concrete anchors. a. See Specification Section 05 50 00.
22 23
B. Fire extinguisher locations shown on Drawings are approximate locations. 1. Verify all extinguisher mounting locations with the AHJ.
24 25
C. Provide "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" sign for each extinguisher location. 1. Provide single or double faced sign to provide optimum visibility for extinguisher location.
27
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid FIRE EXTINGUISHER 10 44 33 - 2
SECTION 11 13 00 DOCK EQUIPMENT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Dock bumpers and dock levelers.
7 8
B. System Description 1. To assist in loading and unloading polymer totes at the Dewatering Facility.
9 10 11 12 13
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 01 61 03 - Equipment: Basic Requirements. 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 15 16
A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
17 18
B. Qualifications: 1. Installer shall be licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer.
19
1.3
DEFINITIONS
20 21 22 23
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
24
B. Rear Impact Bar: Interstate Commerce Commission Bar (ICC Bar).
25
1.4
SUBMITTALS
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data. a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Drawings showing size of all depressions, conduit, pits, trenches, etc., required in concrete work. 4. Complete wiring diagrams and electrical requirements.
35 36
B. Samples: 1. Color samples of dock seals.
37 38 39 40
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
41 42
1.5
WARRANTY A. Provide specified manufacturer's standard warranty.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DOCK EQUIPMENT 11 13 00 - 1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dock bumpers: a. Extruded or molded type: 1) Pawling. 2) Durable Mat Co. 2. Dock levelers: a. Rite-Hite Model RHM-4000. b. Kelley, equal model. c. Serco, equal model.
13
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
14
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
15 16 17 18 19 20
A. Dock Bumpers: 1. Molded rubber type: a. Reinforced with nylon or rayon cord. b. Durometer 80 + 5. c. Minimum thickness 4 IN. d. Minimum height: 1 IN.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B. Dock Levelers: 1. Mechanical with capacity of 10,000 LBS: a. Size: 6’-6” wide x 6’-0’ long. b. Shall meet ANSI MH30.1-2000 test load specification. Submit documentation. 2. Operating range 12 IN above and 12 IN below dock level. 3. Lip extension minimum 11 IN. 4. Platform: a. Minimum 1/4 IN thick steel treadplate. b. Lip extension minimum 1/4 IN thick steel treadplate. c. Designed to accommodate canted truck beds up to 4 IN and still remain flush at rear of pit. d. Factory-painted with manufacturer's standard paint finish. 5. Safety devices: a. Free fall of platform shall be limited to 3 IN and be integral to the manufacturers standard dock leveler. b. Provide unit with lip keeper, toe guards and maintenance strut supports. c. Provide maintenance support system to support lip and deck. This system must withstand a 10,000 lb moving load and provide OSHA approved lock-out/tag-out capabilities. 6. Rite-Hite RHM-4000.
41
PART 3 - EXECUTION
42
3.1
43 44
A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. 3.2
45 46 47
EXAMINATION PREPARATION A. Correct defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DOCK EQUIPMENT 11 13 00 - 2
1 2
B. Install bumpers 1 to 2 IN below dock level and in direction (horizontal or vertical) indicated on Drawings unless directed otherwise by dock leveler manufacturer.
3 4
C. All miscellaneous steel angles, channels, plates, bolts, etc., for installation of dock levelers, restraint device, and fittings shall be furnished by the device manufacturer.
5 6
D. All units shall be tested after installation and any discrepancies noted shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor expense.
8
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid DOCK EQUIPMENT 11 13 00 - 3
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 12 20 00 WINDOW TREATMENT
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Window treatments.
7 8 9 10
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings.
11
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
12
1.3
SUBMITTALS
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Color chart for Engineer's color selection. 3. Window schedule using window numbers established on Drawings showing window treatment utilized.
22 23 24 25
B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
26
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
27
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
28 29 30 31 32 33
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Horizontal louver blinds: a. Hunter Douglas. b. Levolor Lorentzen. c. Bali Graber.
34
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Adjustable blinds with head rail, blades, bottom rail, lift cord, cord lock, tilter, all hardware and installation brackets: a. Blades tiltable to any angle. b. Blades capable of being fully raised and fully lowered. c. Blades capable of being locked in any intermediate position. d. Provide with tilter at left, lift cord at right. e. Headrail and bottom rail. 1) Extruded PVC tubular design with minimum 0.0625 IN wall thickness.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid WINDOW TREATMENT 12 20 00 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
f. g. h. 2.3
9
2) On windows with intermediate mullions provide single headrail with individual tilter, cord lock, lift cord, bottomrail and blade assembly for each individual window panel. Blades: Flame retardant PVC. a) 1 IN x 0.020 IN thickness. Operating hardware: Manufacturer's standard. Hunter Douglas Model #HVOO.
FABRICATION A. Fabricate such that all components do not require lubrication during normal expected life.
10
B. Fabricate units to completely fill openings indicated on Drawings.
11 12
C. For continuous window wall installations, fabricate units so that ends occur only over mullions or other defined vertical separations.
13
D. Space louver blades to provide minimum overlap of 3/8 IN when in fully closed position.
14 15
E. Gear all operating equipment so that blinds will operate easily and can be set accurately and smoothly.
16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
17
3.1
18 19
PREPARATION A. Verify actual opening dimensions by site measurements.
3.2
INSTALLATION
20
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
21
B. Position units plumb and true.
22
C. Anchor securely in place.
23
D. Provide adequate clearance between sash and blinds.
24
E. Utilize Dissimilar Metals Protections: See Section 09 96 00.
26
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid WINDOW TREATMENT 12 20 00 - 2
SECTION 12 35 53 LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL)
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A. Section Includes: 1. Laboratory casework. 2. Laboratory countertops. 3. Laboratory sinks. 4. Laboratory service fittings. 5. Resilient base molding for application to casework. 6. Selected laboratory equipment as listed.
12 13 14 15
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 22 20 00 - Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment.
16
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A1008, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, HighStrength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. b. C1036, Standard Specification for Flat Glass. c. C1048, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. d. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. e. F1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): a. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 3. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): a. LF 8, Performance Requirements for Laboratory Furniture. 4. Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA): a. 4.1, Glossary of Terms. 5. Building code: a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer qualifications: a. Minimum of 10 years experience. b. Five (5) similar installations in past two (2) years. 2. Installer qualifications: a. Employed or approved in writing by manufacturer. b. Minimum five (5) years experience installing metal casework and epoxy resin tops. c. Five (5) installations of metal casework and epoxy resin tops in past two (2) years of similar scope.
46 47 48
C. Miscellaneous: 1. Furnish all metal casework, service fittings, accessories, sinks, drains, and epoxy resin tops from one (1) manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 1
1
1.3
DEFINITIONS
2 3 4 5
A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
6
B. Hazardous Location: Locations requiring the use of Safety Glazing as defined in Building Code.
7 8
C. Additional terminology common to the laboratory furniture and equipment industry as defined in SEFA 4.1.
9
1.4
SUBMITTALS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Product technical data sheets on all components. 3. Scaled drawing showing layout, controlling dimensions, elevations, etc. a. Minimum plan scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT-0 IN. b. Minimum elevation scale: 1/2 IN = 1FT-0 IN. c. Minimum detail scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT-0 IN. 4. Certifications: a. Certification of manufacturer qualifications. b. Certification of installer qualifications. 1) Listing of five (5) installations in past two (2) years of similar scope.
25 26 27
B. Samples: 1. Available casework and countertop colors for Engineer's color selection. 2. Minimum 4 x 4 IN countertop sample in color specified.
28 29 30 31
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 0001 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
32
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
33
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
34 35
A. Product numbers listed on the Drawings are based on Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation.
36 37 38
B. Epoxy Resin Laboratory Countertops, Sinks, Cup Sinks, Drain Troughs and Curbs: 1. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation. 2. Laboratory Tops, Inc.
39
C. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
40
2.2
MATERIALS
41
A. Casework: Steel, ASTM A1008.
42 43 44 45 46 47
B. Glass: 1. Framed swinging and sliding doors: a. ASTM C1036. b. 1/8 IN thick (nominal). c. Clear glass: Type I, Class I, Quality q3. 2. For unframed sliding doors: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 2
1 2 3
a. b. c.
ASTM C1048. 1/4 IN thick (nominal). Clear glass: Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I.
4
C. Countertops and Sinks: Epoxy resin.
5
D. Hardware: Extruded aluminum
6
E. Resilient Base: Rubber.
7
2.3
ACCESSORIES
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A. Hardware and Trim: 1. Door and drawer pulls: a. Meet requirements of ADA. b. Drawers and hinged doors: 1) Square profile: a) Die-cast aluminum. b) Satin finish with clear lacquer coating. c) 4 IN centers. c. Sliding door pulls: 1) Aluminum: Satin finish with clear lacquer coating. 2) Framed glass or solid panel sliding door: Recessed finger grip. 3) Unframed sliding glass doors: Applied knob. 2. Hinges: a. Institutional, five (5) knuckle. b. Stainless steel with brushed satin finish. c. Minimum 2-1/2 IN high. d. Drilled for screw attachment to door and case. 1) Welding to door or case is not acceptable. e. Doors under 36 IN high; 1 pair hinges. f. Doors over 36 IN high; 1-1/2 pair hinges. 3. Door latching mechanism: a. Self-closing, cam action, positive latching. b. Concealed mounting in top rail of door opening. c. Magnetic catches are not acceptable. 4. Locks: a. Heavy duty cylindrical type. b. 5 disc tumbler, removable core. c. Minimum 200 primary key changes. d. Master key. e. Satin nickel plated and stamped with identifying number. 5. Shelf clips: a. Nickel or zinc-plated steel. b. Designed to engage in two (2) rectangular holes on 1/2 IN centers in wall cases and 2 IN centers in base units.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
B. Molded Epoxy Resin Sinks Countertops: 1. Modified epoxy sinks: a. One-piece modified epoxy resin units with coved corners and bottom sloped to drain outlet. b. Color: Black. c. Complete with polyethylene trap and sink outlet assembly. 1) Adjustable tail piece. 2) Plug strainer, gasket and locknut. 3) 1-1/2 IN I.P.S. male straight thread outlet. 4) Outlet color to match sink. 2. Countertops: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
a.
3.
Modified epoxy resin having the following minimum physical properties: 1) Density: 140 pcf. 2) Modulus of rupture: 3,500 psi. 3) Modulus of elasticity: 4.46 x 106 psi. 4) Compressive strength: 15,900 psi; ASTM D695. 5) Shear strength: 5,400 psi. b. Chemical and corrosion resistant. c. Minimum 1 IN thick. d. Radius or bevel all exposed edges to a 1/8 IN radius. e. All sink cut-outs and holes for services shall be factory drilled and cut. 1) Sink cut outs shall be provided with 3/4 IN radius (minimum) corners. f. Color: Black g. Backsplash curbs: 1) 4 IN high x 1 IN thick. 2) Top set, sealed to work surface with epoxy adhesive. 3) Same construction and color as work surface. 4) Provide at back and exposed ends of countertops unless noted otherwise. Glassware drying rack: a. Black epoxy resin. b. Polypropylene pegs. c. Satin finished stainless steel drip tray with 1/2 IN OD outlet.
22 23 24 25 26 27
C. Resilient Base: 1. Top set, coved toe. 2. ASTM F1861. 3. 1/8 IN x 4 IN. 4. Mitered inside corners and wrapped outside corners. 5. Color: Black
28 29 30 31 32
D. Sink Supports: 1. Hanger type, suspended from top front and top rear horizontal rails of base cabinet by four (4) 1/4 IN DIA rods. 2. Minimum 12 GA adjustable sink cradle. a. Paint with corrosion resistant paint.
33 34 35 36 37 38
E. Miscellaneous Support Struts: 1. Pair of nominal 1 IN x 1-1/2 IN vertical channels with adjustable U-shaped connectors top and bottom. 2. Minimum 16 GA steel coated with corrosion resistant paint coating. 3. Size as required for pipe chase and to support items as shown on Drawings. 4. Compatible with commercially available pipe clamps and accessories.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
F. Laboratory Service Fittings: 1. Laboratory grade. 2. Manual operation. 3. Finish: a. Chrome plated 4. Service indexes: a. Identify services with tamperproof color coded plastic index buttons as follows:
COLOR
CODE
COLOR OF LETTERS
Cold Water
Dark Green
CW
White
Hot Water
Red
HW
White
Black
STM
White
SERVICE
Steam
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 4
COLOR
CODE
COLOR OF LETTERS
Orange
Air
Black
Dark Blue
Air
White
Vacuum
Yellow
Vac
Black
Dist. Water
White
DW
Black
R.O. Water
White
RO
Black
Light Green
OXY
White
Hydrogen
Pink
H
Black
Nitrogen
Brown
N
White
Light Blue
Chem Symbol
Black
SERVICE Air Gas
Oxygen
All other rare gases
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5.
6.
7.
8.
Water fittings: a. Cast red brass or bronze. b. Provide with renewable unit containing all operating parts subject to wear. c. Integral volume control device. d. All units capable of converting from compression to self closing without altering faucet body. e. 4 arm forged brass handles with service index buttons as required. Steam fittings: a. Heat resistant handle. b. Removable stainless steel seat with flat Teflon seat disc. c. Teflon impregnated packing. 1) Constructed such that unit may be repacked while under pressure. Goosenecks: a. 3/8 IN I.P.S. spout. b. Removable serrated hose connection c. Minimum 7-1/2 IN clearance between outlet and top with two (2) 90 degree bends. d. Capable of conversion from fixed to swinging type. Vacuum breaker: a. Integral with fixture assembly. b. Provide where indicated or where required by code.
22
G. Electrical Fittings: To be furnished in the Electrical Design.
23 24 25
H. Sloped tops, Ceiling Enclosures and Miscellaneous Filler Panels: 1. Same construction as casework. 2. Concealed attachment.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
2.4
FABRICATION A. General: 1. Modular design providing for interchangeable door and drawer configurations. 2. All units shall be flush front construction with all vertical and horizontal case members in same plane with no overlap. 3. Exterior corners and face joints shall be arc welded and ground smooth to provide continuous flat surface. 4. Each individual unit shall be complete so that any unit may be relocated at any time without requiring field modification or field application of finished end panels or other similar parts. 5. Metal gages: a. All metal used in case construction shall be minimum 18 GA unless indicated otherwise. 1) Corner gussets for leveling bolts and apron corner braces shall be minimum 12 GA.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
2) Hinge reinforcement and case and drawer suspension channels shall be minimum 14 GA. 3) Top and intermediate front horizontal rails, table aprons and reinforcement gussets shall be minimum 16 GA. 4) Drawer assemblies, door assemblies and adjustable shelves shall be minimum 20 GA. No exposed fasteners allowed. Base cabinets shall be constructed to support minimum of 200 LBS/SF of cabinet top area including work surface without distortion resulting in interference with door and drawer operation. Base unit and full height case corner gussets with leveling bolts shall support minimum 500 pounds per corner at 1-1/2 IN projection of leveling bolt below gusset. Adjustable and fixed shelving up to 48 IN long shall support an evenly distributed load of 40 PSF up to a maximum of 200 LBS without permanent set. All drawers shall support an evenly distributed load of minimum 150 LBS. Provide drawers and doors as indicated. Provide shelves as indicated. a. Base units: Adjustable in 2 IN increments. b. Wall-mounted cases: Adjustable in 1 IN increments. Provide accessories as indicated. All units shall be completely fabricated assembly ready for placement.
B. Base Units: 1. Cabinet ends: a. Single piece, full height. b. Formed with channel-shaped return flanges at top, back and bottom. c. Integral front corners offset to form rabbetted opening to receive doors and drawers. 1) Provide continuous hinge reinforcement in hinge jamb of door cabinets. 2. Top rails: a. Formed channels, front and back, welded to cabinet end flanges. b. Front rail: 1) Rabbet to receive doors and drawers. 2) Flush with face of cabinet body. c. Omit back rail at sink units. 3. Intermediate rails: a. Provide intermediate rails between doors and drawers. 1) Horizontal rails: a) Recessed. b) Concealed when cabinet doors and drawers are closed. c) No intermediate horizontal rails between drawers unless required by locks in drawers. 2) Vertical rails: a) Flush with cabinet body. b) Intermediate vertical support in double door cases will not be allowed. 4. Bottom: a. Single piece formed bottom and integral bottom front rail. b. Edges: Turned down and welded to end panels and back channel. c. Access holes located above leveling screws with flush plug buttons. d. Corner units may have separate bottom panel. 5. Bases: a. Toe space: 1) Rail interlocking with cabinet bottom, welded to end panels. 2) 3 IN deep x 5 IN high. 3) Fully enclosed. b. Rear channel welded to end panels and cabinet bottom. c. Reinforcing gusset plates at each corner for leveling legs. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
6.
1) Leveling legs: 3/8 IN x 3 IN long adjustable leveling legs. Back panel: a. Provide removable back panel in all cupboard units. 1) One-piece, formed on all sides. 2) Retained at top by flange of top rail and secured with screws. b. Sink bases and drawer units shall have open backs.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
C. Wall Cases: 1. Cabinet ends: a. Single piece, full height. b. Formed with channel-shaped return flanges at top, back and bottom. c. Integral front corners offset to form rabbetted opening to receive doors. d. Provide continuous hinge reinforcement in hinge jamb of door cabinets. 2. One-piece top formed with front top rail and flanged back. a. Swinging door cases: Top rail rabbetted. b. Sliding door cases: Top rail to form fascia. 1) Door track to be concealed behind fascia. 3. Flush bottom with rabbetted front rail and flanged back. 4. Recessed back welded to top, bottom and end panels.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D. Full Height Cases: 1. Cabinet ends: a. Single piece, full height. b. Formed with channel-shaped return flanges at top, back and bottom. c. Integral front corners offset to form rabbetted opening to receive doors and drawers. 1) Provide continuous hinge reinforcement in hinge jamb of door cabinets. 2. One-piece top formed with front top rail and flanged back. a. Swinging door cases: Top rail rabbetted. b. Sliding door cases: 1) Top rail to form fascia. 2) Door track to be concealed behind fascia. 3. Bottom: a. Single piece formed bottom and integral bottom front rail. b. Edges: Turned down and welded to end panels and back channel. c. Access holes located above leveling screws with flush plug buttons. 4. Bases: a. Toe space: 1) Rail interlocking with cabinet bottom, welded to end panels. 2) 22 IN deep cabinets: 3 IN deep x 5 IN high. 3) Fully enclosed. b. Rear channel welded to end panels and cabinet bottom. c. Reinforcing gusset plates at each corner for leveling legs. 1) Leveling legs: 3/8 IN x 3 IN long adjustable leveling legs
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E. Drawers: 1. Modular sized, removable, mountable in any location in cabinet. 2. Fronts: a. Formed, nominal 3/4 IN thick, with removable outer head. b. Sound deadening material between panels. 3. Bodies: a. Bottom, sides, back and inner front, welded assembly. b. Top edge of sides formed into semi-circular tote grip. c. Bottom and back one-piece. 4. Suspension: a. Self-centering drawers, removable without use of tools, locking in full open position. b. Drawer runner welded to drawer body. c. Case runner attached with screws or into slotted rail. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 7
1 2 3 4
d. e. f. g.
Coved runner raceways with round nylon tired ball bearing rollers. Rubber closing bumpers. Friction centering devices not acceptable. Provide file follower at all file drawers.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
F. Swinging Doors: 1. Inner and outer panels welded together. a. Over 14 IN wide and under 36 IN high: Formed, embossed stiffener. b. 36 IN high and over: Vertical channel stiffener. 2. Sound deadening mastic inside panels. 3. Provide hinge mounting brackets and hinge reinforcement. 4. Provide pull, hinges, rubber bumper and positive latching mechanism.
12 13 14 15
G. Swinging Glazed Doors: 1. Same construction as swinging doors with top, bottom and side rails. a. Over 48 IN high: Intermediate cross rail. 2. Glass set in continuous U-shaped glazing channel.
16 17 18 19 20 21
H. Removable Shelves: 1. Adjustable on 1/2 IN centers in wall cases and on 2 IN centers in base units. 2. Sides formed down 3/4 IN; returned 5/8 IN at front and back. a. 42 IN wide or over: Full length reinforcement required. 3. Support on four (4) die-formed brackets engaged in two (2) rectangular holes in each corner post.
22 23 24 25
I.
Apron Assemblies: 1. Box frame channel construction. 2. Nominal 4 IN high. 3. Openings and intermediate rails for drawers, where shown.
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
J.
Leg Assemblies: 1. Pair of legs with side rail and stretcher rail. a. Fully welded to form a rigid assembly. 2. Legs: a. Nominal 2 x 2 IN box section. b. Recessed leveling screws. c. Coved black vinyl or rubber shoe. 3. Side rails: Nominal 4 IN channel. 4. Stretcher: Nominal 2 x 1 IN box section. 5. Provide nominal 2 x 1 IN spreader rail when used with apron assemblies exceeding 36 IN long.
37
K. Knee Space Rails: Nominal 4 IN high channel section.
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
L. Finishes: 1. Steel components: a. Manufacturer's standard lead free, 2-coat corrosion-resistant baked on paint system. 1) Case body color: Color as selected. 2) Color of doors and drawers: Match case color 3) Finished paint surface shall meet the performance requirements as set forth by SAMA LF 8.
45
PART 3 - EXECUTION
46
3.1
47 48
PREPARATION A. Prior to beginning installation of casework, check and verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the quality of execution of work specified.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 8
1
3.2
INSTALLATION
2
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3 4
B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions and Drawings in all cases where items or details are not indicated.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C. Casework: 1. Set casework components plumb, square, and straight with no distortion. a. Securely anchor to building structure. b. Shim as required using concealed shims. 2. Screw continuous cabinets together with joints flush, tight and uniform, and with alignment of adjacent units within 1/16 IN tolerance. 3. Secure wall cabinets to solid supporting material. a. Do not secure to plaster or gypsum board. 4. Abut top edge surfaces in one (1) true plane. a. Provide flush joints not to exceed 1/8 IN between top units. 5. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules, brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for complete installation.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
D. Work surfaces: 1. Scribe to abutting surfaces as required. 2. Only factory-prepared field joints, located per approved shop drawings, are permitted. a. Secure joints in the field, where practical, in the same manner as in the factory. 3. Secure work surfaces to casework and equipment components with material and procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 4. If field cutting or drilling of epoxy resin countertop, backsplash curb {or service ledge} assembly is required, make holes using saw blades or drill bits as recommended by countertop manufacturers. 5. Seal all joints in epoxy resin countertops, backsplash curbs {and service ledges} using materials and methods as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Seal joints in tops, backsplashes, etc., with sealant as specified by countertop manufacturer.
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E. Furnish and set in place all service and plumbing fixtures as indicated. 1. Except for final mechanical and electrical connections, complete installation of each item in every respect, including all necessary items required for proper operation and appearance. 2. Where an item of equipment is furnished without a cord and plug, bring electrical wiring in or on equipment to an equipment junction box located on and part of the equipment such that flexible connection no longer than 3 FT is needed to make final connection between items and rough-in junction box.
36
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
37 38
A. Repair all damage done to premises as a result of installation. 1. Remove all debris and leave area broom clean.
39
B. Test and adjust all items of equipment for satisfactory operation.
40
3.4
PROTECTION
41 42
A. Cover work surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Protect all installed casework and accessories per manufacturer instructions.
43 44
B. Remove protection upon acceptance of Project by Owner.
45
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid LABORATORY CASEWORK (METAL) 12 35 53 - 9
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A. Section Includes: 1. Complete metal building system including but not limited to: a. Design. b. Materials. c. Fabrication. d. Shipment. e. Erection. f. Components as specified. 2. Miscellaneous roof systems as indicated. a. Providing structural and miscellaneous framing to support new equipment being installed on existing roof systems.
16 17 18 19 20 21
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03 15 19 - Anchorage to Concrete. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance Industrial Coatings.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 621, Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (referred to herein as AISC Code of Standard Practice). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. c. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. d. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. a. A490, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. A792/A792M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc AlloyCoated by the Hot-Dip Process. d. C991, Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings. e. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. f. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5. 6.
FM Global (FM). International Accreditation Service (IAS): a. AC472, Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems. 7. Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA): a. Low Rise Building Systems Manual. 8. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC): a. Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 9. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE). a. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory. 11. Building Code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's qualifications: a. Manufacturer must be member in good standing of the MBMA. b. Manufacturer must be currently approved by IAS Accreditation Committed under the Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Buildings Systems IAS AC472 to assure compliance with fabrication Special Inspections as required by the Building Code. 2. Erector qualifications: a. Erector (installer) must be approved in writing by metal building manufacturer. b. Erector must have minimum of 10 years current experience in erection of similar structures. 3. Manufacturer's Structural Engineer: Registered in the State of North Carolina. 1.3
DEFINITIONS
30
A. Code: The word "code" refers to the Building Code.
31 32 33 34
B. Installer, Erector or Applicator: 1. Installer, erector or applicator is the person actually installing, erecting or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer, erector and applicator are synonymous.
35 36
C. PVDF: Polyvinylidene fluoride. 1. Nomenclature as listed in Bibliography of the MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual.
37
1.4
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Building shall be non-insulated, clear span rigid frame gable type roof. 1. Provide cross bracing in the side walls perpendicular to the rigid frame.
1.5
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's technical reference manual containing all of the manufacturer's standard construction details and specifications. 1) Manufacturer's erection manual containing all details and methods for installation of building frame, roof system, wall system, and accessories. 2) Edit to mark out items not used for this installation. 3. Design and fabrication drawings:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Erection drawings minimum scale: 1/8 IN = 1 FT-0 IN. Details and sections minimum scale: 1-1/2 IN = 1 FT-0 IN. List of all design loads and combination of loads. Size and location of each component of the building. 1) Include clearance under structural framing members, both horizontal and vertical. 2) Include cross-section of components. Fasteners and details of fasteners connecting each component of the building. Size, location and details of anchor bolts, base plates, and all other components fastened to the foundation. 1) Size anchor bolts and base plates assuming 3000 psi concrete. Details of wall panels, roof panels, finishes, flashings, closures, closure strips, trim, gutters, downspouts, sealant, and all other miscellaneous components.
13 14 15
B. Samples: 1. Metal color and finish samples of roof, roof trim colors for Engineer's selection. 2. Color chart is not acceptable.
16 17 18 19
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
D. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's and Erector's Qualifications. 2. Manufacturer's approval of erector. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Accreditation per IAS AC472. 4. Structural calculations stamped and signed by a professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State where Project is located. a. Include list of design loads and loads transmitted to foundation through columns or walls and location where loads occur. b. Submit calculations for information only. 5. Certificate of compliance by fabricator that steel was fabricated in accordance with the approved construction documents.
31
1.6
WARRANTY
32
A. Manufacturer's standard warranty.
33 34
B. Manufacturer's standard warranty for factory applied PVDF coating system against blistering, chipping, cracking, peeling, or color fading of wall and roof panels.
35 36
C. Manufacturer's 20 year weather tightness warranty of roof assembly. 1. Calculate warranty at $.50 per SF of roof panel area over the life of the warranty.
37 38 39
D. Provide written notice of any exceptions taken to warranties. 1. Any exceptions may be grounds for not accepting the manufacturer, at the discretion of the Owner or Engineer.
40
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
41
2.1
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal building systems: a. Butler Manufacturing. b. NCI Building Systems. c. Nucor Building Systems. 2. Insulation: a. Fiberglass batt or blanket.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 3
1 2 3
1) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2) United States Gypsum Company (USG). 3) Certainteed.
4 5 6
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
MATERIALS A. Structural Members: Galvanized steel.
7 8 9 10 11
B. Anchor Bolts: 1. See Section 03 15 19. 2. ASTM A307, ASTM A36/A36M, or equal, galvanized steel. 3. Embedment details to be developed by Engineer upon receipt of anchor bolt and loading information for approved Shop Drawings from building manufacturer.
12 13 14 15 16
C. Fasteners: 1. Building frame, girts, and purlins: Galvanized ASTM A325, ASTM A490 or ASTM A307 bolts. 2. Roof panels: Stainless steel. 3. Miscellaneous fasteners: Corrosion resistant.
17
D. Any structural member to be hot-dipped galvanized shall be minimum 12 GA thickness.
18
E. Roof Panels: Steel.
19
F. Gutters and Downspouts: Aluminum.
20
G. Grout: See Division 03.
21
H. Closures: Neoprene.
22
I.
Sealants: See Specification Section 07 92 00.
23
J.
Trim: Same material as wall or roof panel.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K. Framed Openings: 1. Roofs: a. Provide all necessary roof subframing to support roof mounted equipment and to frame roof penetrations. 1) Material gage to be determined by metal building manufacturer for size of equipment or opening. b. Location of roof mounted equipment and/or roof or wall opening as shown on the Drawings. c. Purlins, angles, clips: 1) Steel: a) Factory applied prime coat per Specification Section 09 96 00. 2) Metal building manufacturer responsible for providing correct size of opening for penetration scheduled, shown or specified.
37 38 39
L. Roof Crickets: 1. Provide roof crickets on all roof curbs to direct water to each side of the curb. 2. Roof cricket material shall be same material as roof panels.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
M. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. Size: a. Provide minimum 5 x 5 IN gutter and minimum 4 x 4 IN downspout in manufacturer's standard profile best suited for project. 2. Minimum 0.040 IN aluminum. 3. Corrosion protection treatment and final finish same as roof panels. 4. Expansion joints: 150 FT maximum spacing but not less than 1 per side of building requiring gutters. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 4
1 2
5.
3 4 5 6 7
Locate/arrange downspouts to avoid drainage on sidewalks, landings, stoops, driveways, etc.
N. Roof Penetration Flashing (Maximum 13 IN DIA): 1. Flashing material: EPDM rubber with an aluminum sealing ring base. 2. Minimum projection above the weather surface of the roof: 8 IN. 3. Configuration of the flanges to match the roof panel. 2.3
BUILDING DESIGN CRITERIA
8 9 10
A. Critical Dimensions: 1. Roof slope: 1:12. 2. Provide minimum clear inside dimensions as noted on the Drawings.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
B. Building Foundation: 1. All footings, foundations, anchor bolts and piers have been designed based on assumed loadings and reactions. a. Member sizes and geometry may vary depending on the building being supplied. b. Do not construct these members until Engineer has verified design with approved Shop Drawings of metal building being supplied. c. Design all column base plates as pinned connections. Fixed base plates are not permitted.
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C. Modifications: 1. Buildings which vary dimensionally from those indicated may be bid providing: a. Minimum interior horizontal dimensions and clear heights are maintained. b. Door and window locations and sizes are maintained. c. Foundation re-design and all construction costs are included in Bid. 2. Contractor is responsible for incorporating any necessary changes to foundations, mechanical, or electrical systems or to any other building component. a. Design changes must be approved by Engineer prior to constructing changed item or system. 3. Itemize modifications in a separate attachment to the bid form and include all modifications in the bid price. 4. Completed building to be free of excessive noise from wind induced vibrations under ordinary weather conditions to be encountered at location of erection, and meet all specified design requirements listed below.
33
D. Roof Live Loads: See Contract Drawings 66S-Series
34
E. Snow Loads: See Contract Drawings 99S-Series
35
F. Wind Loads: See Contract Drawings 66S-Series and 99S-Series
36
G. Seismic (Earthquake) Loads: See Contract Drawings 99S-Series.
37 38 39
H. Auxiliary Loads: See Contract Drawings 66S-Series 1. Consider other superimposed loads as part of the design requirements and combine with the normal design (dead, live, seismic and wind) loads as prescribed hereafter.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
I.
48 49
2.4
Combination of Loads: 1. The combining of dead, live, wind, seismic and auxiliary loads for design purposes as set forth in the Building Code, unless otherwise specified. 2. Horizontal sway deflection of building due to combination of required design loads: H/60. 3. Deflection of purlins and secondary members not to exceed L/180 of its span when supporting applicable vertical live, dead, and auxiliary loads. 4. Wind beams supporting masonry walls: Do not deflect more than L/240 of its span when resisting applicable loads.
FABRICATION A. General:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Fabricate building structure, roof and wall panels, accessories and trim in accordance with requirements of AISC and MBMA. Provide all necessary clips, flashing angles, caps, channels, closures, bases and any other miscellaneous trim required for complete water and airtight installation. a. Provide an inside closure at the base of all corrugated panels and an outside closure at the top of all corrugated panels in addition to all other closure strips required. 1) Form closure strips to fit the corrugation of the metal panels and securely support in place. 2) Closure strips shall fit between corrugated panels and trim or flashing as required to completely separate the interior of the building from the exterior. b. Provide flashing at all intersections of wall panels and roof panels, and above all openings in wall and roof panels, in addition to all other flashing required. 1) Form flashing: 2) To completely contain water on the outside of the building. a) To be watertight and securely fastened in place. c. Provide sealant at all edges where metal panel trim or flashing is adjacent to the foundation of the building in addition to all other sealant required. Fabricate and prepare material for shipment knocked down. Factory punch frame to receive all fasteners. Finishes: a. Clean ferrous surfaces of oil, grease, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. 1) Clean all primary and secondary structural steel members, not noted as being galvanized, in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. All structural components shall have primer paint coats applied in the shop and finish coats applied in the shop 1) Shop paint, prime and finish coats, all surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection. 2) Paint in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00. 3) Paint surfaces of all components not exposed to view. 4) Manufacturer's standard shop applied primer is not acceptable as substitute for primer specified. c. Roof panels: 1) Exterior surface: a) Thermosetting fluoropolymer resin enamel. (1) Minimum 70 percent "KYNAR" resin. b) Meet requirements of AAMA 621. c) FM Class 1 rated. d) Exposed screw heads shall match color of panel. 2) Interior surface: a) Same finish as exterior surface.
B. Roof Panels: 1. 24 GA minimum, galvalume per ASTM A792/A792M. 2. Standing seam interlocking rib configuration. 3. Factory applied color coating. 4. Meet requirements of AAMA 621. 5. Length: Sufficient to cover entire length of any unbroken roof slope up to 40 FT. 6. Panel width: 3’-0”. 7. Profile: Butler Rib II or equal. 8. Panel depth: 1-1/2”. 9. Concealed fasteners. 2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See the QUALITY ASSURANCE Article, Qualifications Paragraph in PART 1 of this Specification Section for manufacturer's internal quality control requirements.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 6
1 2 3
B. Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2.6
4
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 8 OZ of touch up paint for each color provided on the building.
5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
6
3.1
INSTALLATION
7 8 9 10 11 12
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install tolerances in accordance with AISC 303, Code of Standard Practice. a. Install products straight without bowing, sagging, or warping. 2. Install all fasteners. 3. Install base plates on grout bed. a. Grout bed to be 1 IN thick unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
13 14 15
B. Place roof insulation over roof support members. 1. Tape all joints and tears in vapor barrier with tape recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer.
16 17 18
C. Place wall insulation between girts and wall panels. 1. Tape all joints and tears in vapor barrier with tape recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer.
19 20 21
D. Separate the roof support member from the roof panel, except at each concealed structural fastener, with a spacer of material having a density of not less than 2 pcf and, if of a combustible material, having a flame spread rating no greater than 25.
22 23
E. Fasten roof panels to purlins or secondary support members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
24 25 26
F. Install liner panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Completely seal air tight around all building structural members and bracing when these members penetrate the liner panel.
27 28
G. Install trim and other miscellaneous items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and details.
29
3.2
A. Special Inspections and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
30 31 32 33
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
34 35
A. Touch up paint any scratched factory finished surfaces or remove and replace as directed by Engineer.
36
B. Remove and replace any damaged wall or roof panels, frames, etc., as directed by Engineer.
38
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19 - 7
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 13 34 24 REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
5 6 7 8
A. Section Includes: 1. The design and construction of a reinforced concrete roof dome for the 45-foot diameter reinforced concrete Digester No. 1 and No. 2. The tank roof dome shall be supported by a newly constructed reinforced concrete tank.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SUMMARY
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Division 3 - Concrete. 4. Division 5 - Metals. 5. Section 09 96 00 - High Performance industrial Coatings. 6. Section 13 71 02 - Plastic Liner Plate 1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. ACI 350-06, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary. 2. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A185, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. b. A320, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. d. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. e. B241, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. f. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. D110, Wire- and Strand-Wound, Circular, Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks. 5. American Welding Society (AWS). 6. Corps of Engineers (COE): a. CRD-C572, Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop. 7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 8. Building code: a. North Carolina State Building Code 2012 Edition (2009 International Building Code with North Carolina Amendments) including all local amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
45 46 47 48
B. Qualifications: 1. The company constructing the tank: a. At least five (5) years experience in design and construction of reinforced concrete tank domes. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME 13 34 24 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b.
2.
11 12 13 14
Has skill, reliability, and financial stability to build and guarantee the tank in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Has constructed, in the past five (5) years, in its own name, and is presently responsible for a minimum of five (5) dome covered tanks of of similar capacity or greater, which meet these Specifications and are now in satisfactory service. Professional engineer in responsible charge of engineering work: a. Five (5) years experience in design and field construction of circular tanks. b. In responsible charge of engineering work to be done for tank design, construction, and testing. c. Registered in the State of North Carolina.
C. Certifications: 1. Drawings and design calculations for the complete tank roof dome to be signed by Engineer using his professional Engineer's seal for the State of North Carolina. 1.3
SUBMITTALS
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Product technical data including: a. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Mill tests indicating ultimate and yield strength of all reinforcing bars, prestressing and post tensioning wires and cables, and any other steel components. 4. Provide results of digester gas leak testing.
23
B. Furnish applicable "Affidavits of Compliance" to Building Codes and OSHA Standards.
24
C. Structural design calculations or analyses for record purposes only.
25
D. All concrete design mixes.
26
E. Guarantee Document as specified in Article 1.4.
27
F. Detailed construction Drawings.
28
1.4
WARRANTY
29 30
A. The tank constructor will warrant workmanship and materials on the complete structural portion of the tank for a five (5) year period from date of Substantial Completion of the Work.
31 32 33
B. To satisfy the five (5) year warranty, tank constructor is required to furnish the Owner with a written company warranty for additional four (4) year period beginning one (1) year after the date of Substantial Completion.
34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
2.1
ACCEPTABLE TANK CONSTRUCTORS
36 37 38 39 40 41
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following tank constructors are acceptable: 1. Crom LLC; Gainesville, Florida. 2. DN Tanks; Wakefield, Massachusetts. 3. Preload Company; Garden City, New York. 4. Precon.
42
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
43 44
2.2
MATERIALS A. Concrete:
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME 13 34 24 - 2
1 2
1. 2.
28 day compressive strength not less than 4500 psi. Conform to Specification Section 03 31 30.
3 4 5
B. Reinforcing Bars, Wire Mesh: 1. ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. ASTM A185.
6 7 8 9
C. Elastomeric Materials: 1. Waterstops that are polyvinyl chloride conforming to COE CRD-C572. 2. Bearing pads conforming to ASTM D2000. 3. Sponge filler conforming to ASTM D1056.
10
2.3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
A. Tank Roof Dome: 1. The design of the roof dome shall include a tension ring designed to restrain kick-out forces resulting from any loading of the roof dome. 2. Design in conformance with AWWA D110, Standards for Wirewound Circular Prestressed Concrete Tanks. 3. Characteristics: a. Inside diameter: 45 FT. b. For additional information see 61S-Series drawings. 4. Seismic Loads: a. See Contract Drawings 99S-Series. b. Design for earthquake resistance based on requirements of the Building Code or based on requirements of AWWA D110 for applicable zone, whichever requirements are more stringent. 5. Wind Loads: a. See Contract Drawings 99S-Series. b. Design for wind loading in compliance with the more stringent provisions of the AWWA D110 Building Code. 6. Live Loads: See Contract Drawings 61S-Series. a. Design for lowest mean ambient temperature of zero DegF and for temperature differential of 80 DegF. 7. Internal Pressure: a. Maximum Design Pressure: 15 IN WC. b. Minimum Vacuum: (-) 2.5 IN WC. c. Design with minimum 1.25 safety factor.
35 36 37 38
B. Tank Information: 1. Diameter: 45-FT. 2. Volume: 337,500 gallons. 3. SWD: 28.5-FT.
39
2.4
ACCESSORIES
40 41 42 43
A. Roof Hatch: 1. Materials: All Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Provide lock and hasp for roof hatch. 3. Refer to Contract Drawings for size, location, quantity of hatches.
44 45 46 47
B. Mixing Equipment: 1. Provide (2) 27-IN diameter Type 316 stainless steel flanged openings for internal draft tube mixer with concrete curb as necessary. Refer to Drawings. 2. Mixing equipment provided by others.
48 49 50
C. Top Hatch: 1. Provide (1) 30-IN diameter Type 316 stainless steel flange for access hatch. Access hatch provided by others. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME 13 34 24 - 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
D. Center Gas Collection and Manway: 1. Provide central 4’-6” diameter Type 316 stainless steel gas collector. 2. Provide (1) 4-IN ANSI flange for connection of pressure relief valves. Valving by others. 3. Provide (1) 4-IN ANSI flange for connection of gas takeoff piping. Piping by others. 4. Provide (1) 1-IN NPT connection. 5. Refer to Drawings.
7 8 9
E. Sample Tubes: 1. Provide (2) 6-IN 316 SST FL x FL wall pipes. 2. Sample piping and hatch provided by others.
10 11 12 13
F. Aluminum Railings and Toe Boards: See Specification Section 05 52 02 and Contract Drawings 99S-Series 1. Provide all anchorage systems for mounting on tank roof 2. Coordinate railing with stair access.
14 15 16
G. Interior Dome Plastic Liner: 1. Refer to Specification Section 13 71 02. 2. Install liner on underside of entire dome.
17
PART 3 - EXECUTION
18
3.1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CONSTRUCTION A. Dome Roof: 1. Construct dome roof to proper spherical curvature. a. Locate and configure construction joints to result in adequate strength. b. Design and install required connection to existing wall. c. Minimum slope at surface: 12 horizontal to 1 vertical. d. Maximum slope at surface: 10 horizontal to 1 vertical. 2. Design dome forms to resist all forces acting with respect to its sloped surface. 3. Do not remove any portion of formwork for domes until the concrete has reached concrete design strength. 4. Wet cure compound conforming to ASTM C309 to the exterior dome surface of cast-inplace concrete immediately after completion of the final finishing operation. a. See Specification Section 03 31 31. 5. Give exterior dome surface a light broom finish. a. Dome soffit a form finish. 6. Install plastic liner plate, to the underside of the roof dome, per Specification Section 13 71 02.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
36 37 38
A. Special Inspections and Testing: 1. See Specification Section 01 45 33 for special inspection general requirements. 2. See Specification Section 01 45 33, Attachment A, Statement of Special Inspections.
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
B. Gas Testing: 1. Test dome to under air pressure to verify will hold design pressure. 2. Low pressure air testing procedure: a. Isolate digester headspace with valves, plugs, flanges, as required. b. Fill digester to max level with non-potable water (NPW) supplied by Owner to reduce headspace gas area. c. Introduce low pressure air into head space until pressure equals test pressure. Provide nozzles as required. d. Utilized manometer of clear tubing mounted to plywood with fixed ruler for measurement of internal gas pressure. e. Fill headspace with gas to 15 IN WC. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME 13 34 24 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
Discontinue air supply to line segment. Apply soapy water to cover and observe for visual leaks. Record photos of dome and manometer. Allow 2 HRS for testing. Test must hold design pressure throughout the test. Record pressure at beginning and end of test. Submit test results including photos. If testing fails, repair leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
10
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid REINFORCED CONCRETE TANK ROOF DOME 13 34 24 - 5
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 13 71 02 PLASTIC LINER PLATE
1 2 3
PART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.1
SUMMARY
5 6
A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic liner plate.
7 8 9
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
10
1.2
11 12 13 14 15 16
A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension. b. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 1.3
17 18 19 20 21
QUALITY ASSURANCE
DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: 1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Shop fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Installation drawing details and manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and specifications. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Certifications: a. Certification of all welders. 5. Test reports: a. Performance test reports showing permeability, elongation, hardness, tensile strength, adhesion, weathering resistance, tear resistance, and abrasion resistance. b. Chemical resistance tests stating materials will withstand chemicals and concentrations listed in this specification. c. Logs of all field tests performed.
39 40
B. Samples: 1. Samples of materials proposed for use.
41 42 43 44
C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals.
45 46
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 1
1
1.6
2
SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide adequate ventilation in all areas where lining is applied.
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
4
2.1
5 6 7 8 9
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ameron Corp. 2. Poly Tee Inc. 3. Atlas Minerals and Chemicals, Inc.
10 11
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13. 2.2
PLASTIC LINER PLATE AND ACCESSORIES
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A. Composition: 1. All sheets of plastic liner plate, joint, corner, and welding strips for the liner plate: 2. Materials: One of the following two are acceptable: a. High molecular weight polyvinyl chloride resin and other necessary ingredients compounded to make permanently flexible sheets and strips suitable for lining concrete structures. 1) Polyvinyl chloride resin: Constitute not less than 99 percent, by weight, of the resin used in the formulation. 2) Use of copolymer resins: Not permitted. b. High density polyethylene (HDPE) with other necessary ingredients compounded to make permanently flexible sheets and strips suitable for lining concrete structures.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
B. Thickness of Material: 1. Liner plate to be bonded to concrete by means of integral locking extensions embedded in the concrete; a minimum thickness of 0.065 IN. 2. Liner plate to be bonded to concrete surfaces by means of adhesive; minimum thickness of 0.094 IN. 3. Joint strips, minimum thickness: Equivalent to liner. 4. Welding strips, minimum thickness: Nominal 0.125 IN.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C. Sheet and Strip Size: 1. Sheets of liner plate: a. Shall not exceed 16 by 16 FT. b. Reduce the maximum permitted size where necessary to produce satisfactory results. 2. Large sheets formed in the shop by lapping basic size sheets a minimum of 0.50 IN and fusing the sheets together in such a manner as to produce a continuous welded joint. 3. Joint strips: a. 4 IN wide. b. Bevel each edge of joint strips prior to application. c. Welding strips: 1) 1 IN wide. 2) Bevel edges of all welding and corner strips at time of manufacture.
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
D. Locking Extensions: 1. Provide all liner plate to be cast into concrete with integral locking extensions for embedment into the concrete. 2. Locking extensions: Same material as the liner plate and integrally molded or extruded with the sheets of liner plate. a. Minimum height of 0.375 IN and a minimum web thickness of 0.085 IN, approximately 2.50 IN apart and when the extensions are embedded in concrete, the liner plate will be held permanently in place. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3.
4. 5.
6.
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Locking extensions: a. Parallel and continuous except where omitted for joints, transverse weep channels and strap channels. b. Weep channels, which involve the omission of 2 IN of locking extensions, may be made during the manufacture of liner plate. c. Provide a locking extension along all lower, terminal, oblique, or longitudinal edges of liner plate. Extend the lower terminal edge of the liner plate sheet in all structures a maximum of 0.375 IN beyond the base of the final locking extension. Unless alternate methods are approved by the Engineer, provide liner plate, to be secured to the inner form with straps, with strap channels approximately 20 IN OC and perpendicular to the locking extensions. a. Channels: Maximum of 1 IN wide and formed by removing the locking extensions at strap locations so a maximum of 0.188 IN of the base remains in the strap channel. When transverse flaps are specified or required, fabricate them by removing locking extensions so that a maximum of 0.032 IN base of the locking extension remains on the sheet.
E. Liner Color: White. 2.3
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. One-tenth of 1 percent of plastic liner material delivered for use to the jobsite may be selected for testing prior to being embedded in the structures. a. Cut samples from sheets, joint strips, and welded strips for testing. b. Subject the samples thus taken shall be subjected to the following tests: 1) Test tensile strength and elongation in accordance with ASTM D412 using Die B. 2) Test indentation hardness in accordance with ASTM D2240 using a Type D durometer, using a single thickness of material. a) Specimens for indentation hardness shall be 1 by 3 IN in size. 3) Test chemical resistance by first conditioning specimens to a constant weight at 110 DegF prior to and following exposure to the solutions listed in Table 1 for a period of 112 days at 77 DegF +5 DegF. 2. Determine initial values for tensile strength, weight, elongation and indentation hardness prior to and after chemical resistance tests. 3. Remove specimens at 30 day intervals from each of the chemical solutions and tested. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL SOLUTION Sulfuric acid Sodium hydroxide
20 percent * 5 percent
Ammonium hydroxide
5 percent *
Nitric acid
1 percent *
Ferric chloride
1 percent
Soap
0.1 percent
Detergent(Linear alkyl benzyl Sulfonate or (LAS)
0.1 percent
Bacteriological
36 37 38 39
CONCENTRATION
BOD not less than 700 ppm.
* Volumetric percentages of concentrated C.P. grade reagents.
4.
Plastic liner plate sheets, joint, corner, and welding strips: Physical properties when tested at 77 DegF +5 DegF.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 3
1 PROPERTY Tensile strength Elongation at break Shore durometer Type D Weight change
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
**
AFTER 112 DAYS EXPOSURE IN ABOVE LISTED CHEMICAL SOLUTIONS **
2200 psi min
2100 psi min
200 percent min
200 percent min
Inst. 50-60
±5% (with respect to initial test results)
20 sec 35-50
±5% ±1.5%
If any specimen fails to meet the 112-day requirements before completion of the 112 day exposure, the material will be subject to rejection.
5.
Liner plate locking extensions embedded in concrete shall withstand locking test pull of at least 100 LB per linear IN, applied perpendicularly to the concrete surface for a period of one (1) minute, without rupture of the locking extensions or withdrawal from embedment. a. This test shall be made at a temperature between 70 to 80 DegF. 6. All liner plate sheets, including locking extensions, and all joint, corner, and welding strips shall be free of cracks, cleavages, or other defects adversely affecting the protective characteristics of the material. 7. Shop welded joints: a. Free of cracks and separations, and tested for tensile strength in accordance with ASTM D412 using Die B. b. Tensile strength: Minimum of 2000 psi at a test temperature of 77 DegF +5 DegF. 8. Shop test all liner plate for holes with a spark tester. a. Spark tester: 1) To provide a minimum of 20,000 V. 2) Repair in the shop, prior to shipment from manufacturing site, all sheets having holes. 3) Use qualified welders to make all repairs. 9. Specimens taken from sheets and strips at any time prior to final acceptance of the work, when tested as specified, shall meet the requirements set forth above. 10. Submit samples of each type of sheet and strip proposed for use, together with a list of all ingredients from which the sheets and strips are to be compounded prior to shipment. a. No changes in formulation will be permitted. 11. Submit certified test results for tensile strength, elongation, chemical resistance and change of weight showing that the liner plate is in compliance with specifications. a. Before any material is shipped from point of manufacture the test results shall show positive compliance with the Specifications. b. These tests need not be made from batch shipped for incorporation into project, but shall be representative of process and materials used in manufacture of said batch, and shall be performed on material manufactured no more than six (6) months prior to shipping date of material for Project.
35
PART 3 - EXECUTION
36
3.1
37 38 39 40 41 42 43
INITIAL
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Prepare shop drawings to show how the liner plate is to be installed in the structures and the location and type of all field welds. 2. Apply and secure liner plate to the forms, and receive inspection and approval, prior to the placement of reinforcing steel. 3. Use adhesive products and cleaners in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a. 4. 5. 6.
Use only adhesive products and cleaners that are nonflammable and are not detrimental to the plastic liner plate. b. Use cleaners that are water soluble or water dispersible. Apply no adhesive to liner plate or to any of the liner plate strips which will deleteriously affect the plate or strip in any way. The liner must be continuous and free of pinholes both across the joints and in the liner itself. Comply with all applicable written specification, instructions, and recommendations of the lining manufacturer for all work in connection with the installation of the lining in concrete, and the field sealing and welding of joints.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B. Placing Liner Plate: 1. Coverage: a. As a minimum, the areas shown on the plans to be lined. b. The variation in circumferential coverage at each longitudinal terminal edge of adjoining sheets of liner plate shall not exceed 1.50 IN. 2. Positioning liner plate: a. Position all liner plate installed with locking extensions horizontal unless otherwise indicated on the plans. b. Fit liner plate sheets closely to inner forms. 1) Cut sheets to fit curved and warped surfaces using a minimum number of separate pieces. c. Use patterns or mark sheet layouts directly on the forms where complicated or warped surfaces are involved. d. Do not exceed 4 IN for the space between ends of locking extensions, measured longitudinally, at transverse joints between regular size sheets of liner plate used in cast-in-place structures. 1) Where sheets are cut and joined for the purpose of fitting irregular surfaces, this space shall not exceed 2 IN. 3. Securing liner plate in place: a. Make provisions to maintain the liner plate in contact with the forms during concrete placement, where form ties or form stabilizing rods pass through liner plate. b. Prevent concrete from flowing around the edges of sheets at joints by welding a welding strip over the back of the joint.
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
C. Weep Channels: 1. Leave a gap not less than 2 IN nor more than 4 IN wide in all locking extensions, at all pipe joint ends and at all transverse joints in cast-in-place structures to provide an unobstructed transverse weep channel. a. Provide intermediate weep channels as required to maintain a maximum spacing of 8 FT. b. Provide intermediate weep channels, not less than 2.50 IN nor greater than 4 IN in width. c. If locking extensions are removed to provide intermediate weep channels, the base of the extension left on the sheet shall not exceed 0.063 IN. d. Provide additional weep channels 2 IN wide by cutting away locking extensions for any area behind liner plate which is not properly served by regular weep channels. e. Provide a transverse weep channel approximately 12 IN away from each liner plate return where surfaces lined with plastic liner plate join surfaces which are not so lined. f. Clear all outlets of transverse weep channels of obstructions which would interfere with their proper function as part of the work of installing liner plate.
50 51 52 53
D. Liner Plate Returns: 1. Install a liner plate return where shown on the plans and wherever surfaces lined with plastic liner plate join surfaces which are not so lined, such as cast iron pipe. 2. Make returns as follows: 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
a.
b.
c.
Use a separate strip of liner plate at least 3 IN wide joined at right angles to the main liner plate by means of approved corner strips. 1) Weld corner strips continuously to the return and to the main liner plate and applied wherever possible from the back of the lining. Provide locking extensions on returns to lock the returns to the concrete of plastic-lined, cast-in-place structures. 1) Locking extensions will not be required on liner plate returns installed on lined, precast concrete pipe. Seal each line plate return to adjacent construction with which it is in contact by means of an adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 1) If the joint space is too wide or the joint surfaces too rough to allow satisfactory sealing with this adhesive, fill the joint space with 2 IN of densely packed cement mortar, lead wool, or other sealant material approved by the Engineer, and finished with a minimum of 1 IN of an approved corrosion-resistant material.
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
E. Concreting Operations. 1. Concrete placement: a. Carefully vibrate concrete placed against lined plate to avoid damage to the liner plate and to produce a dense, homogeneous concrete securely anchoring the locking extensions into the concrete. 1) Use external vibrators in addition to internal vibrators, particularly along the lower terminal edge of plastic liner plate. b. Use chairs or spacers, approved by the Engineer, between the reinforcement and forms or base rings and, in no case shall any chair or spacer damage the liner plate. 2. Removing forms: a. Exercise care in removing forms to protect liner plate from damage. b. Use no sharp instruments to pry forms from lined surfaces. c. When forms are removed, pull any nails that remain in the liner plate without tearing the liner plate, and clearly mark the resulting holes. d. Mark form tie holes before ties are broken off, and mark all areas of serious abrasion of the liner plate.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
F. Field Joints in Cast-In-Place Structures: 1. Use one (1) of the following types: a. Type C-1: 1) A 4 IN joint strip, centered over the joint and secured along each edge to adjacent liner plate by means of a welding strip. 2) The width of the space between adjacent sheets of liner plate shall not exceed 0.50 IN. 3) This type of joint is the only type permitted at transverse contraction joints in concrete. 4) Its only other use is for joints between pipes and cast-in-place structures. b. Type C-2: 1) Make by overlapping sheets not less than 1.50 IN and securing the overlap to the adjacent liner plate by means of a welding strip. a) Overlap the upstream sheet over the downstream sheet. b) The length of that part of the overlapping sheet not having locking extensions shall not exceed 4 IN. 2) Apply a welding strip to the back of the joint. a) This type of joint may be used at any transverse liner plate joint other than those at transverse contraction joints in concrete, and shall be used for liner plate joints made at longitudinal joints in concrete. c. Type C-3: 1) Make by butting sheets of liner plate together and applying a welding strip over the back of the joint before concrete is poured, and applying a welding strip over the front of the joint after concrete is poured. 10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 6
1 2 3
2) A Type C-3 joint will not be permitted at a transverse joint which extends to a lower terminal edge of liner plate or at any joint where the gap between adjoining sheets of liner plate exceeds 0.125 IN.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
G. Installation of Welding Strips: 1. Fusion-weld welding strips to joint strips and liner plate, using qualified welders, and only approved methods and techniques. a. Use a continuous welding operation on any joint until that joint has been completed. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation in confined spaces during welding operations. 3. Center the welding strip over the cleaned surfaces to be joined and fused across its entire width. a. Remove and replace fusion, charred, or blistered welds. 4. Use hot air welding guns to provide clean effluent air at constant pressure to the surfaces to be joined within a temperature range between 500 and 600 DegF. 5. Re-inspect and test defective welds after repairs have been made. 6. Extend a transverse welding strip, as directed by the Engineer, at least 2 IN to provide a tab. a. The Engineer will test the weld by applying a 10 LB pull to the tab, normal to the face of the structure. 7. Hold the liner plate adjoining the welding strip in place during application of the force. a. If a weld failure develops, maintain the 10 LB pull until no further separation occurs. b. Retest defective welds after repairs have been made. c. After the welding strip has passed the test, the lining plate installer to neatly trim away the tabs.
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
H. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Apply a 12 IN long welding strip as a reinforcement across each transverse joint in liner plate and weep channel which extends to the lower terminal edge of liner plate on each side of a pipe or structure. a. Center these reinforcement strips over the joint being reinforced, locate as close to the lower edge of liner plate as practicable, and weld in place after the transverse welding strips have been tested and the test tabs removed.
30
3.2
PROTECTION AND REPAIR OF LINER PLATE
31 32 33 34
A. Take all necessary measures and precautions to prevent damage to liner plate from equipment and materials used on or taken through the work. 1. Repair any damage to installed liner plate in accordance with the requirements set forth herein for the repair of liner plate.
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
B. Patch all nail and tie holes and all cut, torn, and seriously abraded areas in the liner plate. 1. Fuse patches made entirely with welding strip to the liner plate over the entire patch. 2. Limit the use of this method to patches which can be made with a single welding strip. 3. Do not use parallel, overlapping or adjoining welding strips. 4. Larger patches may consist of smooth liner plate over the damaged area with edges covered with welding strips fused to the patch and to the liner plate adjoining the damaged area. 5. Limit the size of a single patch of the latter type only as to its width, which shall not exceed 4 IN.
43 44 45
C. Wherever liner plate is not properly anchored to concrete, or wherever patches larger than those permitted above are necessary, the repair of liner plate and the restoration of anchorage shall be as directed by the Engineer.
46 47 48 49 50 51
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The surface of liner plate shall be cleaned to permit visual inspection and spark testing after installation of liner plate. 1. All areas specified to receive liner protection shall be covered. 2. All portions of the plastic liner shall be integrally locked by anchor embedment to concrete. 3. Surface shall be smooth, true to line, and free of bulges.
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 7
1 2 3
B. All surfaces covered with lining, including welds, shall be tested with an approved electrical holiday or flaw detector, with the instrument to be set between 15,000-20,000 V. 1. Repair or remedy all holidays, tears, and other imperfections detected.
4 5
C. Assist in the inspection and spark testing by providing adequate ventilation and ladders for access, and by opening and closing entrances and exits.
6 7 8 9
D. Perform holiday and flaw detector tests. 1. Testing equipment to be approved by the Engineer. 2. Keep a log of all testing performed. 3. Submit logs to the Engineer.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
E. Perform test welds in the presence of the Engineer's representative consisting of the following: 1. Two (2) pieces of liner plate, 15 IN long by 9 IN wide, shall be lapped 1.50 IN and held in a vertical position. 2. A welding strip shall be positioned over the edge of the lap and welded to both pieces of liner plate. a. Each end of the welding strip shall extend at least 2 IN beyond the liner plate to provide tabs.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
F. Submit the weld specimen test as follows: 1. Test each welding strip tab separately. a. Subject to a 10 LB pull normal to the face of the liner plate with the liner plate being held firmly in place. b. No separation between the welding strip and liner plate when the welding tabs are submitted to the test pulls. 2. Cut three (3) test specimens from the welded sample and tested in tension across the welds. a. If none of these specimens fail when tested as specified, the weld will be considered as satisfactory. 3. If one (1) of the specimens fails to pass the test, a retest will be permitted. a. Retest three (3) additional specimens cut from the original welded sample. b. If all three (3) of the retest specimens pass the test, the weld will be considered satisfactory.
31
END OF SECTION
10030498 & 10052355 City of Shelby September 2017 First Broad River Wastewater Treatment Plant Influent and Biosolids Improvements Project - Issued for Bid PLASTIC LINER PLATE 13 71 02 - 8
HDR Engineering, Inc. of the Carolinas 440 S. Church Street Suite 1000 Charlotte, NC 28202 704.338.6700 NC License F0116 hdrinc.com © 2017 HDR, Inc., all rights reserved
